OptiX OSN 8800

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
V100R006C00
Hardware Description
Issue
01
Date
2010-12-31
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address:
Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website:
http://www.huawei.com
Email:
support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
Product Name
Version
OptiX OSN 8800
V100R006C00
OptiX OSN 6800
V100R006C00
OptiX OSN 3800
V100R006C00
iManager U2000
V100R003C00
iManager U2000 Web LCT
V100R003C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the hardware feature of a cabinet and each subrack, in addition to
application, working principle, front panel, and specifications of each board.
This document is intended for:
l
Network Planning Engineer
Hardware Installation Engineer
Installation and Commissioning Engineer
Field Maintenance Engineer
Network Monitoring Engineer
Data Configuration Engineer
System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

iii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document
Symbol
Description
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save

time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.
Diagram Conventions
The Diagram conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention
Description
Indicates the flow of optical signals.
Indicates the flow of electrical signals.
Indicates an optical module.
Indicates an electrical module.
All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
iv

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document
Convention
Description
Boldface
Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
>
Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version

V100R006C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R006C00. Compared
with the manual for the previous version, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update
Description
Whole manual
l Added descriptions of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

l Added descriptions of the DAS1, LSQ, and WSMD9 boards
l Added sub-sections Optical-layer ASON and Electrical-layer
ASON in section Functions and Features.
8.12 LOM
Added a description of the TN12LOM board's capability to support 3GSDI services.
10.5 NPO2
Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2 board.
15.4 XCM
Added descriptions of the TN52XCM02.

V100R005C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00.
Compared with the first official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Update
Description
8.19 LSXL
Deleted information about the TN13LSXL.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document
Update
Description
C Quick
Reference Table
of the Units
8 Optical
Transponder
Unit
Added information about the LPT function and protocol or standard

compliance in Functions and Features.
9 Tributary Unit
and Line Unit
10 PID Unit
15.2 TN52XCH
Added information about the TN52XCH02.

V100R005C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 V100R005C00. In this
release, the manuals for OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C02, OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C04,
and OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C04 are combined into one manual.
Update
Description
Whole manual
l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX

OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800, and OptiX OSN 3800. Any difference
between the products is described in the manual.
l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX
OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800A, and OptiX OSN 3800A. Any
difference between the products is described in the manual.
l The equipment name is changed from OptiX OSN 8800 I to OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 or from OptiX OSN 8800 II to OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
l The descriptions of the following boards are added:
TN11LEM24, TN11LEX4, TN13LSXL,TN54NS3, TN53TSXL,
TN54ENQ2, TN54NPO2, TN11SFIU, TN11RMU902,
TN12WSMD4, TN11ST2, TN11OPM8, TNL1STI, N4BPA
vi
24 Optical
Attenuator24.1
Fixed Optical
Attenuator
Introduction to fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical

attenuators is added.
25 Filler Panels
Introduction to filler panels is added.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 OptiX OSN 8800 Cabinet..........................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Cabinet Structure.............................................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 Cabinet Configuration.....................................................................................................................................1-4
1.3 Specifications..................................................................................................................................................1-5
1.4 DC Power Distribution Box............................................................................................................................1-6
1.5 UPM................................................................................................................................................................1-7
2 OptiX OSN 6800 Cabinet..........................................................................................................2-1

2.1 Cabinet Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet..........................................................................................................2-3
2.3 Specifications..................................................................................................................................................2-4
2.4 DC Power Distribution Box............................................................................................................................2-4
2.5 UPM................................................................................................................................................................2-7
3 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack.........................................................................................................3-1

3.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack........................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Structure.................................................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.2 Slot Description......................................................................................................................................3-5
3.1.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan).........................................................................................3-6
3.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack......................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.1 Structure...............................................................................................................................................3-11
3.2.2 Slot Description....................................................................................................................................3-15
3.2.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan).......................................................................................3-17
3.3 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack......................................................................................................................3-21
3.3.1 Structure...............................................................................................................................................3-22
3.3.2 Slot Description....................................................................................................................................3-24
3.3.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan).......................................................................................3-25
3.4 PIU................................................................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-30
3.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................3-31
3.4.3 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-31
3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-31
3.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-32
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

vii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
3.4.6 Specifications of the PIU......................................................................................................................3-33

3.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces.....................................................................3-34
3.5.1 ATE......................................................................................................................................................3-36
3.5.2 EFI........................................................................................................................................................3-43
3.5.3 EFI1......................................................................................................................................................3-52
3.5.4 EFI2......................................................................................................................................................3-57
3.5.5 STI........................................................................................................................................................3-63
4 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack.........................................................................................................4-1

4.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Slot Description...............................................................................................................................................4-5
4.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)..................................................................................................4-6
4.4 PIU................................................................................................................................................................4-11
4.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................4-12
4.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................4-13
4.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................4-14
4.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area............................................................................................................4-16
4.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board.................................................................................4-18
4.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces..............................................................................................................4-19
5 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis...........................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Slot Description...............................................................................................................................................5-4
5.3 Chassis Environment Control System (Fan)...................................................................................................5-5
5.4 PIU..................................................................................................................................................................5-9
5.4.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................5-9
5.4.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................5-9
5.4.3 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................5-9
5.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-10
5.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-10
5.5 APIU..............................................................................................................................................................5-11
5.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-12
5.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................5-12
5.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................5-13
5.5.6 Specifications of the APIU...................................................................................................................5-13
5.6.1 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board.................................................................................5-14
viii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
5.6.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces..............................................................................................................5-16
6 Frame............................................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 DCM Frame.....................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 CRPC Frame................................................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.3 Digital Video O-E Converter.......................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4 Fiber Spooling Frame......................................................................................................................................6-9
7 Overview of Boards...................................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions..................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.2 Laser Hazard Level Label...................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2 Bar Code for Boards........................................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.1 Overview................................................................................................................................................7-5
7.2.2 Characteristic Code................................................................................................................................7-7
7.3 Board Category............................................................................................................................................... 7-7
8 Optical Transponder Unit........................................................................................................8-1

8.1 ECOM............................................................................................................................................................. 8-3
8.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................8-3
8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................8-6
8.1.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-10
8.1.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-11
8.1.7 Board Service Configuration................................................................................................................8-11
8.1.8 ECOM Parameters................................................................................................................................8-14
8.1.9 Specifications of the ECOM................................................................................................................8-15
8.2 L4G................................................................................................................................................................8-19
8.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-20
8.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................8-22
8.2.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-25
8.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-27
8.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G..........................................................................................................8-27
8.2.9 L4G Parameters....................................................................................................................................8-30
8.2.10 Specifications of the L4G...................................................................................................................8-32
8.3 LDGD............................................................................................................................................................8-36
8.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-37
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

ix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
8.3.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-42

8.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-44
8.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD.......................................................................................................8-44
8.3.9 LDGD Parameters................................................................................................................................8-47
8.3.10 Specifications of the LDGD...............................................................................................................8-49
8.4 LDGS............................................................................................................................................................8-54
8.4.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-55
8.4.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-60
8.4.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-62
8.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS.......................................................................................................8-62
8.4.9 LDGS Parameters.................................................................................................................................8-65
8.4.10 Specifications of the LDGS................................................................................................................8-67
8.5 LDM..............................................................................................................................................................8-72
8.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-74
8.5.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................8-81
8.5.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................8-82
8.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM.........................................................................................................8-83
8.5.9 LDM Parameters..................................................................................................................................8-83
8.5.10 Specifications of the LDM.................................................................................................................8-86
8.6 LDMD...........................................................................................................................................................8-94
8.6.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................8-95
8.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-102
8.6.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-103
8.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD....................................................................................................8-104
8.6.8 Board Service Configuration..............................................................................................................8-104
8.6.9 LDMD Parameters.............................................................................................................................8-105
8.6.10 Specifications of the LDMD............................................................................................................8-108
8.7 LDMS..........................................................................................................................................................8-115
8.7.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................8-115
8.7.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................8-115
x

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
8.7.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................8-116

8.7.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................8-120
8.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-123
8.7.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-124
8.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS.....................................................................................................8-125
8.7.9 LDMS Parameters..............................................................................................................................8-125
8.7.10 Specifications of the LDMS.............................................................................................................8-128
8.8 LDX.............................................................................................................................................................8-135
8.8.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................8-136
8.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-141
8.8.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-143
8.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX.......................................................................................................8-143
8.8.9 LDX Parameters.................................................................................................................................8-144
8.8.10 Specifications of the LDX................................................................................................................8-147
8.9 LEM24........................................................................................................................................................8-151
8.9.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................8-152
8.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................8-160
8.9.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................8-162
8.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24 ..................................................................................................8-163
8.9.9 Board Function Configuration...........................................................................................................8-165
8.9.10 LEM24 Parameters...........................................................................................................................8-166
8.9.11 Specifications of the LEM24............................................................................................................8-168
8.10 LEX4.........................................................................................................................................................8-172
8.10.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................8-173
8.10.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-173
8.10.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................8-173
8.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................8-176
8.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-180
8.10.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-181
8.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4 ...................................................................................................8-182
8.10.8 Board Service Configuration............................................................................................................8-182
8.10.9 Board Function Configuration.........................................................................................................8-184
8.10.10 LEX4 Parameters...........................................................................................................................8-184
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
8.10.11 Specifications of the LEX4 ...........................................................................................................8-186

8.11 LOG...........................................................................................................................................................8-190
8.11.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-192
8.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-199
8.11.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-201
8.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG.....................................................................................................8-202
8.11.9 LOG Parameters...............................................................................................................................8-204
8.11.10 Specifications of the LOG..............................................................................................................8-207
8.12 LOM..........................................................................................................................................................8-216
8.12.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-217
8.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-226
8.12.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-230
8.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM.....................................................................................................8-230
8.12.9 LOM Parameters..............................................................................................................................8-232
8.12.10 Specifications of the LOM.............................................................................................................8-236
8.13 LQG...........................................................................................................................................................8-244
8.13.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-245
8.13.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-251
8.13.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-252
8.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG.....................................................................................................8-253
8.13.9 LQG Parameters...............................................................................................................................8-255
8.13.10 Specifications of the LQG..............................................................................................................8-258
8.14 LQM..........................................................................................................................................................8-263
8.14.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-264
8.14.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-273
8.14.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-275
8.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM.....................................................................................................8-275
xii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

8.14.9 LQM Parameters..............................................................................................................................8-279
8.14.10 Specifications of the LQM.............................................................................................................8-282
8.15 LQMD.......................................................................................................................................................8-290
8.15.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-291
8.15.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-301
8.15.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-303
8.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD..................................................................................................8-304
8.15.9 LQMD Parameters...........................................................................................................................8-308
8.15.10 Specifications of the LQMD..........................................................................................................8-311
8.16 LQMS........................................................................................................................................................8-320
8.16.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-322
8.16.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-333
8.16.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-335
8.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS...................................................................................................8-336
8.16.9 LQMS Parameters............................................................................................................................8-341
8.16.10 Specifications of the LQMS...........................................................................................................8-344
8.17 LSQ...........................................................................................................................................................8-353
8.17.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-354
8.17.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-360
8.17.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-361
8.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LSQ......................................................................................................8-362
8.17.9 LSQ Parameters................................................................................................................................8-362
8.17.10 Specifications of the LSQ..............................................................................................................8-365
8.18 LSX...........................................................................................................................................................8-368
8.18.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-370
8.18.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-378
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xiii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
8.18.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-380

8.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX......................................................................................................8-381
8.18.9 LSX Parameters................................................................................................................................8-381
8.18.10 Specifications of the LSX..............................................................................................................8-384
8.19 LSXL.........................................................................................................................................................8-392
8.19.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-394
8.19.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-401
8.19.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-404
8.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL....................................................................................................8-405
8.19.9 LSXL Parameters.............................................................................................................................8-405
8.19.10 Specifications of the LSXL............................................................................................................8-408
8.20 LSXLR......................................................................................................................................................8-412
8.20.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-413
8.20.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-418
8.20.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-421
8.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR.................................................................................................8-422
8.20.9 LSXLR Parameters..........................................................................................................................8-422
8.20.10 Specifications of the LSXLR.........................................................................................................8-425
8.21 LSXR.........................................................................................................................................................8-428
8.21.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-429
8.21.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-433
8.21.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-435
8.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR...................................................................................................8-435
8.21.9 LSXR Parameters.............................................................................................................................8-436
8.21.10 Specifications of the LSXR............................................................................................................8-438
8.22 LWX2........................................................................................................................................................8-441
8.22.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-442
xiv

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

8.22.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-448
8.22.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-450
8.22.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2...................................................................................................8-450
8.22.9 LWX2 Parameters............................................................................................................................8-451
8.22.10 Specifications of the LWX2...........................................................................................................8-453
8.23 LWXD.......................................................................................................................................................8-460
8.23.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-461
8.23.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-467
8.23.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-469
8.23.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD..................................................................................................8-469
8.23.9 LWXD Parameters...........................................................................................................................8-470
8.23.10 Specifications of the LWXD..........................................................................................................8-472
8.24 LWXS........................................................................................................................................................8-479
8.24.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-480
8.24.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-486
8.24.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-488
8.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS..................................................................................................8-489
8.24.9 LWXS Parameters............................................................................................................................8-489
8.24.10 Specifications of the LWXS...........................................................................................................8-492
8.25 TMX..........................................................................................................................................................8-498
8.25.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................8-500
8.25.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................8-506
8.25.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................8-507
8.25.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX.....................................................................................................8-508
8.25.9 TMX Parameters..............................................................................................................................8-509
8.25.10 Specifications of the TMX.............................................................................................................8-511
9 Tributary Unit and Line Unit...................................................................................................9-1

9.1 ND2.................................................................................................................................................................9-3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

9.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................9-4
9.1.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................... 9-20
9.1.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-22
9.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2..........................................................................................................9-23
9.1.9 ND2 Parameters................................................................................................................................... 9-29
9.1.10 Specifications of the ND2..................................................................................................................9-32
9.2 NQ2...............................................................................................................................................................9-37
9.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-39
9.2.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................... 9-54
9.2.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-56
9.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2..........................................................................................................9-57
9.2.9 NQ2 Parameters................................................................................................................................... 9-63
9.2.10 Specifications of the NQ2..................................................................................................................9-66
9.3 NS2................................................................................................................................................................9-69
9.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................9-70
9.3.5 Front Panel........................................................................................................................................... 9-83
9.3.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................9-85
9.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2...........................................................................................................9-86
9.3.9 NS2 Parameters....................................................................................................................................9-92
9.3.10 Specifications of the NS2...................................................................................................................9-95
9.4 NS3..............................................................................................................................................................9-103
9.4.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................9-105
9.4.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-121
9.4.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................9-123
9.4.7 Characteristic Code for the NS3.........................................................................................................9-124
9.4.9 NS3 Parameters..................................................................................................................................9-132
xvi

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
9.4.10 Specifications of the NS3.................................................................................................................9-136

9.5 TBE.............................................................................................................................................................9-139
9.5.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................9-140
9.5.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-147
9.5.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................9-149
9.5.8 TBE Parameters..................................................................................................................................9-152
9.5.9 Specifications of the TBE..................................................................................................................9-153
9.6 TDG.............................................................................................................................................................9-158
9.6.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................9-158
9.6.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-163
9.6.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................9-164
9.6.8 TDG Parameters.................................................................................................................................9-167
9.6.9 Specifications of the TDG..................................................................................................................9-168
9.7 TDX.............................................................................................................................................................9-171
9.7.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................9-172
9.7.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-180
9.7.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................9-182
9.7.8 TDX Parameters.................................................................................................................................9-185
9.7.9 Specifications of the TDX..................................................................................................................9-188
9.8 TOG.............................................................................................................................................................9-191
9.8.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................9-191
9.8.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-197
9.8.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................9-199
9.8.8 TOG Parameters.................................................................................................................................9-202
9.8.9 Specifications of the TOG..................................................................................................................9-204
9.9 TOM............................................................................................................................................................9-207
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

9.9.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................9-208
9.9.3 Function and Feature..........................................................................................................................9-222
9.9.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................9-256
9.9.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................9-258
9.9.8 TOM Parameters................................................................................................................................9-283
9.9.9 Specifications of the TOM.................................................................................................................9-288
9.10 TQM..........................................................................................................................................................9-297
9.10.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................9-299
9.10.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................9-306
9.10.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................9-307
9.10.8 TQM Parameters..............................................................................................................................9-312
9.10.9 Specifications of the TQM...............................................................................................................9-314
9.11 TQS...........................................................................................................................................................9-320
9.11.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................9-321
9.11.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................9-326
9.11.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................9-327
9.11.8 TQS Parameters................................................................................................................................9-329
9.11.9 Specifications of the TQS................................................................................................................9-331
9.12 TQX...........................................................................................................................................................9-335
9.12.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................9-336
9.12.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................9-341
9.12.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................9-342
9.12.8 TQX Parameters...............................................................................................................................9-344
9.12.9 Specifications of the TQX................................................................................................................9-347
9.13 TSXL.........................................................................................................................................................9-349
9.13.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................9-350
xviii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

9.13.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................9-356
9.13.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................9-359
9.13.8 TSXL Parameters.............................................................................................................................9-362
9.13.9 Specifications of the TSXL..............................................................................................................9-364
10 PID Unit...................................................................................................................................10-1
10.1 BMD4..........................................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................10-2
10.1.5 Front Panel......................................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................10-8
10.1.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4......................................................................................................10-9
10.1.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4........................................................................................................ 10-9
10.1.9 BMD4 Parameters............................................................................................................................10-11
10.1.10 Specifications of the BMD4...........................................................................................................10-11
10.2 BMD8........................................................................................................................................................10-13
10.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-14
10.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-17
10.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-19
10.2.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD8....................................................................................................10-20
10.2.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD8......................................................................................................10-20
10.2.9 BMD8 Parameters............................................................................................................................10-23
10.2.10 Specifications of the BMD8...........................................................................................................10-24
10.3 ELQX........................................................................................................................................................10-26
10.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-27
10.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-33
10.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-34
10.3.8 ELQX Parameters............................................................................................................................10-39
10.3.9 Specifications of the ELQX.............................................................................................................10-42
10.4 ENQ2.........................................................................................................................................................10-45
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
10.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-46
10.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-53
10.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-54
10.4.7 Optical Interfaces on the ENQ2.......................................................................................................10-55
10.4.8 ENQ2 Parameters.............................................................................................................................10-60
10.4.9 Specifications of the ENQ2..............................................................................................................10-61
10.5 NPO2.........................................................................................................................................................10-62
10.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-66
10.5.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-75
10.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................10-77
10.5.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2.....................................................................................................10-77
10.5.9 NPO2 Parameters.............................................................................................................................10-85
10.5.10 Specifications of the NPO2............................................................................................................10-87
10.6 PTQX........................................................................................................................................................10-89
10.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................10-92
10.6.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................10-99
10.6.6 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................10-101
10.6.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX...................................................................................................10-101
10.6.8 Board Service Configuration..........................................................................................................10-102
10.6.9 PTQX Parameters...........................................................................................................................10-107
10.6.10 Specifications of the PTQX..........................................................................................................10-110
11 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Unit................................................................11-1

11.1 M40.............................................................................................................................................................11-2
11.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................11-3
11.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................11-5
11.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................11-9
11.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40........................................................................................................11-9
11.1.8 Optical Interfaces.............................................................................................................................11-10
11.1.9 M40 Parameters................................................................................................................................11-10
11.1.10 Specifications of the M40..............................................................................................................11-11
xx

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
11.2 M40V........................................................................................................................................................11-12
11.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-13
11.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-15
11.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-19
11.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V...................................................................................................11-19
11.2.9 M40V Parameters.............................................................................................................................11-20
11.2.10 Specifications of the M40V............................................................................................................11-21
11.3 D40............................................................................................................................................................11-22
11.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-23
11.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-26
11.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-29
11.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40.......................................................................................................11-30
11.3.9 D40 Parameters................................................................................................................................11-31
11.3.10 Specifications of the D40...............................................................................................................11-31
11.4 D40V.........................................................................................................................................................11-32
11.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-33
11.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-36
11.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-39
11.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V....................................................................................................11-40
11.4.9 D40V Parameters.............................................................................................................................11-41
11.4.10 Specifications of the D40V............................................................................................................11-42
11.5 DFIU..........................................................................................................................................................11-43
11.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-44
11.5.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-46
11.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-48
11.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU....................................................................................................11-48
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xxi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
11.5.9 DFIU Parameters..............................................................................................................................11-49

11.5.10 Specifications of the DFIU.............................................................................................................11-50
11.6 FIU............................................................................................................................................................11-51
11.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-53
11.6.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-57
11.6.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-62
11.6.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU.......................................................................................................11-63
11.6.9 FIU Parameters.................................................................................................................................11-64
11.6.10 Specifications of the FIU................................................................................................................11-66
11.7 ITL.............................................................................................................................................................11-67
11.7.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-69
11.7.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-72
11.7.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-75
11.7.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL........................................................................................................11-76
11.7.9 ITL Parameters.................................................................................................................................11-77
11.7.10 Specifications of the ITL................................................................................................................11-77
11.8 SFIU..........................................................................................................................................................11-80
11.8.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................11-81
11.8.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................11-83
11.8.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................11-85
11.8.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU.....................................................................................................11-86
11.8.9 SFIU Parameters..............................................................................................................................11-86
11.8.10 Specifications of the SFIU.............................................................................................................11-88
12 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit........................................................................12-1

12.1 CMR1..........................................................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................12-2
12.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................12-5
xxii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
12.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................12-6

12.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1.....................................................................................................12-6
12.1.8 Optical Interfaces...............................................................................................................................12-6
12.1.9 CMR1 Parameters..............................................................................................................................12-7
12.1.10 Specifications of the CMR1.............................................................................................................12-8
12.2 CMR2..........................................................................................................................................................12-8
12.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................12-10
12.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................12-12
12.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-15
12.2.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR2...................................................................................................12-15
12.2.9 CMR2 Parameters............................................................................................................................12-16
12.2.10 Specifications of the CMR2...........................................................................................................12-17
12.3 CMR4........................................................................................................................................................12-18
12.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................12-20
12.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................12-22
12.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-25
12.3.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR4...................................................................................................12-25
12.3.9 CMR4 Parameters............................................................................................................................12-27
12.3.10 Specifications of the CMR4...........................................................................................................12-27
12.4 DMR1........................................................................................................................................................12-29
12.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................12-30
12.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................12-33
12.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-35
12.4.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1...................................................................................................12-35
12.4.9 DMR1 Parameters............................................................................................................................12-36
12.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1...........................................................................................................12-37
12.5 MR2...........................................................................................................................................................12-38
12.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................12-39
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xxiii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

12.5.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 12-42
12.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-44
12.5.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2..................................................................................................... 12-44
12.5.8 Optical Interfaces............................................................................................................................. 12-45
12.5.9 MR2 Parameters...............................................................................................................................12-45
12.5.10 Specifications of the MR2..............................................................................................................12-46
12.6 MR4...........................................................................................................................................................12-47
12.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................12-49
12.6.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 12-51
12.6.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-53
12.6.9 MR4 Parameters...............................................................................................................................12-55
12.7 MR8...........................................................................................................................................................12-58
12.7.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................12-58
12.7.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 12-61
12.7.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-62
12.7.9 MR8 Parameters...............................................................................................................................12-64
12.8 MR8V........................................................................................................................................................12-67
12.8.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................12-68
12.8.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 12-71
12.8.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-73
12.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V...................................................................................................12-74
12.8.9 MR8V Parameters............................................................................................................................12-75
12.8.10 Specifications of the MR8V...........................................................................................................12-76
12.9 SBM2........................................................................................................................................................ 12-79
xxiv

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
12.9.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................12-80
12.9.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................12-82
12.9.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................12-84
12.9.8 SBM2 Parameters.............................................................................................................................12-85
12.9.9 Specifications of the SBM2..............................................................................................................12-85
13 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit...........................................13-1

13.1 RDU9..........................................................................................................................................................13-2
13.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................13-2
13.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................13-5
13.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................13-7
13.1.8 RDU9 Parameters...............................................................................................................................13-8
13.1.9 Specifications of the RDU9................................................................................................................13-9
13.2 RMU9........................................................................................................................................................13-10
13.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................13-11
13.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................13-14
13.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-16
13.2.8 RMU9 Parameters............................................................................................................................13-17
13.2.9 Specifications of the RMU9.............................................................................................................13-19
13.3 ROAM.......................................................................................................................................................13-20
13.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................13-21
13.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................13-24
13.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-27
13.3.8 ROAM Parameters...........................................................................................................................13-28
13.3.9 Specifications of the ROAM............................................................................................................13-29
13.4 WSD9........................................................................................................................................................13-30
13.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................13-32
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xxv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

13.4.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 13-35
13.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-37
13.4.8 WSD9 Parameters............................................................................................................................13-39
13.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9.............................................................................................................13-40
13.5 WSM9....................................................................................................................................................... 13-42
13.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................13-43
13.5.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 13-47
13.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-49
13.5.8 WSM9 Parameters............................................................................................................................13-51
13.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9............................................................................................................ 13-52
13.6 WSMD2.................................................................................................................................................... 13-54
13.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................13-54
13.6.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 13-57
13.6.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-59
13.6.8 WSMD2 Parameters.........................................................................................................................13-60
13.6.9 Specifications of the WSMD2..........................................................................................................13-62
13.7 WSMD4.................................................................................................................................................... 13-63
13.7.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................13-65
13.7.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 13-68
13.7.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-70
13.7.8 WSMD4 Parameters.........................................................................................................................13-72
13.8 WSMD9.................................................................................................................................................... 13-75
13.8.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................13-76
xxvi

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
13.8.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 13-79

13.8.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................13-81
13.8.8 WSMD9 Parameters.........................................................................................................................13-82
14 Optical Amplifier Unit..........................................................................................................14-1

14.1 CRPC...........................................................................................................................................................14-2
14.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................14-3
14.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................14-7
14.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................14-9
14.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper......................................................................................................................14-9
14.1.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC...................................................................................................14-11
14.1.10 CRPC Parameters...........................................................................................................................14-11
14.1.11 Specifications of the CRPC............................................................................................................14-13
14.2 DAS1.........................................................................................................................................................14-14
14.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-15
14.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-19
14.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-21
14.2.8 DAS1 Parameters.............................................................................................................................14-22
14.2.9 Specifications of the DAS1..............................................................................................................14-26
14.3 HBA..........................................................................................................................................................14-28
14.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-29
14.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-31
14.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-33
14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA.....................................................................................................14-34
14.3.9 HBA Parameters...............................................................................................................................14-35
14.3.10 Specifications of the HBA..............................................................................................................14-37
14.4 OAU1........................................................................................................................................................14-38
14.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-40
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xxvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

14.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-44
14.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-47
14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1...................................................................................................14-49
14.4.9 OAU1 Parameters............................................................................................................................14-50
14.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1...........................................................................................................14-53
14.5 OBU1........................................................................................................................................................14-59
14.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-61
14.5.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-65
14.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-68
14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1...................................................................................................14-69
14.5.9 OBU1 Parameters.............................................................................................................................14-70
14.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1............................................................................................................14-73
14.6 OBU2........................................................................................................................................................14-75
14.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................14-76
14.6.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................14-80
14.6.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................14-83
14.6.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU2...................................................................................................14-84
14.6.9 OBU2 Parameters.............................................................................................................................14-85
14.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2............................................................................................................14-88
15 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit..........................................15-1

15.1 SXM............................................................................................................................................................15-2
15.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................15-2
15.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................15-4
15.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................15-6
15.1.7 Specifications of the SXM.................................................................................................................15-6
15.2 TN52XCH...................................................................................................................................................15-6
15.2.1 Application.........................................................................................................................................15-7
xxviii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

15.2.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................15-9
15.2.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-11
15.2.6 Specifications of the XCH................................................................................................................15-11
15.3 TN16XCH.................................................................................................................................................15-11
15.3.1 Application.......................................................................................................................................15-12
15.3.4 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 15-15
15.3.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-17
15.3.6 Jumper..............................................................................................................................................15-17
15.3.7 Specifications of the TN16XCH......................................................................................................15-18
15.4 XCM..........................................................................................................................................................15-18
15.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................15-19
15.4.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 15-21
15.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-23
15.4.7 Specifications of the XCM...............................................................................................................15-23
15.5 XCS...........................................................................................................................................................15-23
15.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................15-24
15.5.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 15-27
15.5.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-28
15.5.7 Specifications of the XCS................................................................................................................15-28
15.6 XCT...........................................................................................................................................................15-28
15.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................15-29
15.6.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 15-31
15.6.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-33
15.6.7 Specifications of the XCT................................................................................................................15-33
15.7 SCC........................................................................................................................................................... 15-33
15.7.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................15-35
15.7.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 15-39
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xxix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
15.7.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-44

15.7.7 Jumper..............................................................................................................................................15-44
15.7.8 Specifications of the SCC................................................................................................................15-48
15.8 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................15-49
15.8.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................15-52
15.8.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................15-56
15.8.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................15-61
15.8.7 Jumper..............................................................................................................................................15-62
15.8.8 Specifications of the AUX...............................................................................................................15-65
16 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit.....................................................................................16-1

16.1 HSC1...........................................................................................................................................................16-2
16.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................16-2
16.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................16-6
16.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................16-8
16.1.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1......................................................................................................16-8
16.1.9 HSC1 Parameters...............................................................................................................................16-9
16.1.10 Specifications of the HSC1............................................................................................................16-10
16.2 SC1............................................................................................................................................................16-11
16.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................16-12
16.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................16-16
16.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................16-18
16.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1.......................................................................................................16-18
16.2.9 SC1 Parameters................................................................................................................................16-19
16.2.10 Specifications of the SC1...............................................................................................................16-20
16.3 SC2............................................................................................................................................................16-21
16.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................16-22
16.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................16-26
16.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................16-28
xxx

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
16.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SC2.......................................................................................................16-28

16.3.9 SC2 Parameters................................................................................................................................16-29
16.3.10 Specifications of the SC2...............................................................................................................16-30
16.4 ST2............................................................................................................................................................16-31
16.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................16-32
16.4.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 16-35
16.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................16-37
16.4.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2.......................................................................................................16-37
16.4.9 ST2 Parameters................................................................................................................................ 16-38
16.4.10 Specifications of the ST2............................................................................................................... 16-39
17 Optical Protection Unit.........................................................................................................17-1

17.1 DCP.............................................................................................................................................................17-2
17.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................17-4
17.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................17-8
17.1.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................17-11
17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP......................................................................................................17-12
17.1.9 DCP Parameters............................................................................................................................... 17-13
17.1.10 Specifications of the DCP..............................................................................................................17-14
17.2 OLP........................................................................................................................................................... 17-16
17.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................17-18
17.2.5 Front Panel....................................................................................................................................... 17-22
17.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................17-24
17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP......................................................................................................17-25
17.2.9 OLP Parameters................................................................................................................................17-26
17.2.10 Specifications of the OLP.............................................................................................................. 17-27
17.3 SCS............................................................................................................................................................17-29
17.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................17-30
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xxxi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

17.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................17-33
17.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................17-35
17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS.......................................................................................................17-35
17.3.9 SCS Parameters................................................................................................................................17-36
17.3.10 Specifications of the SCS...............................................................................................................17-37
18 Spectrum Analyzer Unit.......................................................................................................18-1

18.1 MCA4..........................................................................................................................................................18-2
18.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................18-2
18.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................18-5
18.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................18-6
18.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................18-7
18.1.9 MCA4 Parameters..............................................................................................................................18-7
18.1.10 Specifications of the MCA4.............................................................................................................18-9
18.2 MCA8........................................................................................................................................................18-10
18.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................18-10
18.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................18-13
18.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................18-14
18.2.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA8...................................................................................................18-15
18.2.9 MCA8 Parameters............................................................................................................................18-16
18.2.10 Specifications of the MCA8...........................................................................................................18-17
18.3 OPM8........................................................................................................................................................18-18
18.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................18-18
18.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................18-21
18.3.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................18-22
18.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8...................................................................................................18-22
18.3.8 OPM8 Parameters............................................................................................................................18-23
18.3.9 Specifications of the OPM8.............................................................................................................18-24
18.4 WMU.........................................................................................................................................................18-25
xxxii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
18.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................18-25
18.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................18-28
18.4.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................18-29
18.4.8 WMU Parameters.............................................................................................................................18-30
18.4.9 Specifications of the WMU..............................................................................................................18-30
19 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit.......................................................................................19-1

19.1 VA1.............................................................................................................................................................19-2
19.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................19-3
19.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................19-6
19.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................19-7
19.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1........................................................................................................19-8
19.1.9 VA1 Parameters.................................................................................................................................19-8
19.1.10 Specifications of the VA1..............................................................................................................19-10
19.2 VA4...........................................................................................................................................................19-11
19.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................19-12
19.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................19-15
19.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................19-16
19.2.7 Characteristic Code for the VA4......................................................................................................19-17
19.2.9 VA4 Parameters...............................................................................................................................19-18
19.2.10 Specifications of the VA4..............................................................................................................19-19
20 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit..............................................................20-1

20.1 DCU............................................................................................................................................................20-2
20.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................20-2
20.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................20-5
20.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................20-6
20.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU.......................................................................................................20-6
20.1.9 DCU Parameters.................................................................................................................................20-7
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xxxiii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
20.1.10 Specifications of the DCU................................................................................................................20-7

20.2 TDC.............................................................................................................................................................20-9
20.2.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................20-10
20.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................20-12
20.2.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................20-14
20.2.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC......................................................................................................20-14
20.2.9 TDC Parameters...............................................................................................................................20-15
20.2.10 Specifications of the TDC..............................................................................................................20-16
21 Clock Unit................................................................................................................................21-1
21.1 STG.............................................................................................................................................................21-2
21.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................21-3
21.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................21-7
21.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................21-9
21.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG......................................................................................................21-10
21.1.8 STG Parameters................................................................................................................................21-10
21.1.9 Specifications of the STG................................................................................................................21-10
22 OCS System Unit....................................................................................................................22-1

22.1 BPA.............................................................................................................................................................22-2
22.1.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................22-2
22.1.5 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................22-4
22.1.6 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................22-6
22.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA........................................................................................................22-6
22.1.9 Specifications of the BPA..................................................................................................................22-7
22.2 EGSH..........................................................................................................................................................22-8
22.2.2 Application.........................................................................................................................................22-9
22.2.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................22-16
22.2.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers.....................................................................................................22-18
22.2.7 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................22-18
xxxiv

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
22.2.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH...................................................................................................22-18

22.2.10 Board Protection.............................................................................................................................22-19
22.2.11 EGSH Parameters...........................................................................................................................22-21
22.2.12 Specifications of the EGSH............................................................................................................22-30
22.3 SF64..........................................................................................................................................................22-32
22.3.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................22-33
22.3.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................22-37
22.3.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches...............................................................................................................22-39
22.3.7 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................22-39
22.3.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64.....................................................................................................22-39
22.3.10 SF64 Parameters.............................................................................................................................22-40
22.3.11 Specifications of the SF64..............................................................................................................22-41
22.4 SF64A........................................................................................................................................................22-43
22.4.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................22-44
22.4.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................22-49
22.4.7 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................22-50
22.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A..................................................................................................22-50
22.4.10 SF64A Parameters..........................................................................................................................22-51
22.4.11 Specifications of the SF64A...........................................................................................................22-52
22.5 SFD64........................................................................................................................................................22-54
22.5.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................22-55
22.5.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................22-59
22.5.7 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................22-61
22.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64..................................................................................................22-61
22.5.10 SFD64 Parameters..........................................................................................................................22-62
22.5.11 Specifications of the SFD64...........................................................................................................22-63
22.6 SL64..........................................................................................................................................................22-65
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xxxv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents

22.6.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................22-66
22.6.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................22-71
22.6.7 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................22-72
22.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64.....................................................................................................22-72
22.6.10 SL64 Parameters............................................................................................................................22-73
22.6.11 Specifications of the SL64.............................................................................................................22-75
22.7 SLD64.......................................................................................................................................................22-77
22.7.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................22-78
22.7.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................22-82
22.7.7 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................22-84
22.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64..................................................................................................22-84
22.7.10 SLD64 Parameters..........................................................................................................................22-85
22.7.11 Specifications of the SLD64..........................................................................................................22-86
22.8 SLH41.......................................................................................................................................................22-88
22.8.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................22-88
22.8.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................22-93
22.8.7 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................22-96
22.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41..................................................................................................22-96
22.8.10 SLH41 Parameters .........................................................................................................................22-97
22.8.11 Specifications of the SLH41..........................................................................................................22-98
22.9 SLO16..................................................................................................................................................... 22-100
22.9.1 Version Description........................................................................................................................22-101
22.9.2 Application.....................................................................................................................................22-101
22.9.3 Functions and Features...................................................................................................................22-102
22.9.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow...............................................................................................22-104
22.9.5 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................... 22-106
22.9.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches.............................................................................................................22-107
xxxvi

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
22.9.7 Valid Slots......................................................................................................................................22-107

22.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16................................................................................................22-107
22.9.9 Optical Interfaces...........................................................................................................................22-108
22.9.10 SLO16 Parameters........................................................................................................................22-108
22.9.11 Specifications of the SLO16........................................................................................................22-110
22.10 SLQ16...................................................................................................................................................22-111
22.10.1 Version Description......................................................................................................................22-111
22.10.2 Application...................................................................................................................................22-112
22.10.3 Functions and Features.................................................................................................................22-112
22.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.............................................................................................22-114
22.10.5 Front Panel...................................................................................................................................22-116
22.10.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches...........................................................................................................22-118
22.10.7 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................22-118
22.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16..............................................................................................22-118
22.10.9 Optical Interfaces.........................................................................................................................22-118
22.10.10 SLQ16 Parameters......................................................................................................................22-119
22.10.11 Specifications of the SLQ16......................................................................................................22-120
22.11 SLQ64...................................................................................................................................................22-121
22.11.1 Version Description......................................................................................................................22-122
22.11.2 Application...................................................................................................................................22-122
22.11.3 Functions and Features.................................................................................................................22-123
22.11.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.............................................................................................22-125
22.11.5 Front Panel...................................................................................................................................22-127
22.11.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches...........................................................................................................22-129
22.11.7 Valid Slots....................................................................................................................................22-129
22.11.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ64..............................................................................................22-129
22.11.9 Optical Interfaces.........................................................................................................................22-129
22.11.10 SLQ64 Parameters......................................................................................................................22-130
22.11.11 Specifications of the SLQ64......................................................................................................22-131
23 Cables.......................................................................................................................................23-1
23.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables..........................................................................................................23-2
23.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables......................................................................................23-2
23.1.2 Subrack Power Cables........................................................................................................................23-7
23.2 Optical Fibers..............................................................................................................................................23-9
23.2.1 Classification....................................................................................................................................23-10
23.2.2 Connectors........................................................................................................................................23-10
23.3 Grounding Cables......................................................................................................................................23-14
23.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables......................................................................................................23-14
23.3.2 PDU Grounding Cable.....................................................................................................................23-15
23.4 Alarm Cables.............................................................................................................................................23-16
23.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable....................................................................................................................23-17
23.4.2 Alarm Interface Cable......................................................................................................................23-18
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xxxvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
23.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating Cable..............................................................23-19

23.5 Management Cables..................................................................................................................................23-21
23.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable....................................................................................................................23-21
23.5.2 AUX Signal Cable............................................................................................................................23-23
23.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable.....................................................................................................23-27
24 Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................................24-1
24.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator ............................................................................................................................24-2
24.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator.....................................................................................................24-2
25 Filler Panels.............................................................................................................................25-1
25.1 Functions and Features................................................................................................................................25-2
25.2 Front Panel..................................................................................................................................................25-2
25.3 Valid Slots...................................................................................................................................................25-3
25.4 Technical Specifications.............................................................................................................................25-4
A Indicators...................................................................................................................................A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicators..........................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 Subrack Indicator...........................................................................................................................................A-2
A.3 Chassis Indicators..........................................................................................................................................A-3
A.4 Board Indicators............................................................................................................................................A-3
A.5 Fan Indicator..................................................................................................................................................A-7
A.6 PIU Indicator.................................................................................................................................................A-7
B Bar Code for Boards..................................................................................................................B-1

B.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................B-3
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs.......................................................................................................................B-4
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs................................................................................................B-4
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs..............................................................B-6
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs.................................................................................................B-7
B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit................................................................................................................B-8
B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM...............................................................................................................B-8
B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1.......................................................................................................B-8
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1.....................................................................................................B-10
B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2........................................................................................................B-10
B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V.....................................................................................................B-12
B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA...................................................................................................................B-13
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4.....................................................................................................B-13
B.5.2 Characteristic Code for the MCA8.....................................................................................................B-14
B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU...................................................................................................................B-14
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA........................................................................................................B-15
xxxviii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1......................................................................................................B-15

B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1......................................................................................................B-16
B.6.4 Characteristic Code for the OBU2......................................................................................................B-16
B.6.5 Characteristic Code for the CRPC......................................................................................................B-17
B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit................................................................................B-17
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40.........................................................................................................B-18
B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V.......................................................................................................B-19
B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU.......................................................................................................B-19
B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU..........................................................................................................B-20
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL..........................................................................................................B-20
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40.........................................................................................................B-20
B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V......................................................................................................B-21
B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit.....................................................................................................B-22
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP.........................................................................................................B-22
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP.........................................................................................................B-22
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS.........................................................................................................B-23
B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA.....................................................................................................................B-23
B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1.........................................................................................................B-23
B.9.2 Characteristic Code for the VA4.........................................................................................................B-24
B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit............................................................................................................B-24
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU......................................................................................................B-24
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU......................................................................................................B-25
B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC......................................................................................................B-25
C Quick Reference Table of the Units.....................................................................................C-1

C.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification...............................................................................C-2
C.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side..............................................................C-2
C.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side...................................................................C-19
C.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification........................................................................................................C-29
C.3 Other Unit Specification..............................................................................................................................C-30
C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio..............................................................................................................C-33
C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ...................................................................C-34
C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..............................................................C-38
C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards ..................................................................C-42
C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards..................................................C-44
D Parameter Reference...............................................................................................................D-1
D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface)..............................................................................................D-4
D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)......................................................................................................................D-5
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold......................................................................................................D-8
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface)...........................................................................................................D-9
D.5 Client Side Service Bearer Rate (M) (WDM Interface)..............................................................................D-10
D.6 Current Bearer Ratio (M) (WDM Interface)...............................................................................................D-11
D.7 Default VLAN ID .......................................................................................................................................D-11
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xxxix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
D.8 Enable Port .................................................................................................................................................D-12

D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression ....................................................................................................D-13
D.10 Enabling LCAS.........................................................................................................................................D-13
D.11 Entry Detection .........................................................................................................................................D-14
D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)...............................................................................................D-15
D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface).................................................................................................D-16
D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................................D-16
D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................D-17
D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)...............................................................................D-18
D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)......................................................................................................................D-19
D.18 Hardware REG Enabled............................................................................................................................D-19
D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)................D-20
D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)..................................................................................................................D-21
D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m)..............................................................................................................D-23
D.22 Laser-in-Position Status.............................................................................................................................D-24
D.23 LCAS Mode...............................................................................................................................................D-24
D.24 Line Rate...................................................................................................................................................D-25
D.25 Loop Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute)..................................................................................................D-28
D.26 Loop Port Shutdown (Ethernet Port Attribute).........................................................................................D-28
D.27 Loopback (WDM Interface)......................................................................................................................D-29
D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface).................................................................................................................D-31
D.29 MAC Loopback ........................................................................................................................................D-32
D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface).........................................................................................D-33
D.31 Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)......................................................................D-34
D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................D-34
D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................D-35
D.34 Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface).......................................................................D-35
D.35 Minimum Number of Members in the Transmit Direction.......................................................................D-36
D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface).................................................................................................D-37
D.37 MSP Sharing..............................................................................................................................................D-37
D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................D-38
D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)..........................................................................D-39
D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)...........................................................................D-40
D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode ...............................................................................................D-40
D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface)......................................................................D-41
D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface).......................................................................................................D-42
D.44 PHY Loopback .........................................................................................................................................D-43
D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)....................................................................................................D-44
D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)..............................D-45
D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................D-46
D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)..........................................................................................................D-48
D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface).........................................................................................D-49
xl

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Contents
D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)...................................................................................................D-49

D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface)................................................................................................................D-50
D.52 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface).........................................................................D-51
D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface)..................................................................................D-52
D.54 TSD (LCAS)..............................................................................................................................................D-53
D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)....................D-54
D.56 VLAN Priority ..........................................................................................................................................D-55
E Glossary.......................................................................................................................................E-1
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xli
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 Appearance of an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet.......................................................................1-3
Figure 1-2 Appearance of an ETSI 600 mm middle-column cabinet..................................................................1-4
Figure 1-3 Front panel of the TN51PDU.............................................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-4 Front panel of the TN16PDU.............................................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-5 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN equipment series ..........................................................1-8
Figure 1-6 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system .............................................................................1-8
Figure 1-7 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system ...........................................................................1-10
Figure 2-1 Appearance of a T63B cabinet...........................................................................................................2-2
Figure 2-2 Appearance of an N63B cabinet.........................................................................................................2-3
Figure 2-3 Front panel of the DC power distribution box....................................................................................2-5
Figure 2-4 Internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box..............................................................2-6
Figure 2-5 Junction box structure.........................................................................................................................2-6
Figure 2-6 Junction box mounting position.........................................................................................................2-7
Figure 2-7 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN equipment series ..........................................................2-7
Figure 2-8 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system .............................................................................2-8
Figure 2-9 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system ...........................................................................2-10
Figure 3-1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack structure ...........................................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack slots................................................................................3-5
Figure 3-3 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-4 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.....................................................3-8
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly............................................................................3-9
Figure 3-6 Fan tray assembly.............................................................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-7 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack structure diagram............................................................................3-12
Figure 3-8 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack slots..............................................................................3-16
Figure 3-9 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system..............................................................................3-18
Figure 3-10 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.................................................3-19
Figure 3-11 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly........................................................................3-20
Figure 3-12 Fan tray assembly...........................................................................................................................3-20
Figure 3-13 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack structure diagram..........................................................................3-22
Figure 3-14 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack slots............................................................................3-25
Figure 3-15 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system............................................................................3-26
Figure 3-16 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.................................................3-27
Figure 3-17 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly........................................................................3-28
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xliii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 3-18 Fan tray assembly...........................................................................................................................3-29

Figure 3-19 Front panel of the TN51PIU board.................................................................................................3-32
Figure 3-20 Front panel of the TN16PIU board.................................................................................................3-32
Figure 3-21 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack............................................................................3-34
Figure 3-24 Front panel of the TN51ATE board...............................................................................................3-37
Figure 3-25 Front panel of the TN16ATE board...............................................................................................3-38
Figure 3-26 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector..........................................................................................3-39
Figure 3-27 Front panel of the EFI board...........................................................................................................3-44
Figure 3-29 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector............................................................................................3-45
Figure 3-30 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board...............................................................................3-51
Figure 3-31 Front panel of the EFI1 board.........................................................................................................3-53
Figure 3-34 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board.............................................................................3-56
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the EFI2 board.........................................................................................................3-57
Figure 3-37 Front panel of the TN52STI board.................................................................................................3-63
Figure 3-38 TNL1STI front panel......................................................................................................................3-64
Figure 4-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram......................................................................................4-2
Figure 4-2 Slots of the subrack.............................................................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-3 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system.....................................................................4-7
Figure 4-4 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system.......................................................................4-8
Figure 4-5 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack............................................................4-9
Figure 4-7 Fan tray assembly.............................................................................................................................4-10
Figure 4-8 Reference diagram for the application of the PIU board..................................................................4-12
Figure 4-9 Front panel of the PIU......................................................................................................................4-13
Figure 4-10 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack....................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-11 Interfaces in the interface area........................................................................................................4-16
Figure 4-12 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX.......................................................................................4-18
Figure 5-1 OptiX OSN 3800 chassis....................................................................................................................5-2
Figure 5-2 Slots of the chassis..............................................................................................................................5-4
Figure 5-3 Mesh group of the chassis..................................................................................................................5-5
Figure 5-4 Front view of the heat dissipation and ventilation system..................................................................5-6
Figure 5-6 Fan tray assembly...............................................................................................................................5-8
xliv

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 5-7 Front panel of the PIU board............................................................................................................5-10

Figure 5-8 Front panel of the APIU board.........................................................................................................5-13
Figure 5-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board...............................................................................5-15
Figure 5-10 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector.......................................................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-11 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector............................................................................................ 5-16
Figure 6-1 DCM frame.........................................................................................................................................6-2
Figure 6-2 CRPC frame........................................................................................................................................6-6
Figure 6-3 Front view of the digital video O-E converter....................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-4 Rear view of the digital video O-E converter.....................................................................................6-7
Figure 6-5 Front view of the power box...............................................................................................................6-8
Figure 6-6 Rear view of the power box................................................................................................................6-9
Figure 6-7 Fiber spooling frame.........................................................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-8 Drawing out the tray.........................................................................................................................6-10
Figure 7-1 Description of the bar code (example 1).............................................................................................7-6
Figure 8-1 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 900A
...............................................................................................................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-2 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 900A
...............................................................................................................................................................................8-4
Figure 8-3 Position of the ECOM board in the WDM system.............................................................................8-5
Figure 8-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board..................................................................8-7
Figure 8-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM............................................................................8-8
Figure 8-6 Front panel of the ECOM board.......................................................................................................8-10
Figure 8-7 Port diagram of the ECOM board.....................................................................................................8-12
Figure 8-8 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM......................................................................................... 8-14
Figure 8-9 Position of the L4G board in the WDM system...............................................................................8-20
Figure 8-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board..................................................................8-23
Figure 8-11 Front panel of the L4G board.........................................................................................................8-26
Figure 8-12 Port diagram of the L4G board.......................................................................................................8-28
Figure 8-13 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G board..................................................................................8-30
Figure 8-14 Position of the LDGD board in the WDM system......................................................................... 8-37
Figure 8-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board...............................................................8-40
Figure 8-16 Front panel of the LDGD board..................................................................................................... 8-43
Figure 8-17 Port diagram of the LDGD board...................................................................................................8-45
Figure 8-18 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD board..............................................................................8-47
Figure 8-19 Position of the LDGS board in the WDM system..........................................................................8-55
Figure 8-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board...............................................................8-58
Figure 8-21 Front panel of the LDGS board......................................................................................................8-61
Figure 8-22 Port diagram of the LDGS board....................................................................................................8-63
Figure 8-23 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS board.............................................................................. 8-65
Figure 8-24 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving).......................8-74
Figure 8-25 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)..................... 8-74
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xlv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 8-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board.................................................................8-79
Figure 8-27 Front panel of the LDM board........................................................................................................8-81
Figure 8-28 Position of the LDMD board in the WDM system.........................................................................8-95
Figure 8-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board............................................................8-100
Figure 8-30 Front panel of the LDMD board...................................................................................................8-102
Figure 8-31 Position of the LDMS board in the WDM system.......................................................................8-116
Figure 8-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board............................................................8-121
Figure 8-33 Front panel of the LDMS board...................................................................................................8-123
Figure 8-34 Position of the LDX board in the WDM system..........................................................................8-136
Figure 8-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board...............................................................8-139
Figure 8-36 Front panel of the LDX board......................................................................................................8-142
Figure 8-37 Application of the TN11LEM24 board in a WDM system..........................................................8-152
Figure 8-38 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board (OptiX OSN 8800) ...........................8-157
Figure 8-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board (OptiX OSN 6800) ...........................8-158
Figure 8-40 Front panel of the LEM24 board .................................................................................................8-161
Figure 8-41 Port diagram of the LEM24 board................................................................................................8-164
Figure 8-42 Cross-connection diagram of the LEM24 board..........................................................................8-165
Figure 8-43 Application of the TN11LEX4 board in a WDM system.............................................................8-173
Figure 8-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 8800) .............................8-177
Figure 8-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 6800) .............................8-178
Figure 8-46 Front panel of the LEX4 board ....................................................................................................8-180
Figure 8-47 Port diagram of the LEX4 board..................................................................................................8-182
Figure 8-48 Cross-connection diagram of the LEX4 board.............................................................................8-184
Figure 8-49 Position of the LOG board in the WDM system..........................................................................8-192
Figure 8-50 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800).......................8-196
Figure 8-51 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)................................8-197
Figure 8-52 Font panel of the LOG board........................................................................................................8-200
Figure 8-53 Port diagram of the LOG board....................................................................................................8-203
Figure 8-54 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG board...............................................................................8-204
Figure 8-55 Position of the TN11LOM board in the WDM system................................................................8-218
Figure 8-56 Position of the TN12LOM board in the WDM system................................................................8-218
Figure 8-57 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LOM board.....................................................8-222
Figure 8-58 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LOM board.....................................................8-223
Figure 8-59 Front panel of the TN11LOM board............................................................................................8-227
Figure 8-60 Front panel of the TN12LOM board............................................................................................8-228
Figure 8-61 Position of the LQG board in the WDM system..........................................................................8-245
Figure 8-62 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board...............................................................8-249
Figure 8-63 Front panel of the LQG board......................................................................................................8-251
Figure 8-64 Port diagram of the LQG board....................................................................................................8-253
Figure 8-65 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG board...............................................................................8-255
Figure 8-66 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)...............................8-264
Figure 8-67 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving).............................8-264
xlvi

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 8-68 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 8800).........................................8-270
Figure 8-69 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)................................8-271
Figure 8-70 Front panel of the LQM board......................................................................................................8-274
Figure 8-71 Port diagram of the LQM.............................................................................................................8-276
Figure 8-72 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM........................................................................................8-279
Figure 8-73 Position of the LQMD board in the WDM system.......................................................................8-292
Figure 8-74 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 8800)............................8-298
Figure 8-75 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
...........................................................................................................................................................................8-299
Figure 8-76 Front panel of the LQMD board...................................................................................................8-302
Figure 8-77 Port diagram of the LQMD board................................................................................................8-305
Figure 8-78 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD board...........................................................................8-307
Figure 8-79 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (LQM Mode)................................................8-322
Figure 8-80 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (NS1 Mode)..................................................8-322
Figure 8-81 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (OptiX OSN 8800)...................8-329
Figure 8-82 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LQMS and TN12 LQMS board (LQM mode) (OptiX
OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)...........................................................................................................................8-330
Figure 8-83 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 mode)(OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX
OSN 3800).........................................................................................................................................................8-331
Figure 8-84 Front panel of the LQMS board...................................................................................................8-334
Figure 8-85 Port diagram of the TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS board (LQM Mode)...........................................8-336
Figure 8-86 Port diagram of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 Mode)...................................................................8-337
Figure 8-87 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board............................................................................8-339
Figure 8-88 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board............................................................................8-341
Figure 8-89 Position of the LSQ board in the WDM system...........................................................................8-354
Figure 8-90 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ board................................................................8-358
Figure 8-91 Front panel of the LSQ board.......................................................................................................8-360
Figure 8-92 Position of the LSX board in the WDM system...........................................................................8-371
Figure 8-93 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX board.......................................................8-375
Figure 8-94 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX board.....................................8-376
Figure 8-95 Front panel of the LSX board.......................................................................................................8-379
Figure 8-96 Position of the LSXL board in the WDM system........................................................................8-394
Figure 8-97 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL board....................................................8-398
Figure 8-98 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL board....................................................8-399
Figure 8-99 Front panel of the TN11LSXL board...........................................................................................8-402
Figure 8-100 Front panel of the TN12LSXL board.........................................................................................8-403
Figure 8-101 Position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system....................................................................8-413
Figure 8-102 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board.........................................................8-417
Figure 8-103 Front panel of the TN11LSXLR board.......................................................................................8-419
Figure 8-104 Front panel of the TN12LSXLR board.......................................................................................8-420
Figure 8-105 Position of the LSXR board in the WDM system......................................................................8-429
Figure 8-106 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board...........................................................8-432
Figure 8-107 Front panel of the LSXR............................................................................................................8-434
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xlvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 8-108 Position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system.....................................................................8-442

Figure 8-109 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board...........................................................8-446
Figure 8-110 Front panel of the LWX2 board.................................................................................................8-449
Figure 8-111 Position of the LWXD board in the WDM system....................................................................8-461
Figure 8-112 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board..........................................................8-465
Figure 8-113 Front panel of the LWXD board.................................................................................................8-468
Figure 8-114 Position of the LWXS board rate in the WDM system..............................................................8-480
Figure 8-115 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board..........................................................8-484
Figure 8-116 Front panel of the LWXS board.................................................................................................8-487
Figure 8-117 Position of the TMX board in the WDM system........................................................................8-500
Figure 8-118 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board.............................................................8-504
Figure 8-119 Front panel of the TMX board....................................................................................................8-506
Figure 9-1 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) .........................................9-5
Figure 9-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ND2 (OptiX OSN 6800).....................................9-14
Figure 9-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 (Line Mode)(OptiX OSN 6800)
.............................................................................................................................................................................9-15
Figure 9-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2 (Relay Mode)(OptiX OSN 6800)...............9-16
Figure 9-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2 (Line Mode)(OptiX OSN 8800) ................9-17
Figure 9-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2 (Relay Mode)(OptiX OSN 8800/6800)
.............................................................................................................................................................................9-18
Figure 9-10 Front panel of the ND2 board.........................................................................................................9-21
Figure 9-11 Port diagram of the TN52ND2.......................................................................................................9-24
Figure 9-12 Port diagram of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2.....................................................................................9-25
Figure 9-13 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52ND2 (ODU0 level)...........................................................9-26
Figure 9-14 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 (ODU1 level)......................9-27
Figure 9-15 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 (ODU2 level)......................9-28
Figure 9-16 Example of service cross-connections on the ND2 board..............................................................9-28
Figure 9-17 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)......................................9-39
Figure 9-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN51NQ2 (OptiX OSN 6800)...................................9-48
Figure 9-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NQ2 (Line Mode) (OptiX OSN 8800)..............9-51
Figure 9-25 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NQ2 (Relay Mode) (OptiX OSN 8800)............9-52
Figure 9-26 Front panel of the NQ2 board.........................................................................................................9-55
Figure 9-27 Port diagram of the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2.....................................................................................9-58
Figure 9-28 Port diagram of the TN51NQ2.......................................................................................................9-59
Figure 9-29 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU0 level).........................................9-60
xlviii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 9-30 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU1 level)......................9-61

Figure 9-31 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU2 level)......................9-62
Figure 9-32 Example of service cross-connections on the NQ2 board..............................................................9-63
Figure 9-33 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1) ......................................9-71
Figure 9-36 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2 board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)................9-78
Figure 9-37 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2 (OptiX OSN 6800) ...................................9-79
Figure 9-38 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 8800).........................9-80
Figure 9-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 6800).........................9-81
Figure 9-40 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 3800)........9-82
Figure 9-41 Front panel of the NS2 board.........................................................................................................9-84
Figure 9-42 Port diagram of the TN52NS2 board..............................................................................................9-86
Figure 9-45 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS2 board (cross-connection at the ODU0 level)...........9-89
Figure 9-46 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)
.............................................................................................................................................................................9-90
Figure 9-47 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11NS2 board (cross-connection at the ODU1 level)...........9-91
Figure 9-48 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board (cross-connection at the ODU2 level)
.............................................................................................................................................................................9-91
Figure 9-49 Example of service cross-connections on the NS2 board...............................................................9-92
Figure 9-50 Position of the NS3 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1).....................................9-106
Figure 9-55 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 6800................9-115
Figure 9-58 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 8800 (Line Mode)
...........................................................................................................................................................................9-118
Figure 9-59 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 8800/6800 (Relay
Mode)................................................................................................................................................................9-119
Figure 9-60 Front panel of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board.............................................................................9-121
Figure 9-61 Front panel of the TN54NS3 board..............................................................................................9-122
Figure 9-62 Port diagram of the TN54NS3 board............................................................................................9-125
Figure 9-65 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board (ODU0 level)..............................9-128
Figure 9-66 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3 board (ODU1 level)...............................................9-129
Figure 9-68 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board (ODU2 level)............9-131
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xlix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures

Figure 9-70 Example of service cross-connections on the NS3 board.............................................................9-132
Figure 9-71 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system...........................................................................9-140
Figure 9-72 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system...........................................................................9-141
Figure 9-73 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board................................................................9-145
Figure 9-74 Front panel of the TBE board.......................................................................................................9-148
Figure 9-75 Port diagram of the TBE board.....................................................................................................9-150
Figure 9-76 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE board...............................................................................9-152
Figure 9-77 Position of the TDG board in the WDM system..........................................................................9-159
Figure 9-78 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board...............................................................9-161
Figure 9-79 Front panel of the TDG board......................................................................................................9-163
Figure 9-80 Port diagram of the TDG board....................................................................................................9-165
Figure 9-81 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board...............................................................................9-166
Figure 9-82 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board...............................................................................9-167
Figure 9-83 Position of the TN11TDX board in the WDM system.................................................................9-173
Figure 9-84 Position of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board in the WDM system..............................................9-173
Figure 9-85 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TDX board......................................................9-177
Figure 9-86 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board...................................9-178
Figure 9-87 Front panel of the TN11TDX board.............................................................................................9-180
Figure 9-88 Front panel of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board..........................................................................9-181
Figure 9-89 Port diagram of the TN11TDX.....................................................................................................9-183
Figure 9-90 Port diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX..................................................................................9-184
Figure 9-91 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TDX...............................................................................9-185
Figure 9-92 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX.............................................................9-185
Figure 9-93 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 8800)...........................................9-191
Figure 9-94 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 6800/3800).................................9-192
Figure 9-95 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)................................9-195
Figure 9-96 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800).......................9-196
Figure 9-97 Front panel of the TOG board......................................................................................................9-198
Figure 9-98 Port diagram of the TOG board....................................................................................................9-200
Figure 9-99 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU0 level) .................................................................9-201
Figure 9-100 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU1 level) ...............................................................9-202
Figure 9-101 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1).......................................................9-209
Figure 9-102 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system...........................................................................9-210
Figure 9-106 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0)................................9-212
Figure 9-107 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0->ODU1).................9-213
Figure 9-108 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)....9-213
Figure 9-110 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU)....................9-215
l

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 9-111 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0)................................9-216

Figure 9-112 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0->ODU1).................9-216
Figure 9-113 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: A)..................................................9-217
Figure 9-114 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: B)..................................................9-217
Figure 9-115 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: A) .................................................9-218
Figure 9-116 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: B) .................................................9-218
Figure 9-118 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 9) ......................................................9-219
Figure 9-119 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 10).....................................................9-220
Figure 9-122 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1) in
cascading mode)................................................................................................................................................9-230
Figure 9-123 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1>OTU1) in cascading mode).............................................................................................................................9-231
non-cascading mode).........................................................................................................................................9-233
Figure 9-125 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1>OTU1) in non-cascading mode)......................................................................................................................9-234
Figure 9-126 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (electrical regeneration board)............9-235
Figure 9-127 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]) in cascading mode)...........................................................................................................................9-237
Figure 9-128 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)...............................................................................................................9-239
cascading mode)................................................................................................................................................9-241
Figure 9-130 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU1>OTU1) in cascading mode).............................................................................................................................9-242
Figure 9-131 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]) in non-cascading mode)....................................................................................................................9-243
Figure 9-132 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode).......................................................................................................9-246
Figure 9-133 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)
in non-cascading mode)....................................................................................................................................9-247
Figure 9-134 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1) in non-cascading mode).............................................................................................9-249
Figure 9-135 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)...............................................................................9-250
Figure 9-136 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode).......................................................................................................9-251
Figure 9-137 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (Application 2 of ODU1 Tributary Mode
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)..........................................................................................9-253
Figure 9-138 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (Application 3 of ODU1 Tributary Mode
(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)................................................................................9-254
Figure 9-139 Front panel of the TOM board....................................................................................................9-257
Figure 9-140 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1)).....9-259
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

li
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 9-141 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1>OTU1))............................................................................................................................................................9-260
Figure 9-142 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1))
...........................................................................................................................................................................9-261
Figure 9-143 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1>OTU1))............................................................................................................................................................9-261
Figure 9-144 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1>OTU1))............................................................................................................................................................9-262
Figure 9-145 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))
...........................................................................................................................................................................9-262
Figure 9-146 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1))..............................................................................................................................................9-263
Figure 9-147 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1))....9-263
Figure 9-148 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1>OTU1))............................................................................................................................................................9-264
Figure 9-149 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]))..........................................................................................................................................................9-264
Figure 9-150 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode: Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1)...............................................................................................................................................9-265
Figure 9-151 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1))
...........................................................................................................................................................................9-266
Figure 9-152 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary Mode: OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
...........................................................................................................................................................................9-267
Figure 9-153 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary Mode: OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0).............................................................................................................................................................9-267
Figure 9-154 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any>ODU0->ODU1)).............................................................................................................................................9-268
Figure 9-155 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1>Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)).....................................................................................................................9-268
Figure 9-156 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1/Any>ODU1->OTU1))..............................................................................................................................................9-268
Figure 9-157 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 1)...............................................9-271
Figure 9-171 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM board (scenario 10).............................................9-281
lii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures

Figure 9-174 Position of the TQM board in the WDM system........................................................................9-299
Figure 9-175 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.......................................................................9-304
Figure 9-176 Front panel of the TQM board....................................................................................................9-306
Figure 9-177 Port diagram of the TQM board.................................................................................................9-308
Figure 9-178 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board............................................................................9-310
Figure 9-179 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board............................................................................9-311
Figure 9-180 Position of the TQS board in the WDM system.........................................................................9-321
Figure 9-181 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS........................................................................9-324
Figure 9-182 Front panel of the TQS board.....................................................................................................9-326
Figure 9-183 Port diagram of the TQS board...................................................................................................9-328
Figure 9-184 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS board.............................................................................9-329
Figure 9-185 Position of the TN11TQX board in the WDM system...............................................................9-336
Figure 9-186 Position of the TN52TQX board in the WDM system...............................................................9-336
Figure 9-187 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQX.......................................................................9-339
Figure 9-188 Front panel of the TQX board....................................................................................................9-341
Figure 9-189 Port diagram of the TQX............................................................................................................9-343
Figure 9-190 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX board.............................................................................9-344
Figure 9-191 Position of the TN11TSXL board in the WDM system.............................................................9-351
Figure 9-192 Position of the TN53TSXL board in the WDM system.............................................................9-351
Figure 9-193 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL............................................................9-354
Figure 9-194 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL............................................................9-355
Figure 9-195 Front panel of the TN11TSXL board.........................................................................................9-357
Figure 9-196 Front panel of the TN53TSXL board.........................................................................................9-358
Figure 9-197 Port diagram of the TN11TSXL board.......................................................................................9-360
Figure 9-198 Port diagram of the TN53TSXL board.......................................................................................9-360
Figure 9-199 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TSXL board..................................................................9-361
Figure 9-200 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TSXL board..................................................................9-362
Figure 10-1 Position of the BMD4 in a WDM system ......................................................................................10-3
Figure 10-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4.........................................................................10-5
Figure 10-3 Front panel of the BMD4................................................................................................................10-7
Figure 10-4 Position of the BMD8 in a WDM system.....................................................................................10-14
Figure 10-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8.......................................................................10-16
Figure 10-6 Front panel of the BMD8..............................................................................................................10-18
Figure 10-7 Position of the ELQX in a WDM system.....................................................................................10-27
Figure 10-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 8800................................10-30
Figure 10-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800................................10-31
Figure 10-10 Front panel of the ELQX............................................................................................................10-33
Figure 10-11 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (cross-connections of client-side services)..............................10-35
Figure 10-12 Diagram of ports on the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800(backplane-side ODU1-level crossconnections)......................................................................................................................................................10-36
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

liii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 10-13 Diagram of ports on the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800(backplane-side ODU2-level crossconnections)......................................................................................................................................................10-36
Figure 10-14 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU2 level).......................................................10-37
Figure 10-15 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU1 level).......................................................10-38
Figure 10-16 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX..................................................10-39
Figure 10-17 Position of the ENQ2 in a WDM system ..................................................................................10-46
Figure 10-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2.....................................................................10-52
Figure 10-21 Front panel of the ENQ2............................................................................................................10-54
Figure 10-22 Diagram of ports on the ENQ2 (backplane-side ODU0-level cross-connections).....................10-55
Figure 10-25 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU0 level)........................................................10-57
Figure 10-28 Diagram of cross-connections between the NPO2 and ENQ2...................................................10-60
Figure 10-29 Position of the NPO2 in a WDM system ...................................................................................10-66
Figure 10-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2 .....................................................................10-73
Figure 10-33 Front panel of the TN54NPO2...................................................................................................10-75
Figure 10-34 Front panel of the TN55NPO2...................................................................................................10-76
Figure 10-35 Diagram of ports on the NPO2 (backplane-side ODU0-level cross-connections).....................10-79
Figure 10-38 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2 (ODU0 level)........................................................10-82
Figure 10-41 Diagram of cross-connections between the NPO2 and ENQ2...................................................10-85
Figure 10-42 Position of the PTQX in a WDM system ..................................................................................10-92
Figure 10-43 Functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 8800 .............................10-96
Figure 10-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800 .............................10-97
Figure 10-45 Front panel of the PTQX..........................................................................................................10-100
Figure 10-46 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (cross-connections of client-side services)............................10-103
Figure 10-47 Diagram of ports on the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800(backplane-side ODU1-level crossconnections)....................................................................................................................................................10-103
Figure 10-48 Diagram of ports on the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800(backplane-side ODU2-level crossconnections)....................................................................................................................................................10-104
Figure 10-49 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU2 level)......................................................10-105
Figure 10-50 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU1 level)......................................................10-106
Figure 10-51 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX................................................10-107
Figure 11-1 Position of the M40 board in the WDM system.............................................................................11-3
liv

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 11-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board..................................................................11-4
Figure 11-3 Front panel of the M40 board.........................................................................................................11-6
Figure 11-4 Position of the M40V board in the WDM system........................................................................11-13
Figure 11-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board.............................................................11-14
Figure 11-6 Front panel of the M40V board....................................................................................................11-16
Figure 11-7 Position of the D40 in the WDM system......................................................................................11-24
Figure 11-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40...........................................................................11-25
Figure 11-9 D40 front panel.............................................................................................................................11-26
Figure 11-10 Position of the D40V board in the WDM system.......................................................................11-33
Figure 11-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board............................................................11-35
Figure 11-12 Front panel of the D40V board...................................................................................................11-36
Figure 11-13 Position of the DFIU board in the WDM system.......................................................................11-44
Figure 11-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board............................................................11-45
Figure 11-15 Front panel of the DFIU board...................................................................................................11-47
Figure 11-16 Position of the FIU board in the WDM system (normal optical power)....................................11-53
Figure 11-17 Position of the TN13FIU02 board in the WDM system (high optical power)...........................11-54
Figure 11-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board and the TN12FIU board..............11-55
Figure 11-19 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board and the TN21FIU board..............11-56
Figure 11-20 Front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU board............................................................................11-58
Figure 11-21 Front panel of the TN13FIU01 board.........................................................................................11-59
Figure 11-22 Front panel of the TN13FIU02 board.........................................................................................11-60
Figure 11-23 Front panel of the TN21FIU board.............................................................................................11-61
Figure 11-24 Position of the ITL board in the WDM system..........................................................................11-69
Figure 11-25 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL01/TN12ITL board.................................11-71
Figure 11-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL04 board..................................................11-71
Figure 11-27 Front panel of the TN11ITL board.............................................................................................11-73
Figure 11-28 Front panel of the TN12ITL board.............................................................................................11-74
Figure 11-29 Position of the SFIU board in the WDM system .......................................................................11-81
Figure 11-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11SFIU board....................................................11-82
Figure 11-31 Front panel of the TN11SFIU board...........................................................................................11-84
Figure 12-1 Position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system.................................................................................12-3
Figure 12-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board...............................................................12-4
Figure 12-3 Front panel of the CMR1 board......................................................................................................12-5
Figure 12-4 Position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system.....................................................................12-10
Figure 12-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR2 board.............................................................12-11
Figure 12-6 Front panel of the TN11CMR2 board..........................................................................................12-13
Figure 12-7 Front panel of the TN21CMR2 board..........................................................................................12-14
Figure 12-8 Position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system.....................................................................12-20
Figure 12-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR4 board.............................................................12-21
Figure 12-10 Front panel of the TN11CMR4 board........................................................................................12-23
Figure 12-11 Front panel of the TN21CMR4 board........................................................................................12-24
Figure 12-12 Position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system...................................................................12-30
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 12-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board..........................................................12-32
Figure 12-14 Front panel of the TN11DMR1 board........................................................................................12-33
Figure 12-15 Front panel of the TN21DMR1 board........................................................................................12-34
Figure 12-16 Position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system.....................................................................12-39
Figure 12-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board.............................................................12-41
Figure 12-18 Front panel of the TN11MR2 board...........................................................................................12-42
Figure 12-26 Front panel of the MR8 board....................................................................................................12-61
Figure 12-27 Position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system..................................................................12-68
Figure 12-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board..........................................................12-70
Figure 12-29 Front panel of the MR8V board.................................................................................................12-72
Figure 12-30 Position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system...................................................................12-80
Figure 12-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board...........................................................12-81
Figure 12-32 Front panel of the SBM2 board..................................................................................................12-83
Figure 13-1 Position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system.......................................................................13-3
Figure 13-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9 board...............................................................13-4
Figure 13-3 Front panel of the RDU9 board......................................................................................................13-6
Figure 13-4 Position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system....................................................................13-11
Figure 13-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board............................................................13-13
Figure 13-6 Front panel of the RMU9 board...................................................................................................13-15
Figure 13-7 Position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system....................................................................13-21
Figure 13-8 Functions and features of the ROAM board.................................................................................13-23
Figure 13-9 Front panel of the ROAM board...................................................................................................13-24
Figure 13-10 Position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system...................................................................13-33
Figure 13-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board...........................................................13-34
Figure 13-12 Front panel of the WSD9 board..................................................................................................13-36
Figure 13-13 Position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system..................................................................13-44
Figure 13-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board..........................................................13-46
Figure 13-15 Front panel of the WSM9 board.................................................................................................13-48
Figure 13-16 Position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system...............................................................13-55
Figure 13-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2.................................................................13-56
Figure 13-18 Front panel of the WSMD2 board..............................................................................................13-58
Figure 13-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board.......................................................13-67
lvi

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 13-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board.......................................................13-78
Figure 14-1 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (backward pump).............................................14-3
Figure 14-2 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (forward pump)................................................14-3
Figure 14-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (backward pump)..................................14-5
Figure 14-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (forward pump).....................................14-6
Figure 14-5 Front panel of the CRPC board......................................................................................................14-8
Figure 14-6 Jumpers on the CRPC board...........................................................................................................14-9
Figure 14-7 Position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system........................................................................14-15
Figure 14-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board..............................................................14-17
Figure 14-9 Front panel of the DAS1 board.....................................................................................................14-20
Figure 14-10 Position of the HBA board in the WDM system........................................................................14-29
Figure 14-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board.............................................................14-30
Figure 14-12 Front panel of the HBA board....................................................................................................14-32
Figure 14-13 Position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system......................................................................14-40
Figure 14-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1 board..................................................14-42
Figure 14-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 board..................................................14-43
Figure 14-16 Front panel of the TN11OAU1 board.........................................................................................14-45
Figure 14-17 Front panel of the TN12OAU1 board.........................................................................................14-46
Figure 14-18 Position of the OBU1 board in the WDM system......................................................................14-61
Figure 14-19 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board..................................................14-63
Figure 14-21 Front panel of the TN11OBU1 board.........................................................................................14-66
Figure 14-23 Position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system......................................................................14-77
Figure 15-1 Position of the SXM board in the OCS system..............................................................................15-2
Figure 15-2 Position of the SXM board in the WDM system............................................................................15-3
Figure 15-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board.................................................................15-4
Figure 15-4 Front panel of the SXM board........................................................................................................15-5
Figure 15-5 Position of the XCH board in the WDM system............................................................................15-7
Figure 15-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board.................................................................15-8
Figure 15-7 Front panel of the XCH board......................................................................................................15-10
Figure 15-8 Position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system.................................................................15-12
Figure 15-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board......................................................15-14
Figure 15-10 Front panel of the TN16XCH board...........................................................................................15-16
Figure 15-11 Position of the battery jumper on the TN16XCH board.............................................................15-17
Figure 15-12 battery jumper.............................................................................................................................15-18
Figure 15-13 Position of the XCM in the OCS system....................................................................................15-19
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 15-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCM.......................................................................15-20

Figure 15-15 XCM front panel.........................................................................................................................15-22
Figure 15-16 Position of the XCS board in the WDM system.........................................................................15-25
Figure 15-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board..............................................................15-26
Figure 15-18 Front panel of the XCS board.....................................................................................................15-27
Figure 15-19 Position of the XCT board in the WDM system........................................................................15-29
Figure 15-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board..............................................................15-30
Figure 15-21 Front panel of the XCT board.....................................................................................................15-32
Figure 15-22 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC board..............................................................15-38
Figure 15-23 Front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board........................................................15-40
Figure 15-24 Front panel of the TNK2SCC board...........................................................................................15-41
Figure 15-25 Front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board..........................................................................15-41
Figure 15-26 LED............................................................................................................................................15-43
Figure 15-27 Position of the battery jumper on the TN11SCC board..............................................................15-45
Figure 15-28 Position of the battery jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC board...................................................15-46
Figure 15-31 Position of the battery jumper on the TNK2SCC board.............................................................15-47
Figure 15-32 battery jumper.............................................................................................................................15-48
Figure 15-33 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN51AUX/TN11AUX/TN22AUX/TN21AUX board
...........................................................................................................................................................................15-54
Figure 15-34 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16AUX board....................................................15-55
Figure 15-35 Front panel of the TN51AUX board...........................................................................................15-56
Figure 15-38 Front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board................................................................................15-58
Figure 15-39 LED............................................................................................................................................15-61
Figure 15-40 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX01 board.....................................................................15-62
Figure 15-41 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board.....................................................................15-63
Figure 15-42 Jumper........................................................................................................................................15-64
Figure 15-43 Position of the jumper on the TN21AUX...................................................................................15-65
Figure 15-44 Position of the jumper on the TN22AUX...................................................................................15-65
Figure 16-1 Position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system...........................................................................16-3
Figure 16-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board................................................................16-4
Figure 16-3 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead......................................................................16-5
Figure 16-4 Front panel of the HSC1 board.......................................................................................................16-7
Figure 16-5 Position of the SC1 board in the WDM system............................................................................16-13
Figure 16-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board.................................................................16-14
Figure 16-7 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead....................................................................16-15
Figure 16-8 Front panel of the SC1 board........................................................................................................16-17
Figure 16-9 Position of the SC2 board in the WDM system............................................................................16-22
Figure 16-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board...............................................................16-24
Figure 16-11 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead..................................................................16-25
lviii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 16-12 Front panel of the SC2 board......................................................................................................16-27

Figure 16-13 Position of the ST2 board in the WDM system..........................................................................16-32
Figure 16-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board...............................................................16-34
Figure 16-15 Front panel of the ST2 board......................................................................................................16-36
Figure 17-1 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)...............................17-4
Figure 17-2 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (OWSP protection).............................................17-5
Figure 17-3 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)................................17-5
Figure 17-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board..................................................................17-7
Figure 17-5 Front panel of the DCP board.........................................................................................................17-9
Figure 17-6 Position of the TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, application 1)
...........................................................................................................................................................................17-18
Figure 17-7 Position of the TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection, application 2)
...........................................................................................................................................................................17-19
Figure 17-8 Position of the TN12OLP01 board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)................17-19
Figure 17-9 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN11OLP02/TN12OLP01 board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1
protection).........................................................................................................................................................17-19
Figure 17-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board..............................................................17-21
Figure 17-11 Front panel of the OLP board.....................................................................................................17-23
Figure 17-12 Position of the SCS board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection).............................17-30
Figure 17-13 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended mode)...........17-31
Figure 17-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board..............................................................17-32
Figure 17-15 Front panel of the SCS board.....................................................................................................17-34
Figure 18-1 Position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system.........................................................................18-2
Figure 18-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board..............................................................18-4
Figure 18-3 Front panel of the MCA4 board.....................................................................................................18-5
Figure 18-4 Position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system.......................................................................18-10
Figure 18-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board............................................................18-12
Figure 18-6 Front panel of the MCA8 board...................................................................................................18-13
Figure 18-7 Position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system........................................................................18-19
Figure 18-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the OPM8 board.............................................................18-20
Figure 18-9 Front panel of the OPM8 board....................................................................................................18-21
Figure 18-10 Position of the WMU board in the WDM system......................................................................18-26
Figure 18-11 Functional block diagram of the WMU board............................................................................18-27
Figure 18-12 Front panel of the WMU board..................................................................................................18-28
Figure 19-1 Position of the VA1 board in the WDM system.............................................................................19-3
Figure 19-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1............................................................................19-5
Figure 19-3 Front panel of the VA1 board.........................................................................................................19-6
Figure 19-4 Position of the VA4 board in the WDM system...........................................................................19-12
Figure 19-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4..........................................................................19-14
Figure 19-6 Front panel of the VA4 board.......................................................................................................19-15
Figure 20-1 Position of the DCU board in the WDM system............................................................................20-3
Figure 20-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board.................................................................20-4
Figure 20-3 Front panel of the DCU board........................................................................................................20-5
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 20-4 Application of the TDC board in a WDM system........................................................................20-10

Figure 20-5 Functional block diagram of the TDC board................................................................................20-11
Figure 20-6 Front panel of the TDC board.......................................................................................................20-13
Figure 21-1 Position of the TNK2STG in OptiX OSN 8800 T64......................................................................21-3
Figure 21-2 Position of the TN52STG in OptiX 8800 T32...............................................................................21-4
Figure 21-3 Position of the TN11STG in OptiX OSN 6800..............................................................................21-4
Figure 21-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the STG board..................................................................21-6
Figure 21-5 Front panel of the TNK2STG board...............................................................................................21-7
Figure 21-6 Front panel of the TN52STG board................................................................................................21-7
Figure 21-7 Front panel of the TN11STG board................................................................................................21-8
Figure 22-1 Position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system.......................................................22-3
Figure 22-2 Function modules and signal flow of the BPA board.....................................................................22-4
Figure 22-3 Front panel of the BPA board.........................................................................................................22-5
Figure 22-4 Networking and application of the EGSH board..........................................................................22-10
Figure 22-5 Function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board................................................................22-14
Figure 22-6 Front panel of the EGSH board....................................................................................................22-16
Figure 22-7 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.........................................................................22-17
Figure 22-8 Slot configuration for the working EGSH board of a DLAG protection group...........................22-20
Figure 22-9 Networking and application of the SF64 board............................................................................22-33
Figure 22-10 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board................................................................22-36
Figure 22-11 Front panel of the SF64 board....................................................................................................22-38
Figure 22-12 Networking and application of the SF64A board.......................................................................22-44
Figure 22-13 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board.............................................................22-47
Figure 22-14 Front panel of the SF64A board.................................................................................................22-49
Figure 22-15 Networking and application of the SFD64 board.......................................................................22-55
Figure 22-16 Function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board.............................................................22-58
Figure 22-17 Front panel of the SFD64 board.................................................................................................22-60
Figure 22-18 Networking and application of the SL64 board..........................................................................22-66
Figure 22-19 Function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board................................................................22-69
Figure 22-20 Appearance of the front panel of the SL64 board.......................................................................22-71
Figure 22-21 Networking and application of the SLD64 board.......................................................................22-78
Figure 22-22 Function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board.............................................................22-81
Figure 22-23 Front panel of the SLD64 board.................................................................................................22-83
Figure 22-24 Networking and application of the SLH41 board.......................................................................22-89
Figure 22-25 Function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board.............................................................22-92
Figure 22-26 Front panel of the SLH41 board (considering optical interfaces as an example).......................22-94
Figure 22-27 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.......................................................................22-95
Figure 22-28 Networking and application of the SLO16 board.....................................................................22-101
Figure 22-29 Function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board...........................................................22-104
Figure 22-30 Front panel of the SLO16 board...............................................................................................22-106
Figure 22-31 Networking and application of the SLQ16 board.....................................................................22-112
Figure 22-32 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board...........................................................22-115
lx

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figures
Figure 22-33 Front panel of the N4SLQ16 board..........................................................................................22-117

Figure 22-34 Networking and application of the SLQ64 board.....................................................................22-123
Figure 22-35 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board...........................................................22-126
Figure 22-36 Front panel of the SLQ64 board...............................................................................................22-128
Figure 23-1 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable (when the cabinet
houses only the OptiX OSN 8800)......................................................................................................................23-3
Figure 23-2 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable (when the cabinet
houses only the OptiX OSN 6800)......................................................................................................................23-3
Figure 23-3 Structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable............................................................................23-4
Figure 23-4 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN 8800......................................................23-8
Figure 23-5 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN6800/3800..............................................23-8
Figure 23-6 LC/PC fiber connector..................................................................................................................23-11
Figure 23-7 FC/PC fiber connector..................................................................................................................23-12
Figure 23-8 SC/PC fiber connector..................................................................................................................23-12
Figure 23-9 LSH/APC fiber connector............................................................................................................23-13
Figure 23-10 Protective caps recommended ...................................................................................................23-13
Figure 23-11 Protective caps not recommended .............................................................................................23-14
Figure 23-12 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable............................................................................23-15
Figure 23-13 Structure of the PDU grounding cable.......................................................................................23-16
Figure 23-14 Structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable............................................................................23-17
Figure 23-15 Alarm interface cable..................................................................................................................23-18
Figure 23-16 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable...................................23-20
Figure 23-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable.......................................................................................23-22
Figure 23-18 Structure of the AUX signal cable..............................................................................................23-23
Figure 23-19 Structure of the straight-through network cable.........................................................................23-28
Figure 24-1 Appearance of a fixed optical attenuator........................................................................................24-2
Figure 24-2 Appearance of a VOA....................................................................................................................24-2
Figure 25-1 Appearance of a filler panel............................................................................................................25-3
Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)...........................................................................................B-3
Figure D-1 Example 1.......................................................................................................................................D-27
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Technical specifications of ETSI 300 mm cabinets.............................................................................1-5
Table 1-2 Technical specifications of ETSI 600 mm cabinets.............................................................................1-6
Table 1-3 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system..............................................................1-9
Table 1-4 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system................................................................................1-10
Table 1-5 Power parameters of the UPM...........................................................................................................1-12
Table 2-1 Maximum number of subracks that can be housed in a cabinet...........................................................2-3
Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the cabinet................................................................................................2-4
Table 2-3 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system..............................................................2-8
Table 2-4 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system................................................................................2-10
Table 2-5 Power parameters of the UPM...........................................................................................................2-12
Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack...........................................................3-3
Table 3-2 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.............................................3-4
Table 3-3 Functions..............................................................................................................................................3-6
Table 3-4 FAN speed mode..................................................................................................................................3-8
Table 3-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly..............................................................................3-10
Table 3-6 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.........................................................3-13
Table 3-7 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32...............3-14
Table 3-8 Functions............................................................................................................................................3-17
Table 3-9 FAN speed mode................................................................................................................................3-18
Table 3-10 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly............................................................................3-21
Table 3-11 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.......................................................3-23
Table 3-12 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.........................................3-23
Table 3-13 Functions..........................................................................................................................................3-26
Table 3-14 FAN speed mode..............................................................................................................................3-27
Table 3-15 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly............................................................................3-29
Table 3-16 Version description of the PIU board...............................................................................................3-30
Table 3-17 Substitution rules of the PIU board..................................................................................................3-31
Table 3-18 Functions and features of the PIU board..........................................................................................3-31
Table 3-19 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board..................................................................................................3-33
Table 3-20 Valid slots for the TN16PIU board..................................................................................................3-33
Table 3-21 Performance specifications of the PIU board...................................................................................3-33
Table 3-22 Version description of the ATE board.............................................................................................3-36
Table 3-23 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ATE board.................................................................3-38
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxiii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 3-24 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces..................................................................3-39

Table 3-25 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces............................................................3-40
Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface...........................................................................................3-40
Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the ALMI2..........................................................................................................3-41
Table 3-28 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface..................................................................................3-41
Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface..................................................................................3-42
Table 3-30 Valid slots for the TN51ATE board.................................................................................................3-42
Table 3-31 Valid slots for the TN16ATE board.................................................................................................3-43
Table 3-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI board...................................................................3-44
Table 3-33 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface.............................................................................................3-46
Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces..............................................................3-48
Table 3-37 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface.....................................................................................3-49
Table 3-39 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface.........................................................................................3-50
Table 3-40 Valid slots for the EFI board............................................................................................................3-51
Table 3-41 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI1 board.................................................................3-53
Table 3-44 Valid slots for the EFI1 board..........................................................................................................3-55
Table 3-45 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI2 board.................................................................3-58
Table 3-51 Valid slots for the EFI2 board..........................................................................................................3-62
Table 3-52 Interface description of the STI........................................................................................................3-64
Table 3-53 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface..................................................................................3-65
Table 3-54 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface..................................................................................3-65
Table 3-55 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface..........................................................................................3-66
Table 3-56 Pin assignment of the F1 interface...................................................................................................3-66
Table 3-57 Valid slots for the STI board............................................................................................................3-67
Table 4-1 Technical specifications of the subrack...............................................................................................4-3
Table 4-2 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 6800.........................4-3
Table 4-3 Functions of a fan tray assembly..........................................................................................................4-7
Table 4-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly..............................................................................4-11
Table 4-6 Type description of the PIU...............................................................................................................4-12
Table 4-7 Functions and features of the PIU board............................................................................................4-13
Table 4-8 Valid slots for the TN11PIU board....................................................................................................4-14
lxiv

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 4-9 Performance specifications of the PIU board.....................................................................................4-14

Table 4-10 Description of interfaces in the interface area..................................................................................4-16
Table 4-11 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board.......................................................4-19
Table 4-12 Pin assignment of the COM interface..............................................................................................4-20
Table 4-13 Pin assignment of the ETH3 interface............................................................................................. 4-21
Table 4-14 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces.................................................................. 4-21
Table 4-15 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces............................................................ 4-22
Table 4-18 Pin assignment of the ALMI2..........................................................................................................4-24
Table 4-20 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface......................................................................................4-25
Table 4-21 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface......................................................................................4-25
Table 5-1 Technical specifications of the chassis.................................................................................................5-2
Table 5-2 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 3800.........................5-3
Table 5-3 Functions of a fan tray assembly..........................................................................................................5-5
Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly................................................................................5-8
Table 5-6 Functions and features of the PIU........................................................................................................5-9
Table 5-7 Performance specifications of the PIU...............................................................................................5-11
Table 5-8 Functions and features of the APIU...................................................................................................5-12
Table 5-9 Performance specifications of the APIU............................................................................................5-14
Table 5-10 Functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board...................................................5-15
Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the COM interface..............................................................................................5-17
Table 5-12 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface........................................................................................... 5-17
Table 5-17 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces................................................................5-20
Table 6-1 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G.652 fiber)............6-3
Table 6-2 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G.655 LEAF fiber)
...............................................................................................................................................................................6-3
Table 6-3 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G.653 fiber)............6-4
Table 6-4 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (TW-RS fiber)..........6-5
Table 6-5 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame......................................................................................6-5
Table 6-6 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame....................................................................................6-6
Table 6-7 Mechanical specifications....................................................................................................................6-7
Table 6-8 Electrical specifications.......................................................................................................................6-7
Table 6-9 Optical specifications...........................................................................................................................6-8
Table 6-10 Technical specifications of the power box.........................................................................................6-9
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 7-1 Board appearance and dimensions.......................................................................................................7-2

Table 7-2 Hazard levels........................................................................................................................................7-4
Table 7-3 Boards for the OptiX OSN 8800..........................................................................................................7-7
Table 7-4 Boards for the OptiX OSN 6800........................................................................................................7-16
Table 7-5 Boards for the OptiX OSN 3800........................................................................................................7-21
Table 8-1 Functions and features of the ECOM board.........................................................................................8-5
Table 8-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ECOM board...............................................................8-11
Table 8-3 Valid slots for ECOM board..............................................................................................................8-11
Table 8-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ECOM board displayed on the NM.....................................8-12
Table 8-5 Meaning of NM port of the ECOM board.........................................................................................8-13
Table 8-6 ECOM parameters..............................................................................................................................8-14
Table 8-7 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical modules on the client side (FE)..........................................8-16
Table 8-8 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical modules on the CWDM side...............................................8-18
Table 8-9 Functions and features of the L4G board...........................................................................................8-20
Table 8-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the L4G board.................................................................8-27
Table 8-11 Valid slots for the L4G board...........................................................................................................8-27
Table 8-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the L4G board displayed on the NM........................................8-28
Table 8-13 Meaning of NM port of the L4G board............................................................................................8-28
Table 8-14 L4G parameters................................................................................................................................8-30
Table 8-15 Specifications of GE optical modules on the client side..................................................................8-33
Table 8-16 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical modules on the client side.................................................8-34
Table 8-17 Specifications of optical modules on the DWDM side....................................................................8-35
Table 8-18 Functions and features of the LDGD board.....................................................................................8-37
Table 8-19 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGD board..............................................................8-44
Table 8-20 Valid slots for LDGD board.............................................................................................................8-44
Table 8-21 Characteristic code for the LDGD board.........................................................................................8-44
Table 8-22 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGD board displayed on the NM....................................8-45
Table 8-23 Meaning of NM port of the LDGD board........................................................................................8-46
Table 8-24 LDGD parameters............................................................................................................................8-47
Table 8-28 Specifications of optical modules on the CWDM side....................................................................8-53
Table 8-29 Functions and features of the LDGS board......................................................................................8-55
Table 8-30 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGS board..............................................................8-62
Table 8-31 Valid slots for LDGS board.............................................................................................................8-62
Table 8-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGS board displayed on the NM.....................................8-63
Table 8-33 Meaning of NM port of the LDGS board.........................................................................................8-63
Table 8-34 LDGS parameters.............................................................................................................................8-65
lxvi

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 8-38 Specifications of optical modules on the CWDM side....................................................................8-71

Table 8-39 Type description of the LDM board.................................................................................................8-73
Table 8-40 Functions and features of the LDM board.......................................................................................8-75
Table 8-41 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN12LDM board......................................................8-82
Table 8-42 Valid slots for the LDM board.........................................................................................................8-83
Table 8-43 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDM board displayed on the NM......................................8-83
Table 8-44 LDM parameters..............................................................................................................................8-84
Table 8-45 Specifications of SDH optical modules on the client side...............................................................8-87
Table 8-48 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical modules on the client side.................................................8-91
Table 8-49 Functions and features of the LDMD board....................................................................................8-95
Table 8-50 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMD board...........................................................8-103
Table 8-51 Valid slots for the LDMD board....................................................................................................8-104
Table 8-52 Characteristic code for the LDMD board.......................................................................................8-104
Table 8-53 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMD board displayed on the NM.................................8-105
Table 8-54 LDMD Parameters.........................................................................................................................8-105
Table 8-55 Specifications of SDH optical modules on the client side.............................................................8-108
Table 8-56 Specifications of GE optical modules on the client side................................................................8-110
Table 8-57 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical modules on the client side...............................................8-111
Table 8-58 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical modules on the client side...............................................8-112
Table 8-59 Specifications of optical modules on the DWDM side..................................................................8-113
Table 8-60 Functions and features of the LDMS board...................................................................................8-116
Table 8-61 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMS board............................................................8-124
Table 8-62 Valid slots for the LDMS board.....................................................................................................8-124
Table 8-63 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMS board displayed on the NM..................................8-125
Table 8-64 LDMS Parameters..........................................................................................................................8-125
Table 8-65 Specifications of SDH optical modules on the client side.............................................................8-129
Table 8-68 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical modules on the client side...............................................8-133
Table 8-70 Functions and features of the LDX board......................................................................................8-136
Table 8-71 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDX board..............................................................8-143
Table 8-72 Valid slots for the LDX board........................................................................................................8-143
Table 8-73 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDX board displayed on the NM.....................................8-144
Table 8-74 LDX Parameters.............................................................................................................................8-144
Table 8-75 Specifications of optical modules on the client side......................................................................8-147
Table 8-76 Specifications of optical modules on the Client side.....................................................................8-149
Table 8-78 Functions and features of the LEM24 board..................................................................................8-153
Table 8-79 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEM24 board..........................................................8-162
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 8-80 Valid slots for the LEM24 board...................................................................................................8-162

Table 8-81 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM.................................8-163
Table 8-82 Definition of NM port of the LEM24 board..................................................................................8-164
Table 8-83 LEM24 Parameters.........................................................................................................................8-166
Table 8-85 Specifications of 10GE optical modules on the client side............................................................8-169
Table 8-88 Functions and features of the LEX4 board....................................................................................8-174
Table 8-89 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEX4 board.............................................................8-181
Table 8-90 Valid slots for the LEX4 board......................................................................................................8-181
Table 8-91 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LEX4 board displayed on the NM...................................8-182
Table 8-92 Meaning of NM port of the LEX4 board.......................................................................................8-183
Table 8-93 LEX4 Parameters...........................................................................................................................8-185
Table 8-94 Specifications of 10GE optical modules on the client side............................................................8-186
Table 8-97 Version description of the LOG board...........................................................................................8-191
Table 8-98 Substitution rules of the LOG board..............................................................................................8-191
Table 8-99 Functions and features of the LOG board......................................................................................8-192
Table 8-100 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOG board............................................................8-201
Table 8-101 Valid slots for TN11LOG board..................................................................................................8-201
Table 8-102 Valid slots for TN12LOG board..................................................................................................8-201
Table 8-103 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOG board displayed on the NM...................................8-202
Table 8-104 Meaning of NM port of the LOG board.......................................................................................8-203
Table 8-105 LOG Parameters...........................................................................................................................8-204
Table 8-106 Specifications of GE optical modules on the client side..............................................................8-207
Table 8-107 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical modules on the client side.............................................8-208
Table 8-108 Specifications of fixed optical modules on the DWDM side.......................................................8-209
Table 8-109 Specifications of tunable optical modules on the DWDM side...................................................8-210
Table 8-110 Specifications of optical modules on the DWDM side................................................................8-212
Table 8-113 Version description of the LOM board........................................................................................8-217
Table 8-114 Substitution rules for the LOM board..........................................................................................8-217
Table 8-115 Functions and features of the LOM board...................................................................................8-219
Table 8-116 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOM board............................................................8-229
Table 8-117 Valid slots for the TN11LOM board............................................................................................8-230
Table 8-118 Valid slots for TN12LOM board..................................................................................................8-230
Table 8-119 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOM board displayed on the NM..................................8-231
Table 8-120 LOM Parameters..........................................................................................................................8-232
lxviii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 8-122 Specifications of FC optical modules on the client side..............................................................8-237

Table 8-128 Functions and features of the LQG board....................................................................................8-246
Table 8-129 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQG board............................................................8-252
Table 8-130 Valid slots for the LQG board......................................................................................................8-252
Table 8-131 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQG board displayed on the NM...................................8-253
Table 8-132 Meaning of NM port of the LQG board.......................................................................................8-254
Table 8-133 LQG Parameters...........................................................................................................................8-255
Table 8-137 Specifications of 5G eSFP CWDM optical modules on the CWDM side...................................8-261
Table 8-138 LQM type description..................................................................................................................8-264
Table 8-139 Functions and features of the LQM.............................................................................................8-265
Table 8-140 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces.................................................................................8-275
Table 8-141 Valid slots for the LQM board.....................................................................................................8-275
Table 8-142 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQM displayed on the NM............................................8-276
Table 8-143 Meaning of NM port of the LQM................................................................................................8-277
Table 8-144 LQM Parameters..........................................................................................................................8-279
Table 8-145 Specifications of SDH optical modules on the client side...........................................................8-283
Table 8-148 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical modules on the client side.............................................8-287
Table 8-149 Version description of the LQMD board.....................................................................................8-291
Table 8-150 Substitution rules of the LQMD board.........................................................................................8-291
Table 8-151 Functions and features of the LQMD board................................................................................8-292
Table 8-152 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMD board.........................................................8-303
Table 8-153 Valid slots for TN11LQMD board...............................................................................................8-303
Table 8-154 Valid slots for TN12LQMD board...............................................................................................8-303
Table 8-155 Characteristic code for the LQMD board.....................................................................................8-304
Table 8-156 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMD board displayed on the NM...............................8-304
Table 8-157 Meaning of NM port of the LQMD board...................................................................................8-305
Table 8-158 LQMD parameters.......................................................................................................................8-308
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables

Table 8-165 Specifications of optical modules on the CWDM side................................................................8-319
Table 8-166 Version description of the LQMS board......................................................................................8-321
Table 8-167 Substitution rules of the LQMS board.........................................................................................8-321
Table 8-168 Functions and features of the LQMS board.................................................................................8-323
Table 8-169 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMS board..........................................................8-335
Table 8-170 Valid slots for TN11LQMS board...............................................................................................8-335
Table 8-171 Valid slots for TN12LQMS board...............................................................................................8-335
Table 8-172 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMS board displayed on the NM................................8-336
Table 8-173 Meaning of NM port of the LQMS board....................................................................................8-337
Table 8-174 LQMS parameters........................................................................................................................8-341
Table 8-182 Functions and features of the LSQ board.....................................................................................8-355
Table 8-183 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSQ board.............................................................8-361
Table 8-184 Valid slots for the LSQ board......................................................................................................8-361
Table 8-185 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSQ board displayed on the NM...................................8-362
Table 8-186 LSQ parameters............................................................................................................................8-363
Table 8-187 Specifications of optical modules on the client side....................................................................8-366
Table 8-189 Version description of the LSX board.........................................................................................8-369
Table 8-190 Substitution rules of the LSX board.............................................................................................8-370
Table 8-191 Functions and features of the LSX board.....................................................................................8-371
Table 8-192 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSX board.............................................................8-380
Table 8-193 Valid slots for the TN11LSX board.............................................................................................8-380
Table 8-196 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSX board displayed on the NM...................................8-381
Table 8-197 LSX parameters............................................................................................................................8-382
Table 8-199 Specifications of optical modules on the Client side...................................................................8-386
Table 8-204 Version description of the LSXL board.......................................................................................8-393
Table 8-205 Functions and features of the LSXL board..................................................................................8-394
lxx

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 8-206 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXL board...........................................................8-404
Table 8-207 Valid slots for the TN11LSXL board...........................................................................................8-404
Table 8-208 Valid slots for the TN12LSXL board...........................................................................................8-404
Table 8-209 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXL board displayed on the NM.................................8-405
Table 8-210 LSXL parameters.........................................................................................................................8-406
Table 8-214 Version description of the LSXLR board....................................................................................8-413
Table 8-215 Functions and features of the LSXLR board................................................................................8-414
Table 8-216 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXLR board........................................................8-421
Table 8-217 Valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board........................................................................................8-421
Table 8-218 Valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board........................................................................................8-421
Table 8-219 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXLR board displayed on the NM..............................8-422
Table 8-220 LSXLR parameters.......................................................................................................................8-422
Table 8-223 Functions and features of the LSXR board..................................................................................8-429
Table 8-224 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXR board..........................................................8-435
Table 8-225 Valid slots for LSXR board..........................................................................................................8-435
Table 8-226 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXR board displayed on the NM.................................8-436
Table 8-227 LSXR parameters.........................................................................................................................8-436
Table 8-230 Functions and features of the LWX2 board.................................................................................8-443
Table 8-231 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWX2 board..........................................................8-450
Table 8-232 Valid slots for the LWX2 board...................................................................................................8-450
Table 8-233 Characteristic code for the LWX2 board.....................................................................................8-451
Table 8-234 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWX2 board displayed on the NM................................8-451
Table 8-235 LWX2 parameters........................................................................................................................8-452
Table 8-241 Functions and features of the LWXD board................................................................................8-461
Table 8-242 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXD board.........................................................8-469
Table 8-243 Valid slots for the LWXD board..................................................................................................8-469
Table 8-244 Characteristic code for the LWXD board....................................................................................8-469
Table 8-245 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXD board displayed on the NM...............................8-470
Table 8-246 LWXD parameters.......................................................................................................................8-470
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxxi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 8-252 Version description of the LWXS board......................................................................................8-480
Table 8-253 Functions and features of the LWXS board.................................................................................8-480
Table 8-254 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXS board.........................................................8-488
Table 8-255 Valid slots for theTN11LWXS board..........................................................................................8-488
Table 8-256 Valid slots for theTN12LWXS board..........................................................................................8-488
Table 8-257 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXS board displayed on the NM................................8-489
Table 8-258 LWXS parameters........................................................................................................................8-489
Table 8-264 Version description of the TMX board........................................................................................8-499
Table 8-265 Substitution rules of the TMX board...........................................................................................8-500
Table 8-266 Functions and features of the TMX board...................................................................................8-501
Table 8-267 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TMX board............................................................8-507
Table 8-268 Valid slots for TN11TMX board..................................................................................................8-507
Table 8-269 Valid slots for TN12TMX board..................................................................................................8-508
Table 8-270 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TMX board displayed on the NM..................................8-508
Table 8-271 TMX parameters..........................................................................................................................8-509
Table 9-1 Version description of the ND2 board.................................................................................................9-3
Table 9-2 Substitution rules of the ND2 board.....................................................................................................9-4
Table 9-3 Functions and features of the ND2 board............................................................................................9-7
Table 9-4 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Relay Mode)...................................................................9-11
Table 9-5 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ND2 board...................................................................9-22
Table 9-6 Valid slots for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board.................................................................................9-22
Table 9-7 Valid slots for the TN52ND2 board...................................................................................................9-22
Table 9-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ND2 board displayed on the NM.........................................9-23
Table 9-9 Definition of NM ports on the ND2...................................................................................................9-25
Table 9-10 ND2 parameters...............................................................................................................................9-29
lxxii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 9-11 Specifications of fixed optical modules on the DWDM side...........................................................9-32

Table 9-12 Specifications of tunable optical modules on the DWDM side.......................................................9-33
Table 9-15 Version description of the NQ2 board.............................................................................................9-38
Table 9-16 Substitution rules of the NQ2 board.................................................................................................9-39
Table 9-17 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Line Mode)...................................................................9-42
Table 9-18 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Relay Mode).................................................................9-45
Table 9-19 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NQ2 board.................................................................9-56
Table 9-20 Valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board.................................................................................................9-56
Table 9-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NQ2 board displayed on the NM.......................................9-57
Table 9-24 Meaning of NM port of the NQ2 board...........................................................................................9-59
Table 9-25 NQ2 parameters...............................................................................................................................9-63
Table 9-28 Version description of the NS2 board..............................................................................................9-70
Table 9-29 Functions and features of the NS2 board.........................................................................................9-72
Table 9-30 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS2 board..................................................................9-85
Table 9-31 Valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board................................................................................9-85
Table 9-32 Valid slots for the TN52NS2 board.................................................................................................9-85
Table 9-33 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NS2 board displayed on the NM........................................9-86
Table 9-34 Meaning of NM port of the NS2 board............................................................................................9-88
Table 9-35 NS2 parameters................................................................................................................................9-92
Table 9-41 Specifications of tunable optical modules on the DWDM side.....................................................9-100
Table 9-42 Specifications of tunable optical modules on the DWDM side.....................................................9-101
Table 9-43 Version description of the NS3 board............................................................................................9-104
Table 9-44 Substitution rules of the NS3 board...............................................................................................9-105
Table 9-45 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Line Mode)..................................................................9-108
Table 9-46 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Relay Mode)................................................................9-112
Table 9-47 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS3 board................................................................9-123
Table 9-48 Valid slots for the TN11NS3 board...............................................................................................9-123
Table 9-51 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NS3 board displayed on the NM......................................9-124
Table 9-52 Meaning of NM port of the NS3 board..........................................................................................9-127
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxxiii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 9-53 NS3 parameters..............................................................................................................................9-132

Table 9-56 Functions and features of the TBE board.......................................................................................9-141
Table 9-57 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TBE board...............................................................9-149
Table 9-58 Valid slots for the TBE board........................................................................................................9-149
Table 9-59 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TBE board displayed on the NM.....................................9-150
Table 9-60 Meaning of NM port of the TBE board.........................................................................................9-151
Table 9-61 TBE parameters..............................................................................................................................9-152
Table 9-62 Specifications of optical modules on the client side (FE)..............................................................9-153
Table 9-65 Specifications of XFP optical modules on the client side..............................................................9-156
Table 9-66 Functions and features of the TDG board......................................................................................9-159
Table 9-67 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDG board..............................................................9-164
Table 9-68 Valid slots for the TDG board........................................................................................................9-164
Table 9-69 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDG board displayed on the NM.....................................9-165
Table 9-70 Meaning of NM port of the TDG board.........................................................................................9-165
Table 9-71 TDG parameters.............................................................................................................................9-167
Table 9-74 Version description of the TDX board...........................................................................................9-172
Table 9-75 Functions and features of the TDX board......................................................................................9-173
Table 9-76 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDX board..............................................................9-182
Table 9-77 Valid slots for the TN11TDX board..............................................................................................9-182
Table 9-80 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDX board displayed on the NM.....................................9-183
Table 9-81 Meaning of NM port of the TDX board.........................................................................................9-184
Table 9-82 TDX parameters.............................................................................................................................9-186
Table 9-83 Specifications of XFP optical modules on the client side..............................................................9-189
Table 9-84 Functions and features of the TOG board......................................................................................9-192
Table 9-85 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOG board..............................................................9-199
Table 9-86 Valid slots for TOG board..............................................................................................................9-199
Table 9-87 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TOG board displayed on the NM.....................................9-200
Table 9-88 Meaning of NM port of the TOG board.........................................................................................9-201
Table 9-89 TOG parameters.............................................................................................................................9-202
Table 9-92 Version description of the TOM board..........................................................................................9-208
Table 9-93 Functions and features of the TOM board.....................................................................................9-223
Table 9-94 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOM board..............................................................9-258
lxxiv

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 9-95 Valid slots for the TN11TOM board..............................................................................................9-258

Table 9-96 Valid slots for the TN52TOM board..............................................................................................9-258
Table 9-97 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TOM displayed on the NM..............................................9-259
Table 9-98 Meaning of NM port of the TOM board (Cascading mode)..........................................................9-269
Table 9-99 Meaning of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode)...................................................9-270
Table 9-100 TOM parameters.......................................................................................................................... 9-283
Table 9-105 Specifications of SDI optical Modules on the client side............................................................9-293
Table 9-106 Specifications of SDH optical modules on the DWDM side.......................................................9-295
Table 9-107 Version description of the TQM board........................................................................................9-298
Table 9-108 Substitution rules of the TQM board........................................................................................... 9-298
Table 9-109 Functions and features of the TQM board................................................................................... 9-299
Table 9-110 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQM board............................................................9-307
Table 9-111 Valid slots for the TQM board.....................................................................................................9-307
Table 9-112 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQM board displayed on the NM..................................9-308
Table 9-113 Meaning of NM port of the TQM board......................................................................................9-309
Table 9-114 TQM parameters.......................................................................................................................... 9-312
Table 9-119 Functions and features of the TQS board.....................................................................................9-322
Table 9-120 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQS board.............................................................9-327
Table 9-121 Valid slots for the TQS board...................................................................................................... 9-327
Table 9-122 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQS board displayed on the NM................................... 9-328
Table 9-123 Meaning of NM port of the TQS board....................................................................................... 9-328
Table 9-124 TQS parameters............................................................................................................................9-329
Table 9-128 Version description of the TQX board.........................................................................................9-335
Table 9-129 Functions and features of the TQX board....................................................................................9-337
Table 9-130 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQX board............................................................ 9-342
Table 9-131 Valid slots for the TN11TQX board............................................................................................ 9-342
Table 9-132 Valid slots for the TN52TQX board............................................................................................ 9-342
Table 9-133 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQX board displayed on the NM...................................9-343
Table 9-134 Meaning of NM port of the TQX board.......................................................................................9-344
Table 9-135 TQX parameters...........................................................................................................................9-345
Table 9-136 Specifications of XFP optical modules on the client side............................................................9-347
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxxv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 9-137 Version description of the TSXL board.......................................................................................9-350

Table 9-138 Functions and features of the TSXL board..................................................................................9-352
Table 9-139 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSXL board...........................................................9-359
Table 9-140 Valid slots for the TN11TSXL board...........................................................................................9-359
Table 9-141 Valid slots for the TN53TSXL board...........................................................................................9-359
Table 9-142 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TSXL board displayed on the NM.................................9-360
Table 9-143 Meaning of NM port of the TSXL board.....................................................................................9-361
Table 9-144 TSXL parameters.........................................................................................................................9-362
Table 10-1 Functions and features of the BMD4...............................................................................................10-4
Table 10-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD4........................................................................10-8
Table 10-3 Valid slots for the BMD4 board.......................................................................................................10-8
Table 10-4 Characteristic code of the BMD4.....................................................................................................10-9
Table 10-5 Optical interfaces on the BMD4 and relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths
...........................................................................................................................................................................10-10
Table 10-6 BMD4 parameters..........................................................................................................................10-11
Table 10-7 Optical specifications of the BMD4...............................................................................................10-12
Table 10-8 Functions and features of the BMD8.............................................................................................10-15
Table 10-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD8......................................................................10-19
Table 10-10 Valid slots for the BMD8 board...................................................................................................10-20
Table 10-11 Characteristic code of the BMD8.................................................................................................10-20
Table 10-12 Optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the frequencies and wavelengths
...........................................................................................................................................................................10-21
Table 10-13 BMD8 parameters........................................................................................................................10-23
Table 10-14 Optical specifications of the BMD8.............................................................................................10-24
Table 10-15 Functions and features of the ELQX............................................................................................10-28
Table 10-16 Types and functions of the ELQX interfaces...............................................................................10-34
Table 10-17 Valid slots for the ELQX board...................................................................................................10-34
Table 10-18 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ELQX displayed on the NM..........................................10-35
Table 10-19 Meaning of NM ports of the ELQX.............................................................................................10-36
Table 10-20 ELQX parameters.........................................................................................................................10-40
Table 10-21 Specifications of XFP optical modules on the client side............................................................10-43
Table 10-22 Specifications of the DWDM optical module on the client side..................................................10-44
Table 10-23 Functions and features of the ENQ2............................................................................................10-48
Table 10-24 Valid slots for the ENQ2 board....................................................................................................10-55
Table 10-25 Meaning of NM ports of the ENQ2.............................................................................................10-56
Table 10-26 ENQ2 parameters.........................................................................................................................10-60
Table 10-27 Version description of the NPO2 board.......................................................................................10-63
Table 10-28 Substitution rules of the LSX board.............................................................................................10-63
Table 10-29 Wavelength allocation table of a PID(NPO2+ENQ2).................................................................10-63
Table 10-30 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system........................10-64
Table 10-31 Functions and features of the NPO2............................................................................................10-69
Table 10-32 Types and functions of the NPO2 interfaces................................................................................10-77
lxxvi

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 10-33 Valid slots for the NPO2 board....................................................................................................10-77

Table 10-34 Characteristic code for the NPO2................................................................................................10-78
Table 10-35 Serial numbers of the interfaces on the NPO2 displayed on the NM..........................................10-78
Table 10-36 Meaning of ports on the NPO2....................................................................................................10-81
Table 10-37 NPO2 parameters.........................................................................................................................10-85
Table 10-38 Specifications of the PID optical module on the DWDM side....................................................10-88
Table 10-39 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (ELQX+PTQX)...............................................................10-90
Table 10-40 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system........................10-90
Table 10-41 Functions and features of the PTQX............................................................................................10-93
Table 10-42 Types and functions of the PTQX interfaces.............................................................................10-101
Table 10-43 Valid slots for the PTQX board.................................................................................................10-101
Table 10-44 Characteristic code for the PTQX..............................................................................................10-102
Table 10-45 Serial numbers of the interfaces on the PTQX displayed on the NM........................................10-102
Table 10-46 Meaning of ports on the PTQX..................................................................................................10-104
Table 10-47 PTQX parameters.......................................................................................................................10-108
Table 10-48 Specifications of XFP optical modules on the client side..........................................................10-111
Table 10-49 Specifications of the DWDM optical module on the client side................................................10-112
Table 10-50 Specifications of the PID optical module on the DWDM side..................................................10-113
Table 11-1 Type description of the M40 board..................................................................................................11-3
Table 11-2 Functions and features of the M40 board.........................................................................................11-3
Table 11-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40 board.................................................................11-7
Table 11-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the TN11M4001 board
(C_EVEN)...........................................................................................................................................................11-7
Table 11-5 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the TN11M4002 board
(C_ODD).............................................................................................................................................................11-8
Table 11-6 Valid slots for the M40 board..........................................................................................................11-9
Table 11-7 Characteristic code for the M40 board.............................................................................................11-9
Table 11-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 board displayed on the NM.....................................11-10
Table 11-9 M40 parameters..............................................................................................................................11-10
Table 11-10 Optical specifications of the M40 board......................................................................................11-11
Table 11-11 Type description of the M40V board...........................................................................................11-13
Table 11-12 Functions and features of the M40V board..................................................................................11-13
Table 11-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40V board..........................................................11-17
Table 11-14 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V board (even)
...........................................................................................................................................................................11-17
Table 11-15 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V board (odd)
...........................................................................................................................................................................11-18
Table 11-16 Valid slots for the M40V board...................................................................................................11-19
Table 11-17 Characteristic code for the M40V board......................................................................................11-19
Table 11-18 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V board displayed on the NM.................................11-20
Table 11-19 M40V parameters.........................................................................................................................11-20
Table 11-20 Optical specifications of the M40V board...................................................................................11-22
Table 11-21 Type description of the D40.........................................................................................................11-23
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxxvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 11-22 Functions and features of the D40...............................................................................................11-24

Table 11-23 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces...................................................................................11-27
Table 11-24 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D4001 board
(C_EVEN).........................................................................................................................................................11-27
Table 11-25 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D4002 board
(C_ODD)...........................................................................................................................................................11-28
Table 11-26 Valid slots for the D40 board.......................................................................................................11-29
Table 11-27 Characteristic code for the D40....................................................................................................11-30
Table 11-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM..............................................11-30
Table 11-29 D40 parameters............................................................................................................................11-31
Table 11-30 Optical specifications of the D40.................................................................................................11-31
Table 11-31 Type description of the D40V board............................................................................................11-33
Table 11-32 Functions and features of the D40V board..................................................................................11-34
Table 11-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the D40V board...........................................................11-37
Table 11-34 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V01 board
(C_EVEN).........................................................................................................................................................11-37
Table 11-35 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the TN11D40V02 board
(C_ODD)...........................................................................................................................................................11-38
Table 11-36 Valid slots for the D40V board....................................................................................................11-39
Table 11-37 Characteristic code for the D40V board.......................................................................................11-40
Table 11-38 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40V board displayed on the NM.................................11-40
Table 11-39 D40V parameters.........................................................................................................................11-41
Table 11-40 Optical specifications of the D40V board....................................................................................11-42
Table 11-41 Functions and features of the DFIU board...................................................................................11-45
Table 11-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DFIU board...........................................................11-47
Table 11-43 Valid slots for DFIU board..........................................................................................................11-48
Table 11-44 Characteristic code for the DFIU board.......................................................................................11-48
Table 11-45 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DFIU board displayed on the NM..................................11-49
Table 11-46 DFIU parameters..........................................................................................................................11-49
Table 11-47 Optical specifications of the DFIU board....................................................................................11-50
Table 11-48 Version description of the FIU board...........................................................................................11-52
Table 11-49 Substitution rules of the FIU board..............................................................................................11-52
Table 11-50 Type description of the FIU board...............................................................................................11-53
Table 11-51 Functions and features of the FIU................................................................................................11-54
Table 11-52 Types and functions of the interfaces on the FIU board..............................................................11-61
Table 11-53 Valid slots for the TN11FIU board..............................................................................................11-62
Table 11-57 Characteristic code for the FIU board..........................................................................................11-63
Table 11-58 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU board displayed on the NM.....................................11-64
Table 11-59 FIU parameters.............................................................................................................................11-64
Table 11-60 Optical specifications of the FIU board.......................................................................................11-66
lxxviii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 11-61 Version description of the ITL board...........................................................................................11-68

Table 11-62 Substitution rules of the ITL board..............................................................................................11-69
Table 11-63 Type description of the ITL.........................................................................................................11-69
Table 11-64 Functions and features of the ITL board......................................................................................11-70
Table 11-65 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ITL board..............................................................11-75
Table 11-66 Valid slots for the ITL board........................................................................................................11-75
Table 11-67 Characteristic code for the ITL board..........................................................................................11-76
Table 11-68 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL board displayed on the NM.....................................11-76
Table 11-69 ITL parameters.............................................................................................................................11-77
Table 11-70 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01....................................................................................11-78
Table 11-71 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04....................................................................................11-78
Table 11-72 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL........................................................................................11-79
Table 11-73 Functions and features of the SFIU..............................................................................................11-81
Table 11-74 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SFIU board............................................................11-85
Table 11-75 Valid slots for the SFIU board.....................................................................................................11-85
Table 11-76 Characteristic code for the SFIU board........................................................................................11-86
Table 11-77 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFIU board displayed on the NM..................................11-86
Table 11-78 SFIU parameters...........................................................................................................................11-87
Table 11-79 Optical specifications of the SFIU board.....................................................................................11-88
Table 12-1 Functions and features of the CMR1...............................................................................................12-3
Table 12-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR1 board..............................................................12-5
Table 12-3 Valid slots for CMR1 board.............................................................................................................12-6
Table 12-4 Characteristic code for the CMR1....................................................................................................12-6
Table 12-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR1 displayed on the NM..............................................12-7
Table 12-6 CMR1 parameters............................................................................................................................12-7
Table 12-7 Optical specifications of the CMR1 board.......................................................................................12-8
Table 12-8 Version description of the CMR2 board..........................................................................................12-9
Table 12-9 Functions and features of the CMR2 board...................................................................................12-10
Table 12-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR2 board..........................................................12-14
Table 12-11 Slots for the TN11CMR2.............................................................................................................12-15
Table 12-13 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board......................................................................................12-16
Table 12-14 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 board displayed on the NM................................12-16
Table 12-15 CMR2 parameters........................................................................................................................12-17
Table 12-16 Optical specifications of the CMR2 board...................................................................................12-17
Table 12-17 Version description of the CMR4 board......................................................................................12-19
Table 12-18 Functions and features of the CMR4 board.................................................................................12-20
Table 12-19 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR4 board..........................................................12-24
Table 12-22 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board......................................................................................12-26
Table 12-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 board displayed on the NM................................12-26
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxxix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 12-24 CMR4 parameters........................................................................................................................12-27

Table 12-25 Optical specifications of the CMR4 board...................................................................................12-28
Table 12-26 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths on the CMR4 board......................................................12-28
Table 12-27 Version description of the DMR1 board......................................................................................12-30
Table 12-28 Functions and features of the DMR1 board.................................................................................12-31
Table 12-29 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DMR1 board..........................................................12-34
Table 12-30 Slots for the TN11DMR1.............................................................................................................12-35
Table 12-31 Slots for the TN21DMR1.............................................................................................................12-35
Table 12-32 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board..................................................................................... 12-36
Table 12-33 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board.................................12-36
Table 12-34 DMR1 parameters........................................................................................................................12-36
Table 12-35 Optical specifications of the DMR1 board...................................................................................12-37
Table 12-36 Version description of the MR2 board.........................................................................................12-39
Table 12-37 Functions and features of the MR2 board....................................................................................12-40
Table 12-38 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR2 board............................................................ 12-43
Table 12-39 Valid slots for the TN11MR2 board............................................................................................ 12-44
Table 12-41 Characteristic code for the MR2 board........................................................................................12-45
Table 12-42 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 board displayed on the NM...................................12-45
Table 12-43 MR2 parameters...........................................................................................................................12-46
Table 12-44 Optical specifications of the MR2 board..................................................................................... 12-46
Table 12-45 Version description of the MR4 board.........................................................................................12-48
Table 12-54 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths of the MR4 board.........................................................12-56
Table 12-57 Valid slots for the MR8 board......................................................................................................12-62
Table 12-62 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8.....................................................................12-66
Table 12-63 Functions and features of the MR8V board.................................................................................12-69
Table 12-64 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8V board..........................................................12-73
Table 12-65 Valid slots for the MR8V board...................................................................................................12-73
lxxx

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 12-66 Characteristic code for the MR8V board..................................................................................... 12-74

Table 12-67 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8V board displayed on the NM................................12-75
Table 12-68 MR8V parameters........................................................................................................................12-75
Table 12-69 Optical specifications of the MR8V board...................................................................................12-77
Table 12-70 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8V..................................................................12-77
Table 12-71 Functions and features of the SBM2 board..................................................................................12-80
Table 12-72 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SBM2 board..........................................................12-84
Table 12-73 Valid slots for the SBM2 board...................................................................................................12-84
Table 12-74 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 board displayed on the NM.................................12-85
Table 12-75 SBM2 parameters.........................................................................................................................12-85
Table 12-76 Optical specifications of the SBM2 board...................................................................................12-86
Table 13-1 Functions and features of the RDU9 board......................................................................................13-3
Table 13-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RDU9 board..............................................................13-7
Table 13-3 Valid slots for the RDU9 board.......................................................................................................13-7
Table 13-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RDU9 board displayed on the NM.....................................13-8
Table 13-5 RDU9 parameters.............................................................................................................................13-8
Table 13-6 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board.......................................................................................13-9
Table 13-7 Type description of the RMU9 board............................................................................................13-11
Table 13-8 Functions and features of the RMU9 board...................................................................................13-12
Table 13-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RMU9 board............................................................13-16
Table 13-10 Valid slots for the RMU9 board...................................................................................................13-16
Table 13-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 board displayed on the NM................................13-17
Table 13-12 RMU9 parameters........................................................................................................................13-17
Table 13-13 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board...................................................................................13-19
Table 13-14 Type description of the ROAM board.........................................................................................13-21
Table 13-15 Functions and features of the ROAM board................................................................................13-22
Table 13-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ROAM board.........................................................13-25
Table 13-17 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (even)
...........................................................................................................................................................................13-25
Table 13-18 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM board (odd)
...........................................................................................................................................................................13-26
Table 13-19 Valid slots for the ROAM board..................................................................................................13-27
Table 13-20 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM board displayed on the NM...............................13-28
Table 13-21 ROAM parameters.......................................................................................................................13-28
Table 13-22 Optical specifications of the ROAM board..................................................................................13-29
Table 13-23 Version description of the WSD9 board......................................................................................13-31
Table 13-24 Substitution rules of the WSD9 board.........................................................................................13-32
Table 13-25 Functions and features of the WSD9 board.................................................................................13-33
Table 13-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSD9 board..........................................................13-37
Table 13-27 Valid slots for the TN11WSD9 board..........................................................................................13-37
Table 13-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM................................13-39
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxxxi
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 13-31 WSD9 parameters........................................................................................................................13-39

Table 13-32 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board...................................................................................13-40
Table 13-33 Version description of the WSM9 board.....................................................................................13-43
Table 13-34 Substitution rules of the WSM9 board.........................................................................................13-43
Table 13-35 Functions and features of the WSM9 board.................................................................................13-45
Table 13-36 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSM9 board.........................................................13-49
Table 13-37 Valid slots for the TN11WSM9 board.........................................................................................13-49
Table 13-40 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM...............................13-51
Table 13-41 WSM9 parameters........................................................................................................................13-51
Table 13-42 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board..................................................................................13-52
Table 13-43 Functions and features of the WSMD2 board..............................................................................13-55
Table 13-44 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD2 board......................................................13-59
Table 13-45 Valid slots for the WSMD2 board...............................................................................................13-60
Table 13-46 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM.............................13-60
Table 13-47 WSMD2 parameters.....................................................................................................................13-61
Table 13-48 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD2 board......................................................................13-62
Table 13-49 Version description of the WDMD4 board..................................................................................13-64
Table 13-50 Version description of the WSMD4 board...................................................................................13-65
Table 13-53 Valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board......................................................................................13-70
Table 13-54 Valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board......................................................................................13-71
Table 13-61 Valid slots for the WSMD9 board...............................................................................................13-82
Table 14-1 Type description of the CRPC board...............................................................................................14-3
Table 14-2 Functions and features of the CRPC board......................................................................................14-4
Table 14-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CRPC board..............................................................14-8
Table 14-4 Valid slots for the CRPC board........................................................................................................14-9
Table 14-5 Characteristic code for the CRPC board........................................................................................14-11
Table 14-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC board displayed on the NM...................................14-11
Table 14-7 CRPC parameters...........................................................................................................................14-11
Table 14-8 Optical specifications of the CRPC board.....................................................................................14-13
lxxxii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 14-9 Functions and features of the DAS1 board....................................................................................14-16

Table 14-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DAS1 board...........................................................14-21
Table 14-11 Valid slots for the DAS1 board....................................................................................................14-22
Table 14-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DAS1 board displayed on the NM.................................14-22
Table 14-13 DAS1 parameters.........................................................................................................................14-23
Table 14-14 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board..........................................................................14-26
Table 14-15 Functions and features of the HBA board....................................................................................14-29
Table 14-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HBA board............................................................14-33
Table 14-17 Valid slots for the HBA board.....................................................................................................14-33
Table 14-18 Characteristic code for the HBA board........................................................................................14-34
Table 14-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA board displayed on the NM...................................14-34
Table 14-20 HBA parameters...........................................................................................................................14-35
Table 14-21 Optical specifications of the HBA board.....................................................................................14-37
Table 14-22 Version description of the OAU1................................................................................................14-39
Table 14-23 Substitution rules of the OAU1 board..........................................................................................14-39
Table 14-24 Type description of the OAU1 board...........................................................................................14-39
Table 14-25 Functions and features of the OAU1 board..................................................................................14-40
Table 14-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OAU1 board..........................................................14-47
Table 14-27 Valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board..........................................................................................14-48
Table 14-28 Valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board..........................................................................................14-48
Table 14-29 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board......................................................................................14-49
Table 14-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OAU1 board displayed on the NM.......................14-49
Table 14-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OAU1 board displayed on the NM.......................14-50
Table 14-32 OAU1 parameters.........................................................................................................................14-50
Table 14-33 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board......................................................................14-53
Table 14-34 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101 board.............................................14-54
Table 14-38 Version description of the OBU1 board.......................................................................................14-60
Table 14-39 Substitution rules of the OBU1 board..........................................................................................14-61
Table 14-40 Type description of the OBU1 board...........................................................................................14-61
Table 14-41 Functions and features of the OBU1 board..................................................................................14-62
Table 14-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU1 board..........................................................14-68
Table 14-43 Valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board..........................................................................................14-68
Table 14-45 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board......................................................................................14-69
Table 14-46 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU1 board displayed on the NM.......................14-69
Table 14-48 OBU1 parameters.........................................................................................................................14-70
Table 14-49 Optical specifications of the OBU1 board...................................................................................14-73
Table 14-50 Version description of the OBU2 board.......................................................................................14-76
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxxxiii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 14-51 Substitution rules of the OBU2 board..........................................................................................14-76

Table 14-52 Functions and features of the OBU2 board..................................................................................14-77
Table 14-53 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU2 board..........................................................14-83
Table 14-56 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board......................................................................................14-84
Table 14-59 OBU2 parameters.........................................................................................................................14-86
Table 14-60 Optical specifications of the OBU2 board...................................................................................14-88
Table 15-1 Functions and features of the SXM board........................................................................................15-3
Table 15-2 Valid slots for the SXM board.........................................................................................................15-6
Table 15-3 Functions and features of the XCH board........................................................................................15-7
Table 15-4 Valid slots for the XCH board.......................................................................................................15-11
Table 15-5 Functions and features of the TN16XCH board............................................................................15-13
Table 15-6 Valid slots for the TN16XCH board..............................................................................................15-17
Table 15-7 Functions and features of the XCM...............................................................................................15-19
Table 15-8 Valid slots for the XCM board.......................................................................................................15-23
Table 15-9 Version description of the XCS board...........................................................................................15-24
Table 15-10 Substitution rules of the XCS board.............................................................................................15-24
Table 15-11 Functions and features of the XCS board....................................................................................15-25
Table 15-12 Valid slots for the XCS board......................................................................................................15-28
Table 15-13 Functions and features of the XCT board....................................................................................15-30
Table 15-14 Valid slots for the XCT board......................................................................................................15-33
Table 15-15 Version description of the SCC board.........................................................................................15-34
Table 15-16 Substitution rules of the SCC board.............................................................................................15-35
Table 15-17 Functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board....................15-36
Table 15-18 Functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board.........................................................15-37
Table 15-19 Functions of the buttons on the SCC board.................................................................................15-42
Table 15-20 Function of the LED indicator on the SCC board........................................................................15-43
Table 15-21 Valid slots for the TN11SCC board.............................................................................................15-44
Table 15-22 Valid slots for the TN51SCC/TN52SCC board...........................................................................15-44
Table 15-23 Valid slots for the TNK2SCC board............................................................................................15-44
Table 15-24 Valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board...........................................................................15-44
Table 15-25 Version description of the AUX board........................................................................................15-50
Table 15-26 Substitution rules of the AUX board............................................................................................15-51
Table 15-27 Type description of the AUX.......................................................................................................15-52
Table 15-28 Functions and features of the TN51AUX board..........................................................................15-52
Table 15-31 Functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board................................................................15-53
Table 15-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11AUX board...................................................15-59
lxxxiv

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 15-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN21/TN22AUX board........................................15-59
Table 15-34 Functions of the buttons on the TN16AUX board.......................................................................15-60
Table 15-35 Function of the LED indicator on the TN16AUX board.............................................................15-60
Table 15-36 Valid slots for the TN51AUX board............................................................................................15-61
Table 15-39 Valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board.........................................................................15-62
Table 16-1 Functions and features of the HSC1 board......................................................................................16-3
Table 16-2 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC....................................................................16-5
Table 16-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HSC1 board...............................................................16-8
Table 16-4 Valid slots for the HSC1 board........................................................................................................16-8
Table 16-5 Characteristic code for the HSC1 board...........................................................................................16-8
Table 16-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HSC1 board displayed on the NM.....................................16-9
Table 16-7 HSC1 parameters.............................................................................................................................16-9
Table 16-8 Optical specifications of the HSC1 board......................................................................................16-10
Table 16-9 Version description of the SC1 board............................................................................................16-12
Table 16-10 Substitution rules of the SC1 board.............................................................................................16-12
Table 16-11 Functions and features of the SC1 board.....................................................................................16-13
Table 16-12 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC................................................................16-15
Table 16-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC1 board..............................................................16-18
Table 16-14 Valid slots for the TN11SC1 board..............................................................................................16-18
Table 16-16 Characteristic code for the SC1 board..........................................................................................16-19
Table 16-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 board displayed on the NM....................................16-19
Table 16-18 SC1 parameters............................................................................................................................16-20
Table 16-19 Optical specifications of the SC1 board.......................................................................................16-20
Table 16-20 Version description of the SC2 board..........................................................................................16-22
Table 16-21 Substitution rules of the SC2 board.............................................................................................16-22
Table 16-22 Functions and features of the SC2 board.....................................................................................16-23
Table 16-23 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC................................................................16-25
Table 16-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC2 board..............................................................16-28
Table 16-27 Characteristic code for the SC2 board..........................................................................................16-29
Table 16-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 board displayed on the NM....................................16-29
Table 16-29 SC2 parameters............................................................................................................................16-30
Table 16-30 Optical specifications of the SC2 board.......................................................................................16-30
Table 16-31 Functions and features of the ST2 board......................................................................................16-33
Table 16-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ST2 board..............................................................16-37
Table 16-33 Valid slots for the ST2 board.......................................................................................................16-37
Table 16-34 Characteristic code for the ST2 board..........................................................................................16-38
Table 16-35 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ST2 board displayed on the NM....................................16-38
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxxxv
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 16-36 ST2 parameters.............................................................................................................................16-39

Table 16-37 Optical specifications of the ST2 board.......................................................................................16-40
Table 17-1 Version description of the DCP board.............................................................................................17-3
Table 17-2 Substitution rules of the DCP board.................................................................................................17-3
Table 17-3 Type description of the DCP board..................................................................................................17-3
Table 17-4 Functions and features of the DCP board........................................................................................17-6
Table 17-5 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCP board...............................................................17-10
Table 17-6 Valid slots for the TN11DCP board...............................................................................................17-12
Table 17-7 Valid slots for the TN12DCP board...............................................................................................17-12
Table 17-8 Characteristic code for the DCP board...........................................................................................17-12
Table 17-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP board displayed on the NM.....................................17-13
Table 17-10 DCP parameters...........................................................................................................................17-13
Table 17-11 Optical specifications of the DCP on the OptiX OSN 8800........................................................17-14
Table 17-12 Optical specifications of the DCP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800..........17-15
Table 17-13 Version description of the OLP....................................................................................................17-17
Table 17-14 Substitution rules of the OLP board.............................................................................................17-17
Table 17-15 Type description of the TN11OLP board.....................................................................................17-18
Table 17-16 Type description of the TN12OLP board.....................................................................................17-18
Table 17-17 Functions and features of the OLP board.....................................................................................17-20
Table 17-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OLP board.............................................................17-24
Table 17-19 Valid slots for the TN11OLP board.............................................................................................17-24
Table 17-20 Valid slots for the TN12OLP board.............................................................................................17-25
Table 17-21 Characteristic code for the OLP board.........................................................................................17-25
Table 17-22 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP board displayed on the NM...................................17-26
Table 17-23 OLP parameters............................................................................................................................17-26
Table 17-24 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 8800..............................................17-27
Table 17-25 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800..........17-28
Table 17-26 Type description of the SCS board..............................................................................................17-30
Table 17-27 Functions and features of the SCS board.....................................................................................17-31
Table 17-28 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SCS board..............................................................17-34
Table 17-29 Valid slots for the TN11SCS board.............................................................................................17-35
Table 17-30 Characteristic code for the SCS board.........................................................................................17-36
Table 17-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS board displayed on the NM....................................17-36
Table 17-32 SCS parameters............................................................................................................................17-37
Table 17-33 Optical specifications of the SCS board.......................................................................................17-37
Table 18-1 Functions and features of the MCA4 board.....................................................................................18-3
Table 18-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA4 board..............................................................18-6
Table 18-3 Valid slots for the MCA4 board.......................................................................................................18-6
Table 18-4 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board.........................................................................................18-7
Table 18-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM....................................18-7
Table 18-6 MCA4 parameters............................................................................................................................18-8
Table 18-7 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board.......................................................................................18-9
lxxxvi

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 18-8 Functions and features of the MCA8.............................................................................................18-11

Table 18-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA8 board............................................................18-14
Table 18-10 Valid slots for the MCA8 board...................................................................................................18-14
Table 18-11 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board.....................................................................................18-15
Table 18-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM................................18-15
Table 18-13 MCA8 parameters........................................................................................................................18-16
Table 18-14 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board...................................................................................18-17
Table 18-15 Functions and features of the OPM8............................................................................................18-19
Table 18-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OPM8 board..........................................................18-22
Table 18-17 Valid slots for the OPM8 board...................................................................................................18-22
Table 18-18 Characteristic code for the OPM8 board......................................................................................18-23
Table 18-19 OPM8 parameters.........................................................................................................................18-23
Table 18-20 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board...................................................................................18-24
Table 18-21 Functions and features of the WMU board..................................................................................18-26
Table 18-22 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WMU board..........................................................18-29
Table 18-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU board displayed on the NM.................................18-30
Table 18-24 WMU parameters.........................................................................................................................18-30
Table 18-25 Optical specifications of the WMU board....................................................................................18-30
Table 19-1 Version description of the VA1 board.............................................................................................19-2
Table 19-2 Substitution rules of the VA1 board.................................................................................................19-3
Table 19-3 Functions and features of the VA1 board........................................................................................19-4
Table 19-4 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA1 board.................................................................19-7
Table 19-5 Valid slots for the TN11VA1 board.................................................................................................19-7
Table 19-6 Valid slots for the TN12VA1 board.................................................................................................19-7
Table 19-7 Characteristic code for the VA1 board.............................................................................................19-8
Table 19-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM.................................................19-8
Table 19-9 VA1 parameters...............................................................................................................................19-9
Table 19-10 Optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board.............................................................................19-10
Table 19-12 Version description of the VA4 board.........................................................................................19-12
Table 19-13 Substitution rules of the VA4 board.............................................................................................19-12
Table 19-14 Functions and features of the VA4 board....................................................................................19-13
Table 19-15 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA4 board.............................................................19-16
Table 19-16 Valid slots for TN11VA4 board...................................................................................................19-16
Table 19-17 Valid slots for TN12VA4 board...................................................................................................19-17
Table 19-18 Characteristic code for the VA4 board.........................................................................................19-17
Table 19-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 board displayed on the NM...................................19-17
Table 19-20 VA4 parameters...........................................................................................................................19-18
Table 20-1 Functions and features of the DCU board........................................................................................20-3
Table 20-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCU board................................................................20-6
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxxxvii
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 20-3 Valid slots for the DCU board.........................................................................................................20-6

Table 20-4 Characteristic code for the DCU board............................................................................................20-6
Table 20-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU board displayed on the NM.......................................20-7
Table 20-6 DCU parameters...............................................................................................................................20-7
Table 20-7 Optical specifications of the DCU (1) board....................................................................................20-8
Table 20-8 Optical specifications of the DCU (2) board....................................................................................20-8
Table 20-9 Functions and features of the TDC board......................................................................................20-11
Table 20-10 Types and functions of the TDC interfaces..................................................................................20-14
Table 20-11 Valid slots for the TDC board......................................................................................................20-14
Table 20-12 Characteristic code for the TDC board........................................................................................20-14
Table 20-13 Display of the optical interfaces on the TDC board.....................................................................20-15
Table 20-14 TDC parameters...........................................................................................................................20-15
Table 20-15 Optical specifications of the TDC board......................................................................................20-16
Table 21-1 Version description of the STG board.............................................................................................21-2
Table 21-2 Functions and features of the STG board.........................................................................................21-5
Table 21-3 Interface description of the STG board............................................................................................21-9
Table 21-4 Valid slots for the TN11STG board.................................................................................................21-9
Table 21-5 Valid slots for the TN52STG board.................................................................................................21-9
Table 21-6 Valid slots for the TNK2STG board................................................................................................21-9
Table 21-7 STG parameters..............................................................................................................................21-10
Table 22-1 Functions and features of the BPA board........................................................................................22-3
Table 22-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BPA board.................................................................22-6
Table 22-3 Relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the output optical power
.............................................................................................................................................................................22-6
Table 22-4 Displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the BPA board on the NMS.........................22-7
Table 22-5 Optical specifications of the BPA board..........................................................................................22-7
Table 22-6 Functions and features of the EGSH board....................................................................................22-10
Table 22-7 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EGSH board............................................................22-17
Table 22-8 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the EGSH board
...........................................................................................................................................................................22-18
Table 22-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EGSH board displayed on the NM...................................22-19
Table 22-10 Slot assignment for the EGSH board...........................................................................................22-20
Table 22-11 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on the EGSH board
...........................................................................................................................................................................22-21
Table 22-12 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)......................................................22-21
Table 22-13 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port)...........................................................22-23
Table 22-14 Parameters on the TAG tab page.................................................................................................22-24
Table 22-15 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page........................................................................22-24
Table 22-16 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)..............................................22-25
Table 22-17 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port).........................................22-26
Table 22-18 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port)........................................................................22-27
Table 22-19 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port)..............................................................22-29
Table 22-20 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port).................................................22-30
lxxxviii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 22-21 Optical specifications of the EGSH board...................................................................................22-31

Table 22-22 Electrical specifications of the EGSH board................................................................................22-31
Table 22-23 Functions and features of the SF64 board....................................................................................22-33
Table 22-24 Type and function of the interface on the SF64 board.................................................................22-39
Table 22-25 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and the type of optical interface
...........................................................................................................................................................................22-39
Table 22-26 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64 board displayed on the NM...................................22-40
Table 22-27 Parameters of the SF64 board......................................................................................................22-40
Table 22-28 Optical specifications of the SF64 board.....................................................................................22-42
Table 22-29 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692.........................22-43
Table 22-30 Functions and features of the SF64A board.................................................................................22-45
Table 22-31 Type and function of the optical interface on the SF64A board..................................................22-50
Table 22-32 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SF64A board
...........................................................................................................................................................................22-50
Table 22-33 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64A board displayed on the NM................................22-51
Table 22-34 Parameters of the SF64A board...................................................................................................22-51
Table 22-35 Optical specifications of the SF64A board..................................................................................22-53
Table 22-37 Functions and features of the SFD64 board.................................................................................22-56
Table 22-38 Type and function of the interface on the SFD64 board..............................................................22-61
Table 22-39 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of optical interface
...........................................................................................................................................................................22-61
Table 22-40 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFD64 board displayed on the NM................................22-62
Table 22-41 Parameters of the SFD64 board...................................................................................................22-62
Table 22-42 Optical specifications of the SFD64 board..................................................................................22-64
Table 22-44 Functions and features of the SL64 board....................................................................................22-67
Table 22-45 Type and function of the interface on the SL64 board.................................................................22-72
Table 22-46 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and the type of optical interface
...........................................................................................................................................................................22-72
Table 22-47 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SL64 board displayed on the NM..................................22-73
Table 22-48 Parameters of the SL64 board......................................................................................................22-73
Table 22-49 Optical specifications of the SL64 board.....................................................................................22-75
Table 22-51 Functions and features of the SLD64 board.................................................................................22-78
Table 22-52 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLD64 board.........................................................22-84
Table 22-53 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and the type of optical interface
...........................................................................................................................................................................22-84
Table 22-54 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLD64 board displayed on the NM...............................22-85
Table 22-55 Parameters of the SLD64 board...................................................................................................22-85
Table 22-56 Optical specifications of the SLD64 board..................................................................................22-87
Table 22-57 Functions and features of the SLH41 board.................................................................................22-89
Table 22-58 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLH41 board.........................................................22-95
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

lxxxix
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 22-59 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLH41 board
...........................................................................................................................................................................22-96
Table 22-60 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLH41 board displayed on the NM...............................22-96
Table 22-61 Parameters of the SLH41 board...................................................................................................22-97
Table 22-62 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used.................22-99
Table 22-63 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used.................22-99
Table 22-64 Electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module is used........22-100
Table 22-65 Functions and features of the SLO16 board...............................................................................22-102
Table 22-66 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLO16 board.......................................................22-107
Table 22-67 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLO16 board. .22-107
Table 22-68 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLO16 board displayed on the NM.............................22-108
Table 22-69 Parameters of the SLO16 board.................................................................................................22-108
Table 22-70 Optical specifications of the SLO16 board................................................................................22-110
Table 22-71 Functions and features of the SLQ16 board...............................................................................22-112
Table 22-72 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ16 board.......................................................22-118
Table 22-73 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and the type of optical interface
.........................................................................................................................................................................22-118
Table 22-74 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ16 board displayed on the NM.............................22-119
Table 22-75 Parameters of the SLQ16 board.................................................................................................22-119
Table 22-76 Optical specifications of the SLQ16 board................................................................................22-121
Table 22-77 Functions and features of the SLQ64 board...............................................................................22-123
Table 22-78 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ64 board.......................................................22-129
Table 22-79 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the SLQ64 board. .22-129
Table 22-80 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ64 board displayed on the NM.............................22-130
Table 22-81 Parameters of the SLQ64 board.................................................................................................22-130
Table 22-82 Optical specifications of the SLQ64 board................................................................................22-132
Table 23-1 Technical parameters of the PGND cables and the -48V/BGND power cables (when the cabinet houses
only the OptiX OSN 8800)..................................................................................................................................23-5
Table 23-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (16 mm2) (when the cabinet houses
Table 23-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(25 mm2) (when the cabinet houses
Table 23-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm2) (when the cabinet houses
Table 23-5 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables ..............................................................23-7
Table 23-6 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables....................................................................................23-9
Table 23-7 Technical parameters of subrack power cables................................................................................23-9
Table 23-8 Classification of optical fibers.......................................................................................................23-10
Table 23-9 Classification of fiber connectors...................................................................................................23-11
Table 23-10 Technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables........................................................23-15
Table 23-11 Technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable.....................................................................23-16
Table 23-12 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable....................................................................23-17
Table 23-13 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable..........................................................23-18
Table 23-14 Pin assignment of X1 ..................................................................................................................23-19
xc

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table 23-15 Technical parameters of the alarm interface cable.......................................................................23-19

Table 23-16 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable...........................23-20
Table 23-17 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable.................23-21
Table 23-18 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port........................................................................................23-22
Table 23-19 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable....................................................................23-22
Table 23-20 Relationship between connectors and interface types..................................................................23-24
Table 23-21 Pin assignment of the W2............................................................................................................23-24
Table 23-28 Technical parameters of the AUX signal cable............................................................................23-27
Table 23-29 Pin assignment of the straight-through network cable.................................................................23-28
Table 23-30 Technical parameters of the straight-through network cable.......................................................23-28
Table 25-1 Valid slots for a filler panel..............................................................................................................25-3
Table 25-2 Technical specifications of a filler panel..........................................................................................25-4
Table A-1 Meanings of cabinet indicators...........................................................................................................A-2
Table A-2 Meanings of subrack indicators..........................................................................................................A-2
Table A-3 Meanings of chassis indicators...........................................................................................................A-3
Table A-4 Meanings of board indicators.............................................................................................................A-4
Table A-5 Meanings of the indicators on the PQ2 board....................................................................................A-5
Table A-6 Meanings of the indicators on the SCC board....................................................................................A-5
Table A-7 Meanings of the FAN indicator..........................................................................................................A-7
Table A-8 Meanings of the PIU indicator...........................................................................................................A-7
Table B-1 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU..............................................................................................B-4
Table B-2 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules..........................................................................B-5
Table B-3 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU.............................................................B-6
Table B-4 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules............................................................................B-7
Table B-5 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU..............................................................................................B-7
Table B-6 Characteristic code for the CMR1......................................................................................................B-9
Table B-7 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board............................................................................................B-9
Table B-8 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board............................................................................................B-9
Table B-9 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board..........................................................................................B-10
Table B-10 Characteristic code for the MR2 board...........................................................................................B-11
Table B-13 Characteristic code for the MR8V board........................................................................................B-12
Table B-14 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board........................................................................................B-14
Table B-15 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board........................................................................................B-14
Table B-16 Characteristic code for the HBA board...........................................................................................B-15
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

xci
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Tables
Table B-17 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board........................................................................................B-15

Table B-18 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board.........................................................................................B-16
Table B-19 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board.........................................................................................B-17
Table B-20 Characteristic code for the CRPC board.........................................................................................B-17
Table B-21 Characteristic code for the D40......................................................................................................B-18
Table B-22 Characteristic code for the D40V board.........................................................................................B-19
Table B-23 Characteristic code for the DFIU board..........................................................................................B-19
Table B-24 Characteristic code for the FIU board.............................................................................................B-20
Table B-25 Characteristic code for the ITL board.............................................................................................B-20
Table B-26 Characteristic code for the M40 board............................................................................................B-21
Table B-27 Characteristic code for the M40V board.........................................................................................B-21
Table B-28 Characteristic code for the DCP board...........................................................................................B-22
Table B-29 Characteristic code for the OLP board............................................................................................B-22
Table B-30 Characteristic code for the SCS board............................................................................................B-23
Table B-31 Characteristic code for the VA1 board...........................................................................................B-24
Table B-32 Characteristic code for the VA4 board...........................................................................................B-24
Table B-33 Characteristic code for the DCU board...........................................................................................B-25
Table B-34 Characteristic code for the GFU board...........................................................................................B-25
Table B-35 Characteristic code for the TDC board...........................................................................................B-26
Table C-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTU boards..................................................C-2
Table C-2 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards............................................C-19
Table C-3 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards............................................C-27
Table C-4 Quick reference table for optical amplifier unit...............................................................................C-29
Table C-5 Quick reference table for CRPC ......................................................................................................C-30
Table C-6 Quick reference table for HBA.........................................................................................................C-30
Table C-7 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards..................................................................C-30
Table C-8 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board
............................................................................................................................................................................C-34
Table C-9 Basic functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards............................................................. C-35
Table C-10 Loopback function of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards......................................................C-38
Table C-11 Loop function of the Ethernet boards.............................................................................................C-40
Table C-12 Loop function of the Ethernet boards.............................................................................................C-41
Table C-13 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards..........................................................C-42
Table C-14 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 8800........C-44
xcii

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1 OptiX OSN 8800 Cabinet
OptiX OSN 8800 Cabinet
About This Chapter

1.1 Cabinet Structure
The equipment consists of hardware such as cabinet, subrack, DCM frame and boards.
1.2 Cabinet Configuration
The OptiX OSN 8800 is available in two types of cabinet, that is, the ETSI 300 mm rear-column
cabinet and the ETSI 600 mm middle-column cabinet.
1.3 Specifications
The specifications of an integrated cabinet include dimensions, weight, maximum power, and
voltage.
1.4 DC Power Distribution Box
A DC power distribution box is mounted at the top part of a cabinet. Its input interface area is
divided into part A and part B.
1.5 UPM
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/
220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM
is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires
batteries.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The equipment consists of hardware such as cabinet, subrack, DCM frame and boards.
Subracks are the basic working units. The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has an independent
power supply and can be installed in an ETSI 600 mm middle-column cabinet or a 23-inch open
rack. The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack have an
independent power supply and can be installed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet, an ETSI
600 mm middle-column cabinet, or a 23-inch open rack.
In typical configuration, the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack is installed in an ETSI 600 mm
middle-column cabinet.
In typical configuration, the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack and the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
are installed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet.
The main frame of the ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet is a rack with a door fixed at the front,
a rear door with air vents fixed at the back and movable side doors at both sides. Figure 1-1
shows the appearance of an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet.
The main frame of the ETSI 600 mm middle-column cabinet is a rack with two doors fixed at
the front and at the back, movable side doors at both sides. Figure 1-2 shows the appearance of
an ETSI 600 mm middle-column cabinet.
The cabinet doors of the ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet are removable and there are
grounding points on the front door and side doors. All the front doors of the ETSI 300 mm rearcolumn cabinet can be opened with the same key. When a Raman amplifier board is installed in
the cabinet, a customized key can be provided upon request.
The cabinet doors of the ETSI 600 mm middle-column cabinet are removable and there are
grounding points on the front door and side doors. All the front doors and the back doors of the
ETSI 600 mm middle-column cabinet can be opened with the same key. When a Raman amplifier
board is installed in the cabinet, a customized key can be provided upon request.
1-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 1-1 Appearance of an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet
Figure 1-2 shows the appearance of an ETSI 600 mm middle-column cabinet.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 1-2 Appearance of an ETSI 600 mm middle-column cabinet
1.2 Cabinet Configuration

The OptiX OSN 8800 is available in two types of cabinet, that is, the ETSI 300 mm rear-column
cabinet and the ETSI 600 mm middle-column cabinet.
l
1-4
Typically, an OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack is housed in an ETSI 600 mm middle-column
cabinet of 2.2 m height. Such a cabinet can house one OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack plus
four OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks or one OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack plus two OptiX
OSN 8800 T32 subracks or one OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack plus four OptiX OSN 6800
subracks.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Typically, an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is housed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column
cabinet of 2.2 m height. Such a cabinet can house two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks.
Typically, an OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is housed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column
cabinet of 2.2 m height. Such a cabinet can house four OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subracks.
1.3 Specifications
The specifications of an integrated cabinet include dimensions, weight, maximum power, and
voltage.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the
same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Recommended power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with the
typical configuration and the equipment runs at the normal temperature. Maximum Power Consumption
indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in the extreme environment.
Table 1-1 lists the technical specifications of different types of ETSI 300 mm cabinets.
Table 1-1 Technical specifications of ETSI 300 mm cabinets
Item
2.2-m High Cabinet
Dimensions
600 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H)
Weight
60 kg
Maximum Power Consumptiona
5400 W
Recommended power consumption
No more than 4000 W
Normal working voltage
-48 V DC/-60 V DC
Working voltage range
-40 V DC to -72 V DC
a: Usually, the dissipation capability of a telecommunications room is no more than 5 kW/

cabinet. It is recommended that you configure a total of no more than 5400 W power for a
cabinet. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the typical power consumption
of the cabinet where two OptiX OSN 8800 T32 (one electrical subrack and one optical
subrack) or one OptiX OSN 8800 T32 and two OptiX OSN 6800 (one electrical subrack and
two optical subracks) are housed.
NOTE
When a large-sized cabinet or 23-inch open rack is used, you can add airduct frames in the cabinet to block
heat sources if a telecommunications room can dissipate heats quickly enough. In this case, you can
configure a maximum of 9600 W power for a cabinet.
Table 1-2 lists the technical specifications of different types of ETSI 600 mm cabinets.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 1-2 Technical specifications of ETSI 600 mm cabinets

Item
2.2-m High Cabinet
Dimensions
600 mm (W) x 600 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H)
Weight
85 kg
Maximum Power Consumptiona
10 kW
Recommended power consumption
No more than 6000 W
-48 V DC/-60 V DC
a: Usually, the dissipation capability of a telecommunications room is no more than 10 kW/

cabinet. It is recommended that you configure a total of no more than 10 kW power for a
cabinet. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the typical power consumption
of the cabinet where one OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and two OptiX OSN 8800 T32(one electrical
subrack and two optical subrack) or one OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and four OptiX OSN 6800
(one electrical subrack and four optical subracks) are housed.

The power distribution box consists of part A and part B of mutual backup. Part A and part B
access four -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies each.
l
For the two working inputs, the RTN(+) and NEG(-).
For the two protection inputs, the RTN(+) and NEG(-).
The PDU provides twelve power output interfaces to supply power to the subracks in the cabinet.
The PDU is available in two versions: TN16 and TN51. The two versions have the same functions
and the TN16PDU can replace the TN51PDU.
Figure 1-3 shows the front panel of the TN51PDU.
Figure 1-4 shows the front panel of the TN16PDU.
1-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 1-3 Front panel of the TN51PDU

Power supply
output area
Power supply
switch area
Power supply
input area
Power supply
switch area
Power supply
output area
Figure 1-4 Front panel of the TN16PDU

Power supply Power supply
output area switch area
+
1
+
2
+
3
Power supply
input area
Power supply Power supply

switch area
output area
+
2
+
3
+
4
Output cable terminal: There are four output cable terminals in each part, which lead in the
power cables connected to the subracks.
Grounding screw: It is used to access the protection grounding cable.
Input cable terminal: Part A and part B connect to four -48 V/-60 V DC power cables,
respectively. Totally, the input cable terminals lead in eight -48 V/-60 V DC power cables.
Power switch: There are four power switches matched for the corresponding output cable
terminals in each part so as to control the power supply of each subrack.
Dimensions of front panel

TN51PDU: 535 mm (W) x 133.4 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) x 5.3 in. (H))
TN16PDU: 535 mm (W) x 104 mm (H) (21.1 in. (W) x 4.1 in. (H))
1.5 UPM
batteries.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application
Figure 1-5 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN equipment series.
Figure 1-5 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN equipment series
OptiX OSN equipment
110V/220V
UPM
Backplane
-48V
PIU
Board A
-48V
PIU
Board B
-48V
Functions and Features

The UPM is a special power supply system and is numbered and EPS75-4815AF.
The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 1600 W. The EPS75-4815AF
power system is 3U high. Figure 1-6 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Figure 1-6 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system
The UPM power box can be directly installed in the 19-inch cabinet or the ETSI cabinet.
The storage batteries of the UPM work with one EPS75-4815AF power system. When the
external AC power system supplies power normally, the batteries store power. When the 110
V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To
supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment, only one power system is required to be connected
to the batteries.
The standard maximum configuration of each EPS75-4815AF power system includes five
rectifier modules and one monitoring module.
NOTE
The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Therefore, the batteries need to be configured separately.
If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment
cabinet is reserved for the batteries.
1-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 1-3 provides the functions and features of the UPM.

Table 1-3 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Function and
Feature
EPS75-4815AF
Hot-swappable
function
The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you

replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still
work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is
improved.
Storage battery
protection function
The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the
mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment
automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the
equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity
of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.
Loading capacity
The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.
Lightning-proof
function
The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector.

The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA
lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier module
along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light
arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system
to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from
damaging the rectifier module.
Working Principle and Signal Flow

The UPM is fed by one 220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts the input
power into 48 V DC voltage to provide four DC branches and one battery branch.
When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The
monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop,
and load loop.
In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is
connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply
fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module
reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts
to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC
undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the poweroff protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment.
As a result, the batteries are automatically protected.
When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
Interfaces and Indicators

Figure 1-7 shows the rear view of the GIE4805S power system (subject to the UPM on site).
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 1-7 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system
1. Control miniature circuit breaker

(MCB) of the AC input (30 A)
2. Control MCB of the battery 3. Control MCB of load 1 (10 A)

branch (80 A)
4. Control MCB of load 2 (30 A)
5. Control MCB of load 3 (40 6. Control MCB of load 4 (40 A)

A)
7. AC phase line terminal
8. AC zero line terminal
9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery

branch
10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load 11. Positive 48 V terminal of

branch
the battery branch
12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load

branch
13. Connecting terminal of the

protection grounding cable
15. Communication interface (COM)
14. DB44 signal interface
16. Communication test interface

(TEST)
The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has seven interfaces. Table 1-4 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF.
Table 1-4 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system
1-10
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
Power
input
interface
Power interface
"7" and "8" indicate the AC mains

input terminals, which access 110 V/
220 V AC power.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
Power
output
interface
Power interface
The power output interfaces are in the

lower left corner on the front panel of
the UPM. The terminals indicated by
"9" and "11" constitute a battery
interface, through which the power
system is connected to the battery
input socket at the back of the storage
battery box through a battery cable.
"10" and "12" indicate the output
interfaces of four loads. The output
interfaces can supply power to the
OptiX OSN equipment by using
power cables.
Connectin
g terminal
of the
protection
grounding
cable
Power interface
The UPM is grounded through the

cabinet.
DB44
signal
interface
DB44
The backplane of the subrack can be

connected to the sensor transfer box
(an optional device) through the DB44
signal interface and to the monitoring
module through the 96-pin DIN
connector. In addition, the sensor
transfer box can be connected to
multiple sensors. As a result, the
monitoring function is extended.
Communi
cation
interface
(COM)
RJ-45
It is used for communication with the

PC. The COM interface can adopt the
RS-485 communication mode or
RS-232 communication mode. Three
baud rates are available, namely, 4800
kbit/s, 9600 kbit/s, and 19200 kbit/s.
The baud rate can be adjusted and the
default baud rate is 9600 kbit/s.
Communi
cation test
interface
(TEST)
RJ-45
It is used for internal test.

1-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
Switch
button
Button
The switch buttons are on the left of

the UPM, as shown in Figure 1-7. "1"
indicates the control MCB of the AC
input (30 A), which enables and
disables the input of the AC mains
supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate
the load control switches, which
enable and disable the load output.
The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators:
l
Running status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) one color (yellow)
Faulty state indicator (FAULT) one color (red)
The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators:
l
Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) one color (red)
Power supply system status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Valid Slots
The UPM is case shaped. Therefore, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.
Technical Specifications
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output
power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.
Table 1-5 lists the power parameters of the UPM.
Table 1-5 Power parameters of the UPM
1-12
Parameter
Value
Voltage range
of the AC input
90-290 V AC
AC input
One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz
Rated input
current
28 A
Output
nominal
voltage
53.50.5 V

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Parameter
Value
Rated output
current
DC output branches
Load MCB 1: 10 A
Load MCB 2: 30 A
Load MCB 3: 40 A
Load MCB 4: 40 A
Battery MCB: 80 A
Total output DC current
37.53 A to 753 A
Regulated
voltage
precision
1%
Non-balance of
load sharing
5% (50%-100% load)
Rated
efficiency of
the integrated
equipment
89%
Power factor
0.99 (nominal input or output)
Peak-to-peak
noise voltage
200 mV (within the range of 20 MHz)
Electrical
network
adjustment rate
0.1%
Lightning
protection
performance
When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated lightning
surge current whose waveform is 8/20s and amplitude is 5 kA for five
times in both directions. The interval between two surges must be at least
one minute. If the lightning surge current is higher than the preceding
indexes, the UPM may be damaged and cannot work normally.
Cooling
method
The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the UPM are as follows:
l
Dimensions of the UPM: 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 133 mm (H) (17.2 in. (W) x 10.0
in. (D) x 5.2 in. (H))
Weight: 15 kg (33.1 lb.)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 6800 Cabinet
About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 6800 intelligent optical transmission platform (OptiX OSN 6800 for short)
consists of hardware such as cabinet, subrack, DCM frame, and boards.
2.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet
The available cabinets are of two height specifications. The number of OptiX OSN 6800 subracks
that can be housed in a cabinet varies with the cabinet height.
2.3 Specifications
The specifications of the integrated cabinet include dimensions, weight, maximum power,
voltage, and so on.
2.5 UPM
batteries.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

2-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The OptiX OSN 6800 intelligent optical transmission platform (OptiX OSN 6800 for short)
consists of hardware such as cabinet, subrack, DCM frame, and boards.
The OptiX OSN 6800 takes subracks as the basic working units. The OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
has an independent power supply and can be installed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet,
a standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet, or a 23-inch open rack.
For typical configuration, the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is installed in an ETSI 300 mm rearcolumn cabinet.
The main frame of the ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet is a rack with a door fixed at the front,
a rear door with air vents fixed at the back, and movable side doors at both sides. The ETSI 300
mm rear-column cabinet has two types: T63B and N63B. Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show the
appearance of the cabinets.
Figure 2-1 Appearance of a T63B cabinet
2-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 2-2 Appearance of an N63B cabinet
2.2 Configuration of the Integrated Cabinet

The available cabinets are of two height specifications. The number of OptiX OSN 6800 subracks
that can be housed in a cabinet varies with the cabinet height.
Table 2-1 lists the maximum number of subracks that can be housed in a cabinet. When the
cabinet is not fully configured, configure the subracks from bottom up.
Table 2-1 Maximum number of subracks that can be housed in a cabinet
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Item
2.2-m High Cabinet
2.6-m High Cabinet
An ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet
A standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet

2-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

2.3 Specifications
The specifications of the integrated cabinet include dimensions, weight, maximum power,
voltage, and so on.
NOTE
Recommended power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with the
typical configuration and the equipment runs at the normal temperature. Maximum Power Consumption
Table 2-2 lists the technical specifications of the different types of cabinets.
Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the cabinet
Item
2.2-m high cabinet
2.6-m high cabinet
Dimensions
600 mm (W) 300 mm (D)

2200 mm (H)
600 mm (W) 300 mm (D)

2600 mm (H)
Weight
69 kg (T63B)
80 kg (T63B)
60 kg (N63B)
66 kg (N63B)a
Maximum Power
Consumption (full
configuration)b
4800 W
4800 W
-48 V DC/-60 V DC
-48 V DC/-60 V DC
-40 V DCto -72 V DC
a: This specification indicates the weight of the 2.2 m cabinet when an enclosure frame of 0.4
m is configured on the top of the cabinet.
b: Usually, the dissipation capability of a telecommunications room is no more than 10 kW/
cabinet. It is recommended that you configure a total of no more than 4800W power for a
cabinet.

Based on the current of the power supply device in the equipment room, there are two power
supply modes:
2-4
When the current of each power input is 63 A, four power inputs are required.
When the current of each power input is 125 A inclusive, one power input is required for
part A and part B, respectively. That is, two inputs in total are required. In this mode, a
junction box needs to be mounted. For details about the junction box, refer to Junction
Box.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The power distribution box consists of part A and part B of mutual backup. Part A and part B
access two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies each.
l
For the two working inputs, the RTN1(+) and NEG1(-), and the RTN2(+) and NEG2(-) in
part A are connected.
For the two protection inputs, the RTN1(+) and NEG1(-), and the RTN2(+) and NEG2(-)
in part B are connected.
The PDU provides twelve power output interfaces (For the OptiX OSN 6800, both parts A and
B use only power switches SW2, SW3, SW4 and SW5, which correspond to four subracks
respectively from bottom up) to supply power to the subracks in the cabinet. Only one functional
version of the DC power distribution box is available, that is, TN11. Figure 2-3 shows the front
panel of the DC power distribution box.
Figure 2-3 Front panel of the DC power distribution box
1
1. Output cable terminal
2. Grounding screw
3. Input cable terminal
4. Power switch
Output cable terminal: There are six output cable terminals in each part, which lead in the
power cables connected to the subracks.
Grounding screw: It is used to access the protection grounding cable.
Input cable terminal: Part A and part B connect to two -48 V/-60 V DC power cables,
respectively. Totally, the input cable terminals lead in four -48 V/-60 V DC power cables.
Power switch: There are six power switches matched for the corresponding output cable
terminals in each part so as to control the power supply of each subrack.
Figure 2-4 shows the internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

2-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 2-4 Internal cable connection of the DC power distribution box

OUTPUT
+- +- +
+- +
OUTPUT
+- +- +
ON
+- +
ON
OFF
+
INPUT
OFF
INPUT
In part A, the input cable terminals RTN1(+) and NEG1(-) are in one group. They supply
power to output cable terminals 1, 2, and 3. The corresponding power switches are
respectively SW1, SW2, and SW3.
In part A, the input cable terminals RTN2(+) and NEG2(-) are in one group. They supply
power to output cable terminals 4, 5, and 6. The corresponding power switches are
respectively SW4, SW5, and SW6.
Part B is the same.
Junction Box
When the current of each power input is 125 A inclusive, a junction box needs to be mounted.
One input is required for part A and part B, respectively. That is, two inputs in total are required.
In this case, a power distribution box need be mounted on each part.Figure 2-5 and Figure
2-6 show the structure and mounting position of the junction box.
Figure 2-5 Junction box structure
2-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 2-6 Junction box mounting position
Dimensions of front panel

530 mm (W) x 131 mm (H) (20.9 in. (W) x 5.2 in. (H))
2.5 UPM
batteries.
Application
Figure 2-7 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN equipment series.
Figure 2-7 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN equipment series
OptiX OSN equipment
110V/220V
UPM
Backplane
-48V
PIU
Board A
-48V
PIU
Board B
-48V

The UPM is a special power supply system and is numbered and EPS75-4815AF.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

2-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 1600 W. The EPS75-4815AF
power system is 3U high. Figure 2-8 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Figure 2-8 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system
The UPM power box can be directly installed in the 19-inch cabinet or the ETSI cabinet.
The storage batteries of the UPM work with one EPS75-4815AF power system. When the
external AC power system supplies power normally, the batteries store power. When the 110
V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To
supply power to the OptiX OSN equipment, only one power system is required to be connected
to the batteries.
The standard maximum configuration of each EPS75-4815AF power system includes five
rectifier modules and one monitoring module.
NOTE
The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Therefore, the batteries need to be configured separately.
If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment
cabinet is reserved for the batteries.
Table 2-3 provides the functions and features of the UPM.

Table 2-3 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system
2-8
Function and
Feature
EPS75-4815AF
Hot-swappable
function
The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you

replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still
work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is
improved.
Storage battery
protection function
The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the
mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment
automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the
equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity
of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.
Loading capacity
The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
EPS75-4815AF
Lightning-proof
function
The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector.

The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA
lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier module
along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light
arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system
to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from
damaging the rectifier module.
Working Principle and Signal Flow

The UPM is fed by one 220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts the input
power into 48 V DC voltage to provide four DC branches and one battery branch.
When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The
monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop,
and load loop.
In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is
connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply
fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module
reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts
to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC
undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the poweroff protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment.
As a result, the batteries are automatically protected.
When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.
Interfaces and Indicators

Figure 2-9 shows the rear view of the GIE4805S power system (subject to the UPM on site).
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

2-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 2-9 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system
1. Control miniature circuit breaker

(MCB) of the AC input (30 A)
2. Control MCB of the battery 3. Control MCB of load 1 (10 A)

branch (80 A)
4. Control MCB of load 2 (30 A)
5. Control MCB of load 3 (40 6. Control MCB of load 4 (40 A)

A)
7. AC phase line terminal
8. AC zero line terminal
9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery

branch
10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load 11. Positive 48 V terminal of

branch
the battery branch
12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load

branch
13. Connecting terminal of the

protection grounding cable
15. Communication interface (COM)
14. DB44 signal interface
16. Communication test interface

(TEST)
The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has seven interfaces. Table 2-4 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF.
Table 2-4 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system
2-10
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
Power
input
interface
Power interface
"7" and "8" indicate the AC mains

input terminals, which access 110 V/
220 V AC power.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
Power
output
interface
Power interface
The power output interfaces are in the

lower left corner on the front panel of
the UPM. The terminals indicated by
"9" and "11" constitute a battery
interface, through which the power
system is connected to the battery
input socket at the back of the storage
battery box through a battery cable.
"10" and "12" indicate the output
interfaces of four loads. The output
interfaces can supply power to the
OptiX OSN equipment by using
power cables.
Connectin
g terminal
of the
protection
grounding
cable
Power interface
The UPM is grounded through the

cabinet.
DB44
signal
interface
DB44
The backplane of the subrack can be

connected to the sensor transfer box
(an optional device) through the DB44
signal interface and to the monitoring
module through the 96-pin DIN
connector. In addition, the sensor
transfer box can be connected to
multiple sensors. As a result, the
monitoring function is extended.
Communi
cation
interface
(COM)
RJ-45
It is used for communication with the

PC. The COM interface can adopt the
RS-485 communication mode or
RS-232 communication mode. Three
baud rates are available, namely, 4800
kbit/s, 9600 kbit/s, and 19200 kbit/s.
The baud rate can be adjusted and the
default baud rate is 9600 kbit/s.
Communi
cation test
interface
(TEST)
RJ-45
It is used for internal test.

2-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type of Interface
Usage
Switch
button
Button
The switch buttons are on the left of

the UPM, as shown in Figure 2-9. "1"
indicates the control MCB of the AC
input (30 A), which enables and
disables the input of the AC mains
supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate
the load control switches, which
enable and disable the load output.
The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators:
l
Running status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) one color (yellow)
Faulty state indicator (FAULT) one color (red)
The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators:
l
Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) one color (red)
Power supply system status indicator (RUN) one color (green)
Valid Slots
The UPM is case shaped. Therefore, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.
Technical Specifications
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output
power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.
Table 2-5 lists the power parameters of the UPM.
Table 2-5 Power parameters of the UPM
2-12
Parameter
Value
Voltage range
of the AC input
90-290 V AC
AC input
One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz
Rated input
current
28 A
Output
nominal
voltage
53.50.5 V

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Parameter
Value
Rated output
current
DC output branches
Load MCB 1: 10 A
Load MCB 2: 30 A
Load MCB 3: 40 A
Load MCB 4: 40 A
Battery MCB: 80 A
Total output DC current
37.53 A to 753 A
Regulated
voltage
precision
1%
Non-balance of
load sharing
5% (50%-100% load)
Rated
efficiency of
the integrated
equipment
89%
Power factor
0.99 (nominal input or output)
Peak-to-peak
noise voltage
200 mV (within the range of 20 MHz)
Electrical
network
adjustment rate
0.1%
Lightning
protection
performance
When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated lightning
surge current whose waveform is 8/20s and amplitude is 5 kA for five
times in both directions. The interval between two surges must be at least
one minute. If the lightning surge current is higher than the preceding
indexes, the UPM may be damaged and cannot work normally.
Cooling
method
The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.
The mechanical specifications of the UPM are as follows:
l
Dimensions of the UPM: 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 133 mm (H) (17.2 in. (W) x 10.0
in. (D) x 5.2 in. (H))
Weight: 15 kg (33.1 lb.)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

2-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

3 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack
OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack
About This Chapter

3.1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
3.4 PIU
PIU: power interface unit
3.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance Interfaces
The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


3.1.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64. Each subrack has independent
power supply.
3.1.2 Slot Description
The board area and the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack provides 93 slots.
3.1.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has four fan areas. In each subrack, the lower fan area
consists of the fan tray assembly and the air filter, and the upper fan area consists of one fan tray
assembly. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
3.1.1 Structure
power supply.
Figure 3-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Figure 3-1 OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack structure
5
3
4
3-2
1. Board area
2. Fiber cabling area
3. Fan tray assembly
4. Air filter
5. Fiber spool
6. Mounting ear

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 93 slots are available.
Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack.
Fan tray assembly: Four fan tray assemblies are available for this subrack. Each fan tray
assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat dissipation for the subrack.
The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that indicate fan status and
related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 3.1.3 Subrack Environment Control System
(Fan).
Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.
Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in
the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack.
Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.
Table 3-1 describes the technical specifications of the 8800 T64 subrack.
NOTE
Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with
the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the normal temperature. Maximum power consumption
Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Item
Specification
Dimensions
498 mm (W) 580 mm (D) 900 mm (H)

(19.6 in. (W) 22.8 in. (D) 35.4 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka)
65 kg (143 lb.)
Maximum subrack power consumptionb
9600 W
Recommended typical configuration power

consumption (OTN)
less than 4000 W

consumption (OCS)
less than 3200 W
Rated working current
200 A (four 50 A switched-mode power

supplies)
Nominal working voltage
-48V DC/-60V DC
-40V DC to -72V DC

3-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Specification
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly
or air filter is installed.
b: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption
configuration that the subrack can support and the maximum heat dissipation capability of
the subracks. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption
of the subrack in typical configuration.
Table 3-2 describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the 8800
T64.
Table 3-2 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64
3-4
Unit Name
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F) (W)a
Remarks
Subrack
OTU
subrack
1424.6
3135.9
It is the power consumed after

you install thirty-two LDXes,
one SCC, eight PIUs, two
AUXes, one EFI1, one EFI2,
one ATE and four fan tray
assemblies in an OTU subrack.
OTU
subrack
3569.6
5007.2

you install two XCTs, two
SXMs, twenty NQ2s, one SCC,
eight PIUs, five TOMs, five
TQXes, two AUXes, one EFI1,
one EFI2, one ATE and four fan
tray assemblies in an OTU
subrack.
OTM
subrack
966.2
2175.9

you install one M40V, one D40,
one OAU1, one OBU1, twelve
LDXes, one SCC, one SC2, four
PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1, one
EFI2, one ATE and four fan tray
assemblies in an OTM subrack.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F) (W)a
Remarks
OCS System
2169.9

you install two SXMs, twenty
SLD64s, eight SLO16s, four
SLQ16s, four SLH41s, four
EGSHes, two STGs, one STI,
two SCCs, eight PIUs, two
AUXes, one EFI1, one EFI2,
one ATE and four fan tray
assemblies in an OCS system.
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and
cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.

Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack is shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack slots
Front
Back
IU91
PIU
PIU
EFI2
IU69
IU70
IU71
IU
19
IU
1
IU
20
IU
2
IU
21
IU
3
IU
22
IU
4
IU
23
IU
5
IU
24
IU
6
A
U
X
IU
72
IU
25
IU
7
IU
73
IU93
SCC
STG
IU74
IU75
IU
26
IU
27
IU
28
EF
I1
IU
76
IU
77
IU
29
IU
30
PIU
PIU
PIU
PIU
STI
IU78
IU79
IU80
IU81
IU82
IU
31
IU
32
IU
33
IU
34
IU
53
IU
54
IU
55
IU
56
IU
57
IU
58
A
U
X
IU
83
IU
59
IU
84
SCC
STG
IU85
IU86
IU
60
XCT
SXM
XCT
SXM
IU
9
IU
10
IU
43
IU
44
IU
8
IU
11
IU
12
IU
13
IU
14
IU
15
IU
16
IU
17
IU
18
IU
35
IU
36
IU
37
IU
38
IU90
IU
39
IU
40
IU
41
IU
42
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, and IU45-IU68 are reserved for service boards.
IU71 is reserved for the EFI2.

PIU
PIU
IU88
IU89
IU
61
IU
62
IU
63
IU
64
IU
65
IU
66
IU
67
IU
68
IU
45
IU
46
IU
47
IU
48
IU
49
IU
50
IU
51
IU
52
IU92
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
ATE
IU87
3-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IU87 is reserved for the ATE.
IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81, IU88, and IU89 are reserved for the PIU.
IU72 and IU83 are reserved for the AUX.
IU73, IU77 and IU84 are reserved for future use.
IU75 and IU86 are reserved for the STG.
IU82 is reserved for the STI.
IU74 and IU85 are reserved for the SCC.
IU9 and IU43 are reserved for the XCT.
IU10 and IU44 are reserved for the SXM.
IU90IU93 are reserved for the fans.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has four fan areas. In each subrack, the lower fan area
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN51.

Table 3-3 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Table 3-3 Functions
Function
Description
Basic function
Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that

the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature
range.
Commissioning control
l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed

regulation, depending on the subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan
speed.
3-6
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide

efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is
independently regulated.
Hot swapping
Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.
Alarming
Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information.
Status checking
Checks and reports on the fan status.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Working Principle
The fan tray assembly implements heat dissipation on a subrack, which allows the subrack to
operate normally within the designated temperature range. The lower fan tray assembly blows
air up. The fan tray assembly located on the upper part of the subrack uses a pulling mechanism.
The two fan tray assemblies form an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack
are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure
reliable heat dissipation.
Figure 3-3 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
Figure 3-3 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Fan tray assembly
Board
Area
Fan tray assembly
Optical fiber
laying area
Air inlet
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 3-4. The partitioned
speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you operate
fans in Auto Speed Mode by default.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 3-4 FAN speed mode

FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode
Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the

temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed.
l If the ambient temperature is lower than 25C (77F), the fans run at
ow speed.
l If the ambient temperature is higher than 45C (113F), the fans run
at high speed.
l If the ambient temperature is from 25C to 45C (77F to 113 F),
the fans adjust the rotating speed to help ensure that the heat
dissipation of each board continues to be stable. This automatic
adjustment also helps ensure that the equipment runs quietly and
consumes less energy than the manually adjustable fan mode.
Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.
If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Six fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium-Low
Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You
can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in
all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned
manual fan speed adjustment.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack has two sides. Each side has three partitions. See Figure
3-4.
Figure 3-4 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
IU91
FAN2
FAN1
IU69
IU19 IU20
IU70
IU21
IU71
IU22 IU23
IU24
IU72
IU74
IU73
IU25 IU26
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU7
FAN3
IU75
IU27
IU9
IU76
IU77
IU28 IU29
IU30
IU78
IU31
IU80
IU79
IU32 IU33
IU34
IU53 IU54
IU81
IU55
IU58
IU83
IU84
IU11
FAN5
IU85
IU59 IU60
FAN3
IU86
IU87
IU61
IU62 IU63
IU45
IU46
IU88
IU89
IU64
IU65
IU66 IU67
IU68
IU47 IU48
IU49
IU50 IU51
IU52
IU43 IU44
IU12
IU13 IU14
IU15
IU16 IU17
IU18
IU35 IU36
IU37 IU38
IU39 IU40
IU41 IU42
IU50
FAN6
FAN4
IU90
3-8
IU82
IU56 IU57
IU50
FAN4
FAN2
FAN1
IU10
IU8
IU93
Back
Front

FAN5
FAN6
IU92
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, a cabinet has two sides (front and back). The fan tray assemblies
IU90 and IU91 are on the front and the fan tray assemblies IU92 and IU93 are on the back. The
fans in the four fan tray assemblies dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where
the fans reside. FAN1 and FAN4 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU-IU6, IU19IU24, and IU69-IU71. FAN2 and FAN5 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU7IU12, IU25-IU28, and IU72-IU75. FAN3 and FAN6 dissipate heat generated by the boards in
slots IU13-IU18, IU29-IU34, and IU76-IU79. FAN7 and FAN10 dissipate heat generated by
the boards in slots IU35-IU40, IU53-IU58, and IU80-IU82. FAN8 and FAN11 dissipate heat
generated by the boards in slots IU41-IU46, IU59-IU62, and IU83-IU86. FAN9 and FAN12
dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU47-IU52, IU63-IU68, and IU87-IU89.
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F).
Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations:
l
Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run
at the same speed.
The fan tray assembly consists of three fans and one fan control unit. Figure 3-5 shows the
functional blocks of the fan tray assembly.
Figure 3-5 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
Status signal
Speed adjusting signal
Fan control unit
Status signal
FAN
External power External power

supply 1
supply 2
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the
fan tray assembly.
Fan control board:

Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals.
Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case,
the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed.
Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan
tray assembly.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the
fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 3-6 shows a fan tray assembly.
Figure 3-6 Fan tray assembly
3
SYSTEM
1. Air filter
2. Operating status indicators
3. Fans (three in total)
NOTE
Only the lower fan tray assembly has the air filter.
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU90 IU91,
IU92 and IU93 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack.
Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly

Table 3-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly.
NOTE
same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 3-5 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly
3-10
Item
Specification
Dimensions
493.7 mm (W) x 280.5 mm (D) x 64.0 mm (H) (19.4 in. (W) x

11.0 in. (D) x 2.5 in. (H))
Weight
3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Specification
Power Consumptiona
l 70 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed

l 95 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed
l 150 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed
l 225 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed
l 347 W when the fans rotate at High Speed
a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured,
rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully
configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high
ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 347 W.

3.2.1 Structure
power supply.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has two fan areas. In each subrack, the lower fan area
3.2.1 Structure
power supply.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 3-7 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack structure diagram
1
5
3
4
1. Board area
4. Air filter
5. Fiber spool
6. Mounting ear
Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains three fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate fan status and related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 3.2.3 Subrack Environment Control System
(Fan).
Table 3-6 describes the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.
3-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with
the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the normal temperature. Maximum power consumption
Item
Specification
Dimensions
498 mm (W) 295 mm (D) 900 mm (H)

(19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 35.4 in. (H))
35 kg (77.1 lb.)
4800 W

consumption (OTN)
less than 3000 W

consumption (OCS)
less than 2400 W
100 A (two 50 A switched-mode power

supplies)
-48V DC/-60V DC
-40V DC to -72V DC
the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption
T32.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 3-7 Power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in the OptiX OSN 8800
T32
3-14
Unit Name
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F) (W)a
Remarks
Subrack
OTU
subrack
1633.4
2408.6

you install thirty-two LDXes,
one SCC, four PIUs, one AUX,
one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE
and two fan tray assemblies in
an OTU subrack.
OTU
electrical
crossconnect
subrack
3158.1
4002.8

you install two XCHes, twenty
ND2s, one SCC, four PIUs, five
TQXes, five TOMs, one AUX,
one EFI1, one EFI2, one ATE
and two fan tray assemblies in
an OTU electrical crossconnection subrack.
OTM
subrack
795
1448.6

you install one M40V, one D40,
one OAU1, one OBU1, twelve
LDXes, one SCC, four PIUs,
one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2,
one ATE and two fan tray
assemblies in an OTM subrack.
OLA
subrack
290.3
860

you install four OBU1s, four
VA1s, one SC2, one SCC, four
EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray
assemblies in an OLA subrack.
OADM
subrack
974
1651.2

you install two OAU1s, two
MR8Vs, sixteen LDXes, one
SC2, one SCC, four PIUs, one
AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2, one
ATE and two fan tray
assemblies in an OADM
subrack.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
OCS System
Typical
Power
Consumptio
n at 25C (77
F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumptio
n at 55C
(131F) (W)a
Remarks
380.7
972.5

you install two M40Vs, two
D40s, two FIUs, one SC2, two
RMU9s, two WSM9s, two
OAU1s, two OBU1s, one SCC,
four PIUs, one AUX, one EFI1,
one EFI2, one ATE and two fan
tray assemblies in an OADM
subrack.
374.1
465.6

you install two M40s, two
D40s, two WSMD9s, two
DAS1s, one SCC, four PIUs,
one AUX, one EFI1, one EFI2,
one ATE and two fan tray
assemblies in an OADM
subrack.
1507.4

you install two XCMs, ten
SLQ64s, eight SLO16s, two
SLH41s, two EGSHes, two
STGs, one STI, two SCCs, four
EFI2, one ATE and two fan tray
assemblies in an OCS system.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IU51
AUX
EFI2
EFI1
PIU
PIU
IU37
IU38
IU39
IU40
OTU OTU OTU
OTU OTU OTU OTU
IU20 IU21
IU23 IU24
IU22
IU25
STG
STG
IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44
OTU
IU26 IU27
PIU
PIU
STI
ATE
IU45
IU46
IU47
IU48
SCC OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
IU28 IU29
IU30 IU31
IU32
IU33
IU34 IU35
IU36
OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
IU14 IU15
IU16
IU17 IU18
IU19
XCH/ XCH/
XCM XCM
IU9
IU10
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
OTU
OTU OTU
SCC OTU
OTU OTU
IU1
IU3
IU4
IU6
IU7
IU11 IU12
IU13
IU2
IU5
IU8
IU50
3-16
IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36 are reserved for service boards.
IU47 is reserved for the STI.
IU39, IU40, IU45 and IU46 are reserved for the PIU.
IU41 is reserved for the AUX.
IU42 and IU44 are reserved for the STG.
IU43 is reserved for future use.
IU28 is reserved for the active SCC.
IU11 is available for the standby SCC or the other boards.
IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the XCH/XCM.
IU50 and IU51 are reserved for the fans.
An OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack does not have IU49.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack has two fan areas. In each subrack, the lower fan area
Version Description

Table 3-8 Functions
Function
Description
Basic function

range.

speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into three partitions to help provide

Hot swapping
Alarming
Status checking
Working Principle
operate normally within the designated temperature range. The lower fan tray assembly blows
air up. The fan tray assembly located on the upper part of the subrack uses a pulling mechanism.
The two fan tray assemblies form an air duct from bottom to top. Other boards in the subrack
are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure
reliable heat dissipation.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Air outlet
Fan tray assembly
Board
Area
Fan tray assembly
Optical fiber
laying area
Air inlet
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode

ow speed.
at high speed.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
3-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack is divided into three partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See
Figure 3-10.
FAN2
FAN1
IU37
IU20 IU21
IU38
IU22
IU39
IU23 IU24
IU40
IU25
IU41 IU42 IU43 IU44
IU26 IU27
IU9
IU1
IU2
IU3
IU4
IU5
IU6
IU7
IU51
FAN3
IU45
IU46
IU28 IU29
IU30 IU31
IU11 IU12
IU13
IU47
IU48
IU32
IU33
IU34 IU35
IU36
IU14 IU15
IU16
IU17 IU18
IU19
IU10
IU8
IU50
FAN4
FAN5
FAN6
IU50
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, the fans on the two fan tray assemblies in slots IU50 and IU51
dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside. FAN1 and FAN4
dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU-IU6, IU20-IU25, and IU37-IU40. FAN2 and
FAN5 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU7-IU12, IU26-IU29, and IU41-IU45.
FAN3 and FAN6 dissipate heat generated by the boards in slots IU13-IU19, IU30-IU36, and
IU46-IU49.
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the two fan tray assemblies fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
Replace the fan tray assembly in either of the following two situations:
l
Two or more fans fail in one of the two fan tray assemblies.
One or more fans fail in each of the two fan tray assemblies.
In a system that is operating normally, the two fans in the same partition (such as FAN1 and FAN4) run
at the same speed.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Status signal
Fan control unit
Status signal
FAN

supply 1
supply 2
fan tray assembly.
Fan control board:

tray assembly.
Appearance
3
SYSTEM
1. Air filter
3. Fans (three in total)
NOTE
Only the lower fan tray assembly has the air filter.
3-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slots for the fan tray assembly are IU50 and
IU51 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack.

NOTE

Item
Specification
Dimensions

11.0 in. (D) x 2.5 in. (H))
Weight
3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)
Power Consumptiona

l 95 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed
l 225 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed

3.3.1 Structure
power supply.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan area. The fan area consists of the fan tray
assembly and the air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

3.3.1 Structure
power supply.
Figure 3-13 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack structure diagram
5
2
3
4
3-22
1. Board area
4. Air filter
5. Fiber spool
6. Mounting ear
Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate fan status and related information.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 3-11 describes the technical specifications of the 8800 T16 subrack.
Item
Specification
Dimensions
498 mm (W) 295 mm (D) 450 mm (H)

(19.6 in. (W) 11.6 in. (D) 17.7 in. (H))
18 kg (39.6 lb.)
1800 W

consumption
700 W
37.5 A
-48V DC/-60V DC
-40V DC to -72V DC
the subrack. In the actual application, the value is much higher than the power consumption
T16.
Table 3-12 Power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Unit Name
Subrack
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OTU subrack
Typical
Power
Consumpt
ion at 25C
(77F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(131F) (W)
509.2
615.6
Remarks

It is the power consumed after you

install eight 10G OTUs (LDXes),
one XCH, two PIUs, one AUX,
one EFI, one ATE and one fan
tray assembly in an OTU subrack.
3-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
Typical
Power
Consumpt
ion at 25C
(77F) (W)a
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(131F) (W)
Remarks
OTN
electrical
cross-connect
subrack
758
879.3

install five NQ2s, two XCHes,
two PIUs, one TQX, two TOMs,
one AUX, one EFI, one ATE and
one fan tray assembly in an OTN
electrical cross-connect subrack.
OTM subrack
471.2
577.2

install one M40V, one D40, one
OAU1, one OBU1, six LDXes,
tray assembly in an OTM
subrack.
OLA subrack
228.1
294.3

install four OBU1s, four VA1s,
one SC2, two FIUs, one XCH,
two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one
ATE and one fan tray assembly in
an OLA subrack.
OADM
subrack
449.5
561.5

install two OAU1s, two MR8vs,
two FIUs, eight LSXes, one SC2,
tray assembly in an OADM
subrack.
222
274.2

install one M40, one D40, one
WSMD9, one DAS1, one XCH,
two PIUs, one AUX, one EFI, one
ATE and one fan tray assembly in
an OADM subrack.

3-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IU20
PIU
IU19
EFI
IU21
AUX
IU22
AUX
IU9
IU
1
IU
2
IU
3
IU
4
IU
5
IU
6
IU
7
IU24
ATE
IU10
IU
8
IU25
IU23
PIU
IU
IU
IU
IU
11
12
13
14
IU
15
IU
16
IU
17
IU
18
FAN
IU1-IU8, and IU11-IU18 are reserved for service boards.
IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the XCH or for the other service boards.
NOTE
Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house other service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions
as a slave subrack.
Each of slots IU9 and IU10 must be filled with a filler panel when they are used to house service boards.
IU19 is reserved for the EFI.
IU20 and IU23 are reserved for the PIU.
IU21 and IU22 are reserved for the AUX.
IU25 is reserved for the fans.

Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan area. The fan area consists of the fan tray
assembly and the air filter. The air filter can be drawn out and be cleaned.
Version Description

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 3-13 Functions

Function
Description
Basic function

range.

speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide

Hot swapping
Alarming
Status checking
Working Principle
operate normally within the designated temperature range. The fan tray assembly is installed in
the lower part of the subrack and blows air up, creating an air duct from bottom to top. Other
boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This
design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation.
Air outlet
Board area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
3-26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode

ow speed.
at high speed.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts two fan tray assemblies to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See
Figure 3-16.
IU20
PIU
IU19
EFI
IU21
AUX
IU22
AUX
IU9
IU
1
IU
2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
IU
3
IU
4
IU
5
IU
6
IU
7
IU23
PIU
IU24
ATE
IU10
IU
8
IU
IU
IU
IU
11
12
13
14

IU
15
IU
16
IU
17
IU
18
Fan tray
assembly
3-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two
fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive
hours in an environment with temperatures between 0C to 45C (32F to 113F).
Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
Status signal
Fan control unit
Status signal
FAN

supply 1
supply 2
fan tray assembly.
Fan control board:

tray assembly.
Appearance
3-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

SYSTEM
1
1. Air filter
3. Fans (ten in total)
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.

NOTE

Item
Specification
Dimensions
493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W)

x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))
Weight
3.6 kg (7.9)
Power Consumptiona
l 42.7 W when the fans rotate at Low Speed

l 74.8 W when the fans rotate at Medium-Low Speed
l 106.8 W when the fans rotate at Medium Speed
l 165.5 W when the fans rotate at Medium-High Speed
l 256.3 W when the fans rotate at High Speed
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 256.3 W.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

3.4 PIU
3.4.1 Version Description
The functional versions of the PIU board are TN16 and TN51.
3.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 is configured with eight PIU boards. The eight boards provide power
supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is configured with four
PIU boards. The four boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. The
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies
to the system with 1+1 hot backup.
3.4.3 Functions and Features
The PIU board accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering functions.
3.4.4 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the PIU board.
3.4.5 Valid Slots
One slot houses one PIU board.
3.4.6 Specifications of the PIU
Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The functional versions of the PIU board are TN16 and TN51.
Table 3-16 lists the version description of the PIU board.
Table 3-16 Version description of the PIU board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the PIU board are TN16 and TN51.
This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the
availability of the boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the
boards, contact the product manager of your Huawei local office.
Difference
l Function:
Only the TN16PIU supports the intelligent ammeter function. For
details, see 3.4.3 Functions and Features.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see PIU
Specification.
Replacement
3-30
Table 3-17 lists the substitution rules for the PIU board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 3-17 Substitution rules of the PIU board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN51PIU
TN16PIU
The TN16PIU can be created as TN51PIU on the NMS. The

former can substitute for the latter, without any software
upgrade. After substitution, the TN16PIU functions as the
TN51PIU.
TN16PIU
None
3.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 8800 T64 is configured with eight PIU boards. The eight boards provide power
supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. The OptiX OSN 8800 T32 is configured with four
PIU boards. The four boards provide power supplies to the system with 1+1 hot backup. The
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies

The PIU board accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering functions.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 3-18.
Table 3-18 Functions and features of the PIU board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning

protection and power filtering functions. Unlike the TN51PIU, the
TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter function, which enables the
TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack and
report the power consumption to the system control unit.
NOTE
The overcurrent protection function for the access power supplies of each subrack is realized by the
magnetic circuit breaker of the PDU.
3.4.4 Front Panel

Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 3-19 shows the front panel of the TN51PIU board.
Figure 3-20 shows the front panel of the TN16PIU board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 3-19 Front panel of the TN51PIU board

PIU
RTN
PWR
-48V
Figure 3-20 Front panel of the TN16PIU board

PIU
RTN(+)
PWR
NEG(-)
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel.
l
Power indicator (PWR) - green
Interface
There is only one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to
access the DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V.
3.4.5 Valid Slots

Table 3-19 and Table 3-20 shows the valid slots for the PIU board.
3-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 3-19 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU20 and IU23

Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Performance Specifications
Table 3-21 Performance specifications of the PIU board
Item
Unit
Value
Number of DC input power supplies
Input DC power voltage range
V DC
-40 to -72
Input DC power current
60
l
Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in.
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight:
TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.)
TN16PIU: 0.65 (1.43 lb.)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
Consumption at 25C (77
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51PIU
1.8
1.8
TN16PIU
3.6
3.5 Data Communication and Equipment Maintenance

Interfaces
The equipment provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
These OptiX OSN 8800 T64 interfaces are located in the interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800
T64 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure
3-21.
Figure 3-21 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
EFI1
EFI2
RTN
53A
PWR
ATE
STI
PIU
RTN
-48V
53A
PWR
-48V
ALMI2
ALMO3
TOD1
ALMO4
ALMO2

ALMI1 ALMO1
CLK1
TOD2
NM_ETH1
ETH3
SERIAL
CLK2
NM_ETH2
ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2
ETH1
3-34
PIU
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

T32 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI1, EFI2, ATE, and STI, as shown in Figure
3-22.
EFI2
EFI1
PIU
ATE
STI
53A
PWR
-48V
ALMO3
TOD1
ALMI2
CLK1
TOD2
ALMI1 ALMO1
CLK2
ALMO4
ALMO2
NM_ETH1
ETH3
SERIAL
ETH2
LAMP1 LAMP2
ETH1
NM_ETH2
RTN
T16 subrack and on the front panel of the EFI, and ATE, as shown in Figure 3-23.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


PIU
EFI
ATE
PWR
RTN(+)
NEG(-)
ALMI1
ALMI2
ALMO1
CLK1
TOD1
ALMO3
ALMO4
ALMO2
NM_ETH1
TOD2
LAMP2
ETH3
NM_ETH2
ETH2
CLK2
LAMP1
SERIAL
ETH1
3.5.1 ATE
ATE: Interface Board of Alarm & Timing & Expanding
3.5.2 EFI
EFI: EMI Filter Interface Board
3.5.3 EFI1
EFI1: EMI Filter Interface Board
3.5.4 EFI2
3.5.5 STI
STI: Synchronous Timing Interface Board
3.5.1 ATE
ATE: Interface Board of Alarm & Timing & Expanding
Version Description
The functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51.
Table 3-22 lists the version description of the ATE board.
Table 3-22 Version description of the ATE board
3-36
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the ATE board are TN16 and TN51.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Description
Difference
l Appearance:
The number of interfaces varies according to the board version. For
details, see Front Panel.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see ATE
Specification.
The TN16ATE and TN51ATE cannot replace each other.
Replacement
Application
The ATE provides alarm output/concatenation interface and alarm input interface. The
TN16ATE provides interfaces for inputting and outputting clock signals.
Alarm outputs are sent to the DC power distribution cabinet through the output interface and the
cascading interface. You can configure it to be the other outputs to implement integrated display
of alarms.
External alarm signal input function is designed for requirements when the alarm signals of the
external systems (such as the environment monitory) need remote monitoring.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the ATE board.

Figure 3-24 shows the front panel of the TN51ATE board.
Figure 3-25 shows the front panel of the TN16ATE board.
Figure 3-24 Front panel of the TN51ATE board
ATE
ALMI2
ALMI1
ALMO3
ALMO1
ALMO4
ALMO2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 3-25 Front panel of the TN16ATE board
ATE
ALMI2
ALMI1
ALMO3
TOD2
ALMO4
ALMO1
ALMO2
CLK1
TOD1
CLK2
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the TN51ATE board and there are ten interfaces
on the front panel of the TN16ATE board. Table 3-23 lists the types and functions of each
interface.
Table 3-23 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ATE board
Interface
Type
Function
ALMO1
ALMO4
RJ-45
l Alarm signals can be output either to an alarm

cabinet or an external device through ALMO1
ALMO4. At the alarm cabinet or external device,
all alarms are displayed.
l The definitions for the pins of the ALMO1 and
ALMO2 interfaces are the same. The two interfaces
are used for output/cascading, respectively. The
definitions for the pins of the ALMO3 and ALMO4
interfaces are the same. The two interfaces are used
for output/cascading, respectively. For example, if
ALMO1 is used to output alarm signals, ALMO2
can be cascaded to ALMO1 on another subrack.
l The OptiX OSN 8800 provides eight alarm outputs.
Defaults of the first three are critical alarm, major
alarm, and minor alarm. The other five are reserved.
Alarm outputs can be cascaded.
3-38
ALMI1
ALMI2
RJ-45
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides eight alarm inputs. The

name of the eight alarms can be configured to cooperate
with the external system to implement remote
monitoring of external alarms.
CLK1/CLK2
RJ-45
CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals.

CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they
input and output signals at the same time.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
TOD1/TOD2
RJ-45
TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals.

At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input
or output time signals.
Pin assignment of the RJ-45 Connector

Figure 3-26 shows the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector.
Figure 3-26 Pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Pin Assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the ALMO1 and the ALMO2 interfaces, refer to Table 3-24.
Table 3-24 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Pin
Signal
Function
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP
Outputs the critical alarm

signal positive
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN

signal negative
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP
Outputs the major alarm

signal positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P
Outputs the minor alarm

signal positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N

signal negative
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN

signal negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P
Alarm signal output 1

positive

3-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N

negative

Table 3-25 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces
Pin
Signal
Function
ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT6P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT6N

negative
Pin Assignment of the ALMI1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface, refer to Table 3-26.
Table 3-26 Pin assignment of the ALMI1 interface
3-40
Pin
Signal
Function
SWITCHI_IN1
Alarm input 1
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN2
Alarm input 2
SWITCHI_IN3
Alarm input 3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN4
Alarm input 4
GND
Ground

Table 3-27 Pin assignment of the ALMI2
Pin
Signal
Function
SWITCHI_IN5
Alarm input 5
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN6
Alarm input 6
SWITCHI_IN7
Alarm input 7
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN8
Alarm input 8
GND
Ground
Pin Assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface, refer to Table 3-28.
Table 3-28 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Pin
Signal
Function
RJ0_E1_RX_N
2MHz/2Mbit input negative
RJ0_E1_RX_P
2MHz/2Mbit input positive
NC
Not connected
RJ0_E1_TX_N
2MHz/2Mbit output negative
RJ0_E1_TX_P
2MHz/2Mbit output positive
NC
Not connected

3-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Pin Assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface, refer to Table 3-29.
Table 3-29 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface
Pin
Signal
Function
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
DCLS_IN0_N
DCLS/1PPS input negative
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
DCLS_IN0_P
DCLS/1PPS input positive
DCLS_OUT0_N
DCLS/1PPS output negative
DCLS_OUT0_P
DCLS/1PPS output positive
Valid Slots
One slot houses one ATE board.
Table 3-30 shows the valid slots for the TN51ATE board.
Table 3-30 Valid slots for the TN51ATE board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU87
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU48
Table 3-31 shows the valid slots for the TN16ATE board.
3-42

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 3-31 Valid slots for the TN16ATE board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU24
Specifications of the ATE

Specifications include dimensions, weight and power consumption.
l
Dimensions of front panel:

TN51ATE: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
TN16ATE: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
Weight:
TN51ATE: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb.)
TN16ATE: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51ATE
0.3
0.3
TN16ATE
0.2
0.3
3.5.2 EFI
EFI: EMI Filter Interface Board
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI board is available, that is, TN16.
Application
The EFI provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface,
subrack communication interface and OAM interfaces.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Figure 3-27 shows the front panel of the EFI board.
Figure 3-27 Front panel of the EFI board
EFI
LAMP1
ETH1
SERIAL
LAMP2
ETH2
NM_ETH1
ETH3
NM_ETH2
CAUTION
The LAMP interfaces on the EFI board provide 5 V power, it is only used for the indicators on
a cabinet. It cannot connect to an RJ45 cable intended for the NM_ETH, ETH, ALMO, or CLK
interface; otherwise, the EFI board, the connected test instrument, or the equipment will be
damaged.
Interfaces
There are eight interfaces on the front panel of the EFI board. Table 3-32 lists the type and
function of each interface.
Table 3-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI board
Interface
Type
Function
LAMP1
LAMP2
RJ-45
Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of

the cabinet that holds the subrack.
ETH1ETH3
RJ-45
l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/

ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding
interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the
communication between the master subrack and
slave subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3
interface cannot be used for the communication between
the master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board

to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP
board.
3-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
RJ-45
l Connects the network interface on the equipment

through a network cable to that on an NM server so
that the NM can manage the equipment.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network
interface on one NE through a network cable to that
on another NE to achieve communication between
NEs.
DB9
SERIAL
The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25

protocol.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Pin Assignment of the DB9 Connector

Figure 3-29 shows the pin assignment of the DB9 connector.
Figure 3-29 Pin assignment of the DB9 connector
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin Assignment of the ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the ETH1 interface, refer to Table 3-33.
Table 3-33 Pin assignment of the ETH1 interface
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH1_TXP
Positive pole for transmitting

the data for ordinary intersubrack communication
ETH1_TXN
Negative pole for

transmitting the data for
ordinary inter-subrack
communication
ETH1_RXP
Positive pole for receiving

ETH1_CRIT_TXP

the data for emergent intersubrack communication
ETH1_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

emergent inter-subrack
communication
ETH1_RXN
Negative pole for receiving

ETH1_CRIT_RXP

ETH1_CRIT_RXN


3-46

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_TXP

ETH2_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH2_RXP

ETH2_CRIT_TXP

ETH2_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH2_RXN

ETH2_CRIT_RXP

ETH2_CRIT_RXN


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_TXP

ETH3_TXN
Negative pole for

communication

3-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_RXP

ETH3_CRIT_TXP

ETH3_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH3_RXN

ETH3_CRIT_RXP

ETH3_CRIT_RXN

Pin Assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces, refer to Table 3-36.
Table 3-36 Pin assignment of the LAMP1 and the LAMP2 interfaces
3-48
Pin
Signal
Function
CRIT_ALMP
Positive pole for critical

alarm signals
CRIT_ALMN
Negative pole for critical

alarm signals
MAJ_ALMP
Positive pole for major alarm

signals
RUNP
Positive pole for power

indicating signals
RUNN
Negative pole for power

indicating signals
MAJ_ALMN
Negative pole for major

alarm signals

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
MIN_ALMP
Positive pole for minor alarm

signals
MIN_ALMN
Negative pole for minor

alarm signals
Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface, refer to Table 3-37.
Table 3-37 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1 interface
Pin
Signal
Function
NM_ETNTXP

the data for communication
with the NM
NM_ETNTXN
Negative pole for

communication with the NM
NM_ETNRXP

with the NM
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NM_ETNRXN

with the NM
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
NMJL_ETNTXP

the concatenated data for
communication with a
network management system
(NM)
NMJL_ETNTXN
Negative pole for

transmitting the concatenated
data for communication with
an NM
NMJL_ETNRXP

communication with an NM
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NMJL_ETNRXN

NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Pin Assignment of the SERIAL Interface

For the pin assignment of the SERIAL interface, refer to Table 3-39.
Table 3-39 Pin assignment of the SERIAL interface
3-50
Pin
Signal
Function
N.C
Not defined
RXD
Receive end
TXD
Transmit end
DTR
Data terminal equipment

ready
GND
Ground
Reserved
Reserved
GND
Ground

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
N.C
Not defined
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI board.
Table 3-40 shows the valid slots for the EFI board.
Table 3-40 Valid slots for the EFI board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU19
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI board.
The master and slave subracks are connected through the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on the
EFI. The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI board. The value that
can be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these
ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. ID7 and ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID6ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. The value is 000000 by default. "0" indicates
the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 3-30 shows the position of
the DIP switches on the EFI board.
l
The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the T1.
When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
As shown in Figure 3-30, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 0000001, which is 1 in
decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Figure 3-30 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI board
U8
SERIAL
SW2
NM_ETH2
SW1
T1
(ID8)
(ID7)
(ID6)
(ID5)
(ID4)
(ID3)
(ID2)
(ID1)
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
SW1
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
SW2

3-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave subracks, see "Master-Slave
Subrack" in the Product Description.
Specifications of the EFI

l
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight: 1.1 lb. (0.5 kg)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI
2.5
3.5.3 EFI1
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI1 board is available, that is, TN51.
Application
The EFI1 provides network management and OAM interfaces.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI1 board.

Figure 3-31 shows the front panel of the EFI1 board.
3-52

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 3-31 Front panel of the EFI1 board

EFI1
NM_ETH2
SERIAL
Interfaces
There are two interfaces on the front panel of the EFI1 board. Table 3-41 lists the type and
Table 3-41 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI1 board
Interface
Type
Function
NM_ETH2
RJ-45

through a network cable to that on an NM so that
the NM can manage the equipment.
NEs.
NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.
DB9
SERIAL
The interface provides serial NM and supports X.25

protocol.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5

3-54
Pin
Signal
Function
NMJL_ETNTXP

communication with a
network management system
(NM)
NMJL_ETNTXN
Negative pole for

transmitting the concatenated
data for communication with
an NM
NMJL_ETNRXP

NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NMJL_ETNRXN


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected

Pin
Signal
Function
N.C
Not defined
RXD
Receive end
TXD
Transmit end
DTR

ready
GND
Ground
Reserved
Reserved
GND
Ground
N.C
Not defined
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI1 board.
Table 3-44 provides the valid slots for the EFI1 board.
Table 3-44 Valid slots for the EFI1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU76
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU38
DIP Switches
There are DIP switches inside the EFI1 board.
The EFI2 board is connected to the master subrack through the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface.
The ID of each subrack is set by using two DIP switches on the EFI1 board. The value that can
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

be set by using each of the two DIP switches on the EFI1 board is a binary value 0 or 1. ID1ID4 correspond to bits 1-4 of SW2, and ID5-ID8 corresponding to bits 1-4 of SW1. Among these
ID values, only ID1-ID6 are valid. ID7 and ID8 are reserved. The bits from high to low are ID6ID1, by which a maximum of 64 states can be set. The value is 000000 by default. "0" indicates
the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks.Figure 3-34 shows the position of
the DIP switches on the EFI1 board.
l
The two DIP switches are numbered SW1 and SW2 and are located to the right of the
CPLD.
When the DIP switch is ON, the value of the corresponding bit is set to 0.
As shown in Figure 3-34, the value represented by the ID6-ID1 is 0000001, which is 1 in
decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is 1.
Figure 3-34 Position of the DIP switches on the EFI1 board
NM_ETH2
CPLD
SERIAL
(ID5)
ON
(ID1)
ON
(ID6)
ON
(ID2)
ON
(ID7)
ON
(ID3)
ON
(ID8)
ON
(ID4)
ON
SW1
SW2
Specifications of the EFI1

l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D)
x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight: 0.2 kg (0.44 lb)
Power Consumption
3-56
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI1

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

3.5.4 EFI2
Version Description
Only one functional version of the EFI2 board is available, that is, TN51.
Application
The EFI2 provides the alarm output/concatenation interface, network management interface and
subrack communication interface.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the EFI2 board.

Figure 3-35 shows the front panel of the EFI2 board.
Figure 3-35 Front panel of the EFI2 board
EFI2
LAMP1
ETH1
LAMP2
ETH2
NM_ETH1
ETH3
CAUTION
damaged.
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the EFI2 board. Table 3-45 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 3-45 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EFI2 board
Interface
Type
Function
LAMP1
LAMP2
RJ-45
Controls the PWR indicators and alarm indicators of

NM_ETH1
RJ-45

through a network cable to that on an NM server so
that the NM can manage the equipment.
NEs.
NM_ETH1 and NM_ETH2 have the same function.
ETH1ETH3
RJ-45
l Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/

ETH3 interface on one subrack to corresponding
interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the
communication between the master subrack and
slave subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3
interface cannot be used for the communication between
the master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board

to achieve communication with the CRPC or ROP
board.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

3-58

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
ETH1_TXP

ETH1_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH1_RXP

ETH1_CRIT_TXP

ETH1_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH1_RXN

ETH1_CRIT_RXP

ETH1_CRIT_RXN


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_TXP

ETH2_TXN
Negative pole for

communication

3-59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_RXP

ETH2_CRIT_TXP

ETH2_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH2_RXN

ETH2_CRIT_RXP

ETH2_CRIT_RXN


3-60
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_TXP

ETH3_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH3_RXP

ETH3_CRIT_TXP


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_CRIT_TXN
Negative pole for

communication
ETH3_RXN

ETH3_CRIT_RXP

ETH3_CRIT_RXN


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Pin
Signal
Function
CRIT_ALMP

alarm signals
CRIT_ALMN

alarm signals
MAJ_ALMP

signals
RUNP

indicating signals
RUNN

indicating signals
MAJ_ALMN

alarm signals
MIN_ALMP

signals
MIN_ALMN

alarm signals

3-61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
NM_ETNTXP

with the NM
NM_ETNTXN
Negative pole for

communication with the NM
NM_ETNRXP

with the NM
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NM_ETNRXN

with the NM
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Valid Slots
One slot houses one EFI2 board.
Table 3-51 shows the valid slots for the EFI2 board.
Table 3-51 Valid slots for the EFI2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU71
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU37
Specifications of the EFI2

3-62

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
EFI2
13
15
3.5.5 STI
STI: Synchronous Timing Interface Board
Version Description
The functional versions of the STI board are TN52 and TNL1.
In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version
must be TN52.
Application
The STI, a clock interface unit, provides interfaces for input and output of clock signals.
Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the STI board.

Figure 3-37 and Figure 3-38 show the front panel of the STI board.
Figure 3-37 Front panel of the TN52STI board
STI
CLK1
CLK2
TOD1
TOD2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

3-63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 3-38 TNL1STI front panel

STI
CLK1
CLK2
TOD1
TOD2
F1
PHONE
NOTE
In an OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, if the TNL1STI board is configured, the SCC board version must be TN52.
Interfaces
The STI board functions as an interface board of the system for STG. The TNL1STI can provide
an orderwire phone interface and F1 interface. Table 3-52 provides descriptions of the interfaces
on the STI board.
Table 3-52 Interface description of the STI
Interfa
ce
Silkscreen
Connector
Function
CLK1/
CLK2
CLK1/
CLK2
RJ-45
CLK1/CLK2 interface can input or output time signals.

CLK1/CLK2 interface is bidirectional. That is, they input
and output signals at the same time.
TOD1/
TOD2
TOD1/
TOD2
RJ-45
TOD1/TOD2 interface can input or output time signals.

At any time, a TOD1/TOD2 interface can either input or
output time signals.
PHONE
PHON
E
RJ-45
Orderwire phone interface
F1
F1
RJ-45
F1 interface

Figure 3-39 describes the pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector.
3-64

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Pin Assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface, refer to Table 3-53.
Table 3-53 Pin assignment of the CLK1/CLK2 interface
Pin
Signal
Function
RJ0_E1_RX_N
2MHz/2Mbit input negative
RJ0_E1_RX_P
2MHz/2Mbit input positive
NC
Not connected
RJ0_E1_TX_N
2MHz/2Mbit output negative
RJ0_E1_TX_P
2MHz/2Mbit output positive
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Pin Assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface, refer to Table 3-54.
Table 3-54 Pin assignment of the TOD1/TOD2 interface
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Pin
Signal
Function
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
DCLS_IN0_N
DCLS/1PPS input negative
GND
Ground

3-65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
GND
Ground
DCLS_IN0_P
DCLS/1PPS input positive
DCLS_OUT0_N
DCLS/1PPS output negative
DCLS_OUT0_P
DCLS/1PPS output positive
Pin Assignment of the PHONE Interface

For the pin assignment of the PHONE interface, refer to Table 3-55.
Table 3-55 Pin assignment of the PHONE interface
Pin
Signal
Function
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
RING
Signal 1
TIP
Signal 2
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Pin Assignment of the F1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the F1 interface, refer to Table 3-56.
Table 3-56 Pin assignment of the F1 interface
3-66
Pin
Signal
Function
TX_P
Transmitting (+)
TX_N
Transmitting (-)
RX_P
Receiving (+)
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
RX_N
Receiving (-)

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
Valid Slots
One slot houses one STI board.
Table 3-57 shows the valid slots for the STI board.
Table 3-57 Valid slots for the STI board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU82
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU47
Specifications of the STI

l
(D) x 3.1 in. (H))
Weight of TN52STI: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb)
Weight of TNL1STI: 0.4 kg (0.88 lb)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN52STI
1.5
1.5
TNL1STI

3-67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack
About This Chapter

4.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800 has an independent power supply.
4.2 Slot Description
The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right.
4.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)
In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray
assembly and air filter. The air filter can be removed, cleaned and replaced.
4.4 PIU
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment
maintenance.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

4-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 6800. The subrack of the OptiX OSN
6800 has an independent power supply.
Figure 4-1 shows the structure of the subrack.
Figure 4-1 OptiX OSN 6800 subrack structure diagram
1
3
6
4
5
1. Indicator
2. Board area
5. Air filter
6. Fiber spool
7. Mounting ear
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel
before you connect cables.
4-2
Indicators: indicate the running status and alarm status of the subrack.
Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. 21 slots are available.
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack. The mechanical
VOA is also installed in this area.
Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack.
Air filter: The air filter protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic
cleaning.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface area: The interface area provides functional interfaces, such as management
interface, inter-subrack communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface,
alarm input and output interface. It is behind the subrack indicator panel.
Table 4-1 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be considered
as the same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Table 4-1 Technical specifications of the subrack

Item
Specification
Dimensions
497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 400 mm (H)
13 kg (28.6 lb.)
Maximum Power Consumption
1200 W
25 A (-48 V)
-48 V DC/-60 V DC
Table 4-2 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Unit Name
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(77F)a
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 55C
(131F)a
Remarks
Su
bra
ck
OTU subrack
566
722.2

install 17 10G OTUs (LSXes), one
SCC, two PIUs, one AUX, and one
fan tray assembly in an OTU
subrack.
OT
M
subr
ack
566
722.2

fan tray assembly in an OTM
subrack.
Subrack
1

4-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(77F)a
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 55C
(131F)a
Remarks
171.2
289.1

OAU101, one OBU103, one FIU,
one SC1, one SCC, two PIUs, one
AUX, and one fan tray assembly
in an OTM subrack.
OLA subrack
144.9
253.9

install two OAU101s, two FIUs,
in an OLA subrack.
FOADM
subrack
292.3
418.3

install two OAU101s, two VA4s,
two OBU103s, two MR4s, four
10G OTUs (LSXes), two FIUs,
in an FOADM subrack.
RO
AD
M
subr
ack
(two
dime
nsio
ns)
Subrack
1
88.4
101.4

install one M40, one D40, two
WSMD2s, two DAS1s, one SCC,
two PIUs, one AUX, and one fan
tray assembly in an ROADM
subrack.
Subrack
2
566
722.2

fan tray assembly in an ROADM
subrack.
RO
AD
M
subr
ack
(four
dime
nsio
ns)b
Subrack
1
161
273.8

install one WSMD4, one DAS1,
one M40, one D40, one SCC, two
PIUs, one AUX, and one fan tray
assembly in an ROADM subrack.
Subrack
2
161
273.8

Subrack
2
4-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
OTN
subr
ack
Ca
bin
et
Typical
Power
Consumpti
on at 25C
(77F)a
Maximum
Power
Consumpti
on at 55C
(131F)a
Remarks
Subrack
3
161
273.8

Subrack
4
161
273.8

Optical
subrack
171.2
289.1

OBU103, one OAU101, one SC1,
one FIU, one SCC, two PIUs, one
in an OTN subrack.
Electrica
l subrack
815
1000

install ten ND2s, two TQXes, two
TOMs, two XCSes, one SCC, two
assembly in an OTN subrack.
1422.2
1951.1
It is the power consumption when

the cabinet is installed with two
OTU subracks and one OTM
subrack 2 in an OTM cabinet.
OTM cabinet
(40x10 Gbit/s)
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis
and cabinet is calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
b: Subrack 1 and subrack 2 are used as subracks in the line dimensions at a four-dimension
RADOM station; subrack 3 and subrack 4 are used as subracks for adding/dropping local
services. Service boards can be configured in another subrack.

The board area of the subrack has 21 slots, labeled IU1 to IU21 from left to right.
Slots of the subrack are shown in Figure 4-2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

4-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 4-2 Slots of the subrack
Board area
X
C
I I I I I I I I S
U U U U U U U U /
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 I
U
9
X
C
S
/
I
U
1
0
5
I
U
1
1
I
U
1
2
I
U
1
3
I
U
1
4
I
U
1
5
I
U
1
6
S
C
C
/
I
U
1
7
P
I
S U
C
C P
/ I
I U
U
1 A
8 U
X
IU19
IU20
IU21
VOA area
IU1-IU17 are reserved for service boards.
IU18 is reserved for the active SCC.
IU17 is available for the standby SCC or the other service boards.
IU9 and IU10 are available for the XCS or for the other service boards.
IU15 and IU16 are available for the STG.
Mapping of Pair Slots

Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses
on the backplanes. For the two boards in the paired slots, the inter-board cross-connection can
be directly configured, and the cross-connect grooming of services can be realized without the
cross-connect board. The OptiX OSN 6800 supports seven paired slots, which are IU1 and IU2,
IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12, IU13 and IU14, IU15 and IU16. The
paired slots support distributed grooming.
4.3 Subrack Environment Control System (Fan)

In the OptiX OSN 6800 system, each subrack has a fan area. A fan area consists of fan tray
assembly and air filter. The air filter can be removed, cleaned and replaced.
Version Description

4-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 4-3 Functions of a fan tray assembly

Function
Description
Basic function
Dissipates the heat generated by an NE so that the NE can operate

normally within the designated temperature range.

speed.
Partitioned heat
dissipation
Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide

Hot swapping
Provides the hot swapping feature for the fan tray assembly.
Alarming
Status checking
Working Principle
operate normally within the designated temperature range. The fan tray assembly is installed in
the lower part of the subrack and blows air up, creating an air duct from bottom to top. Other
boards in the subrack are installed vertically, that is, the boards are parallel to the air duct. This
design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation.
Figure 4-3 and Figure 4-4 show the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN
6800.
Figure 4-3 Single-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Board area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

4-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 4-4 Multi-subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system

Airduct frame
Air outlet
Board area
Fan tray assembly
Optical fiber
laying area
Air inlet
NOTE
If multiple subracks are used, an air duct frame is required to help in heat dissipation.
The OptiX OSN 6800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 4-4. The partitioned
speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that you set the
speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.
FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode

l If the temperature of a partition is lower than 45C (113F), the fans
run at low speed.
l If the temperature of a partition is higher than 65C (149F), the fans
run at high speed.
l If the ambient temperature is from 45C to 65C (113F to 149F),
the fans in this partition run with linear stepless speed.
Adjustable Speed
Mode
4-8
Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium
Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In
Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed
and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Each OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation. The
subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure
4-5.
Figure 4-5 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
I
U
1
9
I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I I
U U U U U U U U U U
U U U U U U U U U
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
I
U
2
1
1
VOA
Fan Tray
Assembly
There are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two fans in each partition dissipate
heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if:

Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
The fan tray assembly consists of ten fans and one fan control unit. Figure 4-6 shows the
Status signal
Fan control unit
Status signal
FAN

supply 1
supply 2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

4-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

fan tray assembly.
Fan control board:

Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals.
the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fan in the same partition to run at
full speed.
Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of
the fan tray assembly.
Appearance
1. Air filter
3. Fans (ten in total)
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU22.

Table 4-5 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 6800 fan tray assembly.
NOTE
4-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Specification
Dimensions
493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm

(H) (19.44 in. (W) x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in.
(H))
Weight
3.6 kg
Power Consumptiona

l 60 W when the fans rotate at Medium
Speed
4.4 PIU
Only one functional version of the PIU board is available, that is, TN11.
4.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies
As a power interface unit, the PIU board accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering
functions.
4.4.4 Front Panel
4.4.5 Valid Slots
Specifications include performance indexes, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

Type
Table 4-6 lists the types of the TN11PIU.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

4-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 4-6 Type description of the PIU

Unit
Type
Description
TN11PIU
02
Provides the subrack with a -48 V DC or -60 V DC power through the

backplane, and provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V DC power.
4.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 6800 is configured with two PIU boards. The two boards provide power supplies
Figure 4-8 Reference diagram for the application of the PIU board
Backplane
-48V
PIU A
-48V
PIU B
Board A
Board B
-48V
-48V
The system accesses two power supplies through PIU A and PIU B. The power distribution parts
of the backplane are connected to different external power supplies. The power supplies provided
by PIU A and PIU B are converged and converted into the -48 V power supply at the service
board. In this manner, the PIU boards provide the -48 V power to each service board. The two
PIU boards are of mutual hot backup. There is no active/standby relation between the two PIU
boards. Thus, the subrack can work normally as long as any PIU board works normally. The
total power provided by the two PIU boards is equal to the power consumption of the subrack.
When the input voltage of the two PIU boards is different from each other, the two PIU boards
provide uneven current. The PIU board with higher voltage provides most of the current. When
the power output of one PIU board is abnormal or one PIU board is offline, the system reports
alarms on the related boards. During the removal of the faulty board and the insertion of a new
board, the system works normally. In this way, the maintenance is easier.

As a power interface unit, the PIU board accesses DC power and provides protection and filtering
functions.
4-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 4-7 Functions and features of the PIU board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides

lightning protection and power filtering functions.
l Provides the subrack with a -48 V DC or -60 V DC power through
the backplane, and provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V
DC power.
Fault detection
The SCC board detects the overvoltage or undervoltage of the input

voltage on each PIU board. The SCC board reports alarms to the NMS
after it detects overvoltage or undervoltage. In this case, the system
does not shut down the PIU board. The maintenance personnel should
check for the cause according to the alarms.
4.4.4 Front Panel


Figure 4-9 shows the front panels of the PIU boards.
Figure 4-9 Front panel of the PIU
PIU
RUN
NEG(-)
RTN(+)
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Running status indicator (RUN) - green

4-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
There is one power interface on the front panel. The interface is used to access DC power from
in a range from -40 V to -72 V.
4.4.5 Valid Slots

Table 4-8 shows the valid slots for the TN11PIU board.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU19 and IU20

Specifications include performance indexes, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Table 4-9 Performance specifications of the PIU board
Item
Unit
Value
V DC
-40 to -72
30
l
Dimensions of front panel: 28 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 65 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in.
(D) x 2.6 in. (H))
Power Consumption
4-14
Board
Typical Power Consumption at

25C (77F)

at 55C (131F)
TN11PIU
24 W
38 W

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Interfaces
maintenance.
These interfaces are located in the interface area of the subrack and on the front panel of the
AUX, as shown in Figure 4-10.
Figure 4-10 Interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 subrack
COM
ETH3
ALM01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM04
SERIAL
ALMI1
ALMI2
xcs
LAMP1 ALMP2
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PIU
RUN
NEG(-)
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RTN(+)
SubRACK_ID
NM_ETH1 NM_ETH2 ETH1

ETH2
Fan
RESET
STAT
PROG
LAMP TEST
AUX
ALM CUT
xcs
SCC
NOTE
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Remove the indicator panel
before you connect cables.
4.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area

The interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack
communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.
4.5.2 Interfaces on the Front Panel of the AUX Board
The AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and
emergent communication interface.
4.5.3 PIN Assignment of Interfaces
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

4-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 used for data communication and equipment maintenance
use the RJ-45 and the DB9 connectors. The pin assignment figures and the functions of the pins
are given in this section.
4.5.1 Interfaces in the Interface Area

The interface area provides functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack
communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.
The interface area is behind the indicator panel in the upper part of the subrack. Figure 4-11
shows the front panel.
Figure 4-11 Interfaces in the interface area
COM
ETH3
ALM01 ALM02 ALM03 ALM04
SERIAL
ALMI1 ALMI2 LAMP1 LAMP2
Description of interfaces in the interface area is list in Table 4-10.
CAUTION
damaged.
Table 4-10 Description of interfaces in the interface area
4-16
Interface
Silk-screen
Connector
Function
Commissioning
interface
COM
RJ-45
It is for the commissioning.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Silk-screen
Connector
Function
Inter-subrack
communication
interface
ETH3
RJ-45
l Connects a network cable from

the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3
interface on one subrack to
corresponding interfaces on the
other subracks to achieve the
communication between the
master subrack and slave
subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is
configured, the ETH3 interface
cannot be used for the
communication between the
master and slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a

CRPC or ROP board to achieve
communication with the CRPC
or ROP board.
ALMO1
ALMO2
ALMO3
ALMO4
Alarm output
and cascading
interface
RJ-45
l Alarm outputs are sent to the DC

power distribution cabinet
through the output interface and
the cascading interface. You can
configure it to be the other
outputs to implement integrated
display of alarms.
l The definitions for the pins of
the ALMO1 and ALMO2
interfaces are the same. The two
interfaces are used for output/
cascading, respectively. The
definitions for the pins of the
ALMO3 and ALMO4 interfaces
are the same. The two interfaces
are used for output/cascading,
respectively. For example, if
ALMO1 is used to output alarm
signals, ALMO2 can be
cascaded to ALMO1 on another
subrack.
l The OptiX OSN 6800 provides
eight alarm outputs. Defaults of
the first three are critical alarm,
major alarm, and minor alarm.
The other five are reserved.
Alarm outputs can be cascaded.
OAM interface
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
SERIAL
DB9
The OAM interface is a serial NM

interface, providing functions of
serial NM and supporting X.25
protocol.

4-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Silk-screen
Connector
Function
Alarm input
interface
ALMI1 ALMI2
RJ-45
External alarm signal input function

is designed for requirements when
the alarm signals of the external
systems (such as the environment
monitory) need remote monitoring.
The OptiX OSN 6800 provides
eight alarm inputs. The name of the
eight alarms can be configured to
cooperate with the external system
to implement remote monitoring of
external alarms.
Subrack alarm
output and
cascading
interface
LAMP1
LAMP2
RJ-45
This interface drives the running

indicators and alarm indicators of

The AUX board provides NM interface, NM cascading interface, inter-subrack normal and
emergent communication interface.
Figure 4-12 shows the front panel of the AUX. Slot IU21 houses the AUX board.
Figure 4-12 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
STAT
PROG
AUX
Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board is list in Table 4-11.
4-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 4-11 Description of interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board
Interface
Silk-screen
Connector
Function
NE
management
interface
NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2
RJ-45
l Connects the network interface

on the OptiX OSN 6800 through
a network cable to that on the
U2000 server to achieve the
management of the U2000 over
the OptiX OSN 6800.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2 network interface
on one NE through a network
cable to that on another NE to
achieve communication
between NEs.
Inter-subrack
communication
interface
ETH1/ETH2
RJ-45
l Connects the ETH1/ETH2/

ETH3 interface on one subrack
through a network cable to such
interfaces on the other subracks
to achieve the communication
between the master subrack and
slave subracks.
l Connects a network cable to a
CRPC or ROP board to achieve
communication with the CRPC
or ROP board.

The interfaces of the OptiX OSN 6800 used for data communication and equipment maintenance
use the RJ-45 and the DB9 connectors. The pin assignment figures and the functions of the pins
are given in this section.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

4-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
Pin Assignment of the COM Interface

For the pin assignment of the COM interface, refer to Table 4-12.
Table 4-12 Pin assignment of the COM interface
Pin
Signal
Function
ETNTX_P_1
Transmits the data positive
ETNTX_N_1
Transmits the data negative
ETNRX_P_1
Receives the data positive
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
ETNRX_N_1
Receives data negative
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected

4-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
ETH3_TXP

for inter-subrack ordinary
communications
ETH3_TXN

communications
ETH3_RXP
Receives the data positive for

inter-subrack ordinary
communications
ETH3_CRIT_TXP

for inter-subrack emergent
communications
ETH3_CRIT_TXN

communications
ETH3_RXN
Receives the data negative

communications
ETH3_CRIT_RXP

inter-subrack emergent
communications
ETH3_CRIT_RXN

communications

Table 4-14 Pin assignment of the ALMO1 and ALMO2 interfaces
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Pin
Signal
Function
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP

signal positive
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN

signal negative
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP

signal positive

4-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Pin
Signal
Function
ALM_SWITCH_OUT1P

signal positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT1N

signal negative
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN

signal negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT2P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT2N

negative

Table 4-15 Pin assignment of the ALMO3 and the ALMO4 interfaces
Pin
Signal
Function
ALM_SWITCH_OUT3P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT3N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT4P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT5P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT5N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT4N

negative
ALM_SWITCH_OUT6P

positive
ALM_SWITCH_OUT6N

negative

4-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
N.C
Not defined
RXD
Receive end of data
TXD
Transmit end of data
DTR

ready
GND
Ground
Reserved
Reserved
GND
GND
5VOADM
Power supply for OADM

Pin
Signal
Function
SWITCHI_IN1
Alarm input 1
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN2
Alarm input 2
SWITCHI_IN3
Alarm input 3
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN4
Alarm input 4
GND
Ground

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

4-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 4-18 Pin assignment of the ALMI2

Pin
Signal
Function
SWITCHI_IN5
Alarm input 5
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN6
Alarm input 6
SWITCHI_IN7
Alarm input 7
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
SWITCHI_IN8
Alarm input 8
GND
Ground

Pin
Signal
Function
CRIT_ALMP
Critical alarm signal positive
CRIT_ALMN
Critical alarm signal negative
MAJ_ALMP
Major alarm signal positive
RUNP
Power indicating signal

positive
RUNN
Power indicating signal

negative
MAJ_ALMN
Major alarm signal positive
MIN_ALMP
Minor alarm signal positive
MIN_ALMN
Minor alarm signal negative
Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH1 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface, refer to Table 4-20.
4-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 4-20 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH1 interface

Pin
Signal
Function
NM_ETNTXP
NM communications,
transmits the data positive
NM_ETNTXN
NM communications,
transmits the data negative
NM_ETNRXP
NM communications,
receives the data positive
NC
Not connected.
NC
Not connected.
NM_ETNRXN
NM communications,
receives the data negative
NC
Not connected.
NC
Not connected.
Pin Assignment of the NM-ETH2 Interface

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface, refer to Table 4-21.
Table 4-21 Pin assignment of the NM-ETH2 interface
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Pin
Signal
Function
NMJL_ETNTXP
Transmits the concatenated

data positive for NM
communications
NMJL_ETNTXN
Transmits the concatenated

data negative for NM
communications
NMJL_ETNRXP
Receives the concatenated

data positive for NM
communications
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected
NMJL_ETNRXN
Receives the concatenated

data negative for NM
communications
NC
Not connected
NC
Not connected

4-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
ETH1_TXP

communications
ETH1_TXN

communications
ETH1_RXP

communications
ETH1_CRIT_TXP

communications
ETH1_CRIT_TXN

communications
ETH1_RXN

communications
ETH1_CRIT_RXP

communications
ETH1_CRIT_RXN

communications

4-26
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_TXP

communications

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Pin
Signal
Function
ETH2_TXN

communications
ETH2_RXP

communications
ETH2_CRIT_TXP

communications
ETH2_CRIT_TXN

communications
ETH2_RXN

communications
ETH2_CRIT_RXP

communications
ETH2_CRIT_RXN

communications

4-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis
OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis
About This Chapter

5.1 Chassis Structure
The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact
intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short).
The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right.
5.3 Chassis Environment Control System (Fan)
Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis is equipped with a fan tray assembly.
5.4 PIU
PIU: Power Interface Unit
5.5 APIU
APIU: AC Power Interface Unit
maintenance.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

5-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5.1 Chassis Structure

The 3U-high, case-shaped chassis is the basic working unit of the OptiX OSN 3800 compact
intelligent optical transport platform (OptiX OSN 3800 for short).
The chassis of the OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with an independent DC or AC power supply
and can be installed in an ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinet, a standard ETSI 300 mm cabinet,
or a 19 and 23-inch open rack.
Figure 5-1 shows an OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.
Figure 5-1 OptiX OSN 3800 chassis
5
1
4
2
1. Grounding connector
2. Fiber frame
3. Board area
4. Antistatic jack
5. Fan indicator
Ground connector: Access the ground cables.
Fiber frame: Fiber jumpers in the service board area are routed through the fiber frame.
Board area: All service boards are installed in this area. In total, 11 slots are available.
Antistatic jack: The ESD strap is in this area.
Fan indicator: The fan indicator indicates the status of the fans.
Table 5-1 list the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3800 chassis.
Table 5-1 Technical specifications of the chassis
5-2
Item
Specification
Dimensions
436 mm (W) x 295 mm (D) x 134

mm (H) or 17.17 in. (W) x 11.61 in.
(D) x 5.28 in. (H))
Weight of an empty chassis (with backplane)
6 kg (13.23 lb)
350 W
Direct current
-48 V DC/-60 V DC
Alternative current
220 V AC

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Specification
Direct current
Alternative current
90 V AC to 285 V AC
Table 5-2 lists the power consumption of the common units in the OptiX OSN 3800.
Unit Name
Chassi
s
OADM
chassis
(Using
the
DPIU)
OADM
chassis
(Using
the
APIU)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption at
25C (77
F)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(131F)
Remarks
Chassis 1
99.4
135.3

you install two TN21MR2s,
four 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs, one
SCC, two DPIUs, one AUX,
and one fan tray assembly in
an OADM chassis.
Chassis 2
77.7
111.5

you install one DFIU, one
SC2, two OAU101s, one
an OADM chassis.
Chassis 1
162.2
207.5

you install two TN21MR2s,
four 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs, one
SCC, two APIUs, one AUX,
an OADM chassis.
Chassis 2
117.7
154.5

SC2, two OAU101s, one
an OADM chassis.
79.7
113.7

SC2, two OBU103s, one
an OLA chassis.
OLA chassis (Using

the DPIU)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

5-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit Name
OLA chassis (Using

the APIU)
Typical
Power
Consum
ption at
25C (77
F)
Maximum
Power
Consumpt
ion at 55C
(131F)
Remarks
119.7
156.7

SC2, two OBU103s, one
an OLA chassis.
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the chassis is the value in a certain configuration.
The value is for reference only. The actual power consumption of the chassis is calculated
based on the power consumption of each module.

The board area of the chassis has 11 slots, labeled IU1 to IU11 from left to right.
Slots of the chassis are shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Slots of the chassis
IU1
FAN
IU11
IU6/PIU
IU2
IU7/PIU
IU3
IU8/SCC
IU4
IU9/SCC
IU5
IU10/AUX
IU1 and IU11 can hold two OADM boards each, or hold one service board such as IU11.
IU2 to IU5 are reserved for the service boards.
The OptiX OSN 3800 can operate with AC and DC power supplies. The arrangement of boards
in IU6, IU7, IU8, and IU9 is different for the two power supply modes.
In DC mode
l
IU8 and IU9 are reserved for the SCC. IU9 is reserved for the active SCC. IU8 is available
for either the standby SCC or the OADM board.
In AC mode:
IU6, IU7, IU8 are reserved for two APIU boards. The IU9 is reserved for the SCC. The IU8 is
occupied and is not available for the standby SCC.
5-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Mapping of Mesh Group

A mesh group refers to a group of slots housing the boards whose overhead can be processed
by the buses on the backplane. The OptiX OSN 3800 supports a four-slot mesh group: IU2, IU3,
IU4, and IU5.
Pair slots refer to a pair of slots whose resident boards' overhead can be processed by the buses
on the backplanes. The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two paired slots: IU2 and IU3, IU4 and IU5.
Figure 5-3 Mesh group of the chassis
IU1
IU11
IU2
Paired slots
IU3
Mesh group
IU4
Paired slots
IU5
5.3 Chassis Environment Control System (Fan)

Each OptiX OSN 3800 chassis is equipped with a fan tray assembly.
Version Description

Table 5-3 shows the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Table 5-3 Functions of a fan tray assembly
Function
Description
Basic function
Dissipates heat generated by the equipment

so that the equipment can operate normally
within the designated temperature range.
l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic

fan speed regulation, depending on the
subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can
manually adjust the fan speed.
NOTE
Only when the chassis accesses DC power, Auto
Speed Mode is available.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

5-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
Description
Hot swapping
Provides the hot swapping function for the

fan tray assembly.
Alarming
Reports alarms of the fans and reports the inservice information.
Status checking
Checks the fan status.
Working Principle
The fan tray assembly is located on the left hand of the chassis. The fan blows air up, which
creates an air duct from left to right. Other boards in the chassis are installed horizontally and
are parallel to the air duct. This design helps to ensure reliable heat dissipation.
Figure 5-4 shows the heat dissipation and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 3800.
Figure 5-4 Front view of the heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Air inlet
Board Area
FAN
The OptiX OSN 3800 supports two fan speed modes, as shown in Table 5-4. It is recommended
that you set the speed mode to Auto Speed Mode.
NOTE
Auto Speed Mode is only available when the chassis operates with DC power.

FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Auto Speed Mode
The fan speed depends on the temperature.

l If the temperature is lower than 45C (113F), the fans run at low
speed.
l If the temperature is higher than 65C (149F), the fans run at high
speed.
l If the temperature ranges from 45C (113F) to 65C (149F), the
fans run at medium speed.
5-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

FAN Speed
Mode
Description
Adjustable Speed
Mode
Four fan speed modes are available: Stop, Low Speed, Medium
Speed, and High Speed. You can set the fan speed manually. In
Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in all partitions run at the same speed
and do not support the partitioned manual fan speed adjustment.
NOTE
If any one of the six fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96
Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if:

Two or more fans fail in the fan tray assembly.
The fan tray assembly consists of six fans and one fan control unit. Figure 5-5 shows the
functional block of the fan tray assembly.
Status signal
Fan control unit
Status signal
FAN

supply 1
supply 2
FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the chassis. FAN is the core of the
fan tray assembly.
Fan control board:

Controls the fan speed according to regulating signals.
Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm.
Monitors the fan speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of
the fan tray assembly.
Appearance
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

5-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


1
1. Fans (6 in total)
2. Operating status indicator
Valid Slots
One slot houses one fan tray assembly. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU12.

Table 5-5 list the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly for the OptiX OSN 3800
system.
NOTE

Item
Specification
Dimensions

10.34 in. (D) x 4.98 in. (H))
Weight
0.81 kg (1.79 lb)
Power Consumptiona

l 32.7 W when the fans rotate at High Speed
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 32.7 W.
5-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5.4 PIU
PIU: Power Interface Unit
5.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3800 has two PIU boards, which supply power to the system and provide 1+1
hot backup.
The PIU is a power interface unit, which accesses power and provides protection and filtering
functions.
5.4.4 Front Panel
There is one indicator and one interface on the front panel of the PIU board.
5.4.5 Valid Slots
Valid slots for the PIU board are IU6 and IU7.
Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

5.4.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3800 has two PIU boards, which supply power to the system and provide 1+1
hot backup.

The PIU is a power interface unit, which accesses power and provides protection and filtering
functions.
Table 5-6 Functions and features of the PIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V.

l Provides lightning protection and power filtering functions.
l Provides the fan tray assembly with a -48 V DC power after
voltage reduction.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

5-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5.4.4 Front Panel

There is one indicator and one interface on the front panel of the PIU board.

Figure 5-7 shows the front panel of the PIU board.
Figure 5-7 Front panel of the PIU board
RUN
DO not hot
plug this unit
S1
S4
S2
SCC
PIU
PIU
S5
AUX
SCC
S11
S6
NEG(-)
RTN(+)
PIU
Indicator
l
Interface
There is one power interface on the front panel of the PIU board. The interface is used to access
the DC power in the range of -40 V to -72 V.
5.4.5 Valid Slots

Valid slots for the PIU board are IU6 and IU7.

Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
5-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 5-7 Performance specifications of the PIU
Item
Unit
Value
V DC
-38.4 to -72
l
Dimensions of front panel: 218.50 mm (H) x 107.76 in. (W) or 8.6 in. (H) x 4.2 in. (W))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21PIU
10
12
5.5 APIU
APIU: AC Power Interface Unit
Only one functional version of the APIU board is available, that is, TN21.
5.5.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3800 has two APIU boards, which supply power to the system and provide 1
+1 hot backup.
The TN21APIU is a power interface unit, which accesses AC power and provides protection
and filtering functions.
5.5.4 Front Panel
There is one indicator and one interface on the front panel of the APIU board.
5.5.5 Valid Slots
IU6, IU7 and IU8 together house two APIU boards. That is, each APIU requires 1.5 slots.
5.5.6 Specifications of the APIU
Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, and weight.

Only one functional version of the APIU board is available, that is, TN21.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

5-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5.5.2 Application
The OptiX OSN 3800 has two APIU boards, which supply power to the system and provide 1
+1 hot backup.

The TN21APIU is a power interface unit, which accesses AC power and provides protection
and filtering functions.
Table 5-8 Functions and features of the APIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses AC power in a range from 90 V to 285 V, and provides

-48 V DC power.
l Provides lightning protection, filtering and power factor
adjustment functions for the accessed power.
l Supplies power to the fan tray assembly.
5.5.4 Front Panel

There is one indicator and one interface on the front panel of the APIU board.

Figure 5-8 shows the front panel of the APIU board.
5-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 5-8 Front panel of the APIU board
APIU
RUN
ON
OFF
~100-240V
S1 S11 APIU
S2
S3 APIU
S4 SCC
S5 AUX
Indicator
There is one indicator on the front panel of the APIU board.
l
Interfaces
There is only one power interface on the front panel of the APIU board. The interface is used to
access the AC power in the range of 90 V to 285 V.
5.5.5 Valid Slots

IU6, IU7 and IU8 together house two APIU boards. That is, each APIU requires 1.5 slots.
5.5.6 Specifications of the APIU

Specifications include performance specifications, dimensions, and weight.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

5-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 5-9 Performance specifications of the APIU
Item
Unit
Value
Input power voltage range
V AC
90 to 285
Input frequency
Hz
50
Input power current
A AC
Output rated voltage
V DC
-48
Output rated current
A DC
6.3
Output power
300
l
Dimensions of front panel: 37.5 mm (H) x 100 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) or 1.5 in. (H) x 3.9
in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D)
Weight: 1.8lb. (0.8 kg)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21APIU
50
55

Interfaces
maintenance.
The AUX board provides NM interfaces and extended auxiliary interfaces.
The OptiX OSN 3800 provides RJ-45 and the DB9 ports to enable data communication and
equipment maintenance. This section shows the pin assignments of the RJ-45 and DB9
connectors and describes the pins of each connector.

The AUX board provides NM interfaces and extended auxiliary interfaces.
Figure 5-9 shows the front panel of the AUX board. The AUX board is housed in slot IU10.
5-14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 5-9 Interfaces on the front panel of the AUX board
STAT
PROG
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
EXT
AUX
Table 5-10 describes the functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board.
Table 5-10 Functions of each interface on the front panel of the AUX board
Interface
Silk-Screen
Connector
Function
NM interface
NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2
RJ-45
l Connects the network interface

on the OptiX OSN 3800 through
a network cable to that on the
U2000 server so that the
U2000 over the OptiX OSN
3800.
l Connects the NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2 network interface
on one NE through a network
cable to that on another NE to
achieve communication
between NEs.
Extended
auxiliary
interfaces
EXT
DB9, RJ-45
Accesses and outputs each kind of

external signals.
NOTE
EXT interfaces include ALMO, LAMP1, LAMP2, ETH, SERIAL, ALMI1, and ALMI2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

5-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The OptiX OSN 3800 provides RJ-45 and the DB9 ports to enable data communication and
equipment maintenance. This section shows the pin assignments of the RJ-45 and DB9
connectors and describes the pins of each connector.

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
.

1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
Pin Assignment of the COM Interface

For the pin assignment of the COM interface, refer to Table 5-11.
5-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 5-11 Pin assignment of the COM interface

Pin
Signal
Function
ETNTX_P_1

the data
ETNTX_N_1
Negative pole for

transmitting the data
ETNRX_P_1

the data
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined
ETNRX_N_1

the data
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined
Pin Assignment of the ALMO Interface

For the pin assignment of the ALMO interface, refer to Table 5-12.
Table 5-12 Pin assignment of the ALMO interface
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Pin
Signal
Function
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP

signals
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN

alarm signals
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTP

signals
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP

alarm signals
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN

alarm signals
MAJ_SWITCH_OUTN

alarm signals
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTP

alarm signals
CRIT_SWITCH_OUTN

alarm signals

5-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
N.C
Not defined
RXD
Receive end
TXD
Transmit end
DTR

ready
GND
Ground
Reserved
Reserved
GND
Ground
V5_OADM
Power supply for OADM

Pin
Signal
Function
SW_IN1P
Alarm input signal 1
GND
Ground
SW_IN2P
SW_IN3P
GND
Ground
GND
Ground
SW_IN4P
GND
Ground

5-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Pin
Signal
Function
SW_IN5P
GND
Ground
SW_IN6P
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined
GND
Ground
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined

Pin
Signal
Function
RED+

alarm signals
RED-

alarm signals
YELLOW+

signals
GREEN+

indicating signals
GND

indicating signals
YELLOW-

alarm signals
ORG+

signals
ORG-

alarm signals
Pin Assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 Interfaces

For the pin assignment of the NM-ETH1/NM_ETH2 interface, refer to Table 5-17.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

5-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 5-17 Pin assignment of the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 interfaces
5-20
Pin
Signal
Function
ETNTX12P

with an NM
ETNTX12N
Negative pole for

ETNRX12P

with an NM
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined
ETNRX12N

with an NM
NC
Not defined
NC
Not defined

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 Frame
Frame
About This Chapter

6.1 DCM Frame
The DCM frame is used to hold DCM modules. DCM modules compensate for the positive
dispersion of transmitting fiber, to help maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
6.2 CRPC Frame
The CRPC frame is used to hold the CRPC board, fan tray assembly, and power distribution
box. The frame is installed into the open rack.
6.3 Digital Video O-E Converter
The digital video O-E converter performs O-E conversion of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI
services.
6.4 Fiber Spooling Frame
The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil. It can accommodate 4 x 10 m
fiber jumpers and hold eight fixed or tunable attenuators.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

6-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 Frame
6.1 DCM Frame

The DCM frame is used to hold DCM modules. DCM modules compensate for the positive
dispersion of transmitting fiber, to help maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
After an optical signal is transmitted over a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is expanded
because of accumulation of the positive dispersion. An expanded pulse has a negative impact
on system transmission performance. A DCM module is a passive device that compensates for
dispersion. The DCM module uses the inherent negative dispersion of a dispersion compensation
fiber to offset the positive dispersion of a transmission fiber to prevent pulse expansion.
The system provides two types of DCM: the DCM based on dispersion compensation fiber
(DCF) and the DCM based on Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG).
The DCF-based DCM and the FBG-based DCM have similar compensation features. The
differences are as follows:
l
The insertion loss of the DCF-based DCM increases with the distance in km.
The insertion loss of the FBG-based DCM is always 4 dB regardless of the distance in km.
The DCM modules are available in different compensation distance specifications: 5 km (3.1
mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.), 60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.),
100 km (62.1 mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.), 160 km (99.4 mi.), 200 km (124.2 mi.), and 240 km (149.1
mi.).
Each DCM frame holds two DCM modules. The DCM frame is installed on the columns of a
cabinet with mounting airs and screws, as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 DCM frame
1. DCM frame
6-2
2. DCMs

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 Frame
Table 6-1 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (G.652
fiber)
Item Type
Distance
(mi./km)
Max.
Inserti
on Loss
(dB)
DSC
R
PMD
(ps)
PD
L
(dB
)
Max.
Allow
Powera
(dBm)
Operatio
n
Wavelen
gth (nm)
DCM(S)
3.1/5
2.3
0.3
0.1
20
DCM(T)
6.2/10
2.8
90%
to
110%
0.3
0.1
20
1528 to
1568
DCM(A)
12.4/20
3.3
0.4
0.1
20
DCM(B)
24.8/40
4.7
0.5
0.1
20
DCM(C)
37.3/60
6.4
0.6
0.1
20
DCM(D)
49.7/80
0.7
0.1
20
DCM(E)
62.1/100
0.8
0.1
20
DCM(F)
74.5/120
9.8
0.8
0.1
20
FBG-DCM
(80)
49.7/80
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(100)
62.1/100
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(120)
74.5/120
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(160)
99.4/160
1.6
0.4
23
FBG-DCM
(200)
124.2/200
1.6
0.4
23
FBG-DCM
(240)
149.1/240
1.6
0.4
23
a: The Max. Allow Power refers to the maximum input optical power that does not damage
the optical module.
LEAF fiber)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Item Type
Distance
(mi./km)
Max.
Inserti
on Loss
(dB)
DSC
R
PMD
(ps)
PD
L
(dB
)
Max.
Allow
Powera
(dBm)
Operatio
n
Wavelen
gth (nm)
DCM(A)
12.4/20
0.4
0.3
20
DCM(B)
24.8/40
90%
to
110%
0.5
0.3
20
1528 to
1568

6-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 Frame
Item Type
Distance
(mi./km)
Max.
Inserti
on Loss
(dB)
DCM(C)
37.3/60
DCM(D)
DSC
R
PMD
(ps)
PD
L
(dB
)
Max.
Allow
Powera
(dBm)
5.9
0.7
0.3
20
49.7/80
6.9
0.8
0.3
20
DCM(E)
62.1/100
7.8
0.9
0.3
20
DCM(F)
74.5/120
8.8
1.0
0.3
20
FBG-DCM
(120)
74.5/120
3.7
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(160)
99.4/160
3.7
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(200)
124.2/200
3.7
1.0
0.2
23
FBG-DCM
(240)
149.1/240
3.7
1.0
0.2
23
Operatio
n
Wavelen
gth (nm)
the optical module.
fiber)
Item Type
Distance
(mi./km)
Max.
Insert
ion
Loss
(dB)
DSC
R
PMD
(ps)
PDL
(dB)
Max.
Allow
Powera
(dBm)
Opera
tion
Wavel
ength
(nm)
DCM(S)
3.1/5
0.2
0.1
20
DCM(T)
6.2/10
90%
to
110%
0.3
0.1
20
1528 to
1568
DCM(A)
12.4/20
0.5
0.1
20
the optical module.
6-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 Frame
Table 6-4 Performance requirement of dispersion compensation optical fiber of C-band (TWRS fiber)
Item Type
Distance
(mi./km)
Max.
Insert
ion
Loss
(dB)
DSC
R
PMD
(ps)
PDL
(dB)
Max.
Allow
Powera
(dBm)
Opera
tion
Wavel
ength
(nm)
DCM(A)
12.4/20
2.3
0.3
0.1
20
DCM(B)
24.8/40
2.8
90%
to
110%
0.3
0.1
20
1528 to
1568
DCM(C)
37.3/60
3.3
0.4
0.1
20
DCM(D)
49.7/80
3.8
0.4
0.1
20
DCM(E)
62.1/100
4.2
0.5
0.1
20
DCM(F)
74.5/120
4.7
0.5
0.1
20
the optical module.
Table 6-5 Mechanical specifications of the DCM frame

Item
Specification
Dimensions
48 mm (H) x 484 mm (W) x 270.5 mm (D)

(1.9 in. (H) x 19.1 in. (W) x 10.6 in. (D) )
Weight
1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
H = Height, W = Width, D = Depth
6.2 CRPC Frame

The CRPC frame is used to hold the CRPC board, fan tray assembly, and power distribution
box. The frame is installed into the open rack.
Figure 6-2 shows the appearance of a CRPC frame. In the middle of the frame, the one with the
front panel is the CRPC board. The fan tray assembly is at the left of the board. At the right are
two power supplies as mutual backup.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

6-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 Frame
Figure 6-2 CRPC frame
2
1
1: Fan tray assembly
2: CRPC board
3: Power distribution box
Table 6-6 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame

Item
Value
Mechanical specifications
535 mm (W) x 257 mm (D) x 86 mm (H) or 21.1 in.

(W) x 10.1 in. (D) x 3.4 in. (H)
Weight
6.6 lb.(3 kg)
6.3 Digital Video O-E Converter

The digital video O-E converter performs O-E conversion of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI
services.
Figure 6-3 and Figure 6-4 show the appearance of the digital video O-E converter.
6-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 Frame
Figure 6-3 Front view of the digital video O-E converter
Figure 6-4 Rear view of the digital video O-E converter
Table 6-7 Mechanical specifications

Item
Value
Weight
1.58 kg (3.5 lb.)
Maximum Power
40 W (fully-loaded frame with all

accessories) Note - power consumption
dependent on the SFP type
Dimensions
482.6 mm (W) x 105.66 mm (D) x 45.72 mm

(H) (19 in.(W) x 4.16 in.(D) x 1.8 in.(H))
Table 6-8 Electrical specifications
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Item
Value
Impedance
75
Connector
BNC per IEC 61169-8 Annex A
Reclocked Standard
SMPTE 424M (3Gb/s), SMPTE 292M, (1.5Gb/s),

SMPTE 259M (270Mb/s),DVB-ASI

6-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 Frame
Item
Value
Equalization
Automatic to 80m @ 3Gb/s, 100m@1.5Gb/s, 250m

@ 270Mb/s
Table 6-9 Optical specifications

Item
Value
Optical Output:
Number of Outputs
Up to 2 per SFP
Connector
LC
Optical Power
-1dBm 1dBm
Operating Wavelength
1310nm
Optical Input:
Number of Inputs
Up to 2 per SFP
Connector
LC
Operating Wavelength
1310nm
Maximum Input Power
-1dBm
Power Box of the Digital Video O-E Converter

The SDI board has a separate power box. Figure 6-5 and Figure 6-6 show the appearance of
the power box.
Figure 6-5 Front view of the power box
6-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 Frame
Figure 6-6 Rear view of the power box
Table 6-10 Technical specifications of the power box

Item
Value
Number of Inputs
Input Voltage
Auto ranging, 100-240V AC
Frequency
50/60Hz
Power
250W max per input
Number of Outputs
6 Primary + 6 Secondary
Output Voltage
12V DC
Output Current
3.5 A
Dimensions
482.6 mm (W) x 119.38 mm (D) x 45.72 mm (H)

(19 in.(W) x 4.7 in.(D) x 1.8 in.(H))
Environmental Temperature
-20C to +70C (-4 F to 158 F)
6.4 Fiber Spooling Frame

The fiber spooling frame is used to store fiber jumpers in a coil. It can accommodate 4 x 10 m
fiber jumpers and hold eight fixed or tunable attenuators.
The fiber spool box is installed at the bottom of the cabinet, more than 50 mm away from the
subrackchassis. Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 show a fiber spooling frame.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

6-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

6 Frame
Figure 6-7 Fiber spooling frame
2
1: Captive screw
2: Fiber holder
3: Fiber spool
4: Attenuator holder
Figure 6-8 Drawing out the tray
1
2
3
1: Box
6-10
2: Mounting ear
3: Cable hole

4: Tray
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

7 Overview of Boards
Overview of Boards
About This Chapter

7.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions
The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser
hazard level label.
7.2 Bar Code for Boards
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, which indicates the basic information about
the board, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board
characteristic code.
7.3 Board Category
The following types of boards are available for the system.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

7-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

7.1 Board Appearance and Dimensions

The board appearance and dimensions include the board appearance, dimensions, and the laser
hazard level label.
7.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions
This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.
7.1.2 Laser Hazard Level Label
Lasers are of two hazard levels according to the value of the output power.
7.1.1 Appearance and Dimensions

This section describes the appearance and dimensions of the board.
CAUTION
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap is
properly grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.
Table 7-1 shows the board appearance and dimensions.
Table 7-1 Board appearance and dimensions
Board Appearance
7-2
Board
Name
Number
of Slots
for Each
Board
Height
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
TN11L4G
264.6
25.4
220.0

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Appearance
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Name
Number
of Slots
for Each
Board
Height
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
TN11OA
U1
264.6
50.8
220.0
TN11M40
264.6
76.2
220.0
TN11AU
X
107.6
25.4
220.0

7-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Appearance
Board
Name
Number
of Slots
for Each
Board
Height
(mm)
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
TN12LSX
L
264.6
101.6
220.0
TN21MR4
118.9
25.4
220.0
7.1.2 Laser Hazard Level Label

Lasers are of two hazard levels according to the value of the output power.
WARNING
It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface during the installation and maintenance
of the fiber, because the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.
Table 7-2 shows the laser hazard levels of the unit.
Table 7-2 Hazard levels
7-4
Hazard Level
Label
Reference Power Range
HAZARD LEVEL 1
<10.00 dBm (<10.00 mW)

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Hazard Level
Label
Reference Power Range
HAZARD LEVEL 1M
10.00 dBm - 21.3 dBm (10.00

mW - 136 mW)
CAUTION
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE

LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
7.2 Bar Code for Boards

There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, which indicates the basic information about
the board, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name, and board
characteristic code.
7.2.1 Overview
There is a bar code on the front panel of each board, from which the basic information about the
board can be obtained, such as the BOM code, delivery information, board version, board name,
and board model number. The bar code of some of such boards also include a characteristic code.
The board characteristic code comprises information about frequency of signals, type of the
optical module, wavelength, and so on.
7.2.2 Characteristic Code
The board characteristic code indicates information about frequency of signals, type of the
7.2.1 Overview
The information about a bar code can be queried on the U2000, for details refer to Supporting
Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
Figure 7-1, Figure 7-2 and Figure 7-3 show a bar code.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

7-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 7-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)

Delivery
information
Board model
number
Board version
(TN12)
2102314840107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 19210AG

Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
BOM
Board
name
Characteristic
code

Delivery
information
Board model
number
Board version
(TN12)
2102315653108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01 TPT

Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
BOM
Board Tunable Characteristic

name
code

Delivery
information
Board version
Board model
number
030FBQ1073000001 N TN11MR8 01 -92109280V

Last four numbers of
the BOM
Environmental
friendliness flag
Board name
Characteristic
code
(N: Environmentally
unfriendly)
7-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

7.2.2 Characteristic Code

For the detailed description of the board characteristic code, refer to B Bar Code for Boards.
7.3 Board Category

The following types of boards are available for the system.
Table 7-3 lists the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800.
Table 7-3 Boards for the OptiX OSN 8800
Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
Optical
transpon
der unit
TN12L
DM
2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/

s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion
board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11L
DMD

board, dual fed and selective receiving
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11L
DMS

board, single fed and single receiving
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12L
DX
2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11LE
M24
22GE + 210GE and 2OTU2

ethernet switch board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11LE
X4
410GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11L
OG
8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12L
OG
TN11L
OM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
8-port multi-service multiplexing &

optical wavelength conversion board

7-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
TN12L
OM
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12L
QMD

unit, dual fed and selective receiving
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12L
QMS

unit, single fed and single receiving
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11LS
Q
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12LS
X
10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12LS
XL
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12LS
XLR
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11LS
XR
10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12L
WXS
arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s)

wavelength conversion board (single
transmit)
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11T
MX
4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
asynchronism mux OTU-2
wavelength conversion board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12T
MX
7-8
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
TN13L
QM
TN13LS
X
Tributar
y unit
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
TN52T
DX
2 x 10G tributary service processing

board

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Line unit
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TN52T
OG
8 x GE service processing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN52T
OM
8 x multi-rate ports service processing

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN52T
QX
4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service

processing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN53TS
XL
40 Gbit/s tributary service processing

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN52N
D2
2 x 10G line service processing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN52N
Q2
4 x 10G Line Service Processing

Board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN54N
Q2
TN52N
S2
10G Line Service Processing Board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN52N
S3
40G line service processing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN54N
S3
PID unit
TN11B
MD4
PID Interleaver Board (C-band),

200/100 GHz
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11B
MD8
PID Interleaver Board (C_Band),

200/50 GHz
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12EL
QX
4Electrical OTU2 with 410G

Tributary Board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN54E
NQ2
4 x 10G Line Service Processing

Board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN54N
PO2
12 x OTU2 PID Board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN55N
PO2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

7-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Crossconnect
unit and
system
and
commun
ication
unit
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TN12PT
QX
12 OTU2 PID board with 410G

Tributary
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN16X
CH
High Cross-connection, System

Control and Clock Processing Board
Not
suppor
ted
Not
support
ed
Support
ed
TNK2S
XM
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized

cross connect board
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN52X
CH

cross connect board
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN52X
CM
Cross & connect process board

(Support high- cross and low-cross)
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TNK2X
CT

cross connect board
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN51SC
C
system control and communication

unit
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN52SC
C
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TNK2S
CC
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Not
suppor
ted
Not
support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN16A
UX
system auxiliary interface unit
TN51A
UX
Optical
multiple
xer and
demultip
lexer unit
7-10
TN11M
40
40-channel multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11D4
0
40-channel demultiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TN11M
40V
40-channel multiplexing unit with

VOA
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11D4
0V
40-channel demultiplexing unit with

VOA
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12FI
U
fiber interface unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN13FI
U
TN11IT
L
interleaver board
TN12IT
L
Optical
add and
drop
multiple
xing unit
Reconfig
urable
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TN11SF
IU
fiber interface unit for sync timing
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11C
MR2
CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop

multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11C
MR4
CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop

multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11D
MR1
CWDM 1-channel bidirectional

optical add/drop multiplexing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11M
R2
2-channel optical add/drop

multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11M
R4

multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11M
R8

multiplexing unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11M
R8V

multiplexing unit with VOA
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11SB
M2
2-channel CWDM single-fiber

bidirectional add/drop board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11R
DU9
9-port ROADM demultiplexing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed

7-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
optical
add and
drop
multiple
xing unit
TN11R
MU9a
9-port ROADM multiplexing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11R
OAM
reconfigurable optical adding board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN12W
SD9
9-port wavelength selective switching

demultiplexing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN13W
SD9
TN12W
SM9

multiplexing board
TN13W
SM9
TN11W
SMD2

multiplexer and demultiplexer board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11W
SMD4

multiplexer and demultiplexer board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12W
SMD4
Optical
amplifier
unit
TN11W
SMD9
9-port wavelength selective

multiplexing and demultiplexing
board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11C
RPC
case-shape Raman pump amplifier

unit for C-band
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11D
AS1
optical amplifier unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11H
BA
high-power booster amplifier board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11O
AU1
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12O
AU1
7-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TN11O
BU1
optical booster unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12O
BU1
TN11O
BU2
TN12O
BU2
Optical
supervis
ory
channel
unit
Optical
protectio
n unit
TN11H
SC1
High Power Unidirectional optical

supervisory channel board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12SC
1
unidirectional optical supervisory

channel unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12SC
2
bidirectional optical supervisory

channel unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11ST
2
bidirectional optical supervisory

channel and timing transmission unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11D
CP
2-channel optical path protection unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12D
CP
TN11O
LP
optical line protection unit
TN12O
LP
Spectru
m
analyzer
unit
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TN11SC
S
sync optical channel separator unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11M
CA4
4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11M
CA8
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11O
PM8
8-channel optical power monitoring

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed

7-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TN11W
MU
wavelength monitoring unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Variable
optical
attenuato
r unit
TN12V
A1
1-channel variable optical attenuator

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN12V
A4
4-channel variable optical attenuator

unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Optical
power
and
dispersio
n
equalizin
g unit
TN11D
CU
dispersion compensation board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11T
DC
single-wavelength tunable-dispersion
compensation board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
Clock
unit
TN52ST
G
centralized clock board
Not
suppor
ted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
TNK2S
TG
OCS
system
unit
7-14
SSN4BP
A
optical booster and pre-amplifier

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN2D
CU
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN1E
GSH
16 x GE Ethernet switching and

processing board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SF
64
1 x STM-64 optical interface board

with the FEC function
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN1SF
64A

Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SF
D64

Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
ROPA
subsyste
m unitb
Interface
area unitc
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
SSN4SL
64
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SL
D64
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN3SL
H41
16 x STM-4/STM-1 optical interface

board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SL
O16
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SL
Q16
4xSTM-16 optical interface board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
SSN4SL
Q64
4 x STM-64 line interface board
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN11G
FU
gain flatness unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11R
GU
ROPA gain unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN11R
OP
ROPA pumping unit
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN16A
TE
interface board of alarm & timing &

expanding
Not
suppor
ted
Not
support
ed
Support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TN51A
TE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TN16EF
I
EMI filter interface board
Not
suppor
ted
Not
support
ed
Support
ed
TN51EF
I1
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed

7-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Categor
y
Board
Name
Board Description
Opti
X
OSN
8800
T64
OptiX
OSN
8800
T32
OptiX
OSN
8800
T16
TN51EF
I2
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
TNL1S
TI
synchronous timing interface board
Suppo
rted
Not
support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Not
support
ed
Suppo
rted
Support
ed
Support
ed
TN52ST
I
TN51PI
U
power interface unit
TN16PI
U
a: For TN11RMU9: OptiX OSN 8800 T16 only supports the TN11RMU902.
b: For details of the ROPA subsystem unit refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.
c: For details of the interface area unit refer to 3 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack.
7-16
Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
Optical
transponder
unit
TN11ECOM
Enhanced communication interface unit
TN11L4G
Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit

Ethernet line capacity
TN11LDGS
2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
TN11LDGD
2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LDM
2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion board
TN11LDMD

conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving
TN11LDMS

conversion board, single fed and single receiving
TN12LDX
2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN11LEM24
22GE + 210GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch board
TN11LEX4
410GE and 2OTU2 ethernet switch board
TN11LOG
TN12LOG
TN11LOM
TN12LOM
8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength

conversion board
TN11LQG
4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
TN13LQM

conversion unit
TN11LQMD

conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LQMD
TN11LQMS
TN12LQMS

conversion unit, single fed and single receiving
TN11LSQ
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
TN11LSX
TN12LSX
TN13LSX
TN11LSXL
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
TN12LSXL
TN11LSXLR
40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay unit
TN12LSXLR
TN11LSXR
TN11LWX2
arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength

conversion board
TN11LWXD
arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength

conversion board (double transmit)
TN11LWXS

conversion board (single transmit)
TN12LWXS
TN11TMX
TN12TMX
Tributary unit
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TN11TBE
4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux

OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board

7-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN11TDG
2 x GE tributary service processing board
TN11TDX
2 x 10G tributary service processing board
TN12TDX
TN52TDX
TN52TOG
TN11TOM
8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
TN52TOM
TN11TQM
4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
TN12TQM
TN11TQS
4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing

board
TN11TQX
4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
TN52TQX
Line unit
TN11TSXL
40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
TN11ND2
2 x 10G line service processing board
TN12ND2
TN52ND2
TN51NQ2
4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
TN52NQ2
TN11NS2
TN12NS2
TN52NS2
TN11NS3
40G line service processing board
TN52NS3
TN54NS3
PID unit
7-18
TN11BMD4
PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz
TN11BMD8
PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
TN12ELQX
4Electrical OTU2 with 410G Tributary Board
TN12PTQX
12 OTU2 PID board with 410G Tributary

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
Cross-connect
unit and
system and
communicatio
n unit
TN11XCS
centralized cross connect board
TN12XCS
TN11SCC
system control and communication unit
TN51SCC
TN52SCC
Optical
multiplexer
and
demultiplexer
unit
TN11AUX
TN11M40
40-channel multiplexing unit
TN11D40
40-channel demultiplexing unit
TN11M40V
40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
TN11D40V
40-channel demultiplexing unit with VOA
TN11FIU
TN12FIU
TN13FIU
TN11ITL
interleaver board
TN12ITL
Optical add
and drop
multiplexing
unit
Reconfigurabl
e optical add
and drop
multiplexing
unit
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TN11SFIU
TN11CMR2
CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
TN11CMR4
TN11DMR1
CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop

multiplexing board
TN11MR2
2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
TN11MR4
TN11MR8
TN11MR8V
8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA
TN11SBM2
2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop

board
TN11RDU9
9-port ROADM demultiplexing board
TN11RMU9
9-port ROADM multiplexing board
TN11ROAM
reconfigurable optical adding board
TN11WSD9
9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing

board

7-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
TN11WSM9
9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
TN11WSMD2
2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and

demultiplexer board
TN11WSMD4
4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and

demultiplexer board
TN12WSMD4
Optical
amplifier unit
TN11WSMD9
9-port wavelength selective multiplexing and

demultiplexing board
TN11CRPC
case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band
TN11DAS1
TN11HBA
high-power booster amplifier board
TN11OAU1
TN12OAU1
TN11OBU1
TN12OBU1
TN11OBU2
TN12OBU2
Optical
supervisory
channel unit
TN11HSC1
High Power Unidirectional optical supervisory channel

board
TN11SC1
unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC1
TN11SC2
bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC2
Optical
protection unit
TN11ST2
bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing

transmission unit
TN11DCP
TN12DCP
TN11OLP
7-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN12OLP
Spectrum
analyzer unit
Variable
optical
attenuator unit
TN11SCS
TN11MCA4
TN11MCA8
TN11OPM8
8-channel optical power monitoring board
TN11WMU
wavelength monitoring unit
TN11VA1
1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
TN12VA1
TN11VA4
TN12VA4
Optical power
and dispersion
equalizing unit
TN11DCU
TN11TDC
single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation

board
Clock unit
TN11STG
centralized clock board
ROPA
subsystem
unita
TN11GFU
gain flatness unit
TN11RGU
ROPA gain unit
TN11ROP
ROPA pumping unit
TN11EFI1
TN11PIU
Interface area
unitb
a: For the details of the ROPA subsystem unit, refer to ROPA Subsystem User Guide.
b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 4 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
Optical
transponder
unit
TN11ECOM
Enhanced communication interface unit
TN11L4G
Line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x Gigabit Ethernet

line capacity
TN11LDGS
2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
TN11LDGD
2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving

7-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN12LDM

conversion board
TN11LDMD

conversion board, dual fed and selective receiving
TN11LDMS

conversion board, single fed and single receiving
TN12LDX
2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
TN11LOG
TN12LOG
TN11LOM
TN12LOM
8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength

conversion board
TN11LQG
4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
TN13LQM

conversion unit
TN11LQMD

conversion unit, dual fed and selective receiving
TN12LQMD
TN11LQMS
TN12LQMS
TN11LSX

conversion unit, single fed and single receiving
TN12LSX
TN13LSX
TN11LSXR
TN11LWX2
arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength

conversion board
TN11LWXD

conversion board (double transmit)
TN11LWXS

conversion board (single transmit)
TN12LWXS
TN11TMX
TN12TMX
Tributary unit
7-22
4 channels STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux

OTU-2 wavelength conversion board
TN11TBE
10 Gigabit ethernet tributary board
TN11TDG
2 x GE tributary service processing board

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN11TDX
2 x 10G tributary service processing board
TN52TOG
TN11TOM
8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
TN52TOM
TN11TQM
4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
TN12TQM
Line unit
TN11TQS
4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing

board
TN11NS2
TN12NS2
TN52NS2
Optical
multiplexer
and
demultiplexer
unit
Optical add
and drop
multiplexing
unit
TN21DFIU
bidirectional fiber interface board
TN13FIUa
TN21FIU
TN11SFIU
TN21CMR1
TN11CMR2
TN21CMR2
TN11CMR4
TN21CMR4
TN11DMR1
TN21DMR1
TN11MR2
CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop

multiplexing board
TN21MR2
TN11MR4
TN21MR4
Optical
amplifier unit
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TN11SBM2
2-channel CWDM single-fiber bidirectional add/drop

board
TN11DAS1
TN11OAU1

7-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
TN12OAU1
TN11OBU1
TN12OBU1
TN11OBU2
TN12OBU2
System control
and
communicatio
n unit
TN21SCC
system control and communication unit
TN22SCC
TN21AUX
TN22AUX
Optical
supervisory
channel unit
TN11HSC1
High Power Unidirectional optical supervisory channel

board
TN11SC1
unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC1
TN11SC2
bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
TN12SC2
Optical
protection unit
TN11ST2
bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing

transmission unit
TN11DCP
TN12DCP
TN11OLP
TN12OLP
Spectrum
analyzer unit
Variable
optical
attenuator unit
TN11SCS
TN11MCA4
TN11MCA8
TN11OPM8
8-channel optical power monitoring board
TN11VA1
TN12VA1
TN11VA4
TN12VA4
7-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Category
Board Name
Board Description
Optical power
and dispersion
equalizing unit
TN11DCU
Interface area
unitb
TN21PIU
TN21APIU
AC Power Interface Unit
a: For TN13FIU: OptiX OSN 3800 only supports the TN13FIU01.

b: For the details of the interface area unit, refer to 5 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

7-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8 Optical Transponder Unit
Optical Transponder Unit
About This Chapter

8.1 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit
8.2 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity
8.3 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
8.4 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
8.5 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
8.6 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and
selective receiving
8.7 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and
single receiving
8.8 LDX
LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
8.9 LEM24
LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE + 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board
8.10 LEX4
LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board
8.11 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
8.12 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.13 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
8.14 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board
8.15 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual
fed and selective receiving
8.16 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single
fed and single receiving
8.17 LSQ
LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
8.18 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
8.19 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
8.20 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
8.21 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
8.22 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board
8.23 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)
8.24 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)
8.25 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU2 wavelength conversion
board
8-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.1 ECOM
ECOM: enhanced communication interface unit
The available functional version of the ECOM board is TN11.
8.1.2 Application
The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/
3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE
service.
The ECOM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and loopback
on the client side.
8.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow
The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply
module.
8.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board.
8.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one ECOM board.
8.1.7 Board Service Configuration
This section describes the interface information on the U2000.
8.1.8 ECOM Parameters
This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NM.
8.1.9 Specifications of the ECOM
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

The available functional version of the ECOM board is TN11.
This manual describes all boards supported by the product. However, the availability of the
boards is subject to the PCNs. For the availability of the boards, contact the product manager of
your Huawei local office.
8.1.2 Application
The ECOM board is used to achieve the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/
3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A, and to converge/deconverge 8xFE services to/from 1xGE
service.
Application Scenario 1: Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN

6800/3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A
The management signal and service signal of the OptiX OSN 900A are together transmitted to
the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 over the line. The FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 separates
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

the signal received into management signal and service signal. The service signal is processed
by the OTU board. The management signal is accessed by the ECOM board through the FE port
and then is transmitted to the SCC board through the backplane.
For the position of the ECOM in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800/3800 and OptiX
OSN 900A, see Figure 8-1 and Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-1 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 6800 and
OptiX OSN 900A
OptiX OSN
900A
OptiX OSN
900A
Service signal
F
I Management
signal
U
Management
signal
F
I Service signal
U
OTU
ECOM
ETH
OptiX OSN
6800
SCC
OTU
NOTE
Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 6800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.
Figure 8-2 Position of the ECOM board in the network built with the OptiX OSN 3800 and
OptiX OSN 900A
OptiX OSN
900A
OptiX OSN
900A
Service signal
F
I Management
signal
U
Management
signal
F
I Service signal
U
OTU
ECOM
ETH
OptiX OSN
3800
SCC
OTU
NOTE
Each FIU board of the OptiX OSN 3800 accesses the signals from only one OptiX OSN 900A.
Application Scenario 2: Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE

Service
When used for convergence or deconvergence, the ECOM board can be used only in the CWDM
system. For the position of the ECOM in the WDM system, see Figure 8-3.
8-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-3 Position of the ECOM board in the WDM system

GE
GE
MUX
FE
DMUX
ECOM
FE
ECOM
DMUX
MUX
GE
8
GE
Client side
Client side
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the MUX and DMUX boards shown in the figure are the OADM boards used
in the CWDM system.

The ECOM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and loopback
on the client side.
Table 8-1 Functions and features of the ECOM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Achieves the DCN communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/

3800 and the OptiX OSN 900A.
l Converges/deconverges 8xFE services to/from 1xGE service.
Client-side service
type
FE: Ethernet service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
WDM
specification
Supports the CWDM specifications.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the transmission of one GE signal each to

working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through the
backplane. Supports the transmission of one GE signal to the paired slots
through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one GE signal from one
board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three
boards belonging to the mesh group.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Tunable
wavelength
function
Not Supported
PRBS function
Not Supported
Protection scheme
Not Supported

8-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events monitoring
l Provides remote monitoring (RMON) of the Ethernet service.
ALS function
Not Supported
Test frame
Not Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not Supported
eSFP
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the

client side.
l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of

the board.

WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

The ECOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power supply
module.
Figure 8-4 and Figure 8-5 show the functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board.
8-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM board
Backplane(management signal transmission)
FE
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
E/O
RX8
L2 switching
module
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Cross-connect
module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Control and communication module

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow (Achieving DCN Communication between the OptiX OSN 6800/3800
and the OptiX OSN 900A)
The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the SCC board,
and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one channel of FE signals (management signals)
from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module, and
groomed by the backplane to the SCC board through the ETH interface.
Receive direction
The L2 switching module receives FE signals from the SCC board, and then sends them to
the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the FE electrical signals, and
then outputs the optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the ECOM

Backplane(service cross-connection)
GE
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
E/O
RX8
L2 switching
module
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Cross-connect
module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow (Converging/Deconverging 8xFE Services to/from 1xGE Service)

The client side of the ECOM board accesses FE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the ECOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ECOM to the WDM side
of the ECOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching
module. The module performs operations such as converging eight channels of FE signals
into one channel of GE signals. Then, the module outputs one channel of GE signals to the
cross-connect module.
The cross-connect module performs operations such as service cross-connection of the GE
signals.
The GE signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths GE optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant GE optical signals
at CWDM standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN optical interface.
Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
8-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

After the O/E conversion, the GE signals are sent to the cross-connect module. The module
performs operations such as service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs one
channel of GE signals.
The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends a maximum of eight
channels of FE signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l
Client-side optical module

The module consists of a client-side receiver and a client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of FE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of internal
electrical signals to FE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
WDM-side optical module

The module consists of a WDM-side receiver and a WDM-side transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to
GE optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical interface.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
L2 switching module
Forwards service signals.
Implements the convergence/deconvergence of the service signals.
Cross-connect module
OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals
between the ECOM and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through
the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical signals
from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards
belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming service signals are
GE signals.

Controls board operations.
Controls the operations on each module of the board according to CPU instructions.
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working states and voltage
detection from each functional module on the board.
Communicates with the SCC board.
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Power supply module

8-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each
module on the board.
8.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board.

Figure 8-6 shows the front panel of the ECOM board.
Figure 8-6 Front panel of the ECOM board
ECOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
OUT
IN
ECOM
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel.
8-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board hardware status indicator (STAT) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Service active status indicator (ACT) - green
Board software status indicator (PROG) - dual-colored (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) - triple-colored (red, green, yellow)
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ECOM board. Table 8-2 lists the type
and function of each interface.
Table 8-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ECOM board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives single-wavelength signals from the optical

demultiplexing unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
Transmits single-wavelength signals to the optical

multiplexing unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX8
LC
Transmits service signals to the client-side equipment.
RX1-RX8
LC
Receives service signals from the client-side

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the maximum output
optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
8.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one ECOM board.
Table 8-3 shows the valid slots for the ECOM board.
Table 8-3 Valid slots for ECOM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NM
are listed in Table 8-4.
Table 8-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ECOM board displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces. One
transmits signals and the other receives signals.
Port Description
Figure 8-7 shows the application model of the ECOM board. Table 8-5 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 8-7 Port diagram of the ECOM board
Client side
PORT3
PORT4
PORT5
PORT6
PORT7
PORT8
PORT9
PORT10
WDM side
VCTRUNK1
101( AP1/AP1)-1
L2 switching module
8-12
1(IN/OUT)-1
Cross-connect WDM-side optical

module
module

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-5 Meaning of NM port of the ECOM board

Port Name
Meaning
PORT3-PORT10
These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces RX1/TX1RX8/TX8.
VCTRUNK1
Internal virtual port.
AP1
Internal convergence port.
IN/OUT
Corresponding to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
If the ECOM board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM
interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Service Mode and HUB
Mode.
NOTE
If the HUB mode need be configured, there must be one-to-one connection between ports, which need not
be set on the U2000.
If the service mode need be configured, the following items must be created on the U2000:
l
During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create the cross-connection between
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the eight
channels of FE optical signals and one channel of GE electrical signals accessed from the
client-side ports is implemented through the L2 switching module.
Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and AP port of other boards (The GE
services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client
side of other boards for the inter-board services deconvergence), as shown (1) in Figure
8-8.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP of the ECOM board and LP port of other boards (The GE
services accessed from the client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards for the inter-board services convergence), as shown (2) in Figure
8-8.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of GE level between the AP port and the IN/OUT port of the ECOM, realizing
the cross-connect grooming of GE services.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-8 Cross-connection diagram of the ECOM

Client side
Other board
101(AP1/AP1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
103(AP3/AP3)-1
201(LP/LP)-3
104(AP4/AP4)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
1
ECOM
101(AP1/AP1)-1
2
The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to the client side of
other boards
The client side of the ECOM board are cross-connected to theWDM side of
other boards
1
2
8.1.8 ECOM Parameters

For parameters of ECOM, refer to Table 8-6.
Table 8-6 ECOM parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Displays the position of the optical

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Set and query the optical interface name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused
The Channel Use Status parameter sets the

occupancy status of the current channel of
a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM
Interface) for more information.
Default: Used
Loopback
Non-Loopback, Inloop,
Outloop
Default: NonLoopback
8-14
The Loopback parameter sets the loopback

mode for the current optical interface of a
board.
See D.27 Loopback (WDM Interface) for
more information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On
The Laser Status parameter sets and

queries the laser status of a board.
See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)
for more information.
Default: On
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Queries the operating wavelength at the

WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type
Queries the band type.
Tunable
Wavelength Range
Queries the tunable wavelength range at the

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
The Planned Wavelength No./

Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz)
parameter sets the wavelength number,
wavelength and frequency of the current
optical interface on the WDM side of a
board.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./
(WDM Interface) for more information.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Board Mode
HUB Mode, Service

Mode
Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets

the band type of the current working
wavelength.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM
Used to configure the working mode of the
board.
Default: HUB Mode
8.1.9 Specifications of the ECOM

NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board
and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board
are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Optical Modules on the Client Side

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
100BASEFX-10 km
100BASEFX-40 km
100BASEFX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
10
40
80
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Eye pattern
mask
IEEE802.3z-compliant
Receiver parameter specifications at point R

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
(EOL)
dBm
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
Table 8-7 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical modules on the client side (FE)
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
8-16
Value
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
NRZ
NRZ

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Target distance
km
Value
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate (eSFP
CWDM)-80 km
40
80

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
Receiver sensitivity
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27

8-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Optical Modules on the CWDM Side

Table 8-8 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical modules on the CWDM side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

Operating wavelength
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean launched

power
dBm
Minimum extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
8-18
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F)
TN11ECOM
19.6
21.6
8.2 L4G
L4G: line wavelength conversion unit with 4 x GE line capacity
The available functional version of the L4G board is TN11.
8.2.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the L4G board implements the conversion between six
channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
The L4G is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical
layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
8.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board.
8.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one L4G board.
8.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G
The board characteristic code indicates the information about frequency of signals, type of the
8.2.9 L4G Parameters
This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried with the NM.
8.2.10 Specifications of the L4G

The available functional version of the L4G board is TN11.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.2.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the L4G board implements the conversion between six
For the position of the L4G board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 Position of the L4G board in the WDM system
1
MUX
L4G
GE
G.694.1
Client side
G.694.1
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
GE
L4G
6
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The client-side six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

The L4G is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the electrical
Table 8-9 Functions and features of the L4G board
8-20
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converges up to six non-full bandwidth GE service signals into four GE

service signals and multiplexes these four signals into an OTU 5G/FEC 5G
signal. Converts the signals into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
GE: Ethernet service at a rate of 1.25 Gbit/s

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services

each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively through
the backplane. Supports the transmission of four GE signals to the paired
slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU5G interface on WDM-side.

l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU5G and ODU5G.
l Supports TCM function for ODU5G.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ESC
function
Supports the ESC function, transmitting the supervisory signal within the
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Supported
NOTE
The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for bidirectional
EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source C-VLAN and Sink CVLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
FEC
encoding
Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Monitors the BIP8 bit error count to help locate line failures.
l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as
well as the optical power.
l Monitors the alarms and performance events of the OTN.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
ALS
function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser shutdown
(ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical transmitter
module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical signal is
received on the WDM side.
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported

8-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Electricallayer ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
l Supports VLAN SNCP.
l Supports client-side 1+1 protection.
l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection.
l Supports OWSP protection.
l Supports MS SNCP protection.
eSFP
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the client

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
MAC
Supported
PHY
Supported
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with

which transparently transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

All L2 protocols including xSTP,
LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, and PPP
MPLS protocols
All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP,
OSPF, RIP, and IGRP
Protocols or standards
(performance monitoring) for
processing services
IEEE 802.3x pause frame

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1p priority
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IGMP
STP
RSTP

The L4G board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, signal processing module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 8-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board.
8-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the L4G board
GE
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
6GE
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
4GE
L2
switching
module
E/O
Client-side
optical 6GE
module
E/O
GE
CrossOTN
encapsulation
connect
processing
and mapping
module
module
module
4GE
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the L4G board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the L4G board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the L4G to the WDM side
of the L4G, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives a maximum of six channels of flat-rate GE optical
signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
After O/E conversion, the six channels of electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching
module. The module performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs
a maximum of four channels of GE signals to the signal processing module.
The signal processing module performs operations such as the service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals.
The OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receive direction
8-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The WDM-side optical module receives OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals at DWDM
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface. Then, the
module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as OTU 5G/FEC 5G framing, decoding of
FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs four channels of GE signals.
The L2 switching module deconverges the GE signals and sends six channels of the signals
with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX6
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of six channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from six channels of internal electrical
signals to GE optical signals.

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals.
OTU 5G/FEC 5G optical signals.
L2 switching module

The module consists of the cross-connect module, GE encapsulation and mapping module,
and OTN processing module.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. Grooms the electrical
signals between the L4G and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other
three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The grooming
service signals are GE signals.
GE encapsulation and mapping module
8-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU 5G/
FEC 5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE
performance.
OTN processing module
Frames OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals, processes overheads in OTU 5G/FEC 5G signals,
and performs FEC encoding and decoding.
l

Power supply module

8.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board.

Figure 8-11 shows the front panel of the L4G board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-11 Front panel of the L4G board
L4G
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
OUT
IN
L4G
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the L4G board. Table 8-10 lists the type
8-26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the L4G board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX6
LC
RX1-RX6
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one L4G board.
Table 8-11 shows the valid slots for the L4G board.
Table 8-11 Valid slots for the L4G board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
8.2.7 Characteristic Code for the L4G

For the detailed description of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the L4G board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 8-12 describes the application model of the L4G board. Table 8-13 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 8-12 Port diagram of the L4G board
Client side
WDM side
PORT3
PORT4
PORT5
PORT6
PORT7
PORT8
VCTRUNK1 101(AP1/AP1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
L2 swithing module
201(LP/LP)-1
1(IN/OUT)-1
Cross-connect Service processing WDM-side optical

module
module
module
Table 8-13 Meaning of NM port of the L4G board
8-28
Port Name
Meaning
PORT3-PORT8
These ports correspond to the client-side

optical interfaces RX1/TX1-RX6/TX6
respectively.
VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4
Internal virtual ports.
AP1-AP4
Internal convergence ports.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Port Name
Meaning
LP
Internal logical port. The optical paths are

numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
IN/OUT
Corresponding to the WDM-side optical

interfaces.
If the L4G board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The cross-connect convergence between the six channels
of GE optical signals and the four channels of GE electrical signals accessed from the clientside ports is realized through the L2 switching module.
NOTE
One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports.

The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 1.25 Gbit/s.
There are one-to-one port connections between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of
the cross-connect module. These connections do not need to be set on the U2000.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services is
implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections can
be created:
Create the cross-connection between the internal AP and LP ports of the L4G board
(create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by
(1) and (2) in Figure 8-13.
Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the LP port of
other boards, as shown by (3) in Figure 8-13. (The GE services accessed from the client
side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and inter-board service convergence.)
Create the cross-connection between the AP port or RX/TX port of other boards and
the LP port of the L4G board, as shown by (4) in Figure 8-13. (The GE services accessed
from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the L4G
board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the L4G board and the LP port of other
board, as shown by (5) in Figure 8-13. (This cross-connection enables the passing-through
of the broadcast services.)
Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the L4G board and the AP port of other
boards, as shown by (6) in Figure 8-13. (The GE services accessed from the client side of
the L4G board are cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the
inter-board service deconvergence.)
The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. This connection does not need to be configured on the U2000.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-13 Cross-connection diagram of the L4G board

Client side
Other board
101(AP1/AP1)-1/3(RX1/TX1)-1
4
102(AP2/AP2)-1/4(RX2/TX2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1/5(RX3/TX3)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
104(AP4/AP4)-1/6(RX4/TX4)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
101(AP1/AP1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
Client side
102(AP2/AP2)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-2
2
103(AP3/AP3)-1
104(AP4/AP4)-1
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
L4G
1
The straight-through of the board
The internal cross-connection of the board

The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the

WDM side of the L4G board
The WDM side of the L4G board are cross-connected to the WDMside of other boards
The client side of the L4G board are cross-connected to thec lient side of other boards
Other board
5
6
TN11L4G/TN11LDGD/TN11LDGS/TN11LOG/TN12LOG/TN11LQG/TN13LQM/
TN11LQMD/TN12LQMD/TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS/ TN11TBE/TN11TDG/TN11TOM/
TN11TQM/TN12TQM
8.2.9 L4G Parameters

For parameters of L4G, refer to Table 8-14.
Table 8-14 L4G parameters
8-30
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Displays the position of the optical interface.
Optical
Interface Name
Sets and queries the optical interface name.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

occupancy status of the current channel of a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side:
On
The Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for

the current optical interface of a board.
See D.27 Loopback (WDM Interface) for more
information.
The Laser Status parameter sets and queries the laser
status of a board.
See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more
information.
l Client side:
Off
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown
Disabled,
Enabled
Service Mode
OTN, SDH
Default: Enabled
Default: OTN
LPT Enabled
Disabled,
Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Disabled,
Enabled
Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter

determines whether to automatically shut down the
laser after the signals received by a board are lost.
See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM
The Service Mode parameter sets and queries the
working mode of a board on the line side.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more
information.
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to
enable the link pass-through (LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more
information.
The FEC Working State parameter determines
whether to enable or disable the forward error
correction (FEC) function of the current optical
interface.
See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side

optical interface of a board.
Band Type

8-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDMside optical interface of a board.
Planned
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196
.050 to
80/1560.61/19
2.100
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/

Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength
number, wavelength and frequency of the current
optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230
.330 to
18/1611.00/18
8.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DE
G
Default: C
Default: None
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band

type of the current working wavelength.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for
more information.
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the
relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or
channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger
conditions of the protection group in which this OTU
board resides.
See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM
8.2.10 Specifications of the L4G

NOTE
8-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 8-15 Specifications of GE optical modules on the client side
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

8-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Modules on the Client Side

Table 8-16 Specifications of eSFP CWDM optical modules on the client side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
8-34
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side

Table 8-17 Specifications of optical modules on the DWDM side
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
3400 ps/nm
3400 ps/nm- Tunable
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-2
-3
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
Dispersion tolerance
ps/nm
3400
3400

Receiver type
APD
APD
range
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-25
-25
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C ( 77F ) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C ( 131F ) (W)
TN11L4G
NRZ-fixed (5G)
(3400 ps/nm)
50.0
55.0
NRZ-tunable (5G)
(3400 ps/nm)
53.0
58.0
8.3 LDGD
LDGD: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, dual fed and selective receiving
The available functional version of the LDGD board is TN11.
8.3.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGD board implements the conversion between two
channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendation, and dually
feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
The LDGD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the
electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
8.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board.
8.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDGD board.
8.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD
The characteristic code for the LDGD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
frequency values of two channels of optical signals on the WDM side.
8.3.9 LDGD Parameters
8.3.10 Specifications of the LDGD

The available functional version of the LDGD board is TN11.
8-36

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.3.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGD board implements the conversion between two
channels of GE signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendation, and dually
For the position of the LDGD board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-14.
Figure 8-14 Position of the LDGD board in the WDM system
MUX
DMUX
1
GE
1
LDGD
G.694.1/
G.694.2
DMUX
MUX
MUX
G.694.1/
LDGD
G.694.2
DMUX
GE
2
DMUX
Client side
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side

The LDGD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the
Table 8-18 Functions and features of the LDGD board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one OTU1/STM-16 signal

and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.
l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM
side.
Client-side
service type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE

services each to working/protection cross-connection boards
respectively through the backplane. Supports the transmission of two
GE signals to the paired slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one
l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side.
OTN function
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping
process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM and PM functions for OTU1 and ODU1.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
Supports DWDM and CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this

module, the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side
within the range of the 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing
of 100 GHz.
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
Not supported.
LPT function
Supported
FEC encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser
as well as the optical power.
8-38
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side provide the automatic laser
shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding
optical transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down
if no optical signal is received on the WDM side.
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
eSFP

client side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Protocols or
standards (nonperformance
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3z
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LDGD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-15 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board.
Figure 8-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGD board
Backplane (service cross-connection)
GE
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
Client side
Optical
module
E/O
GE
Cross- encapsulation
OTN
connect and mapping Processing
module
module
module
Splitter
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
O/E
WDM side
Optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGD board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LDGD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGD to the WDM side
of the LDGD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of GE optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, encapsulation
and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs
one channel of OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths OTU1
8-40

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of
identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1OUT2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at CWDM standard
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU1 signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as received signal selection, OTU1 framing, decoding of
FEC, demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs two channels of GE signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the two channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to GE optical signals.

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU1 optical signals.
OTU1 optical signals.

signals between the LDGD and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE
performance.
Frames OTU1 signals, processes overheads in OTU1 signals, and performs FEC
encoding and decoding.
l

Power supply module

8.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board.

Figure 8-16 shows the front panel of the LDGD board.
8-42

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-16 Front panel of the LDGD board
LDGD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LDGD
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDGD board. Table 8-19 lists the
type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-19 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGD board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDGD board.
Table 8-20 shows the valid slots for the LDGD board.
Table 8-20 Valid slots for LDGD board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
8.3.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGD

The characteristic code for the LDGD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 8-21.
Table 8-21 Characteristic code for the LDGD board
8-44
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
The frequency of forth

optical signal
The last four digits of the

frequency value of the first
channel of signals on the
WDM side.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
Last four digits

optical signal

frequency value of the
second channel of signals on
the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDGD board is 92109210.
l
"92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM
side both are 192.10 THz.


Table 8-22 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGD board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 8-17 shows the application model of the LDGD board. Table 8-23 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 8-17 Port diagram of the LDGD board
3 (RX1/T X1)-1
4 (RX2/T X2)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-2
Cross-connect
mo dule
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Servi ce
p rocessing
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2 /OUT2)-1
WDM-si de
opti cal modu le

8-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-23 Meaning of NM port of the LDGD board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2
These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces.
LP
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and

2.
IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2
These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical

interfaces.
If the LDGD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports. The cross-connect grooming of GE services
is implemented through the cross-connect module. The following three cross-connections
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGD
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGD board and the LP
port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGD board
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
service convergence), as shown (3) in Figure 8-18.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the LP port
of the LDGD board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGD board for protection and the inter-board
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the LP port.
8-46
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGD board and the LP port of
other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGD board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
as shown (5) in Figure 8-18.
The two paths of the LP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2
ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-18 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGD board

Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
4
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
2
1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
LDGD
1

The client side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the
LDGD board
The WDM side of the LDGD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Other board
3
4
5
TN11TQM/TN12TQM
8.3.9 LDGD Parameters

For parameters of LDGD, refer to Table 8-24.
Table 8-24 LDGD parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name

8-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

occupancy status of the current channel of a
board.
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

mode for the current optical interface of a board.
information.
The Laser Status parameter sets and queries the
laser status of a board.
See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for
more information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Service Mode
OTN, SDH
Default: Enabled
Default: OTN
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
8-48

determines whether to automatically shut down
the laser after the signals received by a board are
lost.
The Service Mode parameter sets and queries
the working mode of a board on the line side.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.
The LPT Enabled parameter determines
whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for
more information.
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Queries the operating wavelength at the WDMside optical interface of a board.
Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range

Default: Enabled

interface.
See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.
050 to
80/1560.61/192
.100
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength

(nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the
wavelength number, wavelength and frequency
of the current optical interface on the WDM side
of a board.
Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.
330 to
18/1611.00/188
.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M FullDuplex
Default: C
Default: 9600
Default: AutoNegotiation
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the

band type of the current working wavelength.
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and
queries the maximum packet length supported by
a board and is applicable to the boards supporting
Ethernet services.
See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets
and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.
See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM

channels of an OTU board as SD switching
trigger conditions of the protection group in
which this OTU board resides.
8.3.10 Specifications of the LDGD

NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
8-50
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

8-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm2mWAPD
12800 ps/
nmTunable
6400 ps/
nm-Four
Channels
-Tunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-4
-4
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-8
-8
-5
-5
-5
-5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-28
-18
-28
-28
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
8-52
APD
1300 to
1575

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 8-28 Specifications of optical modules on the CWDM side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
1600 ps/nm-4mW
NRZ

Maximum mean launched
power
dBm

power
dBm
0.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation
nm
6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
APD
Operating wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
Minimum receiver overload
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F)
TN11LDGD
Fixed (2.5 G) (12800

ps/nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
34.0
37.4
38.0
41.8
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mWAPD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
Tunable (2.5 G)
(12800 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
8.4 LDGS
LDGS: 2 x Gigabit Ethernet unit, single fed and single receiving
The available functional version of the LDGS board is TN11.
8.4.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGS implements the conversion between two
The LDGS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the
The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGS board.
8.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDGS board.
8.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS
8.4.9 LDGS Parameters
8.4.10 Specifications of the LDGS
8-54

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The available functional version of the LDGS board is TN11.
8.4.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDGS implements the conversion between two
For the position of the LDGS board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-19.
Figure 8-19 Position of the LDGS board in the WDM system
1
MUX
GE
Client side
G.694.1/ LDGS
G.694.2
DMUX
DMUX
LDGS G.694.1/
G.694.2
WDM side
MUX
GE
2
WDM side
Client side

The LDGS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength and cross-connection at the
Table 8-29 Functions and features of the LDGS board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Multiplexes two GE optical signals into one 2.5 Gbit/s OTU1/STM-16 signal
and converts the signal into standard DWDM wavelength compliant with
ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.
694.2. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type

8-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of two channels of GE services

the backplane. Supports the transmission of two GE signals to the paired
slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of two GE signals from one
OTN
function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU1 signals. The mapping
process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
service signal.
FEC
encoding
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT
function
Supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Monitors items such as the bias current and temperature of the laser as well
as the optical power.
8-56
ALS
function
Test frame
Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Opticallayer ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3z
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LDGS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board.
Figure 8-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDGS board
GE
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
O/E
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDGS board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LDGS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDGS to the WDM side
of the LDGS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
8-58

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN optical interface.
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs two
channels of GE signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l



signals between the LDGS and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


performance.
l

Power supply module

8.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDGS board.

Figure 8-21 shows the front panel of the LDGS board.
8-60

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-21 Front panel of the LDGS board
LDGS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT
IN
LDGS
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on front panel of the LDGS board. Table 8-30 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-30 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDGS board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDGS board.
Table 8-31 shows the valid slots for the LDGS board.
Table 8-31 Valid slots for LDGS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
8.4.7 Characteristic Code for the LDGS

Code for OTUs.


8-62

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-32 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDGS board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 8-22 shows the application model of the LDGS board. Table 8-33 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 8-22 Port diagram of the LDGS board
Client side
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
1(IN/OUT)-1
WDM-side
optical module
Table 8-33 Meaning of NM port of the LDGS board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2
LP
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 and

2.
IN/OUT
If the LDGS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
can be created.
8-63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LDGS
board (Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LDGS board and the LP
port of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LDGS board
are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
of the LDGS board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LDGS board for protection and the inter-board
NOTE
8-64
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LDGS board and the LP port of
other boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LDGS board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
The two paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the IN/
OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-23 Cross-connection diagram of the LDGS board
Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
4
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
2
1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
LDGS
1

The client side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LDGS board
The WDM side of the LDGS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Other board
2
3
4
5
TN11TQM/TN12TQM
8.4.9 LDGS Parameters

For parameters of LDGS, refer to Table 8-34.
Table 8-34 LDGS parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical
Interface
Name

8-65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

occupancy status of the current channel of a board.
See D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side:
On
The Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for

information.
The Laser Status parameter sets and queries the laser
status of a board.
See D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface) for more
information.
l Client side:
Off
Automatic
Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Service Mode
OTN, SDH
Default: Enabled
Default: OTN
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
8-66

determines whether to automatically shut down the
The Service Mode parameter sets and queries the
working mode of a board on the line side.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for more
information.
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to
enable the link pass-through (LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface) for more
information.
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
Queries the operating wavelength at the WDM-side

Band Type
Default: Enabled

interface.
See D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface) for
more information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
Queries the tunable wavelength range at the WDMside optical interface of a board.
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries

the maximum packet length supported by a board and
is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet
services.
See D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Planned
Wavelength
No./
Wavelength
(nm)/
Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196
.050 to
80/1560.61/19
2.100
Default: 9600
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230
.330 to
18/1611.00/18
8.780
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/

Frequency (THz) parameter sets the wavelength
number, wavelength and frequency of the current
optical interface on the WDM side of a board.
See D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type

of the current working wavelength.
See D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Ethernet
Working
Mode
AutoNegotiation,
1000M FullDuplex
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and

queries the working mode of the Ethernet.
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD,
OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger
conditions of the protection group in which this OTU
board resides.
See D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)
8.4.10 Specifications of the LDGS

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
8-68
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-3
-3
-3

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620

8-69
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm2mWAPD
12800 ps/
nmTunable
6400 ps/
nm- Four
Channels
-Tunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
-2
-2
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
8-70

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Eye pattern mask
Value
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm2mWAPD
12800 ps/
nmTunable
6400 ps/
nm- Four
Channels
-Tunable
PIN
APD
APD
APD
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-28
-18
-28
-28
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
1300 to
1575

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
1600 ps/nm-4mW
NRZ
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

power
dBm

power
dBm
2.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm

8-71
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1600 ps/nm-4mW
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F)
TN11LDGS
Fixed (2.5G) (12800

ps/nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
32.0
35.2
36.0
39.6
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mWAPD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
Tunable (2.5G)
(12800 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
8.5 LDM
LDM: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
8-72

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is, TN12.
8.5.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDM board converts between signals at the rate of 100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
The LDM board is mainly used to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board.
8.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDM board.
8.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM
8.5.9 LDM Parameters
8.5.10 Specifications of the LDM

Only one functional version of the LDM board is available, that is, TN12.
Type
The system provides two types of the LDM board: One has a pair of input and output optical
interfaces, and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 8-39 lists the
types of the LDM board.
Table 8-39 Type description of the LDM board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Type
Description
LDM
One type is the single transmitting and

single receiving board.
The WDM-side interfaces are

IN1/OUT1.
Other type is the dual-fed selectively

receiving board.
The WDM-side interfaces are

IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.

8-73
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of LDM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed and
selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.
8.5.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDM board converts between signals at the rate of 100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LDM board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-24 and Figure 8-25.
Figure 8-24 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
G.694.1/
LDM
G.694.2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/ LDM
G.694.2
DMUX
MUX
2
WDM side
Client side
Client side
WDM side
Figure 8-25 Position of the LDM board in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
DMUX
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
1
LDM
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
2
DMUX
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LDM
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The client-side two pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
For the client services at a rate of greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, FC200, FICON Express,
OTU1, and HD-SDI), the client-side interfaces can access up to only one channel.

The LDM board is mainly used to provide OTN interfaces and ESC.
8-74

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 8-40 Functions and features of the LDM board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
Gbit/s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard
DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard
CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process
is similar.
l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and
single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application
scenario.
Client-side
service type

OTU1: OTN service at a rate of 2.67 Gbit/s
STM-1/OC-3: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 155.52 Mbit/s
STM-16/OC-48: SDH/SONET service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s
FC100: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s
FICON: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s
FICON Express: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s
HD-SDI: Bit-serial digital interface for high-definition television systems at
a rate of 1.49 Gbit/s
DVB-ASI: Video service at a rate of 270 Mbit/s
SDI: Serial digital interface at a rate of 270 Mbit/s
ESCON: SAN service at a rate of 200 Mbit/s
FDDI: SAN service at a rate of 125 Mbit/s
OTN
function
l Up to two channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and

multiplexed into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITUT G.709.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
WDM
specification
ESC
function
service signal.

8-75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
PRBS
function
Supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
LPT function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type
is STM-1/OC3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
ALS
function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme

eSFP

side.
Supports enhanced small form-factor pluggable optical modules on the WDM
side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
8-76
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
Transport Systems: Common Generic
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES
(FC-PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND
SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FCSW-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND
SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE
COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL
(FC-SB-2)
SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for HighDefinition Television Systems
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces:Guidelines for
the implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous
Serial Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc
Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets
CONnection architecture (SBCON)
ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed
Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access
Control(MAC)
Data Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer
Protocol(PHY)
Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-77
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-26 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board.
8-78

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDM board
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
O/E
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
( controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
NOTE
For the types of the signals that the client side accesses, refer to 8.5.3 Functions and Features.
In the signal flow of the LDM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDM to the WDM side
of the LDM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the Any optical signals from client
module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing,
OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU1
signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-79
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

optical signals. A laser converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical
optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2
optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of
Any signals.
optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single
receiving function on the WDM side.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of Any optical signals.
electrical signals to Any optical signals.


The module consists of the service encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN
processing module.
Service encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the OTU1
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the Any
performance monitoring function.
8-80

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Power supply module

8.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board.

Figure 8-27 shows the front panel of the LDM board.
Figure 8-27 Front panel of the LDM board
LDM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LDM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-81
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDM board. Table 8-41 lists the type
Table 8-41 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN12LDM board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

8.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDM board.
Table 8-42 shows the valid slots for the LDM board.
8-82

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-42 Valid slots for the LDM board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU42, IU45-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8.5.7 Characteristic Code for the LDM

Code for OTUs.


are listed in Table 8-43
Table 8-43 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDM board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
8.5.9 LDM Parameters

For parameters of LDM, refer to Table 8-44.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-83
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-44 LDM parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused
The Channel Use Status parameter sets

the occupancy status of the current
channel of a board.
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Used
Default: Non-Loopback
Service Type
None, Any, FE, GE, GE

(GFP-T), OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,
FC-200, FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON, FDDI
The Loopback parameter sets the

loopback mode for the current optical
interface of a board.
See D.27 Loopback (WDM
The Service Type parameter sets the
type of the service accessed at the optical
interface on the client side.
Default: None
Client Side
Service Bearer
Rate (M)
100 - 2200
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 0
Default:
l WDM side: On
parameter sets the rate of the accessed

service at the optical interface on the
client side of a board.
See D.5 Client Side Service Bearer
Rate (M) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
See D.20 Laser Status (WDM
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
8-84
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
The Automatic Laser Shutdown

parameter determines whether to
automatically shut down the laser after
the signals received by a board are lost.
See D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown
(WDM Interface) for more
information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
The LPT Enabled parameter

determines whether to enable the link
pass-through (LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range
Queries the tunable wavelength range at

the WDM-side optical interface of a
board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
Default: Enabled
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Default: C
Default: 9600
The FEC Working State parameter

determines whether to enable or disable
the forward error correction (FEC)
function of the current optical interface.

wavelength.
The Max. Packet Length parameter
sets and queries the maximum packet
length supported by a board and is
applicable to the boards supporting
Ethernet services.

8-85
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
The SD Trigger Condition parameter

sets the relevant alarms of certain optical
interfaces or channels of an OTU board
as SD switching trigger conditions of the
protection group in which this OTU
board resides.
See D.50 SD Trigger Condition
information.
Default: None
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to process GCC0,

GCC1, and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If
the processing is required, set this
parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it
to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the client
side accesses OTN services.
PRBS Test
Status
Disabled, Enabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Default: Disabled
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets

the pseudo-random binary sequence
(PRBS) test status of a board.
See D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM
Determines whether to enable the
special frame test before deployment.
When this parameter is set to Enabled,
the board sends the test frame where the
payload consists of only 0. This
parameter is used in the deployment
commissioning.
8.5.10 Specifications of the LDM

NOTE
Specifications of SDH Optical Modules on the Client Side

NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications
listed above completely apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
8-86

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-45 Specifications of SDH optical modules on the client side

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
APD
APD

Receiver
type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
PIN
PIN

8-87
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
Specifications of GE Optical Modules on the Client Side

NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module, or 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be
used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below
apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed
signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580

Operating
wavelength
range
8-88
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly
different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, DVBASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 signals. The
actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-89
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Modules on the Client Side

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
8-90

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-48 Specifications of eSFP DWDM optical modules on the client side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for

the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

8-91
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
80

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
nm
1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1270 to 1620
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
8-92
Value
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate(eSFP
DWDM)-120 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
DWDM)-120 km

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
nm
12.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant (5% margin

are required for the eye pattern
of STM-16 services and

Receiver type
APD
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-93
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN12LDM
22.6
24.8
8.6 LDMD
LDMD: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, dual fed and
selective receiving
Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is, TN11.
8.6.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMD converts between signals at the rate of 100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually
The LDMD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board.
8.6.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDMD board.
8.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD
The characteristic code for the LDMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
8.6.9 LDMD Parameters
This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried on the NM.
8.6.10 Specifications of the LDMD

Only one functional version of the LDMD board is available, that is, TN11.
8-94

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.6.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMD converts between signals at the rate of 100
Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and dually
For the position of the LDMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-28.
Figure 8-28 Position of the LDMD board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
1
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LDMD
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
2
DMUX
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LDMD
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
Client side
NOTE

The LDMD board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 8-49 Functions and features of the LDMD board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process
is similar.

8-95
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

OTN
function

8-96
WDM
specification
Supports DWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
NOTE

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

8-97
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network
(SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
8-98

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-29 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-99
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-29 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMD board
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Splitter
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LDMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMD to the WDM side
of the LDMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
signals.
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals
8-100

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels signals are output
through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of
Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l



processing module.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-101
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

8.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board.

Figure 8-30 shows the front panel of the LDMD board.
Figure 8-30 Front panel of the LDMD board
LDMD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LDMD
8-102

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDMD board. Table 8-50 lists the
Table 8-50 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMD board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

8.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDMD board.
Table 8-51 shows the valid slots for the LDMD board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-103
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-51 Valid slots for the LDMD board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8.6.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMD

The characteristic code for the LDMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
Table 8-52 Characteristic code for the LDMD board
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

optical signal

WDM side.
Last four digits

optical signal

the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LDMD board is 92109210.
l


8-104

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-53 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMD board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
8.6.9 LDMD Parameters

For the parameters of LDMD, refer to Table 8-54.
Table 8-54 LDMD Parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Click D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM
Loopback
Outloop
Default: Used
Service Type

OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,

Click D.27 Loopback (WDM
Default: None
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-105
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Client Side Service

Bearer Rate (M)
100 - 2200

Click D.5 Client Side Service Bearer
information.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 0
Default:
l WDM side: On

Click D.20 Laser Status (WDM
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
8-106

Click D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown
information.
pass-through (LPT).
Click D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Used to query the operating wavelength

at the WDM-side optical interface of a
board.
Band Type
Used to query the band type.
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Default: Enabled

Click D.15 FEC Working State (WDM

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
Click D.46 Planned Wavelength No./
information.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: C
Default: 9600
Default: None
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

wavelength.
Click D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM
Ethernet services.
Click D.32 Max. Packet Length
information.
board resides.
Click D.50 SD Trigger Condition
information.
parameter to Enabled; otherwise, set it to
Disabled.
NOTE
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Click D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM

8-107
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled

commissioning.
Default: Disabled
8.6.10 Specifications of the LDMD

NOTE

NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580

Operating
wavelength
range
8-108
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27

8-109
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
NOTE
The 1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed
below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
PIN
PIN

Receiver
type
8-110
PIN
PIN

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2

8-111
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120
8-112
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

km

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask


Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/nmAPD
12800 ps/nmTunable
6400ps/nmFour
ChannelsTunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
dBm
-4

8-113
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/nmAPD
12800 ps/nmTunable
6400ps/nmFour
ChannelsTunable
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-8
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
ps/nm
12800
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant

Receiver type
APD
APD
APD
range
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
-28
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
1300 to 1575
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
8-114
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11LDMD
26.9
29.6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.7 LDMS
LDMS: 2-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board, single fed and
single receiving
Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is, TN11.
8.7.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMS board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
The LDMS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board.
8.7.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDMS board.
8.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS
8.7.9 LDMS Parameters
8.7.10 Specifications of the LDMS

Only one functional version of the LDMS board is available, that is, TN11.
8.7.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LDMS board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LDMS board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-31.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-115
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-31 Position of the LDMS board in the WDM system
1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LDMS
DMUX
G.694.1
DMUX
MUX
2
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1 LDMS
2
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE

The LDMS board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 8-60 Functions and features of the LDMS board
8-116
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Multiplexes two optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/
s into a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

OTN
function

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
NOTE

8-117
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
8-118
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent
(PDM)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-119
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board.
8-120

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDMS board
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
OTN
processing
module
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LDMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDMS to the WDM side
of the LDMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
signals.
wavelengths OTU1 optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-121
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU1 optical signals from the WDM side through the IN
optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping, and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l



processing module.

l
8-122
Power supply module

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board.

Figure 8-33 shows the front panel of the LDMS board.
Figure 8-33 Front panel of the LDMS board
LDMS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT
IN
LDMS
Indicators
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-123
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDMS board. Table 8-61 lists the type
Table 8-61 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDMS board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

8.7.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDMS board.
Table 8-62 shows the valid slots for the LDMS board.
Table 8-62 Valid slots for the LDMS board
8-124
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8.7.7 Characteristic Code for the LDMS

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-63 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDMS board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
8.7.9 LDMS Parameters

For the parameters of LDMS, refer to Table 8-64.
Table 8-64 LDMS Parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

8-125
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type

OC-12, OC-48, FC-100,

Default: None
Client Side Service
Bearer Rate (M)
100 - 2200
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 0
Default:
l WDM side: On

Click D.5 Client Side Service Bearer
information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
8-126

information.
pass-through (LPT).

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled

Click D.15 FEC Working State
information.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

board.
Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
Default: Enabled
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: C
Default: 9600
Default: Disabled

wavelength.
Ethernet services.
information.
to Disabled.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-127
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG

board resides.
information.
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

commissioning.
8.7.10 Specifications of the LDMS

NOTE

NOTE
8-128

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
APD
APD

Receiver
type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
PIN
PIN

8-129
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27

NOTE
NOTE
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed
below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580

Operating
wavelength
range
8-130
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

NOTE
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-131
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
8-132

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

8-133
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/nmAPD
12800 ps/nmTunable
6400ps/nmFour
ChannelsTunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-2
-2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
ps/nm
12800
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant
8-134
Receiver type
APD
APD
APD
range
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
-28
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
1300 to 1575

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11LDMS
26.9
29.6
8.8 LDX
LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
Only one functional version of the LDX board is available, that is, TN12.
8.8.2 Application
The LDX board is an optical transponder unit that converts two channels of 10 Gbit/s service
signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and
WDM signals that comply with the ITU-T Recommendations.
The LDX board provides OTN interfaces and electrical supervisory channels (ESCs).
The LDX board consists of a client-side optical module, a WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, a control and communication module, and a power supply module.
8.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board.
8.8.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LDX board.
8.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX
The board characteristic code provides information about signal frequency, optical module type,
wavelength, and so on.
8.8.9 LDX Parameters
8.8.10 Specifications of the LDX

Only one functional version of the LDX board is available, that is, TN12.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-135
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.8.2 Application
The LDX board is an optical transponder unit that converts two channels of 10 Gbit/s service
signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and
WDM signals that comply with the ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-34.
Figure 8-34 Position of the LDX board in the WDM system
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
Client side
MUX
LDX
DMUX
G.694.1
G.694.1
DMUX
LDX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
Client side

The LDX board provides OTN interfaces and electrical supervisory channels (ESCs).
Table 8-70 Functions and features of the LDX board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps two channels of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals
and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signals and WDM signals that
comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
Client-side
service type
10GE LAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 10.31 Gbit/s

10GE WAN: Ethernet service at a rate of 9.95 Gbit/s
OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s
NOTE
The 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service are processed identically. For the 10GE
WAN service, you can configure it as the STM-64 service on the U2000.
8-136

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
OTN
function
l Provides the OTU2 interface on the WDM side.

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing to comply with
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of 10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2 into OTU2
signals, and the transparent mapping of 10GE LAN/OTU2e into OTU2e
signals.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU2.
WDM
specification
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT
function
is 10GE LAN.
FEC
encoding
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.975.
NOTE
is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.

NOTE
Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
Not supported
Opticallayer ASON
Supported
Not supported
l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of the
board.

8-137
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protection

XFP
Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the client side.

Supports 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical modules on the WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3ae
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LDX board consists of a client-side optical module, a WDM-side optical module, signal
processing module, a control and communication module, and a power supply module.
Figure 8-35 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board.
8-138

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-35 Functional modules and signal flow of the LDX board
RX1
O/E
Client-side OTN
processing
module
10
TX1
WDM side
SDH/ SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
O/E
IN1
E/O
OUT2
O/E
IN2
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
RX2
TX2
O/E
Client - side OTN
processing module
10
E/O
Clientside
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC
)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LDX board can access the following optical signals:
l
OC-192 optical signals
STM-64 optical signals
10GE LAN optical signals
10GE WAN optical signals
OTU2 optical signals
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-139
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OTU2e optical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LDX board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDX to the WDM side
of the LDX. The receive direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the LDX
to the client side of the LDX.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one channel of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX optical interface and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2
or OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance
monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules
for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Finally, the module outputs two channels of
OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After E/O conversion,
the module transmits OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals
at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2 or OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU2 or OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/
AFEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels
of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, orOTU2e electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN,
10GE WAN, OTU2, orOTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals
through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to
OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
8-140

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN
encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN
processing module.
SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
or OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
SONET performance monitoring function.
10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
or OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE
LAN performance monitoring function.
Client-side OTN processing module
Implements the OTN performance monitoring function.
Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and
performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.

Power supply module

8.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board.

Figure 8-36 shows the front panel of the LDX board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-141
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-36 Front panel of the LDX board
LDX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LDX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the LDX board. Table 8-71 describes the
8-142

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-71 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LDX board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC
Receives a wavelength from the optical demultiplexing

unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC
Transmits a wavelength to the optical multiplexing unit

or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LDX board.
Table 8-72 shows the valid slots for the LDX board.
Table 8-72 Valid slots for the LDX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8.8.7 Characteristic Code for the LDX

Code for OTUs.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-143
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 8-73 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LDX board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
NOTE
8.8.9 LDX Parameters

For the parameters of the LDX, refer to Table 8-74.
Table 8-74 LDX Parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
8-144

board.
more information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Type
None, 10GE LAN,

10GE WAN,FC-1200,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2v, STM-64
The Service Type parameter sets the type

of the service accessed at the optical
Default: 10GE LAN

Port Mapping
Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
The Port Mapping parameter sets and

queries the mapping mode of a port service.
See D.47 Port Mapping (WDM
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

automatically shut down the laser after the
signals received by a board are lost.
whether to enable the link pass-through
(LPT).
determines whether to enable or disable the
forward error correction (FEC) function of
the current optical interface.
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC
mode of the current optical interface.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Used to query the operating wavelength at

the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Band Type

8-145
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Tunable
Wavelength Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE
Only support C band.

wavelength.
NOTE

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets

the relevant alarms of certain optical
interfaces or channels of an OTU board as
SD switching trigger conditions of the
protection group in which this OTU board
resides.
GCC1, and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the
processing is required, set this parameter to
Enabled; otherwise, set it to Disabled.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when the client side
accesses OTN services.
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
8-146
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the

pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS)
test status of a board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Determines whether to enable the special

frame test before deployment. When this
parameter is set to Enabled, the board sends
the test frame where the payload consists of
only 0. This parameter is used in the
deployment commissioning.
Default: Disabled
8.8.10 Specifications of the LDX

NOTE
Specifications of XFP Optical Modules on the Client Side

NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km module
can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, and OTU2 signals. The specifications
listed following completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, or 10GE WAN signals.
The 10Gbit/s single rate -0.3km module can be only used to access 10GE LAN signals. The specifications
listed following completely apply to 10GE LAN signals.
Table 8-75 Specifications of optical modules on the client side

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single Rate
-0.3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3
1530 to 1565
840 to 860

Operating
wavelength
range
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565

8-147
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single Rate
-0.3 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
8-148
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate )
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1 (Multirate) /
0.5(10GE
LAN)
-1
-7
-1

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Maximum
reflectance
dB
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single Rate
-0.3 km
-27
-27
-27
-12
Specifications of XFP DWDM Optical Modules on the Client Side

Table 8-76 Specifications of optical modules on the Client side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm (XFP)
NRZ - 40 channels fixed

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
Operating frequency range
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity (FEC

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

8-149
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm (tunable XFP PIN)
NRZ - 80 channels fixed (odd

& even wavelengths)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
8-150
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
LDX
44.5
51.2
8.9 LEM24
LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE + 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board
The available functional version of the LEM24 board is TN11.
8.9.2 Application
The LEM24 board is an optical transponder unit.
The LEM24 board supports electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function.
The LEM24 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, signal processing module, 1588 module, control and communication module,
and power supply module.
8.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board.
8.9.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11LEM24 board.
8.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24
8.9.9 Board Function Configuration
The LEM24 board provides multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
LAG, and QoS.
8.9.10 LEM24 Parameters
8.9.11 Specifications of the LEM24

The available functional version of the LEM24 board is TN11.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-151
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.9.2 Application
The LEM24 board is an optical transponder unit.
As an OTU, the LEM24 board converts 22 channels of GE/FE services or two channels of 10GE
WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side or two channels of 10GE
services cross-connected from the backplane into two channels of standard WDM wavelength
OTU2 signals. The LEM24 board also performs the reverse process. The LEM24 board supports
convergence of multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of 10GE service. Further,
the board supports transparent transmission of 16 channels of GE or two channels of 10GE
services.
Figure 8-37 shows the application of the LEM24 board in a WDM system.
Figure 8-37 Application of the TN11LEM24 board in a WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
5
GE
FE
LEM24
10GE LAN
10GE WAN 28
Client
side
MUX
DMUX
LEM24
DMUX
WDM
side
MUX
WDM
side
GE
FE
10GE LAN
28 10GE WAN
Client
side
NOTE
The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports and are capable of processing 10GE LAN and
10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports and are capable of processing
GE and FE services.

The LEM24 board supports electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function.
Table 8-78 lists the functions and features of the LEM24 board.
NOTE
The 10GE cross-connections are supported only by OptiX OSN 6800.
8-152

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-78 Functions and features of the LEM24 board

Function and
Feature
Basic function
Description
l Converts 22 channels of GE/FE services or two channels of 10GE
WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly on the client side or two
channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane into
two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals and
performs the reverse process.
l Converges multiple flat-rate GE or 10GE services into one channel of
10GE service.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
l The LEM24 board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical
signal.
l It is recommended to change RX21/TX21, RX22/TX22 optical interfaces to
electrical interfaces only.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE

electrical signals between the LEM24 board and the cross-connect board.
OTN function
l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side.

l Supports mapping of 10GE signals into OTU2 signals.
l Supports section monitoring (SM) and path monitoring (PM) at the
OTU2 and ODU2 layers.
l Supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) at the ODU2 layer.
WDM
specification
LPT function
Supported
NOTE
FEC encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Supports remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.
l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with
FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-153
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
ALS function
shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical
transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no
optical signal is received on the WDM side.
PTP clock (1588

V2)
Supported in the WDM side.
Physical clock
Supported in the Client side and WDM side.
QinQ
Supports stacking VLAN.
QoS (Quality of
Service)
Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS).

Supports IEEE802.1p.
Supports DSCP.
ETH OAM
Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.
LAG (Link
Aggregation
Group)
l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and

trunk ports.
l Supports manual and static LAGs.
l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.
VLAN
multicast
Supports VLAN-based multicast.
Port CVLAN
group
Supports a group of CVLANs being used as one VLAN.
L2 layer
switching
Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D.

Supports MAC address learning and aging.
Supports IGMP snooping.
Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP.
Supports 32K MAC addresses.
8-154
Flow control
Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow

control termination.
Maximum
transmission
unit (MTU)
Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.
Ethernet private
line (EPL)
Provides point-to-point EPLs.
Ethernet virtual
private line
(EVPL)
Provides point-to-multipoint EVPLs and supports VLAN-based

switching.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Port working
mode
Description
10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN
GE optical port: 1000MFUL, auto-negotiation
GE electrical port: auto-negotiation
FE optical port: 100MFULL
FE electrical port: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL,
auto-negotiation
PRBS function
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Loopback
10GE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
GE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
GE electric
interface
MAC
PHY
FE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
FE electric
interface
MAC
PHY
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

8-155
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
WDM side
optical interface
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

services comply
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

LACP, EthOAM, DHCP, PPP, etc.
MPLS protocols
All L3 protocols including ARP,
IGMP, OSPF, RIP, IGRP etc.
processing services

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
IEEE IGMP
STP, RSTP, MSTP
R-APS

The LEM24 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, L2
switching module, signal processing module, 1588 module, control and communication module,
Figure 8-38 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board in the OptiX
OSN 8800.
Figure 8-39 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board in the OptiX
OSN 6800.
8-156

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-38 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
RX5
RX6
WDM side
10GE
O/E
RX28
TX5
TX6
TX28
E/O
L2 switching
module
10GE
OTN
processing
Module
E/O
OUT3
O/E
IN3
IN4
OUT4
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
1588
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
8-157
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEM24 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
10GE
Client side
RX5
RX6
WDM side
10GE
O/E
RX28
TX5
TX6
TX28
E/O
L2 switching
module
10GE
OTN
processing
Module
E/O
OUT3
O/E
IN3
IN4
OUT4
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
1588
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEM24 board.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the LEM24 board. The
transmit direction is the direction from the client side of the LEM24 to the WDM side of the
LEM24. The receive direction is from the WDM side of the LEM24 to the client side of the
LEM24.
l
Transmit direction
The RX5 to RX28 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client
equipment and perform O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module
performs operations, such as convergence. After convergence, the module outputs a
maximum of two channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module.
The signal processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals
into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of
OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT3 and OUT4 optical ports.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN3-IN4 optical
interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion.
8-158

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

After O/E conversion, the OTU2 signals are sent to the OTN processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. After performing
the operation, the module sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching
module for service cross-connection.
The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends 24 channels of the
signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the 24 channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs 24 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX5-TX28
optical interfaces.
NOTE
The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE LAN and 10GE WAN
services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that can process GE and FE services.
The LEM24 board processes clock signals in two directions.

l
Receives clock signals from a service board and sends the clock signals to the clock
processing board through the communication module.
Receives clock signals from the clock processing module and sends the clock signals to the
downstream NE through a service board.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN
signals.
Client-side receiver: Performs E/O conversion of the FE/GE/10GE LAN/10GE WAN
signals.

L2 switching module
Performs convergence/deconvergence of service signals.

Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding
and decoding.
1588 module
The 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to
the 1588 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-159
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

service board according to the 1588 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG
board.
l

Power supply module

8.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board.

Figure 8-40 shows the front panel of the LEM24 board.
8-160

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-40 Front panel of the LEM24 board
LEM24
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
4
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
5 ~ 6: 10 GE
7 ~ 28: GE
TX
RX TX
RX TX RX
OUT OUT
IN
IN
13
5
21
22
23
24
25
10
26
11
27
12
28
20
4
3
LEM24
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are fifty-two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LEM24 board. Table 8-79
describes the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-161
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-79 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEM24 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX5-RX28a
LC

equipment.
TX5-TX28a
LC
IN3-IN4
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT3-OUT4
LC

multiplexing unit.
a: The RX5/TX5 and RX6/TX6 optical ports are 10GE optical ports that can process 10GE
LAN and 10GE WAN services. The other optical ports on the board are GE optical ports that
can process GE and FE services.
Laser Hazard Level

8.9.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11LEM24 board.
Table 8-80 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEM24 board.
Table 8-80 Valid slots for the LEM24 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27-IU33, IU35-IU41,

IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29-IU35
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU15
The rear connector of the LEM24 board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the
two occupied slots in the subrack. The slot number of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM
is the number of the left slot.
For example, if you install the LEM24 board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the LEM24
board displayed on the NM is IU1.
8-162

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.9.7 Characteristic Code for the LEM24

For detailed descriptions of the characteristic code for the board, refer to B.2 Characteristic
Code for OTUs.


Table 8-81 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LEM24 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface on the NM
IN3/OUT3
IN4/OUT4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
TX9/RX9
TX10/RX10
10
TX11/RX11
11
TX12/RX12
12
TX13/RX13
13
TX14/RX14
14
TX15/RX15
15
TX16/RX16
16
TX17/RX17
17
TX18/RX18
18
TX19/RX19
19
TX20/RX20
20
TX21/RX21
21
8-163
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
TX22/RX22
22
TX23/RX23
23
TX24/RX24
24
TX25/RX25
25
TX26/RX26
26
TX27/RX27
27
TX28/RX28
28
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 8-41 shows the application model of the LEM24 board. Table 8-82 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 8-41 Port diagram of the LEM24 board
Client side
WDM side
PORT5
PORT6
PORT28
VCTRUNK1
101(AP1/AP1)-1
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
VCTRUNK2
102(AP2/AP2)-1
VCTRUNK3
103(AP3/AP3)-1
VCTRUNK4
104(AP4/AP4)-1
L2 sw itching
module
3(IN3/OUT3)-1
4(IN4/OUT4)-1
Backplane
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
WDM side
optical
module
Table 8-82 Definition of NM port of the LEM24 board
8-164
Port Name
Definition
PORT5 - PORT28
Respectively corresponds to the client-side optical

interfaces: RX5/TX5 - RX28/TX28.
VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4
AP1 - AP4
ClientLP1 - ClientLP2
Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1
ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2
Internal logical ports.
IN3/OUT3 - IN4/OUT4
Corresponds to the WDM-side optical interfaces.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

If the LEM24 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
During creation of the Ethernet services on the U2000, create cross-connections between
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and
VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections
between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports, or converge optical signals received by the clientside optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals.
NOTE
l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports.

l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.
One-to-one port connections are between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the
cross-connect module. You are not required to set one-to-one port connections on the
U2000.
Create a cross-connection between the AP port of the LEM24 board and the AP port of
other boards, as shown in Figure 8-42.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.
The ClientLP port connects to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port connects to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration of these connections on the U2000.
Figure 8-42 Cross-connection diagram of the LEM24 board

Client
side
WDM
side
103(AP3/AP3)-1
Other board
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Client
side
WDM
side
103(AP3/AP3)-1
LEM24
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Other board
TN11LEM24/TN11LEX4

The LEM24 board provides multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
LAG, and QoS.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the LEM24 by using the U2000:
l
VLAN SNCP Protection
DBPS Protection
QoS
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-165
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
MPLS Tunnel
MSTP
STP and RSTP
LAG
RMON
IGMP Snooping
ETH-OAM
8.9.10 LEM24 Parameters

For parameters of the LEM24, refer to Table 8-83.
Table 8-83 LEM24 Parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

See D.27 Loopback (WDM Interface)
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default:
l WDM side: Enabled
l Client side:
Disabled
8-166

information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled

pass-through (LPT).
Default: Disabled
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC

NOTE
only support FEC.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM

Actual Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

board.
Actual Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

wavelength.

8-167
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.9.11 Specifications of the LEM24

NOTE
Specifications of Optical Modules on the Client Side of the LEM24

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
1000BASESX,I-850-LC
1000BASELX,I-1310-LC
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source type
MLM
SLM
Target distance
km
0.5
10

Operating
wavelength range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-9.5
-9.5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern mask
IEEE802.3z compliant
8-168
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
770 to 860
1260 to 1620
dBm
-17
-20
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.
Table 8-85 Specifications of 10GE optical modules on the client side

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
10GBASE-SR(SFP
+) (multimode)
10GBASE-LR(SFP
+) (single mode)
Optical interface
service rate
Gbit/s
10.3125
10.3125
Optical source type
MLM
SLM
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
0.3
10

Operating
wavelength range
nm
840 to 860
1260 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
0.5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-7.3
-8.2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
3.5
Output optical power

in case of laser
shutdown
dBm
-30
-30
Eye pattern mask
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
840 to 860
1260 to 1355
dBm
-11.1
-14.4
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-1
0.5
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-12
-12

8-169
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Optical Modules on the WDM Side of the LEM24

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value

& even wavelengths)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
8-170
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Gray Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the LEM24

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24

8-171
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11LEM24
81
83
8.10 LEX4
LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board
The available functional version of the LEX4 board is TN11.
8.10.2 Application
The LEX4 board is an optical transponder unit.
The LEX4 board provides electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function.
The LEX4 board consists of a client-side optical module, a WDM-side optical module, a L2
switching module, a signal processing module, a 1588 module, a control and communication
module, and a power supply module.
8.10.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board.
8.10.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TN11LEX4 board.
8.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4
8-172

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The LEX4 board supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
LAG, and QoS. Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
8.10.10 LEX4 Parameters
8.10.11 Specifications of the LEX4

The available functional version of the LEX4 board is TN11.
8.10.2 Application
The LEX4 board is an optical transponder unit.
The LEX4 board converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received directly
on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services cross-connected from the backplane, into
two channels of standard WDM wavelength OTU2 signals. The LEX4 board also performs the
reverse process. The LEX4 board supports convergence of multiple flat-rate 10GE services into
one channel of 10GE service. The board also supports transparent transmission of two channels
of 10GE services.
Figure 8-43 shows the application of the LEX4 board in a WDM system.
Figure 8-43 Application of the TN11LEX4 board in a WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
1
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
DMUX
LEX4
LEX4
4
DMUX
Client
side
MUX
WDM
side
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
WDM
side
Client
side

The LEX4 board provides electrical cross-connections, OTN interfaces, and the ESC function.
Table 8-88 lists the functions and features of the LEX4 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-173
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The 10GE cross-connections are only supported by the OptiX OSN 6800.
Table 8-88 Functions and features of the LEX4 board

Function and
Feature
Basic function
Description
l Converts four channels of 10GE WAN or 10GE LAN services received
directly on the client side, or two channels of 10GE services crossconnected from the backplane, into two channels of standard WDM
wavelength OTU2 signals and performs the reverse process.
l Converges multiple flat-rate 10GE services into one channel of 10GE
service.
Client-side
service type
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of 10GE

electrical signals between the LEX4 board and the cross-connect board.
OTN function
l Provides OTU2 interfaces on the WDM side.
l Supports mapping of 10GE signals into OTU2 signals.

l Supports section monitoring (SM) and path monitoring (PM) at the
OTU2 and ODU2 layers.
l Supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) at the ODU2 layer.
WDM
specification
LPT function
Supported
NOTE
FEC encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
l Supports remote monitoring (RMON) of Ethernet services.
l Supports monitoring of performance events and alarms associated with
FE, GE, 10GE WAN, and 10GE LAN services.
8-174
ALS function
PTP clock
(1588 V2)
Supported in the WDM side.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Physical clock
Supported in the Client side and WDM side.
QinQ
Supports stacking VLAN.
QoS (Quality of
Service)
Supports committed access rate (CAR) and class of service (CoS).

Supports IEEE802.1p.
Supports DSCP.
ETH OAM
Supports ETH OAM protocols defined by IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah.
LAG (Link
Aggregation
Group)
l Supports the IEEE802.3ad-compliant LAG protocol running at IP and

trunk ports.
l Supports manual and static LAGs.
l Supports load-sharing and non-load-sharing LAGs.
VLAN
multicast
Supports VLAN-based multicast.
Port CVLAN
group
Supports a CVLAN group that is being used as one VLAN.
L2 layer
switching
Supports IEEE802.1Q, IEEE802.1ad, and IEEE 802.1D.

Supports MAC address learning and aging.
Supports IGMP snooping.
Supports STP/RSTP and MSTP.
Supports 32K MAC addresses.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Flow control
Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and flow

control termination.
Maximum
transmission
unit (MTU)
Supports a maximum of 9600 bytes frames.
Ethernet
private line
(EPL)
Provides point-to-point EPLs.
Port working
mode
10GE optical port: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN
PRBS function
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported

8-175
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Protection
scheme
Description
l Supports VLAN SNCP.
l Supports DBPS protection.
l Supports ERPS protection
SFP+/XFP
Supports enhanced SFP+ optical modules on the client side.

Loopback
10GE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
WDM side
optical interface
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

services comply
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

MPLS protocols
processing services

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
IEEE IGMP
STP, RSTP, MSTP
R-APS

The LEX4 board consists of a client-side optical module, a WDM-side optical module, a L2
switching module, a signal processing module, a 1588 module, a control and communication
module, and a power supply module.
Figure 8-44 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board in the OptiX OSN
8800.
8-176

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-45 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board in the OptiX OSN
6800.
Figure 8-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
10GE
O/E
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX4
E/O
L2 switching
module
10GE
OTN
processing
Module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
O/E
IN1
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
1588
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
8-177
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-45 Functional modules and signal flow of the LEX4 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
10GE
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
10GE
O/E
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX4
E/O
L2 switching
module
10GE
OTN
processing
Module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
O/E
IN1
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Client-side
optical
module
1588
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The backplane supports cross-connection of only 10GE signals from/to the LEX4 board.
In the signal flow of the LEX4 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LEX4 to the WDM side
of the LEX4, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The RX1 to RX4 optical interfaces on the client side receive optical signals from client
equipment and perform O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The module
performs operations such as convergence. Then, the module outputs a maximum of two
channels of 10GE signals to the OTN processing module.
The signal processing module then encapsulates and maps the two channels of 10GE signals
into OTN frames, performs FEC for the OTN frames, and then outputs two channels of
OTU2 signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical ports.
Receive direction
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then,
the module performs O/E conversion.
8-178

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC. Then, the module
sends out two channels of 10GE signals to the L2 switching module for service crossconnection.
The L2 switching module deconverges the 10GE signals and sends four channels of the
signals with corresponding rates to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4
optical interfaces.
The LEX4 board processes clock signals in two directions.
l
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals.
Client-side receiver: Performs E/O conversion of the 10GE LAN/10GE WAN signals.

L2 switching module

Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC encoding
and decoding.
1588 module
board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-179
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

8.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board.

Figure 8-46 shows the front panel of the LEX4 board.
Figure 8-46 Front panel of the LEX4 board
LEX4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LEX4
8-180

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are twelve optical interfaces on the front panel of the LEX4 board. Table 8-89 lists the
Table 8-89 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LEX4 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
TX1-TX4
LC
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

8.10.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TN11LEX4 board.
Table 8-90 shows the valid slots for the TN11LEX4 board.
Table 8-90 Valid slots for the LEX4 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

8-181
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.10.7 Characteristic Code for the LEX4

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-91 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LEX4 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 8-47 shows the application model of the LEX4 board. Table 8-92 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 8-47 Port diagram of the LEX4 board
Client side
PORT5
PORT6
PORT7
PORT8
WDM side
VCTRUNK2
102(AP2/AP2)-1
VCTRUNK3
103(AP3/AP3)-1
VCTRUNK4
104(AP4/AP4)-1
L2 sw itching
module
8-182
Cross-connect
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
Backplane
Service
processing
module

WDM side
optical
module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-92 Meaning of NM port of the LEX4 board

Port Name
Meaning
PORT5 - PORT8
These ports correspond to the client-side optical

interfaces: RX1/TX1 - RX4/TX4.
VCTRUNK1 - VCTRUNK4
AP1 - AP4
ClientLP1 - ClientLP2
ODU2LP1 - ODU2LP2
Internal logical ports.
IN1/OUT1 - IN2/OUT2
If the LEX4 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. After the cross-connections between the PORT and
VCTRUNK ports are created, the L2 switching module can perform cross-connections
between the PORT and VCTRUNK ports or converge the optical signals received by the
client-side optical modules into two channels of 10GE electrical signals.
NOTE
l One VCTRUNK port can be connected to multiple PORT ports.

l The maximum bandwidth of each VCTRUNK port is 10 Gbit/s.
Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which need not be set on the U2000.
Create the cross-connection between the AP port of the LEX4 board and the AP port of
other boards, as shown in Figure 8-48.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports this operation.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
The ClientLP port is connected to the ODU2LP port, and the ODU2LP port is connected
to the IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

8-183
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-48 Cross-connection diagram of the LEX4 board

Client
side
WDM
side
103(AP3/AP3)-1
Other board
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Client
side
WDM
side
103(AP3/AP3)-1
LEX4
104(AP4/AP4)-1
Other board
TN11LEM24/TN11LEX4

The LEX4 board supports multiple Ethernet functions and features such as Layer 2 switching,
LAG, and QoS. Configure the functions according to actual requirements.
You can configure the following Ethernet functions for the LEX4 by using the U2000:
l
VLAN SNCP Protection
DBPS Protection
QoS
Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
MPLS Tunnel
MSTP
STP and RSTP
LAG
RMON
IGMP Snooping
ETH-OAM
8.10.10 LEX4 Parameters

For the parameters of LEX4, refer to Table 8-93.
8-184

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-93 LEX4 Parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default:
l WDM side: Enabled
l Client side:
Disabled
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

information.
pass-through (LPT).
Actual Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

board.
Actual Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.

8-185
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
C, CWDM
Planned Band Type

wavelength.
Default: C
SD Trigger Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

board resides.
information.
8.10.11 Specifications of the LEX4

NOTE
Specifications of Optical Modules on the Client Side of the LEX4

Table 8-94 Specifications of 10GE optical modules on the client side
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
8-186
Value
10GBASE-SR(SFP
+) (multimode)
10GBASE-LR(SFP
+) (single mode)
Optical interface
service rate
Gbit/s
10.3125
10.3125
Optical source type
MLM
SLM

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module
Type
10GBASE-SR(SFP
+) (multimode)
10GBASE-LR(SFP
+) (single mode)
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
0.3
10

Operating
wavelength range
nm
840 to 860
1260 to 1355
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
0.5
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-7.3
-8.2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
3.5

in case of laser
shutdown
dBm
-30
-30
Eye pattern mask

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
840 to 860
1260 to 1355
dBm
-11.1
-14.4
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-1
0.5
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-12
-12
Specifications of Optical Modules on the WDM Side of the LEX4

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value


& even wavelengths)
8-187
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Specifications of Gray Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the LEX4

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
8-188
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Target distance
km
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27

8-189
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11LEX4
64
67
8.11 LOG
LOG: 8 x Gigabit Ethernet unit
The available functional versions of the LOG board are TN11 and TN12.
8.11.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOG board implements conversion between eight
channels of GE optical signals and OTU2 optical signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations.
The LOG board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelengths, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.11.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board.
8.11.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LOG board.
8.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG
8.11.9 LOG Parameters
8.11.10 Specifications of the LOG
8-190

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 8-97 lists the version description of the LOG board.
Table 8-97 Version description of the LOG board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
The TN11LOG supports AFEC, and the TN12LOG supports
AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate
with each other. For details, see 8.11.3 Functions and Features.
The TN12LOG supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical
signal, while the TN11LOG supports only the GE optical signal. For
details, see 8.11.3 Functions and Features.
The TN12LOG board supports pluggable optical modules on the
WDM side, whereas the TN11LOG does not. For details, see 8.11.3
Functions and Features.
l Specification:
For the power consumption and specification of each version, see
8.11.10 Specifications of the LOG.
Replacement
Table 8-98 lists the substitution rules for the LOG board.
Table 8-98 Substitution rules of the LOG board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LOG
TN12LOG
The TN12LOG can be created as TN11LOG on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOG functions as the
TN11LOG.
NOTE
l When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC
code pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board
and transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution
does not apply.
l A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board
with APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive
optical power are different.
TN12LOG
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
None

8-191
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.11.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOG board implements conversion between eight
channels of GE optical signals and OTU2 optical signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations.
For the position of the LOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-49.
Figure 8-49 Position of the LOG board in the WDM system
1
GE
MUX
LOG
G.694.1
Client side
GE
G.694.1 LOG
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
8
WDM side
Client side

The LOG board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelengths, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 8-99 Functions and features of the LOG board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes eight channels of GE service signals into one channel of

OTU2 optical signals and converts them to a DWDM standard that
complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1 or a CWDM standard
wavelength that complies with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is
similar.
Client-side
service type
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: N/A.
NOTE
The TN12LOG board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of eight channels of GE

services each to working/protection cross-connection boards respectively
through the backplane. Supports the transmission of eight GE signals to
the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of eight GE signals from one
8-192

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
OTN function

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of GE signals into OTU2 signals. The
encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function

within the range of:
l 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
Supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
LPT function
Supported
FEC encoding
TN11LOG:
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.
975.
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies
with ITU-T G.975.1.
TN12LOG:
975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
ALS function
Test frame
Supported
8-193
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LOG
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 only supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1
protection and the OWSP protection.
eSFP/XFP

client side.
TN12LOG:
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
8-194
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3z

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LOG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-50 and Figure 8-51 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-195
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-50 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
8
GE
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
Crossconnect
module
GE
OTN
encapsulation processing
and mapping
module
module
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
8-196

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-51 Functional modules and signal flow of the LOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)
WDM side
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
NOTE
The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the corresponding
electrical signals on the TN12LOG.
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals
is considered as an example.
The client side of the LOG board accesses GE optical signals.

In the signal flow of the LOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOG to the WDM side
of the LOG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then,
the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals.
conversion, the module sends out OTU2 optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-197
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through
the OUT optical interface.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2 optical signals at DWDM
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM wavelengths that comply with
ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E
conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs eight
channels of GE signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels of electrical
signals, and then outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight channels of the internal


OptiX OSN 8800: NA.
OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. And also grooms the
electrical signals between the LOG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
OptiX OSN 3800: Implements the cross-connection and pass through between the
electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to
the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The
grooming service signals are GE signals.
8-198

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

performance.
Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs the FEC/
AFEC encoding and decoding.
l

Power supply module

8.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board.

Figure 8-52 shows the front panel of the LOG board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-199
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-52 Font panel of the LOG board
LOG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
OUT
IN
LOG
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOG board.Table 8-100 lists the type
8-200

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-100 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOG board
Interface
Type
Function
INa
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUTa
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX8
LC
RX1-RX8
LC

equipment.
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOG.
Laser Hazard Level

8.11.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LOG board.
Table 8-101 shows the valid slots for the TN11LOG board.
Table 8-101 Valid slots for TN11LOG board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 8-102 shows the valid slots for the TN12LOG board.
Table 8-102 Valid slots for TN12LOG board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

8-201
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
8.11.7 Characteristic Code for the LOG

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-103 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOG board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 8-53 shows the application model of the LOG board. Table 8-104 describes the meaning
of each port.
8-202

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-53 Port diagram of the LOG board

Client side
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-5
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
Cross-connect
module
201(LP/LP)-1
Service
processing
module
1(IN/OUT)-1
WDM-side
opticalmodule
Table 8-104 Meaning of NM port of the LOG board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
LP
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1, 2, 3,

4, 5, 6, 7 and 8.
IN/OUT
These ports correspond to the WDM-side optical interfaces.
If the LOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LOG board
(create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown by
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LOG board and the LP port
of other boards, as shown by (3) in Figure 8-54. (The GE services accessed from the
client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for
protection and the inter-board service convergence.)
of the LOG board, as shown by (4) in Figure 8-54. (The GE services accessed from the
client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of the LOG board for
protection and the inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.
There should be no more than eight cross-connections between the RX/TX ports of the local
board or other boards and the LP port of the local board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LOG board and the LP port of other
boards, as shown by (5) in Figure 8-54. (The GE services accessed from the WDM side
8-203
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming
of the WDM-side services.)
l
The eight paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 8-54.
Figure 8-54 Cross-connection diagram of the LOG board

Client side
Other board
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-5
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
5
3
4
2
1
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
201(LP/LP)-5
201(LP/LP)-6
201(LP/LP)-7
201(LP/LP)-8
LOG
1

The client side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LOG board
The WDM side of the LOG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
2
3
4
5
Other board TN11L4G/TN11LDGD/TN11LDGS/TN11LOG/TN12LOG/TN11LQG/TN13LQM/

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
8.11.9 LOG Parameters

For the parameters of LOG, refer to Table 8-105.
Table 8-105 LOG Parameters
8-204
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

board.
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
Service Type
GE, GE(GFP-T)
Default: GE

board.
more information.
The Service Type parameter sets the type of
the service accessed at the optical interface on
the client side.
NOTE
The TN11LOG is reset when Service Typeis
changed.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On
The Laser Status parameter sets and queries

the laser status of a board.
more information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: Enabled
Default: FEC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

determines whether to automatically shut
down the laser after the signals received by a
board are lost.
(LPT).
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface)
forward error correction (FEC) function of the
current optical interface.
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode
of the current optical interface.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.

8-205
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
Used to query the operating wavelength at the

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

wavelength number, wavelength and
frequency of the current optical interface on
the WDM side of a board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: C
Default: 9600
Default: 1000M FullDuplex

SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
8-206

queries the maximum packet length supported
by a board and is applicable to the boards
supporting Ethernet services.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled

pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test
status of a board.
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

NOTE
Only TN12LOG supports this parameter.
8.11.10 Specifications of the LOG

NOTE
Specifications of Optical Modules on the Client Side of the TN11LOG/TN12LOG

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 G
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3

8-207
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 G
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km

(eSFP
CWDM)-80km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80
8-208
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP
CWDM)-40km

(eSFP
CWDM)-80km

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE
Std 802.3.
Specifications of Fixed Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN11LOG

Table 8-108 Specifications of fixed optical modules on the DWDM side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm
800 ps/nm
NRZ- 40 channels fixed

(odd & even
wavelengths)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-209
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
800 ps/nm
800 ps/nm

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Specifications of Tunable Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN11LOG

Table 8-109 Specifications of tunable optical modules on the DWDM side
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
1200 ps/nm
- TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm TunableAPD
4800 ps/nm
-ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable

Maximum mean
launched power
8-210
dBm

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
1200 ps/nm
- TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm TunableAPD
4800 ps/nm
-ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
1200
1200
4800
800
APD
APD
PIN

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-211
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Fixed Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12LOG

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value

& even wavelengths)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
8-212
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Tunable Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12LOG

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm -NRZTunable
800 ps/nm- DRZTunable
NRZ- 80 channels
tunable
DRZ- 80 channels tunable

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
range
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

PIN
8-213
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Gray Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12LOG

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
8-214
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11LOG: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN12LOG: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LOG
NRZ-fixed (10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
40
45
NRZ-tunable (10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
43
48
DRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
43.5
48.5
ODB-tunable (10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
55.0
60.5
800 ps/nm (XFP)
37.0
41.44
NRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable)
41.61
46.6
TN12LOG
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-215
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
DRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
43.04
48.0
8.12 LOM
LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board
The available functional versions of the LOM board are TN11 and TN12.
8.12.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOM board multiplexes a maximum of eight channels
of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G, or two
3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G signals into one channel of OTU2 signals. It also
implements conversion between these signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal width
does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. The LOM board also supports
hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above.
The LOM board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.12.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board.
8.12.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11LOM board. One slot houses one TN12LOM board.
8.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM
8.12.9 LOM Parameters
8.12.10 Specifications of the LOM

8-216

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-113 lists the version description of the LOM board.

Table 8-113 Version description of the LOM board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
The TN11LOM supports AFEC, and the TN12LOM supports
AFEC-2. Boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect
with each other. For details, see 8.12.3 Functions and Features.
Only the TN12LOM supports 3G-SDI, InfiniBand 2.5G and
InfiniBand 5G. For details, see 8.12.3 Functions and Features.
l Appearance:
The TN11LOM and TN12LOM versions use different front panels.
For details, see 8.12.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 8.12.10 Specifications of
the LOM.
Replacement
Table 8-114 lists the substitution rules for the LOM board.
Table 8-114 Substitution rules for the LOM board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LOM
TN12LOM
The TN12LOM can be created as TN11LOM on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LOM functions as the
TN11LOM.
NOTE
does not apply.
TN12LOM
None
8.12.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LOM board multiplexes a maximum of eight channels
of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G, four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G, or two
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-217
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G signals into one channel of OTU2 signals. It also

implements conversion between these signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations. The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the signal width
does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. The LOM board also supports
hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above.
For the position of the LOM board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-55 and Figure 8-56.
Figure 8-55 Position of the TN11LOM board in the WDM system
ISC 1G/
ISC 2G/
1
GE/
FC100/
FC200/
FC400/
FICON/
8
FICON Express/
FICON4G
MUX
LOM
G.694.1
G.694.1 LOM
DMUX
Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
ISC 1G/
ISC 2G/
GE/
1
FC100/
FC200/
FC400/
FICON/
8 FICON Express/
FICON4G
Client side
Figure 8-56 Position of the TN12LOM board in the WDM system

GE
ISC 1G
ISC 2G
FC100
FC200
FC400
FICON
FICON4G
FICON Express
InfiniBand 2.5G
InfiniBand 5G
3G-SDI
MUX
LOM
G.694.1
G.694.1
DMUX
Client side
DMUX
LO
M
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
GE
ISC 1G
ISC 2G
FC100
FC200
FC400
FICON
FICON4G
FICON Express
InfiniBand 2.5G
InfiniBand 5G
3G-SDI
Client side
NOTE
For ISC 1G, GE, FC100, and FICON services, the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the client side are all
available.
For FICON Express, ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3,
TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available.
For 3G-SDI, FC400, InfiniBand 5G and FICON4G services, the client-side TX1/RX1 and TX5/RX5 are
available.
The client-side eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
The client-side interfaces are divided into two groups: RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5-RX8/TX8. Each
group of these optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.

The LOM board is mainly used to achieve tunable wavelength, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
8-218

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-115 Functions and features of the LOM board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Multiplexes eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G services,

four FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/InfiniBand 2.5G services, or
two 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G services into one
channel of OTU2 optical signals and converts them to a DWDM
standard wavelength that complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.
694.1. It can also perform the reverse process.
l Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The
overall bandwidth of the first and last four optical interfaces should
be equal to or less than 5 Gbit/s, respectively.
l The LOM board supports FC extension and ensures that the data width
does not decrease during long-haul transmission of FC services. For
FC100/FC200/FC400 services, the maximum transmission distance
of the WDM side is 3000 km.
Client-side
service type

FICON4G: SAN service at a rate of 4.25 Gbit/s
ISC 1G: SAN service at a rate of 1.06 Gbit/s
ISC 2G: SAN service at a rate of 2.12 Gbit/s
InfiniBand 2.5G: SAN service at a rate of 2.5 Gbit/s
InfiniBand 5G: SAN service at a rate of 5 Gbit/s
3G-SDI: Video service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s
NOTE
The LOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Only the TN12LOM supports InfiniBand 2.5G, InfiniBand 5G and 3G-SDI.
OTN function
l Supports the mapping of up to eight channels of client-side signals

into OTU2/OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping process
is compliant with GDPS, ITU-T G.709.
l Supports SM functions for OTU2.
l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-219
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
LPT function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service
type is GE.
FEC encoding
TN11LOM:
l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T
G.975.
with ITU-T G.975.1.
TN12LOM:
G.975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LOM
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of

the board.

eSFP/XFP

client side.
TN12LOM:
Loopback
8-220
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3z
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FCLS)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FCBB-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3
(FC-SW-3)
COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING
PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel
Sysplex) Protocol
IBM Private Protocol
NOTE
Only the TN12LOM supports IBM Private Protocol.
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-221
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-57 and Figure 8-58 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LOM board.
Figure 8-57 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LOM board
Client side
GE
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
RX1
RX2
RX8
TX1
TX2
TX8
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
FICON
encapsulation and
mapping module
WDM side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
OUT
O/E
IN
ISC
encapsulation and
mapping module
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
8-222

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-58 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LOM board
GE
encapsulation and
mapping module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client
side
RX1
RX2
O/E
E/O
InfiniBand
encapsulation and
mapping module
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OTN
processing
module
ISC
encapsulation and
mapping module
RX8
TX1
TX2
WDM
side
FICON
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Any
encapsulation and
mapping module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LOM board can access the following signals:
l
GE optical signals
GE electrical signals
ISC 1G optical signals
ISC 2G optical signals
FC100 optical signals
FICON optical signals
FICON Express optical signals
FICON4G optical signals
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-223
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

InfiniBand 2.5G optical signals
InfiniBand 5G optical signals
3G-SDI optical signals

NOTE
Only the TN12LOM supports 3G-SDI, InfiniBand 2.5G, and InfiniBand 5G service.
NOTE
available.
For FICON Express,ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3,
TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available.
available.
NOTE
electrical signals.
Suggest change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
In the signal flow of the LOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LOM to the WDM side
of the LOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels (GE/FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service
signals) or four channels (FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G /InfiniBand 2.5GI service
signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G service signals) of the
optical signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
After O/E conversion, different types of signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation
and mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one
channel of OTU2 signals.
conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface.
module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC,
demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs eight channels (GE/
FC100/FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four channels (FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G/
InfiniBand 2.5G service signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand
5G service signals) of the electrical signals.
8-224

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the eight channels (GE/FC100/
FICON/ISC 1G service signals) or four channels (InfiniBand 2.5G/FC200/FICON Express/
ISC 2G service signals) or two channels (3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G service
signals) of the electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the
TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of eight channels of GE/FC100/FICON/
ISC 1G optical signals or four channels of FC200/FICON Express/ISC 2G /InfiniBand
2.5G optical signals or two channels of 3G-SDI/FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 5G
optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from eight or four or two channels of
the internal electrical signals to the corresponding optical signals.

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.

The module consists of the GE encapsulation and mapping module, ISC encapsulation and
mapping module, FC encapsulation and mapping module, FICON encapsulation and
mapping module, and OTN processing module.
performance.
ISC encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of ISC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors ISC
performance.
FC encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2e
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FC
performance.
FICON encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates multiple channels of FICON signals and maps the signals into the OTU2
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors FICON
performance.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-225
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/OTU2e signals, and

performs FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l

Power supply module

8.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board.

Figure 8-59 and Figure 8-60 show the front panel of the LOM board.
8-226

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-59 Front panel of the TN11LOM board
LOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK/ACT1
LINK/ACT2
LINK/ACT3
LINK/ACT4
LINK/ACT5
LINK/ACT6
LINK/ACT7
LINK/ACT8
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
RX5
OUT IN
TX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
LOM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-227
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-60 Front panel of the TN12LOM board

LOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
OUT IN
LOM
Indicators
There are twelve indicators on the front panel.
l
Data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn) - green

NOTE
Only the TN11LOM board has the data port connection/data transceiver indicator (LINK/ACTn).
8-228

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are 18 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LOM board. Table 8-116 lists the type
Table 8-116 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LOM board
Interface
Type
Function
INa
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUTa
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX8
LC

Transmits the optical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the optical module is used.
Transmits the electrical service signal to the client-side
equipment when the electrical module is used.
RX1-RX8
LC

equipment.
Receives the optical service signal from the client-side
Receives the electrical service signal from the clientside equipment when the electrical module is used.
a: Only the G.657A2 fiber can be used in "IN" and "OUT" interface of TN12LOM.
NOTE
available.
For FICON Express,ISC 2G, InfiniBand 2.5G, Any(622M-4G) and FC200 services, the client-side TX1/
RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5 and TX7/RX7 are available.
available.
It is recommended to RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-229
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.12.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11LOM board. One slot houses one TN12LOM board.
Table 8-117 and Table 8-118 show the valid slots for the LOM board.
Table 8-117 Valid slots for the TN11LOM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17, IU19-IU25, IU27IU33, IU35-IU41, IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59,

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1-IU7, IU12-IU18, IU20-IU26, IU29IU35
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU3-IU5
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along
the left slot of the two occupied slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board
displayed on the NM is the number of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11LOM
board, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU1.
OptiX OSN 3800: The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot of
the two occupied slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the
NM is the number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the TN11LOM board, the
slot number of the TN11LOM board displayed on the NM is IU3.
Table 8-118 Valid slots for TN12LOM board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8.12.7 Characteristic Code for the LOM

Code for OTUs.
8-230

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Table 8-119 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LOM board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Different service requires different number of timeslots. The number of timeslots required
by each type of service is listed below.
Service Type
Number of Timeslots
GE
FC100
FC200
FC400
FICON
FICON4G
FICON Express
ISC 1G

8-231
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Type
Number of Timeslots
ISC 2G
3G-SDI
InfiniBand 2.5G
InfiniBand 5G
8.12.9 LOM Parameters

For the parameters of LOM, refer to Table 8-120.
Table 8-120 LOM Parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

board.
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
8-232

board.
more information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Type
l TN11LOM: None,
FC-100, FC-200,
FC-400, FICON,
FICON Express,
FICON4G, GE, GE
(GFP-T), ISC 1G,
ISC 2G

the client side.
l TN12LOM: None,
Any, FC-100,
FC-200, FC-400,
FICON, FICON
Express,
FICON4G, GE, GE
(GFP-T), ISC 1G,
ISC 2G, InfiniBand
2.5G, InfiniBand
5G, 3G-SDI
Default: None
Client Side
Service Bearer
Rate (M)
622 - 5000
Default: 622
parameter sets the rate of the accessed service

at the optical interface on the client side of a
board.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only by the
TN12LOM.
See D.5 Client Side Service Bearer Rate (M)

Off, On
Laser Status
Default:
l WDM side: On

more information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

board are lost.
See D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface)

8-233
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FC Internal
Working Mode
Normal Mode, Special

Mode
In different internal working mode, the board

can work with the FC storage equipment of
different vendors.
Default: Normal Mode
l Normal mode: In this mode, the board can

work with the mainstream FC switch
storage equipment (such as the Brocade
switch). Such equipment inserts the
10B_ERR alarm after detecting a link
failure.
l Special mode: In this mode, the board can
work with the switch storage equipment
(such as the McData switch) that uses
special processing standard. Such
equipment inserts the NOS alarm after
detecting a link failure.
OFC Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The open fiber control (OFC) function

controls the transmit power of the laser when
the fiber is disconnected. When the OFC
function is enabled, the laser sends short pulse,
rather than remains in the enabled state, to
check whether the fiber is connected. In this
way, the output optical power of the laser is
cut, which prevents eye injury.
NOTE
l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled
after the OFC function is enabled.
l The OFC function cannot coexist with
protection.
l This parameter is valid only when the Service
Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or ISC 2G.
Only TN11LOM supports this parameter.
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: Enabled
Default: FEC
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
8-234

The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode
of the current optical interface.
See D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface) for
more information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: C
Default: 9600

FC Distance
Extension
Disabled, Enabled
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: Disabled
Default: None
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

A flow control mechanism is applied between
FC service client-side equipment and between
two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching
function of FC services, which ensures that the
bandwidth does not decrease during long haul
transmission of FC services.
See D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM

8-235
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled

status of a board.
Default: Disabled
NOTE

NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

deployment commissioning
NOTE
8.12.10 Specifications of the LOM

NOTE
Specifications of Optical Modules on the Client Side of the TN11LOM/TN12LOM

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 G
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580

Operating
wavelength
range
8-236
nm
830 to 860

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 G
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
Table 8-122 Specifications of FC optical modules on the client side

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
FC400/FICON4G Module
FC100/FC200/FICON/
FICON Express Module
Multimode
Single mode
Multimode
Single mode
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.3
10
0.5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-237
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
FC400/FICON4G Module
FC100/FC200/FICON/
FICON Express Module
Multimode
Single mode
Multimode
Single mode
Transmitter
parameter
specifications
at point S
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
830 to 860
1266 to 1360
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-2
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9
-8
-9.5
-10
Eye pattern
mask
Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface (FC-PI-2)

parameter template

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1260 to 1600
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-14
-16
-17
-18
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-12
-12
-12
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
8-238
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
NOTE
Std 802.3.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-239
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN11LOM

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm
800 ps/nm

(odd & even
wavelengths)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
8-240
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

PIN
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
1200 ps/nm
- TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm TunableAPD
4800 ps/nm
-ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
1200
1200
4800
800
APD
APD
PIN

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-241
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12LOM

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
NRZ- 80 channels
tunable

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
8-242
Receiver type
PIN
range
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

PIN
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value

& even wavelengths)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
TN11LOM:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN12LOM:
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-243
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LOM
NRZ-fixed (10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
92.7
101.7
NRZ-tunable (10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
92.9
101.9
DRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
93.4
102.7
ODB-tunable (10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
98.2
108.0
NRZ - 40 channels
fixed (odd- and evennumbered
wavelengths)(800
ps/nm (XFP))
61.8
69.2
NRZ- 80 channels
tunable (800 ps/nm NRZ- tunable)
64.8
72.6
DRZ- 80 channels
tunable (800ps/nmDRZ-tunable)
66.7
75.0
TN12LOM
NOTE
When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board
increases by another 2 W.
8.13 LQG
LQG: 4 x GE-multiplex-optical wavelength conversion board
8-244

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The available functional version of the LQG board is TN11.

8.13.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQG board implements the conversion between four
The LQG board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connect at the electrical
The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.13.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board.
8.13.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LQG board.
8.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG
8.13.9 LQG Parameters
8.13.10 Specifications of the LQG

The available functional version of the LQG board is TN11.
8.13.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQG board implements the conversion between four
For the position of the LQG board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-61.
Figure 8-61 Position of the LQG board in the WDM system
1
MUX
LQG
GE
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
G.694.1 LQG
G.694.1
DMUX
4
WDMside
DMUX
MUX
GE
4
WDM side

Client side
8-245
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LQG board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connect at the electrical
Table 8-128 Functions and features of the LQG board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Multiplexes four channels of GE service optical signals into one channel of

OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals and converts them to a DWDM standard
wavelength that complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.694.1. The
reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type
Crossconnect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services

the backplane, and supports the transmission of four GE signals to the
paired slots through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one
OTN function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side service

signals into OTU5G signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 5
Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T
G.709.
l Supports SM functions for OTU5G.
l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU5G.
8-246
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specification.
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
Supported
FEC
encoding

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
eSFP

side.
WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3z

8-247
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQG board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-62 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board.
8-248

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-62 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQG board
Backplane (service corss-connection)
GE
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
E/O
Crossconnect
module
Client-side
optical
module
GE
OTN
and mapping
module
module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQG board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the LQG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQG to the WDM side
of the LQG, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of GE optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal processing
one channel of OTU5G/FEC5G signals.
The OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard
wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals from the WDM side through
the IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU5G/FEC5G signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU5G/FEC5G framing, decoding of FEC,
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-249
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

demapping, decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module

outputs four channels of GE signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from four channels of the internal

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals.
OTU5G/FEC5G optical signals.

electrical signals between the LQG and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are GE signals.
electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to
the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane. The
grooming service signals are GE signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the OTU5G/
FEC5G payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors GE
performance.
Frames OTU5G/FEC5G signals, processes overheads in OTU5G/FEC5G signals, and
performs FEC encoding and decoding.

8-250

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

8.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board.

Figure 8-63 shows the front panel of the LQG board.
Figure 8-63 Front panel of the LQG board
LQG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT
IN
LQG
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-251
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQG board. Table 8-129 lists the type
Table 8-129 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQG board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.13.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LQG board.
Valid Slots
Table 8-130 shows the valid slots for the LQG board.
Table 8-130 Valid slots for the LQG board
8-252
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.13.7 Characteristic Code for the LQG

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-131 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQG board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 8-64 shows the application model of the LQG board. Table 8-132 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 8-64 Port diagram of the LQG board
WDM side
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
Cross-connect
module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
201(LP/LP)-1
Service
processing
module
1(IN/OUT)-1
WDM-side
optical
module

8-253
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-132 Meaning of NM port of the LQG board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
LP

IN/OUT
Corresponding to the WDM-side optical

interfaces.
If the LQG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the LQG board
(Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1)
and (2) in Figure 8-65.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQG board and the LP port
of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the LQG board are
cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
of the LQG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the WDM side of the LQG board for protection and the inter-board
NOTE
One optical path of the LP port can be created with a connection to only one RX/TX port.
8-254
Create the cross-connection between the LP port of the LQG board and the LP port of other
boards (The GE services accessed from the WDM side of the LQG board are crossconnected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming of the WDM-side services),
The four paths of the LP port are converged into one channel, which is connected to the
IN/OUT port. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-65 Cross-connection diagram of the LQG board

Client side
Other board
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
5(RX3/TX3)-1
201(LP/LP)-3
6(RX4/TX4)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4
2
1
201(LP/LP)-1
WDM side
WDM side
201(LP/LP)-2
201(LP/LP)-3
201(LP/LP)-4
LQG
The client side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LQG board
The WDM side of the LQG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
3
4
5

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
8.13.9 LQG Parameters

For the parameters of LQG, refer to Table 8-133.
Table 8-133 LQG Parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

8-255
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
GE, GE(GFP-T)
Default: GE
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Service Mode
OTN, SDH
Default: Enabled
Default: OTN
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working
State
8-256
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

information.
The Service Mode parameter sets and
queries the working mode of a board on
the line side.
Click D.51 Service Mode (WDM
pass-through (LPT).
Click D.15 FEC Working State
information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

board.
Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation, 1000M
Full-Duplex
Default: 9600
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

wavelength.
Ethernet services.
information.
The Ethernet Working Mode
parameter sets and queries the working
mode of the Ethernet.
Click D.12 Ethernet Working Mode
information.
board resides.
information.

8-257
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled

Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled

commissioning.
Default: Disabled
8.13.10 Specifications of the LQG

NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
8-258
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
nm
1471 to 1611

1471 to 1611
8-259
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
3400 ps/nm
3400 ps/nmTunable
NRZ
NRZ
8-260
Maximum mean launched power
dBm
Minimum mean launched power
dBm
-2
-3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
3400 ps/nm
3400 ps/nmTunable
10
dB
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode suppression

ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
3400
3400
APD

Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-25
-25
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Specifications of 5G eSFP CWDM Optical Modules on the CWDM Side

Table 8-137 Specifications of 5G eSFP CWDM optical modules on the CWDM side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-50
km
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-70
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
50
70
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB

8-261
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-50
km
5 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-70
km
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
ps/nm
1000
1400

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1450 to 1620
1450 to 1620
dBm
-18
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
8-262
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LQG
NRZ-fixed (5G)
(3400 ps/nm)
28.4
32
NRZ-tunable (5G)
(3400 ps/nm)
31.0
34.4
5 Gbit/s Multi-rate
(eSFP CWDM)-70
km
23.18
26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.14 LQM
LQM: 4-channel multi-rate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion board
The available functional version of the LQM board is TN13.
8.14.2 Application
The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM converts between signals at the rate
between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
The main functions and features supported by the LQM are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.14.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board.
8.14.6 Valid Slots
The LQM occupies one slot.
8.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM
The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
8.14.9 LQM Parameters
8.14.10 Specifications of the LQM

The available functional version of the LQM board is TN13.
Type
The system provides two types of the LQM: One has a pair of input and output optical interfaces,
and the other has two pairs of input and output optical interfaces. Table 8-138 lists the types of
the LQM.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-263
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-138 LQM type description

Board
Type
Description
LQM
Single transmitting and single

receiving board
The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/

OUT1.
Dual-fed selective receiving board
The WDM-side interfaces are IN1/

OUT1 and IN2/OUT2.
NOTE
The WDM-side interfaces of the LQM board are dynamic optical interfaces. Before configuring dual fed
and selective receiving, make sure the optical interfaces have been uploaded manually on the U2000.
8.14.2 Application
The LQM is a type of optical transponder unit. The LQM converts between signals at the rate
between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the LQM in the WDM system, see Figure 8-66 and Figure 8-67.
Figure 8-66 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (single fed and single receiving)
1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LQM
DMUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/ LQM
G.694.2
DMUX
MUX
4
WDM side
Client side
Client side
WDM side
Figure 8-67 Position of the LQM in the WDM system (dual fed and selective receiving)
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
DMUX
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
1
LQM
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
4
DMUX
Client side
8-264
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
LQM
WDM side
MUX
WDM side

Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The client-side four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.

The main functions and features supported by the LQM are cross-connection at the electrical
layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 8-139 Functions and features of the LQM
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
is similar.
l With this board, many services, such as data services (Ethernet services),
SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and voice
services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.
l Implements the dual fed and selective receiving function or single fed and
single receiving function on the WDM side according to the application
scenario.
Client-side
service type

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-265
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.

OptiX OSN 6800:
l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/
protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane.
l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and
2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh
group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to
the mesh group.
OTN
function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and

2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with
GDPS, ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM and TCM function for ODU1.
WDM
specification
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
NOTE
ALS
function
8-266

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Test frame
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and
the OWSP protection.
eSFP

side.
side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

8-267
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
8-268

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-69 and Figure 8-68 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQM.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-269
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-68 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OUT1
E/O
OTN
processing
module
Signal processing
module
OUT2
IN1
IN2
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
8-270

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-69 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQM (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Service
Crossconnect encapsulation
module and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
OUT1
E/O
OUT2
O/E
IN1
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM to the WDM side
of the LQM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the Any optical signals from client
signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-271
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. A laser
converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then
the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with
ITU-T G.694.2 through the IN1-IN2 optical interfaces. Then, the module performs O/E
conversion.
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels
of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
NOTE
Only one pair of WDM-side optical interfaces is used, the board implements the single fed and single
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of Any optical signals.


The module consists of the cross-connect module, service encapsulation and mapping
module, and OTN processing module.
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.
electrical signals between the LQM and the board in the paired slot or the crossconnect board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The signaling module
8-272

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of
four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
l

Power supply module

8.14.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board.

Figure 8-70 shows the front panel of the LQM board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-273
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-70 Front panel of the LQM board
LQM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
LQM
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQM board. Table 8-140 lists the type
8-274

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-140 Types and functions of the LQM interfaces

Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC
Receives single-wavelength signals from the

optical demultiplexing unit or the optical add and
drop multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4
LC
Transmits service signals to the client-side

equipment.
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

8.14.6 Valid Slots

The LQM occupies one slot.
Table 8-141 shows the valid slots for the LQM board.
Table 8-141 Valid slots for the LQM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
8.14.7 Characteristic Code for the LQM

The board characteristic code comprises the information about frequency of signals, type of the
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-275
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code for OTUs.


are listed in Table 8-142
Table 8-142 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQM displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 8-71 shows the application model of the LQM board. Table 8-143 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 8-71 Port diagram of the LQM
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
WDM side
201(ClientLP/ClientLP)-1
Cross-connect
module
8-276
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
Service
processing
module

2(IN2/OUT2)-1
WDM-side
optical
module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-143 Meaning of NM port of the LQM

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
ClientLP

IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2

interfaces.
If the LQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports according to the actual service level
(GE/Any/OTU1) and service type. The cross-connect grooming of GE/Any/OTU1 services
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the LQM
board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
by (1) and (2) in Figure 8-72.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQM board and the
ClientLP port of other boards, as shown by (3) in Figure 8-72. (The GE/Any/OTU1
services accessed from the client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the
WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of other boards and the ClientLP
port of the LQM board, as shown by (4) in Figure 8-72. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services
accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of
the LQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
One RX/TX port can be connected to only one optical path of the ClientLP port.
Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQM board and the ClientLP
port of other boards, as shown by (5) in Figure 8-72. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed
from the WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board
for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/
OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
According to the service type configured on the ClientLP port, configure the transmit and
receive timeslots.
Configuration Principle
l
The transmit and receive timeslots should be specified for each board. In one direction, a
timeslot cannot be shared by multiple services.
In one direction of one service, the timeslot of the receive end must be the same as that of
the transmit end.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-277
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8-278
For each LQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1 and HD-SDI services, timeslots can
be configured only in channel 1 of the LQM board.
Service Type
Number of Timeslots
GE
FE
OTU1
16
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
16
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
16
FC100
FC200
12
FICON
FICON Express
12
HD-SDI
11
DVB-ASI
SDI
ESCON
FDDI

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-72 Cross-connection diagram of the LQM

Client side
Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4
2
1
WDM side
WDM side
LQM
1

The client side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LQM board
The WDM side of the LQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
3
4
5

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 8-72.
8.14.9 LQM Parameters

For the parameters of the LQM, refer to Table 8-144.
Table 8-144 LQM Parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name

8-279
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

board.
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
Service Type
None, Any, FE, GE,

GE(GFP-T), OTU-1,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48,
FC-100, FC-200,
FICON, FICON
Express, HD-SDI,
DVB-ASI, SDI,
ESCON, FDDI

board.
more information.
the client side.
Default: None
Client Side
Service Bearer
Rate (M)
100 - 2200
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 0
Default:
l WDM side: On

board.
more information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode

board are lost.
more information.
Used to set the service mode of the board.
Default: Client Mode
8-280

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled

Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

Default: Enabled
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: C
Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


8-281
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Determines whether to process GCC0, GCC1,

and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the
Default: Disabled
NOTE
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
PRBS Test
Status
Disabled, Enabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Default: Disabled

status of a board.
8.14.10 Specifications of the LQM

NOTE
Specifications of SDH/SONET Optical Modules on the Client Side

NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, L-16.1/LR-1 OC-48 module and L-16.2/LR-2
OC-48 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16, and OC-48 signals.
The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OTU1,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
8-282

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
APD
APD

Receiver
type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
PIN
PIN

8-283
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27

NOTE
NOTE
be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The
specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI
signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580

Operating
wavelength
range
8-284
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

NOTE
The 1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values
may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to
STM-16, and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE
signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-285
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

NOTE
The 2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to
STM-16, and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
signals.
8-286

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

8-287
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
80

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
nm
1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1270 to 1620
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
8-288
Value
DWDM)-120 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
DWDM)-120 km

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
nm
12.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask


Receiver type
APD
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-289
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN13LQM
32.6
35.9
8.15 LQMD
LQMD: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, dual
fed and selective receiving
The available functional versions of the LQMD board are TN11 and TN12.
8.15.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMD board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and
dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
The LQMD board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the
The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.15.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board.
8.15.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LQMD board.
8.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD
The characteristic code for the LQMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
8.15.9 LQMD Parameters
8.15.10 Specifications of the LQMD

Table 8-149 lists the version description of the LQMD board.
8-290

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-149 Version description of the LQMD board

Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
The TN12LQMD board supports access OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and
FDDI services, whereas the TN11LQMD board does not support.
For details, see 8.15.3 Functions and Features.
The TN11LQMD board supports the DWDM and the CWDM
specifications, whereas the TN12LQMD board supports DWDM
specifications. For details, see 8.15.3 Functions and Features.
The TN11LQMD supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.
The TN12LQMD supports the PRBS function on the client side and
WDM side. For details, see 8.15.3 Functions and Features.
l Specification:
the LQMD.
Replacement
Table 8-150 lists the substitution rules for the LQMD board.
Table 8-150 Substitution rules of the LQMD board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LQM
D
TN12LQM
D
The TN12LQMD can be created as TN11LQMD on the NMS.

The former can substitute for the latter, without any software
upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMD functions as the
TN11LQMD.
NOTE
A board with PIN as the receiver type cannot substitute for a board with
APD as the receiver type, because their ranges of receive optical power
are different.
TN12LQM
D
None
8.15.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMD board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and
dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
For the position of the LQMD board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-73.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-291
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-73 Position of the LQMD board in the WDM system

MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
1
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
1
LQMD
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
4
DMUX
Client side
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/ LQMD
G.694.2
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE

The LQMD board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the
Table 8-151 Functions and features of the LQMD board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5
is similar.
l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet
services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and
voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.
side.
8-292

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only TN12LQMD supports OTU1, HD-SDI, SDI and FDDI services.
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.

OptiX OSN 6800:
l Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to working/
protection cross-connection boards respectively through the backplane.
l Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800
2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
l Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh
group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to
the mesh group.
OTN
function

signals into OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than 2.5
Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is compliant with ITU-T
G.709.
WDM
specification
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TN11LQMD: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.

TN12LQMD: Supports the DWDM specification.

8-293
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
TN11LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.

TN12LQMD: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
LPT function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
TN11LQMD: not supported

TN12LQMD: supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and
the OWSP protection.
eSFP
8-294

side.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

8-295
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
the implementation and usage of the DVB
Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
8-296

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQMD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-75 and Figure 8-74 show the functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-297
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-74 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
E/O
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Splitter
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
8-298

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-75 Functional modules and signal flow of the LQMD board (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX
OSN 3800)
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Service
Crossconnect encapsulation
module and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OTN
processing
module
Splitter
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
OUT1
OUT2
IN1
IN2
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
In the signal flow of the LQMD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMD to the WDM side
of the LQMD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-299
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. An optical
splitter converts the OTU1 optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals,
and then the two channels signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
ITU-T G.694.2. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
FEC, demapping, cross-connection and service decapsulation processing. Then, the module
outputs four channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l



OptiX OSN 8800: not applicable.
client-side signals and the WDM-side signals of the board. The cross-connect
module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMD and the board in the
paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service
signals are Any signals.
module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
(consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any signals.
8-300

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l

Power supply module

8.15.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board.

Figure 8-76 shows the front panel of the LQMD board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-301
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-76 Front panel of the LQMD board
LQMD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
LQMD
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQMD board. Table 8-152 lists the type
8-302

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-152 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMD board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

8.15.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LQMD board.
Table 8-153 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMD board.
Table 8-153 Valid slots for TN11LQMD board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 8-154 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMD board.
Table 8-154 Valid slots for TN12LQMD board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

8-303
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
8.15.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMD

The characteristic code for the LQMD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
Table 8-155 Characteristic code for the LQMD board
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Frequency of the forth optical

signal

WDM side.
Last four digits
Frequency of the forth optical

signal

the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the LQMD board is 92109210.
"92109210" indicates the frequency of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.


Table 8-156 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMD board displayed on the NM
8-304
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 8-77 shows the application model of the LQMD board. Table 8-157 describes the
meaning of each port.
Figure 8-77 Port diagram of the LQMD board
Client side
WDM side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
WDM-side
optical
module
NOTE
TN11LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12LQMD: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/
ClientLP)-4.
Table 8-157 Meaning of NM port of the LQMD board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
ClientLP

IN1/OUT1-IN2/OUT2

interfaces.
If the LQMD board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-305
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the
LQMD board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board),
as shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 8-78.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMD board and the
services accessed from the client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the
port of the LQMD board, as shown by (4) in Figure 8-78. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services
the LQMD board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
8-306
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMD board and the
ClientLP port of other boards (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed from the WDM side
of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other board for the grooming
of the WDM-side services), as shown by (5) in Figure 8-77.
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/
OUT2 ports. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
receive timeslots.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-78 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMD board

Client side
Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
WDM side
WDM side
LQMD
1

The client side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LQMD board
The WDM side of the LQMD board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
3
4
5

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 only supports the cross-connections shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 8-78.
l
the transmit end.
For each LQMD board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, HD-SDI services, timeslots can be
configured only in channel 1 of the LQMD board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Service Type
Number of Timeslots
GE
7
8-307
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Type
Number of Timeslots
FE
OTU1
16
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
16
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
16
FC100
FC200
12
FICON
FICON Express
12
HD-SDI
11
DVB-ASI
SDI
ESCON
FDDI
8.15.9 LQMD Parameters

For parameters of LQMD, refer to Table 8-158.
Table 8-158 LQMD parameters
8-308
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

board.
Default: Used

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

board.
more information.
Service Type
None, Any, DVBASI, SDI, ESCON,

FC-100, FC-200,
FDDI, FE, FICON,
FICON Express, GE,
GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
OTU-1, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16

the client side.
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMD supports Any, SDI, FDDI,
HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services.
Default: None
Client Side
Service Bearer
Rate (M)
100 - 2200
Default: 0

board.
NOTE
Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.

Off, On
Laser Status
Default:
l WDM side: On

more information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Service Mode
Default: Enabled

board are lost.
Default: Disabled

more information.
Client Mode, OTN

Mode
The Service Mode parameter sets and queries

the working mode of a board on the line side.
NOTE
Only TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface) for

more information.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-309
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled

Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength
Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.05
0 to
80/1560.61/192.1
00

Default: Enabled
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.33
0 to
18/1611.00/188.7
80
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
C, CWDM
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: C
Default: 9600
8-310


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Determines whether to process GCC0, GCC1,

and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

status of a board.
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMD supports this parameter.
8.15.10 Specifications of the LQMD

NOTE
TN11LQMD/TN12LQMD: Specifications of SDH/SONET Optical Modules on the

Client Side
NOTE
STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-311
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
APD
APD

Receiver
type
8-312
PIN
PIN

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
TN11LQMD/TN12LQMD: Specifications of GE Optical Modules on the Client

Side
NOTE
NOTE
signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580

Operating
wavelength
range
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355

8-313
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
TN11LQMD/TN12LQMD: Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Modules on the

Client Side
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed
signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
8-314

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
TN12LQMD: Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Modules on the Client Side

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-315
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

8-316
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN11LQMD: Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm2mWAPD
12800 ps/
nmTunable
6400 ps/
nm-Four
Channels
-Tunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-4
-4
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-8
-8
-5
-5
-5
-5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-28
-18
-28
-28
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
APD
1300 to
1575

8-317
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN12LQMD: Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/nmAPD
12800 ps/nmTunable
6400ps/nmFour
ChannelsTunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-4
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-8
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
ps/nm
12800
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant
8-318
Receiver type
APD
APD
APD
range
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
-28
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
1300 to 1575

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN11LQMD: Specifications of Optical Modules on the CWDM Side

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
1600 ps/nm-4mW
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
0.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-319
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LQMD
Fixed (2.5G) (12800

ps/nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
57.1
65.7
Tunable (2.5G)
(12800 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
61.1
67.2
31.1
34.3
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mWAPD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
TN12LQMD
8.16 LQMS
LQMS: 4-channel multi-rate (100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s) OTU1 wavelength conversion unit, single
fed and single receiving
The available functional versions of the LQMS board are TN11 and TN12.
8.16.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMS board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations or
between ODU1 signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
The LQMS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the
The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.16.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board.
8.16.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LQMS board.
8.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS
8-320

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.16.9 LQMS Parameters

8.16.10 Specifications of the LQMS

Table 8-166 lists the version description of the LQMS board.
Table 8-166 Version description of the LQMS board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Similarity
As a service convergence board, the TN12LQMS board works in the same

way as the TN11LQMS board does.
Difference
l Function:
The TN11LQMS board does not support access OTU1,HDSDI,SDI and FDDI services, whereas the TN12LQMS board
supports. For details, see 8.16.3 Functions and Features.
The TN11LQMS board supports the DWDM and the CWDM
specifications, whereas the TN12LQMS board supports DWDM
specifications. For details, see 8.16.3 Functions and Features.
The TN12LQMS supports the grooming of ODU1 signal, whereas
the TN11LQMS does not support.
l Specification:
the LQMS.
Replacement
Table 8-167 lists the substitution rules for the LQMS board.
Table 8-167 Substitution rules of the LQMS board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LQM
S
TN12LQM
S
The TN12LQMS can be created as TN11LQMS on the NMS.

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LQMS functions as the
TN11LQMS.
NOTE
are different.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-321
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN12LQM
S
None
8.16.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LQMS board converts between signals at the rate of
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations or
between ODU1 signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
Application Scenario 1 for the TN11LQMS and TN12LQMS: Conversion Between

Signals at the Rate of 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s and ITU-T RecommendationCompliant WDM Signals
Figure 8-79 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (LQM Mode)
1
MUX
DMUX
4
Client side
DMUX
LQMS G.694.1/
G.694.2
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
MUX
G.694.1/
LQMS
G.694.2
WDM side
100Mbit/s
-2.5Gbit/s
4
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
Application Scenario 2 for the TN12LQMS: Conversion Between ODU1 Electrical

Signals and ITU-T Recommendation-Compliant WDM Signals
Figure 8-80 Position of the LQMS board in the WDM system (NS1 Mode)
MUX
TOM
DMUX
LQMS G.694.1
G.694.1 LQMS
DMUX
TOM
MUX
NOTE
Scenario 2 is supported on the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800.
8-322

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LQMS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and cross-connection at the
Table 8-168 Functions and features of the LQMS board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Multiplexes four optical signals at the rate of 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s to
a 2.5 Gbit/s optical signal and converts it into the standard DWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.
l With this board, many services, such as the data services (Ethernet
services), SAN services (ESCON, FC/FICON), video services (DVB), and
voice services (SDH/SONET), can be transmitted by the same wavelength.
l Maps ODU1 signal into OTU1 optical signal and converts it into the
standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse
process is similar.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only TN12LQMS supports OTU1,HD-SDI,SDI and FDDI services.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-323
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: NA.

OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four channels of GE services each to
backplane.
Supports the transmission of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
s and 2.5 Gbit/s to the paired slots through the backplane.
l TN12LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal each to
backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800
l TN11LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
Supports the grooming of four GE signals from one board of the mesh
group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging
to the mesh group.
l TN12LQMS:
Supports the grooming of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s
and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
Supports the grooming of four GE signals or one ODU1 signal from
one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other
three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN
function

signals into one channel of OTU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must
be less than 2.5 Gbit/s. The encapsulation and mapping process is
compliant with ITU-T G.709.
8-324
WDM
specification
TN11LQMS: Supports the DWDM and the CWDM specifications.
Tunable
wavelength
function
TN12LQMS: Supports the DWDM specification.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
TN11LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the WDM side.

TN12LQMS: supports the PRBS function on the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
LPT
function
is FE or GE.
FEC
encoding
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
TN11LQMS: not supported

TN12LQMS: supported
Opticallayer ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
l Supports the tributary SNCP protection (NS1 Mode).
l Supports the ODUk SNCP (NS1 Mode).
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800 supports client-side 1+1 protection and the OWSP protection.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop

Supported
8-325
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Client side
8-326
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Data Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent
(PDM)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-327
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQMS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-81, Figure 8-82 and Figure 8-83 show the functional modules and signal flow of the
LQMS board.
8-328

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-81 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (OptiX OSN 8800)
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
8-329
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-82 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LQMS and TN12 LQMS board
(LQM mode) (OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
100Mbit/s - 2.5Gbit/s Backplane(service cross-connection)
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LQMS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
NOTE
TN12LQMS supports the DWDM specifications only.
In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the WDM side
of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
8-330

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the
OUT optical interface.
l
Receive direction
conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping,
decapsulation processing and service cross-connection. Then, the module outputs four
channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Figure 8-83 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 mode)(OptiX
OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800)
ODU1
WDM side
E/O
Crossconnect
module
OTN
processing
module
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Required
voltage
SCC

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
8-331
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow (NS1 Mode)

In the signal flow of the LQMS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQMS to the backplane
of the LQMS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane.
The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the
module outputs one channel of OTU1 signals.
Receive direction
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the module
sends out one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
Module Function
l



OptiX OSN 8800: NA.
module also grooms the electrical signals between the LQMS and the board in the
paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming service
signals are Any/ODU1 signals.
8-332

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

module also grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any/ODU1 signals.
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and monitors Any
performance.
l

Power supply module

8.16.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board.

Figure 8-84 shows the front panel of the LQMS board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-333
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-84 Front panel of the LQMS board
LQMS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT
IN
LQMS
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LQMS board. Table 8-169 lists the type
8-334

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-169 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LQMS board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
NOTE
Laser Hazard Level

8.16.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LQMS board.
Table 8-170 shows the valid slots for the TN11LQMS board.
Table 8-170 Valid slots for TN11LQMS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 8-171 shows the valid slots for the TN12LQMS board.
Table 8-171 Valid slots for TN12LQMS board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

8-335
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
8.16.7 Characteristic Code for the LQMS

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-172 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LQMS board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 8-85 and Figure 8-86 show the application model of the LQMS board. Table 8-173
describes the meaning of each port.
Figure 8-85 Port diagram of the TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS board (LQM Mode)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
8-336
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
Service
processing
module

WDM-side
optical module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
TN11LQMS: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12LQMS (LQM Mode): The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201
(ClientLP/ClientLP)-4.
Figure 8-86 Port diagram of the TN12LQMS board (NS1 Mode)

WDM side
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
Cross-connect
module
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
Service
processing
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
WDM-side
optical module
Table 8-173 Meaning of NM port of the LQMS board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
ClientLP

ODU1LP
Internal logical port.
IN/OUT

interfaces.
If the LQMS board is used to transmit services, set Board Mode in Configuration > WDM
interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are LQM Mode and NS1
Mode.
NOTE
The TN11LQMS board does not require the configuration of the board mode. The electrical cross-connect
services of the TN11LQMS are created in the same way as the electrical cross-connect services of the
TN12LQMS in the LQM mode.
LQM Mode:
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
can be created.
8-337
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the
LQMS board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board),
as shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 8-87.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the LQMS board and the
services accessed from the client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the
port of the LQMS board, as shown by (4) in Figure 8-87. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services
the LQMS board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
Only the first optical path of ClientLP ports supports OTU1 services.
8-338
Create the cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the LQMS board and the ClientLP
port of other boards, as shown by (5) in Figure 8-87. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services accessed
from the WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other
board for the grooming of the WDM-side services.)
The two paths of the ClientLP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There
is no need for configuration on the U2000.
receive timeslots.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-87 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board

Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Client side
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
WDM side
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4
2
1
WDM side
LQMS
1

The client side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
LQMS board
The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
3
4
5

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports only the cross-connections shown by (1) and (2) in Figure 8-87.
l
the transmit end.
For each LQMS board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can
be configured only in channel 1 of the LQMS board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Service Type
Number of Timeslots
GE
7
8-339
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Type
Number of Timeslots
FE
OTU1
16
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
16
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
16
FC100
FC200
12
FICON
FICON Express
12
HD-SDI
11
DVB-ASI
SDI
ESCON
FDDI
NS1 Mode (Supported only by the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800):
8-340
Create the cross-connection between the ODU1LP port of the LQMS board and the
ClientLP port of other boards shown in Figure 8-88.
The four paths of the ODU1LP port are respectively connected to the IN/OUT ports. There
is no need for configuration on the U2000.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-88 Cross-connection diagram of the LQMS board

Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
WDM side
WDM side
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
LQMS
The WDM side of the LQMS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
Other board TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/

TN52NS2 /TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3/TN12LQMS (NS1 Mode)
8.16.9 LQMS Parameters

For parameters of LQMS, refer to Table 8-174.
Table 8-174 LQMS parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

the occupancy status of the current channel
of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


8-341
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, OTU-1,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16

NOTE
Only the TN12LQMS supports Any, SDI,
FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services.
Default: None
Client Side Service
Bearer Rate (M)
100 - 2200
Default: 0

service at the optical interface on the client
side of a board.
NOTE
Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
See D.5 Client Side Service Bearer Rate

(M) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Off, On
Laser Status
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode

(LPT).
queries the working mode of a board on the
line side.
NOTE
Only TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
See D.51 Service Mode (WDM

8-342

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled

Default: Enabled
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

the WDM-side optical interface of a board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

wavelength.
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets
and queries the maximum packet length
supported by a board and is applicable to
the boards supporting Ethernet services.
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter
sets and queries the working mode of the
Ethernet.
See D.12 Ethernet Working Mode

8-343
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

Disabled.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only the TN12LQMS supports this parameter.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Board Mode
LQM Mode, NS1 Mode
Default: Disabled
Default: LQM Mode

resides.
parameter is set to Enabled, the board
sends the test frame where the payload
consists of only 0. This parameter is used
in the deployment commissioning.
The Board Mode parameter is used to set
the work mode of a board depending on the
application scenario.
NOTE
This parameter is only available for
TN12LQMS.
See D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)

8.16.10 Specifications of the LQMS

NOTE
8-344

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS: Specifications of SDH/SONET Optical Modules on the

Client Side
NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30

8-345
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Eye pattern
mask
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
G.957-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS: Specifications of GE Optical Modules on the Client Side

NOTE
NOTE
signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
8-346
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
TN11LQMS/TN12LQMS: Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Modules on the

Client Side
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4,
OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply
to GE signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-347
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
signals.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
8-348
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN12LQMS: Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Modules on the Client Side

NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

8-349
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN11LQMS: Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm2mWAPD
12800 ps/
nmTunable
6400 ps/
nm- Four
Channels
-Tunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
-2
-2
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
8-350
APD
1300 to
1575
-28
-18
-28

-28
-28
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
12800 ps/
nm- PIN
12800 ps/
nm-APD
6500 ps/
nm- PIN
3200 ps/
nm2mWAPD
12800 ps/
nmTunable
6400 ps/
nm- Four
Channels
-Tunable
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
TN12LQMS: Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
12800 ps/nmAPD
12800 ps/nmTunable
6400ps/nmFour
ChannelsTunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-2
-2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
ps/nm
12800
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-351
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module
Type
12800 ps/nmAPD
12800 ps/nmTunable
6400ps/nmFour
ChannelsTunable
APD
APD
Receiver type
APD
range
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
-28
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
1300 to 1575
TN11LQMS: Specifications of Optical Modules on the CWDM Side

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
1600 ps/nm-4mW
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
2.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant
8-352

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1600 ps/nm-4mW
Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LQMS
Fixed (2.5G) (12800

ps/nm-PIN
12800 ps/nm-APD
56.3
64.5
Tunable (2.5G)
(12800 ps/nm
6400 ps/nm)
60.4
66.4
29
33.3
6500 ps/nm-PIN
3200 ps/nm-2mWAPD
1600 ps/nm-4mW)
TN12LQMS
8.17 LSQ
LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
Only one functional version of the LSQ board is available, that is, TN11.
8.17.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSQ board converts between one channel of STM-256/
OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-353
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LSQ board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The LSQ board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.17.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board.
8.17.6 Valid Slots
Two slots houses one LSQ board.
8.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LSQ
8.17.9 LSQ Parameters
8.17.10 Specifications of the LSQ

Only one functional version of the LSQ board is available, that is, TN11.
8.17.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSQ board converts between one channel of STM-256/
OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 Recommendations.
For the position of the LSQ board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-89.
Figure 8-89 Position of the LSQ board in the WDM system
MUX
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
Client side
8-354
LSQ
DMUX
G.694.1
G.694.1
DMUX
MUX
WDM side

WDM side
LSQ
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LSQ board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 8-182 Functions and features of the LSQ board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Maps one STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signal into one OTU3 optical signal

and converts the signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM
wavelength. It also performs the reverse process and compensates for the
dispersion in the signals accessed on the WDM side.
Client-side
service type
OTN function

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Maps a maximum of one channel of client-side service signals into
OTU3 signals.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function

ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
Supports the PRBS function on the client side.

NOTE
The PRBS function of LSQ on the client side is supported only when the client-side
service type is STM-256/OC-768.
LPT function
Not supported
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-355
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme

Loopback
Client side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Protocol or
standard
compliance
8-356
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSQ board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-90 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-357
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-90 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSQ board
Client side
RX
TX
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
E/O
WDM side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
O/E
Client-side OTN
processing module
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSQ board can access the following optical signals:
l
In the signal flow of the LSQ board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSQ to the WDM side
of the LSQ, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
equipment through the RX interface, and performs O/E conversion.
signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring.
Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for
encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3
electrical signals.
8-358

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Receive direction
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/
OTU3 electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical
signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical
interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical
signals.
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals.


The module consists of a SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side
OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module.
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET
Monitors OTN performance.
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-359
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

8.17.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board.

Figure 8-91 shows the front panel of the LSQ board.
Figure 8-91 Front panel of the LSQ board
LSQ
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX
RX
OUT
IN
LSQ
8-360

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSQ board. Table 8-183 lists the type
Table 8-183 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSQ board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX
LC
RX
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.17.6 Valid Slots

Two slots houses one LSQ board.
Table 8-184 shows the valid slots for the LSQ board.
Table 8-184 Valid slots for the LSQ board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

8-361
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
The rear connector of the LSQ is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the LSQ board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one
of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the LSQ board, the slot number of the LSQ board
displayed on the NM is IU2.
8.17.7 Characteristic Code for the LSQ

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-185 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSQ board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX/RX
NOTE
8.17.9 LSQ Parameters

For parameters of LSQ, refer to Table 8-186.
8-362

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-186 LSQ parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, OC-768, OTU-3,

STM-256
Default: STM-256
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


8-363
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Receive Wavelength
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
Set Receive Wavelength of a board. The

value of the Receive Wavelength is as
follows:
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
l When the receive wavelength of the

board is the same as the transmit
wavelength of the local board, use the
default value, which indicates keeping
the receive wavelength the same as the
transmit wavelength of the local board
automatically.
board is different from the transmit
wavelength of the local board, the
value of this parameter must be the
same as the transmit wavelength of the
peer board; otherwise, services are
affected.
NOTE
In the case of ASON services, this parameter
must be set to the default value.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
8-364
NOTE


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: Disabled
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

Disabled.
resides.
8.17.10 Specifications of the LSQ

NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-365
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Optical Modules on the Client Side of the LSQ

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
Transponder
Line code format
NRZ
nm
1530 to 1565
dBm
dBm
dB
8.2
Minimum side mode suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
40
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1290 to 1570
dBm
-6
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the LSQ

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
Transponder
ODB Tunable
DQPSK Tunable
8-366
Operating frequency
range
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
Transponder
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
NA
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5
2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.6
NA
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
-800 to 800
-800 to 800

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-367
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LSQ
ODB-tunable (40G)
(Transponder)
75.0
82.0
DQPSK-tunable
(40G)(Transponder)
82.0
89.0
8.18 LSX
LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
The available functional versions of the LSX board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.
8.18.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSX board maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service
signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and
WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
The LSX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.18.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the LSX front panel.
8.18.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LSX board.
8.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX
8.18.9 LSX Parameters
8.18.10 Specifications of the LSX

The available functional versions of the LSX board are TN11, TN12 and TN13.
8-368

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-189 lists the version description of the LSX board.

Table 8-189 Version description of the LSX board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the LSX board are TN11, TN12 and
TN13.
Difference
l Function:
The TN11LSX/TN12LSX supports AFEC, and the TN13LSX
supports AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot
interoperate with each other. For details, see 8.18.3 Functions and
Features.
The TN12LSX board and the TN13LSX board support access
FC1200 service, whereas the TN11LSX board does not. For details,
see 8.18.3 Functions and Features.
The TN13LSX board supports the OTU2e service, whereas the
TN11LSX and TN12LSX board does not. For details, see 8.18.3
The TN12LSX board and the TN13LSX board support the 10 Gbit/
s pluggable optical module on the client side, whereas the TN11LSX
board does not. The TN13LSX board supports the 10 Gbit/s
pluggable optical module on the WDM side, whereas the TN11LSX
board and the TN12LSX board do not. For details, see 8.18.3
When client-side services are 10GE LAN services:
TN11LSX: Port Mapping can be set to Bit Transparent Mapping
(11.1G), MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G), or Bit
Transparent Mapping(10.7G).
(11.1G) or Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G).
(11.1G) or MAC Transparent Mapping(10.7G).
For more information, see 8.18.9 LSX Parameters.
l Specification:
the LSX.
Replacement
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Table 8-190 lists the substitution rules for the LSX board.

8-369
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-190 Substitution rules of the LSX board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11LSX
TN12LSX
The TN12LSX can be created as TN11LSX on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12LSX functions as the
TN11LSX.
NOTE
are different.
TN13LSX

TN11LSX.
NOTE
does not apply.
TN12LSX
TN13LSX

TN12LSX.
NOTE
does not apply.
TN13LSX
None
8.18.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSX board maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service
signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and
WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LSX board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-92.
8-370

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-92 Position of the LSX board in the WDM system

10GE LAN /
MUX
10GE WAN /
STM-64/
LSX G.694.1
OC-192/
OTU2/
DMUX
OTU2e/
FC1200
Client side
WDM side
10GE LAN /
10GE WAN /
STM-64/
G.694.1 LSX
OC-192/
OTU2/
MUX
OTU2e/
FC1200
WDM side
Client side
DMUX

The LSX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 8-191 Functions and features of the LSX board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps one channel of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or OTU2e signals
and converts between the 10 Gbit/s service signal and the ITU-T
Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64/OC-192 service is the same.
Therefore, when the 10GE WAN service is transmitted, you can configure it as the
STM-64/OC-192 service on the U2000.
The FC1200 service is only supported by the TN12LSX and TN13LSX.
When an XFP module is used as a WDM-side module on the TN13LSX board, the
TN13LSX board does not support FC1200.
The OTU2e service is only supported by the TN13LSX.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-371
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
OTN
function

the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the mapping of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/
OTU2/OTU2e into OTU2/OTU2e signals, and the transparence mapping
of 10GE LAN into OTU2e signals.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT
function
is 10GE LAN.
FEC
encoding
TN11LSX/TN12LSX:
NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is only supported when the client-side service type
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with
ITU-T G.975.1.
TN13LSX:
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
8-372

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
ALS
function
Test frame
Not supported
Opticallayer ASON
Supported by the TN12LSX and TN13LSX
Not supported
Protection
scheme

XFP
TN12LSX and TN13LSX support the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on

the client side. TN13LSX supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on
the WDM side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-373
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-93 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX.
Figure 8-94 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX.
8-374

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-93 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSX board
Client side
RX
O/E
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
processing module
TX
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
WDM side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
8-375
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-94 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSX/TN13LSX board
Client side
RX
TX
WDM side
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
Client-side OTN
processing module
10GE LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
E/O
OTN
processing
module
FC
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSX board can access the following optical signals:
TN11LSX:
l
TN12LSX:
l
TN13LSX:
8-376

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In the signal flow of the LSX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSX to the WDM side
of the LSX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
equipment through the RX optical interface, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. OTU2/
OTU2e signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance
monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules
for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2/
OTU2e electrical signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/
O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths
Receive direction
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical interface.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC,
demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of
OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical
signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals.
OC-192/STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/OTU2/OTU2e/FC1200 optical signals.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-377
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l

encapsulation and mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, FC encapsulation
and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
Encapsulates one channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/
OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
Encapsulates one channel of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/
OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the 10GE
LAN performance monitoring function.
FC encapsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates one channel of FC signals and maps the signals into the OTU2/OTU2e
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the FC performance
monitoring function.

Power supply module

8.18.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the LSX front panel.

Figure 8-95 shows the LSX front panel.
8-378

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-95 Front panel of the LSX board
LSX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX
RX
OUT
IN
LSX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the LSX front panel. Table 8-192 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-379
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-192 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSX board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX
LC
RX
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.18.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LSX board.
Valid Slots
Table 8-193 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSX board.
Table 8-193 Valid slots for the TN11LSX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8-380
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8.18.7 Characteristic Code for the LSX

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-196 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSX board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX/RX
NOTE
8.18.9 LSX Parameters

For parameters of LSX, refer to Table 8-197.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-381
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-197 LSX parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, 10GE LAN,

10GE WAN,FC-1200,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2v, STM-64
Default: 10GE LAN

board.
more information.
NOTE
Only TN12LSX and TN13LSX support the
FC-1200 service.
Only TN 13LSX support the OTU-2v service.
Port Mapping
l TN11LSX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G),
Bit Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)

queries the mapping mode of a port service.
l TN12LSX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
Bit Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
l TN13LSX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
8-382

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On

Default:
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC

(LPT).
forward error correction (FEC) function of
the current optical interface.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

NOTE


8-383
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

resides.
GCC1, and GCC2 in OTN overheads. If the
NOTE
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

NOTE
Only TN13LSX supports this parameter.
8.18.10 Specifications of the LSX

NOTE
8-384

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Optical Modules on the Client Side of the TN11LSX, TN13LSX

and TN12LSX
NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km
module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2 signals. The
specifications listed following completely apply to OTU2 signals. The actual values may be slightly
different from these specifications when the accessed signals are OC-192, STM-64, FC1200, or 10GE
WAN signals.
The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals. The
specifications listed below apply to 10GE LAN signal. The actual values may be slightly different from
these specifications when the accessed FC1200 signal.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single Rate
-0.3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA

8-385
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80
km
10 Gbit/s
Single Rate
-0.3 km
30
30
30
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate )
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1 (Multirate) /
0.5(10GE
LAN)
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Specifications of DWDM Optical Modules on the Client Side of the TN12LSX and
TN13LSX
Table 8-199 Specifications of optical modules on the Client side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm (XFP)
NRZ - 40 channels fixed

power
8-386
dBm

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
800 ps/nm (XFP)

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN11LSX and

TN12LSX
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm
800 ps/nm

(odd & even
wavelengths)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3

8-387
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
800 ps/nm
800 ps/nm
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
1200 ps/nm
- TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm TunableAPD
4800 ps/nm
-ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable
8-388
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
1200 ps/nm
- TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm TunableAPD
4800 ps/nm
-ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
1200
1200
4800
800
APD
APD
PIN

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN13LSX

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
NRZ- 80 channels
tunable

power
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
dBm

8-389
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
range
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value

& even wavelengths)
8-390

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11LSX: 2.9 lb (1.3 kg)
TN12LSX: 3.1 lb (1.4 kg)
TN13LSX: 2.4 lb (1.1 kg)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LSX
NRZ-fixed (10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
47.7
50.1

8-391
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
TN12LSX
TN13LSX
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
NRZ-tunable (10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
47.9
50.9
DRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
49.7
52.7
ODB-tunable (10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
52.7
55.7
NRZ-fixed (10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
30.5
36.6
NRZ-tunable (10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
30.7
36.8
DRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
32.5
39
ODB-tunable (10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
35.5
42.6
800 ps/nm -NRZtunable
29.4
32.8
800ps/nm- DRZtunable
29.5
33.9
800 ps/nm (XFP)
27
30.4
8.19 LSXL
LSXL: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion board
The available functional versions of the LSXL board are TN11, TN12.
8.19.2 Application
8-392

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXL board converts between one channel of
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1
Recommendations.
The LSXL board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.19.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board.
8.19.6 Valid Slots
Four slots house one TN11LSXL board. Three slots house one TN12LSXL board.
8.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL
8.19.9 LSXL Parameters
8.19.10 Specifications of the LSXL

The available functional versions of the LSXL board are TN11, TN12.
Table 8-204 lists the version description of the LSXL board.
Table 8-204 Version description of the LSXL board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the LSXL board are TN11 and TN12.
Difference
l Appearance:
The LSXL boards of TN11 and TN12 versions use different front
panels. For details, see 8.19.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
the LSXL.
Replacement
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
The LSXL boards of different versions cannot replace each other.

8-393
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.19.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXL board converts between one channel of
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals and OTU3 signals that comply with ITU-T G.694.1
Recommendations.
For the position of the LSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-96.
Figure 8-96 Position of the LSXL board in the WDM system
MUX
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
LSXL
G.694.1
G.694.1 LSXL
DMUX
Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
STM-256/
OC-768/
OTU3
Client side
WDM side
NOTE
l Client-side service types of the TN11LSXL board are STM-256 and OC-768.
l Client-side service types of the TN12LSXL board are STM-256, OC-768, and OTU3.

The LSXL board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
Table 8-205 Functions and features of the LSXL board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Maps one STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signal into one OTU3 optical signal

and converts the signal into ITU-T G.694.1-compliant standard DWDM
wavelength. It also performs the reverse process and compensates for the
dispersion in the signals accessed on the WDM side.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only TN12LSXL supports OTU3 services.
8-394

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
OTN function

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Maps a maximum of one channel of client-side service signals into
OTU3 signals.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function

ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
TN11LSXL: not supported

TN12LSXL: supports the PRBS function on the client side.
NOTE
The PRBS function of TN12LSXL on the client side is supported only when the
client-side service type is STM-256/OC-768.
LPT function
Not supported
FEC encoding
TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL:
975.
with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
shutdown (ALS) function. If the ALS is enabled, the corresponding optical
optical signal is received on the WDM side.
Test frame
Not supported

8-395
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LSXL
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme

NOTE
Only the TN12LSXL supports intra-board 1+1 protection.
TN11LSXL:
Loopback
Client side
Inloop
Not supported
Outloop
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
TN12LSXL:
Loopback
Client side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Protocol or
standard
compliance
8-396
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The LSXL board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-97 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL.
Figure 8-98 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-397
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-97 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11LSXL board
WDM side
Client side
RX
TX
O/E
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OTN
processing
module
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
8-398

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-98 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12LSXL board
Client side
RX
TX
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
E/O
WDM side
E/O
OTN
processing
module
O/E
Client-side OTN
processing module
Client-side
optical
module
OUT
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the LSXL board can access the following optical signals:
TN11LSXL:
l
TN12LSXL:
l
In the signal flow of the LSXL board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LSXL to the WDM side
of the LSXL, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for performance monitoring.
Other types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-399
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing and FEC/
AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU3
electrical signals.
l
Receive direction
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs one channel of STM-256/OC-768/
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the one channel of electrical
signals, and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical
interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical
signals.
STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical signals.


The module consists of a SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, a client-side
OTN processing module, and an OTN processing module.
payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/SONET
8-400

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l

Power supply module

8.19.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board.

Figure 8-99 and Figure 8-100 show the front panel of the LSXL board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-401
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-99 Front panel of the TN11LSXL board
LSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX
RX
OUT
IN
LSXL
8-402

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-100 Front panel of the TN12LSXL board
LSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
TX
IN
RX
LSXL
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXL board. Table 8-206 lists the type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-403
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-206 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXL board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX
LC
RX
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.19.6 Valid Slots

Four slots house one TN11LSXL board. Three slots house one TN12LSXL board.
Table 8-207 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXL board.
Table 8-207 Valid slots for the TN11LSXL board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU14
The rear connector of the TN11LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left one of the four slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXL board, the slot number of
the TN11LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Table 8-208 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXL board.
Table 8-208 Valid slots for the TN12LSXL board
8-404
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU63-IU68

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU3-IU17
The rear connector of the TN12LSXL is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXL board displayed on the NM is the number
of the right one of the three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the TN12LSXL board, the slot number of the
TN12LSXL board displayed on the NM is IU3.
8.19.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXL

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-209 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXL board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX/RX
NOTE
8.19.9 LSXL Parameters

For parameters of LSXL, refer to Table 8-210.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-405
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-210 LSXL parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, OC-768, OTU-3,

STM-256
Default: STM-256

NOTE
Only the TN12LSXL supports the OTU-3
services.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC
8-406


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Receive Wavelength
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

follows:
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /

automatically.
affected.
NOTE
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
NOTE


8-407
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

Disabled.
NOTE
Only TN12LSXL supports this parameter.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

resides.
NOTE
Only TN12LSXL supports this parameter.

NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
PMD Threshold(ps)
Default: Disabled

Queries the PMD threshold of the board.
8.19.10 Specifications of the LSXL

NOTE
8-408

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Optical Modules on the Client Side of the TN11LSXL/TN12LSXL

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
Transponder
Line code format
NRZ
nm
1530 to 1565
dBm
dBm
dB
8.2
dB
35
ps/nm
40
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1290 to 1570
dBm
-6
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN11LSXL

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
Transponder
ODB Tunable
DRZ Tunable
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.00

power
dBm

power
dBm
-5
-5
dB
8.2
8.2

8-409
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Transponder
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5

width
nm
0.6
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
500
400

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12LSXL

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
Transponder
ODB Tunable
DQPSK Tunable
8-410
Operating frequency
range
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
NA

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
Transponder
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5
2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.6
NA
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
-500 to 500
-500 to 500

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
TN11LSXL
l
Dimensions of front panel: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN12LSXL
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-411
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LSXL
DRZ-tunable (40G)
(Transponder)
103.0
110.0
ODB-tunable (40G)
(Transponder)
98.0
101.0
ODB-tunable (40G)
(Transponder)
74
81
DQPSK-tunable
(40G)(Transponder)
84
94
TN12LSXL
8.20 LSXLR
LSXLR: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
The available functional version of the LSXLR board is TN11 and TN12.
8.20.2 Application
The LSXLR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical
regeneration of optical signals.
The LSXLR board is used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and
ESC.
The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
8.20.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board.
8.20.6 Valid Slots
Four slots house one TN11LSXLR board. Two slots house one TN12LSXLR board.
8.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR
8.20.9 LSXLR Parameters
8.20.10 Specifications of the LSXLR
8-412

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The available functional version of the LSXLR board is TN11 and TN12.
Table 8-214 lists the version description of the LSXLR board.
Table 8-214 Version description of the LSXLR board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the LSXLR board are TN11 and TN12.
Difference
l Function:
The TN12LSXLR board supports access OTU3e services, whereas
the TN11LSXLR board does not support. For details, see 8.20.3
l Appearance:
The TN11LSXLR and TN12LSXLR versions use different front
panels. For details, see 8.20.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
the LSXLR.
Replacement
The TN11LSXLR and TN12LSXLR boards are not interchangeable.
8.20.2 Application
The LSXLR board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement electrical
regeneration of optical signals.
For the position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-101.
Figure 8-101 Position of the LSXLR board in the WDM system
WDM side
WDM side
LSXLR
DMUX
G.694.1
MUX
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
MUX
G.694.1
LSXLR
DMUX

8-413
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The LSXLR board is used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and
ESC.
Table 8-215 Functions and features of the LSXLR board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Implements the electrical regeneration of corresponding optical signals and

compensates for the dispersion in the service signals. This board is used at an
electrical REG station in a system.
Regenerati
ng rate

NOTE
Only TN12LSXLR supports OTU3e service.
OTN
function

l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by complying with
the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specificati
on
Tunable
wavelengt
h function
of:
8-414
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
FEC
encoding
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITUT G.975.1.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Alarms
and
performan
ce events
monitorin
g
ALS
function
Not supported
Opticallayer
ASON
Supported by the TN12LSXLR
Electricallayer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Loopback
Not supported
Protocol or
standard
complianc
e
Protocols or standards (nonperformance monitoring) with which

transparently transmitted services
comply

8-415
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or standards (performance

monitoring) for processing services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LSXLR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
Figure 8-102 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board.
8-416

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-102 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXLR board
WDM side
IN
Decoding
module
O/E
Optical
receiving
module
Overhead
module
WDM side
Encoding
module
E/O
OUT
Optical
transmitting
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The LSXLR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals.
The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU3/OTU3e optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN
interface, and performs O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing and encoding of signals.
During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming based on electrical signals are
performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames.
After encoding, the signals are sent to an optical transmitting module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module transmits OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l
Optical receiving module

Performs O/E conversion of OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-417
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Optical transmitting module

Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU3/OTU3e optical
signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The signal processing module

The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module.
Decoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the
performance of WDM-side services.
Encoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU3/OTU3e signals.
Overhead module
Performs overhead processing of OTU3/OTU3e signals, and monitors the performance
of WDM-side services.

Power supply module

8.20.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board.

Figure 8-103 and Figure 8-104 show the front panel of the LSXLR board.
8-418

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-103 Front panel of the TN11LSXLR board
LSXLR
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
LSXLR
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-419
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-104 Front panel of the TN12LSXLR board
LSXLR
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
LSXLR
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXLR board. Table 8-216 lists the
8-420

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-216 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXLR board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

8.20.6 Valid Slots

Four slots house one TN11LSXLR board. Two slots house one TN12LSXLR board.
Table 8-217 shows the valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board.
Table 8-217 Valid slots for the TN11LSXLR board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU14
The rear connector of the TN11LSXLR is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is the
number of the left one of the four slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, IU3, and IU4 house the TN11LSXLR board, the slot number of
the TN11LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU1.
Table 8-218 shows the valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board.
Table 8-218 Valid slots for the TN12LSXLR board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17

8-421
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The rear connector of the TN12LSXLR board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot
in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is
the number of the right one of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12LSXLR board, the slot number of the
TN12LSXLR board displayed on the NM is IU2.
8.20.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXLR

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-219 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXLR board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
8.20.9 LSXLR Parameters

For parameters of the LSXLR, refer to Table 8-220.
Table 8-220 LSXLR parameters
8-422
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Enable AutoSensing
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of

the board to Enabled or Disabled.
l When it is set to Enabled, the board
supports FEC Type and Line Rate of
the received signals in auto-sensing
mode, and thus no manual setting is
required.
l When it is set to Disabled, FEC
Type and Line Rate of the board must
be set manually and the values of the
previous two parameters must be the
same as that of the received signals.
Otherwise, the services are
unavailable.
NOTE
must be set to Enabled.
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: Enabled
Default: FEC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


8-423
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Receive
Wavelength
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

follows:
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780

automatically.
Default: /

affected.
NOTE
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
NOTE

8-424

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

PMD Threshold
(ps)
Board Mode
Electrical Relay Mode,

Optical Relay Mode

the work mode of a board depending on
the application scenario.
See D.2 Board Mode (WDM
Default: Electrical Relay

Mode
8.20.10 Specifications of the LSXLR

NOTE
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side on the TN11LSXLR

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
Transponder
ODB Tunable
DRZ Tunable
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.00

power
dBm

power
dBm
-5
-5
dB
8.2
8.2
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5

8-425
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Transponder

width
nm
0.6
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
500
400

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12LSXLR

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
Transponder
ODB Tunable
DQPSK Tunable
8-426
Operating frequency
range
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
NA
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5
2.5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
Transponder
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.6
NA
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
-500 to 500
-500 to 500

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
TN11LSXLR
l
Dimensions of front panel: 101.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (4.0 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN12LSXLR
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 5.5 lb.(2.5 kg)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LSXLR
DRZ-tunable (40G)
(Transponder)
87.0
90.0

8-427
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
TN12LSXLR
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
ODB-tunable (40G)
(Transponder)
82.0
85.0
DQPSK-tunable
(40G)(Transponder)
62
68.2
ODB-tunable (40G)
(Transponder)
67.0
70.0
8.21 LSXR
LSXR: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion relay board
The available functional version of the LSXR board is TN11.
8.21.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXR board is used in an electrical REG station in the
system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals.
The LSXR is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and
ESC.
The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
8.21.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR.
8.21.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LSXR board.
8.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR
8.21.9 LSXR Parameters
8.21.10 Specifications of the LSXR

The available functional version of the LSXR board is TN11.
8-428

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.21.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LSXR board is used in an electrical REG station in the
system to implement electrical regeneration of optical signals.
For the position of the LSXR board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-105.
Figure 8-105 Position of the LSXR board in the WDM system
WDM side
DMUX
WDM side
LSXR
G.694.1
MUX
MUX
G.694.1
LSXR
DMUX

The LSXR is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable, and to provide OTN interfaces and
ESC.
Table 8-223 Functions and features of the LSXR board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The board is used in an electrical REG station in the system to implement

electrical regeneration of optical signals.
Regenerati
ng rate
OTN
function
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the
ITU-T G.709.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-429
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
WDM
specificati
on
Tunable
wavelengt
h function
of:
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
FEC
encoding
l Supports advanced forward error correction (AFEC) that complies with ITUT G.975.1.
NOTE
8-430
Alarms
and
performan
ce events
monitorin
g
ALS
function
Not supported
Opticallayer
ASON
Supported
Electricallayer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Loopback
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
complianc
e

comply

ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LSXR board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, signal
Figure 8-106 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-431
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-106 Functional modules and signal flow of the LSXR board
WDM side
IN
Decoding
module
O/E
Optical
receiving
module
Overhead
module
WDM side
Encoding
module
E/O
OUT
Optical
transmitting
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The LSXR board implements the regeneration of one channel of unidirectional optical signals.
The signals at the receive and transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at
DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN
After being encoded, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing
E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM wavelengths that
The optical signals are output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l

Performs O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM wavelengths that
8-432

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The signal processing module

The module consists of the decoding module, overhead module, and encoding module.
Decoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC decoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the
performance of WDM-side services.
Encoding module
Performs the FEC/AFEC encoding of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
Overhead module
Performs overhead processing of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and monitors the performance
of WDM-side services.

Power supply module

8.21.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR.

Figure 8-107 shows the front panel of the LSXR.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-433
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-107 Front panel of the LSXR
LSXR
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
LSXR
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the LSXR board. Table 8-224 lists the type
8-434

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-224 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LSXR board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

8.21.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LSXR board.
Table 8-225 shows the valid slots for the LSXR board.
Table 8-225 Valid slots for LSXR board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8.21.7 Characteristic Code for the LSXR

Code for OTUs.


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-435
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-226 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LSXR board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
8.21.9 LSXR Parameters

For parameters of the LSXR, refer to Table 8-227.
Table 8-227 LSXR parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off
8-436

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Enable AutoSensing
Disabled, Enabled
Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function of

the board to Enabled or Disabled.
Default: Enabled

supports FEC Type and Line Rate of
the received signals in auto-sensing
mode, and thus no manual setting is
required.
Type and Line Rate of the board must
be set manually and the values of the
previous two parameters must be the
same as that of the received signals.
Otherwise, the services are
unavailable.
NOTE
FEC Working
State
Disabled, Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: Enabled
Default: FEC

NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Enable
Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.

8-437
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
NOTE

Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C

wavelength.
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

Disabled.
NOTE
Line Rate
Standard Mode, Speedup

Mode
The Line Rate parameter provides an

option to set the OTN line rate.
Default: Standard Mode
NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Enable
Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled
See D.24 Line Rate for more information.

Board Mode
Electrical Relay Mode,

Optical Relay Mode
Default: Electrical Relay
Mode

the work mode of a board depending on
the application scenario.
8.21.10 Specifications of the LSXR

NOTE
8-438

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm
800 ps/nm

(odd & even
wavelengths)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

PIN
8-439
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
1200 ps/nm
- TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm TunableAPD
4800 ps/nm
-ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
1200
1200
4800
800
APD
APD
PIN

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
8-440

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11LSXR
NRZ-fixed (10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
34.8
37.8
NRZ-tunable (10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
35.0
38.0
DRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
36.8
39.8
ODB-tunable (10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
39.8
42.8
8.22 LWX2
LWX2: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) dual-wavelength conversion board
Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is, TN11.
8.22.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWX2 board implements the conversion between two
channels of optical signals at the rate in the range of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals
that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
The LWX2 is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and provide ESC.
The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
8.22.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-441
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.22.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LWX2 board.
8.22.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2
The characteristic code for the LWX2 board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
8.22.9 LWX2 Parameters
8.22.10 Specifications of the LWX2

Only one functional version of the LWX2 board is available, that is, TN11.
8.22.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWX2 board implements the conversion between two
channels of optical signals at the rate in the range of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals
that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-108.
Figure 8-108 Position of the LWX2 board in the WDM system
G.694.1/
G.694.2
M
U
X
1
16Mbit/s2.7Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2
LWX2
D
M
U
X
2
Client side
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
WDM side
16Mbit/s2.7Gbit/s
LWX2
2
WDM side
Client side

The LWX2 is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and provide ESC.
8-442

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-230 Functions and features of the LWX2 board

Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Receives two channels of optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/
s and converts them into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with
the ITU-T G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelengths compliant with the
ITU-T G.694.2. The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. In the case of configuring

four-wavelength tunable optical module, configure every four continuous
wavelengths (first group started with the 1st wavelength) in the C band with
100 GHz channel spacing as one group. In this way, the optical signal output
on the WDM side are tunable within the four wavelengths of every group.
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Not supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring

8-443
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
ALS
function
The optical modules on the WDM side have the automatic laser shutdown
(ALS) function. If the ALS function is enabled, the corresponding optical
transmitter module on the WDM side is automatically shut down if no optical
signal is received on the client side.
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
8-444
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-445
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services

The LWX2 board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
Figure 8-109 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board.
Figure 8-109 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWX2 board
Client side
RX1
WDM side
O/E
OUT1
E/O
RX2
OUT2
TX1
E/O
TX2
Client-side
optical
module
Service processing module
IN1
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
IN2
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWX2 board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
8-446

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In the signal flow of the LWX2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWX2 to the WDM side
of the LWX2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client
After the O/E conversion, the two channels of electrical signals are sent to the service
processing module. The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any
signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends
the signals to the WDM-side optical module.
After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two channels
of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2compliant at CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals through the OUT1-OTU2
optical interfaces.
Receive direction
wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
After O/E conversion, the Any electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the
performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs two channels
of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
Module Function
l


WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals.
Any optical signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-447
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Regenerates Any signals in two directions.
Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.

Power supply module

8.22.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board.

Figure 8-110 shows the front panel of the LWX2 board.
8-448

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-110 Front panel of the LWX2 board
LWX2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LWX2
NOTE
The WDM-side optical modules must be inserted in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in an
ascending order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-449
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX2 board. Table 8-231 lists the type
Table 8-231 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWX2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.22.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LWX2 board.
Table 8-232 shows the valid slots for the LWX2 board.
Table 8-232 Valid slots for the LWX2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8.22.7 Characteristic Code for the LWX2

The characteristic code for the LWX2 board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
8-450

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-233 Characteristic code for the LWX2 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

optical signal

WDM side.
Last four digits

optical signal

the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWX2 board is 92109220.
l
"9210" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side is
192.10 THz.
"9220" indicates the frequency of the second channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 192.20 THz.


Table 8-234 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWX2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
8.22.9 LWX2 Parameters

For parameters of LWX2, refer to Table 8-235
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-451
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-235 LWX2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, HD-SDI,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16

Default: Any
Client Side Service
Bearer Rate (M)
16 - 2500
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 2500
Default:
l WDM side: On

information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default:
l WDM side: Disabled
l Client side: Enabled
8-452


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Current Bearer
Ratio (M)
parameter provides an option to query the

rate of services accessed at the optical
interface on the client side for the OTUs
at any rate.
See D.6 Current Bearer Ratio (M)
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

wavelength.
resides.
8.22.10 Specifications of the LWX2

NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-453
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16
signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals. The specifications listed
below completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
MLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
0.5
15
80
8-454
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
30
30
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
NA
Eye pattern
mask
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-18
-18
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27

NOTE
FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may
be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals.
The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200,
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-455
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
8-456
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP

DWDM)-120 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

THz
192.1 to 196.0
dBm
dBm
dB
8.5
GHz
12.5
nm

ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant (5% margin are

required for the eye pattern of
STM-16 services and equivalent
OTU1 services.)

Receiver type
APD
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code format
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value
12800 ps/
nm-PINa
12800 ps/
nm-APDa
6500 ps/nm PIN
3200 ps/nm
-2mW-APD
6400 ps/nm Four

ChannelsTunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

8-457
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
12800 ps/
nm-PINa
12800 ps/
nm-APDa
6500 ps/nm PIN
3200 ps/nm
-2mW-APD
6400 ps/nm Four

ChannelsTunable

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
-2
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
8.2
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant
PIN
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
APD
Operating
nm
wavelength range
1200 to 1650
1300 to 1575
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-28
-18
-26
-28
Minimum
receiver overload
dBm
-9
-10
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
8-458

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
1600 ps/nm-4mW
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
2.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-459
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
Consumption at 25C (77F)
(W)
Maximum Power
F) (W)
LWX2
38.5
42.4
8.23 LWXD
LWXD: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (double transmit)
Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is, TN11.
8.23.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXD board implements the conversion between the
optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with
ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
The LWXD board is used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC.
The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
8.23.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board.
8.23.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LWXD board.
8.23.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD
The characteristic code for the LWXD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
8.23.9 LWXD Parameters
8.23.10 Specifications of the LWXD

Only one functional version of the LWXD board is available, that is, TN11.
8-460

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.23.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXD board implements the conversion between the
optical signal at the rate between 16 Mbit/s and 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with
ITU-T Recommendations, and dually feeds and selectively receives signals on the WDM side.
For the position of the LWXD board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-111.
Figure 8-111 Position of the LWXD board in the WDM system
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
G.694.1/
LWXD G.694.2
Client side
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
G.694.1/
LWXD
G.694.2
WDM side
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
Client side

The LWXD board is used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC.
Table 8-241 Functions and features of the LWXD board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
l Receives a signal at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and converts the
signals into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T
G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.
side.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-461
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Not supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Test frame
8-462
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme

eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

8-463
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
8-464

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services

The LWXD board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
Figure 8-112 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board.
Figure 8-112 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXD board
WDM side
Client side
RX
O/E
TX
E/O
Splitter
E/O
IN1
IN2
O/E
Client-side
optical
module
OUT1
OUT2
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXD board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-465
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
In the signal flow of the LWXD board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXD to the WDM side
of the LWXD, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The
module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance
monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the WDM-side
optical module.
After performing the E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out the ITU-T
G.694.1-compliant at DWDM standard wavelengths or the ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at
CWDM standard wavelengths Any optical signals. An optical splitter converts the OTU1
optical signals into two channels of identical optical signals, and then the two channels
signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
Receive direction
wavelengths Any optical signals from the WDM side through the IN1-IN2 optical
The module performs operations such as received signal selection, the regeneration of Any
signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and GE signals. Then, the module outputs
one channel of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then
outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals.

8-466

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Monitors the performance of SDH and GE signals in two directions.

Power supply module

8.23.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board.

Figure 8-113 shows the front panel of the LWXD board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-467
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-113 Front panel of the LWXD board
LWXD
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
LWXD
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWXD board. Table 8-242 lists the
8-468

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-242 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXD board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX
LC
RX
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.23.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LWXD board.
Table 8-243 shows the valid slots for the LWXD board.
Table 8-243 Valid slots for the LWXD board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8.23.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXD

The characteristic code for the LWXD board contains eight digits, respectively indicating the
Table 8-244 Characteristic code for the LWXD board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

optical signal

WDM side.

8-469
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
Last four digits

optical signal

the WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11LWXD is 92109210.

l


Table 8-245 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXD board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
TX/RX
NOTE
8.23.9 LWXD Parameters

For parameters of LWXD, refer to Table 8-246
Table 8-246 LWXD parameters
8-470
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON Express,
GE, HD-SDI, OC-3,
OC-12, OC-48, STM-1,
STM-4, STM-16

type of the service accessed at the
optical interface on the client side.
Default: Any
Client Side Service
Bearer Rate (M)
16 - 2500
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 2500
Default:
l WDM side: On

information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default:
l WDM side: Disabled
Current Bearer
Ratio (M)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

information.
parameter provides an option to query
the rate of services accessed at the
optical interface on the client side for the
OTUs at any rate.
information.

8-471
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

wavelength.
board resides.
information.
8.23.10 Specifications of the LWXD

NOTE
8-472

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The I-16 module, S-16.1 module, and L-16.2 module can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, and FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
below completely apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications
when the accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
MLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
0.5
15
80
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA

8-473
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
30
30
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
NA
Eye pattern
mask
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-18
-18
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27

NOTE
FE, DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to GE signals. The actual values may
be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1,
FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.5 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The specifications listed below completely apply to STM-16 signals.
The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC200,
8-474

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

8-475
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

DWDM)-120 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

THz
192.1 to 196.0
dBm
dBm
dB
8.5
GHz
12.5
nm

ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask

OTU1 services.)

Receiver type
APD
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
8-476
Value
12800ps/
nm-PINa
12800ps/
nm-APDa
6500 ps/
nm -PIN
3200 ps/
nm
-2mWAPD
12800 ps/
nmTunable
6400 ps/
nm-Four
Channels
-Tunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
12800ps/
nm-PINa
12800ps/
nm-APDa
6500 ps/
nm -PIN
3200 ps/
nm
-2mWAPD
12800 ps/
nmTunable
6400 ps/
nm-Four
Channels
-Tunable

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-4
-4
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-8
-8
-5
-5
-5
-5
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-28
-18
-26
-28
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-10
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
1300 to
1575
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-477
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
1600 ps/nm-4mW
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
-0.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
8-478
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
(W)
Maximum Power
F) (W)
LWXD
35.8
39.4
8.24 LWXS
LWXS: arbitrary rate (16Mbit/s-2.7Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)
The available functional versions of the LWXS board are TN11 and TN12.
8.24.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXS board implements the conversion between the
optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations.
The LWXS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC.
The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
8.24.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board.
8.24.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one LWXS board.
8.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS
8.24.9 LWXS Parameters
8.24.10 Specifications of the LWXS

Table 8-252 lists the version description of the LWXS board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-479
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-252 Version description of the LWXS board

Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Functions:
The TN11LWXS board does not support access ETR/CLO services,
whereas the TN12LWXS board supports, see 8.24.10
Specifications of the LWXS.
Replacement
The TN11LWXS and TN12LWXS boards are not interchangeable.
8.24.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the LWXS board implements the conversion between the
optical signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T
Recommendations.
For the position of the LWXS board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-114.
Figure 8-114 Position of the LWXS board rate in the WDM system
MUX
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
DMUX
LWXS G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
LWXS
G.694.2
DMUX
Client side
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
16Mbit/s
-2.7Gbit/s
Client side

The LWXS board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide ESC.
Table 8-253 Functions and features of the LWXS board
8-480
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Receives a channel of signals at the rate of 16 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s and converts
the signals into the standard DWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T
G.694.1 or the standard CWDM wavelength compliant with the ITU-T G.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

ETR: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s
CLO: SAN service at a rate of 16 Mbit/s
NOTE
Only TN12LWXS supports ETR and CLO services.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Note supported
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring

8-481
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
ALS
function
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
8-482
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
IBM GDPS( Geographically Dispersed Parallel Sysplex)
Protocol
NOTE
Only TN12LWXS supports IBM GDPS( Geographically
Dispersed Parallel Sysplex) Protocol.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-483
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services

The LWXS board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
Figure 8-115 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board.
Figure 8-115 Functional modules and signal flow of the LWXS board
Client side
WDM side
RX
O/E
TX
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the LWXS board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
8-484

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In the signal flow of the LWXS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LWXS to the WDM side
of the LWXS, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module. The
module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the performance
monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module sends the signals to the
WDM-side optical module.
After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out Any optical
signals at DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one channel of Any optical signals at DWDM
conversion.
The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals and the
performance monitoring of SDH/SONET and GE signals. Then, the module outputs one
channel of Any electrical signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the electrical signals, and then
outputs one channel of client-side optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of Any optical signals.


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-485
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Monitors the performance of SDH/SONET and GE signals in two directions.

l

Power supply module

8.24.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board.

Figure 8-116 shows the front panel of the LWXS board.
8-486

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-116 Front panel of the LWXS board
LWXS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
OUT
IN
LWXS
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWXS board. Table 8-254 lists the
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-487
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-254 Types and functions of the interfaces on the LWXS board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX
LC
RX
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.24.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one LWXS board.
Table 8-255 shows the valid slots for the TN11LWXS board.
Table 8-255 Valid slots for theTN11LWXS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 8-256 shows the valid slots for the TN12LWXS board.
Table 8-256 Valid slots for theTN12LWXS board
8-488
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.24.7 Characteristic Code for the LWXS

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-257 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the LWXS board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX/RX
NOTE
8.24.9 LWXS Parameters

For parameters of the LWXS, refer to Table 8-258
Table 8-258 LWXS parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

a board.
Default: Used
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-489
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Loopback
Outloop

board.
more information.
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, HD-SDI,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, ETR, CLO

NOTE
Only TN12LWXS supports ETR, and CLO
services.
Default: Any
Client Side Service
Bearer Rate (M)
16 - 2500
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: 2500
Default:
l WDM side: On

service at the optical interface on the client
side of a board.
See D.5 Client Side Service Bearer Rate
(M) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Default:
l WDM side:
Disabled
Current Bearer
Ratio (M)
8-490

rate of services accessed at the optical
interface on the client side for the OTUs at
any rate.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OFC Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
The open fiber control (OFC) function

controls the transmit power of the laser
when the fiber is disconnected. When the
OFC function is enabled, the laser sends
short pulse, rather than remains in the
enabled state, to check whether the fiber is
connected. In this way, the output optical
power of the laser is cut, which prevents eye
injury.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
l Set the LPT and ALS functions to Disabled
after the OFC function is enabled.
l The OFC function cannot coexist with
protection.
l Only the TN12LWXS supports this
parameter.
l This parameter is valid only when the
Service Type parameter is set to ISC 1G or
ISC 2G.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable
Wavelength Range

Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band
Type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
C, CWDM
Default: C

band type of the current working
wavelength.

8-491
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG

resides.
Default: None
8.24.10 Specifications of the LWXS

NOTE

NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 can be used to access ETR,
CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
The specifications listed below apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different
from these specifications when the accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
NOTE
below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are GE, FC100, or FE signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
MLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
0.5
15
80
8-492

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-10
-5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
NA
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
IEEE802.3zcompliant
G.957-compliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-18
-18
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
NA
-27
-27
-27

8-493
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The 1.25Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The
actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are ETR, CLO,
FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI.
NOTE
The 2.5Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals. The specifications listed below
apply to STM-16 and OC-48 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are ETR, CLO, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI,
or FE signals.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
8-494
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
DWDM)-120 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

THz
192.1 to 196.0
dBm
dBm
dB
8.5
GHz
12.5
nm

ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask

OTU1 services.)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
APD
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

8-495
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Line code
format
Value
12800 ps/
nm-PINa
12800 ps/
nm-APDa
6500 ps/
nm -PIN
3200 ps/
nm
-2mWAPD
12800 ps/
nmTunable
6400 ps/
nm- Four
ChannelsTunable
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
-1
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
-2
-2
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
8.2
8.2
10
8.2
Central
frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
Central
frequency
deviation
GHz
10
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
0.2
0.2
0.5
0.5
0.2
0.5
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
30
30
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
12800
12800
6500
3200
12800
6400
Eye pattern
mask
G.959.1-compliant
PIN
APD
APD
APD

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1200 to 1650
8-496
APD

1300 to
1575
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
12800 ps/
nm-PINa
12800 ps/
nm-APDa
6500 ps/
nm -PIN
3200 ps/
nm
-2mWAPD
12800 ps/
nmTunable
6400 ps/
nm- Four
ChannelsTunable
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-28
-18
-26
-28
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-10
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
1600 ps/nm-4mW
NRZ

power
dBm

power
dBm
2.5
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
nm
1271 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
1600
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1-compliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-497
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1600 ps/nm-4mW
Receiver type
APD
nm
1200 to 1650
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
(W)
Maximum Power
F) (W)
LWXS
33.9
37.3
8.25 TMX
TMX: 4-channel STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 asynchronism mux OTU2 wavelength conversion
board
The available functional versions of the TMX board are TN11 and TN12.
8.25.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the TMX board multiplexes four channels of STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 service signals into one channel of OTU2 signals, and implements conversion
between these service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
The TMX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
8.25.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board.
8-498

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.25.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TMX board.
8.25.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX
8.25.9 TMX Parameters
8.25.10 Specifications of the TMX

The available functional versions of the TMX board are TN11 and TN12.
Table 8-264 lists the version description of the TMX board.
Table 8-264 Version description of the TMX board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the TMX board are available, that is, TN11 and
TN12.
Difference
l Function:
TN11TMX supports AFEC, and the TN12TMX supports AFEC-2.
Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each
other. For details, see 8.25.3 Functions and Features.
l Specification:
The TN11TMX board supports fixed optical module and tunable
optical module on the WDM side. The TN12TMX board supports
fixed optical module, tunable optical module, XFP module and gray
optical module on the WDM side. For specifications of each version,
see 8.25.10 Specifications of the TMX.
Replacement
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Table 8-265 lists the substitution rules for the TMX board.

8-499
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-265 Substitution rules of the TMX board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11TMX
TN12TMX
The TN12TMX can be created as TN11TMX on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TMX functions as the
TN11TMX.
NOTE
does not apply.
None
TN12TMX
8.25.2 Application
As a type of optical transponder unit, the TMX board multiplexes four channels of STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 service signals into one channel of OTU2 signals, and implements conversion
between these service signals and WDM signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the TMX board in the WDM system, see Figure 8-117.
Figure 8-117 Position of the TMX board in the WDM system
1
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
MUX
TMX
G.694.1
Client side
G.694.1
DMUX
DMUX
TMX
MUX
WDM side
4
WDM side
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
Client side

The TMX board is mainly used to achieve wavelength tunable and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
8-500

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-266 Functions and features of the TMX board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 service optical

signals into one channel of OTU2 optical signals and converts them to a
DWDM standard wavelength that complies with ITU-T
Recommendation G.694.1 or a standard CWDM wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.2. It can also perform the reverse process.
Client-side
service type
OTN function

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports 4ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2.
l Supports PM and TCM functions for ODU2.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function

ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
LPT function
Not supported
FEC encoding
TN11TMX:
G.975.
with ITU-T G.975.1.
TN12TMX:
G.975.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-501
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme

eSFP/XFP

client side.
TN12TMX:
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
8-502
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1

The TMX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
Figure 8-118 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-503
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 8-118 Functional modules and signal flow of the TMX board
Client side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
Client-side OTN
processing module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TMX board can access the following optical signals:
l
OTU1 (without FEC) optical signals
In the signal flow of the TMX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TMX to the WDM side
of the TMX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four channels of the optical signals from client
After the O/E conversion, the four channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. OTU1 signals are sent to the client-side OTN processing module for
performance monitoring. Other types of signals are sent to the SDH/SONET encapsulation
and mapping modules for encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the
OTN framing and FEC/AFEC encoding processing are performed. Then, the module
outputs one channel of OTU2 electrical signals.
8-504

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Receive direction
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
electrical signals, and then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals.


The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module, client-side
OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.
Encapsulates multiples channel of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

8-505
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

8.25.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board.

Figure 8-119 shows the front panel of the TMX board.
Figure 8-119 Front panel of the TMX board
TMX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
OUT
IN
TMX
8-506

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the TMX board. Table 8-267 lists the type
Table 8-267 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TMX board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

8.25.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TMX board.
Table 8-268 shows the valid slots for the TN11TMX board.
Table 8-268 Valid slots for TN11TMX board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

8-507
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 8-269 shows the valid slots for the TN12TMX board.
Table 8-269 Valid slots for TN12TMX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
8.25.7 Characteristic Code for the TMX

Code for OTUs.


Table 8-270 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TMX board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
8-508

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8.25.9 TMX Parameters

For parameters of the TMX, refer to Table 8-271.
Table 8-271 TMX parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, OTU-1, OC-48,

STM-16
Default: OTU-1
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


8-509
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC

Default: FEC
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Planned
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
NOTE

Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C

wavelength.
NOTE

SD Trigger
Condition
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

board resides.
NOTE
Only TN11TMX supports this parameter.

8-510

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

Disabled.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only TN12TMX supports this parameter.
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only TN12TMX supports the parameter.
8.25.10 Specifications of the TMX

NOTE
Specifications of Optical Modules on the Client Side of the TN11TMX/TN12TMX

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM

8-511
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Target
distance
km
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
8-512
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
-27
-27
-27
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
Remark
These modules access STM-16 and OTU1 services. The indexes

listed in the table above are applicable for the STM-16 services.
When the module accesses OTU1 services, the indexes are slightly
different.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value
CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
80
nm
1471 to 1611
dBm
dBm
dB
8.2
nm
6.5
nm

ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
Receiver type
APD
nm
1270 to 1620
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

8-513
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
DWDM)-120 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

THz
192.1 to 196.0
dBm
dBm
dB
8.5
GHz
12.5
nm

ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask

OTU1 services.)

Receiver type
APD
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Specifications of Fixed Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN11TMX

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm
800 ps/nm

(odd & even
wavelengths)
8-514

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
800 ps/nm
800 ps/nm

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Specifications of Tunable Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN11TMX

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
1200 ps/nm
- TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm TunableAPD
4800 ps/nm
-ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable

Maximum mean
launched power
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
dBm

8-515
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
1200 ps/nm
- TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm TunableAPD
4800 ps/nm
-ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
1200
1200
4800
800
APD
APD
PIN

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
8-516

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Fixed Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12TMX

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value

& even wavelengths)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

8-517
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Tunable Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12TMX

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
NRZ- 80 channels
tunable

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800
8-518
Receiver type
PIN
range
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

PIN
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of Gray Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12TMX

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24

8-519
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11TMX: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
TN12TMX: 2.6 lb. (1.2 kg)
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at 25
C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55
C (131F) (W)
TN11TMX
NRZ-fixed (10G)(800
ps/nm-40 channels
fixed
800 ps/nm-80 channels
fixed)
40.3
44.3
NRZ-tunable (10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
42.1
46.4
DRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
44.5
51.2
ODB-tunable (10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
48.4
55.7
800 ps/nm (XFP)
31.4
36.1
DRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
41
45.5
TN12TMX
8-520

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
WDM-Side Module
Typical Power
Consumption at 25
C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55
C (131F) (W)
NRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable)
39
43.7

8-521
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9 Tributary Unit and Line Unit
Tributary Unit and Line Unit
About This Chapter

9.1 ND2
ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board
9.2 NQ2
NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
9.3 NS2
NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board
9.4 NS3
NS3: 40G line service processing board
9.5 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board
9.6 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board
9.7 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
9.8 TOG
TOG: 8 x GE service processing board
9.9 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
9.10 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
9.11 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board
9.12 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
9.13 TSXL
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
9-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.1 ND2
ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board
The available functional versions of the ND2 board are TN11, TN12 and TN52.
9.1.2 Application
The ND2 is a type of line board.
The ND2 board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
OTN interfaces and ESC.
The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, 1588
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
9.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board.
9.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one ND2 board.
9.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2
This section describes serial numbers of interfaces on boards on the NM and service processing.
9.1.9 ND2 Parameters
9.1.10 Specifications of the ND2

The available functional versions of the ND2 board are TN11, TN12 and TN52.
Table 9-1 lists the version description of the ND2 board.
Table 9-1 Version description of the ND2 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the ND2 board are TN11, TN12 and
TN52.

9-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Description
Difference
Function:
l The TN11ND2 supports AFEC. The TN12ND2/TN52ND2 supports
AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with
each other.
l The TN12ND2 board supports pluggable optical modules on the WDM
side. The TN11ND2 or TN52ND2 board does not support that function.
l The TN12ND2 or TN52ND2 supports 1588V2 function. The
TN11ND2 board does not support that function.
l The TN12ND2 or TN52ND2 board regenerates OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals. The TN11ND2 board cannot regenerate OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals.
l The TN11ND2 and TN12ND2 support the cross-connections at the
ODU1 and ODU2 level. The TN52ND2 supports the cross-connections
at the ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2 level.
Specification:
l The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use.
For details, see 9.1.10 Specifications of the ND2.
Replacement
Table 9-2 lists the substitution rules for the ND2 board.
Table 9-2 Substitution rules of the ND2 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11ND2
TN12ND2
The TN12ND2 can be created as TN11ND2 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12ND2 functions as the
TN11ND2.
NOTE
When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code
pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and
transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not
apply.
TN12ND2
None
TN52ND2
None
9.1.2 Application
The ND2 is a type of line board.
The ND2 board implements conversion between 16 cross-connect ODU0 signals or eight crossconnect ODU1 signals or two cross-connect ODU2 signals and the ITU-T Recommendationcompliant WDM OTU2 signals. The ND2 board also converts between two cross-connect
9-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU2e signals and the ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM OTU2e signals. The board
supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 service, ODU1 service and the ODU2/ODU2e
service.
The TN12ND2 or TN52ND2 board implements the electrical regeneration of OTU2/OTU2e
optical signals.
Application scenario 1 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2: conversion between

eight channels of ODU1 signals and two channels of OTU2 signals
Figure 9-1 Position of the ND2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1
1
TOM
G.694.1
4
Client
MUX
DMUX
ND2
DMUX
1
TOM
G.694.1
ND2
side
Client side
MUX
1
WDM side
TOM
WDM side
TOM
4
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2 or TN52ND2 board must be set
to Line Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2: conversion between

two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
TDX
ND2
ND2
DMUX
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
DMUX
WDM side
TDX
MUX
WDM side

Client side
9-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
In the application scenario with the TN11TDX board, the ND2 board receives eight channels of ODU1 signals.
In the application scenario with the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board, the ND2 board receives two channels of ODU2
signals.
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2 or TN52ND2 board must be set to
Line Mode.
Application scenario 3 of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2: Implements the regeneration

of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
WDM side
IN1
DMUX
G.694.1
MUX
WDM side
OUT2
OUT1
MUX
ND2 G.694.1
IN2
DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN12ND2 or TN52ND2 board must be set
to Electrical Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.
The input and output wavelengths can be different.
Application scenario 4 of the TN52ND2: conversion between 16 channels of ODU0

signals and two channels of OTU2 signals
1
1
TOM
G.694.1
8
MUX
9-6
Client side
MUX
1
WDM side
TOM
DMUX
ND2
DMUX
1
TOM
G.694.1
ND2
Client side
WDM side
TOM
8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN52ND2 board must be set to Line
Mode.
The TN52ND2 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800.

The ND2 board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 9-3 and Table 9-4.
NOTE
ODU0 is only supported by the TN52ND2 in OptiX OSN 8800.

The relay mode is supported only by the TN12ND2 andTN52ND2. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical
Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the regeneration
mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Table 9-3 Functions and features of the ND2 board

Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps 16 channels of ODU0 signals or eight channels of ODU1 signals or

double channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals into two OTU2/OTU2e signals and
converts the signal into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.
Supports hybrid transmission of the ODU0 signal, ODU1 signal and the
ODU2 signal.
Crossconnect
capabilities
l TN11ND2/TN12ND2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of

ODU1 signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the
ND2 and the cross-connect board.
l TN52ND2: Supports the cross-connection of 16 channels of ODU0 signals
or eight channels of ODU1 signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e
signals between the ND2 and the cross-connect board.
OTN
function
l Supports 16 x ODU0 multiplexing into two ODU2.

l Supports 4 x ODU1 asynchronous multiplexing into ODU2.
l Supports ODU2 mapping into OTU2.
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1 and ODU2.
l TN52ND2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
WDM
specification
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
TN11ND2:
ITU-T G.975.1.
TN12ND2/TN52ND2:
NOTE
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
Physical
clock
Supported by the TN12ND2 and TN52ND2.
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Supported by the TN52ND2
XFP
TN12ND2:
9-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protection
scheme
l Supports ODUk SNCP.

l Supports ODUk SPRing protection.
l Supports tributary SNCP protection.
Loopback
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Not supported
Path Loopback
Supported

9-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FCPI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND
CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces:Guidelines for the
implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial
Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite
Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
ANSI X3.139 Information Systems - Fiber Distributed Data
Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Media Access Control(MAC)
Interface(FDDI) - Token Ring Physical Layer Protocol(PHY)
Interface(FDDI) Physical Layer Medium Dependent(PDM)
9-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1
Table 9-4 Functions and features of the ND2 board (Relay Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function

Regeneratin
g rate
OTN
function
OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3Gbit/s

the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
TN12ND2/TN52ND2:
NOTE
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
PTP clock
(1588 V2)
Not supported
Physical
clock
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
XFP
TN12ND2:
9-12
Loopback
Not supported
Protocol or
standard
compliance

services comply

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
processing services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The ND2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, 1588
Figure 9-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ND2.
Figure 9-6 and Figure 9-7 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2.
TN52ND2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ND2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e
WDM side
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OTN
processing
module
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
IN1
IN2
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
9-14
Required
voltage
SCC

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 (Line Mode)(OptiX
OSN 6800)
8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e

WDM side
E/O
OUT2
OTN
processing
module
1588
OUT1
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
IN1
IN2
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Required
voltage
SCC

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
9-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-7 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12ND2 (Relay Mode)(OptiX OSN
6800)
WDM
side
WDM
side
IN1
O/E
OUT2
E/O
OTN
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT1
O/E
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
9-16

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2 (Line Mode)(OptiX OSN 8800)
16 X ODU0/8 X ODU1/ 2 X ODU2/2 X ODU2e
Backplane ( service corss-connection)
WDM side
E/O
OUT2
OTN
processing
module
1588
OUT1
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
IN1
IN2
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

9-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52ND2 (Relay Mode)(OptiX OSN
8800/6800)
WDM
side
WDM
side
IN1
O/E
OUT2
E/O
OTN
processing
module
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT1
O/E
IN2
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow (Line Mode)

The signal processing module of the ND2 board can access the following optical signals:
l
ODU0 electrical signals
ODU2e electrical signals
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the ND2 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the ND2 to the WDM side
of the ND2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The OTN processing module receives 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals or eight
channels of ODU1 electrical signals or double channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals
from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations
such as OTN framing and encoding of FEC/AFEC. After processing, the module outputs
two channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
9-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN2 optical
interfaces. After receiving the signals, the module performs O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC/AFEC. In the
final step, the module sends out 16 channels of ODU0 electrical signals or eight channels
of ODU1 electrical signals or double channels of ODU2 electrical signals to the backplane
for service cross-connection.
The TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board processes clock signals in two directions.

l
Signal Flow (Relay Mode)

The ND2 board regenerates two channels of optical signals. The signals at the receive and
transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN2
optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs decoding, overhead processing, and signal encoding.
After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that
The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l


The OTN processing module frames OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2/
OTU2e signals, and performs the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
1588 module
9-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

When four channels of ODU1 are mapped to ODU2, the 1588 module can send the clock
signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the 1588 protocol, or extract the clock
signal from the service signals that come from a service board according to the 1588
protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.
NOTE
The 1588 feature is not supported if the working mode of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2 board is Optical
Relay Mode or Electrical Relay Mode.

Power supply module

9.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board.

Figure 9-10 shows the front panel of the ND2 board.
9-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-10 Front panel of the ND2 board
ND2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
ND2
NOTE
You must insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 interfaces in ascending
order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are 4 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ND2 board. Table 9-5 lists the type and
Table 9-5 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ND2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN2
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT2
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

9.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one ND2 board.
Table 9-6 shows the valid slots for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board.
Table 9-6 Valid slots for the TN11ND2/TN12ND2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 9-7 shows the valid slots for the TN52ND2 board.
Table 9-7 Valid slots for the TN52ND2 board
9-22
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.1.7 Characteristic Code for the ND2

Code of a Line Unit.

Background Information
Table 9-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ND2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 9-11 and Figure 9-12 show the application model on the ND2 board. Table 9-9 describes
the definition of each port.
NOTE
For the TN12ND2/TN52ND2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are only supported when D.2
Board Mode (WDM Interface) is set to Line Mode.
For the TN52ND2: The OptiX OSN 6800A only supports signal grooming at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels from
the backplane.
The cross-connection granularities supported by the board in a subrack is consistent with the cross-connection
granularities supported by the cross-connect board in the subrack. For details on the cross-connect board, see
15 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-11 Port diagram of the TN52ND2

8 x ODU1
16 x ODU0
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
2 x ODU2/ODU2e
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
165
(ODU0LP5/ODU0LP5)-1
165
(ODU0LP5/ODU0LP5)-2
52
(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-1
ODU0
cross-connect
module
WDM
side
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
168
(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-1
168
(ODU0LP8/ODU0LP8)-2
Backplane
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
72
(ODU2LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
2
(IN2/OUT2)-1
52
(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)-4
ODU1
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
ODU2
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
Service
processing
module
Indicates service encapsulation, mapping, decapsulation, and demapping.

Indicates automatic cross-connections that require no NM configuration. For example, to groom ODU1
signals, you only need to configure a cross-connection from another board to the ODU0LP port on the
NM. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted along the fixed cross-connections from the board to
the ODU1LP and ODU2LP ports.
Indicates cross-connections that you must configure on the NM. The cross-connections groom ODUk
signals from other boards.
Automatic cross-connections (
) and cross-connections that you must configure on the NM
(
) cannot coexist in this channel. For example, after configuring a cross-connection between
the 161(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 channel and another board, a cross-connection between the 51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 channel and another board cannot be configured on the NM.
9-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-12 Port diagram of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2

8 x ODU1
2 x ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
2(IN2/OUT2)-1
ODU2
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
ODU1
cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module

Indicates automatic cross-connections that require no NM configuration. For example,
to groom ODU1 signals, you only need to configure a cross-connection from another
board to the ODU0LP port on the NM. Then, the multiplexed signals are transmitted
along the fixed cross-connections from the board to the ODU1LP andODU2LP ports.
Indicates cross-connections that you must configure on the NM. The cross-connections
groom ODUk signals from other boards.
) and cross-connections that you must
configure on the NM (
) cannot coexist in this channel. For example, after
configuring a cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 channel and
another board, a cross-connection between the 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1 channel
and another board cannot be configured on the NM.
Table 9-9 Definition of NM ports on the ND2

Port Name
Definition
Automatic CrossConnection
ODU0LP1ODU0LP8
Internal logical port. The optical

paths are numbered 1-2.
Automatic cross-connections
between the ports and the
ODU1LP port
ODU1LP1ODU1LP2

paths are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
ODU2LP port
ODU2LP1ODU2LP2
Internal logical ports. The optical

paths are numbered 1.
between the ports and the IN/
OUT port
IN1/OUT1-IN2/
OUT2
Corresponding to the WDM-side

optical interfaces.
NOTE
Automatic cross-connections require no configuration on the NM.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Cross-Connection Configuration of Services

If you use the ND2 to transmit services, you must configure cross-connections on the U2000.
See Figure 9-13, Figure 9-14 and Figure 9-15.
l
shows configuration of cross-connections from other boards to the ND2 board. The
configuration enables add/drop of client-side services on the line at the local site.
shows configuration of cross-connections from other boards to the ND2 board. The
configuration enables line-side services to pass through the local site.
Figure 9-13 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52ND2 (ODU0 level)

Client side
WDM side
Other
boarda
WDM side
ND2
Other
boardb
WDM side
9-26
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM side of
the ND2 board
The WDM side of the ND2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
TN52TOG/TN52TOM
TN52ND2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN52NS2/TN52NS3/TN54NS3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-14 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 (ODU1 level)

Client side
WDM side
Other
boarda
WDM side
ND2
Other
boardb
WDM side
the ND2 board
other boards
TN11TDG/TN11TDX/TN52TOG/TN11TOM/TN52TOM/TN11TQM/TN12TQM/TN11TQS
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2/TN11NS2/TN12NS2/
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-15 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2 (ODU2 level)

WDM side
Client side
Other
boarda
WDM side
ND2
WDM side
Other
boardb
the ND2 board
other boards
TN12TDX/TN52TDX/TN11TQX/TN52TQX/TN11TSXL
TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/
TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3
Example of Service Cross-Connections

Figure 9-16 shows an example of service cross-connections on the ND2 board.
l
One IN/OUT can transmit a hybrid of ODU0 and ODU1 signals.
One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2 signals.
The Service Mode parameters of different IN/OUT ports are independent of each other.
Figure 9-16 Example of service cross-connections on the ND2 board

ODU0
TOM ODU0
TOM
ODU1
IN1/OUT1
ODU1 ND2
NS2 ODU1
TDX/ ODU2
ND2
9-28
IN2/OUT2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.1.9 ND2 Parameters

For parameters of the ND2, refer to Table 9-10.
Table 9-10 ND2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop

Query or set the path Loopback.
Service Mode
l TN11ND2: ODU1,
ODU2
Default: ODU1
l TN12ND2:
Automatic, ODU1,
ODU2

the line side.
Default: Automatic
l TN52ND2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: On
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


9-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Enable Auto-Sensing
Disabled, Enabled
Set the Enable Auto-Sensing function

of the board to Enabled or Disabled.
Default: Enabled

supports FEC Type and Line Rate
of the received signals in autosensing mode, and thus no manual
setting is required.
Type and Line Rate of the board
must be set manually and the values
of the previous two parameters must
be the same as that of the received
signals. Otherwise, the services are
unavailable.
NOTE
This parameter is only valid when the Board
Mode is set to Relay Mode.
TN12ND2 and TN52ND2.
Synchronous Clock
Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether to enable lock

synchronization. Set the parameter to
Enabled if clock synchronization is
required.
service clocks are synchronized with NE
clocks. When the parameter is set to
Disabled, service clocks will not be
synchronized with NE clocks.
NOTE
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
9-30


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE
CBAND is the only band now supported.

information.
wavelength.
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Line Rate
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Default: Disabled
Default: Standard
Mode
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

Disabled.
See D.24 Line Rate for more
information.
commissioning.

9-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Board Mode
Line Mode, Electrical

Relay Mode, Optical
Relay Mode
The Board Mode parameter is used to

set the work mode of a board depending
on the application scenario.
Default: Line Mode
NOTE
9.1.10 Specifications of the ND2

NOTE
Specifications of Fixed Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN11ND2

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm- NRZ-Fixed
NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even

wavelengths)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

9-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Specifications of Tunable Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN11ND2/

TN12ND2/TN52ND2
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
NRZ- 80 channels
tunable

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800

Receiver type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
PIN

PIN
9-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
range
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Specifications of XFP Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12ND2

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value

& even wavelengths)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
9-34
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Specifications of Gray Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN12ND2

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA

9-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
30
30
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 3.5 lb. (1.6 kg)
TN52ND2: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
Power Consumption
9-36
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11ND2
800ps/nm- NRZfixed
61.1
68.4
800 ps/nm -NRZ

tunable
62.7
70.2
800 ps/nm- DRZ

tunable
68.4
76.6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN12ND2
800 ps/nm -NRZ

tunable
57.2
64
800 ps/nm- DRZ

tunable
62
69
800 ps/nm (XFP)
46
52
800 ps/nm- DRZtunable
67.8
74.6
70.5
77.5
TN52ND2
9.2 NQ2
NQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
The available functional version(s) of the NQ2 board are TN51, TN52, and TN54.
9.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NQ2 board implements conversion between 32 channels
of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals
and four channels of WDM OTU2/OTU2e signals that comply with of the ITU-T
Recommendations, and supports hybrid transmission of these services. The overall bandwidth
must be equal to or less than 40 Gbit/s.
The NQ2 board carries out cross-connection at the electrical layer, and provides the OTN
interfaces and ESC.
The NQ2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control
and communication module, and power supply module.
9.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board.
9.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one NQ2 board.
9.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2
9.2.9 NQ2 Parameters
This section describes the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NM.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.2.10 Specifications of the NQ2


The available functional version(s) of the NQ2 board are TN51, TN52, and TN54.
Table 9-15 lists the version description of the NQ2 board.
Table 9-15 Version description of the NQ2 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the NQ2 board are TN51, TN52, and
TN54.
Difference
l Function:
The TN51NQ2 board supports FEC. The TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2
board supports FEC and AFEC-2. Boards that use different FEC
codes cannot interoperate with each other
.
The TN51NQ2 board supports the cross-connections at the ODU1
and ODU2 levels. The TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports the
cross-connections of at the ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2 levels.
Only the TN54NQ2 board supports the 1588 V2 function. For
details, see 9.2.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
Only the TN54NQ2 board can realize the regeneration of OTU2/
OTU2e signals. For details, see 9.2.2 Application.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to the version of board that you
use. For details, see 9.2.10 Specifications of the NQ2.
Replacement
9-38
Table 9-16 lists the substitution rules for the NQ2 board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-16 Substitution rules of the NQ2 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN51NQ2
TN52NQ2
The TN52NQ2 can be created as TN51NQ2 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN52NQ2 functions as the
TN51NQ2.
NOTE
When both the receive board and transmit board adopt the FEC code
pattern, the substitution applies; when both the receive board and
transmit board adopt the AFEC code pattern, the substitution does not
apply.
TN54NQ2
TN52NQ2
The TN54NQ2 can be created as TN52NQ2 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN54NQ2 functions as the
TN52NQ2.
NOTE
Only OptiX OSN 8800 supports the TN54NQ2.
TN54NQ2
None
9.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of line board, the NQ2 board implements conversion between 32 channels
of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals
and four channels of WDM OTU2/OTU2e signals that comply with of the ITU-T
Recommendations, and supports hybrid transmission of these services. The overall bandwidth
must be equal to or less than 40 Gbit/s.
Application scenario 1 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between

16 channels of ODU1 and four channels of OTU2 signals
Figure 9-17 Position of the NQ2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1
1
TOM
G.694.1
4
8
Client side
1
1
TOM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TOM
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
NQ2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
4

Client side
1
1
TOM
WDM side
9-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NQ2 board must be set to Line
Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between

four channels of ODU2/ODU2e and four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
G.694.1
4
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
TQX
NQ2
Client side
DMUX
MUX
TQX
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
NOTE
Mode.
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2: conversion between 32

channels of ODU0 signals and four channels of OTU2 signals
1
1
TOM
G.694.1
8
1
TOM
9-40
TOM
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
Client side
NQ2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX

Client side
1
1
TOM
WDM side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN
8800.
Mode.
Application scenario 4 of the TN54NQ2: implements the electrical regeneration of

OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
WDM side
IN1
OUT1
DMUX
MUX
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
WDM side
IN2
OUT2
DMUX
NQ2
IN3
DMUX
MUX
G.694.1
MUX
OUT3
OUT4
G.694.1
IN4
DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NQ2 board must be set to Electrical
Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.

The NQ2 board carries out cross-connection at the electrical layer, and provides the OTN
interfaces and ESC.
NOTE
ODU0 is supported only by the TN52NQ2 and TN54NQ2 in the OptiX OSN 8800.
The relay mode is supported only by the TN54NQ2. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical Relay
Mode or Optical Relay Mode. For an optical-layer ASON system, the regeneration mode must be set to Optical
Relay Mode.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-17 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Line Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four

channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into
four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and converts the signals into standard
DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is
similar.
Supports hybrid transmission of the services mentioned above. The overall
bandwidth must be equal to or less than 40 Gbit/s.
Crossconnect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels

of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NQ2
board and the cross-connect board.
OTN
function
l Supports the OTU2/OTU2e interface on the WDM side.

the ITU-T G.709.
l TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
WDM
specification
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
TN51NQ2:
TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2:
NOTE
9-42
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
PTP clock
(1588 V2)
Supported by the TN54NQ2
Physical
clock
Supported by the TN54NQ2
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Supported by the TN52NQ2 and TN54NQ2
XFP
Protection
scheme

NOTE
The ODUk SPRing protection is supported by the TN51NQ2 and TN52NQ2.
Loopback
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Not supported
Path Loopback
Supported

9-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Interface (ASI)
9-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1
Table 9-18 Functions and features of the NQ2 board (Relay Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function

Regeneratin
g rate
WDM
specification
OTN
function
OTU2e: OTN service at a rate of 11.1 Gbit/s or 11.3Gbit/s

the ITU-T G.709.
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
NOTE
9-46
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
PTP clock
(1588 V2)
Not supported
Physical
clock
Not supported
XFP
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Loopback
Not Supported
Protocol or
standard
compliance

services comply

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
processing services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The NQ2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 9-21 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN51NQ2 board.
Figure 9-22 and Figure 9-23 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NQ2
board.
Figure 9-24 and Figure 9-25 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NQ2
board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-21 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN51NQ2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
16XODU1/4XODU2/4XODU2e

WDM side
Cross-connect
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
O/E
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
9-48
Required
voltage
Backplane
SCC (controlled by SCC)

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


WDM side
Cross-connect
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
O/E
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Required
voltage
Backplane

9-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

32XODU0/16XODU1/
4XODU2/ 4XODU2e

WDM side
Cross-connect
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
O/E
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
9-50
Required
voltage
Backplane

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-24 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NQ2 (Line Mode) (OptiX OSN
8800)
32XODU0/16XODU1/
4XODU2/ 4XODU2e

WDM side
Crossconnect
module
1588
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT1
OUT2
OUT3
OUT4
O/E
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Signal processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Required
voltage
Backplane

9-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-25 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NQ2 (Relay Mode) (OptiX OSN
8800)
WDM
side
IN1
IN3
OUT2
OUT4
WDM
side
O/E
E/O
OTN
processing
module
E/O
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
OUT1
OUT3
IN2
IN4
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

The signal processing module of the NQ2 board can access the following optical signals:
l
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NQ2 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NQ2 to the WDM side
of the NQ2. The receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The signal processing module can receive 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of
ODU1 signals, or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the cross-connection board
through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and
encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs 4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e
signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the WDM-side optical module. After
performing E/O conversion, the module sends out OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM
9-52

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT1-OUT4 optical
interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN1-IN4
optical interfaces. The module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the signal processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU2 framing and decoding of FEC. Then, the
module sends out 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of ODU1 signals, or four
channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
The TN54NQ2 board processes clock signals in two directions.

l

The NQ2 board regenerates four channels of optical signals. The wavelengths at the receive and
transmit ends of the board are OTU2/OTU2e optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN1-IN4
optical interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they are decoded. After performing
E/O conversion, the module transmits OTU2/OTU2e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
The optical signals are output through the OUT1-OUT4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l


The module consists of a cross-connect module and an OTN processing module.
Grooms electrical signals between the NQ2 and the cross-connect board through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


performs FEC encoding and decoding.
l
1588 module
When ODU0, ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e signals are groomed through the backplane, the
1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the
1588 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals that come from a service
board according to the 1588 protocol and then send the clock signal to the STG board.

Power supply module

9.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board.

Figure 9-26 shows the front panel of the NQ2 board.
9-54

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-26 Front panel of the NQ2 board
NQ2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
NQ2
NOTE
You must insert the WDM-side optical modules in the IN1/OUT1 to IN4/OUT4 interfaces in ascending
order of signal frequencies supported by these WDM-side optical modules.
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the NQ2 board. Table 9-19 lists the type
Table 9-19 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NQ2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN4
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT1-OUT4
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

9.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one NQ2 board.
Table 9-20 shows the valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board.
Table 9-20 Valid slots for the TN51NQ2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 6800: If slot IU1, IU4, IU11, or IU14 houses the NQ2 board, the NQ2 board supports a
maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s. If any of the other slots house the NQ2 board, the NQ2 board supports
a maximum service capacity of 20 Gbit/s.
9-56
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 6800: If slot IU1, IU4, IU11, or IU14 houses the NQ2 board, the NQ2 board supports a
maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s. If any of the other slots house the NQ2 board, the NQ2 board supports
a maximum service capacity of 20 Gbit/s.
For the OptiX OSN 8800: The NQ2 board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s in any slot.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800: The NQ2 board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s in any slot.
9.2.7 Characteristic Code for the NQ2



are described in Table 9-23.
Table 9-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NQ2 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
IN3/OUT3
IN4/OUT4

9-57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
Port Description
Figure 9-27 and Figure 9-28 show the application model of the NQ2 board. Table 9-24
NOTE
For the TN54NQ2: ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when D.2 Board Mode
(WDM Interface) is set to Line Mode.
For the TN52NQ2: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals only at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels
from the backplane.
Figure 9-27 Port diagram of the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2

32 x ODU0
16 x ODU1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
173
(ODU0LP13/ODU0LP13)-1
173
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1
ODU0
cross-connect
module
WDM side
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
176
176
Backplane
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
74
(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
4
(IN4/OUT4)-1
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
ODU1
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
ODU2
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
Service
processing
module

Indicates automatic cross-connections, that require no NM configuration. For example, to groom ODU0
the ODU1LP and ODU2LP ports. No manual configuration is involved in this course.
Indicates cross-connections that you must configure on the NM. These cross-connections groom ODUk
(
) cannot coexist in this channel. For example, after a cross-connection between the 161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1 channel and another board is configured, a cross-connection between the 51
9-58

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-28 Port diagram of the TN51NQ2

16 x ODU1
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
ODU1
cross-connect
module
Backplane
WDM side
71
(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
74
(ODU2LP4/ODU2LP4)-1
ODU2
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
4(IN4/OUT4)-1
Service
processing
module

Indicates automatic cross-connections, that require no NM configuration. For example,
along the fixed cross-connections from the board to the ODU2LP ports. No manual
configuration is involved in this course.
Indicates cross-connections that you must configure on the NM. These crossconnections groom ODUk signals from other boards.
a cross-connection between the 51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1 channel and another
board is configured, a cross-connection between the 71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1)-1
channel and another board cannot be configured on the NM.
Table 9-24 Meaning of NM port of the NQ2 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Port Name
Meaning
ODU0LP1ODU0LP16

paths are numbered 1, 2.
ODU1LP port
ODU1LP1ODU1LP4

ODU2LP port
ODU2LP1ODU2LP4
Internal logical ports. The optical

between the ports and the IN/
OUT port

9-59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Port Name
Meaning
IN1/OUT1-IN4/
OUT4

optical interfaces.
NOTE
Automatic cross-connections require no configuration on the NM.
When the NQ2 is used to transmit services, cross-connections must be configured on the
U2000. SeeFigure 9-29, Figure 9-30 and Figure 9-31.
l
shows configuration of cross-connections from other boards to the NQ2 board. The
shows configuration of cross-connections from other boards to the NQ2 board. The
Figure 9-29 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU0 level)

Client side
WDM side
Other
boarda
1
WDM side
NQ2
Other
boardb
WDM side
9-60
the NQ2 board
The WDM side of the NQ2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
TN52TOG/TN52TOM

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

b

Figure 9-30 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU1 level)

Client side
WDM side
Other
boarda
WDM side
NQ2
Other
boardb
WDM side
the NQ2 board
other boards
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-31 Cross-connection diagram of the TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 (ODU2 level)

Client side
WDM side
NQ2
Other
boardb
Other
boarda
WDM side
WDM side
the NQ2 board
other boards

Figure 9-32 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NQ2 board.
9-62
One IN/OUT can transmit a hybrid of ODU0 and ODU1 signals.
One board can transmit a hybrid of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2 signals.
The Service Mode parameters of different IN/OUT ports are independent of each other.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-32 Example of service cross-connections on the NQ2 board

ODU0
TOM ODU0
TOM
IN1/OUT1
ODU1
ODU1
NS2 ODU1
NQ2
TDX
ODU2
IN2/OUT2
ODU2
IN3/OUT3
ODU2
IN4/OUT4
ND2
9.2.9 NQ2 Parameters

This section describes the board parameters that can be set or queried by using the NM.
For parameters of the NQ2, refer to Table 9-25.
Table 9-25 NQ2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Mode
l TN51NQ2: ODU1,
ODU2

the line side.
Default: ODU1
l TN52NQ2/
TN54NQ2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: On
Enable Auto-Sensing
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

unavailable.
NOTE
This parameter is only supported by the
TN54NQ2.
For ASON services, this parameter must be
set to Enabled.
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC

NOTE
Only TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2 supports AFEC.

9-64

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Planned Band Type
NOTE
Default: /

information.
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Line Rate
Default: Standard
Mode
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Used to configure the line rate of OTN.

information.

commissioning.

9-65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Board Mode

Relay Mode, Optical
Relay Mode

Default: Line Mode
NOTE
TN54NQ2.
9.2.10 Specifications of the NQ2

NOTE
Specifications of XFP Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN51NQ2/

TN52NQ2/TN54NQ2
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value

& even wavelengths)
9-66

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Specifications of Gray Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN51NQ2

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
Maximum
mean launched
power
dBm
-1
Minimum
mean launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2

9-67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -80 km
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-11
-14
-24
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN51NQ2: 3.5 lb. (1.6 kg)
TN52NQ2: 4.4 lb. (2.0 kg)
TN54NQ2: 3.5 lb. (1.6 kg)
Power Consumption
9-68
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51NQ2
88
95
TN52NQ2
88
97

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54NQ2
53
58.3
9.3 NS2
NS2: 10G Line Service Processing Board
The available functional versions of the NS2 board are TN11, TN12 and TN52.
9.3.2 Application
Because it is a line unit, the NS2 board implements conversion between eight channels of crossconnect ODU0 signals, or four channels of cross-connect ODU1 signals, or one channel of
ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals and WDM one channel of OTU2/OTU2e signals that comply
with ITU-T Recommendations.
The NS2 board is used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN
interfaces and ESC.
The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control
9.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the NS2 board.
9.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one NS2 board.
9.3.7 Characteristic Code for the NS2
9.3.9 NS2 Parameters
9.3.10 Specifications of the NS2

The available functional versions of the NS2 board are TN11, TN12 and TN52.
Table 9-28 lists the version description of the NS2 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-69
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-28 Version description of the NS2 board

Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the NS2 board are TN11, TN12 and
TN52.
Difference
Function:
l The TN11NS2/TN12NS2 supports AFEC, and the TN52NS2 supports
each other. For details, see 9.3.3 Functions and Features.
l TN11NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 signals. TN12NS2
supports the cross-connection of ODU1, ODU2 and ODU2e signals.
TN52NS2 supports the cross-connection of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2 and
ODU2e signals.
l OptiX OSN 6800: The TN11NS2 supports cross-connection of paired
slots while the TN12NS2 and TN52NS2 do not.
l OptiX OSN 3800: The TN11NS2 supports the cross-connection of
ODU1 signals between any slots of the four-slot mesh group. The
TN12NS2 and TN52NS2 support the cross-connection of ODU1
signals between any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot
mesh group.
For details, see9.3.3 Functions and Features.
Specification:
l The specifications vary according to the version of the board that you
use. For details, see 9.3.10 Specifications of the NS2.
Replacement
The TN11, TN12NS2 and TN52NS2 boards are not interchangeable.
9.3.2 Application
Because it is a line unit, the NS2 board implements conversion between eight channels of crossconnect ODU0 signals, or four channels of cross-connect ODU1 signals, or one channel of
ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals and WDM one channel of OTU2/OTU2e signals that comply
with ITU-T Recommendations.
9-70

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2: conversion between

four channels of ODU1 and one channel of OTU2 signals
Figure 9-33 Position of the NS2 board in the WDM system (application scenario 1)
1
Client
side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
MUX
WDM
side
1
Client
side
TOM
4
WDM
side
Application scenario 2 of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2: conversion between one channel

of ODU2/ODU2e and one channel of OTU2 signals
G.694.1
MUX
NS2
Client side
G.694.1
DMUX
NS2
TDX
Client side
TDX
DMUX
NS2
WDM side
MUX
NS2
WDM side
Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS2: conversion between eight channels of

ODU0 and one channel of OTU2 signals
1
Client
side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
MUX
WDM
side
1
Client
side
TOM
8
WDM
side
NOTE
The TN52NS2 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-71
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The NS2 board is used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN
interfaces and ESC.
NOTE
The ODU0 is only supported by the TN52NS2 in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Table 9-29 Functions and features of the NS2 board

Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
OptiX OSN 8800:

l TN52NS2: Maps eight channels of ODU0 signals, four channels of ODU1
signals, or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals sent from the crossconnect board into one channel of OTU2 or OTU2e signals. The board
converts the signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/
ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into one channel of
OTU2 or OTU2e signals. When mapping is complete, the board converts
the signals into standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar.
l TN12NS2/TN52NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals or one
channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals sent from the cross-connect board into
one channel of OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and converts the signals into
standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse
process is similar.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals sent from the other three
boards in the four-slot mesh group into one channel of OTU2 signals, and
converts the signals into a standard DWDM signal compliant with ITU-T
G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l TN12NS2/TN52NS2: Maps four channels of ODU1 signals sent from any
two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group into one
channel of OTU2 signals, and converts the signals into standard DWDM
signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
9-72

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800:

l TN52NS2: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU0
signals, four channels of ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e
signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1
signals between the NS2 board and the cross-connect board or the board
in the paired slot.
l TN12NS2/TN52NS2: Supports the cross-connection of four channels of
ODU1 signals or one channel of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NS2
board and the cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11NS2: Supports the grooming of four channels of ODU1 signals from
one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three
l TN12NS2/TN52NS2: Supports grooming of four channels of ODU1
signals to any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh
group, that is, supports an ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and
IU4, slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-73
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
OTN
function
TN11NS2:
l Supports the OTU2 interface on the WDM side.
the ITU-T G.709.
TN12NS2:
the ITU-T G.709.
TN52NS2:
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU0.
l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
9-74
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
LPT function
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
FEC
encoding
TN11NS2/TN12NS2:
ITU-T G.975.1.
TN52NS2:
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Supported by the TN52NS2
Protection
scheme

Loopback
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Not supported
Path Loopback
Supported

9-75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Interface (ASI)
9-76

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The NS2 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 9-36 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2 board.
Figure 9-37 and Figure 9-40 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2
board.
TN52NS2 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-77
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-36 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS2 board (OptiX OSN 6800/
3800)
ODU1
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
9-78
Required
voltage
Backplane

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-37 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2 (OptiX OSN 6800)
4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/ 1XODU2e

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Backplane
9-79
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-38 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 8800)
8XODU0/4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/
1XODU2e

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
9-80

Backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-39 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN 6800)
4XODU1/ 1 X ODU2/ 1XODU2e
WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Backplane
9-81
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-40 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board (OptiX OSN
3800)
4XODU1

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
Signal Flow
The signal processing module of the NS2 board can access the following optical signals:
l

NOTE
ODU0 is supported by TN52NS2 in OptiX OSN 8800.

ODU2/ODU2e is supported in OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS2 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane to the WDM side of the NS2,
l
Transmit direction
The signal processing module receives eight channels of ODU0 signals, or four channels
of ODU1 signals, or one channel of ODU2 signals, or one channel of ODU2e signals sent
from the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and encoding
of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of OTU2 signals. The OTU2 signals
9-82

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O conversion, the module
sends out the OTU2 optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITUT G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
l
Receive direction
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 from the WDM side through the
IN optical interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
module performs operations such as OTU2 framing, decoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the
module sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals, or four channels of ODU1 signals, or
one channel of ODU2 signals, or one channel of ODU2e signals to the backplane for service
cross-connection.
Module Function
l

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.

The module consists of a cross-connect module and an OTN processing module.
Grooms electrical signals between the NS2 and the other board through the backplane.
The groomed service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals.
NOTE
The signal processing module of the TN12NS2 does not contain a cross-connect unit. This board,
however, is always connected to the cross-connect board.

Frames OTU2 or OTU2e signals, processes overheads in OTU2 or OTU2e signals, and
l

Power supply module

9.3.5 Front Panel

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-83
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Figure 9-41 shows the front panel of the NS2 board.
Figure 9-41 Front panel of the NS2 board
NS2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
NS2
Indicators
9-84

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NS2 board. Table 9-30 lists the type
Table 9-30 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

9.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one NS2 board.
Table 9-31 shows the valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board.
Table 9-31 Valid slots for the TN11NS2/TN12NS2 board
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 9-32 shows the valid slots for the TN52NS2 board.
Table 9-32 Valid slots for the TN52NS2 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

9-85
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800




Table 9-33 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NS2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 9-42, Figure 9-43 and Figure 9-44 show the application model of the NS2 board. Table
9-34 describes the meaning of each port.
NOTE
For TN52NS2: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals only at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels from
the backplane. The OptiX OSN 3800 supports grooming of signals only at the ODU1 level from the backplane.
For TN12NS2: The OptiX OSN 3800 supports grooming of signals only at the ODU1 level from the backplane.
Figure 9-42 Port diagram of the TN52NS2 board

8 x ODU0
4 x ODU1
ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
WDM side
ODU0
cross-connect
module
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU1
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
ODU2
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
Service
processing
module
9-86

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


along the fixed cross-connections from the board to the ODU1LP and ODU2LP ports.
No manual configuration is involved in this course.

4 x ODU1
ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU1
cross-connect
module
ODU2
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
Service
processing
module

along the fixed cross-connections from the board to the ODU2LP port. No manual
configuration is involved in this course.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-87
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Backplane
4 x ODU1
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
ODU1
cross-connect
module
Service
Multiplexing
processing
module
module

Indicates cross-connections that need to be configured on the NM. These crossconnections are used to groom ODUk signals from other boards.
Table 9-34 Meaning of NM port of the NS2 board

Port Name
Meaning
Automatic Cross-Connection
ODU0LP1ODU0LP4

ODU1LP porta
ODU1LP1

ODU2LP porta
ODU2LP1

between the ports and the IN/OUT
porta
IN/OUTb

IN/OUT

optical interfaces.
a: Users do not need to manually configure an automatic cross-connection on the NMS.

b: The port is available only on the TN11NS2 board.
When the NS2 is used to transmit services, cross-connections must be configured on the
U2000, as shown in Figure 9-45, Figure 9-46, Figure 9-47 and Figure 9-48.
9-88
shows configuration of cross-connections from other boards to the NS2 board. The
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-45 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS2 board (cross-connection at the ODU0
level)
Client side
WDM side
Other
boarda
WDM side
NS2
Other
boardb
the NS2 board
The WDM side of the NS2 board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
TN52TOG/TN52TOM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
WDM side

9-89
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-46 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board (cross-connection at

the ODU1 level)
Client side
WDM side
Other
boarda
WDM side
NS2
Other
boardb
WDM side
9-90
the NS2 board
other boards

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-47 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11NS2 board (cross-connection at the ODU1
level)
Client side
WDM side
Other
boarda
WDM side
NS2
1(IN/OUT)-1
1(IN/OUT)-2
1(IN/OUT)-3
1(IN/OUT)-4
Other
boardb
WDM side
2
the NS2 board
other boards
Figure 9-48 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12NS2/TN52NS2 board (cross-connection at

the ODU2 level)
WDM side
Client side
Other
boarda
WDM side
NS2
WDM side
Other
boardb
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
the NS2 board
other boards

9-91
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


b

Figure 9-49 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NS2 board.
l
As shown in (1) of Figure 9-49, signals at the ODU0 and ODU1 levels are transmitted
together.
As shown in (2) of Figure 9-49, signals at the ODU2 level are processed.
Figure 9-49 Example of service cross-connections on the NS2 board

ODU0
TOM ODU0
TOM
ODU1
IN1/OUT1
NS2
TDX/ ODU2
ND2
NS2
IN1/OUT1
ODU1
ND2 ODU1
(1)
(2)

For parameters of NS2, refer to Table 9-35.
Table 9-35 NS2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
9-92

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Loopback
Outloop

Channel Loopback
Outloop
l TN11NS2: NA
Service Mode
l TN12NS2: ODU1,
ODU2
Default: ODU1

the line side.
l TN52NS2:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: On
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.

9-93
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Planned Band Type
NOTE
Default: /

information.
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

to Disabled.
NOTE
The parameter is only supported by the
TN12NS2 and TN52NS2.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

board resides.
information.
NOTE
TN11NS2 board.
Line Rate
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Default: Standard
Mode
9-94

NOTE

information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

commissioning.
NOTE

NOTE
TN11NS2: Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm
800 ps/nm

(odd & even
wavelengths)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
10

9-95
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
800 ps/nm
800 ps/nm

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
1200 ps/nm
- TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm TunableAPD
4800 ps/nm
-ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable
9-96
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
10
10
NAa
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
1200 ps/nm
- TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm TunableAPD
4800 ps/nm
-ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
Minimum side
mode suppression
ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
Dispersion
tolerance
ps/nm
1200
1200
4800
800
APD
APD
PIN

Receiver type
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver
sensitivity (FEC
on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
NRZ- 40 channels fixed (odd & even

wavelengths)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05

9-97
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Line code format
Value
1200 ps/
nm TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm Tunabl
e-APD
4800 ps/
nm ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
NRZ- 80
channels
tunable
ODB- 80
channels
tunable
DRZ- 80
channels
tunable
9-98

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
-3
-3
dB
10
10
NAa
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1200 ps/
nm TunablePIN
1200 ps/
nm Tunabl
e-APD
4800 ps/
nm ODBTunable
800 ps/nmDRZTunable

width
nm
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
35
ps/nm
1200
1200
4800
800
APD
APD
PIN

Receiver type
PIN
range
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-26
-26
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-9
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
TN12NS2: Specifications of XFP Optical Modules on the DWDM Side

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value

& even wavelengths)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
THz
192.10 to 196.05

9-99
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type
GHz
10

width
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
TN12NS2: Specifications of tunable optical Modules on the DWDM side

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm -NRZ- Tunable
NRZ- 80 channels tunable
9-100
dBm
dBm
-3
dB
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
GHz
nm
0.3
dB
35
ps/nm
800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
800 ps/nm -NRZ- Tunable

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity (FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
NRZ- 80 channels
tunable

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
-3
dB
10
10
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency
deviation
GHz

width
nm
0.3
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
800
800

Receiver type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
PIN

PIN
9-101
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
range
nm
1200 to 1650

on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11NS2/TN12NS2: 2.64 lb (1.2 kg)
TN52NS2: 2.86 lb (1.3 kg)
Power Consumption
9-102
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11NS2
NRZ-fixed (10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
38.0
41.8
NRZ-tunable (10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
39.0
42.9
DRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
41.0
45.1
ODB-tunable (10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
44.0
48.4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN12NS2
NRZ-fixed (10G)
(800 ps/nm-40
channels fixed
800 ps/nm-80
channels fixed)
39.5
43.45
NRZ-tunable (10G)
(1200 ps/nm-PIN-80
channels tunable
1200 ps/nm-APD-80
channels tunable)
40.5
44.55
DRZ-tunable (10G)
(800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
42.5
46.75
ODB-tunable (10G)
(4800 ps/nm-80
channels tunable)
45.5
50.05
800 ps/nm (XFP)
25.35
28.39
30.32
34
800 ps/nm - NRZ tunable
46.5
51.1
800 ps/nm - DRZ tunable
47
51.7
TN52NS2
9.4 NS3
NS3: 40G line service processing board
The available functional versions of the NS3 board are TN11, TN52, and TN54.
9.4.2 Application
The NS3 board is applied in several scenarios. In different application scenarios, the NS3 board
works with different boards. In addition, the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board supports hybrid
transmission of the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e services.
The NS3 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The NS3 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and
communication module, and power supply module.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-103
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.4.5 Front Panel

9.4.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11NS3 board or TN52NS3 board, and one slot houses one TN54NS3
board.

The available functional versions of the NS3 board are TN11, TN52, and TN54.
Table 9-43 lists the version description of the NS3 board.
Table 9-43 Version description of the NS3 board
9-104
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the NS3 board are TN11, TN52, and
TN54.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Description
Difference
l The TN11NS3/TN52NS3 supports AFEC, and the TN54NS3 supports

each other. For details, see 9.4.3 Functions and Features.
l Function:
Only the TN52NS3 board and TN54NS3 board support the crossconnections of ODU0/ODU1 level, and only the TN54NS3 board
supports the cross-connections of ODU3 level. For details, see 9.4.3
Functions and Features and 9.4.4 Working Principle and Signal
Flow.
Only the TN54NS3 board supports 1588 V2 function. For details,
see 9.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
Only the TN54NS3 board can implement the electrical regeneration
of OTU3/OTU3e signals. For details, see 9.4.2 Application.
l Appearance:
The TN11NS3 board and the TN52NS3 board use the same front
panel. The TN54NS3 board uses a different front panel from the
preceding boards. For details, see 9.4.5 Front Panel and9.4.10
Specifications of the NS3.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to the version of the board that
you use. For details, see 9.4.10 Specifications of the NS3.
Replacement
Table 9-44 lists the substitution rules for the NS3 board.
Table 9-44 Substitution rules of the NS3 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11NS3
TN52NS3
The TN52NS3 can be created as TN11NS3 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN52NS3 functions as the
TN11NS3.
TN52NS3
None
TN54NS3
None
9.4.2 Application
The NS3 board is applied in several scenarios. In different application scenarios, the NS3 board
works with different boards. In addition, the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board supports hybrid
transmission of the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e services.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-105
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application scenario 1 of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion

between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals and one channel of OTU3/OTU3e
signals
1
MUX
1
NS3 G.694.1
TQX
Client side
MUX
WDM side
1
G.694.1 NS3
DMUX
DMUX
TQX
4
4
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Line
Mode.
Application scenario 2 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion between

sixteen channels of ODU1 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
1
1
TOM
Client
side
TOM
4
MUX
G.694.1 NS3
DMUX
8
4
DMUX
1
TOM
MUX
NS3 G.694.1
1
WDM side
TOM
WDM side
Client
side
NOTE
Mode.
9-106

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application scenario 3 of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board: conversion between

thirty-two channels of ODU0 signals and one channel of OTU3 signals
1
1
TOM
TOM
8
8
Client
side
MUX
DMUX
NS3 G.694.1
G.694.1 NS3
DMUX
8
Client
side
MUX
TOM
WDM side
TOM
WDM side
NOTE
The TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board supports this application scenario only when used in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Mode.
Application scenario 4 of the TN54NS3 board: conversion between one channel of

ODU3/ODU3e signals and one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals
G.694.1
MUX
TSXL
DMUX
NS3
NS3
DMUX
Client side
G.694.1
WDM side
TSXL
MUX
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
Mode and the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard Mode.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-107
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application scenario 5 of the TN54NS3 board: implement the electrical

regeneration of one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signal
WDM side
IN
DMUX
NS3
G.694.1
MUX
OUT
WDM side
OUT
MUX
G.694.1
NS3
IN
DMUX
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Board Mode parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Electrical
Relay Mode or Optical Relay Mode.
The TN54NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports this application scenario.

The NS3 board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
NOTE
ODU0 is only supported by the TN52NS3 and TN54NS3 in the OptiX OSN 8800.
ODU3/ODU3e is only supported by the TN54NS3 in the OptiX OSN 8800.
The relay mode is only supported by the TN54NS3. The relay mode can be set to either Electrical Relay
Mode or Optical Relay Mode. In the case of an optical-layer ASON system, however, the regeneration mode
must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
The TN54NS3 board for the OptiX OSN 6800 only supports relay mode.
Table 9-45 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Line Mode)
9-108
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function
Maps 32 channels of ODU0 signals, 16 channels of ODU1 signals, or four

channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or one channel of ODU3/ODU3e signals
sent from the cross-connect board into one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals
and converts the signals into a standard DWDM signal compliant with ITUT G.694.1. The reverse process is similar, and in this process, dispersion
compensation can be performed for signals received on the WDM side.
Crossconnect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels

of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals or one channel
of ODU3/ODU3e signals between the NS3 and the cross-connect board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
OTN
function
TN11NS3:
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU3 and ODU2.
TN52NS3:
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU3, ODU2, ODU1, and ODU0.
l Supports TCM function for ODU3, ODU2 and ODU1.
l Supports PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1 and ODU2.
l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0.
TN54NS3:
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU0, ODU1, ODU3, and ODU3.
l Supports TCM function for ODU1, ODU2 and ODU3.
l Supports PM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and
ODU3.
l Supports TCM non-intrusive monitoring for ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function

9-109
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
LPT function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
TN11NS3/TN52NS3:
ITU-T G.975.1.
TN54NS3:
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
PTP clock
(1588 V2)
Supported by TN54NS3
Physical
clock
Supported by TN54NS3
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Supported by the TN52NS3 and TN54NS3
Protection
scheme

Loopback
9-110
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Not supported
Path Loopback
Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
Interface (ASI)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-111
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1
Table 9-46 Functions and features of the NS3 board (Relay Mode)
Function
and feature
Description
Basic
function

Regeneratin
g rate
OTN
function

the ITU-T G.709.
WDM
specification
Tunable
wavelength
function
of:
9-112

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
ESC
function
service signal.
PRBS
function
Not supported
FEC
encoding
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
PTP clock
(1588 V2)
Not supported
Physical
clock
Not supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Not supported
Loopback
Not Supported
Protocol or
standard
compliance

services comply

9-113
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and feature
Description
processing services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The NS3 board consists of the WDM-side optical module, OTN processing module, control and
Figure 9-55 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS3 board.
board.
board.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports the ODU0 and ODU3/ODU3e signals.
9-114

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-55 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11NS3 board in the OptiX OSN 6800
4 X ODU2/4 X ODU2e

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Required
voltage
Backplane

9-115
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
9-116

Backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

32XODU0/16XODU1/
4XODU2/4XODU2e

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Backplane
9-117
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

(Line Mode)
32 X ODU0/16 X ODU1/4 X ODU2/
4 X ODU2e/1XODU3/1XODU3e

WDM side
OTN
processing
module
1588
E/O
OUT
O/E
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
9-118

Backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-59 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN54NS3 board in the OptiX OSN
8800/6800 (Relay Mode)
WDM
side
WDM
side
O/E
OTN
processing
module
IN
WDM-side
optical
module
E/O
OUT
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
( controlled by SCC)

The signal processing module of the NS3 board accesses ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/
ODU3e electrical signals.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the NS3 board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NS3 to the WDM side
of the NS3, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The OTN processing module receives thirty-two channels of ODU0 or sixteen channels of
ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e or one channel of ODU3/ODU3e electrical
signals sent from the cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs
operations such as OTN framing and encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then, the module outputs
one channel of OTU3/OTU3e signals.
O conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 through the IN optical
interface. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the OTU3/OTU3e signals are sent to the OTN processing module.
The module performs operations such as OTU3/OTU3e framing and decoding of FEC/
AFEC. Then, the module sends out thirty-two channels of ODU0 or sixteen channels of
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-119
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e or one channel of ODU3/ODU3e electrical

signals to the backplane for service cross-connection.
NOTE
Only the TN52NS3 and TN54NS3 support ODU0 signals.

Only the TN54NS3 supports ODU3/ODU3e signals.
The TN54NS3 board processes clock signals in two directions.

l

The NS3 board implements the regeneration of one channel of optical signals. The wavelengths
at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM
wavelengths that carry OTU3/OTU3e optical signals.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the IN optical
After encoding, the signals are sent to the optical transmitting module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module sends out the OTU3/OTU3e signals at DWDM standard wavelengths
The optical signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l


Frames OTU3/OTU3e signals, processes overheads in OTU3/OTU3e signals, and performs
the FEC/AFEC encoding and decoding.
1588 module
In the case of grooming of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, or ODU3/ODU3e signals
through the backplane, the 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the
next NE according to the 1588 protocol, or extract the clock signal from the service signals
that come from a service board according to the 1588 protocol and then send the clock
signal to the STG board.
l
9-120

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

9.4.5 Front Panel


Figure 9-60 and Figure 9-61 show the front panel of the NS3 board.
Figure 9-60 Front panel of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3 board
NS3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
NS3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-121
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-61 Front panel of the TN54NS3 board
NS3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
NS3
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NS3 board. Table 9-47 lists the type
9-122

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-47 Types and functions of the interfaces on the NS3 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC

multiplexing unit.
Laser Hazard Level

9.4.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11NS3 board or TN52NS3 board, and one slot houses one TN54NS3
board.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16
NOTE
The rear connector on the TN11NS3 board connects to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. The
slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
For example, if you install the board in slots IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the TN11NS3 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU46-IU52, IU54-IU60, IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16

9-123
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The rear connector on the TN52NS3 board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the
two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN52NS3 board, the slot number of the TN52NS3 board displayed
on the NM is IU2.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16



Table 9-51 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the NS3 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
9-124

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Port Description
Figure 9-62, Figure 9-63 and Figure 9-64 show the application model of the NS3 board. Table
9-52 describes the meaning of each port.
NOTE
For TN54NS3:
l
ODUk cross-connections through the backplane are supported only when D.2 Board Mode (WDM
Interface) is set to Line Mode.
When used with a TN53TSXL board, Line Rate must be set to Standard Mode for the board.
For TN52NS3: The OptiX OSN 6800 supports grooming of signals at the ODU1 and ODU2 levels only from
the backplane.

32 x ODU0
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
164(ODU0LP4/
ODU0LP4)-1
164(ODU0LP4/
ODU0LP4)-2
173(ODU0LP13/
ODU0LP13)-1
173(ODU0LP13/
ODU0LP13)-2
176(ODU0LP16/
ODU0LP16)-1
176(ODU0LP16/
ODU0LP16)-2
ODU0
cross-connect
module
Backplane
ODU3/ODU3e
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
16 x ODU1
WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/O
DU2LP1)-1001
71(ODU2LP1/
ODU2LP1)-1
71(ODU2LP1/O
DU2LP1)-1004
81(ODU3LP1/
ODU3LP1)-1
1(IN1/OU
T1)-1
71(ODU2LP1/O
DU2LP1)-1013
74(ODU2LP4/
ODU2LP4)-1
71(ODU2LP1/O
DU2LP1)-1016
ODU1
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
ODU2
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
ODU3
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
Service
processing
module

the ODU1LP, ODU2LP and ODU3LP ports. No manual configuration is involved in this course.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-125
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

(

32 x ODU0
16 x ODU1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-1
161
(ODU0LP1/ODU0LP1)-2
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-1
164
(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4)-2
51
(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)-4
WDM side
71
(ODU2LP1/
ODU2LP1)-1
1
(IN1/OUT1)-1
173
173
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-1
176
176
54
(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)-4
ODU0
cross-connect
module
Backplane
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
ODU1
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
74
(ODU2LP4/
ODU2LP4)-1
ODU2
Multiplexing
cross-connect
module
module
Service
Multiplexing
processing
module
module

the ODU1LP and ODU2LP ports. No manual configuration is involved in this course.
(
9-126

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


4 x ODU2/ODU2e
Backplane
WDM side
1(IN1/OUT1)-1
ODU2
cross-connect
module
Service
Multiplexing
processing
module
module

Table 9-52 Meaning of NM port of the NS3 board

Port Name
Meaning
Automatic Cross-Connection
ODU0LP1ODU0LP16

ODU1LP port
ODU1LP1ODU1LP4

ODU2LP port
ODU2LP1

ODU2LP port
NOTE
This port is used for crossconnections at the ODU1 level.
ODU2LP1ODU2LP4

TN11NS3/TN52NS3: Automatic
cross-connections between the
ports and the IN/OUT port
TN54NS3: Automatic crossconnections between the ports and
the ODU3LP port
ODU3LP1

between the ports and the IN/OUT
port
IN/OUT

optical interfaces.
When the NS3 is used to transmit services, cross-connections must be configured on the
U2000, as shown in Figure 9-65, Figure 9-66, Figure 9-67, Figure 9-68 and Figure 9-69.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-127
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-65 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board (ODU0 level)

Client side
WDM side
Other
boarda
WDM side
NS3
Other
boardb
WDM side
9-128
the NS3 board
other boards
TN52TOG/TN52TOM

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-66 Cross-connection diagram of the TN52NS3 board (ODU1 level)

Client side
WDM side
Other
boarda
WDM side
NS3
Other
boardb
WDM side
the NS3 board
other boards
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-129
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
WDM side
Other
boarda
WDM side
NS3
Other
boardb
9-130
WDM side
the NS3 board
other boards

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-68 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3/TN54NS3 board (ODU2

level)
Client side
WDM side
NS3
Other
boardb
Other
boarda
WDM side
WDM side
the NS2 board
other boards

WDM side
Client side
Other
boarda
WDM side
NS3
WDM side
Other
boardb
the NS3 board
other boards
TN53TSXL
TN54NS3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-131
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Figure 9-70 shows an example of service cross-connections on the NS3 board.
l
As shown in (1) of Figure 9-70, signals at the ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2 levels are
transmitted together.
As shown in (2) of Figure 9-70, signals at the ODU3 level are processed.
Figure 9-70 Example of service cross-connections on the NS3 board

ODU0
TOM ODU0
TOM
ODU1
ODU1
ODU1
ND2
NS3
IN1/OUT1
TSXL
ODU3
NS3
IN1/OUT1
ODU2
ODU2
TDX
ODU2
(1)
(2)

For parameters of the NS3, refer to Table 9-53.
Table 9-53 NS3 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
9-132


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Loopback
Outloop
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: On
l TN11NS3: not
supported
Service Mode
l TN52NS3:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic

the line side.
l TN54NS3:
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2,
ODU3, Mix
Default: Automatic
Enable Auto-Sensing
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

unavailable.
NOTE
TN54NS3.
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


9-133
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC

Default: AFEC
Receive Wavelength
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /

follows:
default value, which indicates
keeping the receive wavelength the
same as the transmit wavelength of
the local board automatically.
same as the transmit wavelength of
the peer board; otherwise, services
are affected.
NOTE
For ASON services, this parameter must be
set to the default value.
Receive Band Type
9-134
C, CWDM
Sets Receive Band Type of a board.
Default: C
NOTE
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.780
Planned Band Type
NOTE
Default: /

information.
C, CWDM

wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE

Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Line Rate
Default:

information.
l ODU2LP channel:
Standard Mode
l ODU2LP channel:
Speedup Mode
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

to Disabled.
NOTE
Only TN52NS3/TN54NS3 supports this
parameter.
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


9-135
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled

Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only TN52NS3/54NS3 supports this
parameter.
PMD Threshold(ps)
Board Mode

Relay Mode, Optical
Relay Mode

Default: Electrical
Relay Mode
NOTE
Only the TN54NS3 supports this parameter.


NOTE
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN11NS3/TN52NS3

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
Transponder
ODB Tunable
DQPSK Tunable
9-136
Operating frequency
range
THz
192.10 to 196.05
192.10 to 196.05
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
Transponder
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
NA
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5
2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.6
NA
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
-500 to 500
-500 to 500

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side of the TN54NS3

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Line code format
Value
Transponder
ODB Tunable
DQPSK Tunable

Operating frequency
range
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
THz
192.10 to 196.05

192.10 to 196.05
9-137
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
Transponder
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-5
-5
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
NA
Central frequency
deviation
GHz
2.5
2.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
0.6
NA
Maximum -3 dB
spectral width
nm
NA
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
ps/nm
-800 to 800
-800 to 800

Receiver type
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength range
nm
1529 to 1561
1529 to 1561
(FEC on) EOL
dBm
-16
-16
Minimum receiver
overload (FEC on)
dBm
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
TN11NS3
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 5.5 lb (2.5 kg)
TN52NS3
l
9-138
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN54NS3
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
WDM-Side
Module
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131C) (W)
TN11NS3
DQPSK-tunable
(40G) (Transponder)
76.8
86
ODB-tunable (40G)
(Transponder)
67
75
DQPSK-tunable
(40G) (Transponder)
118
130
ODB-tunable (40G)
(Transponder)
110
118
DQPSK-tunable
(40G) (Transponder)
71
78
ODB-tunable (40G)
(Transponder)
60
66
TN52NS3
TN54NS3
9.5 TBE
TBE: 10 Gigabit Ethernet tributary board
The available functional version of the TBE board is TN11.
9.5.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TBE board converges eight channels of GE services and a
maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and
deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services, converges multiple flatrate GE services into one full-rate GE service, and implements transparent transmission of GEGE services.
The TBE board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and ALS.
The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module,
L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
9.5.5 Front Panel
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-139
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board.
9.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TBE board.
9.5.8 TBE Parameters
9.5.9 Specifications of the TBE

The available functional version of the TBE board is TN11.
9.5.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TBE board converges eight channels of GE services and a
maximum of 16 channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE services and
deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple GE services, converges multiple flatrate GE services into one full-rate GE service, and implements transparent transmission of GEGE services.
Application Scenario 1: Converging/Deconverging 8xGE Services and a Maximum

of 16 Cross-Connect GE Services to/from One 10GE Service
For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 9-71.
Figure 9-71 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system
8GE Local
client
side
G.694.1
10GE
TBE 4
L4G
L4G
Client side
9-140
MUX
G.694.1
DMUX
10GE
L4G 4 TBE
GE
4
8GE
Local
client
side
4
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
GE
L4G 4
WDM side

Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Application Scenario 2: Transparent Transmission of GE-GE Services

For the position of the TBE board in the WDM system, see Figure 9-72.
Figure 9-72 Position of the TBE board in the WDM system
GE
G.694.1
G.694.1
1
L4G
1
4
TBE
GE
1
MUX
L4G
GE
TBE
GE
1
DMUX
L4G
MUX
4
Client side
L4G
DMUX
1
8
GE
4
WDM side
WDM side
GE Client side

The TBE board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer and ALS.
Table 9-56 Functions and features of the TBE board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Converges eight channels of GE services and a maximum of 16

channels of cross-connect GE services into one channel of 10GE
services and deconverges one channel of 10GE services into multiple
GE services.
l Converges multiple flat-rate GE services into one full-rate GE
service.
l Implements transparent transmission of GE-GE services.
The reverse process is similar.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
The TBE board supports both FE/GE electrical signal and FE/GE optical signal.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals

to the central working/protection cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals
from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-141
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events monitoring
ALS function
The optical modules on the client side have the automatic laser shutdown
optical signal is received on the backplane side.
QinQ
Supports Stacking VLAN.
QoS (Quality of
Service)
Supports CAR (Committed Access Rate) and CoS (Class of Service).
ETH OAM
Supports IEEE802.1ag and IEEE802.3ah-compliant ETH OAM

protocol.
LAG (Link
Aggregation
Group)
l Supports the aggregation group protocol to aggregate services from

IP port to Trunk port.
l Supports the monitoring of the alarms and performance events of the

FE, GE, 10GE WAN and 10GE LAN.
l Supports manual and static link aggregation.

l Supports payload equalization and non-payload equalization
VLAN broadcast
Supports VLAN-based service group broadcast.
CVLAN group
port
Supports a group of CVLAN to be used as one VLAN.
Layer 2 switching
Supports the MAC address learning and aging.
Flow control
Supports IEEE802.3X-compliant Ethernet flow control protocol and

flow control termination.
EPL (Ethernet
Private Line)
Provides point-to-point EPL dedicated line.
EVPL (Ethernet
Virtual Private
Line)
Provides point-to-multipoint EVPL dedicated line and supports VLANbased switching.
Port working
mode
10GE optical interface: 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN

GE optical interface: 1000MFULL, auto-negotiation
GE electric interface: auto-negotiation
FE optical interface: 100MFULL
FE electric interface: 10MHALF, 10MFULL, 100MHALF, 100MFULL,
auto-negotiation
9-142
Test frame
Not supported
PRBS function
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
LPT function
Supported
NOTE
The LPT function cannot be configured for EVPL services but only for
bidirectional EPL services. When the LPT function is enabled, Source CVLAN and Sink C-VLAN of an EPL service must be left empty.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Loopback
10GE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
GE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
GE electric
interface
MAC
PHY
FE optical
interface
MAC
PHY
FE electric
interface
MAC
PHY
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Not
supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
9-143
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance

services comply
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

MPLS protocols
processing services

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1ag OAM
IEEE 802.3ah OAM
IEEE IGMP
STP, RSTP, MSTP
R-APS

The TBE board consists of the client-side GE optical module, client-side 10GE optical module,
L2 switching module, cross-connect module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 9-73 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board.
9-144

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-73 Functional modules and signal flow of the TBE board
GE
16
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
16
E/O
TX8
Client-side
GE optical
module
RX
O/E
TX
E/O
L2
switching
module
Cross-connect
module
16
Client-side
10GE optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TBE board accesses the following signals:
l
GE optical signals
FE optical signals
FE electrical signals
GE electrical signals
NOTE
l The client-side GE optical module can be replaced with the electrical module to access the
corresponding electrical signals.
l It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
l The processing of electrical signals is similar to that of optical signals. The processing of optical signals
Convergence of Multiple GE Services into 10GE Services

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-145
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Positive process:
The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from
client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2
switching module. The eight channels of GE electrical signals are converged with a
maximum of sixteen channels of GE electrical signals groomed from the cross-connect
module into one channel of 10GE electrical signals.
The 10GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side 10GE optical module. After
performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out 10GE optical signals through the
TX optical interface.
Negative process:
The client-side 10GE optical module receives 10GE optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, 10GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. This
module deconverges the one channel of 10GE electrical signals into multiple channels
of GE electrical signals.
A maximum of eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the client-side GE
optical module. After performing the E/O conversion, the module sends out GE optical
signals through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
A maximum of 16 channels of GE electrical signals are sent to other boards by the crossconnect module through the backplane.
Convergence or Transparent Transmission of GE-to-GE Services

l
Positive process:
The client-side GE optical module receives eight channels of GE optical signals from
After O/E conversion, the eight channels of GE electrical signals are sent to the L2
switching module. Based on the service requirement, the L2 switching module either
transparently transmits the received GE signals or converges the received multiple
channels of flat-rate GE signals into one channel of GE signals.
The GE signals are sent to other boards by the cross-connect module through the
backplane.
Negative process:
The cross-connect module receives the GE electrical signals groomed from other boards
GE electrical signals are sent to the L2 switching module. The L2 switching module
either transparently transmits the received GE signals or deconverges the received GE
signals into multiple channels of flat-rate GE signals.
The client-side GE optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals,
and then outputs the optical signals through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of GE/10GE optical signals.
9-146

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to GE/10GE optical signals.
l
L2 switching module
Implements cross-connecting 16 GE signals to the other boards through the backplane.
The grooming service signals are GE signals.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports cross-connecting 16 channels of GE signals to the central
working/protection cross-connect board.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of 16 channels of GE signals from one board
of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the
mesh group.

Power supply module

9.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board.

Figure 9-74 shows the front panel of the TBE board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-147
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-74 Front panel of the TBE board
TBE
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TX
RX
TBE
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eighteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TBE board. Table 9-57 lists the
9-148

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-57 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TBE board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX8
LC

TX
LC
Transmits the 10 GE service signal to the client-side

equipment.
RX1-RX8
LC

RX
LC
Receives the 10 GE service signal from the client-side

equipment.
NOTE
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level

9.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TBE board.
Table 9-58 shows the valid slots for the TBE board.
Table 9-58 Valid slots for the TBE board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-149
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-59 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TBE board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TX/RX
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
10
TX8/RX8
11
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 9-75 describes the application model of the TBE board. Table 9-60 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 9-75 Port diagram of the TBE board
16 x GE
Backplane
PORT3
PORT4
PORT11
Client side
VCTRUNK1
VCTRUNK2
101(AP1/AP1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
L2 switching
model
Cross-connect
model

Indicates cross-connections that need to be configured on the NM. These crossconnections are used to groom GE signals from other boards.
9-150

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-60 Meaning of NM port of the TBE board

Port Name
Meaning
PORT3
The port corresponds to the client side optical interface RX/

TX.
PORT4-PORT11
These ports correspond to the client-side optical interfaces

RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8.
VCTRUNK1VCTRUNK16
AP1-AP16
If the TBE board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
the PORT and VCTRUNK ports. The deconvergence of the 10GE services that are accessed
from the client-side PORT3 port is implemented through the L2 switching module.
Between the VCTRUNK ports and the AP ports of the cross-connect module are one-toone port connections, which do not need to be set on the U2000.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the AP port of other boards, as shown
by (1) in Figure 9-76. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board are
cross-connected to the client side of other boards for protection and the inter-board service
deconvergence.)
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the AP port of the TBE board and the LP port of other boards, as shown
by (2) in Figure 9-76. (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TBE board are
cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and inter-board service
convergence.)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-151
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-76 Cross-connection diagram of the TBE board

Client side
WDM side
Other board
Client side
101(AP1/AP1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
103(AP3/AP3)-1
201(LP/LP)-3
104(AP4/AP4)-1
201(LP/LP)-4
101(AP1/AP1)-1
102(AP2/AP2)-1
103(AP3/AP3)-1
116(AP16/AP16)-1
TBE
The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the

client side of other boards
The client side of the TBE board are cross-connected to the

WDM side of other boards

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
9.5.8 TBE Parameters

For parameters of the TBE, refer to Table 9-61.
Table 9-61 TBE parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
9-152
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Disabled, Enabled

(LPT).
Default: Disabled
9.5.9 Specifications of the TBE

NOTE
Specifications of Optical Module at the Client Side

Table 9-62 Specifications of optical modules on the client side (FE)
Item
Unit
Optical Module
Type
Value
100BASE-FX
1310 nm-10 km
100BASE-FX
1550 nm-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
10
80

Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-11.5
-2
Minimum extinction
ratio
dB
Central frequency
nm
1310
1550
Eye pattern mask
IEEE802.3zcompliant
IEEE802.3zcompliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
(EOL)
dBm
-19
-22

9-153
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module
Type
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
100BASE-FX
1310 nm-10 km
100BASE-FX
1550 nm-80 km
-3
-3

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 G
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
9-154
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical
Module
Type
2.125 G
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
Std 802.3.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-155
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Table 9-65 Specifications of XFP optical modules on the client side

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3
9-156
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3 km
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-157
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TBE
40.7
44.8
9.6 TDG
TDG: 2 x GE tributary service processing board
Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is, TN11.
9.6.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDG board implements conversion between two channels of
GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical
signals through cross-connection.
The TDG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
9.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board.
9.6.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TDG board.
9.6.8 TDG Parameters
9.6.9 Specifications of the TDG

Only one functional version of the TDG board is available, that is, TN11.
9.6.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDG board implements conversion between two channels of
GE optical signals and two channels of GE electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical
signals through cross-connection.
9-158

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the position of the TDG board in the WDM system, see Figure 9-77.
Figure 9-77 Position of the TDG board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
GE
TDG
NS2
NS2
DMUX
Client side
DMUX
TDG
GE
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side

The TDG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 9-66 Functions and features of the TDG board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts between two channels of GE optical signals and two channels of GE

electrical signals or one channel of ODU1 electrical signals through the crossconnect board or with the board in the paired slot.
Client-side
service type
Crossconnect
capabilities
l OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of an ODU1 signal and

two GE signals between the TDG and the cross-connect board or the board
in the paired slot through the backplane.
l OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of one ODU1 signal and two
GE signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
transmitter module on the client side is automatically shut down if no optical
signal is received on the backplane side.
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Supported
Test frame
Supported
l Monitors alarms and performance events of the OTN.


9-159
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocols or
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3z
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1
9-160

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The TDG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 9-78 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board.
Figure 9-78 Functional modules and signal flow of the TDG board
2 X GE/ 1 X ODU1
Client side
RX1
O/E
RX2
TX1
TX2
E/O
Cross-connect
module
Client-side
optical
module
GE
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TDG board accesses GE optical signals.
In the signal flow of the TDG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDG to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-161
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out two channels of
GE signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then,
If the signals are GE signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing,
demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out two channels of
GE signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and
then outputs two channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal

Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TDG and the board in
the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane. The grooming
service signals are GE and ODU1 signals.
Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the backplane.
The grooming service signals are GE and ODU1 signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of GE signals and maps the signals into the ODU1
performance.
Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals.

l
9-162
Power supply module

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board.

Figure 9-79 shows the front panel of the TDG board.
Figure 9-79 Front panel of the TDG board
TDG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TDG
Indicators
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-163
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDG board. Table 9-67 lists the type
Table 9-67 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDG board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

9.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TDG board.
Table 9-68 shows the valid slots for the TDG board.
Table 9-68 Valid slots for the TDG board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8 and IU11-IU16.
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


9-164

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-69 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDG board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 9-80 describes the application model of the TDG board. Table 9-70 describes the
Figure 9-80 Port diagram of the TDG board
2 x GE
ODU1
201(LP/LP)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Client side
Backplane
Cross-connect
module
Serv ice
processing
module
Cross-connect
module

Indicates cross-connections that need to be configured on the NM. These crossconnections are used to groom GE/ODU1 signals from other boards.
Table 9-70 Meaning of NM port of the TDG board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2
LP
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1and

2.
If the TDG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the GE crossconnection between the RX/TX and LP ports to implement the cross-connect grooming of
GE services. The following three cross-connections can be created.
9-165
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and LP ports of the TDG board
(Create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown (1)
and (2) in Figure 9-81.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TDG board and the LP port
of other boards (The GE services accessed from the client side of the TDG board are
cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards for protection and the inter-board
of the TDG board (The GE services accessed from the client side of other boards are
cross-connected to the client side of the TDG board for protection and the inter-board
NOTE
Figure 9-81 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board

Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
201(LP/LP)-2
Client side
WDM side
4
3(RX1/TX1)-1
201(LP/LP)-1
3
4(RX2/TX2)-1
2
1
201(LP/LP)-2
TDG
1
The straight-through of the TDGboard

The internal cross-connection of the TDG board
The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
TDG board
3
4

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
9-166
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the ODU1
cross-connection between the LP port and ODU1LP port of other boards (or IN/OUT port
of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as
shown in Figure 9-82.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-82 Cross-connection diagram of the TDG board
WDM side
Other board
Client side
201(LP/LP)-1
TDG
201(LP/LP)-2
The client side of the TDG board are cross-connected to the WDM
side of other boards

9.6.8 TDG Parameters

For parameters of TDG, refer to Table 9-71.
Table 9-71 TDG parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


9-167
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600
Default: 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None

information.
pass-through (LPT).
Ethernet services.
information.
board resides.
information.
9.6.9 Specifications of the TDG

9-168

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22

9-169
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
-3
-3
-3
Specifications of eSFP CWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
9-170
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TDG
30
33
9.7 TDX
TDX: 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
The available functional versions of the TDX board are TN11, TN12 and TN52.
9.7.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDX board implements conversion between two channels of
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and eight channels of
2.5 Gbit/s ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals or two 10Gbit/s ODU2/ODU2e
electrical signals through cross-connection.
The TDX board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
9.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board.
9.7.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TDX board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-171
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


9.7.8 TDX Parameters
9.7.9 Specifications of the TDX

The available functional versions of the TDX board are TN11, TN12 and TN52.
Table 9-74 lists the version description of the TDX board.
Table 9-74 Version description of the TDX board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the TDX board are TN11, TN12 and
TN52.
Difference
Function:
l The TN11TDX board supports the conversion between the client-side
signals and ODU1 electrical signals. The TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
supports the conversion between the client-side signals and ODU2
electrical signals.
l The TN52TDX board supports OTU2/OTU2e service on the client side,
whereas the TN11TDX/TN12TDX board does not.
Specification:
l The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 9.7.9
Specifications of the TDX.
Replacement
The TN11TDX, TN12TDX and TN52TDX boards are not interchangeable.
9.7.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TDX board implements conversion between two channels of
10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and eight channels of
2.5 Gbit/s ODU1 virtual concatenation electrical signals or two 10Gbit/s ODU2/ODU2e
electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TDX board in the WDM system, see Figure 9-83 and Figure 9-84.
9-172

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-83 Position of the TN11TDX board in the WDM system

G.694.1
G.694.1
4
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
NS2
MUX
NS2 4
DMUX
TDX
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
TDX
4
DMUX
NS2
Client side
NS2 4
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Figure 9-84 Position of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board in the WDM system

G.694.1
G.694.1
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
MUX
TDX
ND2
ND2
DMUX
Client side
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
DMUX
TDX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The TN12TDX board supports the conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192 optical signals and two channels of 10 Gbit/s ODU2 electrical signals.
The TN52TDX board supports the conversion between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and two channels of 10 Gbit/s ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.

The TDX board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 9-75 Functions and features of the TDX board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
TN11TDX: Converts between two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/

STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and eight channels of ODU1 virtual
concatenation electrical signals.
STM-64/OC-192 optical signals and two channels of ODU2/ODU2e
electrical signals.
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and two channels of
ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-173
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only the TN52TDX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services.
The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same.
STM-64 service on the U2000.
Cross-connect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800:

l TN52TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/
ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11TDX: Supports the cross-connection of eight channels of ODU1
signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board or the
board in the paired slot through the backplane.
l TN12TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2
signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board through
the backplane.
l TN52TDX: Supports the cross-connection of two channels of ODU2/
ODU2e signals between the TDX board and the cross-connect board
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11TDX: Supports the grooming of eight channels of ODU1 signals
from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the
other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
OTN function
l Maps each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2 signals at the ODU2
interface of the backplane.
to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T
G.709 and G.Sup43.
9-174
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS function

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
LPT function
The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service
type is 10GE LAN.
PRBS function

NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service
type is STM-64/OC-192.
Test frame
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN52TDX
Protection
scheme

l Supports tributary SNCP protection (TN12TDX/TN52TDX).
XFP
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783

9-175
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TDX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 9-85 and Figure 9-86 show the functional modules and signal flow of the TDX board.
9-176

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-85 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TDX board
8 x ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
O/E
E/O
Crossconnect
module
Client-side
optical
module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)

SCC
9-177
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-86 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
ODU2/ODU2e
Client side
RX1
RX2
TX1
TX2
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
E/O
OTN
processing
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TDX board can access the following optical signals:
l

NOTE
Only TN52TDX supports the OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
In the signal flow of the TDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TDX to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client
9-178

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of ODU1
signals or two channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming.
l
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives eight channels of ODU1 signals or two channels of
ODU2/ODU2e signals sent from the backplane. The module performs operations such as
ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the
module sends out two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/
OTU2e signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs two channels of clientside optical signals through the TX1-TX2 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of two channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from two channels of the internal
electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals.

The module consists of the cross-connect module, SDH/SONET encapsulation and
mapping module, 10GE LAN encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing
module.
NOTE
The signal processing module of the TN12TDX and TN52TDX do not contain a cross-connect unit.
This board, however, is always connected to the cross-connect board.

Encapsulates multiple channels of SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the
ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and
monitors SDH/SONET performance.
Encapsulates multiple channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the
ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and
monitors 10GE LAN performance.
Frames ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals and processes overheads in ODU1/ODU2/
ODU2e signals.
l

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-179
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

9.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board.

Appearance of the front panel of the TDX board.
Figure 9-87 Front panel of the TN11TDX board
TDX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TDX
9-180

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-88 Front panel of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX board
TDX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TDX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDX board.Table 9-76 lists the type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-181
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-76 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TDX board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX2
LC
RX1-RX2
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

9.7.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TDX board.
Table 9-77 shows the valid slots for the TN11TDX board.
Table 9-77 Valid slots for the TN11TDX board
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
9-182
Product
Valid slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Table 9-80 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TDX board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 9-89 and Figure 9-90 shows the application model of the TDX board. Table 9-81
Figure 9-89 Port diagram of the TN11TDX
Backplane
151(imp1/imp1)-1
151(imp1/imp1)-2
151(imp1/imp1)-3
151(imp1/imp1)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-1
152(imp2/imp2)-2
152(imp2/imp2)-3
152(imp2/imp2)-4
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
8 x ODU1
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module

9-183
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-90 Port diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX

Backplane
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
Client side
2 x ODU2/ODU2e
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module

Indicates cross-connections that need to be configured on the NM. These
cross-connections are used to groom ODUk signals from other boards.
Table 9-81 Meaning of NM port of the TDX board
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX2/TX2
imp1-imp2
Inverse multiplexing ports. The optical channels are

ClientLP1-ClientLP2
Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1.
If the TDX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set the
service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, configure the
bandwidth binding of the imp port.
NOTE
The bandwidth of each imp port that accesses 10GE must be bound with 4 ODU1s.
For bandwidth binding, each 10GE signal must be bound in order. For example, when the TN11TDX
board works with the TN12NS2 board, imp1.1 must be bound to ODU1LP1.1, imp1.2 must be bound
to ODU1LP1.2, and so on.
9-184
level cross-connections between the imp port and the IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2
board (or the ODU1LP port of other board), realizing the cross-connect grooming of ODU1
services, as shown in Figure 9-91.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port of other board,
as shown in Figure 9-92.
Figure 9-91 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TDX

WDM side
Other board
Client side
151(imp1/imp1)-1
151(imp1/imp1)-2
151(imp1/imp1)-3
151(imp1/imp1)-4
152(imp2/imp2)-1
152(imp2/imp2)-2
152(imp2/imp2)-3
152(imp2/imp2)-4
TDX
The client side of the TDX board are cross-connected to the WDM

Figure 9-92 Cross-connection diagram of the TN12TDX/TN52TDX

WDM side
Other board
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2)-1
Client side
TDX
The client side of the TDX board are cross-connected to the WDM
Other board TN11ND2/TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN51NQ2/TN52NQ2/ TN54NQ2/TN12NS2/TN52NS2/

9.7.8 TDX Parameters

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-185
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For parameters of the TDX, refer to Table 9-82.

Table 9-82 TDX parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
l TN11TDX: 10GE
LAN, OC-192,
STM-64

Default: 10GE LAN

l TN12TDX: None,
10GE LAN,
OC-192, STM-64
Default: None
l TN52TDX: None,
10GE LAN,
OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2E, STM-64
Default: None
9-186

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Port Mapping
l TN11TDX: doesn't
support this
parameter

queries the mapping mode of a port
service.
l TN12TDX/
TN52TDX: Bit
Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC transparent
mapping (10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
NOTE
For the TN12TDX: only
the ClientLP1 port
supports MAC
transparent mapping
(10.7G).
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
PAUSE Frame Flow

Control
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

information.
pass-through (LPT).
switch of the flow control.
NOTE
Only TN11TDX supports this parameter.
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600
Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Ethernet services.

9-187
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

to Disabled.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Only TN52TDX supports this parameter.
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

NOTE
This parameter can be set only when Service
Type is set to OTU2 or OTU-2E.

FEC, AFEC
FEC Mode
Default: FEC

NOTE

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

board resides.
information.
9.7.9 Specifications of the TDX

9-188

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant

9-189
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3 km

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight
l
TN11TDX: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)
TN12TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN52TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
9-190
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TDX
78.0
80.0
TN12TDX
37.4
40.7
TN52TDX
57.3
63.0

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.8 TOG
TOG: 8 x GE service processing board
The available functional version of the TOG board is TN52.
9.8.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TOG board implements conversion between 8 channels of GE
optical signals or GE electrical signals and 4 channels of ODU1 electrical signals and8 channels
of ODU0 electrical signals through cross-connection.
The TOG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
The TOG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
9.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board.
9.8.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TOG board.
9.8.8 TOG Parameters
9.8.9 Specifications of the TOG

The available functional version of the TOG board is TN52.
9.8.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TOG board implements conversion between 8 channels of GE
optical signals or GE electrical signals and 4 channels of ODU1 electrical signals and8 channels
of ODU0 electrical signals through cross-connection.
For the position of the TOG board in the WDM system, see Figure 9-93 and Figure 9-94.
Figure 9-93 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 8800)
1
8
client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOG
GE
MUX
1
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
TOG
8
WDM side

1
GE
8
client side
9-191
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-94 Position of the TOG board in the WDM system (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
1
8
client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOG
GE
MUX
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
TOG
4
WDM side
1
GE
8
client side

The TOG board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 9-84 Functions and features of the TOG board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts between 8 channels of GE optical signals or GE electrical signals

and 4 channels of ODU1 electrical signals or 8 channels of ODU0 electrical
signals.
Client-side
service type
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800: Supports the cross-connection of 8 channels of ODU0

signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of 4 channels of ODU1
signals between the TOG board and the cross-connect board through the
backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one
board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards
belonging to the mesh group.
OTN
function
l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of 8 channels of client-side service

signals into 4 channels of ODU1 signals.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing defined in the
ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU1/ODU0.
9-192

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
PRBS
function
Not supported.
Test frame
Not supported.
PTP clock
(1588 V2)
Supported.
Physical
clock
Supported.
ALS
function
Supported
Protection
scheme
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3z

9-193
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TOG board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 9-95 or Figure 9-96 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board.
9-194

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Figure 9-95 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 8800)
8XODU0
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Crossconnect
module
RX8
OTN
processing
module
1588
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC )
9-195
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-96 Functional modules and signal flow of the TOG board (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)
4XODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Crossconnect
module
RX8
OTN
processing
module
1588
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC )
The client side of the TOG board can access the following optical signals:
l
GE optical signals.
GE electrical signals.
In the signal flow of the TOG board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOG to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives 8 channels of the optical signals from client
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and
mapping modules. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out 4 channels of ODU1 signals or
8 channels of ODU0 signals to the backplane for grooming.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU1 or ODU0 electrical signals sent from the
cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as
ODU1 or ODU0 framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module
sends out 8 channels of GE signals to the client-side optical module.
9-196

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of GE electrical signals, and
then outputs 8 channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical
interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of 8 channels of GE optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from 8 channels of the internal

The module consists of a GE service encapsulation and mapping module and an OTN
processing module.
GE service encapsulation and mapping module
It encapsulates multiple GE signals and maps the GE signals to the ODU1 or ODU0
payload area and performs the reverse of the preceding process. It supports the function
of GE performance monitoring.
Frames ODU1 or ODU0 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 or ODU0 signals.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TOG and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 or ODU0 signals.
1588 module
board.
NOTE
Two channels clock signals are supported by the TOG.

Power supply module

9.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-197
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Figure 9-97 shows the TOG front panel.
Figure 9-97 Front panel of the TOG board
TOG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TOG
Indicators
9-198

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are 16 optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOG board. Table 9-85 lists the type
Table 9-85 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOG board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX8
LC
RX1-RX8
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

9.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TOG board.
Table 9-86 shows the valid slots for the TOG board.
Table 9-86 Valid slots for TOG board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-199
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-87 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TOG board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 9-98 shows the application model of the TOG board.Table 9-88 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 9-98 Port diagram of the TOG board
Backplane
8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
10(RX8/TX8)-1
Client side
Service
proccessing
module
Cross-connect
module

9-200

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-88 Meaning of NM port of the TOG board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8
ClientLP1-ClientLP8
If the TOG board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU0LP port of the other
boards, as shown in Figure 9-99.
level cross-connections between the ClientLP port and the ODU1LP port of the other
boards, as shown in Figure 9-100.
Figure 9-99 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU0 level)

WDM side
Other board
164(ODU0LP4/ODU0LP4) -1
Client side
TOG
The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM
Other board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-201
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-100 Cross-connection diagram of the TOG (ODU1 level)

WDM side
Other board
Client side
TOG
The client side of the TOG board are cross-connected to the WDM

9.8.8 TOG Parameters

For parameters of the TOG, refer to Table 9-89.
Table 9-89 TOG parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use
Status
Used, Unused

board.
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: Used
9-202

board.
more information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On

more information.
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Disabled, Enabled
Max. Packet
Length
1518 - 9600
Ethernet
Working Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex

NOTE
This parameter must be set to Auto-Negotiation
when the PTP clock function is used.
Default: Enabled
Default: 9600

board are lost.

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
SD Trigger
Condition
Default: None
Synchronous
Clock Enabled
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled

Determines whether to enable lock
synchronization. Set the parameter to
Enabled if clock synchronization is required.
When this parameter is set to Enabled, service
clocks are synchronized with NE clocks.
When the parameter is set to Disabled, service
clocks will not be synchronized with NE
clocks.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-203
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Synchronous/
Asynchronous
Mode
Asychronous,
Sychronous
Specifies a clock source, or determines

whether to transparently transmit the upstream
clock information or to trace the local clock.
Set the parameter based on the network
design. The default value is Asynchronous
for the board to trace the local clock. The
default value is recommended because the
local clock has higher quality.
Asychronous
When the parameter is set to Asynchronous,

the board will terminate the clock information
in the client-side services. Instead, it will trace
the local clock and transmit the clock
information to the downstream station. When
the parameter is set to Synchronous, the board
will extract the clock information from its
client-side services and transparently transmit
the clock information to the downstream
station.
NOTE
Value change of this parameter will cause service
interruption.
9.8.9 Specifications of the TOG

NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 G
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80
9-204

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 G
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
Std 802.3.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-205
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask

Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
9-206
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 0.85 kg (1.87 lb.)

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN52TOG
41.8
46.0
9.9 TOM
TOM: 8 x multi-rate ports service processing board
The available functional versions of the TOM board are TN11 and TN52.
9.9.2 Application
The TOM can be used in different application scenarios. In different application scenarios, eight
pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side
interfaces. The maximum access capacity of the TOM at the client side is 10 Gbit/s.
9.9.3 Function and Feature
The TOM board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
9.9.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board.
9.9.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TOM board.
9.9.8 TOM Parameters
9.9.9 Specifications of the TOM

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-207
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-92 Version description of the TOM board

Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
Function:
l The TN52TOM board supports the conversion between the client-side
signals and ODU0 electrical signals. The TN11TOM board does not
support the conversion. For details, see 9.9.3 Function and Feature.
Specification:
l The specifications vary according to the version of board that you use.
For details, see 9.9.9 Specifications of the TOM.
Replacement
The two versions are not interchangeable.
9.9.2 Application
The TOM can be used in different application scenarios. In different application scenarios, eight
pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used as client-side interfaces or WDM-side
interfaces. The maximum access capacity of the TOM at the client side is 10 Gbit/s.
The TOM board has two working modes, that is, Cascading mode and Non-cascading mode.
There are totally 5 scenarios of the TN11TOM. There are totally 12 scenarios of the TN52TOM.
The scenarios of the TN11TOM:
l
In cascading mode, there are two scenarios.

Scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1)
Scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1)
In non-cascading mode, there are three scenarios.

Scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1)
The scenarios of the TN52TOM:

l
In cascading mode, there are four scenarios.

Scenario 1: ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
Scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
In non-cascading mode, there are eight scenarios.

Scenario 5: ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
Scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
9-208

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Scenario 7: ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)

Scenario 8: ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)
Scenario 9: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1)
Scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)
Scenario 11: ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
Scenario 12: ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)
NOTE
In scenario 1 of the TN52TOM, the service mapping path in OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 and
OptiX OSN 3800 are difference. The details are as follows:
l
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0.
For the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1.
In scenario 5 of the TN52TOM, the service mapping path in OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800 and
OptiX OSN 3800 are difference. The details are as follows:
l
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0.
For the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, the service mapping path is Any->ODU0->ODU1.
Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports scenario 11 of the TN52TOM,

Only the OptiX OSN 8800 supports scenario 12 of the TN52TOM,
TN11TOM scenario 1: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 9-101. For the port diagram of the
TOM, see Figure 9-140. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see Figure 9-157.
Figure 9-101 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1)
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
TOM
8
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
1
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
8
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
TN11TOM scenario 2: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in

cascading mode
Implements conversion between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and
selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any
signals and one OTU1 signal.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-209
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-102 Position of the TN11TOM in a WDM system

G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
DMUX
1
DMUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side
WDM side
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
WDM side
MUX
TOM
Client side
DMUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2 TOM
DMUX
Client side
MUX
WDM side
7
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
TN11TOM scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals.
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
MUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
9-210
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side

1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
4
8
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In this application scenario, the client-side internal logical ports of the TOM are divided into four groups:
ClientLP1-ClientLP2, ClientLP3-ClientLP4, ClientLP5-ClientLP6, and ClientLP7-ClientLP8. Any group
of these internal logical ports can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
TN11TOM scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in noncascading mode

Implements conversion between four optical signals at the rate from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s
and four ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
G.694.1/
G.694.2
1
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
DMUX
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
TOM
4
Client side
G.694.1/
G.694.2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
4
Client side
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as described in the system
plan.
TN11TOM scenario 5: ODU1 tributary-line mode (electrical regeneration board)

Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-211
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


W DM side
W DM side
DMUX
TOM
G.694.1
MUX
MUX
G.694.1
4 DMUX
TOM
NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal, only
RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
In non-cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of four channels of OTU1 signal.
Any four of RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be configured as WDM-side optical interfaces.
TN52TOM scenario 1: ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) in cascading

mode
Implements conversion between eight Any signals and two ODU0 signals or one ODU1 signal.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 9-106 and Figure 9-107. For the
port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 9-145. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see
Figure 9-162.
Figure 9-106 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0)
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
TOM
8
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
1
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
8
Client side
NOTE
In this scenario, for Any services, only the FE, GE, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, SDI, ESCON, and FDDI
services can be accessed.
9-212

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-107 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 1: Any->ODU0->ODU1)

1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
NS2 G.694.1
1
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
8
Client side
DMUX
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
MUX
8
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
TN52TOM scenario 2: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)

in cascading mode
signals and one OTU1 signal.
Figure 9-108 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 2: Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1)
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
1
DMUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
MUX
TOM
MUX
DMUX
6
DMUX
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
MUX
WDM side

WDM side
Client side
9-213
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
G.694.1/
G.694.2
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2 TOM
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
7
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5
Gbit/s.
In cascading mode, only RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
TN52TOM scenario 3: ODU1 tributary mode (Any->ODU1) in cascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal.
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
TOM
8
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
1
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
8
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
TN52TOM scenario 4: ODU1 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in

cascading mode
signals and one OTU1.
9-214

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-110 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 4: Any->ODU1->OTU)

G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
MUX
1
DMUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
MUX
TOM
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
Client side
WDM side
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
WDM side
MUX
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
DMUX
G.694.1/
G.694.2
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1/
G.694.2 TOM
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
7
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
On the client side, six or seven pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5
Gbit/s.
In this scenario, mapping of ODU0 services is not supported. This is different than the TN52TOM scenario
2.
TN52TOM scenario 5: ODU0 tributary mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) in noncascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any Signals and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1
signals.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 9-111 and Figure 9-112. For the
port diagram of the TOM, see Figure 9-149. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see
Figure 9-166.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-215
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-111 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0)

1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
WDM side
MUX
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
8
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10 Gbit/s.
Figure 9-112 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 5: Any->ODU0->ODU1)

1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
4
8
Client side
NOTE
TN52TOM scenario 6: ODU0 tributary-line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)

in non-cascading mode
Implements conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements
conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 9-113 or Figure 9-114. For the port
diagram of the TOM, see Figure 9-150. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see
Figure 9-167.
9-216

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-113 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: A)

G.694.1
1
G.694.1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
DMUX
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
TOM
DMUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
The conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals.
NOTE
On the client side, six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
Figure 9-114 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 6: B)

G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
1
DMUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
4
DMUX
Client side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
TOM
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
Implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and
selective receiving function on the WDM side.
NOTE
On the client side, each optical interface can access services at a maximum rate of 1.25 Gbit/s.
On the client side, four pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/s.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-217
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN52TOM scenario 7: ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1) in noncascading mode

Implements conversion between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or implements
conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals.
For the position of the TOM in a WDM system, see Figure 9-115 or Figure 9-116. For the port
diagram of the TOM, see Figure 9-151. For the cross-connection diagram of the TOM, see
Figure 9-168.
NOTE
In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 8.
Figure 9-115 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: A)

1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
8
MUX
MUX
WDM side
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
4
WDM side
Client side
The conversion between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals.
Figure 9-116 Position of the TN52TOM in a WDM system (Scenario 7: B)

1
4
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
OTU1
MUX
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
1
TOM
OTU1
4
Client side
The conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals.
TN52TOM scenario 8: ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals through Any reencapsulation.
9-218

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


1
4
Client side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
OTU1
MUX
WDM side
MUX
1
TOM
OTU1
4
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
When the Any service is mapped into the ODU0 service, the TOM board supports de-encapsulation and
then re-encapsulation of only 10 Any services.
TN52TOM scenario 9: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0>ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode

Implements conversion between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any reencapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
G.694.1/
G.694.2
G.694.1/
G.694.2
OTU1
Client side
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
TOM
TOM
MUX
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
OTU1
Client side
NOTE
TN52TOM scenario 10: ODU1 tributary-line mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)

in non-cascading mode
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-219
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


A: OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
W DM side
W DM side
DMUX
TOM
G.694.1
MUX
MUX
G.694.1
4 DMUX
TOM
B: Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Implements conversion between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements
conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals and the dual fed and selective
G.694.1
1
G.694.1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
TOM
TOM
DMUX
Client side
DMUX
WDM side
WDM side
G.694.1
1
DMUX
DMUX
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
TOM
MUX
DMUX
4
DMUX
Client side
Client side
G.694.1
MUX
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
MUX
WDM side
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system
plan.
9-220

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN52TOM scenario 11: ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in noncascading mode

Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals.
4
Client side
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
OTU1
MUX
WDM side
MUX
1
TOM
OTU1
4
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
In this scenario, mapping of Any services is not supported. This is different than TN52TOM scenario 12.
TN52TOM scenario 12: ODU1 tributary mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in

non-cascading mode
Implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals through Any reencapsulation.
4
Client side
DMUX
NS2 G.694.1
TOM
OTU1
MUX
G.694.1 NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX
WDM side
1
TOM
OTU1
4
Client side
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-221
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.9.3 Function and Feature

The TOM board achieves cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide OTN interfaces
and ESC.
NOTE
ODU0 is only supported by the TN52TOM in the OptiX OSN 8800.
9-222

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-93 Functions and features of the TOM board

Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
TN11TOM:
l Converts between eight optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5
Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal.
l Converts between six optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5
Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and converts the signals into a standard
DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1, and the dual fed and
selective receiving function on the WDM side, or implements conversion
between seven Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and converts the signals
into a standard DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
Gbit/s and four ODU1 signals.
l Converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5
Gbit/s and four OTU1 signals, and converts the signals into a standard
DWDM signals compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
l Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
TN52TOM:
Gbit/s and two ODU0 signals or one ODU1 signal.
Gbit/s and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven
optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and one OTU1
signal.
Gbit/s and one ODU1 signal.
Gbit/s and eight ODU0 signals or four ODU1 signals.
Gbit/s and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four
optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and two OTU1
signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM
side.
l Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or
implements conversion between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1
signals.
l Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals or four
ODU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation.
l Converts between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any
re-encapsulation, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on the
WDM side.
l Implements the electrical regeneration of four OTU1 optical signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-223
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

NOTE
The TOM board supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal. It is
recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces
only, for detailed description of the configuration. see Configuring Electrical Ports of
a Board in Configuration Guide.
The TOM board supports access of SDI, HD-SDI, and DVB-ASI electrical signals.
When the TOM board accesses these electrical signals, the digital video O/E converter
must be used for O/E or E/O conversion. For details, see 6.3 Digital Video O-E
Converter. The access optical module on the client side requires the SDI access module.
See Table 9-105.
9-224

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 8800:

l TN52TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals or eight ODU0
signals through the cross-connect bus on the backplane and the crossconnect board.
OptiX OSN 6800:
l TN11TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM
and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection of four
ODU1 signals to the paired slots through the backplane.
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of GE signals between
the TOM and the cross-connect board. Supports the cross-connection
of eight channels of GE signals to the paired slots through the
backplane.
l TN52TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals between the TOM
and the cross-connect board.
Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals to the
paired slots through the backplane.
Supports the transmission of six signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
OptiX OSN 3800:
l TN11TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals from
one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of GE signals from one
Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100
Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s from one board of the mesh group (consisting of
four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group.
l TN52TOM
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU1 signals
between one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and
any two boards in the non-paired slots of the four-slot mesh group, that
is, supports the ODU1 cross-connection between slots IU2 and IU4,
slots IU2 and IU5, slots IU3 and IU4, and slots IU3 and IU5.
Supports the cross-connection of six channels of GE signals between
one board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-225
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
slot of the four-slot mesh group, that is, supports the GE crossconnection between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5.
Supports the cross-connection of six signals at the rate between 100
Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals, between one board of the
mesh group (consisting of four boards) and the paired slot of the fourslot mesh group, that is, supports the cross-connection of six signals at
the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s, except ODU1 signals,
between slots IU2 and IU3 and slots IU4 and IU5.
OTN
function
l The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.7041 and ITU-T G.709.
Supports the frame format and overhead processing by referring to the
ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the SM and TCM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers on
the WDM side.
l Supports the PM and TCM non-intrusive monitoring functions at the
ODU1 layer.
l Supports the SM and PM functions at the OTU1 and ODU1 layers.
l TN52TOM supports the PM function at the ODU0 layer.
WDM
specification
Supports the DWDM and CWDM specifications.
ESC
function
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
9-226
ALS
function
PRBS
function
LPT
function
is FE or GE.
Test frame
Supported
NOTE
is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Opticallayer ASON
Not supported
Supported by the TN52TOM
Protection
scheme
OptiX OSN 3800/OptiX OSN 6800:

l Supports SW SNCP.
OptiX OSN 8800:
l Supports SW SNCP.
eSFP

side.
side.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
NOTE
When being used as tributary & line
board, the TOM board only supports the
loopback between ClientLP1ClientLP4.
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

9-227
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
standards
(nonperformance
monitoring)
with which
transparently
transmitted
services
comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING
INTERFACE (FC-PH)
Interface (ASI)
9-228

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performanc
e
monitoring)
for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TOM board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, signal
The signal flow of the board and the functional modules over which the signals travel vary with
the application scenarios. Figure 9-122 to Figure 9-126 and Figure 9-127 to Figure 9-138 show
the block diagram of the functions of the TOM board. The transmit and the receive directions
are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit direction is defined as the direction
from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined
as the reverse direction.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-229
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal flow
Figure 9-122 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary Mode
(Any->ODU1) in cascading mode)
4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1 X ODU1

Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
Memory
Communication
CPU

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal.

On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 2.5
Gbit/s.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals from client
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out one
channel of ODU1 signals or eight channels of Any signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane.
For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module.
9-230

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals
to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and then
outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical
interfaces.
Signal flow
Figure 9-123 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (ODU1 Tributary-Line
Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
Service
OTN
Crossconnect encapsulation processing
module and mapping module
module
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
TX7
TX8
O/E
RX7
WDM-side
optical
module
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1
signal.
NOTE
On the client side, the TOM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate ranging from
100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s).
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives six or seven channels of the Any optical signals
from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-231
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

After O/E conversion, the six or seven channels of electrical signals are sent to the signal
processing module. The module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping
processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs one
channel of OTU1 signals.
conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply
with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical optical
signals, and then output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of OTU1 optical signals at
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX7-RX8 optical interfaces.
After processing, the module performs O/E conversion.
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. After processing, the module outputs
seven or six channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six channels or seven
channels of electrical signals, and then outputs six channels of client-side optical signals
through the TX1-TX6 or TX1-TX7 optical interfaces.
9-232

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
(Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 4X ODU1

Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
OTN
and mapping
module
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals.

On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10
Gbit/s.
l
Transmit direction
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four
channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane.
For Any signals, the module sends the signals to the client-side optical module.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-233
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals
interfaces.
NOTE
ClientLP1-ClientLP2, ClientLP3-ClientLP4, ClientLP5-ClientLP6, and ClientLP7-ClientLP8. For client
services at a rate greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI),
any group of these internal logical ports can access only one channel.
Signal Flow
Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
WDM side
O/E
E/O
Service
OTN
module
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
TX5
TX6
TX7
TX8
RX5
RX6
RX7
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s-2.5 Gbit/s and four ITUT Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
On the client side, eight pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 10
Gbit/s.
9-234

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
plan.
Transmit direction
module. The module performs operations, such as service cross-connection, encapsulation
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends the signals to the
WDM-side optical module.
After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out four channels
of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1
or CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the TX5- TX8
optical interfaces.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of Any optical signals at DWDM
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM standard wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX5-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module
performs O/E conversion.
The module performs operations such as OTU1 framing, decoding of FEC, demapping,
and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs four channels of Any signals.
optical interfaces.
NOTE
ClientLP1-ClientLP2, ClientLP3-ClientLP4, ClientLP5-ClientLP6, and ClientLP7-ClientLP8. For client
services at a rate greater than 1.25 Gbit/s (OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, FC200, FICON Express, HD-SDI),
any group of these internal logical ports can access only one channel.
Signal Flow
Figure 9-126 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TOM (electrical regeneration
board)
Non-cascading mode
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-235
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


WDM side
WDM side
RX1
RX2
Service
regeneration
module
Cross-connect
O/E
RX3
module
RX4
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Cascading mode
WDM side
WDM side
Cross-connect
RX7
O/E
module
Client-side
optical
module
Service
regeneration
module
E/O
TX7
WDM-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
The TOM board implements the regeneration of one/four channels of unidirectional optical
signals.
9-236

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only
RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
The wavelengths at the receive and transmit ends of the board are the OTU1 optical signals at
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical receiving module receives the optical signals to be regenerated through the RX1RX4 interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
The signal processing module performs service cross-connection, decoding, overhead
processing and encoding of signals. During the process, the reshaping, regenerating and retiming
based on electrical signals are performed, and the signals are encapsulated into OTN frames.
The signals are sent to the optical transmitting module after they have been encoded. After
performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 signals at DWDM standard
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
The optical signals are output through the TX1-TX4 interfaces.
Signal Flow
(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) in cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 8800
2X ODU0
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
9-237
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800

1X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal or between eight Any signals and
two ODU0 signals.
NOTE
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane
of the TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
processing module. The module performs operations, such as service cross-connection,
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module
sends out two channels of ODU0 signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. The
module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and
9-238

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the
client-side optical module.
interfaces.
Signal Flow
mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
Service
OTN
module
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
TX7
TX8
O/E
RX7
WDM-side
optical
module
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between six Any signals and one ODU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one ODU1
signal.
NOTE
In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as the WDM-side optical interfaces.
The transmit and receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TOM board. The transmit
direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TOM to the backplane of the
TOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Transmit direction
9-239
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The client-side optical module receives six or seven channels of the Any optical signals
from client equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of
OTU1 signals.
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical
optical signals, and then are output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of OTU1 optical signals at
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs seven or six
or TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.
9-240

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
(Any->ODU1) in cascading mode)
1X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between eight Any signals and one ODU1 signal.

NOTE
In the signal flow of the TOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
l
Transmit direction
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out one
channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping and decapsulation
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-241
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the client-side
optical module.
interfaces.
Signal Flow
mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1) in cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
Service
OTN
module
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
TX7
TX8
O/E
RX7
WDM-side
optical
module
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between six Any signals and one OTU1 signal, and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side, or implements conversion between seven Any signals and one OTU1.
NOTE
In cascade mode, only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1-RX6 or RX1-RX7 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
9-242

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs one channel of
OTU1 signals.
comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels of identical
optical signals, and then are output through the TX7-TX8 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives one or two channels of the OTU1 optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs seven or six
or TX1-TX6 optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]) in non-cascading mode)
OptiX OSN 8800
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-243
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

8X ODU0
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
9-244

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between eight Any Signals and eight ODU0 signals, or between eight Any signals and
four ODU1 signals.
NOTE
l
Transmit direction
equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces and performs O/E conversion.
encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module
sends out eight channels of ODU0 signals or four channels of ODU1 signals to the
backplane.
Receive direction
module performs operations such as ODU0 or ODU1 framing, demapping and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals to the
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-245
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

interfaces.
Signal Flow
Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
Service
OTN
module
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
TX7
TX8
O/E
RX7
WDM-side
optical
module
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between six Any signals and two OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between
four Any signals and two OTU1 signals, and the dual fed and selective receiving function on
the WDM side.
NOTE
On the client side, four or six pairs of optical interfaces can access services at a maximum rate of 5 Gbit/
s.
plan.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals from client
9-246

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

processing, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. After processing, the module outputs two
channels of OTU1 signals.
comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels or four channels
of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two channels or four channels of the OTU1 optical
signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX1-RX8 optical
FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs six or four
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the six or four channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs six channels or four channels of client-side optical
Signal Flow
(OTU1/Any->ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
4X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
9-247
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Converts between eight Any signals and four ODU1 signals, or converts between four OTU1
signals and four ODU1 signals.
NOTE
The OTU1 service can be input through ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives eight channels of Any optical signals or four OTU1
signals from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E
conversion.
After O/E conversion, the eight channels or four channels of electrical signals are sent to
the signal processing module. The module performs operations such as service crossconnection, encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing. After processing,
the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of Any signals or four OTU1 to the
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of Any electrical signals or ODU1
electrical signals, and then outputs eight channels or four channels of client-side optical
9-248

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1) in non-cascading mode)
4X ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between four OTU1 signals and four ODU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation.
NOTE
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four OTU1 signals from client equipment through
the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs O/E conversion.
and mapping processing, re-encapsulation and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out
four channels of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receive direction
9-249
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, demapping, re-encapsulation and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of OTU1 to the clientside optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of ODU1 electrical signals, and
then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the TX1-TX8 optical
interfaces.
Signal Flow
Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
WDM side
O/E
Service
OTN
module
RX6
TX1
TX2
TX6
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
E/O
TX7
TX8
O/E
RX7
WDM-side
optical
module
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between two OTU1 signals and two OTU1 signals through Any re-encapsulation, and
the dual fed and selective receiving function on the WDM side.
NOTE
plan.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the OTU1 optical signals from
9-250

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

re-encapsulation, OTN framing, and encoding of FEC. Then, the module outputs two
channels of OTU1 signals.
comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The optical signals are split into two channels or four channels
of identical optical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX8 optical interfaces.
l
Receive direction
standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths
that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the RX1-RX8 optical interfaces. Then, the module
performs O/E conversion.
FEC, demapping, re-encapsulation and decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs
two channels of OTU1 signals.
optical interfaces.
Signal Flow
Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1) in non-cascading mode)
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
WDM side
O/E
E/O
Service
OTN
module
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
O/E
WDM-side
optical
module
TX5
TX6
TX7
TX8
RX5
RX6
RX7
RX8
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
9-251
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Converts between OTU1 signal and OTU1 signal, or converts between six Any signals and two
OTU1 signals, or implements conversion between four Any signals and two OTU1 signals.
NOTE
plan.
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives six channels of the Any optical signals or four
channels of OTU1 from client equipment through the RX1-RX8 interfaces, and performs
O/E conversion.
module. The module performs operations such as service cross-connection, regeneration
of Any signals and the performance monitoring of SDH and Any signals. Then, the module
sends the signals to the WDM-side optical module.
After performing E/O conversion, the WDM-side optical module sends out two or four
channels of Any optical signals at DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T
G.694.1 or at CWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2 through the
TX1- TX8 optical interfaces.
Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives two or four channels of Any optical signals at
DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or at CWDM standard
The module performs operations such as the regeneration of Any signals, performance
monitoring of SDH and Any signals and service cross-connection. Then, the module
outputs four channels of Any signals.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of the four or six channels of
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
9-252

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Figure 9-137 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (Application 2 of ODU1
Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)
8X ODU0
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals.

NOTE
This scenario is only supported in the OptiX OSN 8800.

l
Transmit direction
and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of
ODU0 signals to the backplane.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-253
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Receive direction
processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of four OTU1 to the client-side
optical module.
interfaces.
Signal Flow
Figure 9-138 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN52TOM (Application 3 of ODU1
Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0) in non-cascading mode)
8X ODU0
Client side
RX1
RX2
O/E
8
RX8
TX1
TX2
E/O
TX8
Client-side
optical
module
Crossconnect
module
Service
encapsulation
and mapping
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Converts between four OTU1 signals and eight ODU0 signals through Any re-encapsulation.
NOTE
This scenario is only supported in the OptiX OSN 8800.
9-254

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Transmit direction
and mapping processing, re-encapsulation and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out
eight channels of ODU0 signals to the backplane.
Receive direction
module performs operations such as ODU0 framing, demapping, re-encapsulation and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out eight channels of four OTU1 to the
interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of the standard optical signals.
standard optical signals.

WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of standard optical signals.
standard optical signals.

module, OTN processing module, service processing module, and service regeneration
module.
Implements the cross-connection and pass-through between the client-side signals and
the WDM-side signals of the board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-255
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Regenerates Any signals and monitors SDH and Any signals in two directions.
Service regeneration module
Implements the FEC decoding/encoding and overhead processing of OTU1 signals.
Monitors the performance of WDM-side services.
l

Power supply module

9.9.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board.

Figure 9-139 shows the front panel of the TOM board.
9-256

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-139 Front panel of the TOM board
TOM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
TOM
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are sixteen optical interfaces on the front panel of the TOM board. Table 9-94 lists the
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-257
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-94 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TOM board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX8
LC
Transmits the service signal.
RX1-RX8
LC
Receives the service signal.
Laser Hazard Level

9.9.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TOM board.
Table 9-95 shows the valid slots for the TN11TOM board.
Table 9-96 shows the valid slots for the TN52TOM board.
Table 9-95 Valid slots for the TN11TOM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 9-96 Valid slots for the TN52TOM board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the NMS
9-258

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-97 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TOM displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
10
NOTE
Description of NM ports
Figure 9-140 to Figure 9-144 show the application model of the TN11TOM board. Figure
9-145 to Figure 9-156 show the application model of the TN52TOM board. Table 9-98 and
Table 9-99 describe the meaning of each port.
The TOM board has two working modes, that is, Cascading mode and Non-cascading mode.
You can select a proper mode by using the U2000 according to the actual application
requirements. The difference between the two modes lies in the ports of the board and the crossconnection routes. For the TN11TOM, in Cascading mode, there are two modes of the ClientLP
port. In non-cascading mode, there are four modes of the ClientLP port. For the TN52TOM, in
cascading mode, there are four modes of the ClientLP port. In non-cascading mode, there are
eight modes of the ClientLP port.
Figure 9-140 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any>ODU1))
11TOM
52NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: Client-side services
: WDM-side services
: Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS
: Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-259
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-141 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode
(Any->ODU1->OTU1))
Converts between six Any signals and one ODU1 signal and the dual fed and selective receiving
function on the WDM side.
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
10(RX8/TX8)
8(RX6/TX6)
: WDM-side services
Converts between seven Any signals and one ODU1 signal.

11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
9-260

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-142 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode
(Any->ODU1))
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
52NS2
201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-1
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-2
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-3
51(ODU1LP/ODU1LP)-4
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
In this case, the 201 (ClientLP1/ ClientLP1) and 203 (ClientLP3/ ClientLP3) ports can access a maximum
of four services, and the 202 (ClientLP2/ ClientLP2) and 204 (ClientLP4/ ClientLP4) ports can access a
maximum of two services.
Figure 9-143 Port diagram of the TN11TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line
Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1))
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
7(RX5/TX5)
4(RX2/TX2)
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
9(RX7/TX7)
6(RX4/TX4)
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-261
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1))
11TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
7(RX5/TX5)
4(RX2/TX2)
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3)
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
9(RX7/TX7)
6(RX4/TX4)
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
In cascading mode, the TOM implements the electrical regeneration of one channel of OTU1 signal. Only
RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical interfaces.
Figure 9-145 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary Mode (Any>ODU0[->ODU1]))
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1
52TOM
52NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0

52TOM
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
1(IN/OUT)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
9-262

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the
two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection
from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202
(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time.
Figure 9-146 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary-Line mode
(Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
6(RX4/TX4)
10(RX8/TX8)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1 port is the same as that of a route of the ClientLP2 port, the
two routes cannot be configured with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection
from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202
(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not supported at the same time.
Figure 9-147 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any>ODU1))
52TOM
52NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-263
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-148 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode
(Any->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
6(RX4/TX4)
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
10(RX8/TX8)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
Figure 9-149 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary Mode
(Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))
OptiX OSN 8800: Any->ODU0
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
52NS2
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
1(IN/OUT)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800: Any->ODU0->ODU1
9-264

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
52NS2
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
1(IN/OUT)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that
of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured
with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not
supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is
configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same
time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule
applies.
Mode: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
7(RX5/TX5)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
When the number of a route of the ClientLP1, ClientLP3, ClientLP5, or ClientLP7 port is the same as that
of a route of the ClientLP2, ClientLP4, ClientLP6, or ClientLP8 port, the two routes cannot be configured
with cross-connections at the same time. That is, when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 201(ClientLP1/
ClientLP1)-1 is configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 is not
supported at the same time; when the cross-connection from RX/TX to 203(ClientLP3/ClientLP3)-1 is
configured, the cross-connection from RX/TX to 204(ClientLP4/ClientLP4)-1 is not supported at the same
time. For other port groups, that is, ClientLP5&ClientLP6 and ClientLP7&ClientLP8, the same rule
applies.
The client-side optical interfaces and WDM-side optical interfaces can be chosen as required.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-265
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-151 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1/
Any->ODU1))
OptiX OSN 8800/OptiX OSN 6800:
A
52NS2
A
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
1(IN/OUT)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
: Working service direction
: Virtual channel
OptiX OSN 3800:

52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
8(RX6/TX6)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
Particularly, in the OptiX OSN 3800, inter-board ODU1 cross-connections between the 52TOM and 52NS2
boards, if required, should be configured in such a manner that the ClientLP3-1 port on the 52TOM board
is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-3 port on the 52NS2 board, the ClientLP5-1 port on the 52TOM board
is cross-connected to the ODU1LP1-2 port on the 52NS2 board.
9-266

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-152 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary Mode: OTU1>ODU1->ODU0)
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
5(RX3/TX3)
52NS2
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
The client-side optical interfaces can be chosen according to the system plan.
The OTU1 signals are accessed on the client side.
Figure 9-153 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary Mode: OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0)
52TOM
52NS2
237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-1
3(RX1/TX1)
5(RX3/TX3)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-267
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-154 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1>ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1))
52TOM
52NS2
3(RX1/TX1)
5(RX3/TX3)
1(IN/OUT)
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
Figure 9-155 Port diagram of the TN52TOM (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode
(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
52TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
7(RX5/TX5)
9(RX7/TX7)
5(RX3/TX3)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
plan.
Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1))
OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
9-268

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
7(RX5/TX5)
4(RX2/TX2)
8(RX6/TX6)
5(RX3/TX3)
9(RX7/TX7)
6(RX4/TX4)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
: WDM-side services
TOM
3(RX1/TX1)
7(RX5/TX5)
8(RX6/TX6)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
9(RX7/TX7)
10(RX8/TX8)
: WDM-side services
NOTE
plan.
Table 9-98 Meaning of NM port of the TOM board (Cascading mode)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a
ClientLP1/ClientLP2
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1 to 8.

9-269
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Port Name
Meaning
ODU1LP1
Internal logical port. The optical paths are numbered 1.
ODU0LP1
a: In different application scenarios, RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8 of the TOM can be used as clientside interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.
Table 9-99 Meaning of NM port of the TOM board (Non-cascading mode)

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8a
TN11TOM:
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP3
TN52TOM:
l ClientLP1
l ClientLP2
l ClientLP5
l ClientLP6
TN11TOM:
l ClientLP2
l ClientLP4
TN52TOM:
l ClientLP3
l ClientLP4
l ClientLP7
l ClientLP8
AnyLP1-AnyLP12
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP4
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4
a: In different application scenarios, eight pairs of optical interfaces of the TOM can be used
as client-side interfaces or WDM-side interfaces.
NOTE
Only the display of NM port in cascading mode is different from that in non-cascading mode. The
configuration in cascading mode is similar to the configuration in non-cascading mode.
9-270

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Configuration
If the TOM board is used to transmit services, set Board working Mode in Configuration >
WDM interfaces on the U2000. The valid values of the board mode field are Cascading and
Non-cascading.
l
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 1

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1
service is implemented through the cross-connect module in cascading mode, as shown in
Figure 9-157
Figure 9-157 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM board (scenario 1)

Other board
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
The internal cross-connection of the board, w hich needs to be configured on the NMS
The client side of the TOM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of other boards,
w hich needs to be configured on the NMS


During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Tthen the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in cascading mode, as shown in Figure 9-158

Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
TOM
The straight-through of the board, w hich does not need to be configured on the NMS
Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-271
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. The cross-connect grooming of ODU1
service is implemented through the cross-connect module in non-cascading mode, as shown
in Figure 9-159.

Other board
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
WDM side
TOM
The internal cross-connection of the board, which needs to be configured on the NMS
which needs to be configured on the NMS


During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in non-cascading mode, as shown in Figure 9-160.

WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
5(TX3/RX3)-1
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
6(TX4/RX4)-1
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TOM scenario 5 (Non-cascading mode: ODU1

Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1->OTU1))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the Any crossconnection between the RX/TX and ClientLP ports. Then the tributary & line crossconnections can be achieved in non-cascading mode, as shown in Figure 9-161.
9-272

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


WDM side
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
51(ODU1LP1/ODU1LP1)
52(ODU1LP2/ODU1LP2)
8(TX6/RX6)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
53(ODU1LP3/ODU1LP3)
9(TX7/RX7)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
54(ODU1LP4/ODU1LP4)
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 1 (Cascading mode: ODU0 Tributary

Mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Cascading.
Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]).
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM
board. Then, create the following cross-connections:
Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the TOM board and
ODU0LP port of the other boards to achieve grooming of ODU0 services in OptiX OSN
8800, as shown (2) in Figure 9-162.
Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and
6800/3800, as shown (2) in Figure 9-162.
NOTE
When creating the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected. For
Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1.
Two channels with the same type of services at the ClientLP1 and ClientLP2 ports respectively must
not be used at the same time. For example, if the 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1 service type is
configured, the 202(ClientLP2/ClientLP2)-1 service type must not be configured.

OptiX OSN 8800
WDM side
Other board
Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Other board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-273
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Other board
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
3
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
TOM

Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 2 (Cascading mode: ODU0

Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1>OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections:
board, as shown (1) in Figure 9-163.
Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8
of the TOM board, as shown (2) in Figure 9-163.

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
3
9(TX7/RX7)-1
WDM side
10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
TOM
9-274

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side
3
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-2
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 3 (Cascading mode: ODU1 Tributary

Mode (Any->ODU1))
Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1). Create the
cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board. Then,
create the following cross-connections:
ODU1LP port of the other boards to implement the cross-connect grooming of ODU1
services, as shown (2) in Figure 9-164.

Other board
Client side
WDM side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM

Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 4 (Cascading mode: ODU1

Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1))
Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1>OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections:
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-275
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX7/TX7 or RX8/TX8
of the TOM board, as shown (2) in Figure 9-165.
Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
2
TOM
Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM

Tributary Mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1]))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU0[>ODU1]). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of
the TOM board. Then, create the following cross-connections, as shown in Figure 9-166.
8800, as shown (3) in Figure 9-166.
Create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and
6800/3800, as shown (4) in Figure 9-166.
NOTE
When configuring the internal cross-connection of ODU0 signal, only the first route can be selected.
For Example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1.

OptiX OSN 8800
9-276

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WDM side
Other board
Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Other board

Other board
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
WDM side
WDM side
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
162(ODU0LP2
/ODU0LP2)-1
163(ODU0LP3
/ODU0LP3)-1
164(ODU0LP4
/ODU0LP4)-1

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Tributary-Line Mode: Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
9-277
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any>ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following cross-connections:
Create the cross-connection between the internal ODU1LP1 and RX/TX of the TOM
NOTE
In this scenario, all the eight pairs of the optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either
the client-side or the WDM-side interfaces. If six Any services are input, two OTU1 services are
output. If four Any services are input, two OTU1 services are output for dual transmitting and
selective receiving.

Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1
161(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
162(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-1
WDM side
51(ODU1LP1/
ODU1LP1)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
52(ODU1LP2/
ODU1LP2)-1
162(ODU0LP1/
ODU0LP1)-2
TOM
Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 7 (Non-cascading: ODU1 Tributary

Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to Application 1 of ODU1 Tributary Mode
(OTU1/Any->ODU1). Then, create the following cross-connections:
create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ClientLP port on the TOM board and
the ODU1LP port on the TN52NS2 boards to implement grooming of ODU1 services,
defined as (2) in Figure 9-168.
NOTE
When the internal cross-connection of ODU1 signal is configured, only the first route can be selected.
For example: 201(ClientLP1/ClientLP1)-1. Only ClientLP1/ClientLP3/ClientLP5/ClientLP7 can be
used.
Each ClientLP logical port can access a maximum of 2.5 Gbit/s signals.
9-278

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


WDM side
Other board
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
WDM side


Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1))
(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1). Then, create the following cross-connections:
Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TN52TOM board, as
shown (3) in Figure 9-169.
create the ODU1 cross-connection between the ODU0LP port of the TOM board and
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-279
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Other board
Client
side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
201(ClientLP1
/ClientLP1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
203(ClientLP3
/ClientLP3)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
205(ClientLP5
/ClientLP5)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
203(ClientLP7
/ClientLP7)-1
TOM
3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-3
244(Any LP12/Any LP12)-8

244(Any LP12/Any LP12)-8
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
WDM
side
WDM
side
4
162(ODU0LP2
/ODU0LP2)-1
163(ODU0LP3
/ODU0LP3)-1
164(ODU0LP4
/ODU0LP4)-1

Cross-connection diagram of the TN52TOM scenario 9 (Non-cascading: ODU1 TributaryLine Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to Application 1 of ODU1 Tributary-Line
Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1). Then, create the following
cross-connections:
Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown
(3) in Figure 9-170.
NOTE
In this scenario, all the eight pairs of optical interfaces on the TOM board can function as either the
client-side or the WDM-side interfaces.
9-280

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
201(ClientLP1
/ClientLP1)-1
203(ClientLP3
/ClientLP3)-1
205(ClientLP5
/ClientLP5)-1
203(ClientLP7
/ClientLP7)-1
3 237(AnyLP5/AnyLP5)-3
161(ODU0LP1
/ODU0LP1)-1
162(ODU0LP2
/ODU0LP2)-1
51(ODU1LP1
/ODU1LP1)-1
52(ODU1LP2
/ODU1LP2)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
4
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM

Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1))
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, select Noncascading. Set the mode of the ClientLP port to Application 2 of ODU1 Tributary-Line
Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)). Then, create the following cross-connections:

OTU1->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
WDM side
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Any->ODU1->OTU1 mode.
Client side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
WDM side
9(TX7/RX7)-1
3
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM
Any->ODU1->OTU1 dual fed and selective receiving mode.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-281
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
WDM side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
4(TX2/RX2)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
6(TX4/RX4)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
8(TX6/RX6)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
10(TX8/RX8)-1
TOM

Mode: OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
(OTU1->ODU1->ODU0). Then, create the following cross-connections:

Other board
Client
side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
1
WDM
side
WDM
side
2
Other board

Mode: OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)
(OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0). Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/
TX and ClientLP ports of the TOM board.
9-282

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Create the internal cross-connections of the Any service on the TOM board, as shown
(3) in Figure 9-173.
Create the ODU0 cross-connection between the AnyLP port of the TOM board and
Other board
Client
side
3(TX1/RX1)-1
1
5(TX3/RX3)-1
7(TX5/RX5)-1
9(TX7/RX7)-1
TOM
WDM
side
WDM
side
4
Other board
9.9.8 TOM Parameters

For parameters of TOM, refer to Table 9-100.
Table 9-100 TOM parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

9-283
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, Any, DVB-ASI,

SDI, ESCON, FC-100,
FC-200, FDDI, FE,
FICON, FICON
Express, GE, GE(GFPT), HD-SDI, OC-3,
0C-12, OC-48, OTU-1,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16

NOTE
Only the TN52TOM supports this
parameter.

Default: None
Client Side Service
Bearer Rate (M)
100 - 2200
Default: 0

NOTE
parameter.

information.
Off, On
Laser Status
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
9-284
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled

pass-through (LPT).
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled

the line side.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
information.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

wavelength.

9-285
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600

Ethernet services.
Default: 9600
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

information.
Disabled.
NOTE
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
9-286
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

board resides.
information.
commissioning.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Board Mode
Cascading Mode, Noncascading Mode

Default: Noncascading Mode
NOTE
parameter.

Board Working mode
Cascading, NonCascading
Default: NonCascading

NOTE
parameter.
See Board Working mode for more

information.
Port Working Mode
In Non-Cascading
mode, nine working
modes are supported.a
In Cascading mode,
five working modes are
supported.b
This parameter is used to set the working

mode of the interface on the board
according to the actual application
scenario and service mapping trail. For
the configuration methods of different
application scenarios of the TOM board,
see the Configuration Guide.
a: Working modes supported in Non-Cascading mode are as follows:

l ODU0 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
l ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1)
l ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->ODU0)
l ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0)
l ODU1 Tributary Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1)
l ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1->ODU1->Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
l ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1->OTU1)
l NONE Mode
b: Working modes supported in Cascading mode are as follows:
l ODU0 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU0[->ODU1])
l ODU0 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU0->ODU1->OTU1)
l ODU1 Tributary Mode (Any->ODU1)
l ODU1 Tributary-Line Mode (Any->ODU1->OTU1)
l NONE Mode
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-287
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.9.9 Specifications of the TOM

NOTE

NOTE
listed above apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
9-288
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27

NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals. The specifications
listed below apply to FC200 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals. The specifications
listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when
the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-289
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask
9-290
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
1.25Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
might be slightly different from these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI.
NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28

9-291
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27

NOTE
2.67Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
STM-16, OC-48 signals. The actual values might be slightly different from these specifications when the
accessed signals are OTU1, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120
9-292
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

km

Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Specifications of SDI Optical Modules on the Client Side

Table 9-105 Specifications of SDI optical Modules on the client side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video
eSFP)-20 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
20
Service rate
Gbit/s
1.5

nm
1290 to 1330
dBm
dBm
-7
dB
nm
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
nm
1260 to 1620
dBm
-22
dBm
-0
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

9-293
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
80

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
nm
1471 to 1611
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.959.1 - compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1270 to 1620
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
9-294
Value
DWDM)-120 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Optical Module Type

DWDM)-120 km

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
nm
12.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask


Receiver type
APD
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Table 9-106 Specifications of SDH optical modules on the DWDM side

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Line code
format
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ

9-295
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
9-296
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11TOM: 3.1 lb. (1.4 kg)
TN52TOM: 3.3 lb. (1.5 kg)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TOM
55
60
TN52TOM
81
89.1
9.10 TQM
TQM: 4 x multi-rate tributary service processing board
The available functional versions of the TQM board are TN11 and TN12.
9.10.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQM board converts between four optical signals at the rate
between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical
signal through cross-connection.
The TQM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
9.10.5 Front Panel
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-297
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board.
9.10.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TQM board.
9.10.8 TQM Parameters
9.10.9 Specifications of the TQM

Table 9-107 lists the version description of the TQM board.
Table 9-107 Version description of the TQM board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
Only the TN12TQM supports the OTU1/HD-SDI/SDI/FDDI
services, PRBS function, Test frame and Tributary SNCP
protection. For details, see 9.10.3 Functions and Features.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see 9.10.9
Specifications of the TQM.
Replacement
Table 9-108 lists the substitution rules for the TQM board.
Table 9-108 Substitution rules of the TQM board
9-298
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11TQM
TN12TQM
The TN12TQM can be created as TN11TQM on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12TQM functions as the
TN11TQM.
TN12TQM
None

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.10.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQM board converts between four optical signals at the rate
between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s and four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical
signal through cross-connection.
For the position of the TQM board in the WDM system, see Figure 9-174.
Figure 9-174 Position of the TQM board in the WDM system
G.694.1
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
G.694.1
MUX
TQM
NS2
1
NS2
DMUX
4
Client side
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TQM
4
WDM side
Client side
NOTE

The TQM board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 9-109 Functions and features of the TQM board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts four optical signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s
into four client-side electrical signals or one ODU1 electrical signal and sends
the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection.

9-299
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only the TN12TQM supports SDI, HD-SDI, OTU1 and FDDI services.
The TQM supports both GE electrical signal and GE optical signal.
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800:

l Supports the cross-connection of four signals at the rate between 100 Mbit/
s and 2.5 Gbit/s between the boards in paired slots.
l Supports the cross-connection of one ODU1 signal or two GE signals
between the TQM and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired
slot.
OptiX OSN 3800:
2.5 Gbit/s or one ODU1 signals from one board of the mesh group
(consisting of four boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh
group.
OTN
function
l Up to four channels of client-side service signals can be mapped and

multiplexed into ODU1 signals. The greatest bandwidth must be less than
the ITU-T G.709.
9-300

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
PRBS
function
TN11TQM: not supported.

TN12TQM: supports the PRBS function on the client side.

NOTE
is STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, or STM-16/OC-48.
LPT
function
is FE or GE.
Test frame
TN11TQM: not supported

TN12TQM: supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme
l Supports SW SNCP.
l Supports the Tributary SNCP protection (TN12TQM).
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported

9-301
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
(FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
NOTE
Only the TN12TQM supports the following standards and
protocols.

Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
9-302

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TQM board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 9-175 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQM.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-303
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-175 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQM

4 X 100 Mbit/s -2.5 Gbit/s / 1X ODU1

Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
OTN
Service
Cross-connect encapsulation and processing
module
module
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQM board accesses Any optical signals (Any optical signals at a rate
ranging from 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) and GE electrical signals.
NOTE
NOTE
electrical signals.
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1, RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
In the signal flow of the TQM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQM to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
9-304

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

and mapping processing, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of
Any signals or one channel of ODU1 signals to the backplane.
l
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives the electrical signals sent from the backplane. Then,
If the signals are Any signals, they are sent to the client-side optical module.
If the signals are ODU1 signals, the module performs operations such as ODU1 framing,
demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out four channels of
Any signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of Any electrical signals, and
interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal

OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQM
and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane.
The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are Any and ODU1 signals.
Encapsulates multiple channels of Any signals and maps the signals into the ODU1
Frames ODU1 signals and processes overheads in ODU1 signals.

l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Power supply module

9-305
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.10.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board.

Figure 9-176 shows the front panel of the TQM board.
Figure 9-176 Front panel of the TQM board
TQM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TQM
Indicators
9-306

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQM board. Table 9-110 lists the
Table 9-110 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQM board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX4
LC

RX1-RX4
LC

NOTE
It is recommended to change RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 optical interfaces to electrical interfaces only.
Laser Hazard Level

9.10.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TQM board.
Table 9-111 shows the valid slots for the TQM board.
Table 9-111 Valid slots for the TQM board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

9-307
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Table 9-112 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQM board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 9-177 shows the application model of the TQM board. Table 9-113 describes the
Figure 9-177 Port diagram of the TQM board
4 x GE/Any/OTU1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Client side
Backplane
ODU1
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module

Indicates cross-connections that need to be configured on the NM. These crossconnections are used to groom GE/Any/OTU1/ODU1 signals from other boards.
NOTE
TN11TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (LP/LP)-1 to 201 (LP/LP)-4.
TN12TQM: The optical paths of internal logical port are 201 (ClientLP/ClientLP)-1 to 201 (ClientLP/
ClientLP)-4.
9-308

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-113 Meaning of NM port of the TQM board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
ClientLP

If the TQM board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
can be created.
Create the cross-connection between the internal RX/TX and ClientLP ports of the TQM
board (create the internal straight-through and cross-connection of the board), as shown
by (1) and (2) in Figure 9-178.
Create the cross-connection between the RX/TX port of the TQM board and the
services accessed from the client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the
port of the TQM board, as shown by (4) in Figure 9-178. (The GE/Any/OTU1 services
accessed from the client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of
the TQM board for protection and inter-board service convergence.)
NOTE
Only the first optical path of ClientLP port supports OTU1 services.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-309
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-178 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board

Client side
Client side
Other board
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
4
2
1
WDM side
TQM
1

The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the client side of the
TQM board
3
4

TN11TQM/TN12TQM
9-310
cross-connection between the ClientLP port of the board and ODU1LP port of other boards
(or IN/OUT port of the TN11NS2 board) to implement the cross-connect grooming of
ODU1 services, as shown in Figure 9-179.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-179 Cross-connection diagram of the TQM board

WDM side
Other board
Client side
TQM
The client side of the TQM board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards

receive timeslots.
l
the transmit end.
For each TQM board, the number of timeslots occupied by all services should not exceed
16.
For FC200, FICON Express, OC-48, STM-16, OTU1, and HD-SDI services, timeslots can
be configured only in channel 1 of the TQM board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Service Type
Number of Timeslots
GE
FE
OTU1
16
STM-1
STM-4
STM-16
16
9-311
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Service Type
Number of Timeslots
OC-3
OC-12
OC-48
16
FC100
FC200
12
FICON
FICON Express
12
HD-SDI
11
DVB-ASI
SDI
ESCON
FDDI
9.10.8 TQM Parameters

For parameters of the TQM, refer to Table 9-114.
Table 9-114 TQM parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
9-312


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Type
None, Any, DVBASI,SDI, ESCON,

FC-100, FC-200,
FDDI, FE, FICON,
FICON Express, GE,
GE(GFP-T), HD-SDI,
OC-3, OC-12, OC-48,
STM-1, STM-4,
STM-16, OTU-1

NOTE
Only the TN12TQM supports Any, SDI,
FDDI, HD-SDI, and OTU-1 services.
Default: None
Client Side Service
Bearer Rate (M)
100 - 2200
Default: 0

NOTE
Only TN12TQM supports this parameter.

information.
Off, On
Laser Status
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Client Mode, OTN

Mode
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600
Default: 9600
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

information.
pass-through (LPT).
the line side.
Ethernet services.

9-313
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Ethernet Working
Mode
Auto-Negotiation,
1000M Full-Duplex

information.
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

to Disabled.
NOTE
Only available for TN12TQM.
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

board resides.
information.
NOTE
Only available for the TN12TQM.
9.10.9 Specifications of the TQM

NOTE
9-314

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Specifications of SDH/SONET Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30

9-315
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Eye pattern
mask
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
G.957-compliant

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27
Specifications of GE Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE
NOTE
signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
9-316
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Target
distance
km
0.5
10
40
80

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate
1000 BASELX-10 km
1000 BASELX-40 km
1000 BASEZX-80 km

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
830 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-2.5
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-9.5
-11.5
-4.5
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
Eye pattern
mask

Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
PIN
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
770 to 860
1270 to 1355
1270 to 1355
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-17
-19
-20
-22
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-3
-3
NOTE
Std 802.3.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-317
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The 1.25Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
The 2.67Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
signals.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
Target distance
km
40
80

range
nm
1471 to 1611
1471 to 1611
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Central wavelength
deviation
nm
6.5
6.5
Maximum -20 dB
spectral width
nm
1.0
1.0
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant
9-318
Receiver type
PIN
APD
range
nm
1270 to 1620
1270 to 1620
dBm
-19
-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km

(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
Minimum receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
-27
Specifications of eSFP DWDM Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE
The 2.67Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
accessed signals are FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
120
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00
GHz
12.5

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.5

width
nm
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
2400
Eye pattern mask


9-319
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
km

Receiver type
APD
range
nm
NA
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight
l
TN11TQM: 1.2 kg (2.64 lb.)
TN12TQM: 1.1 kg (2.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TQM
50.3
57.6
TN12TQM
25
27.5
9.11 TQS
TQS: 4 x STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 tributary service processing board
Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is, TN11.
9.11.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQS board implements conversion between four STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals.
The TQS board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
9-320

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
9.11.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board.
9.11.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TQS board.
9.11.8 TQS Parameters
9.11.9 Specifications of the TQS

Only one functional version of the TQS board is available, that is, TN11.
9.11.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQS board implements conversion between four STM-16/
OC-48/OTU1 optical signals and four ODU1 electrical signals.
For the position of the TQS board in the WDM system, see Figure 9-180.
Figure 9-180 Position of the TQS board in the WDM system
G.694.1
1
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
MUX
Client side
NS2
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
DMUX
NS2
TQS
4
G.694.1
4
WDM side
STM-16/
OC-48/
OTU1
TQS
4
Client side

The TQS board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer, and to provide
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-321
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-119 Functions and features of the TQS board

Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts four STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals into four ODU1 signals

and sends the signals to the backplane for further cross-connection. The
Client-side
service type
Crossconnect
capabilities
OptiX OSN 6800: Supports the cross-connection of four ODU1 signals

between the TQS and the cross-connect board or the board in the paired slot.
OTN
function
l Supports mapping each channel of 2.5G signals into the ODU1 signals at
the ODU1 interface of the backplane.
OptiX OSN 3800: Supports the grooming of four ODU1 signals from one
board of the mesh group (consisting of four boards) to the other three boards
belonging to the mesh group.

the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709.
ESC
function
service signal.
FEC
encoding
Adopts FEC encoding compliant with the ITU-T G.975.
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
ALS
function
PRBS
function
Not supported
LPT function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme


9-322

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
eSFP

side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
ITU-T G.707
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TQS board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
Figure 9-181 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQS.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-323
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-181 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQS

ODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
O/E
E/O
Cross-connect
module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side OTN
procssing module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQS board can access the following optical signals:
l
In the signal flow of the TQS board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQS to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as OTU1 framing and FEC decoding with OTU1 signals,
and performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN framing
with STM-16/OC-48 signals. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU1 signals
to the backplane for grooming.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU1 electrical signals sent from the backplane.
The module performs operations such as ODU1 framing, framing of OTU1 signals,
9-324

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

encoding of FEC, demapping, and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends out
four channels of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 signals to the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of STM-16/OC-48/OTU1
electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of client-side optical signals through the
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of STM-16/OC-48/
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from four channels of the internal
electrical signals to STM-16/OC-48/OTU1 optical signals.

mapping module, client-side OTN processing module, and OTN processing module.
OptiX OSN 6800: Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the TQS
and the board in the paired slot or the cross-connect board through the backplane.
Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group (consisting of four
boards) to the other three boards belonging to the mesh group through the
backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals.
OptiX OSN 3800: Grooms the electrical signals from one board of the mesh group
through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU1 signals.
ODU1 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
Frames ODU1/OTU1 signals, processes overheads in ODU1/OTU1 signals, and
performs FEC encoding and decoding of the OTU1 signals.

l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Power supply module

9-325
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board.

Figure 9-182 shows the front panel of the TQS board.
Figure 9-182 Front panel of the TQS board
TQS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TQS
Indicators
9-326

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQS board. Table 9-120 lists the type
Table 9-120 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQS board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

9.11.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TQS board.
Table 9-121 shows the valid slots for the TQS board.
Table 9-121 Valid slots for the TQS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-327
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-122 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQS board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 9-183 shows the application model of the TQS board. Table 9-123 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 9-183 Port diagram of the TQS board
Backplane
201(LP1/LP1)-1
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Client side
4 x ODU1
202(LP2/LP2)-1
203(LP3/LP3)-1
204(LP4/LP4)-1
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module

Table 9-123 Meaning of NM port of the TQS board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4
LP1-LP4
Internal logical ports. All optical paths are numbered 1.
If the TQS board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
9-328

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The corresponding channels of the four LP ports are respectively connected to the RX1/
TX1-RX4/TX4. There is no need for configuration on the U2000.
cross-connection between the LP port of the TQS board and the optical channels of the
ODU1LP port of other boards (or the IN/OUT port on the NS2 board) to implement the
cross-connect grooming of ODU1 services, as shown Figure 9-184.
Figure 9-184 Cross-connection diagram of the TQS board

WDM side
Other board
Client side
201(LP1/LP1)-1
201(LP1/LP1)-2
TQS
201(LP1/LP1)-3
201(LP1/LP1)-4
The client side of the TQS board are cross-connected to the WDM side of
other boards

9.11.8 TQS Parameters

For parameters of TQS, refer to Table 9-124.
Table 9-124 TQS parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

9-329
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Service Type
None, OC-48, OTU-1,

STM-16
Default: OTU-1
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

information.
to Disabled.
NOTE
9-330

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG

board resides.
information.
Default: None
9.11.9 Specifications of the TQS

NOTE
Specifications of SDH Optical Module at the Client Side

NOTE
This module is used to access STM-16 and OTU1 signals. The specifications listed below apply to STM-16
OTU1 signals.

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
SLM
Target
distance
km
15
40
80
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580

Operating
wavelength
range
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
nm
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360

9-331
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-10
-5
-2
-2
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
NA
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.957-compliant
9-332
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
APD
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1270 to 1580
1270 to 1580
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Receiver
sensitivity
dBm
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-3
-9
-9
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-27

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access STM-16, OC-48, OTU1 signals. The
specifications listed below apply to OTU1 signals. The actual values may be slightly different from these
specifications when the accessed signals are STM-16, OC-48.
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
CWDM)-80 km
Line code format
NRZ
Target distance
km
80

nm
1471 to 1611
dBm
dBm
dB
8.2
nm
6.5
nm
1.0

ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask
G.957-compliant

Receiver type
APD
nm
1270 to 1620
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value
DWDM)-120 km

NRZ
9-333
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
DWDM)-120 km
Target distance
km
120

THz
192.1 to 196.0
dBm
dBm
dB
8.5
GHz
12.5
nm

ratio
dB
30
Eye pattern mask

OTU1 services.)

Receiver type
APD
dBm
-28
dBm
-9
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
9-334
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TQS
43
47.3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.12 TQX
TQX: 4 x 10 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
The available functional versions of the TQX board are TN11 and TN52.
9.12.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQX board converts between four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and four ODU2 electrical signals through crossconnection.
The TQX board enables cross-connections at the electrical layer.
The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
9.12.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board.
9.12.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TQX board.
9.12.8 TQX Parameters
9.12.9 Specifications of the TQX

Table 9-128 lists the version description of the TQX board.
Table 9-128 Version description of the TQX board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Item
Description
Functional
version

9-335
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Description
Difference
Function:
l The TN52TQX board supports OTU2/OTU2e service on the client side.
The TN11TQX board does not support the service. For details, see
9.12.3 Functions and Features.
Specification:
l The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For
details, see 9.12.9 Specifications of the TQX.
The TN52TQX and TN11TQX boards are not interchangeable.
Replacement
9.12.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TQX board converts between four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals and four ODU2 electrical signals through crossconnection.
For the position of the TQX board in the WDM system, see Figure 9-185 and Figure 9-186.
Figure 9-185 Position of the TN11TQX board in the WDM system
G.694.1
4
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
MUX
DMUX
NQ2
TQX
4
G.694.1
4
TQX
NQ2
4 DMUX
Client side
MUX
WDM side
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
Client side
WDM side
Figure 9-186 Position of the TN52TQX board in the WDM system

G.694.1
10GE LAN
1
10GE WAN
STM-64
TQX
OC-192
OTU2
4
OTU2e
Client side
4
1
G.694.1
MUX
DMUX
4
1
NQ2
1
TQX
NQ2
4 DMUX
WDM side
MUX
4
WDM side
10GE LAN
10GE WAN
STM-64
OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
Client side

The TQX board enables cross-connections at the electrical layer.
9-336

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 9-129 Functions and features of the TQX board
Function
and Feature
Description
Basic
function
Converts four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e

optical signals into four ODU2 electrical signals. The reverse process is
similar.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only the TN52TQX supports OTU2 and OTU2e services.
The processing of the 10GE WAN service and the STM-64 service is the same.
STM-64 service on the U2000.
Crossconnect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of four ODU2/ODU2e signals between the

TQX and the cross-connect board through the backplane.
OTN
function
l Supports mapping each channel of 10G signals into the ODU2/ODU2e

signals at the ODU2/ODU2e interface of the backplane.
l Supports overhead processing by referring to the ITU-T G.709. The
mapping process is compliant with ITU-T G.709 and G.Sup43.
l Supports PM function for ODU2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Alarm and
performance
event
monitoring
ALS
function
PRBS
function
LPT function
is 10GE LAN.
Test frame
Supported
Supported by the TN52TQX

NOTE

9-337
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and Feature
Description
Protection
scheme

XFP
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3ae
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control
Figure 9-187 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TQX.
9-338

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-187 Functional modules and signal flow of the TQX

ODU2/ODU2e
4
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
RX4
O/E
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
Client-side
optical
module
OTN
processing
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the TQX board can access the following optical signals:
l

NOTE
Only TN52TQX supports the OTU2/ OTU2e optical signals.
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TQX board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TQX to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-339
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

processing, and OTN framing. After processing, the module sends out four channels of
ODU2/ODU2e signals to the backplane for grooming.
l
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the
cross-connection board through the backplane. The module performs operations such as
ODU2/ODU2e framing, demapping and decapsulation processing. Then, the module sends
out four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals to
the client-side optical module.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion of 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals, and then outputs four channels of clientside optical signals through the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of four channels of 10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
electrical signals to 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals.

encapsulation and mapping module, and OTN processing module.
ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the
SDH/SONET performance monitoring function.
ODU2/ODU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the
10GE LAN performance monitoring function.
Frames ODU2/ODU2e signals and processes overheads in ODU2/ODU2e signals.

Power supply module

9-340

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.12.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board.

Figure 9-188 shows the front panel of the TQX board.
Figure 9-188 Front panel of the TQX board
TQX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TQX
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-341
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the TQX board. Table 9-130 lists the type
Table 9-130 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TQX board
Interface
Type
Function
TX1-TX4
LC
RX1-RX4
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

9.12.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TQX board.
For the OptiX OSN 6800, if slots IU1, IU4, IU11, and IU14 house the TQX board, the TQX
board supports a maximum service capacity of 40 Gbit/s. If any of the other slots houses the
TQX board, the TQX board supports a maximum service capacity of 20 Gbit/s.
Table 9-131 shows the valid slots for the TN11TQX board.
Table 9-131 Valid slots for the TN11TQX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
Table 9-132 shows the valid slots for the TN52TQX board.
Table 9-132 Valid slots for the TN52TQX board
9-342
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Table 9-133 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TQX board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Description of NM ports
Figure 9-189 shows the application model of the TQX board. Table 9-134 describes the meaning
of each port.
Figure 9-189 Port diagram of the TQX
Backplane
3(RX1/TX1)-1
4(RX2/TX2)-1
5(RX3/TX3)-1
6(RX4/TX4)-1
Client side
4 x ODU2/ODU2e
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-343
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-134 Meaning of NM port of the TQX board

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4
ClientLP1-ClientLP4
If the TQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
Create ODU2 cross-connections between this board and other boards to support service
pass-through.
Step 1: In the NE Explorer of the U2000, choose Configuration > WDM Interface to set
the service type. Ensure that the service type is the same as the actual service type.
Step 2: Create the cross-connections of ODU2 level between the ClientLP port and the
ODU2LP port of the other boards, achieving grooming of ODU2 services, as shown in
Figure 9-190.
Figure 9-190 Cross-connection diagram of the TQX board

WDM side
Other board
Client side
TQX
The client side of the TQX board are cross-connected to the WDM

9.12.8 TQX Parameters

For parameters of the TQX, refer to Table 9-135.
9-344

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-135 TQX parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Service Type

None, 10GE LAN,

OC-192, OTU-2,
OTU-2E, STM-64

Default: None
NOTE
Only the TN52TQX supports OTU-2
services.
NOTE
Only the TN52TQX supports OTU-2/
OTU-2E services.
Port Mapping
Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G),
MAC Transparent
Mapping(10.7G)
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)

service.
NOTE
For the TN11TQX: only
the ClientLP1 and
ClientLP3 ports support
MAC transparent
mapping (10.7G).
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Off
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


9-345
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled

information.
Max. Packet Length
1518 - 9600
Default: Enabled
Default: 9600
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets

and queries the maximum packet length
supported by a board and is applicable to
the boards supporting Ethernet services.
Disabled.
NOTE
Only the TN52TQX supports this parameter.
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled

NOTE

FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC

NOTE

9-346

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG

board resides.
information.
Default: None
Enabled, Disabled
LPT Enabled

pass-through (LPT).
Default: Disabled
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled

Default: Disabled
9.12.9 Specifications of the TQX

NOTE

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical
source type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3

9-347
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3 km

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum
-20 dB
spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum
side mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
G.691-compliant
9-348
Receiver
type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity
(10GE LAN)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10
km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-4
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-8
0 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.
3 km
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11TQX: 3.3 lb. (1.5 kg)
TN52TQX: 3.5 lb. (1.6 kg)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TQX
65.0
71.2
TN52TQX
91.5
100
9.13 TSXL
TSXL: 40 Gbit/s tributary service processing board
The available functional versions of the TSXL board are TN11 and TN53.
9.13.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TN11TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/
OC-768 optical signals and four channels of ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection.
The TN53TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical
signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical signals through cross-connection.
The TSXL board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-349
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

9.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board.
9.13.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11TSXL board. One slot houses one TN53TSXL.
9.13.8 TSXL Parameters
9.13.9 Specifications of the TSXL

Table 9-137 lists the version description of the TSXL board.
Table 9-137 Version description of the TSXL board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
The TN53TSXL supports the cross-connections of ODU3 level, and
the TN11TSXL supports the cross-connections of ODU2 level. For
details, refer to 9.13.3 Functions and Features and 9.13.4
Working Principle and Signal Flow.
Only the TN53TSXL supports the OTU3 service. For details, see
9.13.2 Application and 9.13.3 Functions and Features.
l Appearance:
The TN53TSXL and TN11TSXL use different front panels with
different dimensions. For details, see 9.13.5 Front Panel and 9.13.9
Specifications of the TSXL.
l Specification:
The specifications vary with the version of the board that you use. For
details, see 9.13.9 Specifications of the TSXL.
Replacement
The TN53TSXL and TN11TSXL are not interchangeable.
9.13.2 Application
As a type of tributary board, the TN11TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/
OC-768 optical signals and four channels of ODU2 electrical signals through cross-connection.
The TN53TSXL board converts between one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 optical
signals and one channel of ODU3 electrical signals through cross-connection.
9-350

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the position of the TSXL board in the WDM system, see Figure 9-191 and Figure 9-192.
Figure 9-191 Position of the TN11TSXL board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
4
NS2
STM-256
OC-768
TSXL
MUX
DMUX 4
4
NS2
Client side
NS2
DMUX
WDM side
MUX 4
STM-256
TSXL
OC-768
NS2
WDM side
Client side
Figure 9-192 Position of the TN53TSXL board in the WDM system

G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
STM-256
OC-768
OTU3
Client side
TSXL
DMUX
NS3
NS3
DMUX
WDM side
STM-256
OC-768
OTU3
TSXL
MUX
WDM side
Client side
NOTE
In this application scenario, the Line Rate parameter of the TN54NS3 board must be set to Standard
Mode.

The TSXL board is mainly used to achieve cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-351
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-138 Functions and features of the TSXL board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l TN11TSXL:
Maps one channel of STM-256/OC-768 signals on the client side
into four ODU2 signals.
Implements the transparent transmission of 40 Gbit/s services in
a 10 Gbit/s WDM network.
Implements the transparent transmission of client-side SDH/
SONET service clock and alarms.
l TN53TSXL:
Maps one channel of STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 signals on the
client side into one channel of ODU3 signals.
Implements the transparent transmission of client-side SDH/
SONET/OTN service clock and alarms.
Client-side
service type

NOTE
Only the TN53TSXL supports the OTU3 service.
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of four channels of ODU2 signals between

the TN11TSXL and the cross-connect board.
Supports the cross-connection of one channel of ODU3 signals between
the TN53TSXL and the cross-connect board.
l TN11TSXL: Supports inversely multiplexing one channel of 40 Gbit/
s signals into four channels of ODU2 services.
OTN function
l TN53TSXL: Supports inversely multiplexing one channel of 40 Gbit/

s signals into one channel of ODU3 services.
to the ITU-T G.709. The mapping process is compliant with ITU-T
G.709.
l TN11TSXL: Supports PM functions for ODU2.
l TN53TSXL:
Supports PM, TCM, SM functions for ODU3 when the client-side
service type is OTU3.
Supports PM function for ODU3 when the client-side service type is
STM-256/OC-768.
ALS function
PRBS function
TN11TSXL: Not supported

TN53TSXL: Supports the PRBS function on the client side.
9-352

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
LPT function
Not supported
Test frame
Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN53TSXL
Protection
scheme

Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
ITU-T G.707
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The TSXL consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, control and
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-353
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-193 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL.
Figure 9-194 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL.
Figure 9-193 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11TSXL
ODU2
Client side
O/E
RX
TX
E/O
Cross-connect
module
Client-side
optical
module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
OTN
processing
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
9-354

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-194 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN53TSXL

ODU3
Client side
O/E
RX
TX
E/O
Cross-connect
module
Client-side
optical
module
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
OTN
processing
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The client side of the TSXL board can access the following optical signals:
l
The transmit and the receive directions are defined in the signal flow of the TSXL board. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the TSXL to the backplane,
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives one 40 Gbit/s service signal through the RX
interface, and performs the O/E conversion.
After O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the signal processing module. The
module performs operations such as encapsulation and mapping processing, and OTN
framing. Then, the module sends out four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one
channel of ODU3 electrical signals to the backplane for grooming.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives four channels of ODU2 electrical signals or one
channel of ODU3 electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board through the
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-355
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

backplane. The module performs operations such as ODUk virtual concatenation,

demapping processing. Then, the module sends out one channel of 40 Gbit/s service signal
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of one 40 Gbit/s service signal,
and then outputs one channel of client-side optical signal through the TX optical interface.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of one channel of STM-256/OC-768/
OTU3 optical signal.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion of one channel of STM-256/
OC-768/OTU3 optical signal.

The module consists of the SDH/SONET encapsulation and mapping module and OTN
processing module.
ODUk payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
Frames ODU2, ODU3 signals.

Power supply module

9.13.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board.

Figure 9-195 shows the front panel of the TN11TSXL board.
Figure 9-196 shows the front panel of the TN53TSXL board.
9-356

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-195 Front panel of the TN11TSXL board
TSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX
RX
TSXL
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-357
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-196 Front panel of the TN53TSXL board
TSXL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX
RX
TSXL
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TSXL board. Table 9-139 lists the type
9-358

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 9-139 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TSXL board
Interface
Type
Function
RX
LC

equipment.
TX
LC
Laser Hazard Level

9.13.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11TSXL board. One slot houses one TN53TSXL.
Table 9-140 shows the valid slots for the TN11TSXL board.
Table 9-140 Valid slots for the TN11TSXL board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU16
NOTE
The rear connector of the TN11TSXL board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the
two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN11TSXL board, the slot number of the TN11TSXL board
Table 9-141 shows the valid slots for the TN53TSXL board.
Table 9-141 Valid slots for the TN53TSXL board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-359
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 9-142 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TSXL board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RX/TX
Port Description
Figure 9-197 shows the application model of the TN11TSXL board.
Figure 9-198 shows the application model of the TN53TSXL board.
Table 9-143 describes the meaning of each port.
Figure 9-197 Port diagram of the TN11TSXL board
Backplane
4 x ODU2
151(imp/imp)-1
151(imp/imp)-2
3(RX1/TX1)-1
151(imp/imp)-3
151(imp/imp)-4
Client side
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
Figure 9-198 Port diagram of the TN53TSXL board

Backplane
3(RX1/TX1)-1
Client side
9-360
ODU3
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Indicates cross-connections that you must configure on the NM. These
cross-connections groom ODUk signals from other boards.
Table 9-143 Meaning of NM port of the TSXL board
Port Name
Meaning
RX/TX
Corresponding to the client-side optical

interfaces.
imp (inverse multiplexing port)
The optical channels are numbered 1, 2, 3 and 4.
ClientLP1

numbered 1.
If the TSXL board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
TN11TSXL:
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of ODU2 level between the imp port and the ODU2LP port of the other boards
to achieve grooming of ODU2 services, as shown in Figure 9-199.
Figure 9-199 Cross-connection diagram of the TN11TSXL board

WDM side
71(ODU2LP1/ODU2LP1 )-1
Other board
72(ODU2/LP2/ODU2LP2 )-1
Client side
151(imp/imp)-1
151(imp/imp)-2
151(imp/imp)-3
TSXL
151(imp/imp)-4
The client side of the TSXL board are cross-connected to the WDM

TN53TSXL:
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnections of ODU3 level between the ClientLP port and the ODU3LP port of the other
boards to achieve grooming of ODU3 services, as shown in Figure 9-200.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

9-361
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 9-200 Cross-connection diagram of the TN53TSXL board

WDM side
Other board
Client side
TSXL
The client side of the TSXL board is cross-connected to the WDM

Other board
TN54NS3
9.13.8 TSXL Parameters

For parameters of TSXL, refer to Table 9-144.
Table 9-144 TSXL parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
9-362


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Service Type
None, OC-768,
STM-256, OTU3

Default: STM-256
NOTE
Only the TN53TSXL supports OTU-3
services.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Off
Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
FEC Working State
Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
Default: Enabled

information.
NOTE
Type is set to OTU3.

FEC Mode
FEC
Default: FEC

NOTE
Type is set to OTU3.

SD Trigger Condition B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

board resides.
information.

9-363
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
PRBS Test Status
Disabled, Enabled

Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

commissioning.
NOTE
Only the TN53TSXL supports this
parameter.
9.13.9 Specifications of the TSXL

NOTE

Parameters
Unit
Specifications
Optical Interface type
40G Transponder
Line code format
NRZ
9-364
nm
1530 to 1565

power
dBm

power
dBm
dB
8.2
Minimum side-mode
suppression ratio (SMSR)
dB
35

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Parameters
Unit
Specifications
ps/nm
40

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1290 to 1570
dBm
-6
Receiver overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
TN11TSXL:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN53TSXL:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TSXL
90.2
96
TN53TSXL
75
83

9-365
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
10
PID Unit
About This Chapter

10.1 BMD4
BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz
10.2 BMD8
BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
10.3 ELQX
ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board
10.4 ENQ2
ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
10.5 NPO2
NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board
10.6 PTQX
PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
10.1 BMD4
BMD4: PID Interleaver Board (C-band), 200/100 GHz
The available functional version of the BMD4 board is TN11.
10.1.2 Application
The BMD4 is an optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit. It multiplexes and demultiplexes
signals.
The BMD4 provides functions and features such as multiplexing, demultiplexing, and in-service
spectrum detection.
The BMD4 board consists of the optical module, the control and communication module, and
the power supply module.
10.1.5 Front Panel
There is one indicator and 11 optical interfaces on the front panel of the BMD4.
10.1.6 Valid Slots
The BMD4 occupies one slot.
10.1.7 Characteristic Code of the BMD4
The characteristic code of the BMD4 consists of one character, indicating the band adopted by
the board.
10.1.8 Optical Interfaces on the BMD4
Each optical interface on the BMD4 accesses certain fixed wavelengths.
10.1.9 BMD4 Parameters
10.1.10 Specifications of the BMD4
The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.

The available functional version of the BMD4 board is TN11.
10.1.2 Application
signals.
Figure 10-1 shows the position of the BMD4 in a WDM system.
10-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-1 Position of the BMD4 in a WDM system

4
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
PTQX
OA
BMD4
OA
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
OA
BMD4
PTQX 4
OA
PTQX
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
NPO2
OA
ENQ2 4
4
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OA
4
BMD4
BMD4
OA
NPO2 4
OA
NPO2
4
4
NPO2 4
ENQ2 4

ENQ2 4
ENQ2 4
10-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

spectrum detection.
Table 10-1 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD4.
Table 10-1 Functions and features of the BMD4
Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function
In a 40-channel system, the BMD4 board multiplexes and

demultiplexes the optical signals.
l Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed
signals with a spacing of 100 GHz to four channels of signals with
a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12-wavelength
multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength
multiplexed signals. The reverse process is similar.
In-service detection
and monitoring of the
spectrum
Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of

optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum
analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the
services.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

Figure 10-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4.
10-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD4
Optical module
T01
T02
T03
T04
IN
Interleaver
R01
R02
R03
R04
Splitter
Coupler
OUT
MON
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface
and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into four
channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, two channels of 12wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. Finally,
the four channels of multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces.
The four channels of multiplexed signals are received through the R01-R04 optical interfaces
and are transmitted to the coupler. Then, the coupler couples the four channels of multiplexed
signals into one channel of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 100 GHz. Finally, the signals
are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Demultiplexes one channel of input 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing
of 100 GHz into four channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that
is, two channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and two channels of 8-
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
wavelength multiplexed signals, and uses the coupler to couple the signals with a
spacing of 200 GHz into one channel of 40-wavelength multiplexed signals with a
spacing of 100 GHz.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and provides them to
the MON interface for detection.
l

Controls the operations on each module of the board according to the instructions from
the CPU.
Collects information about alarms, performance events, working status, and voltage
detection of each functional module of the board.
Power supply module

Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by each module
on the board.
10.1.5 Front Panel


Figure 10-3 shows the front panel of the BMD4.
10-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-3 Front panel of the BMD4
BMD4
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
T01
R01
T02
R02
T03
R03
T04
R04
BMD4
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 11 optical interfaces on the front panel of the BMD4. Table 10-2 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD4

Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Accesses the optical signals at 100 GHz channel

spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
OUT
LC
Outputs the optical signals at 100 GHz channel spacing

(C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
MON
LC
Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8

board so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect
the optical spectrum in service.
The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the
optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical
power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the
optical power at the OUT interface, calculation
formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) =
10 dB).
T01/R01
LC
Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.80 THz to

196.00 THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel
spacing.
T02/R02
LC
Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.70 THz to

spacing.
T03/R03
LC
Transmits/Receives eight wavelengths (192.20 THz to

spacing.
T04/R04
LC

spacing.
Laser Hazard Level

The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum output
optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
10.1.6 Valid Slots

The BMD4 occupies one slot.
Table 10-3 shows the valid slots for the BMD4 board.
Table 10-3 Valid slots for the BMD4 board
10-8
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1-IU8, IU11-U42, IU45-U68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17

the board.
Table 10-4 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD4.
Table 10-4 Characteristic code of the BMD4
Code
Indication
Description
The first character
Band
Indicates the multiplexing

scheme adopted by the board.
The value C represents the C
band. The value L represents
the L band.
For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD4 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are
in the C band.

Table 10-5 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD4 and the relationships between the frequencies
and wavelengths.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-5 Optical interfaces on the BMD4 and relationships between the frequencies and
wavelengths
Interface
Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
T01/R01
12
193.8
1546.917
194.0
1545.322
194.2
1543.730
194.4
1542.142
194.6
1540.557
194.8
1538.976
195.0
1537.397
195.2
1535.822
195.4
1534.250
195.6
1532.681
195.8
1531.116
196.0
1529.553
193.7
1547.715
193.9
1546.119
194.1
1544.526
194.3
1542.936
194.5
1541.349
194.7
1539.766
194.9
1538.186
195.1
1536.609
195.3
1535.036
195.5
1533.465
195.7
1531.898
195.9
1530.334
192.2
1559.794
192.4
1558.173
192.6
1556.555
192.8
1554.940
193.0
1553.329
193.2
1551.721
193.4
1550.116
193.6
1548.515
T02/R02
T03/R03
10-10
12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Interface
Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
T04/R04
192.1
1560.606
192.3
1558.983
192.5
1557.363
192.7
1555.747
192.9
1554.134
193.1
1552.524
193.3
1550.918
193.5
1549.315

For BMD4 parameters, refer to Table 10-6.
Table 10-6 BMD4 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface Name
Sets and queries the optical interface

name. It is recommended to use the
default value.
Configure Band
Used to configure type of the

working band of a board.
Default: C
Actual Band
Queries the actual working band of

the board.
Actual Working Band

Parity
Queries the parity of the actual

working band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Used to select the desired parity of

the working band.
Default: All

consumption.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Optical Specifications
Table 10-7 Optical specifications of the BMD4
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529 - 1561
T0x/R0x channel spacinga
GHz
200
IN/OUT channel spacing
GHz
100
Insertion loss
dB
dB
dB
25
IN-T01
IN-T02
IN-T03
IN-T04
R01-OUT
R02-OUT
R03-OUT
R04-OUT
IN->T01/T03@T02/T04
Isolationb
IN->T02/T04@T01/T03
IN->T01@T03
13
IN->T03@T01
IN->T02@T04
IN->T04@T02
R01->OUT@R03
R03->OUT@R01
R02->OUT@R04
R04->OUT@R02
Optical return loss
dB
40
Directivity
dB
45
PMD
dB
0.5
Polarization dependent loss
dB
0.5
Input optical power range
dBm
23
a: T0x represents T01 to T04 ports. R0x represents R01 to R04 ports.
b: In the case of T01/T03@T02/T04, this parameter refers to the isolation between any one
of T01/T03 ports and any one of T02/T04 ports. It is the same case for other isolation item.
T01/T02 ports are intended for blue band signals. T03/T04 ports are intended for red band
signals.
10-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
BMD4
0.2
0.3
10.2 BMD8
BMD8: PID Interleaver Board (C_Band), 200/50 GHz
Only one functional version of the BMD8 board is available, that is, TN11.
10.2.2 Application
signals.
spectrum detection.
10.2.5 Front Panel
10.2.6 Valid Slots
The BMD8 occupies two slots.
the board.
consumption.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Only one functional version of the BMD8 board is available, that is, TN11.
10.2.2 Application
signals.
Figure 10-4 shows the position of the BMD8 in a WDM system.
Figure 10-4 Position of the BMD8 in a WDM system
4
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
PTQX
OA
10-14
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
OA
BMD8
BMD8
OA
PTQX 4
OA
PTQX

PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
NPO2
NPO2 4
OA
ENQ2 4
8
4
BMD8
BMD8
OA
OA
ENQ2 4
OA
NPO2 4
NPO2
ENQ2 4
ENQ2 4

spectrum detection.
Table 10-8 provides the details about the functions and features of the BMD8.
Table 10-8 Functions and features of the BMD8
Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function
In an 80-channel system, the BMD8 board multiplexes and

demultiplexes optical signals.
l Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed
signals with a spacing of 50 GHz into four channels of oddwavelength signals and four channels of even-wavelength
multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz, that is, four
channels of 12-wavelength multiplexed signals and four channels
of 8-wavelength multiplexed signals. The reverse process is
similar.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Function or
Feature
Description
Detection and
monitoring of the
online spectrum
Provides an in-service monitoring interface. A small number of

optical signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum
analyzer unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multichannel signals without interrupting the
services.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

Figure 10-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8.
Figure 10-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the BMD8
Optical module
T01
T02
T03
T04
T05
T06
T07
T08
Interleaver
R01
R02
R03
R04
R05
R06
R07
R08
IN
Splitter
OUT
MON
Interleaver
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
10-16

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals with a spacing of 50 GHz are accessed through the IN optical interface
and transmitted to the interleaver. Then, the interleaver splits the multiplexed signals into eight
channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz. Finally, the four channels of oddwavelength multiplexed signals are output through the T01-T04 optical interfaces. After
wavelength filtering, the four channels of even-wavelength multiplexed signals are output
through the T05-T08 optical interfaces.
The interleaver multiplexes the four channels of odd-wavelength signals input through the R01R04 optical interfaces and the four channels of even-wavelength signals input through the R05R08 optical interfaces to one channel of optical signals. Finally, the signals are output through
the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Demultiplexes one channel of input 80-wavelength multiplexed signals with a spacing
of 50 GHz into eight channels of multiplexed signals with a spacing of 200 GHz and
uses the interleaver to couple the signals into one channel of 80-wavelength multiplexed
signals with a spacing of 50 GHz.

the CPU.
Power supply module

on the board.
10.2.5 Front Panel


Figure 10-6 shows the front panel of the BMD8.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-6 Front panel of the BMD8
BMD8
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
MON
T05
T01
R05
R01
T06
T02
R06
R02
T07
T03
R07
R03
T08
T04
R08
R04
BMD8
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 19 optical interfaces on the front panel of the BMD8. Table 10-9 lists the type and
10-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BMD8

Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing

(C_ODD and C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
OUT
LC

MON
LC
Connects to the input port on the MCA4 or the MCA8 board

so that the MCA4 or the MCA8 board can detect the optical
spectrum in service.
The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the optical
power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical power at the
MON interface is 10 dB lower than the optical power at the
OUT interface, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm)
= 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
T01/R01
LC
Transmits/Receives 12 wavelengths (193.850 THz to 196.050

THz) of optical signals with a 200 GHz channel spacing.
T02/R02
LC

T03/R03
LC

T04/R04
LC

T05/R05
LC

spacing.
T06/R06
LC

spacing.
T07/R07
LC

spacing.
T08/R08
LC

spacing.
Laser Hazard Level

10.2.6 Valid Slots

The BMD8 occupies two slots.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-10 shows the valid slots for the BMD8 board.
Table 10-10 Valid slots for the BMD8 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU45-IU51, IU53-IU59, IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot on the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the BMD8 displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of
the two occupied slots. For example, if the BMD8 occupies IU1 and IU2, the slot number of the
BMD8 displayed on the NM is IU1.

the board.
Table 10-11 provides the details about the characteristic code of the BMD8.
Table 10-11 Characteristic code of the BMD8
Code
Indication
Description
The first character
Band

scheme adopted by the board.
The value C represents the C
band.
For example, if the characteristic code of the BMD8 is C, it indicates that the optical signals are
in the C band.

Table 10-12 lists the optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the
frequencies and wavelengths.
10-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-12 Optical interfaces on the BMD8 and the relationships between the frequencies and
wavelengths
Interface
Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
T01/R01
12
193.85
1546.52
194.05
1544.92
194.25
1543.33
194.45
1541.75
194.65
1540.16
194.85
1538.58
195.05
1537.00
195.25
1535.43
195.45
1533.86
195.65
1532.29
195.85
1530.72
196.05
1529.16
193.8
1546.917
194.0
1545.322
194.2
1543.730
194.4
1542.142
194.6
1540.557
194.8
1538.976
195.0
1537.397
195.2
1535.822
195.4
1534.250
195.6
1532.681
195.8
1531.116
196.0
1529.553
T02/R02
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
12

10-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Interface
Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
T03/R03
12
193.75
1547.32
193.95
1545.72
194.15
1544.13
194.35
1542.54
194.55
1540.95
194.75
1539.37
194.95
1537.79
195.15
1536.22
195.35
1534.64
195.55
1533.07
195.75
1531.51
195.95
1529.94
193.7
1547.715
193.9
1546.119
194.1
1544.526
194.3
1542.936
194.5
1541.349
194.7
1539.766
194.9
1538.186
195.1
1536.609
195.3
1535.036
195.5
1533.465
195.7
1531.898
195.9
1530.334
192.25
1559.39
192.45
1557.77
192.65
1556.15
192.85
1554.54
193.05
1552.93
193.25
1551.32
193.45
1549.72
193.65
1548.11
T04/R04
T05/R05
10-22
12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Interface
Number of
Wavelengths
Frequency (THz)
Wavelength (nm)
T06/R06
192.2
1559.794
192.4
1558.173
192.6
1556.555
192.8
1554.940
193.0
1553.329
193.2
1551.721
193.4
1550.116
193.6
1548.515
192.15
1560.20
192.35
1558.58
192.55
1556.96
192.75
1555.34
192.95
1553.73
193.15
1552.12
193.35
1550.52
193.55
1548.91
192.1
1560.606
192.3
1558.983
192.5
1557.363
192.7
1555.747
192.9
1554.134
193.1
1552.524
193.3
1550.918
193.5
1549.315
T07/R07
T08/R08

For BMD8 parameters, refer to Table 10-13.
Table 10-13 BMD8 parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

10-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description

default value.
Configure Band
Used to configure type of the

working band of a board.
Default: C
Actual Band
Queries the actual working band of

the board.
Actual Working Band

Parity
Queries the parity of the actual

working band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Used to select the desired parity of

the working band.
Default: All

consumption.
Table 10-14 Optical specifications of the BMD8
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529 - 1561
T0x/R0x channel spacinga
GHz
200
IN/OUT channel spacing
GHz
50
Insertion loss
dB
IN-T01
IN-T02
IN-T03
IN-T04
IN-T05
IN-T06
IN-T07
IN-T08
10-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Item
R01-OUT
Unit
Value
dB
9.5
dB
25
R02-OUT
R03-OUT
R04-OUT
R05-OUT
R06-OUT
R07-OUT
R08-OUT
IN->T01/T05 @T02/T06/
T03/T07/T04/T08
Isolationb
IN->T02/T06 @T01/T05/
T03/T07/T04/T08
IN->T03/T07 @T01/T05/
T02/T06/T04/T08
IN->T04/T08 @T01/T05/
T02/T06/T03/T07
IN->T01@T05
13
IN->T05@T01
IN->T02@T06
IN->T06@T02
IN->T03@T07
IN->T07@T03
IN->T04@T08
IN->T08@T04
R01->OUT@R05
R05->OUT@R01
R02->OUT@R06
R06->OUT@R02
R03->OUT@R07
R07->OUT@R03
R04->OUT@R08
R08->OUT@R04
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Optical return loss
dB
40
Directivity
dB
45
PMD
dB
0.5
dB
0.5
dBm
23

10-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Value
a: T0x represents T01 to T08 ports. R0x represents R01 to R08 ports.
b: In the case of T01/T05@T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08, this parameter refers to the isolation
between any one of T01/T05 ports and any one of T02/T06/T03/T07/T04/T08 ports. It is the
same case for other isolation item. T01 to T04 ports are intended for blue band signals; the
T05 to T08 ports are intended for red band signals.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
BMD8
0.2
0.3
10.3 ELQX
ELQX: 4 x Electrical OTU2 with 4 x 10G Tributary Board
The available functional version of the ELQX board is TN12.
10.3.2 Application
The ELQX board converts four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e
signals into four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals or converts four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16
ODU1 signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is
similar.
The ELQX supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS.
The ELQX board consists of the client-side optical module, the signal processing module, the
control and communication module, and the power supply module.
10.3.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators and eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELQX.
10.3.6 Valid Slots
The ELQX occupies one slot.
Each optical interface on the ELQX board has a serial number, and the logical ports of the board
are provided on the U2000.
10-26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
10.3.8 ELQX Parameters

10.3.9 Specifications of the ELQX
consumption.

The available functional version of the ELQX board is TN12.
10.3.2 Application
The ELQX board converts four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e
signals into four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals or converts four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16
ODU1 signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The reverse process is
similar.
Figure 10-7 shows the position of the ELQX in a WDM system.
Figure 10-7 Position of the ELQX in a WDM system
4
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/ 4
OTU2/
OTU2e
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
OA
PTQX
OA
BMD4
BMD4
OA
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
OA
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
4 OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
4

The ELQX supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS.
Table 10-15 provides the details about the functions and features of the ELQX.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals between
the PTQX board and the cross-connect board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-15 Functions and features of the ELQX

Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Converts between four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192,

OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals from the client side and four OTU2/
OTU2e electrical signals, and supports hybrid transmission of the
preceding services. The reverse process is similar.
l Multiplexes 16 ODU1 signals or four ODU2/ODU2e signals from the
backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals, and supports hybrid
transmission of the ODU1 and ODU2/ODU2e services. The reverse
process is similar.
Client-side
service type

l Maps and multiplexes a maximum of four channels of client-side signals
into OTU2/OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping comply
with ITU-T G.7041, ITU-T G.709, and GDPS.
OTN function
l Supports the PM and TCM functions for ODU1.

l Supports the SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports the TCM function for ODU2.
WDM
specification
ESC function
Supports the ESC function. The supervisory signal is transmitted within the
service signal.
PRBS function
NOTE
type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
LPT function
is 10GE LAN.
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
10-28
Provides the function of optical power detection and the function to report
the alarms and performance events of the board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Function or
Feature
Description
ALS function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported
Protection
scheme

l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
l Supports the ODUk SPRing protection.
XFP
Supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side.
Loopback
WDM side
Not Supported
Client side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3ae
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

The ELQX board consists of the client-side optical module, the signal processing module, the
control and communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 10-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 8800.
Figure 10-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800.
Signal Flow
Figure 10-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 8800
RX1
RX2
RX3
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
Backplane
(service cross-connection)
4OTU2(e)
Client side
OTN
processing
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
10-30

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800
Client side 4ODU2(e)/16ODU1
RX1
RX2
RX3
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
OTN
processing
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
Backplane
4OTU2(e)
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
The client side of the ELQX board can access the following optical signals:
l
In the signal flow of the ELQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ELQX to the WDM side
of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives four optical signals from client equipment through
the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical signals. The clientside optical module can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from
the backplane.
The electrical signals converted from the client optical signals or the ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e
signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal processing module. The signals of
different types are transmitted to different encapsulation and mapping modules. Then, the
encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing
for the signals. Finally, four OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives four OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals from the
PTQX board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping, and
decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs four ODU2/ODU2e signals, 16 ODU1
signals, or four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e electrical
signals.
The four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals are cross-connected to other boards
through the backplane, or the four 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or
OTU2e electrical signals are transmitted to the client-side optical module. The optical
signals are converted into electrical signals, and then are output through the TX1-TX4
optical interfaces.
NOTE
In the OptiX OSN 6800, the ELQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards
through the backplane. One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or
from the backplane.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals.
Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
Reports the working status of the client-side laser.

module.
NOTE
The signal processing module on the ELQX board has fixed cross-connections to the PTQX board.

OTU2 payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the SDH/
OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and has the
10GE LAN performance monitoring function.
Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals.
l

the CPU.
10-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
detection of each functional module on the board.
l
Power supply module

Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
10.3.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators and eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELQX.

Figure 10-10 shows the front panel of the ELQX.
Figure 10-10 Front panel of the ELQX
ELQX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
ELQX
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the ELQX. Table 10-16 lists the type and
function of each optical interface.
Table 10-16 Types and functions of the ELQX interfaces
Interface
Type
Function
TX1 - TX4
LC

equipment.
RX1 - RX4
LC

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

10.3.6 Valid Slots

The ELQX occupies one slot.
Table 10-17 shows the valid slots for the ELQX board.
Table 10-17 Valid slots for the ELQX board
10-34
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1, IU4, IU5, IU8, IU12, IU15, IU16, IU19, IU20, IU23, IU24,
IU27, IU29, IU32, IU33, IU36
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1, IU4, IU5, IU8, IU11, IU14, IU15, IU18, IU19, IU22, IU23,
IU26, IU27, IU30, IU31, IU34, IU35, IU38, IU39, IU42, IU45,
IU68
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1, IU4, IU5, IU8, IU11, IU14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Each optical interface on the ELQX board has a serial number, and the logical ports of the board
are provided on the U2000.

Table 10-18 lists the serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board
displayed on the NM.
Table 10-18 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ELQX displayed on the NM
Interface on the Front Panel
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
The number of an interface displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of physical optical interfaces, of which
one is used to transmit signals and the other is used to receive signals.
Port Description
Figure 10-11, Figure 10-12 and Figure 10-13 describes the NM ports of the ELQX board.
Table 10-19 lists the indication of each port.
Figure 10-11 Diagram of ports on the ELQX (cross-connections of client-side services)
Client side
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
Service
Processing
Module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Service
Processing
Module

Service
Processing
Module
10-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-12 Diagram of ports on the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800(backplane-side ODU1level cross-connections)
Backplane
Crossconnect
module
Service
processing
module
Service
processing
module
Figure 10-13 Diagram of ports on the ELQX in the OptiX OSN 6800(backplane-side ODU2level cross-connections)
Backplane
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Table 10-19 Meaning of NM ports of the ELQX

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces
ClientLP1-ClientLP4
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4
Internal logical ports. The optical paths are numbered 1,

2, 3, 4.
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4
If the ELQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
10-36

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
cross-connection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the ELQX board, as
shown by (1) in Figure 10-14.
If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to
create cross-connections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on
the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown Figure 10-15.
If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ELQX board, you need to
the ELQX board on the U2000, as shown by (2) Figure 10-14.
The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX board and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of
one-to-one cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created
on the U2000. For details, see Figure 10-16.
Figure 10-14 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU2 level)

ODU2 level cross-connection in the OptiX OSN 8800
Client side
Cross-connection
module
ELQX board
Client side
Cross-connection
module
Other board
Client side
Cross-connection
module
ELQX board

the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1
2
10-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-15 Diagram of cross-connections of the ELQX (ODU1 level)

Client side
1
Other board
Client side
ELQX board
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board
10-38

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-16 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX

Client side
ELQX board
WDM side
141(OCHLP9/OCHLP9)-1
2
PTQX baord
Client side
ELQX board
Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the

PTQX board in a PID group
1
2
Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the

10.3.8 ELQX Parameters

For parameters of the ELQX, refer toTable 10-20.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-20 ELQX parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop

Queries or sets the path Loopback.
Service Type
10GE LAN, 10GE

WAN, OTU-2, OTU2
2E, STM-64

Default: 10GE LAN

Port Mapping
Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G), MAC
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G), Bit
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G)

service.
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default:
l WDM side: Enabled
l Client side:
Disabled
10-40

information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled

pass-through (LPT).
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Automatic, ODU1,
ODU2
Default: Automatic
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC

Actual Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Actual Band Type
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

the line side.

wavelength.

10-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

Disabled.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Line Rate

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

information.
board resides.
information.
commissioning.
10.3.9 Specifications of the ELQX

consumption.
10-42

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
80 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
0.3 km
Line code
format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target
distance
km
10
40
80
0.3

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum
mean
launched
power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction
ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression
ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
ITU-T G.691-compliant
APD
PIN

Receiver type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
PIN
PIN

10-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Optical
Module
Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
80 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
0.3 km
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5
Receiver
sensitivity (10
GE)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1
(multirate)/
0.5(10GE
LAN)
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Table 10-22 Specifications of the DWDM optical module on the client side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm (XFP)
NRZ 40-wavelength fixed

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.00

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
GHz
10
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800

10-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
800 ps/nm (XFP)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

enabled) EOL
dBm
-16

(FEC enabled)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power Consumption

at 25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
(W)
ELQX
86.2
99.1
10.4 ENQ2
ENQ2: 4 x 10G Line Service Processing Board
The available functional version of the ENQ2 board is TN54.
10.4.2 Application
The ENQ2 board converts 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four
channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The
The ENQ2 supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC.
The ENQ2 board consists of the signal processing module, the control and communication
module, and the power supply module.
10.4.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators on the front panel of the ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
10.4.6 Valid Slots

The ENQ2 occupies one slot.
10.4.7 Optical Interfaces on the ENQ2
On the U2000, the logical ports of the board are provided.
10.4.8 ENQ2 Parameters
10.4.9 Specifications of the ENQ2
The specifications include the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

The available functional version of the ENQ2 board is TN54.
10.4.2 Application
The ENQ2 board converts 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals or four
channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The
Application scenario 1: conversion between 32 channels of ODU0 signals and four

channels of OTU2 signals
Figure 10-17 Position of the ENQ2 in a WDM system
8
TOM 8
4
ENQ2 4
OA
TOM 8
TOM 8
4
10-46
ENQ2
OA
BMD4
BMD4
OA
NPO2
NPO2
ENQ2 4
TOM 8
4
8
TOM 8
TOM 8
OA
NPO2
NPO2
4
ENQ2
4
8

TOM 8
TOM 8
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Application scenario 2: conversion between 16 channels of ODU1 signals and four

8
TOM 4
4
ENQ2 4
OA
TOM 4
TOM 4
4
BMD4
OA
ENQ2
OA
BMD4
NPO2
NPO2
TOM 8
4
TOM 8
TOM 8
OA
NPO2
NPO2
ENQ2 4
TOM 4
ENQ2
4
4
TOM 8
Application scenario 3: conversion between four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals

and four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
8
NPO2
4
TQX 4
NPO2
OA
ENQ2 4
4
4
BMD4
BMD4
OA
OA
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TQX 4
ENQ2 4

TQX 4
ENQ2 4
TQX 4
OA
NPO2
ENQ2 4
NPO2
4
10-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

The ENQ2 supports functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 10-23 provides the details about the functions and features of the ENQ2.
Table 10-23 Functions and features of the ENQ2
Function or
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16 channels of ODU1 signals

or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane into four
channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and supports hybrid transmission of the
ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e services. The reverse process is similar.
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of 32 channels of ODU0 or 16 channels of

ODU1 or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board
OTN function

to the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the PM function for ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2.
l Supports the TCM function and SM function for ODU2 and ODU1.
WDM
specification
ESC function
Supports the ESC function. The supervisory signal is transmitted within the
service signal.
PRBS function
LPT function
Not supported
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
10-48
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Provides the function to report the alarms and performance events of the
board.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
10 PID Unit
Function or
Feature
Description
Protection
scheme
l Supports the ODUk SNCP.
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Path Loopback
Inloop is supported

10-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Function or
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING
PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces:Guidelines
for the implementation and usage of the DVB
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
10-50

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function or
Feature
10 PID Unit
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The ENQ2 board consists of the signal processing module, the control and communication
module, and the power supply module.
Figure 10-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Signal Flow
Figure 10-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the ENQ2
32XODU0/16XODU1/
4XODU2/4XODU2e
Backplane
4XOTU2/
4XOTU2e
Cross-connect
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
In the signal flow of the ENQ2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the WDM side of the ENQ2 to the WDM side
of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane are transmitted to the signal
processing module. Then, the encapsulation and mapping modules perform encapsulation,
mapping, and OTN framing for the signals. Finally, four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
are transmitted to the NPO2 board through the backplane.
Receive direction
The signal processing module receives four channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals
from the NPO2 board through the backplane, performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, demapping,
and decapsulation for the signals, and finally outputs 32 channels of ODU0 signals or 16
channels of ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals.
The signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
10-52

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Module Function
l

The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module.
NOTE
The signal processing module on the ENQ2 board has fixed cross-connections to the NPO2 board.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2
signals
Frames OTU2 signals and processes overheads in OTU2 signals.
l

the CPU.
detection of each functional module on the board.
Power supply module

Converts the DC power supplied from the backplane into the power required by each
10.4.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators on the front panel of the ENQ2.

Figure 10-21 shows the front panel of the ENQ2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-21 Front panel of the ENQ2
ENQ2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
ENQ2
Indicators
l
10.4.6 Valid Slots

The ENQ2 occupies one slot.
Table 10-24 shows the valid slots for the ENQ2 board.
10-54

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-24 Valid slots for the ENQ2 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU45, IU49, IU53, IU57, IU61, IU65
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1, IU5, IU12, IU16, IU20, IU24, IU29, IU33
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1, IU5, IU11, IU15
10.4.7 Optical Interfaces on the ENQ2

On the U2000, the logical ports of the board are provided.
Port Description
Figure 10-22, Figure 10-23 and Figure 10-24 describe the NM ports of the ENQ2 board. Table
10-25 lists the indication of each port.
Figure 10-22 Diagram of ports on the ENQ2 (backplane-side ODU0-level cross-connections)
WDM side
Cross-connect
Module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Service
processing
module

Service
processing
module
10-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Service
processing
module

WDM side
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Table 10-25 Meaning of NM ports of the ENQ2

Port Name
Meaning
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP16

2.
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4

2, 3, 4.
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4
If the ENQ2 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
10-56
If the ODU0 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the ENQ2 board, you need to
the ENQ2 board on the U2000, as shown by (1) in Figure 10-25, or create cross-connections
from the ODU0LP ports on the other boards to the ODU0LP port on the ENQ2 board on
the U2000, as shown by (2) in Figure 10-25.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
l
The ODU2LP ports on the ENQ2 board and the OCHLP ports on the NPO2 board are of
one-to-one cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created
on the U2000. For details, see Figure 10-28.
Figure 10-25 Diagram of cross-connections of the ENQ2 (ODU0 level)

Client
side
Other
board
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
2
Cross-connect
module
ENQ2 board
WDM side
Other board
except NPO2
Cross-connect
module
The client side of other boards are cross-connected to the WDM

side of the ENQ2
The WDM side of other boards except NPO2 are cross-connected to
the WDM side of the ENQ2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1
2
10-57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Client
side
Other
board
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
2
Cross-connect
module
ENQ2 board
WDM side
Other board
except NPO2
Cross-connect
module

side of the ENQ2
10-58

1
2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Client
side
Other
board
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
ENQ2 board
WDM side
Other board
except NPO2
Cross-connect
module

side of the ENQ2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1
2
10-59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-28 Diagram of cross-connections between the NPO2 and ENQ2

WDM side
ENQ2
WDM side
NPO2
10.4.8 ENQ2 Parameters

For parameters of the ENQ2, refer to Table 10-26.
Table 10-26 ENQ2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Channel Loopback
Outloop
10-60

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
Service Mode
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2

the line side.
Default: Automatic
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Line Rate
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Default: Disabled

Disabled.

PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

commissioning.
10.4.9 Specifications of the ENQ2

The specifications include the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
10-61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power Consumption

at 25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
(W)
ENQ2
40
44
10.5 NPO2
NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID Board
The available functional versions of the NPO2 board are TN54 and TN55.
10.5.2 Application
The NPO2 board is a PID unit. The NPO2 board converts 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32
channels of ODU1 signals, or 8 channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals into 8 channels of standard
WDM wavelength OTU2/OTU2e signals. In addition, the NPO2 board supports hybrid
transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. Further, the NPO2 board receives
4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2, multiplexes 12 channels of OTU2/
OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the optical signals. The
The NPO2 provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC.
The NPO2 board consists of the signal processing module, PID module, control and
communication module, 1588 module, and power supply module.
10.5.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators and optical interfaces on the front panel of the NPO2.
10.5.6 Valid Slots
The NPO2 occupies two slots.
10.5.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2
The characteristic code for the NPO2 consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency
values of the first channel and the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side.
On the U2000, each optical interface on the NPO2 board has a serial number, and the logical
ports of the board are provided.
10.5.9 NPO2 Parameters
10.5.10 Specifications of the NPO2
consumption.
10-62

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Table 10-27 lists the version description of the NPO2 board.
Table 10-27 Version description of the NPO2 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free
transmission over short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCMfree transmission over long distance.
l Appearance:
For the front panels of the TN54NPO2 and TN55NPO2, see 10.5.5
Front Panel.
l Specification:
For the specification of each version, see 10.5.10 Specifications of the
NPO2.
Replacement
Table 10-28 lists the substitution rules for the NPO2 board.
Table 10-28 Substitution rules of the LSX board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN54NPO2
TN55NPO2
The TN55NPO2 can be created as TN54NPO2 on the NMS.

upgrade. After substitution, the TN55NPO2 functions as the
TN54NPO2.
TN55NPO2
None
One PID can use only certain wavelengths, as listed in Table 10-29. Table 10-30 lists the
wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies.
Table 10-29 Wavelength allocation table of a PID(NPO2+ENQ2)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Serial
No.
Wavelength No.
of ENQ2
Wavelength No. of NPO2
NPO2 Type
33, 37, 41, 45
1, 5, 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, 29
TN54NPO201/
TN55NPO2S01

10-63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Serial
No.
Wavelength No.
of ENQ2
Wavelength No. of NPO2
NPO2 Type
34, 38, 42, 46
2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, 30
TN54NPO202/
TN55NPO2S02/
TN55NPO2L02
35, 39, 43, 47
3, 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, 27, 31
TN54NPO203/
TN55NPO2S03
36, 40, 44, 48
4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, 32
TN54NPO204/
TN55NPO2S04/
TN55NPO2L04
49, 53, 57, 61, 65, 69, 73, 77
TN54NPO205/
TN55NPO2S05
50, 54, 58, 62, 66, 70, 74, 78
TN54NPO206/
TN55NPO2S06
51, 55, 59, 63, 67, 71, 75, 79
TN54NPO207/
TN55NPO2S07
52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 76, 80
TN54NPO208/
TN55NPO2S08
NOTE
For the wavelength groups indicated by serial numbers 5-8, only one NPO2 board is required.
The ENQ2 board should be housed on the left of the NPO2 board.
Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free transmission over short distance and the
TN55NPO2L supports DCM-free transmission over long distance.
The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing
board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st,
5th, 9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board,
it can also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For the position where the TN54PQ2 should
be installed on the TN55NPO2, see 10.5.5 Front Panel.
Table 10-30 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system
10-64
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
196.05
1529.16
41
194.05
1544.92
196.00
1529.55
42
194.00
1545.32
195.95
1529.94
43
193.95
1545.72
195.90
1530.33
44
193.90
1546.12
195.85
1530.72
45
193.85
1546.52
195.80
1531.12
46
193.80
1546.92
195.75
1531.51
47
193.75
1547.32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
10 PID Unit
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
195.70
1531.90
48
193.70
1547.72
195.65
1532.29
49
193.65
1548.11
10
195.60
1532.68
50
193.60
1548.51
11
195.55
1533.07
51
193.55
1548.91
12
195.50
1533.47
52
193.50
1549.32
13
195.45
1533.86
53
193.45
1549.72
14
195.40
1534.25
54
193.40
1550.12
15
195.35
1534.64
55
193.35
1550.52
16
195.30
1535.04
56
193.30
1550.92
17
195.25
1535.43
57
193.25
1551.32
18
195.20
1535.82
58
193.20
1551.72
19
195.15
1536.22
59
193.15
1552.12
20
195.10
1536.61
60
193.10
1552.52
21
195.05
1537.00
61
193.05
1552.93
22
195.00
1537.40
62
193.00
1553.33
23
194.95
1537.79
63
192.95
1553.73
24
194.90
1538.19
64
192.90
1554.13
25
194.85
1538.58
65
192.85
1554.54
26
194.80
1538.98
66
192.80
1554.94
27
194.75
1539.37
67
192.75
1555.34
28
194.70
1539.77
68
192.70
1555.75
29
194.65
1540.16
69
192.65
1556.15
30
194.60
1540.56
70
192.60
1556.55
31
194.55
1540.95
71
192.55
1556.96
32
194.50
1541.35
72
192.50
1557.36
33
194.45
1541.75
73
192.45
1557.77
34
194.40
1542.14
74
192.40
1558.17
35
194.35
1542.54
75
192.35
1558.58
36
194.30
1542.94
76
192.30
1558.98

10-65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
37
194.25
1543.33
77
192.25
1559.39
38
194.20
1543.73
78
192.20
1559.79
39
194.15
1544.13
79
192.15
1560.20
40
194.10
1544.53
80
192.10
1560.61
10.5.2 Application
The NPO2 board is a PID unit. The NPO2 board converts 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32
channels of ODU1 signals, or 8 channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals into 8 channels of standard
WDM wavelength OTU2/OTU2e signals. In addition, the NPO2 board supports hybrid
transmission of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. Further, the NPO2 board receives
4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals sent from the ENQ2, multiplexes 12 channels of OTU2/
OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the optical signals. The
Application scenario 1: conversion between 64 channels of ODU0 signals and eight

Figure 10-29 Position of the NPO2 in a WDM system
8
TOM 8
8
TOM 8
ENQ2 4
NPO2
NPO2
OA
OA
BMD4
BMD4
OA
TOM 8
TOM 8
ENQ2 4
TOM 8
OA
10-66
TOM 8
ENQ2 4
TOM 8
NPO2

NPO2
8
TOM 8
ENQ2 4
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Application scenario 2: conversion between 32 channels of ODU1 signals and eight

TOM 4
8
TOM 4
ENQ2 4
NPO2
NPO2
OA
OA
BMD4
BMD4
OA
TOM 4
TOM 8
ENQ2 4
TOM 8
OA
8
8
TOM 4
ENQ2 4
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TOM 8
NPO2

NPO2
4
TOM 8
ENQ2 4
10-67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Application scenario 3: conversion between eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e

signals and eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
4
TQX 4
TQX 4
ENQ2 4
NPO2
OA
TQX 4
TQX 4
ENQ2 4
TQX 4
NPO2 4
TQX 4
ENQ2 4
TQX 4
NPO2 4
TQX 4
ENQ2 4
OA
BMD4
BMD4
OA
OA
NPO2

The NPO2 provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces and ESC.
Table 10-31 provides the details about the functions and features of the NPO2.
10-68

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-31 Functions and features of the NPO2

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight

channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the backplane, maps the signals
into eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals, and converts the signals
into the standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
The reverse process is similar, and hybrid access of ODU0, ODU1 or
ODU2/ODU2e is supported.
l Accesses eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals from the ENQ2 board,
and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar.
l Integrates twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of
optical signals.
l Unlike the TN54NPO2, the TN55NPO2S supports DCM-free
transmission over short distance and the TN55NPO2L supports DCMfree transmission over long distance.
Cross-connect
capabilities
Supports the cross-connection of 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of

ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals between the NPO2 board
OTN function
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing as defined in

the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports the PM function for ODU0, ODU1 and ODU2.
l Supports the TCM function and SM function for ODU2 and ODU1.
WDM
specification
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
LPT function
Not supported
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Provides optical power detection and reports alarms and performance

events of the board.
PTP Clock
(1588 V2)
Supported

10-69
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
10-70
Function and
Feature
Description
Physical clock
Supported
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme
Loopback
WDM side
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Client side
Path Loopback
Inloop is Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocol or
standard
compliance
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.3u
IEEE 802.3z
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
(FC-SB-2)
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces:Guidelines
for the implementation and usage of the DVB
Control(MAC)
Protocol(PHY)
Dependent(PDM)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-71
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The NPO2 board consists of the signal processing module, PID module, control and
communication module, 1588 module, and power supply module.
Figure 10-32 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2.
10-72

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-32 Functional modules and signal flow of the NPO2

64XODU0/32XODU1/
8XODU2/8XODU2e
Backplane
4XOTU2/
4XOTU2e
8
Cross-connect
module
1588
OTN
processing
module
OUT
PID
Module
IN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
In the signal flow of the NPO2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the backplane of the NPO2 to the WDM side
of the NPO2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
The signal processing module receives 64 channels of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or
eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals sent from the cross-connection board
through the backplane. The module performs operations such as OTN framing, and
encoding of FEC/AFEC. Then the module outputs eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
to the PID module.
The eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals and the four channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
sent from the ENQ2 board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which are
finally output through the OUT optical interface.
Receive direction
The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical
interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and
demultiplexes the signal into twelve channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals.
Four of the twelve channels OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the ENQ2 board, and the
remaining eight channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-73
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2/OTU2e framing, and FEC/
AFEC decoding for the signals. Finally, the signal processing module outputs 64 channels
of ODU0 or 32 channels of ODU1 or eight channels of ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals.
The electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the backplane.
Module Function
l
PID module
WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into
twelve channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical
signals.
WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical
signals, and integrates twelve channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed
signals.

The module consists of the cross-connect module and OTN processing module.
Implements the grooming of electrical signals between the NPO2 and the cross-connect
board through the backplane. The grooming service signals are ODU0/ODU1/ODU2
signals
Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC
coding and decoding.
1588 module
In the case of grooming of ODU0, ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e signals through the backplane,
the 1588 module can send the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to
board.
NOTE
The NPO2 board supports one channel of 1588 signals on the WDM side. This channel of 1588 signals
can be configured as any one of the 8 channels of signals.

the CPU.
Power supply module

on the board.
10-74

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
10.5.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators and optical interfaces on the front panel of the NPO2.

Figure 10-33 shows the front panel of the TN54NPO2.
Figure 10-34 shows the front panel of the TN55NPO2.
Figure 10-33 Front panel of the TN54NPO2
NPO2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
NPO2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-34 Front panel of the TN55NPO2

NPO2
NPO2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
LASER
RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY
WITH OPTICAL
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
IN
OUT
IN
PQ2
STAT
NPO2
PQ2 installed
NPO2
PQ2 not installed
NOTE
The TN55NPO2 can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing
board, it can process four more wavelengths. For example, the TN55NPO2S01 can process only the 1st, 5th,
9th, and 13th wavelengths. However, when it is equipped with the TN54PQ2 service processing board, it can
also process the 17th, 21st, 25th, and 29th wavelengths. For details, see 10.5.1 Version Description.
Indicators
There are four indicators on the NPO2 panel.
l
There is one indicator on the PQ2 panel.

l
10-76

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the NPO2. Table 10-32 lists the type and
Table 10-32 Types and functions of the NPO2 interfaces
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives the line signal.
OUT
LC
Transmits the line signal.
Laser Hazard Level

10.5.6 Valid Slots

The NPO2 occupies two slots.
Table 10-33 shows the valid slots for the NPO2 board.
Table 10-33 Valid slots for the NPO2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU47, IU51, IU55, IU59, IU63, IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU3, IU7, IU13, IU17
NOTE
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the
slot number of the NPO2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots.
For example, if the NPO2 occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the NPO2 displayed on the NM is
IU3.
10.5.7 Characteristic Code of the NPO2

The characteristic code for the NPO2 consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-77
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-34 Characteristic code for the NPO2

Code
Meaning
Description
The first three digits
The frequency of optical

signal
The last three digits of the

WDM side.
The last three digits

signal

frequency value of the last
WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN54NPO2 is 605385.

l
"605385" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 196.05 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 193.85 THz.

On the U2000, each optical interface on the NPO2 board has a serial number, and the logical

Table 10-35 Serial numbers of the interfaces on the NPO2 displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 10-35, Figure 10-36, and Figure 10-37 show the NM ports on the NPO2 board. Table
10-78

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-35 Diagram of ports on the NPO2 (backplane-side ODU0-level cross-connections)

WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect
module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Cross-connect
module

Service
processing
module
10-79
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module

Cross-connect
module
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect
module
10-80

Service
processing
module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-36 Meaning of ports on the NPO2

Port Name
Meaning
ODU0LP1-ODU0LP32

and 2.
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP8

2, 3 and 4.
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP8
OCHLP1-OCHLP12
IN/OUT
This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.
If the NPO2 board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
l
If the ODU0 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the NPO2 board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU0LP port on the NPO2
board on the U2000, as shown by (1) in Figure 10-38 or cross-connections from the
ODU0LP ports on other boards to the ODU0LP port on the NPO2 board on the U2000, as
ODU1LP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the NPO2 board on the U2000, as
ODU2LP ports on other boards to the ODU21LP port on the NPO2 board on the U2000,
as shown by (2) in Figure 10-40.
The ODU2LP ports on the ENQ2 and the OCHLP ports on the NPO2 board are of one-toone cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the
U2000. For details, see Figure 10-41.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-81
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-38 Diagram of cross-connections of the NPO2 (ODU0 level)

Client
side
Other
board
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
2
Cross-connect
module
NPO2 board
WDM side
Other board
except ENQ2
Cross-connect
module

side of the NPO2
The WDM side of other boards except ENQ2 are cross-connected to
the WDM side of the NPO2
10-82

1
2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Client
side
Other
board
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
2
Cross-connect
module
NPO2 board
WDM side
Other board
except ENQ2
Cross-connect
module

side of the NPO2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1
2
10-83
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Client
side
Other
board
Cross-connect
module
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
NPO2 board
WDM side
Other board
except ENQ2
Cross-connect
module

side of the NPO2
10-84

1
2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-41 Diagram of cross-connections between the NPO2 and ENQ2

WDM side
ENQ2
WDM side
NPO2
10.5.9 NPO2 Parameters

For parameters of the NPO2, refer to Table 10-37.
Table 10-37 NPO2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-85
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
Configure Band
Sets the working band type of a board.
Default: C
Actual Band
Queries the actual working band of the

board.
Loopback
Outloop

Channel Loopback
Outloop
Queries or sets path Loopback.
Service Mode
Automatic, ODU0,
ODU1, ODU2
Default: Automatic
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: On
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: FEC
10-86

the line side.
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)

Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
Planned Wavelength
Frequency (THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.10
0

board.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330
to
18/1611.00/188.78
0
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
NOTE
Only C band is supported.

information.
wavelength.
NOTE

OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled
Line Rate
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Default: Disabled
Default: Standard
Mode
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

Disabled.
information.
commissioning.
10.5.10 Specifications of the NPO2

consumption.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-87
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Table 10-38 Specifications of the PID optical module on the DWDM side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
PID
NRZ

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05

power (single wavelength)
dBm

dBm
-7
dB
6.5
GHz
nm
0.8
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
200

Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

enabled) EOL
dBm
-10.5
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
10-88
TN54NPO2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)
TN55NPO2: 1.7 kg (3.7 lb.)

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN54NPO2
134
147
TN55NPO2
143
157.3
10.6 PTQX
PTQX: 12 x OTU2 PID board with 4 x 10G tributary
The available functional version of the PTQX board is TN12.
10.6.2 Application
The PTQX is an PID unit. The PTQX board can map four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals into four OTU2(e) signals, or map four ODU2(e) signals or 16
ODU1 signals from another board into four OTU2(e) signals. The PTQX also receives eight
OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board and integrates the 12 OTU2(e) signals into one channel
of optical signals for output. The reverse process is similar.
The PTQX provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS.
The PTQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, PID
10.6.5 Front Panel
There are four indicators and 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the PTQX.
10.6.6 Valid Slots
The PTQX occupies two slots.
10.6.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX
The characteristic code for the PTQX consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency
On the U2000, each optical interface on the PTQX board has a serial number, and the logical
10.6.9 PTQX Parameters
10.6.10 Specifications of the PTQX
consumption.

The available functional version of the PTQX board is TN12.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-89
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
One PID can use only certain wavelengths, as listed in Table 10-39. Table 10-40 lists the
wavelength numbers and the relations between the wavelengths and frequencies.
Table 10-39 Wavelength allocation table of a PID (ELQX+PTQX)
Serial
No.
Wavelength No.
of the ELQX (on
the Left)
Wavelength No.
of the PTQX
Wavelength No.
of the ELQX (on
the Right)
PTQX Type
33, 37, 41, 45
1, 5, 9, 13
17, 21, 25, 29
TN12PTQX01
34, 38, 42, 46
2, 6, 10, 14
18, 22, 26, 30
TN12PTQX02
35, 39, 43, 47
3, 7, 11, 15
19, 23, 27, 31
TN12PTQX03
36, 40, 44, 48
4, 8, 12, 16
20, 24, 28, 32
TN12PTQX04
49, 53, 57, 61
65, 69, 73, 77
TN12PTQX05
50, 54, 58, 62
66, 70, 74, 78
TN12PTQX06
51, 55, 59, 63
67, 71, 75, 79
TN12PTQX07
52, 56, 60, 64
68, 72, 76, 80
TN12PTQX08
NOTE
For the wavelength groups indicated by serial numbers 5-8, only one PTQX board and one ELQX board
are required and the ELQX board should be housed on the right of the PTQX board.
Table 10-40 Frequencies and wavelengths of a C-band 80-channel (50 GHz-spaced) system
10-90
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
196.05
1529.16
41
194.05
1544.92
196.00
1529.55
42
194.00
1545.32
195.95
1529.94
43
193.95
1545.72
195.90
1530.33
44
193.90
1546.12
195.85
1530.72
45
193.85
1546.52
195.80
1531.12
46
193.80
1546.92
195.75
1531.51
47
193.75
1547.32
195.70
1531.90
48
193.70
1547.72
195.65
1532.29
49
193.65
1548.11
10
195.60
1532.68
50
193.60
1548.51

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
10 PID Unit
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
11
195.55
1533.07
51
193.55
1548.91
12
195.50
1533.47
52
193.50
1549.32
13
195.45
1533.86
53
193.45
1549.72
14
195.40
1534.25
54
193.40
1550.12
15
195.35
1534.64
55
193.35
1550.52
16
195.30
1535.04
56
193.30
1550.92
17
195.25
1535.43
57
193.25
1551.32
18
195.20
1535.82
58
193.20
1551.72
19
195.15
1536.22
59
193.15
1552.12
20
195.10
1536.61
60
193.10
1552.52
21
195.05
1537.00
61
193.05
1552.93
22
195.00
1537.40
62
193.00
1553.33
23
194.95
1537.79
63
192.95
1553.73
24
194.90
1538.19
64
192.90
1554.13
25
194.85
1538.58
65
192.85
1554.54
26
194.80
1538.98
66
192.80
1554.94
27
194.75
1539.37
67
192.75
1555.34
28
194.70
1539.77
68
192.70
1555.75
29
194.65
1540.16
69
192.65
1556.15
30
194.60
1540.56
70
192.60
1556.55
31
194.55
1540.95
71
192.55
1556.96
32
194.50
1541.35
72
192.50
1557.36
33
194.45
1541.75
73
192.45
1557.77
34
194.40
1542.14
74
192.40
1558.17
35
194.35
1542.54
75
192.35
1558.58
36
194.30
1542.94
76
192.30
1558.98
37
194.25
1543.33
77
192.25
1559.39
38
194.20
1543.73
78
192.20
1559.79
39
194.15
1544.13
79
192.15
1560.20

10-91
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Wavelengt
h No.
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
40
194.10
1544.53
80
192.10
1560.61
10.6.2 Application
The PTQX is an PID unit. The PTQX board can map four 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e signals into four OTU2(e) signals, or map four ODU2(e) signals or 16
ODU1 signals from another board into four OTU2(e) signals. The PTQX also receives eight
OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board and integrates the 12 OTU2(e) signals into one channel
of optical signals for output. The reverse process is similar.
For the position of the PTQX in a WDM system, see Figure 10-42.
Figure 10-42 Position of the PTQX in a WDM system
4
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/ 4
OTU2/
OTU2e
ELQX 4
ELQX 4
OA
PTQX
OA
BMD4
BMD4
OA
PTQX 4
ELQX
ELQX
OA
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
4 OC-192/
OTU2/
OTU2e
4

The PTQX provides functions and features such as OTN interfaces, ESC, and ALS.
Table 10-41 provides the details about the functions and features of the PTQX.
NOTE
Only the OptiX OSN 6800 supports the cross-connection of ODU1 or ODU2/ODU2e electrical signals between
the PTQX board and the cross-connect board.
10-92

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-41 Functions and features of the PTQX

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Accesses four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192,

OTU2 or OTU2e client-side signals, maps the signals into OTU2(e)
signals, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM wavelengths
compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is similar. Hybrid
transmission of the preceding signals is supported.
l Accesses 16 x ODU1 or 4 x ODU2(e) signals from the backplane, maps
the signals into 4 x OTU2(e) signals, and converts the signals into the
standard DWDM wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The
reverse process is similar. Hybrid access of ODU1 or ODU2(e) is
supported.
l Accesses 8 x OTU2(e) signals from the ELQX board through the
backplane, and converts the signals into the standard DWDM
wavelengths compliant with ITU-T G.694.1. The reverse process is
similar.
l Integrates 12 x OTU2(e) signals into one channel of optical signals.
Client-side
service type

l Maps a maximum of four channels of client-side signals to OTU2/
OTU2e signals. The encapsulation and mapping comply with ITU-T G.
7041, ITU-T G.709, and GDPS.
OTN function
l Supports the PM and TCM functions for ODU1.

l Supports the SM and PM functions for OTU2 and ODU2.
l Supports the TCM function for ODU2.
WDM
specification
ESC function
service signal.
PRBS function
NOTE
type is STM-64/OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e.
LPT function
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
is 10GE LAN.

10-93
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Function and
Feature
Description
FEC encoding

975.
NOTE
Alarms and
performance
events
monitoring
Provides optical power detection and reports alarms and performance

events of the board.
ALS function
The client-side optical module provides the ALS function. With the ALS
function enabled, the corresponding optical output laser is automatically
shut down if no signals are received.
Optical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Not supported
Protection
scheme

XFP
Supports the 10 Gbit/s pluggable optical module on the client side.
Loopback
WDM side
Client side
Protocol or
standard
compliance
10-94
Protocols or
monitoring) with
which
transparently
transmitted
services comply
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
IEEE 802.3ae
ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.782
ITU-T G.783

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Function and
Feature
Description
Protocols or
standards
(performance
monitoring) for
processing
services
ITU-T G.805
ITU-T G.806
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.694.1

The PTQX board consists of the client-side optical module, signal processing module, PID
Figure 10-43 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN
8800.
Figure 10-44 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN
6800.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-95
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-43 Functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 8800
Backplane
8OTU2(e)
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
4
OTN
processing
module
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
OUT
PID
Module
IN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
10-96

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-44 Functional modules and signal flow of the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800
Backplane
8OTU2(e)
4xODU2(e)/16xODU1
Client side
RX1
RX2
RX3
SDH/SONET
encapsulation and
mapping module
O/E
RX4
TX1
TX2
TX3
TX4
E/O
Client-side
optical
module
10GE-LAN
encapsulation and
mapping module
4
OTN
processing
module
OUT
PID
Module
IN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The client side of the PTQX board can access the following optical signals:
l
In the signal flow of the PTQX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the PTQX to the WDM side
of the PTQX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l
Transmit direction
equipment through the RX1-RX4 interfaces, and converts the optical signals into electrical
signals. The PTQX can also receive four ODU2/ODU2e signals or 16 ODU1 signals from
the backbone.
The electrical signals converted from client optical signals or 16 x ODU1 or 4 x ODU2/
ODU2e signals are transmitted to the signal processing module. Different types of signals
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-97
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
are sent to the corresponding encapsulation and mapping modules. The module performs
operations such as encapsulation, mapping, and OTN framing. Then, the module sends out
four channels of OTU2(e) signals to the PID module.
The four OTU2(e) signals and the eight OTU2(e) signals cross-connected through the
backplane from the ELQX board are integrated into one channel of optical signals, which
are finally output through the OUT optical interface.
l
Receive direction
The PID module receives one optical signal from the WDM side through the IN optical
interfaces. Then, the module converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and
demultiplexes the signal into 12 OTU2(e) signals.
Eight of the 12 OTU2(e) signals are cross-connected through the backplane to the ELQX
board, and the remaining four OTU2(e) signals are transmitted to the signal processing
module. Then, the signal processing module performs OTU2(e) framing, FEC/AFEC
decoding, demapping, and decapsulation for the signals. Finally, the signal processing
module outputs four channels of electrical signals.
The four channels of electrical signals are cross-connected to other boards through the
backplane or transmitted to the client-side optical modules. Then, the four channels of
electrical signals are converted into four channels of optical signals that are output through
the TX1-TX4 optical interfaces.
NOTE
In the OptiX OSN 6800: The PTQX board can receive service signals from the client side or from other boards
through the backplane. One ODU2LP port can only receive one channel of signals either from the client side or
from the backplane.
Module Function
l

Client-side receiver: converts four channels of 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64,
OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals into electrical signals.
Client-side transmitter: converts four channels of internal electrical signals into 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, OC-192, OTU2 or OTU2e optical signals.
PID module
WDM-side receiver: demultiplexes the WDM-side multiplexed optical signals into 12
channels of optical signals, and then converts the optical signals to electrical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: converts the internal electrical signals into OTU2 optical
signals, and integrates 12 channels of signals into one channel of multiplexed signals.

module.
10-98

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Encapsulates SDH/SONET signals and maps the signals into the OTU2 payload area.
This module also performs the reverse process and monitors SDH/SONET performance.
OTU2/OTU2e payload area. This module also performs the reverse process and
monitors 10GE LAN performance.
Frames OTU2 signals, processes overheads in OTU2 signals, and performs FEC/AFEC
coding and decoding.
l

the CPU.
Power supply module

on the board.
10.6.5 Front Panel

There are four indicators and 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the PTQX.

Figure 10-45 shows the front panel of the PTQX.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-99
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-45 Front panel of the PTQX
PTQX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
OUT
IN
TX4
RX4
PTQX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 10 optical interfaces on the front panel of the PTQX. Table 10-42 lists the type and
10-100

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-42 Types and functions of the PTQX interfaces

Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC
TX1-TX4
LC
Transmits the service signal to the client-side

equipment.
RX1-RX4
LC
Receives the service signal from the client-side

equipment.
Laser Hazard Level

10.6.6 Valid Slots

The PTQX occupies two slots.
Table 10-43 shows the valid slots for the PTQX board.
Table 10-43 Valid slots for the PTQX board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU47, IU51, IU55, IU59, IU63, IU67
OptiX OSN 6800
IU3, IU7, IU13
NOTE
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot on the subrack. Therefore, the
slot number of the PTQX board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two occupied slots.
For example, if the PTQX occupies slots IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the PTQX displayed on the NM is
IU3.
10.6.7 Characteristic Code of the PTQX

The characteristic code for the PTQX consists of six digits, respectively indicating the frequency
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-101
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-44 Characteristic code for the PTQX

Code
Meaning
Description
The first three digits

signal

WDM side.
The last three digits

signal

frequency value of the last
WDM side.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12PTQX is 605385.

l
"605385" indicates the frequency of the first channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 196.05 THz, and the frequency of the last channel of optical signals on the WDM side
is 193.85 THz.

On the U2000, each optical interface on the PTQX board has a serial number, and the logical

Table 10-45 Serial numbers of the interfaces on the PTQX displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
NOTE
Port Description
Figure 10-46, Figure 10-47, and Figure 10-48 show the NM ports on the PTQX board. Table
10-102

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-46 Diagram of ports on the PTQX (cross-connections of client-side services)

Client side
3(RX1/TX1)
4(RX2/TX2)
5(RX3/TX3)
6(RX4/TX4)
Service
processing
module
Service
processing
module
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect
module
Figure 10-47 Diagram of ports on the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800(backplane-side ODU1level cross-connections)
Backplane
WDM side
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect
module
Cross-connect
module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Service
processing
module
10-103
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-48 Diagram of ports on the PTQX in the OptiX OSN 6800(backplane-side ODU2level cross-connections)
Backplane
WDM side
Cross-connect
module
1(IN/OUT)
Cross-connect
module
Service
processing
module
Table 10-46 Meaning of ports on the PTQX

Port Name
Meaning
RX1/TX1-RX4/TX4

interfaces.
ClientLP1-ClientLP4
ODU1LP1-ODU1LP4

2, 3 and 4.
ODU2LP1-ODU2LP4
OCHLP1-OCHLP12
IN/OUT
This port corresponds to the WDM-side optical interface.
If the PTQX board is used to transmit services, the following items must be created on the
U2000:
10-104
During creation of the electrical cross-connect services on the U2000, create the crossconnection between the ClientLP port and the ODU2LP port on the PTQX board, as shown
by (1) in Figure 10-49.
If the ODU1 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, reate crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU1LP port on the PTQX
board on the U2000, as shown in Figure 10-50.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
If the ODU2 signals of other boards are cross-connected to the PTQX board, create crossconnections from the ClientLP ports on other boards to the ODU2LP port on the PTQX
board on the U2000, as shown by (2) in Figure 10-49.
The ODU2LP ports on the ELQX and the OCHLP ports on the PTQX board are of one-toone cross-connections. Therefore, the cross-connections do not need to be created on the
U2000. For details, see Figure 10-51.
Figure 10-49 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU2 level)

Client side
WDM side
PTQX board

Client side
Other board
except ELQX
Client side
WDM side
PTQX board

the PTQX board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

1
2
10-105
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-50 Diagram of cross-connections of the PTQX (ODU1 level)

Client side
Other board
except ELQX
WDM side
PTQX board
the PTQX board
10-106

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Figure 10-51 Diagram of cross-connections between the PTQX and ELQX

Client side
ELQX board
WDM side
2
PTQX board
Client side
ELQX board
Fixed cross-connection between the first ELQX board and the

Fixed cross-connection between the second ELQX board and the

10.6.9 PTQX Parameters

For parameters of the PTQX, refer toTable 10-47.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

10-107
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Table 10-47 PTQX parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Loopback
Outloop
Channel Loopback
Outloop

Service Type
10GE LAN, OC-192,

OTU-2, OTU-2E,
STM-64

Default: 10GE LAN

Port Mapping
Bit Transparent
Mapping(11.1G), MAC
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G), Bit
Transparent Mapping
(10.7G)

service.
Default: Bit
Transparent Mapping
(11.1G)
Laser Status
Off, On
Default:
l WDM side: On

l Client side: Off

Automatic Laser
Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default:
l WDM side: Enabled
l Client side:
Disabled
10-108

information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
LPT Enabled
Enabled, Disabled

pass-through (LPT).
Default: Disabled
Service Mode
Automatic, ODU1,
ODU2
Default: Automatic
FEC Working State
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
FEC Mode
FEC, AFEC
Default: AFEC

Actual Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)

Actual Band Type
Tunable Wavelength
Range

board.
Planned Wavelength
No./Wavelength
(nm)/Frequency
(THz)
l C:
1/1529.16/196.050 80/1560.61/192.100

board.
information.
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
Default: C
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

the line side.

wavelength.

10-109
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Field
Value
Description
OTN Overhead
Transparent
Transmission
Enabled, Disabled

Disabled.
Default: Disabled
NOTE
Standard Mode,
Speedup Mode
Line Rate

B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG
Default: None
PRBS Test Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
NULL Mapping
Status
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled

information.
board resides.
information.
commissioning.
10.6.10 Specifications of the PTQX

consumption.
10-110

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit

Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
80 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
0.3 km
Line code format
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
NRZ
Optical source
type
SLM
SLM
SLM
MLM
Target distance
km
10
40
80
0.3

Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
840 to 860
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
-1
-1.3
Minimum mean
launched power
dBm
-6
-1
-7.3
Minimum
extinction ratio
dB
8.2
Maximum -20
dB spectral
width
nm
NA
NA
NA
NA
Minimum side
mode
suppression ratio
dB
30
30
30
30
Eye pattern
mask
ITU-T G.691-compliant
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
PIN
APD
PIN
Operating
wavelength
range
nm
1290 to 1330
1260 to 1605
1270 to 1600
840 to 860
Receiver
sensitivity
(multirate)
dBm
-11
-14
-24
-7.5

10-111
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Optical
Module Type
Value
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
80 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate,
0.3 km
Receiver
sensitivity (10
GE)
dBm
-14.4
-15.8
-24
-7.5
Minimum
receiver
overload
dBm
-1(multirate)/
0.5(10GE
LAN)
-1
-7
-1
Maximum
reflectance
dB
-27
-27
-27
-12
Table 10-49 Specifications of the DWDM optical module on the client side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
800 ps/nm (XFP)
NRZ 40-wavelength fixed

Central wavelength
THz
192.10 to 196.00

power
dBm

power
dBm
-3
dB
GHz
10
nm
0.3
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
ps/nm
800
10-112
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity (FEC on)

EOL
dBm
-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type
Value
800 ps/nm (XFP)

(FEC on)
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

Table 10-50 Specifications of the PID optical module on the DWDM side
Item
Unit
Optical Module Type

Line code format
Value
PID
NRZ

Central frequency
THz
192.10 to 196.05

dBm

dBm
-7
dB
6.5
GHz
nm
0.8
Minimum side mode

suppression ratio
dB
30
ps/nm
200
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver type
PIN
nm
1200 to 1650

enabled) EOL
dBm
-10.5
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
-27

10-113
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

10 PID Unit
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 3 kg (7 lb.)
Power Consumption
10-114
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
PTQX
93.6
107.6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

11
11 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing Unit
Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexing

Unit
About This Chapter

11.1 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing board
11.2 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA
11.3 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board
11.4 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA
11.5 DFIU
DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board
11.6 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit
11.7 ITL
ITL: interleaver board
11.8 SFIU
SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

11.1 M40
M40: 40-channel multiplexing board
The available functional version of the M40 board is TN11.
11.1.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40 board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels
of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
The M40 board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals, and
monitor alarms and performance events.
The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
11.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board.
11.1.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one M40 board.
11.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40
The characteristic code for the M40 board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
the other indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board
are odd or even.
11.1.8 Optical Interfaces
11.1.9 M40 Parameters
11.1.10 Specifications of the M40

The available functional version of the M40 board is TN11.
Type
Table 11-1 lists the types of the TN11M40 board.
11-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 11-1 Type description of the M40 board

Unit
Type
Description
TN11M4
0
01
Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
02
Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
11.1.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40 board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels
of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations.
For the position of the M40 board in the WDM system, see Figure 11-1.
Figure 11-1 Position of the M40 board in the WDM system
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
M40
OA
OA
D40
40
40
1
D40
OA
OA
M40
40
40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

The M40 board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals, and
monitor alarms and performance events.
Table 11-2 Functions and features of the M40 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels of signals into one channel

of multiplexed signals.
l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Provides an online monitoring interface. A small number of optical

signals can be output to the spectrum analyzer or spectrum analyzer
unit through the interface to monitor the spectrum and optical
performance of the multiplexed signals with no service interruption.

11-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Detects optical power and reports alarms and performance events of

the board.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The M40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
Figure 11-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board.
Figure 11-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40 board
M01
M02
Multiplexer
Optical module
Splitter
OUT
M40
MON
Temperature Temperature
control
detection
PIN
Detection and temperature control module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical
signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer. The multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels
11-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of multiplexed optical signals, and then
outputs them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of
multiplexed optical signals.

Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature.
Detects in real time the output optical power of service signals.

Power supply module

11.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board.

Figure 11-3 shows the front panel of the M40 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-3 Front panel of the M40 board
M40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M01 196.00 M11 195.00

M02 195.90 M12 194.90
M03 195.80 M13 194.80
M04 195.70 M14 194.70
M05 195.60 M15 194.60
M06 195.50 M16 194.50
M07 195.40 M17 194.40
M08 195.30 M18 194.30
M09 195.20 M19 194.20
M10 195.10 M20 194.10
M21 194.00
M22 193.90
M23 193.80
M24 193.70
M25 193.60
M26 193.50
M27 193.40
M28 193.30
M29 193.20
M30 193.10
M31 193.00
M32 192.90
M33 192.80
M34 192.70
M35 192.60
M36 192.50
M37 192.40
M38 192.30
M39 192.20
M40 192.10
M27 M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35 M36
M37
M38
M25 M26
M39 M40
M11 M12
M24
M10
M23
M09
M21 M22
M07 M08
M20
M06
M19
M05
M18
M04
M17
M03
M16
M02
M15
M01
M14
M13
MON OUT
M40
NOTE
A table indicating the mapping relationship between interfaces and frequencies is located on the front panel.
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board. Table 11-3 lists the type
11-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 11-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40 board
Interface
Type
Function
M01-M40
LC
Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected

to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs.
OUT
LC
Transmits multiplexed signals, when connected to an

optical amplifying board or ITL.
MON
LC
Accomplishes online monitoring of optical spectrum,

when connected to the input interface of the MCA4,
MCA8 or OPM8.
The MON port is a 10/90 tap of the total composite
signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 input interfaces on the front panel of the M40 board. Table 11-4 and Table 11-5
show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the M40 board.
Table 11-4 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the
TN11M4001 board (C_EVEN)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.00
1529.55
M21
194.00
1545.32
M02
195.90
1530.33
M22
193.90
1546.12
M03
195.80
1531.12
M23
193.80
1546.92
M04
195.70
1531.90
M24
193.70
1547.72
M05
195.60
1532.68
M25
193.60
1548.51
M06
195.50
1533.47
M26
193.50
1549.32
M07
195.40
1534.25
M27
193.40
1550.12
M08
195.30
1535.04
M28
193.30
1550.92
M09
195.20
1535.82
M29
193.20
1551.72
M10
195.10
1536.61
M30
193.10
1552.52
M11
195.00
1537.40
M31
193.00
1553.33
M12
194.90
1538.19
M32
192.90
1554.13
M13
194.80
1538.98
M33
192.80
1554.94
M14
194.70
1539.77
M34
192.70
1555.75
M15
194.60
1540.56
M35
192.60
1556.55

11-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M16
194.50
1541.35
M36
192.50
1557.36
M17
194.40
1542.14
M37
192.40
1558.17
M18
194.30
1542.94
M38
192.30
1558.98
M19
194.20
1543.73
M39
192.20
1559.79
M20
194.10
1544.53
M40
192.10
1560.61
Table 11-5 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the
TN11M4002 board (C_ODD)
11-8
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.05
1529.16
M21
194.05
1544.92
M02
195.95
1529.94
M22
193.95
1545.72
M03
195.85
1530.72
M23
193.85
1546.52
M04
195.75
1531.51
M24
193.75
1547.32
M05
195.65
1532.29
M25
193.65
1548.11
M06
195.55
1533.07
M26
193.55
1548.91
M07
195.45
1533.86
M27
193.45
1549.72
M08
195.35
1534.64
M28
193.35
1550.52
M09
195.25
1535.43
M29
193.25
1551.32
M10
195.15
1536.22
M30
193.15
1552.12
M11
195.05
1537.00
M31
193.05
1552.93
M12
194.95
1537.79
M32
192.95
1553.73
M13
194.85
1538.58
M33
192.85
1554.54
M14
194.75
1539.37
M34
192.75
1555.34
M15
194.65
1540.16
M35
192.65
1556.15
M16
194.55
1540.95
M36
192.55
1556.96
M17
194.45
1541.75
M37
192.45
1557.77
M18
194.35
1542.54
M38
192.35
1558.58
M19
194.25
1543.33
M39
192.25
1559.39
M20
194.15
1544.13
M40
192.15
1560.20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Laser Hazard Level

11.1.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one M40 board.
Table 11-6 shows the valid slots for the M40 board.
Table 11-6 Valid slots for the M40 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16, IU19-IU24, IU27-IU32, IU35IU40, IU45-IU50, IU53-IU58, IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU25, and IU29-IU34
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the M40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost
one of the three slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the M40 board, the slot number of the M40 board
11.1.7 Characteristic Code for the M40

are odd or even.
Table 11-7 Characteristic code for the M40 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band
Indicates the band of the

optical signals processed by
the board. The value C
represents C band; the value
L represents L band.

11-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
Second character
Odd/even wavelengths
Indicates whether the

wavelengths that carry
signals are odd or even
wavelengths. The value E
represents even wavelengths;
the value O represents odd
wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.


Table 11-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
OUT
M01-M40
2-41
MON
42
11.1.9 M40 Parameters

For M40 parameters, refer to Table 11-9.
Table 11-9 M40 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Configure Band
Default: C
11-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Actual Band
Queries the actual working band of the board.
Actual Working
Band Parity
Queries the parity of the actual working band

of the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Selects the desired parity of the working band.
Default: Even
11.1.10 Specifications of the M40

Table 11-10 lists the optical specifications of the M40 board.
Table 11-10 Optical specifications of the M40 board
Item
Unit
Value
Adjacent channel spacing
GHz
100
Insertion loss
dB
6.5
Reflectance
dB
< -40
nm
1529-1561
Adjacent channel isolation
dB
> 22
Non-adjacent channel isolation
dB
> 25
Polarization dependence loss
dB
0.5
Temperature characteristics
nm/C
0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference
dB
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
M40
10.0
13.0
11.2 M40V
M40V: 40-channel multiplexing board with VOA
The available functional version of the M40V board is TN11.
11.2.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40V board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels
of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and adjusts
the input optical power of each channel.
The M40V board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals,
monitor alarms and performance events, and adjust optical power.
The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
control and communication module, and power supply module.
11.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board.
11.2.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one M40V board.
11.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V
The characteristic code for the M40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
11.2.9 M40V Parameters
11.2.10 Specifications of the M40V

The available functional version of the M40V board is TN11.
11-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Type
Table 11-11 lists the types of the TN11M40V board.
Table 11-11 Type description of the M40V board
Unit
Type
Description
TN11M4
0V
01
Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
02
Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
11.2.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing unit, the M40V board multiplexes a maximum of 40 channels
of signals into one channel of signals that comply with ITU-T Recommendations, and adjusts
the input optical power of each channel.
For the position of the M40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 11-4.
Figure 11-4 Position of the M40V board in the WDM system
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
M40V
OA
OA
D40
40
40
1
D40
OA
OA
M40V
40
40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

The M40V board is mainly used to multiplex signals, monitor performance of optical signals,
monitor alarms and performance events, and adjust optical power.
Table 11-12 Functions and features of the M40V board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one multiplexed signal and

adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
l Multiplexes 40 C_EVEN channels into one main path.
l Multiplexes 40 C_ODD channels into one main path.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Adjusts the optical power of each signal before multiplexing.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The M40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
Figure 11-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board.
Figure 11-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the M40V board
M01
M02
Optical module
Multiplexer
VOA
Splitter
VOA
OUT
VOA
M40
MON
VOA Temperature
control
control
Temperature
detection
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
11-14

Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
Each of the M01-M40 optical interfaces receives one channel of single-wavelength optical
signals, and sends the signals to the multiplexer after the optical power adjustment by VOA. The
multiplexer multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel
of multiplexed optical signals, and then outputs them through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals before multiplexing.
Multiplexes the 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals into one channel of
multiplexed optical signals.

Monitors and controls in real time the multiplexer operating temperature.

Power supply module

11.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board.

Figure 11-6 shows the front panel of the M40V board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-6 Front panel of the M40V board
M40V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
M01 196.00 M11 195.00

M02 195.90 M12 194.90
M03 195.80 M13 194.80
M04 195.70 M14 194.70
M05 195.60 M15 194.60
M06 195.50 M16 194.50
M07 195.40 M17 194.40
M08 195.30 M18 194.30
M09 195.20 M19 194.20
M10 195.10 M20 194.10
M21 194.00
M22 193.90
M23 193.80
M24 193.70
M25 193.60
M26 193.50
M27 193.40
M28 193.30
M29 193.20
M30 193.10
M31193.00
M32192.90
M33192.80
M34192.70
M35192.60
M36192.50
M37192.40
M38192.30
M39192.20
M40192.10
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
M35 M36
M37
M24
M38
M25 M26
M39 M40
M11 M12
M23
M10
M21 M22
M09
M20
M07 M08
M19
M06
M18
M05
M17
M04
M16
M03
M15
M02
M14
M01
M13
MON OUT
M40V
NOTE
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board. Table 11-13 lists the type
11-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 11-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the M40V board
Interface
Type
Function
M01-M40
LC
Receives the signals to be multiplexed, when connected

to the "OUT" interface of the OTUs.
OUT
LC
Transmits the multiplexed signals, when connected to

an optical amplifier or ITL.
MON
LC

MCA8 or OPM8 board.
signal at the OUT port (10dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 input interfaces on the front panel of the M40V board. Table 11-14 and Table
11-15 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency, and wavelengths of the M40V board.
Table 11-14 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V
board (even)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.00
1529.55
M21
194.00
1545.32
M02
195.90
1530.33
M22
193.90
1546.12
M03
195.80
1531.12
M23
193.80
1546.92
M04
195.70
1531.90
M24
193.70
1547.72
M05
195.60
1532.68
M25
193.60
1548.51
M06
195.50
1533.47
M26
193.50
1549.32
M07
195.40
1534.25
M27
193.40
1550.12
M08
195.30
1535.04
M28
193.30
1550.92
M09
195.20
1535.82
M29
193.20
1551.72
M10
195.10
1536.61
M30
193.10
1552.52
M11
195.00
1537.40
M31
193.00
1553.33
M12
194.90
1538.19
M32
192.90
1554.13
M13
194.80
1538.98
M33
192.80
1554.94
M14
194.70
1539.77
M34
192.70
1555.75
M15
194.60
1540.56
M35
192.60
1556.55

11-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M16
194.50
1541.35
M36
192.50
1557.36
M17
194.40
1542.14
M37
192.40
1558.17
M18
194.30
1542.94
M38
192.30
1558.98
M19
194.20
1543.73
M39
192.20
1559.79
M20
194.10
1544.53
M40
192.10
1560.61
Table 11-15 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies, and wavelengths of the M40V
board (odd)
11-18
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.05
1529.16
M21
194.05
1544.92
M02
195.95
1529.94
M22
193.95
1545.72
M03
195.85
1530.72
M23
193.85
1546.52
M04
195.75
1531.51
M24
193.75
1547.32
M05
195.65
1532.29
M25
193.65
1548.11
M06
195.55
1533.07
M26
193.55
1548.91
M07
195.45
1533.86
M27
193.45
1549.72
M08
195.35
1534.64
M28
193.35
1550.52
M09
195.25
1535.43
M29
193.25
1551.32
M10
195.15
1536.22
M30
193.15
1552.12
M11
195.05
1537.00
M31
193.05
1552.93
M12
194.95
1537.79
M32
192.95
1553.73
M13
194.85
1538.58
M33
192.85
1554.54
M14
194.75
1539.37
M34
192.75
1555.34
M15
194.65
1540.16
M35
192.65
1556.15
M16
194.55
1540.95
M36
192.55
1556.96
M17
194.45
1541.75
M37
192.45
1557.77
M18
194.35
1542.54
M38
192.35
1558.58
M19
194.25
1543.33
M39
192.25
1559.39
M20
194.15
1544.13
M40
192.15
1560.20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Laser Hazard Level

11.2.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one M40V board.
Table 11-16 shows the valid slots for the M40V board.
Table 11-16 Valid slots for the M40V board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU17, IU20-IU25, and IU29IU34
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
Therefore, the slot number of the M40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the M40V board, the slot number of the M40V
11.2.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V

are odd or even.
Table 11-17 Characteristic code for the M40V board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band


11-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
Second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and
even wavelengths.


Table 11-18 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the M40V board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
OUT
M01-M40
2-41
MON
42
11.2.9 M40V Parameters

For M40V parameters, refer to Table 11-19.
Table 11-19 M40V parameters
11-20
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio

(dB) parameter sets the optical power
attenuation of a board channel so that the
optical power of the output signals at the
transmit end is within the preset range.
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
You can obtain the value range of this

parameter by querying the corresponding
Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max.
Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
See D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation
Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface) for more
information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter

queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed
by the current optical interface of a board.
See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter

queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed
See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB)
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: Even
11.2.10 Specifications of the M40V

Table 11-20 lists the optical specifications of the M40V board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 11-20 Optical specifications of the M40V board

Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
Insertion loss
dB
8a
Reflectance
dB
< -40
nm
1529-1561
dB
> 22
dB
> 25
Attenuation range
dB
0-15
Loss accuracy
dB
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
dB
0.5
dB
3a
NOTE
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
M40V
20.0
24.95
11.3 D40
D40: 40-channel demultiplexing board
The available functional version of the D40 board is TN11.
11.3.2 Application
The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexing unit. The D40 implements the demultiplexing of
one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
11-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring.
The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
11.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the D40 front panel.
11.3.6 Valid Slots
The D40 occupies three slots.
11.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40
The characteristic code for the D40 consists of two characters. One indicates the band. The other
indicates whether the wavelengths that carry the optical signals processed by the board are odd
or even wavelengths.
11.3.9 D40 Parameters
11.3.10 Specifications of the D40
Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.

The available functional version of the D40 board is TN11.
Type
Table 11-21 lists the types of the TN11D40.
Table 11-21 Type description of the D40
Unit
Type
Description
TN11D40
01
Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
02
Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
11.3.2 Application
The D40 is a type of optical demultiplexing unit. The D40 implements the demultiplexing of
one optical signal into a maximum of 40 ITU-T Recommendation-compliant WDM signals.
For the position of the D40 in the WDM system, see Figure 11-7.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-7 Position of the D40 in the WDM system

OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
1
M40
OA
OA
D40
40
40
1
D40
OA
OA
M40
40
40
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

The main functions and features supported by the D40 are demultiplexing, online optical
performance monitoring, alarms and performance events monitoring.
Table 11-22 Functions and features of the D40
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of

service.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

the board.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The D40 board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module, control
Figure 11-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40.
11-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40

Optical module
Demultiplexer
Splitter
D01
D02
IN
D40
MON
Temperature
detection
PIN
Temperature
control
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals
to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical
signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the
D01-D40 optical interfaces.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals.

Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature.
Detects in real time the input optical power of service signals.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

11.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the D40 front panel.

Figure 11-9 shows the D40 front panel.
Figure 11-9 D40 front panel
D40
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D01 196.00
D02 195.90
D03 195.80
D04 195.70
D05 195.60
D06 195.50
D07 195.40
D08 195.30
D09 195.20
D10 195.10
D11 195.00
D12 194.90
D13 194.80
D14 194.70
D15 194.60
D16 194.50
D17 194.40
D18 194.30
D19 194.20
D20 194.10
D21 194.00
D22 193.90
D23 193.80
D24 193.70
D25 193.60
D26 193.50
D27 193.40
D28 193.30
D29 193.20
D30 193.10
D31 193.00
D32 192.90
D33 192.80
D34 192.70
D35 192.60
D36 192.50
D37 192.40
D38 192.30
D39 192.20
D40 192.10
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D26
D40
D12
D25
D11
D24
D10
D23
D09
D22
D08
D21
D07
D20
D06
D19
D05
D18
D04
D17
D03
D16
D02
D15
D01
D14
IN
D13
MON
D40
11-26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 11-23 lists the type and function
of each interface.
Table 11-23 Types and functions of the D40 interfaces
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Connected to an optical amplifier or ITL, receives the

signals to be demultiplexed.
D01-D40
LC
Transmit demultiplexed signals to the connected "IN"

interface of the OTUs.
MON
LC
Connected to the input interface of the MCA4, MCA8

or OPM8, accomplishes online monitoring of optical
spectrum.
signal at the IN port (10 dB lower than the actual signal
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg(90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 output interfaces on the D40 front panel. Table 11-24 and Table 11-25 show the
mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the D40 board.
Table 11-24 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
TN11D4001 board (C_EVEN)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01
196.00
1529.55
D21
194.00
1545.32
D02
195.90
1530.33
D22
193.90
1546.12
D03
195.80
1531.12
D23
193.80
1546.92
D04
195.70
1531.90
D24
193.70
1547.72

11-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D05
195.60
1532.68
D25
193.60
1548.51
D06
195.50
1533.47
D26
193.50
1549.32
D07
195.40
1534.25
D27
193.40
1550.12
D08
195.30
1535.04
D28
193.30
1550.92
D09
195.20
1535.82
D29
193.20
1551.72
D10
195.10
1536.61
D30
193.10
1552.52
D11
195.00
1537.40
D31
193.00
1553.33
D12
194.90
1538.19
D32
192.90
1554.13
D13
194.80
1538.98
D33
192.80
1554.94
D14
194.70
1539.77
D34
192.70
1555.75
D15
194.60
1540.56
D35
192.60
1556.55
D16
194.50
1541.35
D36
192.50
1557.36
D17
194.40
1542.14
D37
192.40
1558.17
D18
194.30
1542.94
D38
192.30
1558.98
D19
194.20
1543.73
D39
192.20
1559.79
D20
194.10
1544.53
D40
192.10
1560.61
TN11D4002 board (C_ODD)
11-28
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01
196.05
1529.16
D21
194.05
1544.92
D02
195.95
1529.94
D22
193.95
1545.72
D03
195.85
1530.72
D23
193.85
1546.52
D04
195.75
1531.51
D24
193.75
1547.32
D05
195.65
1532.29
D25
193.65
1548.11
D06
195.55
1533.07
D26
193.55
1548.91
D07
195.45
1533.86
D27
193.45
1549.72
D08
195.35
1534.64
D28
193.35
1550.52
D09
195.25
1535.43
D29
193.25
1551.32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D10
195.15
1536.22
D30
193.15
1552.12
D11
195.05
1537.00
D31
193.05
1552.93
D12
194.95
1537.79
D32
192.95
1553.73
D13
194.85
1538.58
D33
192.85
1554.54
D14
194.75
1539.37
D34
192.75
1555.34
D15
194.65
1540.16
D35
192.65
1556.15
D16
194.55
1540.95
D36
192.55
1556.96
D17
194.45
1541.75
D37
192.45
1557.77
D18
194.35
1542.54
D38
192.35
1558.58
D19
194.25
1543.33
D39
192.25
1559.39
D20
194.15
1544.13
D40
192.15
1560.20
Laser Hazard Level

11.3.6 Valid Slots

The D40 occupies three slots.
Table 11-26 shows the valid slots for the D40 board.
Table 11-26 Valid slots for the D40 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
The back connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack.
Therefore, the slot number of the D40 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost
one of the three occupied slots.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For example, if the D40 occupies slots IU1, IU2 and IU3, the slot number of the D40 displayed
on the NM is IU1.
11.3.7 Characteristic Code for the D40

Table 11-27 Characteristic code for the D40
Code
Meaning
Description
The first character
Band

The second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.


Table 11-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40 displayed on the NM
11-30
Interface on the NM
IN
D01-D40
2-41
MON
42

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

11.3.9 D40 Parameters

For D40 parameters, refer to Table 11-29.
Table 11-29 D40 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)
The Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

parameter queries the threshold value of the
input optical power, which can trigger a board
to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS)
alarm. When the actual input optical power is
lower than this threshold value, the board
reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
See D.52 Threshold of Input Power Loss
(dBm) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Configure Band
C
Default: C
Used to configure type of the working band of

a board.
Actual Band
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: Even
11.3.10 Specifications of the D40

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Table 11-30 lists the optical specifications of the D40.
Table 11-30 Optical specifications of the D40
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100

11-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Insertion loss
dB
6.5
Reflectance
dB
< -40
nm
1529-1561
dB
> 25
dB
> 25
dB
0.5
Temperature characteristics
nm/C
< 0.002
dB
-1 dB bandwidth
nm
0.2
-20 dB bandwidth
nm
< 1.4
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
D40
10.0
13.0
11.4 D40V
D40V: 40-channel demultiplexing board with VOA
The available functional version of the D40V board is TN11.
11.4.2 Application
As a type of optical demultiplexing unit, the D40V demultiplexes one channel of signals into a
maximum of 40 channels of signals that comply with the related ITU-T Recommendations and
adjusts the output optical power of each channel.
The D40V board is mainly used to demultiplex signals, to monitor performance of optical
signals, to monitor alarms and performance events, and to adjust optical power.
11-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
11.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on front panel of the D40V board.
11.4.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one D40V board.
11.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V
The characteristic code for the D40V board contains two characters. One indicates the band and
are odd or even.
11.4.9 D40V Parameters
11.4.10 Specifications of the D40V

The available functional version of the D40V board is TN11.
Type
Table 11-31 lists the types of the TN11D40V board.
Table 11-31 Type description of the D40V board
Unit
Type
Description
TN11D40V
01
Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
02
Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
11.4.2 Application
As a type of optical demultiplexing unit, the D40V demultiplexes one channel of signals into a
maximum of 40 channels of signals that comply with the related ITU-T Recommendations and
adjusts the output optical power of each channel.
For the position of the D40V board in the WDM system, see Figure 11-10.
Figure 11-10 Position of the D40V board in the WDM system
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
1
M40
OA
OA
D40V
40
40
1
D40V
OA
OA
M40
40
40

OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
11-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The D40V board is mainly used to demultiplex signals, to monitor performance of optical
signals, to monitor alarms and performance events, and to adjust optical power.
Table 11-32 Functions and features of the D40V board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Demultiplexes one channel of signals into a maximum of 40 channels

of signals and adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_EVEN channels.
l Demultiplexes one main path into 40 C_ODD channels.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Adjusts the optical power of each channel of signals after

demultiplexing.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The D40V board consists of the optical module, detection and temperature control module,
Figure 11-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board.
11-34

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the D40V board
Splitter
Optical module
Demultiplexer
VOA
VOA
IN
VOA
D01
D02
D40
MON
Temperature
detection
PIN
Temperature VOA
control
control
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The IN optical interface receives one channel of multiplexed optical signals and sends the signals
to the demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical
signals into 40 channels of single-wavelength optical signals, and then outputs them through the
D01-D40 optical interfaces after the optical power adjustment by VOA.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Demultiplexes the one channel of multiplexed optical signals into 40 channels of singlewavelength optical signals.
Adjusts the optical power of the single-wavelength optical signals after demultiplexing.

Monitors and controls in real time the demultiplexer operating temperature.
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

11.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on front panel of the D40V board.

Figure 11-12 shows front panel of the D40V board.
Figure 11-12 Front panel of the D40V board
D40V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D01 196.00
D02 195.90
D03 195.80
D04 195.70
D05 195.60
D06 195.50
D07 195.40
D08 195.30
D09 195.20
D10 195.10
D11 195.00
D12 194.90
D13 194.80
D14 194.70
D15 194.60
D16 194.50
D17 194.40
D18 194.30
D19 194.20
D20 194.10
D21 194.00
D22 193.90
D23 193.80
D24 193.70
D25 193.60
D26 193.50
D27 193.40
D28 193.30
D29 193.20
D30 193.10
D31 193.00
D32 192.90
D33 192.80
D34 192.70
D35 192.60
D36 192.50
D37 192.40
D38 192.30
D39 192.20
D40 192.10
D27
D28
D29
D30
D31
D32
D33
D34
D35
D36
D37
D38
D39
D26
D40
D12
D25
D11
D24
D10
D23
D09
D22
D08
D21
D07
D20
D06
D19
D05
D18
D04
D17
D03
D16
D02
D15
D01
D14
IN
D13
MON
D40V
11-36

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 42 optical interfaces on front panel of the D40V board. Table 11-33 lists the type and
Table 11-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the D40V board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives signals to be demultiplexed when connected

to an optical amplifier or ITL.
D01-D40
LC
Transmits demultiplexed signals when connected to the

"IN" interface of the OTUs.
MON
LC

MCA8 or OPM8 board.
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (90/10) = 10 dB).
There are 40 output interfaces on front panel of the D40V board. Table 11-34 and Table
11-35 show the mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the
D40V board.
TN11D40V01 board (C_EVEN)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01
196.00
1529.55
D21
194.00
1545.32
D02
195.90
1530.33
D22
193.90
1546.12

11-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D03
195.80
1531.12
D23
193.80
1546.92
D04
195.70
1531.90
D24
193.70
1547.72
D05
195.60
1532.68
D25
193.60
1548.51
D06
195.50
1533.47
D26
193.50
1549.32
D07
195.40
1534.25
D27
193.40
1550.12
D08
195.30
1535.04
D28
193.30
1550.92
D09
195.20
1535.82
D29
193.20
1551.72
D10
195.10
1536.61
D30
193.10
1552.52
D11
195.00
1537.40
D31
193.00
1553.33
D12
194.90
1538.19
D32
192.90
1554.13
D13
194.80
1538.98
D33
192.80
1554.94
D14
194.70
1539.77
D34
192.70
1555.75
D15
194.60
1540.56
D35
192.60
1556.55
D16
194.50
1541.35
D36
192.50
1557.36
D17
194.40
1542.14
D37
192.40
1558.17
D18
194.30
1542.94
D38
192.30
1558.98
D19
194.20
1543.73
D39
192.20
1559.79
D20
194.10
1544.53
D40
192.10
1560.61
TN11D40V02 board (C_ODD)
11-38
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D01
196.05
1529.16
D21
194.05
1544.92
D02
195.95
1529.94
D22
193.95
1545.72
D03
195.85
1530.72
D23
193.85
1546.52
D04
195.75
1531.51
D24
193.75
1547.32
D05
195.65
1532.29
D25
193.65
1548.11
D06
195.55
1533.07
D26
193.55
1548.91
D07
195.45
1533.86
D27
193.45
1549.72

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
D08
195.35
1534.64
D28
193.35
1550.52
D09
195.25
1535.43
D29
193.25
1551.32
D10
195.15
1536.22
D30
193.15
1552.12
D11
195.05
1537.00
D31
193.05
1552.93
D12
194.95
1537.79
D32
192.95
1553.73
D13
194.85
1538.58
D33
192.85
1554.54
D14
194.75
1539.37
D34
192.75
1555.34
D15
194.65
1540.16
D35
192.65
1556.15
D16
194.55
1540.95
D36
192.55
1556.96
D17
194.45
1541.75
D37
192.45
1557.77
D18
194.35
1542.54
D38
192.35
1558.58
D19
194.25
1543.33
D39
192.25
1559.39
D20
194.15
1544.13
D40
192.15
1560.20
Laser Hazard Level

11.4.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one D40V board.
Table 11-36 shows the valid slots for the D40V board.
Table 11-36 Valid slots for the D40V board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15

11-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Therefore, the slot number of the D40V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the D40V board, the slot number of the D40 board
11.4.7 Characteristic Code for the D40V

are odd or even.
Table 11-37 Characteristic code for the D40V board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.


Table 11-38 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the D40V board displayed on the NM
11-40
Interface on the NM
IN
D01-D40
2-41
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
MON
42
11.4.9 D40V Parameters

For D40V parameters, refer to Table 11-39.
Table 11-39 D40V parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)
The Threshold of Input Power Loss

(dBm) parameter queries the threshold value
of the input optical power, which can trigger
a board to generate an optical power loss
(MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual input
optical power is lower than this threshold
value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

queries the maximum attenuation rate
allowed by the current optical interface of a
board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: Even
11.4.10 Specifications of the D40V

Table 11-40 lists the optical specifications of the D40V board.
Table 11-40 Optical specifications of the D40V board
Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
Insertion loss
dB
8a
Reflectance
dB
< -40
nm
1529-1561
dB
> 25
dB
> 30
Attenuation range
dB
0-15
Loss accuracy
dB
1 (0 to 10 dB)
1.5 (>10 dB)
11-42
dB
0.5
dB
3a

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
NOTE
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
D40V
20.0
24.95
11.5 DFIU
DFIU: bidirectional fiber interface board
The available functional version of the DFIU board is TN21.
11.5.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the DFIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes the signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory
channel.
The DFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals.
The DFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
11.5.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board.
11.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one DFIU board.
11.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU
The characteristic code for the DFIU board contains one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
11.5.9 DFIU Parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

11.5.10 Specifications of the DFIU

The available functional version of the DFIU board is TN21.
11.5.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the DFIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes the signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory
channel.
For the position of the DFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 11-13.
Figure 11-13 Position of the DFIU board in the WDM system
OA
DFIU
SC2
DFIU
OA
NOTE
The DFIU board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DFIU boards actually
refer to one physical board.

The DFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals.
11-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 11-41 Functions and features of the DFIU board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals in two directions transmitted

along the main path and optical supervisory channel.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The DFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 11-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board.
Figure 11-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the DFIU board
Optical module
ERC
ERM
Multiplexer
EOUT
ETC
ETM
Demultiplexer
EIN
WRC
WRM
Multiplexer
WOUT
WTC
WTM
Demultiplexer
WN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Signal Flow
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the WRC
optical interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the WRM optical
11-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

interface into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output
through the WOUT optical interface.
l
The WIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
demultiplexer. The demultiplexer demultiplexes the line optical signals into the main path
optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the WTC
and WTM optical interfaces
The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the ERC optical
interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the ERM optical interface
into one channel of optical signals. The multiplexed signals are then output through the
EOUT optical interface.
The EIN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the ETC
and ETM optical interfaces
Module Function
l
Optical module
Performs the multiplexing and demultiplexing of main path signals and supervisory channel
signals.

Power supply module

11.5.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board.

Figure 11-15 shows the front panel of the DFIU board.
11-46

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-15 Front panel of the DFIU board

ETM ERM
ETC ERC
EIN EOUT WTMWRM
WTC WRC
WIN WOUT
DFIU
Interfaces
There are twelve optical interfaces on the front panel of the DFIU board. Table 11-42 lists the
Table 11-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DFIU board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Type
Function
WIN
LC
Receives the west line signal.
WOUT
LC
Transmits the west line signal.
WTC
LC
Transmits the west main path signal.
WRC
LC
Receives the west main path signal.
WTM
LC
Transmits the west optical supervisory channel signal.
WRM
LC
Receives the west optical supervisory channel signal.
EIN
LC
Receives the east line signal.
EOUT
LC
Transmits the east line signal.
ETC
LC
Transmits the east main path signal.
ERC
LC
Receives the east main path signal.
ETM
LC
Transmits the east optical supervisory channel signal.

11-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
ERM
LC
Receives the east optical supervisory channel signal.
Laser Hazard Level

11.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DFIU board.
Table 11-43 shows the valid slots for the DFIU board.
Table 11-43 Valid slots for DFIU board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11
11.5.7 Characteristic Code for the DFIU

by the board.
Table 11-44 Characteristic code for the DFIU board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

solution adopted by the
board. The value C represents
C band; the value L
represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical
signals are in C band.

11-48

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 11-45 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DFIU board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
EIN/EOUT
ERM/ETM
ERC/ETC
WIN/WOUT
WRM/WTM
WRC/WTC
NOTE
11.5.9 DFIU Parameters

For DFIU parameters, refer to Table 11-46.
Table 11-46 DFIU parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40

Mode, CWDM
Mode
Sets the number of wavelengths supported by the

DFIU board.
Default: C80
Mode
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Actual Working
Band Parity
Queries the parity of the actual working band of the

board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
PMD Coefficient
(ps/SQRT(km))
0-1
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
-15 - 30
Default: All
Default: 0.05
Default: 0
This parameter is available only in the ASON

system. Set the parameter according to the fiber
type. Usually, take the nominal value of the fiber.
11.5.10 Specifications of the DFIU

Table 11-47 Optical specifications of the DFIU board
Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
range of optical
supervisory channel
nm
1500-1520
Optical return loss
dB
> 40
EIN-ETM
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
Insertion loss
dB
Isolation
dB
> 40
ERM-EOUT
WIN-WTM
WRM-WOUT
EIN-ETC
ERC-EOUT
WIN-WTC
WRC-WOUT
EIN-ETM
WIN-WTM
11-50

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Item
Unit
Value
EIN-ETC
Isolation
dB
> 12
Polarization dependent
loss
dB
< 0.2
WIN-WTC
l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in.
(D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21DFIU
0.2
0.3
11.6 FIU
FIU: fiber interface unit
The available functional versions of the FIU board are TN11, TN12, TN13, and TN21.
11.6.2 Application
As an optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the FIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel.
The FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals, and monitors performance of optical
signals.
The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and
11.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the FIU board.
11.6.6 Valid Slots
One slots house one FIU board.
11.6.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU
The characteristic code for the FIU board consists of one character. The character indicates the
band adopted by the board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


11.6.9 FIU Parameters
11.6.10 Specifications of the FIU

The available functional versions of the FIU board are TN11, TN12, TN13, and TN21.
Table 11-48 lists the versions of the FIU board.
Table 11-48 Version description of the FIU board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the FIU board are TN11, TN12, TN13,
and TN21.
Difference
l Function:
The TN13FIU02 board supports high power input and works with
the HBA board. The other versions of the FIU board do not support
high power input. For details, see 11.6.2 Application.
The TN11FIU and TN12FIU boards support reporting of input
optical power, but the TN13FIU and TN21FIU boards do not. For
details, see 11.6.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
l Appearance:
The TN11 and TN12 versions use the same front panel. The TN13
version uses a different front panel from the preceding versions. The
TN21 version uses a different front panel from the preceding
versions and is applicable to case-shaped equipment. For details, see
11.6.5 Front Panel and 11.6.10 Specifications of the FIU.
Replacement
Table 11-49 lists the substitution rules for the FIU board.
Table 11-49 Substitution rules of the FIU board
11-52
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11FIU
TN12FIU
l Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800

V100R004C01 or a later version.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN12FIU
TN13FIU
l When the ASON function is not required. upgrade the NE

software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later
version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800
l When the ASON function is required, upgrade the NE
software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C03 or a later
TN13FIU
None
TN21FIU
None
Type
Table 11-50 lists the types of the FIU board.
Table 11-50 Type description of the FIU board
Unit
Type
Description
TN11FIU
Supports access of normal optical power.
TN12FIU
TN13FIU
01
02
Supports access of high optical power.
TN21FIU
11.6.2 Application
As an optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the FIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel.
For the position of the FIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 11-16 and Figure 11-17.
Figure 11-16 Position of the FIU board in the WDM system (normal optical power)
OTU
OTU
MUX
OA
SC1
OTU
OTU
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
DMUX
OA
FIU
FIU
OA

DMUX
OTU
OTU
SC1
OA
MUX
OTU
OTU
11-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-17 Position of the TN13FIU02 board in the WDM system (high optical power)
OTU
OTU
MUX
HBA
SC1
OTU
OTU
DMUX
HBA
FIU
FIU
HBA
DMUX
OTU
OTU
SC1
HBA
MUX
OTU
OTU

The FIU board multiplexes and demultiplexes signals, and monitors performance of optical
signals.
Table 11-51 Functions and features of the FIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main

path and optical supervisory channel.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Optical-layer ASON
Supported by the TN12FIU, TN13FIU and TN21FIU.

The FIU board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and
Figure 11-18 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board and the
TN12FIU board. Figure 11-19 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU
board and the TN21FIU board.
11-54

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-18 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11FIU board and the TN12FIU
board
Optical module
RC
RM
Splitter
Multiplexer
OUT
MON
TC
TM
Demultiplexer
IN
PIN
Optical power detection module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
11-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-19 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN13FIU board and the TN21FIU
board
Optical module
RC
RM
Splitter
Multiplexer
OUT
MON
TC
TM
Demultiplexer
IN
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
l
The multiplexer multiplexes the main path optical signals received through the RC optical
interface and the supervisory channel signals received through the RM optical interface
into one channel of optical signals, and then outputs the multiplexed signals through the
OUT optical interface.
The IN optical interface receives line optical signals, which are then sent to the
optical signals and supervisory channel signals, and then outputs them through the TC and
TM optical interfaces
Module Function
l
Optical module
Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the line optical signals and sends the signals
to the MON interface for detection.

NOTE
Only the TN11FIU and TN12FIU support the input optical power detection.
l
11-56

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

11.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the FIU board.

Figure 11-20 shows the front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIUboard. Figure 11-21 and Figure
11-22 show the front panel of the TN13FIU board. Figure 11-23 shows the front panel of the
TN21FIU board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-20 Front panel of the TN11FIU/TN12FIU board
FIU
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
TC
RC
TM
RM
FIU
11-58

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-21 Front panel of the TN13FIU01 board
FIU
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
TC
RC
TM
RM
FIU
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-22 Front panel of the TN13FIU02 board
FIU
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
TM
RM
IN
TC
RC
OUT
FIU
11-60

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-23 Front panel of the TN21FIU board
TM
RM
TC
RC
IN
OUT
MON
FIU
Indicators
The TN11FIU board has four indicators on the front panel.The TN12FIU board has four
indicators on the front panel.The TN13FIU board has one indicator on the front panel.The
TN21FIU board has no indicator on the front panel.
l
Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the front panel of the FIU board. Table 11-52 lists the type
Table 11-52 Types and functions of the interfaces on the FIU board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LCa
TC
LC
Transmits the main path signal.
RC
LCa
Receives the main path signal.

11-61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
TM
LC
Transmits the 1510 nm optical supervisory

channel signal.
RM
LC
Receives the 1510 nm optical supervisory

channel signal.
MON
LC
Accomplishes online monitoring of optical

spectrum when it is connected to the input
interface of the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total
composite signal at the OUT port (20 dB lower
than the actual signal power, calculation
formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg
(99/1) = 10 dB).
a: the interface type of the "RC" and "OUT" of the TN13FIU02 are "LSH/APC".
Laser Hazard Level

NOTE
TN13FIU02: After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL
1M, which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10
mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
11.6.6 Valid Slots

One slots house one FIU board.
Table 11-53 shows the valid slots for the TN11FIU board.
Table 11-53 Valid slots for the TN11FIU board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
11-62
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2IU5, IU11
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, IU11
11.6.7 Characteristic Code for the FIU

Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table 11-57.
Table 11-57 Characteristic code for the FIU board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band; the value L
represents L band.

11-63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For example, the characteristic code for the board is C, indicating that the optical signals are in
C band.


Table 11-58 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the FIU board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
RM/TM
RC/TC
MON
NOTE
11.6.9 FIU Parameters

For FIU parameters, refer to Table 11-59.
Table 11-59 FIU parameters
11-64
Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Threshold of
Input Power Loss
(dBm)

parameter queries the threshold value of the input
optical power, which can trigger a board to
generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm.
When the actual input optical power is lower than
this threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
NOTE
This parameter is supported only by TN11FIU and
TN12FIU .
See D.52 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)

Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40

Mode, CWDM
Mode

FIU board.
Default: C80
Mode
Actual Working
Band Parity

board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
PMD Coefficient
(ps/SQRT(km))
0-1
Fiber Type
G652 Fiber, G653

Fiber, LEAF
Fiber, TWRS
Fiber, TWC Fiber,
TWPLUS Fiber,
SMFLS Fiber,
G654B Fiber
Default: All
Default: 0.05

Specifies the type of a fiber.
Default: G652
Fiber
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
-15 - 30
Default: 0


11-65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Send DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
0.0 - 6553.5
Specifies the dispersion compensation value for

the DCM at the transmit end.
Receive DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
0.0 - 6553.5
Default: 0
Default: 0
Specifies the dispersion compensation value for

the DCM at the receive end.
11.6.10 Specifications of the FIU

Table 11-60 Optical specifications of the FIU board
Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
range of optical
supervisory channel
nm
1500-1520
Optical return loss
dB
> 40
IN-TM
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
Insertion loss
dB
IN-TM
Isolation
dB
> 40
IN-TC
Isolation
dB
> 12
Polarization dependent
loss
dB
< 0.2
RM-OUT
IN-TC
RC-OUT
TN11/TN12/TN13FIU:
l
11-66
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN21FIU:
l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220.0 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11/TN12FIU
4.2
4.6
TN13/TN21FIU
0.2
0.3
11.7 ITL
ITL: interleaver board
The available functional versions of the ITL board are TN11 and TN12.
11.7.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the ITL board implements
multiplexing/demultiplexing between the optical signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and
the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz. The TN11ITL04 board is mainly used in systems
where the bit rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s.
The ITL board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals, and to detect online optical
spectrum.
The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
11.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ITL board.
11.7.6 Valid Slots
One slots house one ITL board.
11.7.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL
The characteristic code for the ITL board contains one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
11.7.9 ITL Parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

11.7.10 Specifications of the ITL


Version
Table 11-61 lists the version description of the ITL board.
Table 11-61 Version description of the ITL board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
The optical module on the TN11ITL04 board consists of two
interleavers which are used to multiplex/demultiplex optical signals.
This board is mainly used in a system in which the rate of a single
wavelength is 40 Gbit/s. The optical module on the ITL board of
other versions consists of an interleaver and a coupler. The
interleaver is used to demultiplex optical signals, and the coupler is
used to multiplex optical signals. For details, see 11.7.4 Working
Principle and Signal Flow.
The TN12ITL board supports the VOA modea, but the ITL board of
other versions does not. For details, see 11.6.9 FIU Parameters.
l Appearance:
The TN11 and TN12 versions use different front panels. For details,
see 11.7.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
The specifications vary according to versions. For details, see
11.7.10 Specifications of the ITL.
Replacement
Table 11-62 lists the substitution rules for the ITL board.
a: If the services are less than 40 channels, VOA mode can be configured in which all the
service signals pass through the TE optical interface of even channel.
NOTE
ITL Mode: Split the multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface into two channels
of signals in equal spacing. Then, the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE
optical interfaces respectively.
VOA Mode: The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface all passed through
the TE interface.
11-68

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 11-62 Substitution rules of the ITL board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11ITL
TN12ITL
Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01

or a later version or update the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800
V100R002C00 or later version.
TN12ITL
TN11ITL
The TN11ITL board can replace the TN12ITL board only in

one application scenario: multiplexing/demultiplexing
between the signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and the
signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz.
Type
Table 11-63 lists the types of the TN11ITL.
Table 11-63 Type description of the ITL
Unit
Type
Description
TN11ITL
01
The optical module of the ITL01 board consists of one interleaver and
one coupler. The interleaver is used for demultiplexing, and the
coupler is used for multiplexing.
04
The optical module of the ITL04 board consists of two interleavers.

The interleaver is used for both demultiplexing and multiplexing.
11.7.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the ITL board implements
multiplexing/demultiplexing between the optical signals at a channel spacing of 100 GHz and
the signals at a channel spacing of 50 GHz. The TN11ITL04 board is mainly used in systems
where the bit rate of a single wavelength is 40 Gbit/s.
For the position of the ITL board in the WDM system, see Figure 11-24.
Figure 11-24 Position of the ITL board in the WDM system
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
C_ODD
C_ODD
M40
40
1
OA
C_EVEN
WMU
40
ITL
1
D40
40
1
C_ODD
C_EVEN
40
1
D40
40
1
ITL
WMU
OA
D40
D40
OA
C_EVEN
M40
C_ODD
M40
OA
C_EVEN
40
40
1
M40
40

OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
11-69
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The WMU board must be used when the 10G OTU with fixed wavelengths is used in the system. In other
cases, the WMU board is optional.

The ITL board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals, and to detect online optical
spectrum.
Table 11-64 Functions and features of the ITL board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes/demultiplexes optical signals between C_ODD signals

and C_EVEN signals.
Detection and
monitoring of the
online spectrum

Optical-layer ASON
Supported by TN11ITL.

The ITL board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 11-25 and Figure 11-26 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ITL board.
11-70

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-25 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL01/TN12ITL board
Optical module
TO
TE
Interleaver
RO
RE
IN
Splitter
Coupler
OUT
MON
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Figure 11-26 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11ITL04 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-71
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
TN11ITL01:
l
The multiplexed optical signals received through the IN optical interface are sent to the
interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then,
the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
optical interfaces into one channel of optical signals. The one channel of optical signals is
output through the OUT optical interface.
TN11ITL04:
l
interleaver that splits the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then,
the two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
The interleaver multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
TN12ITL:
l
interleaver. Then according to the requirement, get the signals all passed through the TE
interface or split the signals into two channels of optical signals in equal spacing. Then, the
two channels of optical signals are output through the TO and TE optical interfaces
respectively.
The coupler multiplexes the two channels of optical signals input from the RO and RE
Module Function
l
Optical module
Performs the transformation between C band optical signals in 100 GHz spacing and C
band optical signals in 50 GHz spacing.

Power supply module

11.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ITL board.
11-72

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Figure 11-27 and Figure 11-28 show the front panel of the ITL board.
Figure 11-27 Front panel of the TN11ITL board
ITL
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
TO
RO
TE
RE
ITL
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-73
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-28 Front panel of the TN12ITL board
ITL
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
TO
RO
TE
RE
ITL
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of TN11ITL board, and there are four indicators on the
front panel of TN12ITL board.
l
Interfaces
There are seven optical interfaces on the front panel of the ITL board. Table 11-65 lists the type
11-74

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 11-65 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ITL board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Accesses the optical signals at 50 GHz channel spacing

OUT
LC

TE
LC

(C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
RE
LC

spacing (C_EVEN multiplexed signals).
TO
LC

(C_ODD multiplexed signals).
RO
LC

spacing (C_ODD multiplexed signals).
MON
LC
Connects to the input port on the MCA4, MCA8 or

OPM8 board so that the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8 board
can detect the optical spectrum in service.
The optical power at the MON interface is 10/90 of the
optical power at the OUT interface, that is, the optical
power at the MON interface is 10 dB lower than the
optical power at the OUT interface, calculation
formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm) = 10 x lg (90/10)
= 10 dB.
Laser Hazard Level

11.7.6 Valid Slots

One slots house one ITL board.
Table 11-66 shows the valid slots for the ITL board.
Table 11-66 Valid slots for the ITL board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
TN11ITL: U1-IU8, IU11-IU27, IU29-IU36

TN12ITL: U1-IU8, IU12-IU27, IU29-IU36
OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
IU1-IU18

11-75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
11.7.7 Characteristic Code for the ITL

by the board.
Table 11-67 Characteristic code for the ITL board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band.
For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals
are in C band.


Table 11-68 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ITL board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
RE/TE
RO/TO
MON
NOTE
11-76

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

11.7.9 ITL Parameters

For ITL parameters, refer to Table 11-69.
Table 11-69 ITL parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Board Mode
ITL Mode, VOA

Mode
Sets the working mode of a board.
Default: ITL Mode
l ITL Mode: Split the multiplexed optical

signals received through the IN optical
interface into two channels of signals in equal
spacing. Then, the two channels of optical
signals are output through the TO and TE
optical interfaces respectively.
l VOA Mode: The multiplexed optical signals
received through the IN optical interface all
passed through the TE interface.
NOTE
VOA Mode can be configured only when the
services are less than 40 channels.
NOTE
Only for TN12ITL.
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Actual Working
Band Parity
Queries the parity of the actual working band of

the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: Even
11.7.10 Specifications of the ITL

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-77
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 11-70 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01
Item
Unit
Value
Input channel spacinga
GHz
100
Output channel spacinga
GHz
50
Insertion loss
RE-OUT
dB
< 4.5
dB
< 2.5
dB
<1
Isolation
dB
> 25
RO-OUT
IN-TE
IN-TO
IN-TE
IN-TO
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Directivity
dB
> 45
PMD
ps
< 0.5
dB
< 0.5
dBm
26
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.
Table 11-71 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04

Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
GHz
50
Insertion loss
RE-OUT
dB
<3
dB
<3
dB
<1
Isolation
dB
> 25
dB
-40
RO-OUT
IN-TE
IN-TO
IN-TE
IN-TO
Maximum reflectance
11-78

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Directivity
dB
> 45
PMD
ps
< 0.5
dB
< 0.5
dBm
26
Table 11-72 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL

Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
GHz
50
Insertion loss
RE-OUT
dB
< 4.5
dB
< 3.5
dB
<1
Isolation
dB
> 22
RO-OUT
IN-TE
IN-TO
IN-TE
IN-TO
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Directivity
dB
> 45
PMD
ps
< 0.5
dB
< 0.5
dBm
23
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-79
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
The typical power

consumption at 25C (77
F) (W)
The maximum power

consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11ITL
0.2
0.3
TN12ITL
10.0
11.5
11.8 SFIU
SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing
Only one functional version of the SFIU board is available, that is, TN11.
11.8.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the SFIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel
(OSC).
The SFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals.
The SFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
11.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the SFIU board.
11.8.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SFIU board.
11.8.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU
The characteristic code for the SFIU board consists of one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
11.8.9 SFIU Parameters
11.8.10 Specifications of the SFIU

Only one functional version of the SFIU board is available, that is, TN11.
11-80

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

11.8.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the SFIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel
(OSC).
For the position of the SFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 11-29.
Figure 11-29 Position of the SFIU board in the WDM system
OA
SYS1
ST2
OSC1
OA
LINE1
SYS1
SYS1
LINE1
LINE1
SYS1
OA
OSC2
SCC
LINE1
S
F
I
U
SYS2
S
F
I
U
LINE2
LINE2
OSC2
ST2
OA
OSC2
OSC1
OSC1
SCC
SYS2
NE1
OA
S
F
I
U
SYS2
S
F
I
U
LINE2
LINE2
NE2
OSC2
ST2
SCC
OSC1
SYS2
OA
NE3
NOTE
Of all the OSC boards, only the ST2 board can work with the SFIU board.

The SFIU board is mainly used to multiplex and demultiplex signals.
Table 11-73 Functions and features of the SFIU
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main

Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The SFIU board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 11-30 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11SFIU board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-81
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-30 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11SFIU board
SYS1
LINE1
OSC1
Optical module
OSC2
LINE2
SYS2
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Signal Flow
The LINE1 optical interface transmits the OSC signals and the signals of the main optical path.
The LINE2 optical interface transmits the signals of the main optical path.
The OSC1 and OSC2 optical interfaces can receive or transmit the OSC signals. One optical
interface, however, cannot receive the OSC signals and transmit OSC signals at the same time.
That is, if the OSC1 or OSC2 optical interface is used to receive the OSC signals, the other
optical interface must be used to transmit OSC signals.
The following describes the signal flow of the SFIU when the OSC1 optical interface receives
the OSC signals and the OSC2 optical interface transmits OSC signals.
l
SYS1/SYS2 to LINE1/LINE2
The optical module multiplexes the signals of the main optical path received through
the SYS1 optical interface and the OSC signals received through the OSC1 optical
interface into one channel of optical signals. Then, the one channel of optical signals is
output through the LINE1 optical interface.
The signals in the main optical path received through the SYS2 optical interface are
output through the LINE2 optical interface.
LINE1/LINE2 to SYS1/SYS2
The OSC signals received through the LINE1 optical interface are output through the
OSC2 optical interface after being processed by the optical module.
The signals in the main optical path received through the LINE2 optical interface are
output through the SYS2 optical interface.
11-82

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Module Function
l
Optical module
Multiplexes and demultiplexes the main path signals and supervisory channel signals.

Power supply module

11.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the SFIU board.

Figure 11-31 shows the front panel of the TN11SFIU board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

11-83
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 11-31 Front panel of the TN11SFIU board
SFIU
STAT
CAUTION
HAZARDLEVEL1MINVISIBLE
LASERRADIATION
DO NOTVIEW DIRECTLY WITH
NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
LINE1
LINE2
SYS1
SYS2
OSC1
OSC2
SFIU
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the SFIU board. Table 11-74 lists the type
11-84

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 11-74 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SFIU board
Interface
Type
Function
LINE1
LC
The LINE1 optical interface is located on the

line side. It sends and receives OSC signals in
addition to transmitting main optical path
signals.
LINE2
LC
The LINE2 optical interface is located on the

line side. It transmits the signals of the main
optical path.
SYS1
LC
The SYS1 optical interface transmits the

signals in the main optical path.
SYS2
LC
The SYS2 optical interface transmits the

signals in the main optical path.
OSC1
LC
The OSC1 optical interface transmits the OSC

signals.
OSC2
LC
The OSC2 optical interface transmits the OSC

signals.
Laser Hazard Level

11.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SFIU board.
Table 11-75 shows the valid slots for the SFIU board.
Table 11-75 Valid slots for the SFIU board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, IU11

11-85
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

11.8.7 Characteristic Code for the SFIU

The characteristic code for the SFIU board consists of one character, indicating the band adopted
by the board.
Table 11-76 Characteristic code for the SFIU board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band; the value L
represents L band.
C band.


Table 11-77 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFIU board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
LINE1/LINE2
OSC1/OSC2
SYS1/SYS2
NOTE
11.8.9 SFIU Parameters

For SFIU parameters, refer to Table 11-78.
11-86

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 11-78 SFIU parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical
Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Threshold of
Input Power Loss
(dBm)

parameter queries the threshold value of the input
optical power, which can trigger a board to
generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm.
When the actual input optical power is lower than
this threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
See D.52 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm)
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40

Mode, CWDM
Mode

board.
Default: C80
Mode
Actual Working
Band Parity

board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
PMD Coefficient
(ps/SQRT(km))
0-1
Fiber Type
G651 Fiber, G652

Fiber, G655 Fiber
Default: All
Default: 0.05

Sets the fiber type of the board.
Default: /
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
-15 - 30
Send DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
Default: 0

Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of
the transmitting direction.

11-87
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Receiving DCM
Dispersion
Compensation
Value(ps/nm)
Sets the DCM dispersion compensation value of

the receiving direction.
11.8.10 Specifications of the SFIU

Table 11-79 Optical specifications of the SFIU board
Interface
Item
Uni
t
Value
Operating wavelength range (C band)
nm
1528-1561
Operating wavelength range of optical

supervisory channel
nm
1480 to 1520
LINE1SYS1
Insertion loss
dB
1.0
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
LINE1OSC1 @c
Isolation
dB
65
LINE1OSC2 @c
Isolation
dB
40
OSC1SYS1
Directivity
dB
45
Directivity
dB
55
Optical return loss
dB
> 40
LINE2SYS2
LINE1OSC1
LINE1OSC2
SYS1OSC1
OSC1OSC2
OSC2OSC1
11-88

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Item
Polarization
dependent loss
Uni
t
Value
C band
dB
< 0.1
OSC channel
dB
< 0.15
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Typical Power
F)(W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)(W)
TN11SFIU
0.2
0.3

11-89
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12
12 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
About This Chapter

12.1 CMR1
CMR1: CWDM 1-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
12.2 CMR2
12.3 CMR4
12.4 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board
12.5 MR2
MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
12.6 MR4
12.7 MR8
12.8 MR8V
MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA
12.9 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12.1 CMR1
The available functional version of the CMR1 board is TN21.
12.1.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the CMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes
one channel of signals.
The CMR1 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to
provide a cascading interface.
The CMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
12.1.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board.
12.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses on CMR1 board.
12.1.7 Characteristic Code for the CMR1
The characteristic code for the CMR1 board contains four digits, indicating the wavelength that
carries the signals processed by the board.
12.1.9 CMR1 Parameters
12.1.10 Specifications of the CMR1

The available functional version of the CMR1 board is TN21.
12.1.2 Application
one channel of signals.
For the position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system, see Figure 12-1.
12-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 12-1 Position of the CMR1 in the CWDM system

Client side
Client side
OTU
OTU
CMR1
CMR1

The CMR1 is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to
Table 12-1 Functions and features of the CMR1
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/Drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the

multiplexed signals.
WDM specification
Supports the CWDM specification.
Cascade interface
Provides the interface to cascade another optical add and drop

multiplexing board to achieve expansion.
Wavelength query
Queries the wavelengths for the added or dropped signals.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

Figure 12-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 12-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the CMR1 board
MO
IN
MI
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical module

Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The IN interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. The drop optical
module separates one wavelength from the signals and this wavelength is transmitted to the OTU
board or integrated client-side equipment through the D interface. The remaining wavelengths
are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
The MI interface receives the signals transmitted by the main path. The signals are multiplexed
with one wavelength added through the A interface by the add optical module. Then, the
multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals.
Provides an intermediate cascade interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so
that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local station.

12-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power supply module

12.1.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board.

Figure 12-3 shows the front panel of the CMR1 board.
Figure 12-3 Front panel of the CMR1 board
IN
D
MO
MI
A
OUT
CMR1
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR1 board. Table 12-2 lists the type
Table 12-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CMR1 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Type
Function
LC
Receives the signals sent from the OTU or the

integrated client-side equipment.
LC
Transmits the signals to the OTU or the integrated

client-side equipment.
IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signals.

12-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
OUT
LC
Transmits the multiplexed signals.
MI
LC
Cascading input interface, connected to the output

interface of another OADM board.
MO
LC
Cascading output interface, connected to the input

Laser Hazard Level

12.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses on CMR1 board.
Table 12-3 shows the valid slots for the CMR1 board.
Table 12-3 Valid slots for CMR1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11

Table 12-4 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1.
Table 12-4 Characteristic code for the CMR1
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Wavelength that carries

optical signals
Indicates the wavelength that

carries the optical signals
processed by the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength
that carries the signals is 1471 nm.

12-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 12-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR1 displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
A/D
MI/MO
IN/OUT
NOTE

For CMR1 parameters, refer to Table 12-6.
Table 12-6 CMR1 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.
Actual Wavelength No./

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )
Queries the operating wavelength at

board.
Actual Band Type
Configure Wavelength
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default:/
Sets the operating wavelength at the

WDM-side optical interface of a
board.
Configure Band Type
CWDM
Sets the band type.
Default: CWDM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 12-7 lists the optical specifications of the CMR1 board.
Table 12-7 Optical specifications of the CMR1 board
Correspondi
ng interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1260-1360
IN-D
Drop channel insertion loss
dB
Isolation
dB
> 40
A-OUT
Add channel insertion loss
dB
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
0.8
Isolation
dB
25
Reflectance
dB
< -40
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The CMR1 adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
l
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN21CMR1
0.2
0.3
12.2 CMR2
12-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The available functional versions of the CMR2 board are TN11 and TN21.
12.2.2 Application
two channels of signals.
The CMR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of signals, to query
wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface.
12.2.5 Front Panel
There are one indicator and eight interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board.
12.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one CMR2 board.
The characteristic code for the CMR2 board contains eight digits, indicating the two wavelengths
that carry the signals processed by the board.

Table 12-8 lists the version description of the CMR2 board.
Table 12-8 Version description of the CMR2 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Appearance:
The TN11 and TN21 versions use different front panels with
different dimensions. See 12.2.5 Front Panel and 12.2.10
Specifications of the CMR2.
l Specification:
The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For
details, see 12.2.10 Specifications of the CMR2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Description
Replacement
The TN11CMR2 and TN21CMR2 boards are not interchangeable.
12.2.2 Application
For the position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 12-4.
Figure 12-4 Position of the CMR2 board in the CWDM system
Client side
OTU
OTU
CMR2
Client side
OTU
OTU
CMR2

The CMR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex two channels of signals, to query
wavelengths, and to provide a cascading interface.
Table 12-9 Functions and features of the CMR2 board
12-10
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/Drops and multiplexes two channels of signals to/from the

WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


D1
IN
D2
MO
MI
Drop optical
module
A1
A2
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical
module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The
remaining wavelengths are transmitted to other OADM equipment through the MO interface.
with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
the multiplexed signals are transmitted through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l

Power supply module

12.2.5 Front Panel

There are one indicator and eight interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board.

Figure 12-6 shows the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board.
Figure 12-7 shows the front panel of the TN21CMR2 board.
12-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 12-6 Front panel of the TN11CMR2 board
CMR2
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
CMR2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IN
D1
D2
MO
MI
A2
A1 OUT
CMR2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR2 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21CMR2 board.
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR2 board. Table 12-10 lists the
12-14
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A2
LC

D1-D2
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MI
LC


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
MO
LC

Laser Hazard Level

12.2.6 Valid Slots

Table 12-11 shows the valid slots for the TN11CMR2 board.
Table 12-11 Slots for the TN11CMR2
Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-13 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
First wavelength that carries

optical signals
Indicates the first wavelength

that carries the optical signals
Last four digits
Second wavelength that

carries optical signals
Indicates the second

wavelength that carries the
the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.

l
"1471" indicates that the first wavelength is 1471 nm.
"1571" indicates that the second wavelength is 1571 nm.


Table 12-14 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
MI/MO
IN/OUT
NOTE

12-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
CWDM
Sets the band type.
Default: CWDM

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1271-1611
nm
20
IN-D1
IN-D2
0.5 dB spectral width
nm
6.5
Drop channel insertion

loss
dB
1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
Non-adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 35

12-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
nm
6.5
Add channel insertion

loss
dB
1.5
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
1.0
Isolation
dB
13
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1271 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR2 board to a corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1271 nm OTU board and line board.

The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR2 are as follows.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR2 are as follows.

l
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
CMR2
0.2
0.3
12.3 CMR4
12-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12.3.2 Application
four channels of signals.
The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes signals, queries wavelengths, and provides a
cascading interface.
12.3.5 Front Panel
There are one indicator and 12 interfaces on the front panel of CMR4 board.
12.3.6 Valid Slots
The characteristic code for the CMR4 board contains eight digits, indicating the four
wavelengths that carry the signals processed by the board.

Table 12-17 lists the version description of the CMR4 board.
Table 12-17 Version description of the CMR4 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Appearance:
The TN11 and TN21 versions have different front panels that have
Specifications of the CMR4.
l Specification:
The mechanical specifications vary according to the version of the
board that you use. For details, see 12.3.10 Specifications of the
CMR4.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Description
Replacement
The TN11CMR4 and TN21CMR4 boards are not interchangeable.
12.3.2 Application
four channels of signals.
For the position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 12-8.
Figure 12-8 Position of the CMR4 board in the CWDM system
Client side
OTU
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
CMR4
CMR4

The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes signals, queries wavelengths, and provides a
Table 12-18 Functions and features of the CMR4 board
12-20
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/Drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the

WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


D1
IN
D4
MO
MI
A1
Drop optical
module
A4
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical module

Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 to D4 interfaces. The
with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Power supply module

12.3.5 Front Panel

There are one indicator and 12 interfaces on the front panel of CMR4 board.

Figure 12-10 show the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board.
Figure 12-11 show the front panel of the TN21CMR4 board.
12-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

CMR4
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
CMR4
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IN
D1
D2
D3
D4
MO
MI
A4
A3
A2
A1
OUT
CMR4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11CMR4 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21CMR4 board.
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the CMR4 board. Table 12-19 lists the type
12-24
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A4
LC

D1-D4
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MI
LC


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
MO
LC

Laser Hazard Level

12.3.6 Valid Slots

Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-22 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First and second digits

optical signals
Indicates the middle two

digits of the first wavelength
Third and fourth digits


digits of the second
the board.
Fifth and sixth digits
Third wavelength that carries

optical signals

digits of the third wavelength
Seventh and eighth digits
Fourth wavelength that


digits of the fourth
the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961.
l
"59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.
"61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.


Table 12-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CMR4 board displayed on the NM
12-26
Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
A4/D4
MI/MO
IN/OUT
NOTE

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
CWDM
Sets the band type.
Default: CWDM

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1271-1611 (1371 nm excluded)
nm
20
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
nm
6.5

loss
dB
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
isolation
dB
> 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
nm
6.5

loss
dB
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
Isolation
dB
13
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1291 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR4 board to a corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1291 nm OTU board and line board.
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are four wavelength groups.
Table 12-26 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths on the CMR4 board
Group
12-28
Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
1291
1311
1331
1351
1391
1411
1431
1451
1471
1491
1591
1611
1511
1531
1551
1571

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR4 board are as follows:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
The mechanical specifications of TN21CMR4 board are as follows:

l
Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
CMR4
0.2
0.3
12.4 DMR1
DMR1: CWDM 1-channel bidirectional optical add/drop multiplexing board
The available functional versions of the DMR1 board are TN11 and TN21.
12.4.2 Application
The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west
directions.
The DMR1 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to concatenate ports, and to
query wavelengths.
The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
12.4.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the board.
12.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one DMR1 board.
12.4.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1
The characteristics code for the DMR1 board contains four digits, identifying the frequency of
the optical signals processed by the board.
12.4.9 DMR1 Parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1

Table 12-27 lists the version description of the DMR1 board.
Table 12-27 Version description of the DMR1 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Appearance:
Specifications of the DMR1.
l Specification:
The mechanical specifications vary according to versions. For
details, see 12.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1.
The TN11DMR1 and TN21DMR1 boards are not interchangeable.
Replacement
12.4.2 Application
The DMR1 board is used to add/drop and multiplex a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west
directions.
For the position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 12-12.
Figure 12-12 Position of the DMR1 board in the CWDM system
1310nm
OTU
OTU
WD
WIN
WOUT
D
M
R
1
WMO
EA
O
A
D
M
O
A
D
M
EMI
D
M
R
EMO
1
WMI
WA
1310nm
12-30
1310nm
EOUT
EIN
ED
1310nm

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The DMR1 board is able to process signals in two directions. In the figure, the two DMR1 boards are
actually one physical board.
In the figure, the OADM boards are actually the CMR2 or CMR4 boards.
The OADM board in the figure supports wavelengths ranging from 1471 nm to 1611 nm.

The DMR1 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to concatenate ports, and to
query wavelengths.
Table 12-28 provides the detailed features and functions of the DMR1 board.
Table 12-28 Functions and features of the DMR1 board
Functions and
Features
Description
Basic functions
Adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and

west directions.
WDM specification
Port concatenation

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The DMR1 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 12-13 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 12-13 Functional modules and signal flow of the DMR1 board
WD ED
WMO EMO EMI WMI
EA WA
WIN
EIN
Drop optical
module
EOUT
Add optical
module
WOUT
OADM optical module

Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
WIN receives signals from the west main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals
from the received signals. The extracted signals are dropped through WD. The remaining signals
are connected to other OADM equipment through WMO. EIN receives signals from the east
main path. The Drop optical module extracts 1310 nm signals from the received signals. The
extracted signals are dropped through ED. The remaining signals are connected to other OADM
equipment through EMO.
Local 1310 nm signals are added through EA, and other signals are added through EMI. After
being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to east main path by EOUT.
Similarly, Local 1310 nm signals are added through WA, and other signals are added through
WMI. After being multiplexed by the Add optical module, the signals are sent to west main path
by WOUT.
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Performs the add/drop multiplexing of 1310nm signals and other signals.
l
12-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l

Power supply module
12.4.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the board.

Figure 12-14 shows the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board.
Figure 12-15 shows the front panel of the TN21DMR1 board.
Figure 12-14 Front panel of the TN11DMR1 board
DMR1
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
WOUT WIN
EOUT
EIN
WMO
WMI
EMO
EMI
WD
WA
ED
EA
DMR1
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 12-15 Front panel of the TN21DMR1 board
WIN WD
WMO WMI
WA WOUT
EIN
ED
EMO EMI
EA EOUT
DMR1
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11DMR1 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21DMR1 board.
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the DMR1 board. Table 12-29 lists the type and function of
each interface.
Table 12-29 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DMR1 board
12-34
Interface
Type
Function
EA/WA
LC
Receives the 1310 nm optical signals that west and east

client-side equipment transmits.
ED/WD
LC
Transmits 1310 nm optical signals to west and east

EIN/WIN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signals on west and east main

paths.
EOUT/WOUT
LC
Transmits multiplexed signals to west and east main

paths.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
EMI/WMI
LC
Serves as concatenation input optical interface. It

connects to the output interfaces on other boards.
EMO/WMO
LC
Serves as concatenation output optical interface. It

connects to the input interfaces on other boards.
Laser Hazard Level

12.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DMR1 board.
Table 12-30 shows the valid slots for the TN11DMR1 board.
Table 12-31 shows the valid slots for the TN21DMR1 board.
Table 12-30 Slots for the TN11DMR1
Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
Table 12-31 Slots for the TN21DMR1

Product
Slots
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11
12.4.7 Characteristic Code for the DMR1

Table 12-32 provides the details on the characteristics code.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-32 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board

Barcode
Meaning
Description
First to fourth digits
Optical signal frequency
Frequency of the optical

signals processed by the
board
For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that
the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.

Interface Display
Table 12-33 lists the number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the board.
Table 12-33 Number on the NM indicating each optical interface on the DMR1 board
Interface on Front Panel
Number on the NM
WA/WD
EA/ED
WMI/WMO
WIN/WOUT
EMI/EMO
EIN/EOUT
NOTE
12.4.9 DMR1 Parameters

For parameters of the DMR1, refer to Table 12-34.
Table 12-34 DMR1 parameters
12-36
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
Used to configure the operating

wavelength at the WDM-side optical
Configure Band Type
C+L
Used to configure the band type.
Default: C+L
12.4.10 Specifications of the DMR1

Table 12-35 Optical specifications of the DMR1 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
EA/ED/WA/
WD
range
nm
1260-1360
EIN-ED
WIN-WD

loss
dB
Isolation
dB
> 40
EA-EOUT
WA-WOUT

loss
dB
EIN-EMO
EMI-EOUT
WIN-WMO
WMI-WOUT
Insertion loss
dB
0.8
Isolation
dB
25
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40

12-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The DMR1 board adds/drops and multiplexes a 1310 nm wavelength in the east and west
directions from the multiplexed signals.
Mechanical specifications of the TN11DMR1 board:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Mechanical specifications of the TN21DMR1 board:

l
in. (D) x 4.7 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
DMR1
0.2
0.3
12.5 MR2
The available functional versions of the MR2 board are TN11 and TN21.
12.5.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes
The MR2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, to query wavelengths, and to
The MR2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module, and
power supply module.
12.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR2 board.
12.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one MR2 board.
12.5.7 Characteristic Code for the MR2
12-38

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The characteristic code for the MR2 board contains eight digits that indicate the frequencies of
the two signals processed by the board.
12.5.9 MR2 Parameters
12.5.10 Specifications of the MR2

Table 12-36 lists the version description of the MR2 board.
Table 12-36 Version description of the MR2 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Appearance:
different dimensions. The TN21 version is applicable to case-shaped
equipment. See 12.5.5 Front Panel and 12.5.10 Specifications of
the MR2.
l Specification:
The power consumption varies according to versions. For details,
see 12.5.10 Specifications of the MR2.
Replacement
12.5.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR2 board adds/drops and multiplexes
For the position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 12-16.
Figure 12-16 Position of the MR2 board in the DWDM system
Client side
OTU
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
MR2
MR2
OA
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

OA
12-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 12-37 Functions and features of the MR2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from

the multiplexed signals.
WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

Figure 12-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board.
12-40

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 12-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR2 board
D1
IN
D2
MO
MI
Drop optical
module
A1
A2
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
module separates two wavelengths from the signals and these two wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment through the D1 and D2 interfaces. The
with two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals.
Provides an intermediate cascading interface for cascading to other OADM boards, so

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

12.5.5 Front Panel


Figure 12-18 shows the front panel of the TN11MR2 board.
Figure 12-18 Front panel of the TN11MR2 board
MR2
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
MR2

12-42

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

IN
D1
D2
MO
MI
A2
A1 OUT
MR2
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR2 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21MR2 board.
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR2 board. Table 12-38 lists the type
Table 12-38 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR2 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A2
LC

D1-D2
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MO
LC


12-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
MI
LC

Laser Hazard Level

12.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one MR2 board.
Table 12-39 and Table 12-40 shows the valid slots for the MR2 board.
Table 12-39 Valid slots for the TN11MR2 board
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11

12-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-41 Characteristic code for the MR2 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Frequency of the first optical Indicates the last four digits

signal
of the frequency that carries
the first optical signal.
Last four digits
Frequency of the second

optical signal
Indicates the last four digits

the second optical signal.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370.
l
"9360" indicates that the frequency of the first optical signal is 193.60 THz.
"9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.


Table 12-42 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
MI/MO
IN/OUT
NOTE

For MR2 parameters, refer to Table 12-43.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-43 MR2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
Sets the band type.
Default: C

Table 12-44 lists the optical specifications of the MR2 board.
Table 12-44 Optical specifications of the MR2 board
12-46
Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
GHz
100
IN-D1
IN-D2
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
1.5
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
isolation
dB
> 35

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
1.5
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
1.0
Isolation
dB
> 13
Polarization dependence
loss
dB
< 0.2
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40

The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping wavelengths.
The mechanical specifications of TN11MR2 are as follows:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
The mechanical specifications of TN21MR2 are as follows:

l
Dimensions of front panel: 128.9 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 25.4 mm (W) or 5 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 1 in. (W)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MR2
0.2
0.3
12.6 MR4
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12.6.2 Application
As a type of optical add/drop multiplexing unit, the MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four
channels of signals.
12.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR4 board.
12.6.6 Valid Slots
One slot house one MR4 board.
The characteristic code for the MR4 board contains eight digits. Each digit indicates the
frequencies of the first and the fourth signals processed by the board.

Table 12-45 lists the version description of the MR4 board.
Table 12-45 Version description of the MR4 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Appearance:
The TN21 and TN11 versions have different front panels that have
different dimensions. The TN21 version is only applicable to caseshaped equipment. See 12.6.5 Front Panel and 12.6.10
Specifications of the MR4.
l Specification:
The power consumption varies according to the version of the board
that you use. For details, see 12.6.10 Specifications of the MR4.
Replacement
12-48

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12.6.2 Application
As a type of optical add/drop multiplexing unit, the MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four
channels of signals.
Client side
OTU
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
MR4
MR4
OA
OA

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/

from the multiplexed signals.
WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D1
IN
D4
MO
MI
A1
Drop optical
module
A4
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical module

Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
module separates four wavelengths from the signals and these four wavelengths are transmitted
with four wavelengths added through the A1 to A4 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals.

12-50

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

12.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR4 board.

MR4
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
MO
MI
D1
A1
D2
A2
D3
A3
D4
A4
MR4
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 12-23 shows the front panels of the TN21MR4 boards respectively.
IN
D1
D2
D3
D4
MO
MI
A4
A3
A2
A1
OUT
MR4
Indicators
There is one indicator on the front panel of the TN11MR4 board. There is no indicator on the
front panel of the TN21MR4 board.
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR4 board. Table 12-47 lists the type
12-52
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A4
LC

D1-D4
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MI
LC


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
MO
LC

Laser Hazard Level

12.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot house one MR4 board.
Table 12-48 and Table 12-49 shows the valid slots for the MR4 board.
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-U17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU8, and IU11

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Frequency of first optical

signal

the first optical signal
Last four digits
Frequency of forth optical

signal

the fourth optical signal
For example, the characteristic code for the MR4 board is 92109240.
l
"9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can
be inferred that:
l
The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.
The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.


Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
MI/MO
IN/OUT
NOTE
12-54

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
Sets the band type.
Default: C

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
GHz
100
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
2.2

12-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Item
Unit
Value
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
isolation
dB
> 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
2.2
IN-MO
MI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
1.5
Isolation
dB
> 13
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/from the
multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths.
Table 12-54 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths of the MR4 board
12-56
G
ro
u
p
A1/D1
Wa
vel
en
gth
No.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm)
Fre
que
ncy
(TH
z)
W
av
el
e
n
gt
h
N
o.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm
)
Fre
que
ncy
(T
Hz)
W
av
ele
ng
th
No
.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm
)
Freq
uenc
y
(TH
z)
W
av
el
en
gt
h
N
o.
Wave
lengt
h
(nm)
Frequ
ency
(THz)
80
1560.
61
192.
10
78
1559
.79
192.
20
76
1558
.98
192.
30
74
1558.1
7
192.4
0
72
1557.
36
192.
50
70
1556
.55
192.
60
68
1555
.75
192.
70
66
1554.9
4
192.8
0
64
1554.
13
192.
90
62
1553
.33
193.
00
60
1552
.52
193.
10
58
1551.7
2
193.2
0
56
1550.
92
193.
30
54
1550
.12
193.
40
52
1549
.32
193.
50
50
1548.5
1
193.6
0
48
1547.
72
193.
70
46
1546
.92
193.
80
44
1546
.12
193.
90
42
1545.3
2
194.0
0
A2/D2
A3/D3

A4/D4
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

G
ro
u
p
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
Wa
vel
en
gth
No.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm)
Fre
que
ncy
(TH
z)
W
av
el
e
n
gt
h
N
o.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm
)
Fre
que
ncy
(T
Hz)
W
av
ele
ng
th
No
.
Wav
elen
gth
(nm
)
Freq
uenc
y
(TH
z)
W
av
el
en
gt
h
N
o.
Wave
lengt
h
(nm)
Frequ
ency
(THz)
40
1544.
53
194.
10
38
1543
.73
194.
20
36
1542
.94
194.
30
34
1542.1
4
194.4
0
32
1541.
35
194.
50
30
1540
.56
194.
60
28
1539
.77
194.
70
26
1538.9
5
194.8
0
24
1538.
19
194.
90
22
1537
.40
195.
00
20
1536
.61
195.
10
18
1535.8
2
195.2
0
16
1535.
04
195.
30
14
1534
.25
195.
40
12
1533
.47
195.
50
10
1532.6
8
195.6
0
10
1531.
90
195.
70
1531
.12
195.
80
1530
.33
195.
90
1529.5
5
196.0
0
Mechanical specifications of TN11MR4 board are as follows:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Mechanical specifications of TN21MR4 board are as follows:

l
Dimensions of front panel: 128.9 mm (H) x 220 mm (D) x 25.4 mm (W) or 5 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 1 in. (W)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MR4
0.2
0.3

12-57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12.7 MR8
The available functional version of the MR8 board is TN11.
12.7.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR8 boar adds/drops and multiplex
eight channels of signals.
12.7.5 Front Panel
12.7.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one MR8 board.
the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.

The available functional version of the MR8 board is TN11.
12.7.2 Application
As a type of optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the MR8 boar adds/drops and multiplex
eight channels of signals.
12-58

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Client side
OTU
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
MR8
MR8
OA
OA

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the

WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D1
IN
D8
MO
MI
A1
Drop optical
module
A8
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM optical module

Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted
with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of wavelengths.

12-60

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

12.7.5 Front Panel


Figure 12-26 shows the front panel of the MR8 board.
Figure 12-26 Front panel of the MR8 board
MR8
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
D4
IN
A4
OUT
D5
MO
A5
MI
D6
D1
A6
A1
D7
D2
A7
A2
D8
D3
A8
A3
MR8
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 20 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR8 board. Table 12-56 lists the type
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A8
LC

D1-D8
LC

IN
LC
OUT
LC
MI
LC

MO
LC

Laser Hazard Level

12.7.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one MR8 board.
Table 12-57 shows the valid slots for the MR8 board.
Table 12-57 Valid slots for the MR8 board
12-62
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot
number of the MR8 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8 board displayed on
the NM is IU1.

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

signal
Last four digits
Frequency of the eighth

optical signal

the eighth optical signal
l
"9280" indicates that the frequency of the eighth optical signal is 192.80 THz.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
l
The frequency of the second optical signal is 192.20 THz.
The frequency of the third optical signal is 192.30 THz.
The frequency of the seventh signal is 192.70 THz.


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
A5/D5
A6/D6
A7/D7
A8/D8
MI/MO
IN/OUT
10
NOTE

12-64
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100

board.
Default: /

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Configure Band Type
Sets the band type.
Default: C

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
GHz
100
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
IN-D5
IN-D6
IN-D7
IN-D8
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
isolation
dB
> 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
-1dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
IN-MRO
MRI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
3.5
Isolation
dB
> 13
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40

12-65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The MR8 adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
Table 12-62 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8
Group
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
A5/D5
A6/D6
12-66
Waveleng
th No.
80
64
48
32
16
Waveleng
th (nm)
1560.61
1554.13
1547.72
1541.35
1535.04
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.10
192.90
193.70
194.50
195.30
Waveleng
th No.
78
62
46
30
14
Waveleng
th (nm)
1559.79
1553.33
1546.92
1540.56
1534.25
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.20
193.00
193.80
194.60
195.40
Waveleng
th No.
76
60
44
28
12
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.98
1552.52
1546.12
1539.77
1533.47
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.30
193.10
193.90
194.70
195.50
Waveleng
th No.
74
58
42
26
10
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.17
1551.72
1545.32
1538.98
1532.68
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.40
193.20
194.00
194.80
195.60
Waveleng
th No.
72
56
40
24
Waveleng
th (nm)
1557.36
1550.92
1544.53
1538.19
1531.90
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.50
193.30
194.10
194.90
195.70
Waveleng
th No.
70
54
38
22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Group
A7/D7
A8/D8
Waveleng
th (nm)
1556.55
1550.12
1543.73
1537.40
1531.12
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.60
193.40
194.20
195.00
195.80
Waveleng
th No.
68
52
36
20
Waveleng
th (nm)
1555.75
1549.32
1542.94
1536.61
1530.33
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.70
193.50
194.30
195.10
195.90
Waveleng
th No.
66
50
34
18
Waveleng
th (nm)
1554.94
1548.51
1542.14
1535.82
1529.55
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.80
193.60
194.40
195.20
196.00
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MR8
0.2
0.3
12.8 MR8V
MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA
The available functional version of the MR8V board is TN11.
12.8.2 Application
The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals, and adjusts the multiplexed
input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The MR8V board is mainly used to add/drop signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a
The MR8V board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
12.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8V
board.
12.8.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one MR8V board.
12.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V
The characteristic code for the MR8V board contains of eight digits that indicate the frequencies
of the first and the eighth signals processed by the board.
12.8.9 MR8V Parameters
12.8.10 Specifications of the MR8V

The available functional version of the MR8V board is TN11.
12.8.2 Application
The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals, and adjusts the multiplexed
input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding channel.
For the position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system, see Figure 12-27.
Figure 12-27 Position of the MR8V board in the DWDM system
Client side
OTU
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
OA
OA
MR8V
MR8V
OA
12-68

OA
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The MR8V board is mainly used to add/drop signals, to query wavelengths, and to provide a
Table 12-63 Functions and features of the MR8V board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the

multiplexed signals and adjusts the multiplexed input optical power
of WDM-side signal and the input optical power of each adding
channel.
WDM specification
Cascading interface

Wavelength query
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The MR8V board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 12-28 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-69
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 12-28 Functional modules and signal flow of the MR8V board
D1
D8
MO
A1
A2
A8
VOA
VOA
VOA
MI
IN
VO
VI
V
O
A
Drop optical
module
Add optical
module
OUT
OADM
optical module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
module separates eight wavelengths from the signals and these eight wavelengths are transmitted
to the OTU boards or integrated client-side equipments through the D1 to D8 interfaces. The
The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals. After the optical power adjustment by VOA,
the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the MI interface receives the adjusted
with eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 interfaces by the add optical module. Then,
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals.
12-70

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Adjusts the input optical power of eight channels. Adjusts the input optical power of
pass-through wavelengths.
l

Power supply module

12.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the MR8V
board.

Figure 12-29 shows the front panel of the MR8V board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-71
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 12-29 Front panel of the MR8V board
MR8V
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
D4
OUT
A4
IN
D5
MO
A5
MI
D6
D1
A6
A1
D7
D2
A7
A2
D8
D3
A8
A3
VO
VI
MR8V
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 22 optical interfaces on the front panel of the MR8V board. Table 12-64 lists the type
12-72

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-64 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MR8V board
Interface
Type
Function
A1-A8
LC

D1-D8
LC

IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side

when the IN interface is not connected to the VO
interface on the same MR8V board.
Receives the adjusted multiplexed signal from the VO
interface when the IN interface is connected to the VO
interface on the same MR8V board by a fiber.
OUT
LC
MI
LC

MO
LC

VI
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal from the WDM side.
VO
LC
Transmits the adjusted multiplexed signal to the IN

interface.
Laser Hazard Level

12.8.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one MR8V board.
Table 12-65 shows the valid slots for the MR8V board.
Table 12-65 Valid slots for the MR8V board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

12-73
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack, so the slot
number of the MR8V board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MR8 board, the slot number of the MR8V board displayed on
the NM is IU1.
12.8.7 Characteristic Code for the MR8V

Table 12-66 Characteristic code for the MR8V board
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

signal
Last four digits

optical signal

"V"
Adjustment of the input

optical power of each
channel
Indicates that the board

adjusts the input optical
power of each channel.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V.
l
"V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
l


12-74

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-67 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MR8V board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
A1/D1
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
A5/D5
A6/D6
A7/D7
A8/D8
MI/MO
IN/OUT
10
VI
11
VO
12
NOTE
12.8.9 MR8V Parameters

For MR8V parameters, refer to Table 12-68.
Table 12-68 MR8V parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

name.

Add-Drop Wavelength
( nm ) / Frequency
( THz )

board.
Actual Band Type

12-75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
No./Add-Drop
Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
1/1529.16/196.050 to
80/1560.61/192.100
Default: /

board.
Configure Band Type
Sets the band type.
Default: C
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio (dB)
Min. Attenuation Rate

(dB) to Max.
Attenuation Rate (dB)
Default:Max.
The Optical Interface Attenuation

Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical
power attenuation of a board channel
so that the optical power of the
output signals at the transmit end is
within the preset range.
You can obtain the value range of
this parameter by querying the
corresponding Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB) parameters.
See D.42 Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM
Max. Attenuation Rate

(dB)
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)

parameter queries the maximum
attenuation rate allowed by the
current optical interface of a board.
See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate
(dB) (WDM Interface) for more
information.

(dB)
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB)

parameter queries the minimum
attenuation rate allowed by the
current optical interface of a board.
See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate
information.
12.8.10 Specifications of the MR8V

Table 12-69 lists the optical specifications of the MR8V board.
12-76

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-69 Optical specifications of the MR8V board

Correspondin
g interfaces
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1529-1561
GHz
100
IN-D1
IN-D2
IN-D3
IN-D4
IN-D5
IN-D6
IN-D7
IN-D8
1 dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
Adjacent channel
isolation
dB
> 25
isolation
dB
> 35
A1-OUT
A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
VI-VO
1 dB spectral width
nm
0.2

loss
dB
Attenuation range
dB
0-20
Adjustment accuracy
dB
1 (attenuation 10 dB)
IN-MRO
MRI-OUT
Insertion loss
dB
3.5
Isolation
dB
> 13
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
1.5 (attenuation 15 dB)

1.8 (attenuation >15 dB)

The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
Table 12-70 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8V
Group
A1/D1
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Waveleng
th No.
80
64
48
32
16
Waveleng
th (nm)
1560.61
1554.13
1547.72
1541.35
1535.04

12-77
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Group
A2/D2
A3/D3
A4/D4
A5/D5
A6/D6
A7/D7
12-78
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.10
192.90
193.70
194.50
195.30
Waveleng
th No.
78
62
46
30
14
Waveleng
th (nm)
1559.79
1553.33
1546.92
1540.56
1534.25
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.20
193.00
193.80
194.60
195.40
Waveleng
th No.
76
60
44
28
12
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.98
1552.52
1546.12
1539.77
1533.47
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.30
193.10
193.90
194.70
195.50
Waveleng
th No.
74
58
42
26
10
Waveleng
th (nm)
1558.17
1551.72
1545.32
1538.98
1532.68
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.40
193.20
194.00
194.80
195.60
Waveleng
th No.
72
56
40
24
Waveleng
th (nm)
1557.36
1550.92
1544.53
1538.19
1531.90
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.50
193.30
194.10
194.90
195.70
Waveleng
th No.
70
54
38
22
Waveleng
th (nm)
1556.55
1550.12
1543.73
1537.40
1531.12
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.60
193.40
194.20
195.00
195.80
Waveleng
th No.
68
52
36
20
Waveleng
th (nm)
1555.75
1549.32
1542.94
1536.61
1530.33
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.70
193.50
194.30
195.10
195.90

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Group
A8/D8
Waveleng
th No.
66
50
34
18
Waveleng
th (nm)
1554.94
1548.51
1542.14
1535.82
1529.55
Frequenc
y (THz)
192.80
193.60
194.40
195.20
196.00
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MR8V
7.7
8.6
12.9 SBM2
SBM2: 2-channel CWDM single-fiber bi-directional add/drop board
The available functional versions of the SBM2 board is TN11.
12.9.2 Application
The SBM2 board adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
The SBM2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, and to provide a cascading
interface.
The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
12.9.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board.
12.9.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SBM2 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-79
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

12.9.8 SBM2 Parameters

12.9.9 Specifications of the SBM2

The available functional versions of the SBM2 board is TN11.
12.9.2 Application
The SBM2 board adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
For the position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system, see Figure 12-30.
Figure 12-30 Position of the SBM2 board in the CWDM system
Client side
OTU
Client side
OTU
OTU
OTU
SBM2
SBM2

The SBM2 board is mainly used to add/drop and multiplex signals, and to provide a cascading
interface.
Table 12-71 Functions and features of the SBM2 board
12-80
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds/drops two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

The added and dropped optical signals must be of different
wavelengths.
WDM specification
Supports only the single-fiber dual fed CWDM system.
Cascading interface
Provides a cascading optical interface to cascade other single-fiber

bi-directional OADM boards.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The SBM2 board consists of the OADM optical module, control and communication module,
Figure 12-31 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board.
Figure 12-31 Functional modules and signal flow of the SBM2 board
D1
LINE
D2
A1
Drop optical
module
A2
Add optical
module
EXT
OADM optical module

Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed signals through the LINE interface. After the optical module
processes the multiplexed signals, the board separates the multiplexed signals into two
wavelengths of optical signals and outputs them through the D1 and D2 optical interfaces to the
OTU boards or integrated client-side equipment. The board also receives two wavelengths of
optical signals through the A1 and A2 interfaces, couples them to the multiplexed signals and
outputs the coupled signals through the LINE interface.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-81
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The EXT interface is used as a cascade interface. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other
single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed
signals.
Module Function
l
OADM optical module

Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals.

Power supply module

12.9.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board.

Figure 12-32 shows the front panel of the SBM2 board.
12-82

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 12-32 Front panel of the SBM2 board
SBM2
STAT
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
EXT
LINE
D1
A1
D2
A2
SBM2
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the SBM2 board. Table 12-72 lists the type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-83
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-72 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SBM2 board
Interface
Type
Function
A1/A2
LC

D1/D2
LC

LINE
LC
Receives and transmits multiplexed signals.
EXT
LC
Cascading interface, transmits the multiplexed signals

to other single-fiber bi-directional OADM boards to
add/drop the remaining channels of the multiplexed
signals.
Laser Hazard Level

12.9.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SBM2 board.
Table 12-73 shows the valid slots for the SBM2 board.
Table 12-73 Valid slots for the SBM2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11


12-84

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-74 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SBM2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
A1
D1
A2
D2
LINE
EXT
12.9.8 SBM2 Parameters

For SBM2 parameters, refer to Table 12-75.
Table 12-75 SBM2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Sets and displays the optical

interface name.

Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
Queries the operating wavelength

at the WDM-side optical interface
of a board.
Actual Band Type
No./Wavelength ( nm ) /
Frequency ( THz )
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
Default: /
Sets the operating wavelength at

the WDM-side optical interface of
a board.
Configure Band Type
CWDM
Sets the band type.
Default: CWDM
12.9.9 Specifications of the SBM2

Table 12-76 lists the optical specifications of the SBM2 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

12-85
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 12-76 Optical specifications of the SBM2 board

Interface
Item
Unit
Value
range
nm
1271 to 1611
LINE-D1
LINE-D2
Drop channel insertion loss
dB
Isolation
dB
30
A1-LINE
A2-LINE
Add channel insertion loss
dB
Isolation
dB
30
Optical return loss
dB
> 40
Pass-through loss
dB
1.5
CWDM
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
12-86
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
SMB2
0.2
0.3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

13
13 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit
Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop

Multiplexing Unit
About This Chapter

13.1 RDU9
RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band)
13.2 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
13.3 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board
13.4 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
13.5 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
13.6 WSMD2
WSMD2: 2-port wavelength selective switching multiplexer and demultiplexer board
13.7 WSMD4
13.8 WSMD9
WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

13.1 RDU9
RDU9: 9-port ROADM splitting board (C_Band)
The available functional version of the RDU9 board is TN11.
13.1.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RDU9 board is used with
the WSM9 board to implement the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
The RDU9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
performance, and monitor alarms and performance events.
The RDU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
13.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board
13.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one RDU9 board.
13.1.8 RDU9 Parameters
13.1.9 Specifications of the RDU9

The available functional version of the RDU9 board is TN11.
13.1.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RDU9 board is used with
the WSM9 board to implement the wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 13-1.
13-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-1 Position of the RDU9 board in the DWDM system

Client-side
O
T
U
O O
T T
U U
O
T
U
O O
T T
U U
DMUX
DMUX
DCM
Client-side
MUX
OA
OA
RDU9
WSM9
WSM9
RDU9
MUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
Client-side
O
T
U
OA
OA
DCM
DMUX
O O
T T
U U
O
T
U
Client-side
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same wavelength
at the same time.

The RDU9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
Table 13-1 Functions and features of the RDU9 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Broadcasts the signals received from the main optical path in nine
directions at the same time.
WDM specification
Supports the DWDM specification.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

13-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The RDU9 board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 13-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9.
Figure 13-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the RDU9 board
DM1
DM2
DM3
DM4
DM5
DM6
DM7
DM8
Optical demultiplexer module

ROA
MONI
TOA
MONO
IN
EXPO
Optical module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface.
13-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The optical signals from the IN optical interface are divided into two channels of signals based
on the optical power by the optical splitter. The main path optical signals are output through the
EXPO interface and other signals are output through the TOA interface.
The RDU9 board can be cascaded to the optical amplifier unit (OAU) through the TOA interface.
If no cascade is required, the signals from the TOA interface should be input to the ROA interface
directly.
The optical wavelength signal from the ROA interface is split equally into different channels of
optical signals, and the signals are then output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces.
A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and
are then output through the MONO interface for performance detection. A few signals are
extracted from the optical signals that are from the ROA interface and are output through the
MONI interface for performance detection.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Broadcasts signals in nine directions.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for input and output
optical power detection.
the MONI/MONO interface for detection.

Power supply module

13.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board

Figure 13-3 shows the front panel of the RDU9 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-3 Front panel of the RDU9 board
RDU9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MONO MONI
EXPO
IN
TOA ROA
DM1
DM2
DM3
DM4
DM5 DM6
DM7
DM8
RDU9
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the RDU9 board. Table 13-2 lists the type
13-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RDU9 board
Interface
Type
Function
DM1-DM8
LC
Transmits the multiplexed signals to be output at the

local station to the optical demultiplexing unit or the
optical add/drop multiplexing unit
IN
LC
EXPO
LC
MONI
LC
Connected to the input interface of the spectrum

analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the
optical spectrum for the input through the ROA
interface.
The MONI port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the ROA port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Proa (dBm) - Pmoni
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO
LC

analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for
the signals output through the EXPO interface.
The MONO port is a 3/97 tap of the total composite
signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
TOA
LC
Used as the cascade output interface.
ROA
LC
Used as the cascade input interface.
NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber
jumper.
Laser Hazard Level

13.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one RDU9 board.
Table 13-3 shows the valid slots for the RDU9 board.
Table 13-3 Valid slots for the RDU9 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

13-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17


Table 13-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RDU9 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
EXPO
DM1-DM8
3-10
TOA/ROA
11
MONI
12
MONO
13
13.1.8 RDU9 Parameters

For RDU9 parameters, refer to Table 13-5.
Table 13-5 RDU9 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Sets and displays the optical interface name.
Configure Band
Default: C
13-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Actual Band
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

information.
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All
13.1.9 Specifications of the RDU9

Table 13-6 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
Insertion loss
IN-Drop (DM1-DM8)
dB
12.5
ROA-Drop (DM1-DM8)
dB
11.5
IN-EXPO
dB
12.5
IN-TOA
dB
Consistency of the insertion loss of each

channel
dB
1.2
Reflectance
dB
< -40
dB
0.5

13-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11RDU9
6.0
6.6
13.2 RMU9
RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
The available functional version of the RMU9 board is TN11.
13.2.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RMU9 board is used
with the WSD9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
The RMU9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and
13.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board.
13.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one RMU9 board.
13.2.8 RMU9 Parameters
13.2.9 Specifications of the RMU9

The available functional version of the RMU9 board is TN11.
13-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Type
Table 13-7 lists the types of the RMU9 board.
Table 13-7 Type description of the RMU9 board
Board
Type
Description
TN11RMU
9
01
Processes the odd and even wavelengths of C-band.
TN11RMU
9
02
Processes the odd and even wavelengths in the C band and

supports the port blocking function.
13.2.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the RMU9 board is used
The RMU9 board can add eight single-wavelength signal or multi-channel signals to the main
path. Being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit or optical add and drop multiplexing
unit, the multiplexed channels enter the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port. As for
the single channels, they are directly sent to the RMU9 board through the channel-adding port
by the optical transponder units.
For the position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 13-4.
Figure 13-4 Position of the RMU9 board in the DWDM system
Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
O O O
T T T
U U U
DMUX
O
T
U
MUX
DCM
8
OA
OA
WSD9
RMU9
RMU9
WSD9
MUX
O
T
U
O O
T T
U U
OA
DCM
DMUX
O
T
U
Client-side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OA
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side

13-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
at the same time.

The RMU9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
Table 13-8 Functions and features of the RMU9 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Adds eight single-wavelength signals or multi-channel signals to the

main path. Used with the OTU with tunable wavelength, the RMU9
board implements the dynamic input of eight channel signals.
WDM specification
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Port blocking
Blocks all input wavelengths at one of the AM1 to AM8 optical

interfaces.
NOTE
Only the TN11RMU902 board supports this function.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The RMU9 board consists of the optical module, optical power detection module, control and
Figure 13-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board.
13-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the RMU9 board
AM1
AM2
AM3
AM4
AM5
AM6
AM7
AM8
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
VOA
Optical multiplexer module

TOA
MONO
ROA
OUT
EXPI
MONI
Optical module
PIN
optical power detection module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The wavelengths to be added are input through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
NOTE
l The channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) must use a unique wavelength. Otherwise,
the services in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
l The wavelength used by the channel corresponding to each interface (AM1-AM8) cannot be the same
as the wavelength of the optical signals input through the EXPI optical interface. Otherwise, the services
in the two channels that use the same wavelength are interrupted.
After being multiplexed by the optical multiplexer module, the optical signals input through the
AMn optical interface are output through the TOA optical interface.
The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface can be cascaded with an optical
amplifier board. If no cascading is required, the optical signals are directly input to the ROA
optical interface.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

After the main optical path input through the EXPI optical interface is multiplexed with the
optical wavelength signals added on the board through the ROA optical interface, the
multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
A small number of optical signals that are input through the EXPI interface are separated from
the main path and then output through the MONI interface. They are used for optical performance
detection.
A small number of optical signals are separated from those that are output through the TOA
interface and then sent to the MONO interface. These signals are used for optical performance
detection.
Module Function
l
Optical module
Multiplexes eight wavelengths added on the board.
Eight VOAs achieve the in-service adjustment of input optical power.

Detects in real time the optical power of TOA and EXPI interface.

Power supply module

13.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board.

Figure 13-6 shows the front panel of the RMU9 board.
13-14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-6 Front panel of the RMU9 board
RMU9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
MONO MONI
OUT EXPI
TOA ROA
AM1
AM2
AM3
AM4
AM5
AM6
AM7
AM8
RMU9
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces on the front panel of the RMU9 board. Table 13-9 lists the type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the RMU9 board
Interface
Type
Function
AM1-AM8
LC
Receive the single-wavelength signals or multichannel signals that are to be multiplexed into the main
path.
OUT
LC
EXPI
LC
MONI
LC

analyzer unit, accomplishes the online detection of the
optical spectrum for the input signals transmitted by the
main optical path.
signal at the EXPI port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pexpi (dBm) Pmoni (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO
LC

analyzer unit, detects the optical spectrum online for
the signals output through the TOA interface.
signal at the TOA port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Ptoa (dBm) - Pmono
(dBm) = 10 x lg(97/3) = 15 dB).
TOA
LC
Used as the cascade output interface.
ROA
LC
Used as the cascade input interface.
NOTE
When cascading is not adopted, the TOA and ROA interfaces should be directly connected by a fiber
jumper.
Laser Hazard Level

13.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one RMU9 board.
Table 13-10 shows the valid slots for the RMU9 board.
Table 13-10 Valid slots for the RMU9 board
13-16
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17


Table 13-11 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the RMU9 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
EXPI
OUT
AM1-AM8
3-10
TOA/ROA
11
MONI
12
MONO
13
13.2.8 RMU9 Parameters

For RMU9 parameters, refer to Table 13-12.
Table 13-12 RMU9 parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

13-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

parameter queries the maximum attenuation
rate allowed by the current optical interface
of a board.
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

parameter queries the minimum attenuation
of a board.
Configure Band
Default: C
13-18
Actual Band

board.
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

(dBm) parameter queries the threshold
value of the input optical power, which can
trigger a board to generate an optical power
loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When the actual
input optical power is lower than this
threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Block Port
Disabled, Enabled
Before wavelengths are added to the AM

interface of the RMU9, set this parameter to
Enabled. After configurations of
wavelengths and services on the OTU are
complete, set this parameter to Disabled.
Default: Disabled
Before the OTU where wavelengths are

added is replaced, set this parameter to
Enabled. After the OTU is replaced, and
wavelengths and services are configured,
set this parameter to Disabled.
Actual Working
Band Parity
Queries the parity of the actual working

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Selects the desired parity of the working

band.
Default: All
13.2.9 Specifications of the RMU9

Table 13-13 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9 board.
Table 13-13 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
Insertion loss
EXPI-OUT
dB
8.5
AMxa-TOA
dB
12.5b
ROA-OUT
dB
1.5
Reflectance
dB
< -40
Attenuation range
dB
0-15
Attenuation precision
dB
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
VOA attenuation under channel blocking

functionc
dB
> 42
dB
0.5

13-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
c: Only the TN11RMU902 supports the channel blocking function.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11RMU901
7.7
8.6
TN11RMU902
8.2
13.3 ROAM
ROAM: reconfigurable optical adding module board
The available functional version of the ROAM board is TN11.
13.3.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM board is used
with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement
wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
The ROAM board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, achieve built-in power
equilibrium, and monitor alarms and performance events.
The ROAM board consists of the planar lightwave circuit (PLC) optical module, control and
13.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ROAM
board.
13.3.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one ROAM board.
13-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


13.3.8 ROAM Parameters
13.3.9 Specifications of the ROAM

The available functional version of the ROAM board is TN11.
Type
Table 13-14 lists the types of the ROAM board.
Table 13-14 Type description of the ROAM board
Board
Type
Description
TN11ROAM
01
Processes the even

wavelengths in C band.
02
Processes the odd

13.3.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the ROAM board is used
with the optical demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop multiplexing unit to implement
wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system, see Figure 13-7.
Figure 13-7 Position of the ROAM board in the DWDM system
OA
OA
ROAM
ROAM
OA
OA
40
DMUX
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
40
O
T
U
O
T
U
DMUX
O O O
T T T
U U U
O
T
U
Client-side

13-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
at the same time.

The ROAM board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, achieve built-in power
equilibrium, and monitor alarms and performance events.
Table 13-15 Functions and features of the ROAM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Implements dynamic adding/dropping, pass-through, and blocking of

a maximum of 40 wavelengths with the demultiplexing board as well
as dynamic grooming of wavelengths for services on the ring network.
WDM specification
Power equilibrium
Implements the wavelength-level equilibrium and control of optical

power to flatten the spectrum for the working signals.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring

the board.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The ROAM board consists of the planar lightwave circuit (PLC) optical module, control and
Figure 13-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ROAM.
13-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-8 Functions and features of the ROAM board
OUT
M01
M02
M40
VOA
VOA
VOA
EXPI
Optical multiplexer module

Splitter
IN
EXPO
DM
PLC optical module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
The main path signals are received through the IN interface. The splitter divides the main path
signals into two channels of the same signals. One signal is output to the optical demultiplexer
unit through the DM interface and demultiplexed into single wavelengths dropped at the local
station. The other signal passes through and is output through the EXPO interface.
The signals to be added at the local station are received through the corresponding M01-M40
interfaces. These signals are multiplexed with the signal input through the EXPI interface and
then output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l
PLC optical module

Multiplexes forty wavelengths added on the board.
The PLC optical module contains the VOA modules that implement the power
adjustment at the wavelength level.
The PLC optical module blocks and terminates the signals dropped at the local station
and adjusts the optical power of other signals.
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

13.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the ROAM
board.

Figure 13-9 shows the front panel of the ROAM board.
Figure 13-9 Front panel of the ROAM board
ROAM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
M01 196.00
M02 195.90
M03 195.80
M04 195.70
M05 195.60
M06 195.50
M07 195.40
M08 195.30
M09 195.20
M10 195.10
M11 195.00
M12 194.90
M13 194.80
M14 194.70
M15 194.60
M16 194.50
M17 194.40
M18 194.30
M19 194.20
M20 194.10
M21 194.00
M22 193.90
M23 193.80
M24 193.70
M25 193.60
M26 193.50
M27 193.40
M28 193.30
M29 193.20
M30 193.10
M31193.00
M32192.90
M33192.80
M34192.70
M35192.60
M36192.50
M37192.40
M38192.30
M39192.20
M40192.10
DM
M31
M32
M12
M02
M22
M11
M01
M21
IN
EXPI
EXPO
OUT
M23
M13
M03
M34
M35
M36
M37 M38
M39
M30
M40
M20
M10
M29
M19
M09
M27 M28
M17 M18
M07 M08
M26
M16
M06
M25
M15
M05
M24
M14
M04
ROAM
13-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 45 optical interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 13-16 lists the type
Table 13-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ROAM board
Interface
Type
Function
M01-M40
LC
Add channels from the local station.
DM
LC
Drops channels to the local station.
OUT
LC
IN
LC
EXPO
LC
Used as the cascade interface to transmit the passthrough signal.
EXPI
LC
Used as the cascade interface to receive the passthrough signal.
There are 40 output interfaces on the front panel of the ROAM board. Table 13-17 and Table
13-18 show the mapping between the interfaces, frequency and wavelengths of the ROAM
board.
Table 13-17 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM
board (even)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.00
1529.55
M21
194.00
1545.32
M02
195.90
1530.33
M22
193.90
1546.12
M03
195.80
1531.12
M23
193.80
1546.92
M04
195.70
1531.90
M24
193.70
1547.72
M05
195.60
1532.68
M25
193.60
1548.51

13-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M06
195.50
1533.47
M26
193.50
1549.32
M07
195.40
1534.25
M27
193.40
1550.12
M08
195.30
1535.04
M28
193.30
1550.92
M09
195.20
1535.82
M29
193.20
1551.72
M10
195.10
1536.61
M30
193.10
1552.52
M11
195.00
1537.40
M31
193.00
1553.33
M12
194.90
1538.19
M32
192.90
1554.13
M13
194.80
1538.98
M33
192.80
1554.94
M14
194.70
1539.77
M34
192.70
1555.75
M15
194.60
1540.56
M35
192.60
1556.55
M16
194.50
1541.35
M36
192.50
1557.36
M17
194.40
1542.14
M37
192.40
1558.17
M18
194.30
1542.94
M38
192.30
1558.98
M19
194.20
1543.73
M39
192.20
1559.79
M20
194.10
1544.53
M40
192.10
1560.61
Table 13-18 Mapping between the optical interfaces, frequencies and wavelengths of the ROAM
board (odd)
13-26
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M01
196.05
1529.16
M21
194.05
1544.92
M02
195.95
1529.94
M22
193.95
1545.72
M03
195.85
1530.72
M23
193.85
1546.52
M04
195.75
1531.51
M24
193.75
1547.32
M05
195.65
1532.29
M25
193.65
1548.11
M06
195.55
1533.07
M26
193.55
1548.91
M07
195.45
1533.86
M27
193.45
1549.72
M08
195.35
1534.64
M28
193.35
1550.52
M09
195.25
1535.43
M29
193.25
1551.32
M10
195.15
1536.22
M30
193.15
1552.12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
Interface
Frequency
(THz)
Wavelengt
h (nm)
M11
195.05
1537.00
M31
193.05
1552.93
M12
194.95
1537.79
M32
192.95
1553.73
M13
194.85
1538.58
M33
192.85
1554.54
M14
194.75
1539.37
M34
192.75
1555.34
M15
194.65
1540.16
M35
192.65
1556.15
M16
194.55
1540.95
M36
192.55
1556.96
M17
194.45
1541.75
M37
192.45
1557.77
M18
194.35
1542.54
M38
192.35
1558.58
M19
194.25
1543.33
M39
192.25
1559.39
M20
194.15
1544.13
M40
192.15
1560.20
Laser Hazard Level

13.3.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one ROAM board.
Table 13-19 shows the valid slots for the ROAM board.
Table 13-19 Valid slots for the ROAM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
NOTE
The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the subrack. Therefore,
the slot number of the ROAM board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the three
slots.
For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the ROAM board, the slot number of the ROAM board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800



Table 13-20 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ROAM board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
EXPO
EXPI
OUT
DM
A01-A40
6-45
NOTE
The A01A40 interfaces correspond to the M01
M40 interfaces on the physical front panel.
13.3.8 ROAM Parameters

For ROAM parameters, refer to Table 13-21.
Table 13-21 ROAM parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
13-28

board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: Even
Wavelength Target
-32 to 8
Output Power (dBm) Default: /
Applies to the ROAM board only and is

used to set the single wavelength target
output optical power after add wavelengths
are multiplexed.
13.3.9 Specifications of the ROAM

Table 13-22 lists the optical specifications of the ROAM board.
Table 13-22 Optical specifications of the ROAM board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Item
Unit
Value
GHz
100
Insertion loss
Mxa-OUT
dB
9b
IN-DM
dB
EXPI-OUT
dB
14b
IN-EXPO
dB
nm
1529 - 1561
dB
> 22
dB
> 25

13-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Attenuation range
dB
0 to 20
Attenuation precision
dB
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Module switch time
ms
50
Extinction ratio
dB
30
-0.5 dB bandwidth of adding wavelength
nm
> 0.3
-0.5 dB bandwidth of pass-through

wavelength
nm
> 0.2
NOTE
a: Mx represents the M01-M40 interface.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11ROAM
66
72.6
13.4 WSD9
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
The available functional versions of the WSD9 board are TN11, TN12, and TN13.
13.4.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSD9 board is used with
the WSM9 or RMU9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM
network.
The WSD9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
13-30

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection
13.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSD9
board.
13.4.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSD9
board.
13.4.8 WSD9 Parameters
13.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9

The available functional versions of the WSD9 board are TN11, TN12, and TN13.
Version
Table 13-23 lists the version description of the WSD9 board.
Table 13-23 Version description of the WSD9 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the WSD9 board are TN11, TN12, and
TN13.
Difference
l Appearance:
The TN13WSD9 board uses a front panel different from that of the
WSD9 board of other versions. The TN13WSD9 board occupies
three slots. The TN12WSD9 and TN11WSD9 boards occupy two
slots. For details, see 13.4.5 Front Panel and 13.4.9 Specifications
of the WSD9.
l Specification:
The wavelength of the TN13WSD9 board is separated at 50 GHz
channel spacing. The wavelength of the TN12WSD9 and
TN11WSD9 boards are separated at 100 GHz channel spacing. For
details, see 13.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9.
The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary
according to the version of the board that you use. For details, see
13.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9.
Replacement
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Table 13-24 lists the substitution rules for the WSD9 board.
13-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-24 Substitution rules of the WSD9 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11WSD
9
TN12WSD
9
Upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R003 or a

later version.
TN12WSD
9
None
TN13WSD
9
None
13.4.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSD9 board is used with
the WSM9 or RMU9 board to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM
network.
The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be dropped at the local station are output
through the interfaces of the WSD9 board based on the configuration.
If the dropped signal is a multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical demultiplexer unit for
demultiplexing. Then, the demultiplexed signals enter corresponding OTUs and are sent to the
client-side equipment at the local station.
If the dropped signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is sent directly to the OTU at the local
station.
For the position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 13-10.
13-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-10 Position of the WSD9 board in the DWDM system

Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
O O O
T T T
U U U
MUX
DMUX
DCM
OA
OA
WSD9
WSM9
WSM9
WSD9
MUX
O
T
U
O O
T T
U U
O
T
U
OA
OA
DCM
DMUX
O
T
U
Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
NOTE
at the same time.

The WSD9 board is used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
Table 13-25 Functions and features of the WSD9 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or

chain network can output any wavelength combination to any
interface to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.
WDM specification
Online optical
performance
monitoring

13-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The WSD9 board consists of the optical module, temperature and optical power detection
Figure 13-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board.
Figure 13-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSD9 board
DM1 DM2
DM8
Splitter
IN
Splitter
EXPO
WSS optical module
MONI
MONO
Optical module
Temperature
detection
PIN
Temperature and optical power deteciton module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
13-34

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
The main path signal is received through the IN interface. The single-wavelength or multichannel signals to be dropped at the local station are output through the DM1-DM8 interfaces
based on the configuration. Other channels pass through the station and are output through the
EXPO interface.
Module Function
l
Optical module
The optical module can combine any wavelengths and transmit the signals through the
DM1-DM8 and EXPO interfaces.
The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains the VOA module that
implements the power adjustment at the wavelength level.
Temperature and optical power detection module

Monitors in real time the WSS optical module operating temperature.

Power supply module

13.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSD9
board.

Figure 13-12 shows the front panel of the WSD9 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-12 Front panel of the WSD9 board
WSD9
WSD9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MONO MONI
MONO MONI
EXPO
EXPO
IN
IN
DM1
DM1
DM2
DM2
DM3
DM4
DM3 DM4
DM5 DM6
DM5 DM6
DM7 DM8
DM7 DM8
WSD9
WSD9
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSD9 board. Table 13-26 lists the type
13-36

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSD9 board
Interface
Type
Function
DM1-DM8
LC
Transmits the single-wavelength or multi-channel

signal separated from the main path. If the signal is a
multi-channel signal, it is sent to the optical
demultiplexer unit or the optical add and drop
multiplexing unit. If the signal is a single-wavelength
signal, it is directly sent to the optical transponder unit.
EXPO
LC
IN
LC
MONI
LC

analyzer unit, accomplishes the online optical
performance monitoring for the received main path
signal.
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm)
= 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO
LC

performance monitoring for the transmitted main path
signal.
signal at the EXPO port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pexpo (dBm) Pmono (dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
Laser Hazard Level

13.4.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSD9
board.
Table 13-27, Table 13-28 and Table 13-29 show the valid slots for the WSD9 boards.
Table 13-27 Valid slots for the TN11WSD9 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

13-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16,
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
NOTE
OptiX OSN 8800:The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot in the
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9 board, the slot
number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSD9
board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSD9 or TN12WSD9 board displayed on the NM is the
number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSD9 board displayed on the NM
is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSD9
board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house
the TN13WSD9 board, the slot number of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


13-38

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSD9 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
EXPO
DM1-DM8
3-10
MONI
11
MONO
12
13.4.8 WSD9 Parameters

For parameters of the WSD9 board, refer to Table 13-31.
Table 13-31 WSD9 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation parameter by querying the corresponding Min.
Rate (dB)
Attenuation Rate (dB) and Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB) parameters.
information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed
See D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

See D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM
Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

information.
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default:
l TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9:
Even
l TN13WSD9:
All
13.4.9 Specifications of the WSD9

Table 13-32 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board
13-40
Item
Unit
Value
Type
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
Optical channels
40
80
GHz
100
50

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Type
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9
TN13WSD9
dB
8b
8b
Maximum channel insertion loss

difference
dB
1.5
1.5
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
-1dB spectral width
nm
> 0.32
> 0.16
Port isolation
dB
> 25
> 25
dB
> 25
> 25
dB
> 30
> 30
Extinction ratio
dB
35
35
Reconfiguration time
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
-40
Directivity
dB
35
35
dB
Attenuation range of each of

dropping wavelengths
dB
0-15
0-15
Attenuation precision of each of

dropping wavelengths
dB
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
<1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (>10 dB)
<1.5 (>10 dB)
Insertion loss
IN-DMxa
IN-EXPO
NOTE
a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.
l
TN11WSD9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
10.4 in. (H)
10.4 in. (H)
Weight:
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
TN11WSD9: 2.2 kg (4.9 lb.)

13-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN12WSD9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
TN13WSD9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSD9
17.0
18.7
TN12WSD9
25.4
28.5
TN13WSD9
25.4
28.5
13.5 WSM9
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
The available functional versions of the WSM9 board are TN11, TN12, TN13.
13.5.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSM9 board is used
The WSM9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power
detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
13.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSM9
board.
13.5.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSM9
board.
13.5.8 WSM9 Parameters
13.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9

The available functional versions of the WSM9 board are TN11, TN12, TN13.
13-42

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Version
Table 13-33 lists the version description of the WSM9 board.
Table 13-33 Version description of the WSM9 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the WSM9 board are TN11, TN12,
TN13.
Difference
l Appearance:
The TN13WSM9 board uses a front panel different from that of the
WSM9 board of other versions. The TN13WSM9 board occupies
three slots. The TN12WSM9 and TN11WSM9 boards occupy two
slots. For details, see 13.5.5 Front Panel and 13.5.9 Specifications
of the WSM9.
l Specification:
The wavelength of the TN13WSM9 board is separated at 50 GHz
channel spacing. The wavelength of the TN12WSM9 and
TN11WSM9 boards are separated at 100 GHz channel spacing. For
details, see 13.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9.
The mechanical specifications and power consumption vary
according to versions. For details, see13.5.9 Specifications of the
WSM9.
Replacement
Table 13-34 lists the substitution rules for the WSM9 board.
Table 13-34 Substitution rules of the WSM9 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11WSM
9
TN12WSM
9

later version.
TN12WSM
9
None
TN13WSM
9
None
13.5.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSM9 board is used
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The single-wavelength or multi-channel signals to be added to the main path are input through
the interfaces of WSM9 board.
If the added signal is a multiplexed signal, it is received after being multiplexed by the optical
multiplexer unit. If the added signal is a single-wavelength signal, it is directly received after
being converted by the OTU.
For the position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 13-13.
Figure 13-13 Position of the WSM9 board in the DWDM system
Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
O O O
T T T
U U U
DMUX
DCM
MUX
OA
OA
WSD9
WSM9
WSM9
WSD9
MUX
O
T
U
O O
T T
U U
O
T
U
OA
OA
DCM
DMUX
O
T
U
Client-side
O O
T T
U U
O O
T T
U U
Client-side
NOTE
at the same time.

The WSM9 board is mainly used to dynamically groom wavelengths, monitor online optical
13-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-35 Functions and features of the WSM9 board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Configures any wavelengths to any interfaces. A node on the ring or

chain network can receive any wavelengths at the local station through
any interfaces to achieve the dynamic wavelength allocation.
WDM specification
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of each channel.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported by the TN12WSM9 and TN13WSM9.

The WSM9 board consists of four parts: the optical module, temperature and optical power
detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 13-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSM9 board
AM1 AM2
AM8
Splitter
Splitter
EXPI
OUT
WSS optical module
MONI
MONO
Optical module
Temperature
detection
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI
optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input
through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
l
If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for
processing and then input to the WSM9 board through the AMn optical interface.
If single wavelength is to be added, the signal can be directly input to the WSM9 board
from the optical transponder unit through the AMn interface.
optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are
Module Function
l
Optical module
Selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs them through AM1-AM8 or EXPI.
13-46

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The wavelength selecting switch (WSS) optical module contains a VOA module, which
implements the optical power adjustment on a wavelength level.
l


Power supply module

13.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSM9
board.

Figure 13-15 shows the front panel of the WSM9 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-15 Front panel of the WSM9 board
WSM9
WSM9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MONO MONI
MONO MONI
OUT EXPI
OUT EXPI
AM1
AM2
AM2
AM1
AM3
AM4
AM4
AM3
AM5
AM6
AM6
AM5
AM7
AM8
AM8
AM7
WSM9
WSM9
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSM9 board. Table 13-36 lists the type
13-48

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-36 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSM9 board
Interface
Type
Function
AM1-AM8
LC
Receive the single-wavelength or multi-wavelength

signals that are to be multiplexed into the main path.
OUT
LC
EXPI
LC
MONI
LC
Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer

unit, accomplishes the online optical performance
monitoring for the received main path signal.
MONO
LC
Connects to the input interface of the spectrum analyzer

unit, accomplishes the online optical performance
monitoring for the transmitted main path signal.
signal at the OUT port (15 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmono
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
Laser Safety Level

TN11WSM9 and TN12WSM9:
The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1, indicating that the
maximum output optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
TN13WSM9:
The laser safety class of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the
maximum output optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3
dBm (136 mW).
13.5.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one TN11WSM9/TN12WSM9 board. Three slots house one TN13WSM9
board.
Table 13-37, Table 13-38 and Table 13-39 show the valid slots for the WSM9 boards.
Table 13-37 Valid slots for the TN11WSM9 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

13-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU66
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU6, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU15
NOTE
subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the
left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9 board, the slot
number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house the TN13WSM9
board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.
subrack. Hence, the slot number of the TN11WSM9 or TN12WSM9 board displayed on the NM is the
number of the left one of the two slots, and the slot number of the TN13WSM9 board displayed on the NM
is the number of the left one of the three slots. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the TN12WSM9
board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1. If slots IU1, IU2 and IU3 house
the TN13WSM9 board, the slot number of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM is IU1.


13-50

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-40 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSM9 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
EXPI
OUT
AM1-AM8
3-10
MONI
11
MONO
12
13.5.8 WSM9 Parameters

For WSM9 parameters, refer to Table 13-41.
Table 13-41 WSM9 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Sets and displays the optical interface

name.
Optical Interface
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.

(dB)

attenuation rate allowed by the current
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description

(dB)

Configure Band
Sets the working band of a board.
Default: C
Actual Band

board.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: Even
13.5.9 Specifications of the WSM9

Table 13-42 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board
13-52
Item
Unit
Value
Type
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
Optical channels
40
80
GHz
100
50
Insertion
loss
dB
8b
8b
Maximum channel insertion

loss difference
dB
1.5
1.5
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
-1 dB spectral width
nm
> 0.32
> 0.16
Port isolation
dB
> 25
> 25
dB
> 25
> 25
dB
> 30
> 30
AMxa-OUT
EXPI-OUT

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Type
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9
TN13WSM9
Extinction ratio
dB
35
35
Directivity
dB
35
35
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
-40
dB
Attenuation range of each of

adding wavelengths
dB
0-15
0-15
Attenuation precision of each of

adding wavelengths
dB
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (>10 dB)
< 1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
l
TN11WSM9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
10.4 in. (H)
10.4 in. (H)
Weight:
l
TN11WSM9: 2.2 kg (4.84 lb.)
TN12WSM9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
TN13WSM9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSM9
17.0
18.7
TN12WSM9
25.4
28.5
TN13WSM9
25.4
28.5

13-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

13.6 WSMD2
The available functional version of the WSMD2 board is TN11.
13.6.2 Application
As a type of reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit, the WSMD2 board is used
with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and the optical add and drop multiplexing
unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
The WSMD2 board is mainly used to broadcast services, dynamically groom wavelengths,
monitor online optical performance monitoring, and monitor alarms and performance events.
The WSMD2 board consists of the WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection
13.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the WSMD2
board.
13.6.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one WSMD2 board.
13.6.8 WSMD2 Parameters
13.6.9 Specifications of the WSMD2

13.6.2 Application
with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and the optical add and drop multiplexing
unit to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
For the position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system, see Figure 13-16.
13-54

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-16 Position of the WSMD2 board in the DWDM system

O
T
U
O
T
U
Client-side
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
MUX
DCM
OA
OA
WSMD2
WSMD2
OA
OA
DCM
MUX
O
T
U
DMUX
O
T
U
Client-side
O
T
U
O
T
U

Table 13-43 Functions and features of the WSMD2 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides service broadcasting function, and supports the function of

configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or
chain network can broadcast the signals received from the main
optical path as two channels of the same signals, and can input any
wavelengths added locally to the AM port.
WDM specification
Online optical
performance
monitoring


13-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment
Provides the function to adjust the optical power of any add

wavelengths at the local station.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The WSMD2 board consists of the WSS optical module, temperature and optical power detection
Figure 13-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2.
Figure 13-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD2
DM
AM
EXPO
EXPI
Splitter
Splitter
IN
OUT
WSS optical
module
Optical module
Coupler
MONI
MONO
Temperature
detection
PIN
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
13-56

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal flow
The optical signals of the main path are accessed through the IN interface. The signals are
broadcast into two same optical signals through the coupler. Then, the board drops one channel
of optical signals at the local station through the DM optical interface. The other channel of
optical signals is output through the EXPO optical interface to other directions.
Optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input
to WSMD2 board through the AM optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added,
the signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD2
board through the AM optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be
directly input to the WSMD2 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM interface.
Optical signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD2 board through
the EXPI optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the wavelengths added at the local
station. The multiplexed signals are finally output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l
Optical module
The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through the
following optical interface: EXPI and AM.
The WSS optical module contains the VOA module that implements the power
The Coupler optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it
through DM. It implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to two ports.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and sends them to
MONI/MONO for detection.

Detects in real time the input and output optical power of service signals.

Power supply module

13.6.5 Front Panel

board.

Figure 13-18 shows the front panel of the WSMD2 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-18 Front panel of the WSMD2 board
WSMD2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MONO MONI
OUT
IN
EXPO EXPI
DM
AM
WSMD2
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 8 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSMD2 board. Table 13-44 lists the type
13-58

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-44 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WSMD2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC
DM
LC

local station or other stations to the optical
demultiplexing unit or the optical add/drop
multiplexing unit.
AM
LC
Receives the single-wavelength signal or multiplexed

signal from the local station or other stations. Then, the
accessed signal is multiplexed into the main path.
EXPO
LC
Functions as a cascade output optical interface.

Multiple WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through
their EXPO optical interfaces.
EXPI
LC
Functions as a cascade input optical interface. Multiple

WSMD2 boards can be cascaded through their EXPI
optical interfaces.
MONI
LC

signal.
MONO
LC

analyzer unit, monitors the optical performance of the
transmitted main path signal online.
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
Laser Hazard Level

13.6.6 Valid Slots

Table 13-45 shows the valid slots for the WSMD2 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-45 Valid slots for the WSMD2 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
NOTE
the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the leftmost one of the two
slots.
For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the WSMD2 board, the slot number of the WSMD2 board displayed
on the NM is IU1.


Table 13-46 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WSMD2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
DM
AM
OUT
EXPO
EXPI
MONO
MONI

13-60

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For WSMD2 parameters, refer to Table 13-47.

Table 13-47 WSMD2 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)


(dB)

Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

board.

13-61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: Even

Table 13-48 lists the optical specifications of the WSMD2 board.
Table 13-48 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD2 board
Item
Unit
Value
Optical channels
40
GHz
100
nm
1529-1561
-1 dB spectral width
nm
> 0.32
dB
8a
Insertion loss
AM-OUT
EXPI-OUT
IN-DM
4.5a
IN-EXPO
13-62
dB
1.5
Port isolation
dB
> 25
Extinction ratio
dB
35

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Directivity
dB
35
dB
Attenuation range of each of adding

wavelength
dB
0-15
Attenuation precision of each of adding

wavelength
dB
< 1 (0 dB to 10 dB)
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSMD2
17.0
18.7
13.7 WSMD4
The available functional versions of the WSMD4 board are TN11 and TN12
13.7.2 Application
with the optical multiplexer and demultiplexer unit and optical add and drop multiplexing unit
to implement wavelength grooming at the nodes in the DWDM network.
The WSMD4 board consists of the RDU optical module, WSS optical module, temperature and
optical power detection module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
13.7.5 Front Panel
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

board.
13.7.6 Valid Slots

The available functional versions of the WSMD4 board are TN11 and TN12
Version
Table 13-49 lists the version description of the WDMD4 board.
Table 13-49 Version description of the WDMD4 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the WSMD4 board are TN11 and
TN12.
Difference
l Function:
The TN11WSMD4 processes 40 wavelengths in C band. The
TN12WSMD4 processes 80 wavelengths in C band. For details, see
Table 13-50.
l Specification:
you use. For details, see 13.7.9 Specifications of the WSMD4.
Replacement
The TN12WSMD4 board and TN11WSMD4 board are not

interchangeable.
Type
Table 13-50 lists the version description of the WSMD4 board.
13-64

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-50 Version description of the WSMD4 board

Board
Type
Description
TN11WSMD4
01
Processes the even wavelengths in C band.
02
Processes the odd wavelengths in C band.
01
Processes the even wavelengths and odd

TN12WSMD4
13.7.2 Application
West client
side
West
ODF
F
I
U
South
ODF
F
I
U
East client
side
WSMD4
WSMD4
WSMD4
WSMD4
South client
side
F
I
U
East
ODF
F
I
U
North
ODF
North client
side

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

optical path as four channels of the same signals, and can input any
wavelengths added locally to any port.
WDM specification
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment

Optical-layer ASON
Supported by the TN11WSMD401 and TN12WSMD4.

Figure 13-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board.
13-66

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD4 board
D D D D
M M M M
1 2 3 4
A A A A
M M M M
1 2 3 4
Splitter
Splitter
IN
OUT
RDU optical
WSS optical
module
module
Optical module
MONI
MONO
Temperature
detection
PIN
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal flow
The optical signals on the main path are accessed through the IN interface. It is broadcast into
four same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The four channels of optical signals
are output through the DM1-DM4 optical interfaces separately. According to the network
planning, the WSMD4 board drops one channel locally and outputs the other three channels to
other directions.
The optical signals (single-wavelength or multiplexed signals) added at the local station are input
to the WSMD4 board through one of the AM1-AM4 optical interfaces. Assume that the optical
signals are input through the AM1 optical interface. If multiple wavelengths are to be added, the
signals are first sent to the multiplexer unit for processing and then input to the WSMD4 board
through the AM1 optical interface; if single wavelength is to be added, the signals can be directly
input to the WSMD4 board from the optical transponder unit through the AM1 interface. Optical
signals cross-connected from other directions are input to the WSMD4 board through the AM2AM4 optical interfaces. Then, they are multiplexed with the added wavelengths at the local
station. The multiplexed signals are output through the OUT optical interface.
Module function
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Optical module
13-67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of
the following optical interfaces: AM1, AM2, AM3 and AM4.
The RDU optical module selects any combination of wavelengths and outputs it through
DM1-DM4. Implements the broadcasting from wavelength signals to four ports.
l


Power supply module

13.7.5 Front Panel

board.

13-68

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WSMD4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MONO MONI
OUT
IN
DM1
AM1
DM2
AM2
DM3
AM3
DM4
AM4
WSMD4
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSMD4 board. Table 13-52 lists the
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-69
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
AM1-AM4
LC

DM1-DM4
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
IN
LC
MONI
LC

signal.
MONO
LC

signal.
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
Laser Hazard Level

13.7.6 Valid Slots

Table 13-53 shows the valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board.
Table 13-53 Valid slots for the TN11WSMD4 board
13-70
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
Table 13-54 shows the valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board.
Table 13-54 Valid slots for the TN12WSMD4 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
NOTE
the slot number of the WSMD4 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots.
on the NM is IU1.


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface on the NM
IN
DM1
AM1
OUT
4
13-71
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
DM2-DM4
5 to 7
AM2-AM4
8 to 10
MONO
11
MONI
12

For WSMD4 parameters, refer to Table 13-56.
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

13-72

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description

(dB)

Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band

board.
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: Even

Item
Unit
Value
Optical channels
40
GHz
100
nm
1529-1561
-1dB spectral width
nm
> 0.32
dB
8b
Insertion loss
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
AMxa-OUT

13-73
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
IN-DMxa
Value
8
dB
1.5
Port isolation
dB
> 25
Extinction ratio
dB
35
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Directivity
dB
35
dB

wavelength
dB
0-15

wavelength
dB
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
Dimension
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)

4
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface.

Item
Unit
Value
Optical channels
80
GHz
50
nm
1529-1561
-1dB spectral width
nm
> 0.16
dB
8b
Insertion loss
AMxa-OUT
IN-DMxa
13-74
dB
1.5
Port isolation
dB
> 25
Extinction ratio
dB
35
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Directivity
dB
35

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
dB

wavelength
dB
0-15

wavelength
dB
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
Dimension
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)

4
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11WSMD4: 3.2 kg (7.1 lb.)
TN12WSMD4: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSMD4
17
18.7
TN12WSMD4
12
15
13.8 WSMD9
WSMD9: 9-Port wavelength selective multiplexing and demultiplexing board
13.8.2 Application
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

13.8.5 Front Panel
board.
13.8.6 Valid Slots

13.8.2 Application
Client side
Client side
O
T
U
MUX
DMUX
DCM
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
DM1
IN
LIN
SIN
EXPI
WSMD9
SIN
WSMD9
EXPO
MUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
Client side
13-76
DAS1
IN
SOUT
AM1
DCM
LOUT
OUT
EXPI
OUT
LOUT
AM1
EXPO
SOUT
DAS1
DCM
LIN
DM1
DMUX
O
T
U
DCM
O
T
U
Client side

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
Optical interfaces AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards
in other dimensions.

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

optical path as nine channels of the same signals, and can input any
wavelengths added locally to any port.
WDM specification
Supports the DWDM specification. The wavelength of the

TN11WSMD9 board is separated at 50 GHz channel spacing.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarm and
performance event
monitoring

the board.
Optical power
adjustment

Optical-layer ASON
Supported

Figure 13-23 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-77
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 13-23 Functional modules and signal flow of the WSMD9 board
DDDDDDDD
MMMMMMMM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EXPO EXPI
A A A A A A A A
MMMMMMMM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Optical demultiplexer
module
Splitter
IN
MONI
Splitter
OUT
Splitter
WSS optical
module
RDU optical
module
MONO
Optical module
PIN
PIN
Temperature
detection
Optical power deteciton module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal flow
The multiplexed signals that need to be dropped are input to the board through the IN interface.
It is broadcast into nine same optical signals through the RDU optical module. The nine channels
of optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces separately.
One channel of the signals is dropped locally through the multiplexer board and the other eight
channels of signals are scheduled to other eight directions.
A few signals are extracted from the main path optical signals that are from the IN interface and
are then output through the MONI interface for performance detection.
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals of the main optical path through the EXPI
optical interface. The single-wavelength or multiplexed optical signals to be added are input
through the AM1-AM8 optical interfaces.
optical wavelength signals added through the AMn optical interface, the multiplexed signals are
Module function
l
13-78
Optical module

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The RDU optical module broadcasts signals in nine directions. The nine channels of
optical signals are output through the DM1-DM8 and EXPO optical interfaces
separately.
The WSS optical module can access any combination of wavelengths through any of
the following optical interfaces: AM1 - AM8 and EXPI.
l


Power supply module

13.8.5 Front Panel

board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-79
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

WSMD9
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION
HAZARDLEVEL 1MINVISIBLE
LASERRADIATION
DONOTVIEWDIRECTLYWITH
NON-ATTENUATINGOPTICALINSTRUMENTS
DM1
AM1
DM2 AM2
DM3
AM3
DM4 AM4
DM5
AM5
DM6 AM6
MONO MONI
DM7
OUT
AM7
IN
DM8 AM8
EXPO EXPI
WSMD9
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 22 optical interfaces on the front panel of the WSMD9 board. Table 13-60 lists the
13-80

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
AM1-AM8
LC

DM1-DM8
LC

multiplexing unit.
OUT
LC
IN
LC
MONI
LC

signal.
power, calculation formula: Pin (dBm) - Pmoni (dBm)
= 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
MONO
LC

signal.
(dBm) = 10 x lg (97/3) = 15 dB).
EXPO
LC
EXPI
LC
Laser Hazard Level

13.8.6 Valid Slots

Table 13-61 shows the valid slots for the WSMD9 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

13-81
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 13-61 Valid slots for the WSMD9 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
NOTE
the slot number of the WSMD9 board displayed on the NM is the number of the left one of the two slots.
on the NM is IU1.


Interface on the NM
IN
EXPO
EXPI
OUT
DM1-DM8
5-12
AM1-AM8
13-20

For WSMD9 Parameters, refer to Table 13-63.
13-82

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.

(dB)


(dB)

Configure Band
C
Default: C
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Used to configure type of the working band

of a board.
Actual Band

board.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All

13-83
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

MUT_LOS alarm.
information.

Item
Unit
Value
Optical channels
80
GHz
50
Insertion loss
dB
8b
AMxa/EXPI-OUT
IN-DMxa/EXPO
13-84
12
dB
1.5
nm
1529-1561
-1dB spectral width
nm
> 0.16
Port isolation
dB
> 25
Extinction ratio
dB
35
Maximum reflectance
dB
-40
Directivity
dB
35
dB

wavelength
dB
0 to 15

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value

wavelength
dB
< 1 (0 to 10 dB)
Dimension
< 1.5 (> 10 dB)

9
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11WSMD9
25
30

13-85
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14 Optical Amplifier Unit
14
Optical Amplifier Unit
About This Chapter

14.1 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band
14.2 DAS1
DAS1: optical amplifier unit
14.3 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board
14.4 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifier unit
14.5 OBU1
OBU1: optical booster unit
14.6 OBU2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.1 CRPC
CRPC: case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C band
The available functional version of the CRPC board is TN11.
14.1.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the CRPC board adopts backward pumping technology. It
supports transmission over ultra-long distance and application of the 40G OTU, and can generate
multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC board must be used with the EDFA.
The main function and feature supported by the CRPC board is online optical performance
monitoring.
The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module,
14.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the CRPC board.
14.1.6 Valid Slots
The CRPC board is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is installed outside the cabinet and not
inside the subrack.
14.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper
There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and
J4.
14.1.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC
The characteristic code for the CRPC board contains one character and two digits, indicating
the gain of the optical signals processed by the board.
14.1.10 CRPC Parameters
14.1.11 Specifications of the CRPC
Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.

The available functional version of the CRPC board is TN11.
Type
Table 14-1 lists the types of the CRPC board.
14-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-1 Type description of the CRPC board

Board
Type
Description
CRPC
01
Adopts the backward pumping technology.
03
Adopts the forward pumping technology.
14.1.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the CRPC board adopts backward pumping technology. It
supports transmission over ultra-long distance and application of the 40G OTU, and can generate
multi-channel pump light of high power. The CRPC board must be used with the EDFA.
CAUTION
Always turn off the pump laser of the CRPC board before removing or inserting the fiber to the
CRPC.
For the position of the CRPC board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-1 and Figure 14-2.
Figure 14-1 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (backward pump)
Client
side
Client
side
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
OBU1
OAU1
F
I
U
F
I
U
CRPC
F
I
U
F
I
U
CRPC
OAU1
OBU1
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side
Figure 14-2 Position of the CRPC board in the WDM system (forward pump)
Client
side
Client
side
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
OBU1
OAU1
F
I
U
F
I
U
F
I
U
CRPC
CRPC
F
I
U
OAU1
OBU1
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side

The main function and feature supported by the CRPC board is online optical performance
monitoring.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 14-2 Functions and features of the CRPC board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing

energy for the amplification of signals in the fiber.
l Implements the distributed online amplification of signals over
long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Detects the optical power of the pump laser, temperature control

current, pump current, and back facet current.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The CRPC board consists of the Raman pump optical module, driving and detection module,
The CRPC board is used at the receive end and the transmit end of the system, making use of
the stimulated Raman scattering effect to amplify the optical signals during transmission.
The CRPC board is located before the receiver. The pump light travels in the reverse direction
of the signal light. Figure 14-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC.
The CRPC board is located after the transmit end. The pump light travels in the same direction
of the signal light. Figure 14-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC.
14-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (backward pump)
LINE
Splitter
Signal
Signal
Pump light
Pump source
Raman pump optical module
Detection for
pump light
power and
current
Pumping
current and
temperature
control
PIN
SYS
MON
Detection for
temperature
Driving and detection module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
DC power supply
from PDU
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

SCC
14-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the CRPC board (forward pump)
LINE
Splitter
Signal
Signal
Pump light
Pump source
MON
Detection for
pump light
power and
current
Pumping
current and
temperature
control
PIN
SYS
Detection for
temperature
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
DC power supply
from PDU
Signal Flow
l
Backward pump
The pump source of the CRPC board sends the pump light to the WDM side through the
LINE optical interface. On the line, the signals that are amplified through the distributed
amplification are input through the LINE interface. The splitter then splits them into two,
among which the service optical signals are output through the SYS interface. A few
supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8)
or test instrument through the MON interface for online optical performance monitoring.
For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2
interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with
the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32/: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC
board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the
communication with the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the
ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.
Forward pump
The signal light is input through the SYS interface and output to the optical line through
the LINE interface. A few supervisory signals are output to the multi-channel spectrum
analyzer unit (MCA4, MCA8) or test instrument through the MON interface for online
14-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

optical performance monitoring. The pump light that is generated by the CRPC board is
output to the optical line through the LINE interface in the same direction as the signal
light, to implement the distributed amplification of the optical signal.
For OptiX OSN 6800: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC is connected to the ETH1/ETH2
interface of the AUX or the ETH3 interface of the EFI board for communication with the
SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T64/OptiX OSN 8800 T32/: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC
board is connected to the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI2 board for the
communication with the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800 T16: The Ethernet interface of the CRPC board is connected to the
ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface of the EFI board for the communication with the SCC.
Module Function
l

The laser in the pump source generates the pump light and sends the light to the optical
line for transmission. The Raman pump optical module makes use of the stimulated
Raman scattering effect of the fiber to amplify the optical signals during transmission.
The splitter splits one channel of optical signals from the pump source module into two
channels of signals of different power. One of them is output through the SYS interface
and transmitted in the main optical path. The other channel of signals is output to the
MON interface for spectrum detection and supervising.

Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current and operating
temperature of the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
Drives the pump laser inside the pump optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the control and communication module.

Power supply module

14.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the CRPC board.

Figure 14-5 shows the front panel of the CRPC board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-5 Front panel of the CRPC board

MON
SYS
LINE
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
CRPC
ALM
RUN
WARNING: FIBERS MUST

BE CONNECTED SEFORE
POWER UP
RS232-1
RS232-2
LAN
Indicators
There are two indicators on the front panel.
l
Service alarm indicator (ALM) - red
Interfaces
There are six interfaces on the front panel of the CRPC board. Table 14-3 lists the type and
Table 14-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the CRPC board
Interface
Type
Function
LINE
LSH/APC
Receives the line optical signal.
SYS
LC
Transmits the amplified signal to the FIU.
MON
LC
Connected to the MCA4, MCA8 or OPM8, monitors

performance online.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite signal
at the SYS port (20 dB lower than the actual signal
power, calculation formula: Psys (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
LAN
RJ-45
For OptiX OSN 6800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2

of the AUX interface or the ETH3 interface of the EFI
board for the communications with the SCC.
For OptiX OSN 8800: Connected to the ETH1/ETH2/
ETH3 of the EFI2 board for the communications with
the SCC.
RS232-1/
RS232-2
14-8
RS232 communication interface

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Laser Hazard Level

After the IPA function is enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M,
which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from10
dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
14.1.6 Valid Slots

The CRPC board is a case-shaped Raman amplifier. It is installed outside the cabinet and not
inside the subrack.
Table 14-4 shows the valid slots for the CRPC board.
Table 14-4 Valid slots for the CRPC board
Product
Supported Logical Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
120-123
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
120-123
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
120-123
OptiX OSN 6800
Non-extended slot numbering mode: 28-31

Extended slot numbering mode: 120-123
14.1.7 Dip Switch and Jumper

There are two groups of jumpers on the CRPC boards. The two groups are identified as J3 and
J4.
Figure 14-6 shows the number of each jumper.
Figure 14-6 Jumpers on the CRPC board
CRPC
10
10
J3
J4
CPU
Jumpers 9 to 10 in J3 and 1 to 6 in J4 are used for internal identification on the board. To ensure
the normal operation of the board, follow the requirements below to set the jumpers.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Do not connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J3.
Do not connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Non-extended slot numbering mode)
Connect jumpers 9 to 10 in J3. (Extended slot numbering mode)
Connect jumpers 1 to 2 in J4.
Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are
jumper setting regulations in the non-extended slot numbering mode:
When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are not connected, the board slot is IU28.
When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are connected and jumpers 9-10 are not connected, the board
slot is IU29.
When jumpers 7-8 in J4 are not connected and jumpers 9-10 are connected, the board
slot is IU30.
When jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are connected, the board slot is IU31.
The following are jumper setting regulations in the extended slot numbering mode:
slot is IU121.
slot is IU122.
For OptiX OSN 8800:

l
Jumpers 7-8 and 9-10 in J4 are used to set the slot of the CRPC board. The following are
jumper setting regulations:
slot is IU121.
slot is IU122.
14-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.1.8 Characteristic Code for the CRPC

Table 14-5 Characteristic code for the CRPC board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Is always G.
Two digits
Gain
Indicate the gain value.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.


Table 14-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the CRPC board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
LINE
SYS
MON
14.1.10 CRPC Parameters

For CRPC parameters, refer to Table 14-7.
Table 14-7 CRPC parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.

14-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Board Work Type
C, C + L, L
Sets the working mode of a board.

According to the board working mode, you
can specify the type of the band from which
the optical signals are accessed.
Default: C
Actual Band

board.
Configure Band
Default: C
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: Off

14-12
Fixed Pump Optical

Power (dBm)
The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm)

parameter sets or queries the output optical
power of an optical amplifier board.
See D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power
information.
Min. Fixed Pump

Optical Power
(dBm)
The Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power

(dBm) parameter is used to query the
minimum pump optical power that an
optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed
pump optical power value is smaller than
the minimum value, the board might work
abnormally.
See D.34 Min. Fixed Pump Optical
Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Max. Fixed Pump

Optical Power
(dBm)
The Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power

(dBm) parameter is used to query the
maximum pump optical power that an
optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed
pump optical power value is larger than the
maximum value, the board might work
abnormally.
See D.31 Max. Fixed Pump Optical
Power (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.1.11 Specifications of the CRPC

Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.
Table 14-8 Optical specifications of the CRPC board
Item
Un
it
Value
CRPC01
CRPC03
Pump wavelength range
nm
1400-1500
1400-1500
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
Maximum pump power
dB
m
29
29.5
Channel gain on G.652 fiber
dB
> 10
> 10
Channel gain on G.653 fiber
dB
NA
> 16
Channel gain on LEAF fiber
dB
> 12
NA
Channel gain on TWRS fiber
dB
> 13
NA
Effective noise figure on G.652

fiber
dB
NA
Effective noise figure on G.653

fiber
dB
NA
NA
Effective noise figure on LEAF

fiber
dB
-1
NA
Effective noise figure on

TWRS fiber
dB
-1.5
NA
dB
0.5
0.5
Output connector type
LSH/APC, LC/PC
LSH/APC, LC/PC
l
Dimensions of board: 345.0 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 76.0 mm (W) or 13.8 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 3.0 in. (W)
Weight
l
CRPC01: 4.0 kg (8.8 1b.)
CRPC03: 4.2 kg (9.2 1b.)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
CRPC01
110.0
121.0
CRPC03
70.0
77.0
14.2 DAS1
DAS1: optical amplifier unit
The available functional version of the DAS1 board is TN11.
14.2.2 Application
The DAS1 board is used to amplify optical signals, multiplex and demultiplex the optical
supervisory channel and main optical channel, and process optical supervisory signals in one
direction. The DAS1 board can be used at either the transmit end or the receive end.
The DAS1 board integrates the functions of an optical amplifier unit, an FIU board (used to
multiplexes the main optical channel and supervisory channel or demultiplexes the supervisory
channel from the main channel signal), and an optical supervisory board. It supports gain
adjustment, in-service monitoring of optical performance, gain locking, and transient state
control.
The DAS1 board consists of the multiplexer, VOA, EDFA module, demultiplexer, OSC optical
module, service processing module, driving and detection module, control and communication
module, and power supply module.
14.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the DAS1 board.
14.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot house one DAS1 board.
14.2.8 DAS1 Parameters
14.2.9 Specifications of the DAS1

The available functional version of the DAS1 board is TN11.
14-14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.2.2 Application
The DAS1 board is used to amplify optical signals, multiplex and demultiplex the optical
supervisory channel and main optical channel, and process optical supervisory signals in one
direction. The DAS1 board can be used at either the transmit end or the receive end.
For the position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-7.
Figure 14-7 Position of the DAS1 board in the WDM system
Client side
Client side
O
T
U
O
T
U
O
T
U
MUX
DMUX
DCM
O
T
U
DM1
IN
LIN
AM1
EXPO
SIN
DAS1
WSMD9
SIN
WSMD9
EXPO
SOUT
AM1
DCM
MUX
O
T
U
O
T
U
Client side
DAS1
IN
EXPI
OUT
LOUT
OUT
EXPI
SOUT
LOUT
DCM
LIN
DM1
DMUX
O
T
U
DCM
O
T
U
Client side
NOTE
Optical interfaces AM2AM8 and DM2DM8 on the WSMD9 board can be used to cross-connect boards
in other dimensions.
It is recommended that the DAS1 board be used at a ROADM station.
The DAS1 board cannot be used at an OLA station.

The DAS1 board integrates the functions of an optical amplifier unit, an FIU board (used to
multiplexes the main optical channel and supervisory channel or demultiplexes the supervisory
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

channel from the main channel signal), and an optical supervisory board. It supports gain
adjustment, in-service monitoring of optical performance, gain locking, and transient state
control.
Table 14-9 Functions and features of the DAS1 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total

wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm.
l Supports the system to transmit services over different fiber spans
without electrical regeneration.
l Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main
l Processes one channel of optical supervisory signals.
14-16
Gain adjustment
The DAS1 board continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB

based on the input optical power.
Online optical
performance
monitoring
Provides the online monitoring interface. A small number of EDFAamplified optical signals is output through this interface to the optical
spectrum analysis board. In this manner, the spectrum and optical
performance of the multiplexed signal are monitored without
interrupting the services.
Gain lock function
The EDFA inside the board has the gain lock function. Adding or
dropping one or more channels or optical signal fluctuation does not
affect the signal gain of other channels.
Transient control
function
The EDFA inside the board has the transient control function. When
channels are added or dropped, the board can suppress the fluctuation
of the optical power in the path so as to implement the smooth
upgrading and expansion.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
l Detects and reports the optical power.
OSC signal
regeneration
The DAS1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has
the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical
amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory
signals are added.
Operating
wavelength for OSC
signals
1511nm
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
l Monitors the temperature of the pump laser.

l Detects the pump driving current, back facet current, pump
cooling current, temperature of the pump laser and the ambient
temperature of the board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The DAS1 board consists of the multiplexer, VOA, EDFA module, demultiplexer, OSC optical
module, service processing module, driving and detection module, control and communication
Figure 14-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board.
Figure 14-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the DAS1 board
RTDC RRDC MONR
LIN
VOA
Demultiplexer
EDFA module
Splitter
SOUT
TM
O/E
RX
TX
Service
processing
module
E/O
OSC optical
module
WSC
RM
LOUT
Splitter
Multiplexer
EDFA module
VOA
SIN
MONT
TRDC
TTDC
PIN
PIN
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Required voltage
Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlledby SCC)
Signal Flow
l
Signal flow in the main optical channel

In the transmit direction:
The board receives line optical signals through the LIN optical interfaces and sends the
signals to the demultiplexer module.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The demultiplexer splits OSC signals from main optical channel signals. The
demultiplexer outputs OSC signals through the TM optical interface and sends the main
optical channel signals to the VOA.
The VOA adjusts optical power of the main optical channel signals and then sends the
signals to the EDFA optical module.
The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain
of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board
through the RTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion
for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the RRDC optical
interface. Then, the EDFA module outputs the amplified signals through the SOUT
optical interface.
In the receive direction:
The board receives multiplexed signals through the SIN optical interface and sends the
signals to the VOA.
The VOA adjusts optical power of the signals and then sends the signals to the EDFA
optical module.
The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks the gain
of the signal. Then, the EDFA optical module outputs the signals to a DCM board
through the TTDC optical interface. After the DCM finishes compensating dispersion
for the signals, the EDFA optical module receives the signals through the TRDC optical
interface. The EDFA optical module sends the amplified multiplexed signals to the
multiplexer module.
The multiplexer multiplexes the amplified multiplexed signals and OSC signals input
through the RM optical interface as line optical signals, and outputs the signals through
the LOUT optical interface.
l
Signal flow in the OSC

The board receives OSC signals through the TM optical interface on itself or from an
FIU board through the RX optical interface, and sends the OSC signals to the optical
receiver module.
The optical receiver module converts the optical signals into electrical signals and sends
the electrical signals to the service processing module.
The service processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals and
sends the overhead bytes to the SCC board. This module also processes FE electrical
signals.
The overhead bytes processed by the SCC board are sent to the optical receiver module
and then are converted into OSC signals by the optical receiver module.
The optical receiver module sends the signals to the RM optical interface on the local
board or to an FIU board. After multiplexing the signals, the multiplexer sends the OSC
signals to other NEs.
Module Function
l
Multiplexer
Multiplexes main optical channel signals and OSC signals as line optical signals.
Demultiplexer
Demultiplexes line optical signals into main optical channel signals and OSC signals.
l
14-18
VOA
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Adjusts optical power of optical signals according to system requirements.

l
EDFA optical module

Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for amplification.
The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify the optical signal
to implement the optical power amplification function.
The splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path for optical power
detection.

Encapsulates FE electrical signals and electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames,
processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding.
OSC optical module

Performs O/E and E/O conversion for one channel of OSC signals.

temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA.
Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.

Power supply module

14.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the DAS1 board.

Figure 14-9 shows the front panel of the DAS1 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-9 Front panel of the DAS1 board
DAS1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
WSC
TX
RX
TM
RM
MONT MONR LOUT LIN
SOUT SIN
TTDC
TRDC
RTDC RRDC
DAS1
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 14 optical interfaces and one FE electrical interface on the front panel of the DAS1
board. Table 14-10 lists the type and function of each interface.
14-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-10 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DAS1 board
Interface
Type
Function
WSC
RJ45
Transmits/Receives the FE electrical signals.
TX
LC
Transmits the supervisory signal.
RX
LC
Receives the supervisory signal.
TM
LC
RM
LC
MONT
LC
MONR
LC
Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, OPM8 or WMU,

accomplishes the online performance monitoring.
The MONT port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite
signal at the LOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Plout (dBm) Pmont (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
The MONR port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite
signal at the SOUT port (20 dB lower than the actual
signal power, calculation formula: Psout (dBm) Pmonr (dBm) = 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
LOUT
LC
Transmits the amplified signal (including the

supervisory signal).
LIN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified

(including the supervisory signal).
SOUT
LC
Transmits the amplified signal(not including the

supervisory signal).
SIN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified (not

including the supervisory signal).
TTDC/TRDC
LC
RTDC/RRDC
LC
Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion

compensation.
Laser Hazard Level

14.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot house one DAS1 board.
Table 14-11 shows the valid slots for the DAS1 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-11 Valid slots for the DAS1 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5


Table 14-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DAS1 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
LIN/LOUT
RM/TM
RX/TX
RRDC
SOUT
RTDC
10
MONR
11
SIN
12
TRDC
15
TTDC
17
MONT
18
14.2.8 DAS1 Parameters

For parameters of the DAS1, refer to Table 14-13.
14-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-13 DAS1 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
This parameter provides an option to set the

optical power attenuation of a board
channel so that the input signals power of
the board is within the preset range.
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Actual Band

board.
Configure Band

of a board.
Default: C
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop
Default: All
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


14-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: On

Gain (dB)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain

of an optical amplifier board, namely, the
difference of the output power (dBm) to the
input power (dBm).
See D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface) for
more information.
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Threshold (dB) Value of Nominal
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter

specifies the desired gain of the signal
optical power. This parameter is used to
indicate the relative value between the
optical power of output signals and the
optical power of input signals, namely, the
amplifying multiple of the signal optical
power.
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold
(dB) parameters.
Default: The specific

value is related to the
module.
See D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM

Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold

(dB) parameter provides an option to query
the maximum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter
value cannot be set and depends on the
optical module type.
The value can be queried.
See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface) for
more information.
14-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Nominal Gain Lower

Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold

the minimum nominal gain of the optical
See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower
more information.
Channel Number
Mode
C80 Mode, C40

Mode, CWDM Mode
Sets the number of wavelengths supported

by the FIU board.
Default: C80 Mode

DEG Threshold
0 to 10167
Default: 190
DEG Monitoring
Time(s)
2 to 10
Degrade Threshold
Before FEC
1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3,

1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6,
1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9,
1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12,
Default: 7
Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An

alarm is reported when error codes detected
in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more
than the value of this parameter.
Sets the signal monitoring time. If the
number of bit errors in the signal exceeds
DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm
is reported.
Sets error codes thresholds for signals
before FEC.
Default: 1E-4
Rated Optical Power
(dBm)
-30 - 30
board.
The Rated Optical Power (dBm)

parameter provides an option to set and
query the per-channel rated optical power.
It is a reference value for automatic
adjustment of the optical power. When the
optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are
used in a network, this parameter is
available for the optical amplifier unit.
The value can be set or queried.
See D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm)
Fiber Type
G652 Fiber, G653

Fiber, LEAF Fiber,
TWRS Fiber, TWC
Fiber, TWPLUS
Fiber, SMFLS Fiber,
G654B Fiber
Specifies the type of a fiber.
Default: G652 Fiber
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Chromatic
Dispersion
Coefficient(ps/
(nm*km))
-15 - 30
This parameter is available only in the

ASON system. Set the parameter
according to the fiber type. Usually, take
the nominal value of the fiber.
Receive DCM
Dispersion
Compensation Value
(ps/nm)
0.0 - 6553.5
Default: 0
Default: 0
Specifies the dispersion compensation

value for the DCM at the receive end.
14.2.9 Specifications of the DAS1

Table 14-14 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board
Item
Specifica
tions of
OA
Uni
t
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
20
26
31
Nominal input power range
dB
m
-32 to 0
-32 to -6
-32 to -11
Input power range

per channel
40
channels
dB
m
-32 to -16
-32 to -22
-32 to -27
80
channels
dB
m
-32 to -19
-32 to -25
-32 to -30
40
channels
dB
m
-16
-22
-27
80
channels
dB
m
-19
-25
-30
Noise figure (NF)a
dB
8.5
5.5
5.5
Gain response time on adding/

dropping of channels
ms
< 10
< 10
< 10
Channel gain
dB
20 to 31
Gain flatness
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
Multi-channel gain slope
dB/
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
Nominal singlewavelength input

optical power
14-26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Specifica
tions of
demultipl
exer and
multiplex
er
Specifica
tions of
OSC
optical
module
Uni
t
Value
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Pump leakage at input
dB
m
< -30
< -30
< -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance

at input
dB
-27
-27
-27
Maximum reflectance tolerance

at output
dB
-27
-27
-27
Maximum total output optical

power
dB
m
20
20
20
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Input VOA inherent insertion

loss
dB
1.5
Input VOA dynamic attenuation

range
dB
20
Input VOA adjustment accuracy
dB
Operating wavelength range of

optical supervisory channel
nm
1480 to 1520
Optical return loss
dB
> 40
dB
1.5
Insert loss of C-band
dB
dB
< 0.2
nm
1504.5 to 1517.5
Signal rate
Mbi
t/s
155.52
Launched optical power
dB
m
0.5 to 5
dB
m
-42
Receiver overload
dB
m
-10
Insert loss of optical

supervisory
channel
LIN-TM
RMLOUT
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise
figure when the noise figure adopts the typical value.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11DAS1
22
28.6
14.3 HBA
HBA: high-power booster amplifier board
The available functional version of the HBA board is TN11.
14.3.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the HBA board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end.
The HBA board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and
transient control.
The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
14.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the HBA board.
14.3.6 Valid Slots
Three slots house one HBA board.
14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA
The characteristic code for the HBA board contains seven characters and digits, indicating the
band, the gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by
the board.
14.3.9 HBA Parameters
14.3.10 Specifications of the HBA
14-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The available functional version of the HBA board is TN11.
14.3.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the HBA board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end.
For the position of the HBA board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-10.
Figure 14-10 Position of the HBA board in the WDM system
Client
side
Client
side
OTU
OTU
MUX
OTU
HBA
FIU
OTU
DMUX
OAU1
DMUX
HBA
MUX
FIU
OAU1
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side

The HBA board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and
transient control.
Table 14-15 Functions and features of the HBA board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Only applied on the transmit edge of the OTM station in the system
that covers a long fiber span transmission.
l The HBA can amplify the input optical signals in C band. The total
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Typical gain
The typical gain of the HBA is 29 dB.
Online optical
performance
monitoring


14-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Gain lock function
Transient control
function
of the optical power in the path to implement smooth upgrade and
expansion.
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Optical-layer ASON
Supported


The HBA board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
Figure 14-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board.
Figure 14-11 Functional modules and signal flow of the HBA board
Splitter
OUT
IN
EDFA optical module

Driving
current
PIN
MON
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
14-30
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
One channel of multiplexed optical signal received through the IN interface is input to the EDFA
optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of the signal and locks
the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
Module Function
l
EDFA optical module

detection.


Power supply module

14.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the HBA board.

Figure 14-12 shows the front panel of the HBA board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-12 Front panel of the HBA board
HBA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
IN
OUT
HBA
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the HBA board. Table 14-16 lists the type
14-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HBA board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives the multiplexed signal to be amplified.
OUT
LSH/APC
Transmits the amplified signal.
MON
LC
Connected to the MCA4, MCA8, WMU or OPM8,

monitors performance online.
signal power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon
(dBm) = 10 x lg (999/1) = 30 dB).
Laser Hazard Level

which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from
10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
14.3.6 Valid Slots

Three slots house one HBA board.
Table 14-17 shows the valid slots for the HBA board.
Table 14-17 Valid slots for the HBA board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU2-IU7, IU12-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU16
NOTE
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the middle slot of the three occupied slots
in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the HBA board displayed on the NM is the number of the
middle slot.
l For example, if slots IU1, IU2, and IU3 house the HBA board, the slot number of the HBA board displayed
on the NM is IU2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.3.7 Characteristic Code for the HBA

the board.
Table 14-18 Characteristic code for the HBA board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character
The second character is

always G.
Third to the fourth digits
Gain
The third to the fourth digits

indicate the gain value.
Fifth character
The fifth character is always

I.
Sixth and seventh digits
Maximum nominal input

optical power
Indicate the maximum

nominal input optical power.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates
that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical
power is -8 dBm.


Table 14-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HBA board displayed on the NM
14-34
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
MON

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.3.9 HBA Parameters

For HBA parameters, refer to Table 14-20.
Table 14-20 HBA parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Actual Band
Configure Band
Used to configure type of the working band of

a board.
Default: C
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

information.
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: On

more information.
Gain (dB)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of

an optical amplifier board, namely, the
input power (dBm).
more information.

14-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies

the desired gain of the signal optical power.
This parameter is used to indicate the relative
value between the optical power of output
signals and the optical power of input signals,
namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal
optical power.
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) and
Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)
parameters.
Default: 29

Nominal Gain
Upper Threshold
(dB)
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

maximum nominal gain of the optical
amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value
cannot be set and depends on the optical
module type.
See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold
(dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
Nominal Gain
Lower Threshold
(dB)
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)

minimum nominal gain of the optical
module type.
See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold
(dB) (WDM Interface) for more information.
14-36
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even
Default: All

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Rated Optical
Power (dBm)
-30 - 30
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter

provides an option to set and query the perchannel rated optical power. It is a reference
value for automatic adjustment of the optical
power. When the optical amplifier unit and
ROADM unit are used in a network, this
parameter is available for the optical amplifier
unit.
Default:
l IN: -19
l OUT: 4

14.3.10 Specifications of the HBA

Table 14-21 Optical specifications of the HBA board
Item
Unit
Value
Type
TN11HBA
Channel allocation
nm
1529 - 1561
dBm
-25 to -3
Typical input power of a single

wavelength
dBm
80-channel system: -22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Noise figure (NF)
dB
<8
Input reflectance
dB
< -45
Output reflectance
dB
< -45
Maximum total output power
dBm
26
Gain response time on adding/dropping of

channels
ms
< 10
Channel gain
dB
291
Gain flatness
dB
2.5
dB
< 0.5

14-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
HBA
47
75
14.4 OAU1
OAU1: optical amplifier unit
The available functional versions of the OAU1 board are TN11 and TN12.
14.4.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OAU1 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end
or receive end.
The OAU1 is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain
lock, and transient control.
The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
14.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OAU1
board.
14.4.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one OAU1 board.
14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1
The characteristic code for the OAU1 board contains eight characters and digits, indicating the
gain range and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
14.4.9 OAU1 Parameters
14.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1
14-38

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 14-22 lists the version description of the OAU1 board.
Table 14-22 Version description of the OAU1
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
The TN11OAU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical
power of a wavelength, whereas the TN12OAU1 board supports.
For details, see 14.4.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.
l Appearance:
The TN11 and TN12 versions have different front panels. For
details, see 14.4.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
For the power consumption of each version, see 14.4.10
Specifications of the OAU1.
Replacement
Table 14-23 lists the substitution rules for the OAU1 board.
Table 14-23 Substitution rules of the OAU1 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OAU1
TN12OAU
1
The TN12OAU1 can be created as TN11OAU1 on the NMS.

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OAU1 functions as the
TN11OAU1.
TN12OAU1
None
Type
Table 14-24 lists the types of the OAU1 board.
Table 14-24 Type description of the OAU1 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Unit
Type
Description
Gain Range
TN11OAU1
01
Amplifies the input optical signals in C band.
20 dB to 31 dB

14-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Unit
TN12OAU1
Type
Description
Gain Range
02
20 dB to 31 dB
03
24 dB to 36 dB
05
23 dB to 34 dB
00
16 dB to 25.5 dB
01
20 dB to 31 dB
02
20 dB to 31 dB
03
24 dB to 36 dB
05
23 dB to 34 dB
14.4.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OAU1 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end
or receive end.
For the position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-13.
Figure 14-13 Position of the OAU1 board in the WDM system
Client
side
Client
side
OTU
MUX
OBU1
DMUX
OAU1
OAU1
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OBU1
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side

The OAU1 is mainly used for gain adjustment, online optical performance monitoring, gain
lock, and transient control.
Table 14-25 Functions and features of the OAU1 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

14-40

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Gain adjustment
The OAU100 continuously adjusts the gain from 16 dB to 25.5 dB

based on the input optical power.
The OAU101/OAU102 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to
31 dB based on the input optical power.
The OAU103 continuously adjusts the gain from 24 dB to 36 dB based
on the input optical power.
The OAU105 continuously adjusts the gain from 23 dB to 34 dB based
on the input optical power.
NOTE
14.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1 only provides the value of nominal gain.
Actual gain includes the noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal
gain.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Gain lock function
Transient control
function
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Optical-layer ASON
Supported


The OAU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
Figure 14-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1 board. Figure
14-15 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OAU1 board
TDC
RDC
MON
IN
OUT
EDFA optical module

Driving
current
PIN
Splitter
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
14-42
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-15 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OAU1 board
TDC
MON
OUT
IN
EDFA optical module

VOA
VO
RDC
Driving
current
PIN
VI
Splitter
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
the gain of the signal. Then the signal is sent to the DCM through the TDC interface for dispersion
compensation and returns to the EDFA optical module through the RDC interface. At last, the
amplified multiplexed signal is output through the OUT interface.
The VI interface receives the multiplexed signals sent from the upstream station. After the optical
power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then, the IN
interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals.
Module Function
l
EDFA optical module

detection.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l


Power supply module

14.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OAU1
board.

Figure 14-16 and Figure 14-17 show the front panel of the OAU1 board.
14-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-16 Front panel of the TN11OAU1 board
OAU1
OAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
MON
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
TDC
TDC
RDC
RDC
OAU1
OAU1
OAU101/OAU102/
OAU103
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OAU105

14-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-17 Front panel of the TN12OAU1 board
OAU1
OAU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
MON
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
TDC
TDC
RDC
RDC
VO
VO
VI
VI
OAU1
OAU1
OAU100/OAU101/
OAU102/OAU103
OAU105
Indicators
14-46

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are five optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OAU1 board. There are seven
optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN121OAU1 board. Table 14-26 lists the type and
Table 14-26 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OAU1 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC
TDC/RDC
LC
Connected to the interface of the DCM for dispersion

compensation.
MON
LC

at the OUT port (20 dB lower than the actual signal
power, calculation formula: Pout(dBm) - Pmon(dBm)
= 10 x lg(99/1) = 20 dB).
VIa
LC
VOa
LC

interface.
a: Only the TN12OAU1 board supports the interfaces.
Laser Hazard Level

OAU100, OAU101, OAU102, OAU103:
OAU105:
which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm
(10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
14.4.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one OAU1 board.
Table 14-27 shows the valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-27 Valid slots for the TN11OAU1 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU4, IU11
Table 14-28 shows the valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board.
Table 14-28 Valid slots for the TN12OAU1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU4, IU11
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800:

l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the right slot in the subrack. Therefore,
the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 3800:
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore,
the slot number of the OAU1 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OAU1 board, the slot number of the OAU1 displayed on the
NM is IU2.
14-48

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

14.4.7 Characteristic Code for the OAU1

Table 14-29 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Is always G.
Second to fifth digits
Gain range
Indicates the range within

which the gain can be
continuously adjusted.
Sixth character
Is always I.

optical power
Indicates the maximum

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates
that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input
optical power is 0 dBm.


are listed in Table 14-30 and Table 14-31.
Table 14-30 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OAU1 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
RDC/TDC
MON

14-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN12OAU1 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
RDC/TDC
MON
VI
VO
14.4.9 OAU1 Parameters

For parameters of the OAU1, refer to Table 14-32.
Table 14-32 OAU1 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE
Only the TN12OAU1 supports this parameter.
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE

14-50

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE

Actual Band

board.
Configure Band

of a board.
Default: C
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: On

Gain (dB)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

input power (dBm).
more information.

14-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)

power.
Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)
and Nominal Gain Upper Threshold
(dB) parameters.

module.

Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)

See D.40 Nominal Gain Upper
more information.
Nominal Gain Lower

Threshold (dB)

more information.
14-52
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Rated Optical Power

(dBm)
-30 - 30


board.

14.4.10 Specifications of the OAU1

Table 14-33 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
16
22
25.5
dBm
-20 to 2
-26 to -4
-32 to -7.5
Input power range per

channel
40 channels
dBm
-32 to -14
-32 to -20
-32 to -23.5
80 channels
dBm
-32 to -17
-32 to -23
-32 to -26.5

optical power
40 channels
dBm
-14
-20
-23.5
80 channels
dBm
-17
-23
-26.5
Noise figure (NF)a
dB
5.5
5.5

ms
< 10
< 10
< 10
Channel gain
dB
16 to 25.5
Gain flatness
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
dB/dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at

input
dB
-27
-27
-27

output
dB
-27
-27
-27
Maximum total output optical power
dBm
18
18
18
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
VI-VO
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
Adjustment accuracy
Table 14-34 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101 board

Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
20
26
31
dBm
-32 to 0
-32 to -6
-32 to -11

channel
40 channels
dBm
-32 to -16
-32 to -22
-32 to -27
80 channels
dBm
-32 to -19
-32 to -25
-32 to -30

optical power
40 channels
dBm
-16
-22
-27
80 channels
dBm
-19
-25
-30
Noise figure (NF)a
dB
8.5
5.5
5.5

ms
< 10
< 10
< 10
Channel gain
dB
20 to 31
Gain flatness
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
dB/dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
14-54

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30

input
dB
-27
-27
-27

output
dB
-27
-27
-27
dBm
20
20
20
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
VI-VOb
Adjustment accuracyb
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1.

Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
20
26
31
dBm
-32 to -3
-32 to -9
-32 to -14

channel
40 channels
dBm
-32 to -19
-32 to -25
-32 to -30
80 channels
dBm
-32 to -22
-32 to -28
-32

optical power
40 channels
dBm
-19
-25
-30
80 channels
dBm
-22
-28
-32
Noise figure (NF)a
dB
7.5
5.5
5.5

ms
< 10
< 10
< 10
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Channel gain
dB
20 to 31
Gain flatness
dB
dB/dB
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30

input
dB
-27
-27
-27

output
dB
-27
-27
-27
dBm
17
17
17
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
VI-VOb

Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
Nominal gain
dB
24
29
36
dBm
-32 to -4
-32 to -9
-32 to -16
Input power range

per channel
40
channels
dBm
-32 to -20
-32 to -25
-32
80
channels
dBm
-32 to -23
-32 to -28
-32
14-56

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
40
channels
dBm
-20
-25
-32
80
channels
dBm
-23
-28
-32
Noise figure (NF)a
dB
7.5
5.5
5.5

ms
< 10
< 10
< 10
Channel gain
dB
24 to 36
Gain flatness
dB
dB/dB
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30

input
dB
-27
-27
-27

output
dB
-27
-27
-27

power
dBm
20
20
20
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB
20
dB

optical power
VI-VOb

Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
1529-1561

1529-1561
14-57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
Nominal gain
dB
23
30
34
dBm
-32 to 0
-32 to -7
-32 to -11
Input power range

per channel
40
channels
dBm
-32 to -16
-32 to -23
-32 to -27
80
channels
dBm
-32 to -19
-32 to -26
-32 to -30
40
channels
dBm
-16
-23
-27
80
channels
dBm
-19
-26
-30
Noise figure (NF)a
dB
< 8.5
<6
<6

ms
< 10
< 10
< 10
Channel gain
dB
23 to 34
Gain flatness
dB
dB/dB
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
<-40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30

input
dB
-27
-27
-27

output
dB
-27
-27
-27

power
dBm
23
23
23
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation
range
dB
20
dB

optical power
VI-VOb
14-58

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F)
TN11OAU101
18.0
24.0
TN11OAU102
14.0
18.0
TN11OAU103
18.0
24.0
TN11OAU105
22.0
29.0
TN12OAU100
11.0
14.0
TN12OAU101
12.0
15.0
TN12OAU102
10.0
13.0
TN12OAU103
12.0
15.0
TN12OAU105
15.0
21.0
14.5 OBU1
The available functional versions of the OBU1 board are TN11, TN12.
14.5.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU1 amplifies optical signals.
The OBU1 board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and
transient control.
The OBU1 board consists of the EDFA optical module, driving and detection module, control
14.5.5 Front Panel
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU1
board.
14.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one OBU1 board.
14.5.7 Characteristic Code for the OBU1
The characteristic code for the OBU1 board contains six characters and digits, indicating the
gain and the maximum nominal input optical power of the signals processed by the board.
14.5.9 OBU1 Parameters
14.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1

The available functional versions of the OBU1 board are TN11, TN12.
Table 14-38 lists the version description of the OBU1 board.
Table 14-38 Version description of the OBU1 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the OBU1 board are TN11 and TN12.
Difference
l Function:
The TN11OBU1 board does not support adjustment of input optical
power of a wavelength, whereas the TN12OBU1 board supports.
l Appearance:
l Specification:
Specifications of the OBU1.
Replacement
14-60
Table 14-39 lists the substitution rules for the OBU1 board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-39 Substitution rules of the OBU1 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OBU1
TN12OBU
1
The TN12OBU1 can be created as TN11OBU1 on the NMS.

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU1 functions as the
TN11OBU1.
TN12OBU1
None
Type
Table 14-40 lists the types of the OBU1 board.
Table 14-40 Type description of the OBU1 board
Unit
Type
Description
Gain Range
TN11OBU1/
TN12OBU1
01
201.5 dB
03
231.5 dB
04
171.5 dB
14.5.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU1 amplifies optical signals.
For the position of the OBU1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-18.
Figure 14-18 Position of the OBU1 board in the WDM system
Client
side
Client
side
OTU
MUX
OBU1
OBU1
DMUX
OTU
OTU
DMUX
OBU1
OBU1
OTU
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side

The OBU1 board is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and
transient control.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-41 Functions and features of the OBU1 board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

l The typical gain of the OBU101 is 20 dB.
Typical gain

NOTE
14.5.10 Specifications of the OBU1 only provides the value of nominal gain.
gain.
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Gain lock function
Transient control
function
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring
Optical-layer ASON
Supported


Figure 14-19 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board. Figure
14-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN12OBU1 board.
14-62

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-19 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN11OBU1 board
Splitter
IN
OUT
EDFA optical module
Driving
current
PIN
MON
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
SCC
14-63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Splitter
OUT
IN
EDFA optical module
Driving
current
VOA
VO
PIN
MON
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
VI
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC )
SCC
Signal Flow
power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN
interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
Module Function
l
EDFA optical module

detection.

14-64

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l

Power supply module

14.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU1
board.

Figure 14-21 and Figure 14-22 show the front panel of the OBU1 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-21 Front panel of the TN11OBU1 board
OBU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
OBU1
14-66

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OBU1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
VO
VI
OBU1
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OBU1 board. And there are five
optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN121OBU1 board. Table 14-42 lists the type and
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-42 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU1 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC
MON
LC

power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
VIa
LC
VOa
LC

interface.
a: Only the TN12OBU1 board supports the interfaces.
Laser Hazard Level

14.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one OBU1 board.
Table 14-43 shows the valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board.
Table 14-43 Valid slots for the TN11OBU1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
14-68
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 14-45 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
The first character is always

G.
Second and third digits
Gain
The second and the third

digits indicate the gain value.
Fourth character
The fourth character is

always I.

optical power
The fifth and the sixth digits

indicate the maximum
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.


Table 14-46 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the TN11OBU1 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface on the NM
IN
1
14-69
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface on the NM
OUT
MON
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
MON
VI
VO

For parameters of the OBU1, refer to Table 14-48.
Table 14-48 OBU1 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of Max.
Attenuation Rate
(dB)

Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE
Only the TN12OBU1 supports this parameter.
14-70

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE

Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

parameter queries the minimum attenuation
of a board.
NOTE

Actual Band

board.
Configure Band

of a board.
Default: C
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

MUT_LOS alarm.
information.
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: On

Gain (dB)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

input power (dBm).
more information.

14-71
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)

power.
parameters.
Default:
l OBU101: 20dB
l OBU103: 23dB
l OBU104: 17dB

Nominal Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)

module type.
information.
Nominal Gain Lower

Threshold (dB)

module type.
more information.
14-72
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Rated Optical Power

(dBm)
-30 - 30


board


Table 14-49 Optical specifications of the OBU1 board
Item
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Unit
Value
TN11OBU10
1/
TN12OBU10
1
TN11OBU10
3/
TN12OBU10
3
TN11OBU10
4/
TN12OBU10
4
nm
1529-1561
1529-1561
1529-1561
dBm
-32 to -4
-32 to -3
-32 to -1
Input power
range per
channel
40
channels
dBm
-32 to -20
-32 to -19
-32 to -17
-32 to -23
-32 to -22
-32 to -20
Nominal singlewavelength
input optical
power
40
channels
-20
-19
-17
-23
-22
-20
80
channels
dBm
80
channels
Noise figure (NF)
dB
5.5
6.0
5.5
Nominal gain
dB
20
23
17

ms
< 10
< 10
< 10

14-73
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
TN11OBU10
1/
TN12OBU10
1
TN11OBU10
3/
TN12OBU10
3
TN11OBU10
4/
TN12OBU10
4
Channel gain
dB
201.5
231.5
171.5
Gain flatness
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
< -40
< -40
dBm
< -30
< -30
< -30
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at input
dB
-27
-27
-27
Maximum reflectance
tolerance at output
dB
-27
-27
-27

power
dBm
16
20
16
dB
2.0
2.0
2.0
dB
0.5
0.5
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuatio
n range
dB
20
dB
VI-VOa
Adjustment accuracya
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU1.
14-74
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11OBU1: 1.3 kg (2.9 1b.)
TN12OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OBU101
11.0
13.0
TN11OBU103
13.0
15.0
TN11OBU104
12.0
14.0
TN12OBU101
10.0
11.0
TN12OBU103
11.0
12.1
TN12OBU104
10.0
12.0
14.6 OBU2
14.6.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU2 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end
or receive end.
The OBU2 is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient
control.
14.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU2 board.
14.6.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one OBU2 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 14-50 lists the details on the two versions of the OBU2 board.
Table 14-50 Version description of the OBU2 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
The TN11OBU2 board does not support adjustment of input optical
power of a wavelength, whereas the TN12OBU2 board supports.
l Appearance:
l Specification:
Specifications of the OBU2.
Replacement
Table 14-51 lists the substitution rules for the OBU2 board.
Table 14-51 Substitution rules of the OBU2 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OBU2
TN12OBU
2
The TN12OBU2 can be created as TN11OBU2 on the NMS.

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12OBU2 functions as the
TN11OBU2.
TN12OBU2
None
Type
The OBU2 board is available only in one type, that is, OBU205.
14.6.2 Application
As a type of optical amplifier unit, the OBU2 board amplifies optical signals at the transmit end
or receive end.
For the position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-23.
14-76

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 14-23 Position of the OBU2 board in the WDM system

Client
side
Client
side
OTU
MUX
OTU
OTU
DMUX
OBU2
OBU2
OBU2
OBU2
DMUX
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
Client
side
Client
side

The OBU2 is mainly used for online optical performance monitoring, gain lock, and transient
control.
Table 14-52 Functions and features of the OBU2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function

Typical gain
The typical gain of the OBU205 is 23 dB.

NOTE
14.6.10 Specifications of the OBU2 only provides the value of nominal gain.
gain.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Online optical
performance
monitoring

Gain lock function
Transient control
function
Alarms and
performance events
monitoring


14-77
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

Figure 14-24 and Figure 14-25 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OBU2
board.
Splitter
IN
OUT
EDFA optical
module
Driving
current
PIN
MON
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
14-78
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Splitter
OUT
IN
EDFA optical module
Driving
current
VOA
VO
PIN
MON
Detection for
pump current
and temperature
VI
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC )
SCC
Signal Flow
power adjustment by VOA, the signals are transmitted through the VO interface. Then the IN
interface receives the adjusted multiplexed signals too.
Module Function
l
EDFA optical module

detection.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-79
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l

Power supply module

14.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OBU2 board.

Figure 14-26 and Figure 14-27 show the front panel of the OBU2 board.
14-80

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OBU2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
OBU2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-81
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

OBU2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
MON
OUT
IN
VO
VI
OBU2
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are three optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN11OBU2 board. There are five
optical interfaces on the front panel of the TN12OBU2 board. Table 14-53 lists the type and
14-82

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-53 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OBU2 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC
MON
LC

power, calculation formula: Pout (dBm) - Pmon (dBm)
= 10 x lg (99/1) = 20 dB).
VOa
LC

interface.
VIa
LC
a: Only the TN12OBU2 board supports the interfaces.
Laser Hazard Level

which indicates that the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges from
10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
14.6.6 Valid Slots

Two slots house one OBU2 board.
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU4, IU11
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-83
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU62-IU68
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU2-IU8, IU12-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU2-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU4, IU11
NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800:

the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 6800:
the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the right one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on
the NM is IU2.
For OptiX OSN 3800:
l The rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the upper slot in the chassis. Therefore,
the slot number of the OBU2 board displayed on the NM is the number of the upper one of the two slots.
l For example, if slots IU2 and IU3 house the OBU2 board, the slot number of the OBU2 displayed on the
NM is IU2.

Table 14-56 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board
14-84
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

G.
Gain

Fourth character

always I.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description

optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.


Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
MON
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
MON
VI
VO

For parameters of the OBU2, refer to Table 14-59.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-85
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 14-59 OBU2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

optical power attenuation of a board channel
so that the input signals power of the board is
within the preset range.
Default: Value of
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE
Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

queries the maximum attenuation rate
allowed by the current optical interface of a
board.
NOTE

Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

NOTE

Actual Band
Configure Band

of a board.
Default: C
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)
14-86

value, the board reports the MUT_LOS alarm.
information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: On

more information.
Gain (dB)
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of

an optical amplifier board, namely, the
input power (dBm).
more information.
Nominal Gain (dB)
Value of Nominal
Gain Lower
Gain Upper
Threshold (dB)
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies

the desired gain of the signal optical power.
This parameter is used to indicate the relative
value between the optical power of output
signals and the optical power of input signals,
namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal
optical power.
parameters.
Default: 23dB

Nominal Gain
Upper Threshold
(dB)
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB)

maximum nominal gain of the optical
module type.
information.
Nominal Gain
Lower Threshold
(dB)
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB)

minimum nominal gain of the optical
module type.
See D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold
information.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-87
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Actual Working
Band Parity

of the board.
Configure
Working Band
Parity
All, Odd, Even
Rated Optical
Power (dBm)
-30 - 30
Default: All

board
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter

provides an option to set and query the perchannel rated optical power. It is a reference
value for automatic adjustment of the optical
power. When the optical amplifier unit and
ROADM unit are used in a network, this
parameter is available for the optical amplifier
unit.

Table 14-60 Optical specifications of the OBU2 board
Item
Unit
Value
OBU205
nm
1529-1561
dBm
-24 to 0

channel
dBm
-24 to -16
40
Channels
80
Channels

optical power
14-88
40
Channels
-24 to -19
dBm
80
Channels
-16
-19
Noise figure (NF)
dB
7.0
Nominal gain
dB
23

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
OBU205

ms
< 10
Channel gain
dB
231.5
Gain flatness
dB
2.0
Input reflectance
dB
< -40
Output reflectance
dB
< -40
dBm
< -30

input
dB
-27

output
dB
-27

power
dBm
23
dB/dB
2.0
dB
0.5
Inherent
insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuatio
n range
dB
20
dB
VI-VOa
Adjustment accuracya
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU2.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN11OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)
TN12OBU2: 1.6 kg (3.7 lb.)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

14-89
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
14-90
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OBU205
17
24
TN12OBU205
14
19

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15
15 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit
Cross-Connect Unit and System and

Communication Unit
About This Chapter

15.1 SXM
SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
15.2 TN52XCH
TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board
15.3 TN16XCH
TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board
15.4 XCM
XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross)
15.5 XCS
XCS: centralized cross connect board
15.6 XCT
XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
15.7 SCC
SCC: system control and communication unit
15.8 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.1 SXM
SXM: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
The available functional version of the SXM board is TNK2. The SXM board is only used on
the OptiX OSN 8800 T64.
15.1.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXM cross-connects services.
The SXM board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
The SXM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
15.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the SXM board.
15.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SXM board.
15.1.7 Specifications of the SXM
Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.

The available functional version of the SXM board is TNK2. The SXM board is only used on
15.1.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the SXM cross-connects services.
For the position of the SXM board in the system, see Figure 15-1 and Figure 15-2.
Independent use of the SXM board

Figure 15-1 Position of the SXM board in the OCS system
1
SLO16
STM-16
15-2
SLQ64
SLQ64
SXM
SXM
SLQ64
SLQ64

STM-16
SLO16
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Joint use of the SXM board and the XCT board

Figure 15-2 Position of the SXM board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
4
NS2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
XCT
SXM
MUX
DMUX 4
NS2
DMUX
MUX 4
WDM side
client side
NS2
SXM
XCT
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
WDM side
client side

The SXM board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 15-1 Functions and features of the SXM board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Grooms services.
Cross-connect
function
Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s VC-4 cross-connect grooming.

Supports a maximum of 80G lower-order VC-12 and VC-3 crossconnect grooming.
Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk cross-connect grooming
when the SXM board is jointly used with the XCT board.
Protection scheme
Supports cross-connection 1+1 protection and provides 1+1 hot

backup.
Switching mode
Supports manual switching and auto switching.

Supports non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The SXM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 15-3 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-3 Functional modules and signal flow of the SXM board
VC-12/VC-3/VC-4/ODU0/ODU1/
ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Module Function
l
The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane,
performs electrical grooming of the VC-4/VC-3/VC-12/ODUk (k=0, 1, 2 or 3) service, and
then sends the service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module
implements service cross-connection.

Power supply module

15.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the SXM board.

Figure 15-4 shows the front panel of the SXM board.
15-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-4 Front panel of the SXM board

SXM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SXM
Indicators
l
Interfaces
The SXM board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SXM board.
Table 15-2 shows the valid slots for the SXM board.
Table 15-2 Valid slots for the SXM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU10, IU44
15.1.7 Specifications of the SXM

l
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
Weight: 3.74 kg (8.2lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK2SXM
+TNK2XCT
190
210
5303.6 x (64
n)
5833.6 x (64
n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the
TNK2SXM and TNK2XCT must be configured.
n is equal to the total number of tributary, line, and PID boards housed in a subrack.
15.2 TN52XCH
TN52XCH: OptiX OSN 8800 T32 centralized cross connect board
15.2.1 Application
The XCH cross-connects services.
The XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
The XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
15-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the XCH board.
15.2.5 Valid Slots
One slot houses one XCH board.
15.2.6 Specifications of the XCH
15.2.1 Application
The XCH cross-connects services.
For the position of the XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-5.
Figure 15-5 Position of the XCH board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
NS2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
XCH
TOM
MUX
DMUX 4
NS2
4
4
NS2
DMUX
MUX 4
WDM side
Client side
XCH
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
WDM side
Client side

The XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 15-3 Functions and features of the XCH board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Implements grooming of services.
Cross-connect
function
Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 1.28 Tbit/s

ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2 or 3) signals or VC-4.
Protection scheme

backup.
Supports warm backup.
Switching mode
Supports the manual switching and auto switching.

Supports the non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Supported

15-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 15-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board.
Figure 15-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCH board
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/
ODU3/ODU3e/VC-4
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Module Function
l
The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane,
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2 or 3) service, and then sends the
service to each service board. In this manner, the cross-connect module implements service
cross-connection.
Clock processing module

The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter,
clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock
synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module.
Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide
the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source.
Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE.

15-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

15.2.4 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the XCH board.

Figure 15-7 shows the front panel of the XCH board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-7 Front panel of the XCH board

XCH
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
XCH
Indicators
l
Interfaces
The XCH board does not provide external interfaces.
15-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.2.5 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCH board.
Table 15-4 shows the valid slots for the XCH board.
Table 15-4 Valid slots for the XCH board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU9, IU10
15.2.6 Specifications of the XCH

l
Dimensions of the front panel: 27.2 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 581.5 mm (H) or 1.1 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
Weight: 3.40 kg (7.49 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN52XCH01
65
72
243 - 3.6 x (32 n)
267.3 - 3.6 x (32

- n)
TN52XCH02
43
47.3
101 - 1.12 x (32

- n)
111 - 1.12 x (32

- n)
NOTE
15.3 TN16XCH
TN16XCH: high cross-connection, system control and clock processing board
15.3.1 Application
The TN16XCH, a cross-connect and system control board, implements communication between
equipment, synchronizes physical clocks and PTP clocks on the entire NE, implements service
cross-connections, and manages each board on the equipment with the U2000.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The TN16XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer, system
control function and clock function.
The TN16XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module,
15.3.4 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the TN16XCH board.
15.3.5 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TN16XCH board.
15.3.6 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the TN16XCH board. It switches the power supplied by the
battery on the board on or off.
15.3.7 Specifications of the TN16XCH
15.3.1 Application
The TN16XCH, a cross-connect and system control board, implements communication between
equipment, synchronizes physical clocks and PTP clocks on the entire NE, implements service
cross-connections, and manages each board on the equipment with the U2000.
For the position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-8.
Figure 15-8 Position of the TN16XCH board in the WDM system
External clock
External clock
TN16ATE
TN16ATE
G.694.1
G.694.1
4
4
TQX
TN16
XCH
DMUX 4
NQ2
NQ2
4
Client side
MUX
DMUX
TN16
4
XCH
TQX
MUX 4
WDM side
WDM side
Client side

The TN16XCH board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer, system
control function and clock function.
15-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-5 Functions and features of the TN16XCH board

Function and
Feature
Description
Cross-connect
function
Implements non-congestion full cross-connection of 640 Gbit/s

ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2 or 3) signals.
System control
function
l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management

and alarm output of a subrack.
l Supports the backup of the NE data. When the NE data changes,
the real-time database backup function immediately saves the
changed configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that
no configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered
off. This improves the reliability of the NE.
l Supports the function of the CF card to back up database. The NE
date (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID and Node ID) and the
board software are backed up to the CF card, so that the NE needs
not to be re-configured after the replacement of the TN16XCH.
l Supports IP over DCC.
l Implements communication between NEs when used with the
TN16AUX by using DCC bytes.
l Supports subrack cascading. The functions of the TN16XCH are
different when it is housed in the master and slave subracks. The
TN16XCH in the slave subrack processes overheads of the slave
subrack. The TN16XCH in the master subrack processes
overheads and alarms of the master and slave subracks, sends
configurations to the slave subrack, and communicates with the
U2000.
Clock function
l Basic function:
Locks the reference clock source.
Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with
G.813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals.
Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream
system.
l Clock source selection function:
Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local
clock source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself
and the system.
l Time synchronization function:
Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.
Protection scheme

backup.
Supports warm backup.
Switching mode

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The TN16XCH board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module,
Figure 15-9 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board.
Figure 15-9 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16XCH board
Service cross-connection from backplane
(ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e)
Time signals/
Clock signals
CPU and control module
Monitoring
module
Power supply
module
Overhead
processing
module
Communication
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
DC power supply
from a backplane
Other boards
Module Function
l
The cross-connect module receives data from each service board through the backplane,
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2 or 3) service, and then sends the
cross-connection.
l
15-14
Clock procession module

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Traces the external clock source, line clock source, tributary clock source, and provides
the board and system with a synchronization clock source.
Provides a synchronization clock signal, which enables the system to satisfy the
requirements of data setup time and holdoff time.
l

Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the
board.
Overhead processing module

Receives overhead signals from the TN16AUX board and processes the overhead bytes.
In the TN16XCH board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module.
Sends the overhead signals to the TN16AUX board.
Monitoring module
Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000.
Communication module
Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000.
Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000.
Transmits urgent data through the RS485.
Power supply module

15.3.4 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the TN16XCH board.

Figure 15-10 shows the front panel of the TN16XCH board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-10 Front panel of the TN16XCH board
XCH
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
RESET
XCH
Indicators
l
Interfaces
The TN16XCH board does not provide external interfaces.
15-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.3.5 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TN16XCH board.
Table 15-6 shows the valid slots for the TN16XCH board.
Table 15-6 Valid slots for the TN16XCH board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU9, IU10
15.3.6 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the TN16XCH board. It switches the power supplied by the
battery on the board on or off.
The battery on the TN16XCH helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure
of the TN16XCH. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a
short circuit, which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use
a jumper cap to disconnect the battery jumper.
Figure 15-11 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN16XCH board.
Figure 15-11 Position of the battery jumper on the TN16XCH board
J1
CPU
Battery
Jumper
321
CF Card
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-12 shows the power jumper.

Figure 15-12 battery jumper
When
battery is
not
required
When
battery is
required
15.3.7 Specifications of the TN16XCH

l
x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN16XCH
40
48
74
88.8
15.4 XCM
XCM: Cross & connect process board (Support high- cross and low-cross)
Only one functional version of the XCM board is available, that is TN52.
15.4.2 Application
The XCM is a type of cross-connect unit. The XCM implements the cross-connection of services.
The main function and feature of the XCM is the cross-connection at the electrical layer.
15-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The XCM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
15.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the XCM front panel.
15.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one XCM board.
15.4.7 Specifications of the XCM

Only one functional version of the XCM board is available, that is TN52.
15.4.2 Application
The XCM is a type of cross-connect unit. The XCM implements the cross-connection of services.
For the position of the XCM in the OCS system, see Figure 15-13.
Figure 15-13 Position of the XCM in the OCS system
1
SLQ64
SLO16
STM-16
XCM
XCM
SLQ64
SLQ64
SLQ64
STM-16
SLO16

The main function and feature of the XCM is the cross-connection at the electrical layer.
Table 15-7 Functions and features of the XCM
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Grooms services.
Cross-connect
functions
l Supports the centralized electrical-layer grooming of transmitted

ODU0, ODU1, ODU2/ODU2e, or ODU3/ODU3e signals.
l Supports the VC-4 higher-order cross-connection and VC-3 and
VC-12 lower-order cross-connection.
l Supports a maximum of 1.28 Tbit/s higher-order cross-connect
capacity.
l Supports a maximum of 80 Gbit/s lower-order cross-connect
capacity.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Protection scheme

backup.
Switching mode

Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The XCM board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 15-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCM.
Figure 15-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCM
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e
VC-4/VC-3/VC-12
Backplane (for service cross-connection)
Control
Storage
CPU
communication

Voltages for boards
Power module
Fuse
DC power provided by the backplane
SCC
Backplane (for
SCC control)
Module Function
l
The cross-connect module receives the data from each service board through the backplane
to implement the electrical-layer grooming of ODUk (k equals 0, 1, 2, or 3) signals or VC-4/
15-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

VC-3/VC-12 signals. Then, the cross-connect module sends the signals to each service
board to complete service cross-connection.
l

Power supply module

15.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the XCM front panel.

Figure 15-15 shows the XCM front panel.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-15 XCM front panel

XCM
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
XCM
Indicators
l
Interfaces
The XCM does not provide external interfaces.
15-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCM board.
Table 15-8 shows the valid slots for the XCM board.
Table 15-8 Valid slots for the XCM board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU9, IU10
15.4.7 Specifications of the XCM

l
x 8.7 in. (D) x 22.9 in. (H)
Weight: 3.84 kg (8.45 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Typical Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TN52XCM01
125
138
339 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m
368 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m
TN52XCM02
67
73.7
124 - 3.6 x (32 n) -80 x m
136.4 - 3.6 x (32

- n) -80 x m
NOTE
l If a subrack is configured with VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, m is equal to 0.
l If a subrack is not configured with any VC-3 or VC-12 cross-connections, m is equal to 1.
15.5 XCS
XCS: centralized cross connect board
The available functional versions of the XCS board are TN11 and TN12.
15.5.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCS board cross-connects services.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The XCS board cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
15.5.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the XCS board.
15.5.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one XCS board.
15.5.7 Specifications of the XCS

Table 15-9 lists the version description of the XCS board.
Table 15-9 Version description of the XCS board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
The cross-connection capacities vary according to versions. For details,
see 15.5.3 Functions and Features.
l Specification:
Specifications of the XCS.
Replacement
Table 15-10 lists the substitution rules for the XCS board.
Table 15-10 Substitution rules of the XCS board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11XCS
TN12XCS
Upgrade NE software to OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a

later version.
TN12XCS
None
15.5.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCS board cross-connects services.
15-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For the position of the XCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-16.
Figure 15-16 Position of the XCS board in the WDM system
OTU
M40
XCS
OTU
OTU
1
OA
XCS
D40
40
40
XCS
OTU
OA
D40
OA
OA
M40
OTU
OTU
XCS
40
40
OTU
OTU

The XCS board cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Table 15-11 Functions and features of the XCS board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Implements grooming of services.
Cross-connect
function
TN11XCS:
l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2
signals or GE services.
l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 320
Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals. Supports a maximum
cross-connect and grooming capacity of 160 Gbit/s for GE
services.
TN12XCS:
l Supports the integrated grooming of ODU1 signals or ODU2
signals or GE services.
l Supports a maximum cross-connect and grooming capacity of 360
Gbit/s for ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals. Supports a maximum
cross-connect and grooming capacity of 180 Gbit/s for GE
services.
Active/standby
backup
Provides the 1+1 hot backup.
Protection scheme
Supports cross-connect board 1+1 protection.
Switching mode

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN12XCS02.

The XCS board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 15-17 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board.
Figure 15-17 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCS board
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Module Function
l
Receives the data from each service board from the backplane. It performs the grooming
of ODU1 signals or ODU2 signals at the electrical layer, then sends the signals to each
service board and implements the cross-connection.

15-26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

15.5.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the XCS board.

Figure 15-18 shows the front panel of the XCS board.
Figure 15-18 Front panel of the XCS board
XCS
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
XCS
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
The XCS board does not provide external interfaces.
15.5.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCS board.
Table 15-12 shows the valid slots for the XCS board.
Table 15-12 Valid slots for the XCS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU9, IU10
15.5.7 Specifications of the XCS

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN16XCH
86.3
103.6
15.6 XCT
XCT: OptiX OSN 8800 T64 centralized cross connect board
15-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The available functional version of the XCT board is TNK2. The XCT board is used only on
15.6.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCT cross-connects services.
The XCT board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
The XCT board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
15.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the XCT board.
15.6.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one XCT board.
15.6.7 Specifications of the XCT

The available functional version of the XCT board is TNK2. The XCT board is used only on
15.6.2 Application
As a type of cross-connect unit, the XCT cross-connects services.
For the position of the XCT board in the WDM system, see Figure 15-19.
Figure 15-19 Position of the XCT board in the WDM system
G.694.1
G.694.1
NS2
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
TOM
XCT
SXM
MUX
NS2
4
4
NS2
DMUX
WDM side
client side
DMUX 4
MUX 4
SXM XCT
TOM
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
WDM side
client side

The XCT board is mainly used to cross-connect services at the electrical layer.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-13 Functions and features of the XCT board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Grooms services.
Cross-connect
function
Supports a maximum of 2.56 Tbit/s ODUk cross-connect grooming

when the XCT board is jointly used with the TNK2SXM board.
Protection scheme

backup.
Switching mode
Supports manual switching and auto switching.

Supports non-revertive switching.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

The XCT board consists of the cross-connect module, control and communication module, and
Figure 15-20 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board.
Figure 15-20 Functional modules and signal flow of the XCT board
ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU2e/ODU3/ODU3e
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
15-30

SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Module Function
l
The cross-connect module receives data of each service board through the backplane,
performs electrical grooming of the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, or 3) service, and then sends the
cross-connection.

Power supply module

15.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the XCT board.

Figure 15-21 shows the front panel of the XCT board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-21 Front panel of the XCT board

XCT
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
XCT
Indicators
l
Interfaces
The XCT board does not provide external interfaces.
15-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.6.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one XCT board.
Table 15-14 shows the valid slots for the XCT board.
Table 15-14 Valid slots for the XCT board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU9, IU43
15.6.7 Specifications of the XCT

l
8.7 in. (D) x 23.7 in. (H)
Power Consumption
Board
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (25C,
77F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at Warm
Backup (55C,
131F) (W)
Power
Consumption
at 25C (77F)
(W)
Power
Consumption
at 55C (131F)
(W)
TNK2SXM
+TNK2XCT
190
210
5303.6 x (64
n)
5833.6 x (64
n)
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack grooms electrical-layer signals through the backplane, the
TNK2SXM and TNK2XCT must be configured.
15.7 SCC
SCC: system control and communication unit
The available functional versions of the SCC board are TN11, TN21, TN22, TN51, TN52, and
TNK2.
15.7.2 Application
The SCC board is a system control and communication unit that works with the network
management system to manage each board and implements inter-equipment communication.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The SCC board is used for DCC communication, subrack cascading, power supply backup and
clock.
The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module,
communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module.
15.7.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, buttons, and an LED indicator on the front panel.
15.7.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SCC board.
15.7.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the SCC board. It switches the power supplied by the battery
on the board on or off.
15.7.8 Specifications of the SCC

The available functional versions of the SCC board are TN11, TN21, TN22, TN51, TN52, and
TNK2.
Table 15-15 lists the version description of the SCC board.
Table 15-15 Version description of the SCC board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the SCC board are TN11, TN21, TN22,
and TN51, TN52, TNK2.
Difference
l Function:
The TN21SCC and TN22SCC boards do not support SCC data
backup, IP over DCC, subrack cascading, and power supply backup.
The other versions support these functions. For details, see 15.7.3
l Appearance:
The TN11, TN51, and TN52 versions use the same front panel; the
TN21 and TN22 versions use the same front panel; the TNK2
version uses a front panel different from that of other versions. The
TN21 and TN22 versions are applicable to case-shaped equipment.
For details, see 15.7.5 Front Panel and 15.7.8 Specifications of the
SCC.
l Specification:
you use. For details, see 15.7.8 Specifications of the SCC.
Replacement
15-34
Table 15-16 lists the substitution rules for the SCC board.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-16 Substitution rules of the SCC board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11SCC
TN51SCC
l When the ASON function is not used, or only the opticallayer ASON function instead of the electrical-layer ASON
function is used, the TN51SCC can be used to replace the
TN11SCC. Software upgrade is required for the
replacement.
l When the electrical-layer ASON function is used, the
TN51SCC cannot be used to replace the TN11SCC.
TN52SCC
Software upgrade is required for the replacement.
TN51SCC
TN52SCC
TN52SCC
None
TNK2SCC
None
TN21SCC
TN22SCC
TN22SCC
None
NOTE
If a subrack/chassis uses two SCC boards (one is active and the other is standby), the versions of the two
SCC boards must be the same.
15.7.2 Application
The SCC board is a system control and communication unit that works with the network
management system to manage each board and implements inter-equipment communication.

The SCC board is used for DCC communication, subrack cascading, power supply backup and
clock.
Table 15-17 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/
TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board.
Table 15-18 shows the detailed functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-17 Functions and features of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC/TNK2SCC board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and

alarm output of a subrack.
l Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management
and alarm output of a subrack.
l Supports SCC data backup. If the NE data changes, the real-time
database backup function immediately saves the changed
configuration data into the storage medium to ensure that no
configuration data is lost after the NE is reset (cold) or powered
off. This improves the reliability of the NE.
l Supports the function of the CF card to back up the database. The
NE data (except NE IP, NE ID, Gateway ID, and Node ID) and
the board software are backed up to the CF card. Backing up data
to the CF means that you do not need to reconfigure the NE after
replacing the SCC.
l Supports IP over DCC.
DCC
communication
Supports DCC communication with the NEs for network

management.
Active/Standby
backup
Supports active/standby backup: There are two SCCs in the system

that can provide 1+1 hot backup. If the active board fails, the standby
board automatically becomes active.
Clock function
Provides clock source for the system communications.
Subrack cascading
Supports subrack cascading.

The SCC accomplishes different functions based on the mode (master
or slave) of the subrack in which it is installed. The SCC in a slave
subrack processes the overhead bytes, handles alarms and manages
the configuration inside the subrack. The SCC in a master subrack
performs the same functions as the SCC in the slave subrack, and also
processes overhead bytes and handles the alarms of all its slave
subracks. The SCC in the master subrack connects to the network
management system (NM). The configuration commands are issued
to the SCC of a slave subrack through the SCC in the master subrack.
15-36
Optical-layer ASON
Supported
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-18 Functions and features of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Accomplishes the service grooming, configuration management and

alarm output of a chassis.
DCC
communication
Supports DCC communication with the NEs for network

management.
Active/standby
backup
Supported: In DC-powered systems, the two SCCs are used to provide

1+1 hot backup. If the active SCC fails, the standby SCC becomes
active automatically.
Not supported: Active/standby backup configuration is not supported
in AC-powered systems.
Clock function
Provides clock source for the system communications.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported by the TN22SCC.
Electrical-layer
ASON
Supported by the TN22SCC.

The SCC board consists of the overhead processing module, clock module, monitoring module,
communication module, CPU and control module, and power supply module.
Figure 15-22 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCC.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-22 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCC board
Other boards
Clock module
Overhead
processing
module
CPU and control

module
Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Monitoring
module
Communication
module
Backplane
DC power supply
from a backplane
Other boards
Module Function
l

Implements the control, monitoring and management of each functional module on the
board.

Receives overhead signals from the service board and processes the overhead bytes.
In the TN11SCC board, the 360 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module.
In the TN51SCC board, the 512 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control module.
In the TN52SCC board, the 1024 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control
module.
In the TNK2SCC board, the 1024 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the control
module.
In the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board, the 40 DCCs (D1-D3) are processed by the
control module.
Sends the overhead signals to the service board.
Monitoring module
Detects whether the boards are in position and reports alarms to the U2000.
Clock module
Provides the clock source for the system.
15-38

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Receives the clock signals from the OSC board at the upstream station, and ensures that
the local clock of the local board is synchronized with the clock signals from the OSC
board at the upstream station.
Sends a local clock to the downstream station through the OSC board.
l
Communicates with each board, and reports the data of other boards to the U2000.
Transmits data with other boards through the Ethernet and reports to the U2000.
Transmits urgent data through the RS485.
Power supply module

The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 6800/8800 provides the entire system with
3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any board in the system.
In addition, it provides power backup to the boards of which the total power consumption
is less than 60W.
The power supply module for the OptiX OSN 3800 converts the DC power supplied by the
backplane into the power required by each module of the board.
15.7.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, buttons, and an LED indicator on the front panel.

Figure 15-23 shows the front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board.
Figure 15-24 shows the front panel of the TNK2SCC board.
Figure 15-25 shows the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-23 Front panel of the TN11SCC/TN51SCC/TN52SCC board
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
SubRACK_ID
RESET
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT
SCC
15-40

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-24 Front panel of the TNK2SCC board
SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRC
ALMC
SubRACK_ID
RESET
LAMP
TEST
ALM
CUT
Figure 15-25 Front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
LAMP
TEST
ALM
CUT
PWR
CRI
MAJ
MIN
SCC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
There are eight indicators on the front panel.
l
System power supply indicator (PWRA)- dual-colored (red, green)
System power supply indicator (PWRB)- dual-colored (red, green)
Protection power indicator (PWRC)- dual-colored (red, green)
Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow

NOTE
The TNK2SCC board does not have PWRA and PWRB.
There are also four chassis indicators on the front panel of the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board.
l
Chassis power supply indicator (PWR) - green
Minor alarm indicator (MIN) - yellow
Major alarm indicator (MAJ) - orange
Critical alarm indicator (CRI) - red
Buttons
There are three buttons on the front panel. Table 15-19 lists the function of each button.
Table 15-19 Functions of the buttons on the SCC board
Button
Function
RESET
Used to reset the SCC.
ALM CUT
Used to clear an audible alarm.
LAMP TEST
Used to test all of the indicators.
LED
There is an LED indicator on the front panel. Table 15-20 shows its function.
15-42

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-20 Function of the LED indicator on the SCC board

LED indicator
Function
SubRack_ID
The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is
a master or slave subrack when master/slave subrack mode is used.
"0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the subrack ID
is incorrect or fails to be read. The other values indicate slave
subracks. For the values displayed on the LED, see Figure 15-26.
For details on the principle for configuring the master and slave
subracks, see "Master-Slave Subrack" in the Product Description.
Figure 15-26 LED
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Error
Interfaces
The SCC board does not provide external interfaces.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

15.7.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SCC board.
Table 15-21 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCC board.
Table 15-22 shows the valid slots for the TN51SCC/TN52SCC board.
Table 15-23 shows the valid slots for the TNK2SCC board.
Table 15-24 shows the valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board.
Table 15-21 Valid slots for the TN11SCC board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU17, IU18
Table 15-22 Valid slots for the TN51SCC/TN52SCC board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU11, IU28
OptiX OSN 6800
IU17, IU18
Table 15-23 Valid slots for the TNK2SCC board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU74, IU85
Table 15-24 Valid slots for the TN21SCC/TN22SCC board

Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 3800
IU8, IU9
15.7.7 Jumper
There is a three-bit jumper inside the SCC board. It switches the power supplied by the battery
on the board on or off.
The battery on the SCC helps to ensure that the configuration is kept upon a power failure of
the SCC. If the board is in use, place a jumper cap over the battery jumper to make a short circuit,
which allows the battery to supply power normally. If the board is not in use, use a jumper cap
to disconnect the battery jumper.
Figure 15-27 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN11SCC board.
15-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-27 Position of the battery jumper on the TN11SCC board
CPU
CF
Card
Battery jumper
1
2
3
Battery jumper
Figure 15-28 shows the position of battery jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-28 Position of the battery jumper on the TN21/TN22SCC board
CPU
Battery jumper
3
2
1
Battery jumper
Figure 15-29 shows the battery jumper on the TN51SCC board.

Battery Supply
J42
U45
J1
J12
U42
Battery
Jumper
CPU
321
CF Card
Figure 15-30 shows the power jumper on the TN52SCC board.

15-46

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

CPU
321
Battery
Jumper
J1
Battery Supply
U33
U18
CF Card
Figure 15-31 shows the power jumper on the TNK2SCC board.

Figure 15-31 Position of the battery jumper on the TNK2SCC board
Battery Jumper
CPU
Battery Supply
3
2
1
J44
CF
Figure 15-32 shows the power jumper.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-32 battery jumper

When
battery is
not
required
When
battery is
required
15.7.8 Specifications of the SCC

l
TN11SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4
in. (H)
in. (H)
TN22SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) ox 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7
in. (H)
in. (H)
in. (H)
TNK2SCC: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 110.0 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.4
in. (H)
Weight:
15-48
TN11SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
TN21SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN22SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN51SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
TN52SCC: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
TNK2SCC: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11SCC
27.0
30.0
TN21SCC
14.0
16.0
TN22SCC
10.0
13.0
TN51SCC
18.0
20.0
TN52SCC
23.0
25.1
TNK2SCC
26.7
29.3
15.8 AUX
AUX: system auxiliary interface unit
TN16, The available functional versions of the AUX board are TN11, TN16, TN21, TN22, and
TN51.
15.8.2 Application
The TN51AUX board is a system control and communication unit that does not provide external
interfaces. The TN16AUX, a system control and communication board, provides the intrasubrack management function but does not provide external interfaces. The TN11AUX board
is a system control and communication unit that provides various auxiliary interfaces and
management interfaces. The TN21AUX board and the TN22AUX board are system control and
communication units that provide backup power supply and various auxiliary and management
interfaces.
interfaces. The TN11AUX board is a system control and communication unit that provides
various auxiliary and management interfaces. The TN21AUX board and the TN22AUX board
are system control and communication units that provide various auxiliary and management
interfaces.
The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power
supply module.
15.8.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the AUX board.
15.8.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one AUX board.
15.8.7 Jumper
There are three jumpers inside the TN11AUX01 board, and eight jumpers inside the
TN11AUX02 board. These jumpers are used to set the subrack ID. There are three jumpers
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN22AUX board. There is no
jumper inside the TN51AUX/TN16AUX// board.
15.8.8 Specifications of the AUX

TN16, The available functional versions of the AUX board are TN11, TN16, TN21, TN22, and
TN51.
Table 15-25 lists the version description of the AUX.
Table 15-25 Version description of the AUX board
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the AUX board are TN11, TN16,
TN21, TN22, and TN51.
15-50

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Description
Difference
l Function:
The TN16AUX does not provide external interfaces. It provides the
inter-subrack management function. For details, see 15.8.3
Functions and Features and 15.8.4 Working Principle and
Signal Flow.
The TN51AUX board does not provide external interfaces. For
detail, see 15.8.3 Functions and Features and 15.8.4 Working
Principle and Signal Flow.
The TN11AUX board provides various auxiliary interfaces and
management interfaces. For detail, see 15.8.3 Functions and
Features and 15.8.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow. There
are three jumpers inside the TN11AUX board, which are used to set
the subrack ID. For detail, see 15.8.7 Jumper.
The TN21AUX and TN22AUX boards are mainly used to provide
backup power supply, various auxiliary interfaces, and management
interfaces. For detail, see 15.8.3 Functions and Features and 15.8.4
Working Principle and Signal Flow. There are three jumpers
inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the
TN22AUX board. For detail, see 15.8.7 Jumper.
l Appearance:
The appearance and dimensions of front panels of different
hardware versions are different. The TN51/TN16 board does not
provide external interfaces. The TN21 and TN22 boards are applied
to case-shaped equipment. For details, see 15.8.5 Front Panel and
15.8.8 Specifications of the AUX.
The board software status indicators of the TN21 and TN22 are
different. For details, see 15.8.5 Front Panel.
l Specification:
The power consumption of the boards of different versions is
different. For details, see 15.8.8 Specifications of the AUX.
Replacementa
Table 15-26 lists the substitution rules for the AUX board.
Table 15-26 Substitution rules of the AUX board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11AUX
None
TN21AUX
TN22AUX
If the SCC is the TN22SCC, upgrade the NE software to OptiX

OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version.
TN22AUX
None
TN51AUX
None

15-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN16AUX
None
Type
The system provides two types of the TN11AUX. Table 15-27 lists the types of the TN11AUX.
Table 15-27 Type description of the AUX
Board
Type
Description
TN11AUX
TN11AUX01
Provides three jumpers to set

subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to
7.
TN11AUX02
Provides eight jumpers to set

subrack ID, which ranges from 0 to
31.
15.8.2 Application
interfaces. The TN16AUX, a system control and communication board, provides the intrasubrack management function but does not provide external interfaces. The TN11AUX board
is a system control and communication unit that provides various auxiliary interfaces and
management interfaces. The TN21AUX board and the TN22AUX board are system control and
communication units that provide backup power supply and various auxiliary and management
interfaces.

interfaces. The TN11AUX board is a system control and communication unit that provides
various auxiliary and management interfaces. The TN21AUX board and the TN22AUX board
are system control and communication units that provide various auxiliary and management
interfaces.
For detailed functions and features of the TN51AUX board, refer to Table 15-28.
Table 15-28 Functions and features of the TN51AUX board
15-52
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Implements communications between boards or subracks.
Interface
Does not provide external interfaces.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Implements communication between boards or subracks and intersburack management.

Whether the subrack is configured with a TN16XCH affects the intersubrack management function of the TN16AUX.
l If the subrack is configured with a TN16XCH, the TN16AUX
collects overhead information about other boards and sends the
information to the TN16XCH. After processing overhead
information, the TN16XCH sends the processed information to
the TN16AUX. Then, the TN16AUX sends the information to the
other boards.
l If the subrack is not configured with a TN16XCH, the TN16AUX
collects and processes overhead information about other boards
and sends the processed information to the other boards.
Does not provide external interfaces.
Interface
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides the system with various auxiliary interfaces and

management interfaces.
Interface
Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management

interface.
Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack
communications interfaces
Setting of subrack ID
Sets the subrack ID that contains six bits.
For detailed functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board, refer to Table 15-31.
Table 15-31 Functions and features of the TN21/TN22AUX board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides the system with backup power supplies as well as various

auxiliary and management interfaces.
15-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function and
Feature
Description
Interface
Provides the Ethernet communications interface and management

interface.
Provides the OAM interface for remote maintenance.
Provides the alarm channel for chassis indicators.
Power supply backup
Provides the entire system with the 3.3 V integrated power supply
backup.
Alarm function
Provides alarms on the failure of 3.3 V integrated backup power

supply, including over-voltage and under-voltage alarms.

The AUX board consists of the CPU and control module, communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 15-33 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN51AUX/TN11AUX/
TN22AUX/TN21AUX board.
Figure 15-34 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the TN16AUX board.
Figure 15-33 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN51AUX/TN11AUX/TN22AUX/
TN21AUX board
CPU and control

module
Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Communication
module
Backplane
DC power supply
from a backplane
Other boards
15-54

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-34 Functional modules and signal flow of the TN16AUX board
Monitoring
module
Power supply
module
Overhead
processing
module
Communication
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
Backplane
DC power supply
from a backplane
Other boards
Module Function
l

The CPU module implements the control, monitoring and management of the
communication module and detects the power supply at the same time.
TN11AUX: The control module provides the subrack ID and collects the alarms and
performance events of each functional module as well as the clock information.
TN21/TN22AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each
functional module as well as the clock information.
TN51AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each
TN16AUX: The control module collects the alarms and performance events of each
NOTE
The TN51AUX board is connected to the EFI1 and EFI2 boards through the backplane. The interfaces
as follows are provided on the EFI1 and EFI2 boards.
The TN16AUX board is connected to the EFI board through the backplane. The interfaces as follows
are provided on the EFI board.
Provides the inter-board communication interface to connect the service boards and the
SCC. Implements the data communication between boards.
Provides the NM interface and the NM cascading interface that connect the AUX and
the NM terminal.
TN11AUX: Provides the common and the emergent inter-subrack communication
network interfaces. TN21/TN22AUX: Provides the OAM interface for remote
maintenance.
l
Power supply module

TN11AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power required by
each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

TN21/TN22AUX: Supplies power for the AUX. It also provides the entire OptiX OSN
3800 system with 3.3 V integrated power backup to protect the 3.3 V power supply of any
board in the system.
TN16AUX/TN51AUX: Converts the DC power supplied by the backplane into the power
required by each module on the board.
15.8.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the AUX board.

Figure 15-35 shows the front panel of the TN51AUX board.
Figure 15-35 Front panel of the TN51AUX board
AUX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
15-56

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


AUX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
ALMC
RESET
SubRACK-ID
LAMP TEST
ALM CUT

NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
ETH1
ETH2
STAT
PROG
AUX
Figure 15-38 shows the front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-38 Front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board
STAT
PROG
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
EXT
AUX
Indicators
There are four indicators on the front panel of the TN51AUX board.
There are five indicators on the front panel of the TN16AUX board.
There are two indicators on the front panel of the TN11AUX/TN21AUX/TN22AUX board.
l
Alarm cut-off indicator (ALMC)- yellow
Interfaces
The TN51AUX board provides no external interfaces.
The TN16AUX board provides no external interfaces.
There are four interfaces on the front panel of the TN11AUX board. Table 15-32 lists the type
15-58

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 15-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN11AUX board
Interface
Type
Function
NM_ETH1
RJ-45
l Using a network cable, the port connects the

network interface on the OptiX OSN 6800 to the
U2000 server to enable the management of the
U2000 over the OptiX OSN 6800.
NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one
NE to another NE for communication between NEs.
NM_ETH2
RJ-45

ETH1
RJ-45
Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/

ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other
subracks for communication between the master
subrack and slave subracks.
ETH2
RJ-45
Using a network cable, the port connects the ETH1/

ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to the other
subracks for communication between the master
subrack and slave subracks.
There are three interfaces on the front panel of the TN21/TN22AUX board. Table 15-33 lists
the type and function of each interface.
Table 15-33 Types and functions of the interfaces on the TN21/TN22AUX board
Interface
Type
Function
NM_ETH1
RJ-45

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
NM_ETH2
RJ-45

DB64
EXT
Provides the alarm input/output interface, cascading

interface, commissioning network interface and
management serial interface.
Buttons
Buttons are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the buttons, see Table 15-34.
Table 15-34 Functions of the buttons on the TN16AUX board
Button
Function
RESET
Used to reset the TN16AUX board.
ALM CUT
Used to clear an audible alarm.
LAMP TEST
Used to test all of the indicators.
LED
LED indicators are present on only the TN16AUX. For details on the LED indicators, see Table
15-35.
Table 15-35 Function of the LED indicator on the TN16AUX board
15-60
LED indicator
Function
SubRack-ID
The LED on the front panel is used to indicate whether the subrack is
a master or slave subrack in the case of master/slave subrack mode.
"0" indicates the master subrack. "EE" indicates that the AUX board
is out of service and the subrack ID cannot be obtained. The other
values indicate slave subracks. For the values displayed on the LED,
see Figure 15-39.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-39 LED
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Error
15.8.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one AUX board.
Table 15-36 shows the valid slots for the TN51AUX board.
Table 15-36 Valid slots for the TN51AUX board
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU41
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU72, IU83
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU21, IU22
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 6800
IU21
Table 15-39 shows the valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board.
Table 15-39 Valid slots for the TN21AUX/TN22AUX board
Product
Slot
OptiX OSN 3800
IU10
15.8.7 Jumper
There are three jumpers inside the TN11AUX01 board, and eight jumpers inside the
TN11AUX02 board. These jumpers are used to set the subrack ID. There are three jumpers
inside the TN21AUX board. There are eight jumpers inside the TN22AUX board. There is no
jumper inside the TN51AUX/TN16AUX// board.
Jumper of TN11AUX
The SCC detects the subrack ID and identifies whether the subrack is a primary or a secondary
one. The result is indicated by the LED indicator of the SCC front panel.
The TN11AUX01 board has three jumpers, the jumpers are numbered 3 to 1 from the side close
to CPU, and the jumpers are numbered 1 to 3 from the most significant bit to the lest significant
bit. The default value of the four jumpers is 00000. "0" indicates the master subrack. The other
values indicate slave subracks shows the jumpers on the board.
Figure 15-40 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX01 board
jumpers
3
CPU
15-62

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The TN11AUX02 board has eight jumpers, which can be used to implement 32 states that
represent decimal values 0-31. Each jumper represents a binary value: 0 or 1. In the TN11AUX02
board, the J14, J17, and J18 jumpers are reserved. The default value of the five jumpers is 00000.
"0" indicates the master subrack. The other values indicate slave subracks. Figure 15-41 shows
the jumpers on the board.
Figure 15-41 Position of the jumper on the TN11AUX02 board
Jumpers
J4
J3
J2
J17
J16
J15
J18
J14
CPU
When a jumper cap is placed over the right-hand two pins in the figure or the three pins are not
placed with any jumper cap, it represents the value 1. When a jumper cap is placed over the
right-hand two pins in the figure, it represents the value 0. In Figure 15-42 the value represented
by the three jumpers is 001, which is 1 in decimal system. That is, the subrack ID is "1". The
value is "0" by default.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-42 Jumper

jumper cap
representing 0
representing 0
representing 1
TN11AUX01
jumper cap
representing 0
representing 0
representing 0
representing 0
representing 1
TN11AUX02
J16
J15
J4
J3
J2
NOTE
The dashed line between two pins in the figure indicates that a jumper cap may or may not be placed over
the two pins.
CAUTION
Exercise caution when modifying the subrack ID, because the modification may cause service
interruption.
Jumper of TN21/TN22AUX
The TN21AUX has 3 jumpers. Figure 15-43 shows the jumpers.
The TN22AUX has 8 jumpers. Before the board is used, make sure that the setting of the J4
jumper is the same as that shown in Figure 15-44.
15-64

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 15-43 Position of the jumper on the TN21AUX
CPU
Jumper
Figure 15-44 Position of the jumper on the TN22AUX
Jumper
Jumper cap
8 (J4)
15.8.8 Specifications of the AUX

l
Dimensions of the front panel:

TN51AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
4.2 in. (H))
TN16AUX: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
4.2 in. (H))
4.7 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

15-65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

4.7 in. (H))
l
Weight:
TN51AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN16AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
TN11AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN21AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
15-66
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN51AUX
17.5
17.5
TN16AUX
26.5
29.2
TN11AUX
12.0
17.0
TN21AUX
11.7
13.0
TN22AUX
15.0
17.0

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16
16 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
Optical Supervisory Channel Unit
About This Chapter

16.1 HSC1
HSC1: High power unidirectional/bi-directional optical supervisory channel board
16.2 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board
16.3 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit
16.4 ST2
ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16.1 HSC1
HSC1: High power unidirectional/bi-directional optical supervisory channel board
The available functional version of the HSC1 board is TN11.
16.1.2 Application
As a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the HSC1 board processes one channel of
supervisory signals in one direction, transmits and extracts the overhead information about the
system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
The HSC1 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals.
The HSC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
encoding module, CMI decoding module, overhead processing module, control and
16.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the HSC1 board.
16.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one HSC1 board.
16.1.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1
The characteristic code for the HSC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and numbers of optical interface.
16.1.9 HSC1 Parameters
16.1.10 Specifications of the HSC1

The available functional version of the HSC1 board is TN11.
16.1.2 Application
As a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the HSC1 board processes one channel of
system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
For the position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 16-1.
16-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 16-1 Position of the HSC1 board in the WDM system

OAU
OAU
SCC
HSC1
F
I
U
OAU
NE1
F
I
U
HSC1
HSC1
SCC
OAU
F
I
U
OAU
NE2
F
I
U
HSC1
SCC
OAU
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can make use of the
supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 16-1,
the user can use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 are
remote equipment. They can be remotely managed through the supervisory channel when there
is no data line connected. In this way, the entire network is under management.
The SCC of NE1 sends the network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel
(OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the FIU.
The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main path. Then, all
the signals are transmitted on line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from the
line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into
supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for processing.

The HSC1 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals.
Table 16-1 Functions and features of the HSC1 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The HSC1 board is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory
signal. The HSC1 board supports a maximum of 53 dB span transmission.
Technical
features
The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line amplifiers.
The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the
OSC.
The HSC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the
HSC1 can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces
and monitor other stations.
Regenerati
on
function
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
The HSC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has the 3R
function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information
can be correctly received and new supervisory signals are added.

16-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Operating
wavelengt
h
The signal wavelength of supervisory channel is 1510 nm.
Loopback
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Opticallayer
ASON
Supported

The HSC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
Figure 16-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board.
Figure 16-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the HSC1 board
RM
CMI
decoding
module
O/E
Overhead
processing
module
CMI
encoding
module
E/O
TM
Optical
transmitting
module
Optical
receiving
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
16-4

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
The optical receiving module converts the optical supervisory signals from the FIU into electrical
signals. The electrical signals enter the overhead processing module after CMI decoding. The
overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them
to the SCC for processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends
the electrical signals to be encoded in the CMI encoding module. Finally, the electrical
supervisory signals are converted into optical supervisory signals through the optical
transmitting module.
Frame Structure of the OSC Signals

Figure 16-3 shows the timeslots of the E1 frame adopted by the OSC signals. There are 32
timeslots in a frame, numbered 0 to 31.
Figure 16-3 Timeslot assignment diagram of the OSC overhead
0
...
14
15
16
...
31
For the definition and functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC, refer to Table
16-2.
Table 16-2 Functions of the timeslots in the E1 frame of the OSC
Timeslot
Number
Name
Function
E1 byte
Provides the path for orderwire phone. Transmission of one

orderwire phone requires three bytes.
F1 byte
Co-directional 64 kbit/s data interface.
3-13, 15
D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
Used to transmit the OAM data information, such as the
issued commands and the data of the queried alarms and
performance events.
The OSC board extracts relevant bytes and sends them to the
SCC for processing.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
14
ALC
byte
Provides the channel for the transmission of ALC protocol

byte.
17
F2 byte
Reserved for the user (usually, the network provider) for the
temporary orderwire communication with the purpose of
specific maintenance.
18
F3 byte

16-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Timeslot
Number
Name
Function
19
E2 byte
Provides the path for orderwire phone.

Transmission of one orderwire phone requires three bytes.
21-23
Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Used to transmit optical layer overhead information.
Other
Reserve
d
Module Function
l

Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.

Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.
CMI encoding/decoding module

Performs mutual conversion between the 2 Mbit/s signal.

Extracts overhead bytes from the electrical signals, and sends them to the SCC for
processing. After the overhead bytes are processed by the SCC, this module sends the
electrical signals to the optical transmitting module.

Power supply module

16.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the HSC1 board.

Figure 16-4 shows the front panel of the HSC1 board.
16-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 16-4 Front panel of the HSC1 board
HSC1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EOW
TM
RM
HSC1
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the
HSC1 board. Table 16-3 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the HSC1 board
Interface
Type
Function
TM
LC
RM
LC
EOW
Connects to an orderwire phone set through telephone

wires to implement orderwire communication between
NEs.
Laser Hazard Level

16.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one HSC1 board.
Table 16-4 shows the valid slots for the HSC1 board.
Table 16-4 Valid slots for the HSC1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1-IU8, IU12-IU27, and IU29-IU36
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5 and IU11
16.1.7 Characteristic Code for the HSC1

The characteristic code for the HSC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and numbers of optical interface.
Table 16-5 Characteristic code for the HSC1 board
16-8
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

W.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
Second to tenth characters
Optical signal wavelength

range
The optical signal

wavelength range is 1500 nm
to 1520 nm processed by the
board.
Eleventh character
The eleventh character is

always P.
Twelfth character
Numbers of optical interface
The number of the optical

interface is one.
For example, the characteristic code for the HSC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical
interface is one.


Table 16-6 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the HSC1 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RM/TM
NOTE
16.1.9 HSC1 Parameters

For HSC1 Parameters, refer to Table 16-7.
Table 16-7 HSC1 parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

16-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface
Name
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
240/1510.00/198.540
This parameter is queriable only.
Band Type
SMC
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

board.
more information.
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: On
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

board.
16.1.10 Specifications of the HSC1

NOTE
Table 16-8 lists the optical specifications of the HSC1 board.
Table 16-8 Optical specifications of the HSC1 board
16-10
Item
Unit
Value
Signal rate
Mbit/s
4.096
nm
1500 to 1520
Signal coding
CMI
dBm
5 to 10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
dBm
-48
Receiver overload
dBm
-3
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
HSC1
8.0
8.8
16.2 SC1
SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel board
The available functional versions of the SC1 board are TN11, TN12.
16.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC1 board processes one channel of
system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
The SC1 board processes and regenerates optical supervisory signals.
The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, CMI decoding module, overhead
processing module, CMI encoding module, optical transmitting module, control and
16.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SC1 board.
16.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SC1 board.
16.2.7 Characteristic Code for the SC1
The characteristic code for the SC1 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
wavelength range and optical interface number.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

16.2.9 SC1 Parameters

16.2.10 Specifications of the SC1

Table 16-9 lists the version description of the SC1 board.
Table 16-9 Version description of the SC1 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
None
Replacement
Table 16-10 lists the substitution rules for the SC1 board.
Table 16-10 Substitution rules of the SC1 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11SC1
TN12SC1
The TN12SC1 can be created as TN11SC1 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC1 functions as the
TN11SC1.
TN12SC1
None
16.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC1 board processes one channel of
system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
For the position of the SC1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 16-5.
16-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 16-5 Position of the SC1 board in the WDM system
OA
SCC
SC1
OA
F
I
U
OA
NE1
F
I
U
SC2
SCC
OA
F
I
U
F
I
U
OA
NE2
SC1
SCC
OA
NE3
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory
channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 16-5, the user can
use the Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage the NE1 directly. NE2 and NE3 can be remotely
managed through the supervisory channel when there is no data line connected. When configured
as described above, the entire network can be managed.
the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from
the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into

Table 16-11 Functions and features of the SC1 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The SC1 board receives, processes, and transmits one optical supervisory signal.
The SC1 supports a maximum of 48 dB span transmission.
Technical
features
The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the optical
supervisory channel (OSC). The failure of an optical line amplifier does not
affect the performance of the OSC.
The SC1 is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the SC1
board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical interfaces
and monitor other stations.
Regenerati
on
function
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
The SC1 board transmits signals from section to section. It also performs the
3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information
can be received and new supervisory signals are added.

16-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Function
and
Feature
Description
Operating
wavelengt
h
The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.
Loopback
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Opticallayer
ASON
Supported

The SC1 board consists of the optical receiving module, CMI decoding module, overhead
processing module, CMI encoding module, optical transmitting module, control and
Figure 16-6 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board.
Figure 16-6 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC1 board
RM
CMI
decoding
module
O/E
Overhead
processing
module
CMI
encoding
module
E/O
TM
Optical
transmitting
module
Optical
receiving
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
16-14

Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow

0
...
14
15
16
...
31
16-12.
Timeslot
Number
Name
Function
E1 byte

F1 byte
3-13, 15
D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
performances.
SCC for processing.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
14
ALC
byte

byte.
17
F2 byte
18
F3 byte

16-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Timeslot
Number
Name
Function
19
E2 byte

21-23
Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Other
Reserve
d
Module Function
l

Performs O/E conversion of an optical supervisory signal.

Performs E/O conversion of an electrical supervisory signal.

Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s
signal.


Power supply module

16.2.5 Front Panel


Figure 16-8 shows the front panel of the SC1 board.
16-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 16-8 Front panel of the SC1 board
SC1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EOW
TM
RM
SC1
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the SC1
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-13 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC1 board
Interface
Type
Function
TM
LC
RM
LC
EOW

NEs.
Laser Hazard Level

16.2.6 Valid Slots

Table 16-14 shows the valid slots for the TN11SC1 board.
Table 16-14 Valid slots for the TN11SC1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

16-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-16 Characteristic code for the SC1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

W.
Second to the tenth

characters

range
The optical signal

board.
Eleventh character

always P.
Twelfth character
The number of the optical

interface is one.
For example, the characteristic code for the SC1 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the number of the optical
interface is one.


Table 16-17 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC1 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RM/TM
NOTE

For parameters of the SC1, refer to Table 16-18.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-18 SC1 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Optical Interface
Name
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
240/1510.00/198.540
Band Type
SMC
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

board.
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: On

Table 16-19 lists the optical specifications of the SC1 board.
Table 16-19 Optical specifications of the SC1 board
16-20
Item
Unit
Value
Signal rate
Mbit/s
16.896
nm
1500 to 1520
Signal coding
CMI
dBm
-4 to 0
dBm
-46
Receiver overload
dBm
-3

4.096
-48
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
SC1
11.0
14.9
16.3 SC2
SC2: bi-directional optical supervisory channel unit
Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
16.3.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC2 board processes two channels
of supervisory signals in opposite directions, transmits and extracts the overhead information
about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
16.3.5 Front Panel
16.3.6 Valid Slots
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available: TN11 and TN12. There is no difference
between the two versions in terms of functionality.
Table 16-20 lists the version description of the SC2 board.
Table 16-20 Version description of the SC2 board
Item
Description
Functional
version
Two functional versions of the SC2 board are available, that is, TN11 and
TN12.
Difference
None
Replacement
Table 16-21 lists the substitution rules for the SC2 board.
Table 16-21 Substitution rules of the SC2 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11SC2
TN12SC2
The TN12SC2 can be created as TN11SC2 on the NMS. The

upgrade. After substitution, the TN12SC2 functions as the
TN11SC2.
TN12SC2
None
16.3.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the SC2 board processes two channels
about the system, and processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC.
For the position of the SC2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 16-9.
Figure 16-9 Position of the SC2 board in the WDM system
OA
SCC
SC1
OA
NE1
16-22
OA
F
I
U
F
I
U
SC2
SCC
OA
F
I
U
OA
NE2

F
I
U
SC1
SCC
OA
NE3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use supervisory
channels to transmit supervisory and management data. As shown in Figure 16-9, you can
manage NE1 directly by logging in to it through the Ethernet. NE2 and NE3 are remote
equipment that you can manage through the supervisory channel when there is no data line
connected. By logging in to NE1 and managing NE2 and NE3 through the supervisory channel,
the entire network can be managed.
the signals are transmitted on the line. The FIU of NE2 separates the supervisory signals from
the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit converts the optical signals into

Table 16-22 Functions and features of the SC2 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
function
The SC2 board receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory
signals. The SC2 board supports a maximum of 48 dB span transmission.
Technical
features
The distance between two optical line amplifiers is not limited by the OSC. The
failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the performance of the OSC.
The SC2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not in position, the
SC2 board can still ensure the pass-through of ECC with the two optical
interfaces and monitor other stations.
Regenerati
on
function
The SC2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also provides the 3R
function. In each regenerating station that has optical amplifiers, information
can be received and new supervisory signals are added.
Operating
wavelengt
h
The supervisory channel signal wavelength is 1510 nm.
Loopback
Inloop
Supported
Outloop
Supported
Opticallayer
ASON
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Supported

16-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The SC2 board consists of the optical receiving module, optical transmitting module, CMI
Figure 16-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board.
Figure 16-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the SC2 board
RM1
RM2
O/E
CMI
decoding
module
O/E
Overhead
processing
module
CMI
encoding
module
Optical
receiving
module
E/O
TM1
E/O
TM2
Optical
transmitting
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow

16-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


0
...
14
15
16
...
31
16-23.
Timeslot
Number
Name
Function
E1 byte

F1 byte
3-13, 15
D1-D12
bytes
DCC channel
performances.
SCC for processing.
14
ALC
byte

byte.
17
F2 byte
18
F3 byte
19
E2 byte

21-23
Optical
layer
overhea
d bytes
Other
Reserve
d
Module Function
l

Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.

Performs mutual conversion between the 8 Mbit/s CMI-coded signal and the 2 Mbit/s
signal.


Power supply module

16.3.5 Front Panel


Figure 16-12 shows the front panel of the SC2 board.
16-26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 16-12 Front panel of the SC2 board
SC2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EOW
TM1
RM1
TM2
RM2
SC2
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces and one orderwire phone interface on the front panel of the SC2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-24 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SC2 board
Interface
Type
Function
TM1/TM2
LC
Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.
RM1/RM2
LC
Receives the first/second supervisory signal.
EOW

wires to realize orderwire communication between
NEs.
Laser Hazard Level

16.3.6 Valid Slots

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

16-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-27 Characteristic code for the SC2 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

W.

range
The optical signal

board.
Eleventh character

always P.
Twelfth character
The numbers of optical

interface are two.
For example, the characteristic code for the SC2 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical
interface are two.


Table 16-28 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SC2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RM1/TM1
RM2/TM2
NOTE

For parameters of the SC2, refer to Table 16-29.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-29 SC2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
240/1510.00/198.540
Band Type
SMC
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

board.
Laser Status
Off, On

Default: On

Table 16-30 lists the optical specifications of the SC2.
Table 16-30 Optical specifications of the SC2 board
16-30
Item
Unit
Value
Signal rate
Mbit/s
16.896
nm
1500 to 1520
Signal coding
CMI
dBm
-4 to 0
dBm
-46
Receiver overload
dBm
-3

4.096
-48
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
SC2
12.5
14.9
16.4 ST2
ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
The available functional versions of the ST2 board is TN11.
16.4.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the ST2 board processes two channels
about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. In addition, the ST2
board can process the 1588 clock for time synchronization.
The ST2 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals. In addition,
the ST2 board supports the 1588 V2 feature.
The ST2 board consists of the optical receiving module, service processing module, 1588
module, optical transmitting module, control and communication module, and power supply
module.
16.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ST2 board.
16.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one ST2 board.
16.4.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2
The characteristic code for the ST2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
16.4.9 ST2 Parameters
16.4.10 Specifications of the ST2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The available functional versions of the ST2 board is TN11.
16.4.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical supervisory channel unit, the ST2 board processes two channels
about the system, processes and sends the overhead information to the SCC. In addition, the ST2
board can process the 1588 clock for time synchronization.
For the position of the ST2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 16-13.
Figure 16-13 Position of the ST2 board in the WDM system
OA
SCC
ST2
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
NE1
OA
ST2
scc
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
OA
S
F
I
U
/
F
I
U
ST2
SCC
OA
NE3
NE2
Transmits and receives two channels of optical supervisory signals in the west and east
directions.
In the WDM network that adopts the optical supervisory channel, the NEs can use the
supervisory channel to transmit supervisory and management data. You can use the
Ethernet to log in to the NE1 to manage it directly. NE2 and NE3 are remote equipment
that you can manage remotely through the supervisory channel if there is no data line
connected. In the scenario described above, you can manage the entire network.
The SCC of NE1 sends network management (NM) data to the optical supervisory channel
(OSC) unit. The OSC unit converts the data into optical signals and sends the signals to the
SFIU/FIU. The supervisory signals are multiplexed with the signals transmitted by the main
path. Then, all the signals are transmitted on the line. The SFIU/FIU of NE2 separates the
supervisory signals from the line and sends them to the OSC unit of NE2. The OSC unit
converts the optical signals into supervisory data and sends the data to the SCC for
processing.
Performs 1588 clock synchronization.

Extracts clock signals and provides the clock signals for clock synchronization on an NE.
The extracted clock signals can also function as a clock source for the clock board on this
NE.
Sends clock signals of an NE to the downstream NE.
Passes through west and east 1588 packets and service clock signals.
16-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Reports the time information to a clock board for time synchronization on an NE where
the clock board is located.

The ST2 board is mainly used to process and regenerate optical supervisory signals. In addition,
the ST2 board supports the 1588 V2 feature.
Table 16-31 Functions and features of the ST2 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Receives, processes, and transmits two optical supervisory signals.

Supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical
signals.
Supports 1588 V2 function.
Supports a maximum of 40 dB transmission.
Supports loopback.
Technical features
The OSC has no limitation on the distance between two optical line
amplifiers. The failure of an optical line amplifier does not affect the
performance of the OSC.
The ST2 board is independent of the SCC. When the SCC is not
properly installed, the ST2 board can still ensure the pass-through of
ECC with the two optical interfaces and monitor other stations.
Regeneration
function
The ST2 board transmits signals from section to section. It also has
the 3R function. In each regenerating station that has optical
amplifiers, information can be correctly received and new supervisory
signals are added.
Operating
wavelength
When the ST2 board works with the SFIU board, the signal
wavelengths of supervisory channel are 1491nm and 1511 nm.
When the ST2 board works with the FIU board, the supervisory
channel signal wavelength of is 1511 nm.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The ST2 board consists of the optical receiving module, service processing module, 1588
module, optical transmitting module, control and communication module, and power supply
module.
Figure 16-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 16-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the ST2 board
WSC1
WSC2
O/E
RM1
O/E
RM2
Service
processing
module
1588
module
Optical
receiving
module
E/O
TM1
E/O
TM2
Optical
transmitting
module
Control
Memory
Communication
CPU

Power supply
module
Required
Voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
l
The optical supervisory signals from the FIU/SFIU board are converted into an electrical
signal by the O/E module. After conversion, the electrical signal is sent to the service
processing module. The service processing module extracts overhead bytes from the
electrical signal and sends the overhead bytes to the SCC board for processing. In addition,
the service processing module extracts a clock signal and sends the clock signal to the STG
board for processing while at the same time processing FE electrical signals. The overhead
bytes processed by the SCC board, and the clock signal and time information processed by
the STG board are sent to the E/O module, where they are converted into an optical
supervisory signal.
The FE signals are processed separately in the transmit and receive directions. The direction
from the WSC1/WSC2 port to the RM1/RM2 port is defined as transmit direction, and the
direction from the RM1/RM2 port to the WSC1/WSC2 port is defined as receive direction.
Module Function
l

Performs O/E conversion of two optical supervisory signals.

Performs E/O conversion of two electrical supervisory signals.

Encapsulates FE electrical signals and electrical supervisory signals into OTU frames,
processes overheads, and performs encoding/decoding.
16-34

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

1588 module
Sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the 1588 protocol, or
extracts the clock signal from the optical supervisory signals according to the 1588 protocol
and then sends the clock signal to the STG board.

Power supply module

16.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ST2 board.

Figure 16-15 shows the front panel of the ST2 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 16-15 Front panel of the ST2 board

ST2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EOW
WSC1
WSC2
TM1
RM1
TM2
RM2
ST2
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces, one orderwire phone interface and two FE electrical interfaces
on the front panel of the ST2 board. Table 16-32 lists the type and function of each interface.
16-36

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-32 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ST2 board
Interface
Type
Function
TM1/TM2
LC
Transmits the first/second supervisory signal.
RM1/RM2
LC
Receives the first/second supervisory signal.
WSC1/WSC2a
RJ45
Transmits/Receives the first/second channel of FE

electrical signals.
EOW

NEs.
a: Connect a non-shielded network cable to the WSC1 or WSC2 interface on the TN11ST2
board.
Laser Hazard Level

16.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one ST2 board.
Table 16-33 shows the valid slots for the ST2 board.
Table 16-33 Valid slots for the ST2 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU8, IU11IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5
16.4.7 Characteristic Code for the ST2

The characteristic code for the ST2 board contains twelve characters and digits, indicating the
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-34 Characteristic code for the ST2 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character

W.

range
The optical signal

wavelength range is 1484.5
nm to 1517.5 nm processed
by the board.
Eleventh character

always P.
Twelfth character
The numbers of optical

interface are two.
For example, the characteristic code for the ST2 board is W1500/1520P1. This code indicates
that the optical signal wavelength range is 1500 nm to 1520 nm, and the numbers of optical
interface are two.


Table 16-35 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ST2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RM1/TM1
RM2/TM2
NOTE
16.4.9 ST2 Parameters

For parameters of the ST2, refer to Table 16-36.
16-38

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-36 ST2 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name
Loopback
Non-Loopback,
Inloop, Outloop

board.
Laser Status
Off, On
Default: On

Band Type/
Wavelength No./
Wavelength (nm)/
Frequency (THz)
Band Type
DEG Threshold
0 to 10167
Sets signal deterioration thresholds. An

alarm is reported when error codes detected
in DEG Monitoring Time(s) are more than
the value of this parameter.
Default: 190
DEG Monitoring
Time(s)
2 to 10
Degrade Threshold
Before FEC
1E-1, 1E-2, 1E-3,

1E-4, 1E-5, 1E-6,
1E-7, 1E-8, 1E-9,
1E-10, 1E-11, 1E-12,
Default: 7
Sets the signal monitoring time. If the

number of bit errors in the signal exceeds
DEG Threshold during this time, an alarm
is reported.
Sets error codes thresholds for signals
before FEC.
Default: 1E-4
16.4.10 Specifications of the ST2

Table 16-37 lists the optical specifications of the ST2.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

16-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 16-37 Optical specifications of the ST2 board

Item
Unit
Value
Signal rate
Mbit/s
155.52
nm
1504.5 to 1517.5
1484.5 to 1497.5
dBm
0.5 to 5
dBm
-42
Receiver overload
dBm
-10
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
16-40
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
ST2
17.5
19.5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17 Optical Protection Unit
17
Optical Protection Unit
About This Chapter

17.1 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
17.2 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit
17.3 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17.1 DCP
DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
The available functional versions of the DCP board are TN11 and TN12.
17.1.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the DCP board implements intra-board 1+1
protection, optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection) and client-side 1+1
protection.
The DCP board provides intra-board 1+1 protection, OWSP protection and client-side 1+1
protection.
The DCP board contains the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
17.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board.
17.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one DCP board.
17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP
The characteristic code for the DCP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
maximum protection switching time.
17.1.9 DCP Parameters
17.1.10 Specifications of the DCP

Version
Table 17-1 lists the version description of the DCP.
17-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-1 Version description of the DCP board

Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
The TN11DCP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical
modules.
The TN12DCP supports single-mode optical module.
l Specification:
see 17.1.10 Specifications of the DCP.
Replacement
Table 17-2 lists the substitution rules for the DCP board.
Table 17-2 Substitution rules of the DCP board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11DCP
TN12DCP
In the case of single mode, the TN12DCP can substitute for the
TN11DCP. For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to
OptiX OSN 6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the
NE software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later
TN12DCP
None
Type
Table 17-3 lists the type description of the DCP board.
Table 17-3 Type description of the DCP board
Board
Type
Description
TN11DCP
01
Supports the single-mode optical module.
02
Supports the multi-mode optical module.
01
Supports the single-mode optical module.
TN12DCP
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17.1.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the DCP board implements intra-board 1+1
protection, optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP protection) and client-side 1+1
protection.
For the position of the DCP board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-1, Figure 17-2 and Figure
17-3.
Figure 17-1 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
TO11
RI1 1
TO21 MUX
OTU
TI1
RO1
RI11
DMUX RI21
FIU
FIU
RI21 DMUX
TI2
RI12
TO22 MUX
RI12
TI1 OTU
MUX TO21
DCP TO12
OTU RO2
RO1
TO11
DMUX RI22
FIU
FIU
RI22 DMUX
TO12
DCP
RO2
TI2
OTU
MUX TO22
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the DCP board does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
17-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-2 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (OWSP protection)
OTU1
1/2
2 x DCP
2/1
OTU1
OTU2
OADM
2/1 (East) 1/2
(East)
2
1
OADM
(West)
2
1
(West)
FIU
FIU
OADM 1/2
(West)
2/1
2 x DCP
2/1
1/2
2
1
OADM
(East)
FIU
FIU
FIU
FIU
1
2
2
1
OADM
(East)
1
2
OTU2
2/1
1/2
2 x DCP
OADM
2/1 (West) 1/2
FIU
FIU
2
1
OADM
(West)
1
2
2/1 OADM 1/2

(East)
2 x DCP
2/1
OTU2
OTU2
OTU1
: Working signal
1/2
OTU1
: Optical signal
: Protection signal
Figure 17-3 Position of the DCP board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TO11
RI11
TI1
TO21
RO1
RI21
DCP
TI2
RO2
TO12
RI12
MUX
OTU
(W)
OTU
TO22 (P)
RI22
DMUX
FIU
FIU
DMUX
MUX
DMUX
MUX
FIU
MUX
Client-side
RO1
TI1
OTU
RI21
(W)
TO21
RI12
TO12
OTU
(P) RI22
FIU
DMUX
RI11
TO11
DCP
RO2
TI2
TO22
NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the DCP
board can be used for client-side protection.

The DCP board provides intra-board 1+1 protection, OWSP protection and client-side 1+1
protection.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 17-4 Functions and features of the DCP board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the

OTU, which has no dual-fed and selective receiving function.
Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides protection for two
signals to implement 1+1 protection.
l Provides client-side 1+1 protection, using a working OTU and a
protection OTU to protect the client-side services.
l Provides the OWSP protection, make use of two different channels
to achieve the protection of one channel of service between all
stations.
Protection scheme
The intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1 protection:

l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and singleended switching.
l If the performance of the working fiber declines, the system
automatically switches the service from the working path to the
protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because
the APS protocol is not needed.
NOTE
The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-ended switching for GE services.
The OWSP protection:

l The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and dualended switching.
l When the performance of the working fiber declines, the system
automatically switches the service from the working path to the
protection path. Protection switching is stable and quick because
the APS protocol is needed.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The DCP board contains the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 17-4 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board.
17-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCP board
TO11
TO12
TO21
TO22
RI11
TI1
TI2
Optical switch
RO1
RI12
Optical switch
RI21
RO2
RI22
Optical
power detecting
module
Optical module
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
One DCP board supports the dual-fed and selective receiving of two channels of optical signals.
The DCP board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section
describes the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
l
Transmit direction
The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO11 and TO12 optical interfaces.
Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI11
and RI12 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch
selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In
this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical interface.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch
based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the
protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l
Optical module
The optical module consists of two signal dual-fed parts and two signal selection parts.
Signal dual-fed part
Divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same power, and
outputs them to the working and protection channels.
Signal selection part
Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical
power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of
optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of
optical signals and outputs it.

Power supply module

17.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board.

Figure 17-5 shows the front panel of the DCP board.
17-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-5 Front panel of the DCP board
DCP
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TO11 RI11
TO12 RI12
TO21 RI21
TO22 RI22
RO1
TI1
RO2
TI2
DCP
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCP board. Table 17-5 lists the type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-5 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCP board
Interface
Type
Function
TI1
LC
Receives the first channel of WDM-side signals. (intraboard 1+1 protection)

Receives the first channel of client-side signals. (clientside 1+1 protection)
Receives one channel of client-side signals. (OWSP
protection)
TI2
LC
Receives the second channel of WDM-side signals.

(intra-board 1+1 protection)
Receives the second channel of client-side signals.
(client-side 1+1 protection)
Receives the optical signals from the adjacent stations.
(OWSP protection)
RO1
LC
Transmits the first channel of WDM-side signals.

Transmits the first channel of client-side signals.
Transmits one WDM-side optical signal to the OTU
board. (OWSP protection)
RO2
LC
Transmits the second channel of WDM-side signals.

Transmits the second channel of client-side signals.
Transmits one optical signal to the adjacent stations.
(OWSP protection)
TO11
LC
Transmits the first channel of signals to the working

multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1 protection)
OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Serves as a dual-fed optical interface, transmitting one
optical signal to the working router. (OWSP protection)
TO12
LC
Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection

Transmits the first channel of signals to the protection
Dual fed optical interface, transmitting one optical
signal to the protection router. (OWSP protection)
17-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
TO21
LC
Transmits the second channel of signals to the working

Connects to the RI12 interface of another DCP board
in the same station by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
TO22
LC
Transmits the second channel of signals to the

protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Transmits the second channel of signals to the
protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Connects to the RI22 interface on the same DCP board
by using a fiber. (OWSP protection)
RI11/RI12
LC
Receives the first channel of signals from the working

and the protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1 protection)
Serve as selective receive interfaces, connecting to the
working route and protection route, respectively.
(OWSP protection)
RI21/RI22
LC
Receives the second channel of signals from the

working and the protection multiplexer unit. (intraboard 1+1 protection)
working and protection OTU. (client-side 1+1
protection)
Connects to the TO12 and TO22 interfaces on the same
DCP board, respectively, by using a fiber. (OWSP
protection)
Laser Hazard Level

17.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DCP board.
Table 17-6 shows the valid slots for the TN11DCP board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-6 Valid slots for the TN11DCP board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 6800
IIU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
Table 17-7 shows the valid slots for the TN12DCP board.
Table 17-7 Valid slots for the TN12DCP board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IIU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
17.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCP

Table 17-8 Characteristic code for the DCP board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

protection switching time.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that
the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

17-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 17-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCP board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TO11/RI11
TO12/RI12
TO21/RI21
TO22/RI22
TI1/RO1
TI2/RO2
NOTE
17.1.9 DCP Parameters

For parameters of the DCP, refer to Table 17-10.
Table 17-10 DCP parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)
-35 - -10

value, the board reports the MUT_LOS
alarm.
information.
Default: -35

17-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Initial Variance Value

Between Primary and
Secondary Input Power
(dB)
-10 - 10
The Initial Variance Value Between

Primary and Secondary Input Power
(dB) parameter provides an option to set the
reference value of the optical power variance
between the primary and secondary input
optical interfaces of a board.
See D.19 Initial Variance Value Between
Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
Variance Threshold
Between Primary and
Secondary Input
Optical Power (dB)
3-8
Default: 0
Default: 5
The Variance Threshold Between Primary

and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
parameter provides an option to set the
optical power variance threshold of the
primary and secondary optical interfaces of a
board. When the threshold is reached, signal
degrade (SD) occurs. When the variance
between the primary and secondary optical
power exceeds the threshold, the optical
switch switches services to the channel with
better optical power. The configured value
can be queried.
See D.55 Variance Threshold Between
17.1.10 Specifications of the DCP

Table 17-11 Optical specifications of the DCP on the OptiX OSN 8800
Interface
17-14
Item
Unit
Value
TN11DCPa
TN12DCPb
TI1-TO11
TI1-TO12
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
Insertion loss
at the
transmit end
Single-mode
dB
multimode
dB
4.5
RI11-RO1
RI12-RO1
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Insertion loss
at the receive
end
Single-mode
dB
1.5
Multi-mode
dB

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Item
Unit
Value
TN11DCPa
TN12DCPb
Range of the input optical

power
Single-mode
dBm-
-35 to 7
Multi-mode
dBm
-35 to 0
Single-mode
nm
1270 to
1350,
1528 to 1567
Multi-mode
nm
830 to 870
Switching threshold of optical power

difference
dB
Range of the alarm threshold for the optical

power difference
dB
3 to 8
3 to 8
a: TN11DCP has no single-mode optical module.

b: TN12DCP has no multi-mode optical module.
Table 17-12 Optical specifications of the DCP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN
3800
Interface
Item
Unit
TN11DCP
TN12DCPa
TI1-TO11
TI1-TO12
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
Insertion loss
at the
transmit end
Single-mode
dB
Multi-mode
dB
4.5
RI11-RO1
RI12-RO1
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Insertion loss
at the receive
end
Single-mode
dB
1.5
1.5
Multi-mode
dB
Range of the input optical

power
Single-mode
dBm
-35 to 7
-35 to 7
Multi-mode
dBm
-35 to 0
Single-mode
nm
1270 to
1350,
1528 to 1567
1270 to
1350,
1528 to 1567
Multi-mode
nm
830 to 870
dB
Switching threshold of optical power

difference
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value

17-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Item
Unit
Range of the alarm threshold for the optical

power difference
dB
Value
TN11DCP
TN12DCPa
3 to 8
3 to 8
a: TN12DCP board has no multi-mode optical module.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
DCP
6.8
7.5
17.2 OLP
OLP: optical line protection unit
The available functional versions of the OLP board are TN11 and TN12.
17.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the OLP board provides the optical line protection,
intra-board 1+1 protection, and client-side 1+1 protection.
The OLP board provides optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1
protection.
The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
17.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OLP board.
17.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one OLP board.
17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP
The characteristic code for the OLP board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
17-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


17.2.9 OLP Parameters
17.2.10 Specifications of the OLP

Version
Table 17-13 lists the version description of the OLP.
Table 17-13 Version description of the OLP
Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Function:
The TN11OLP supports single-mode and multi-mode optical
modules. It supports only normal power application.
The TN12OLP supports single mode optical modules. It supports
not only normal power application but also high power application.
l Specification:
see 17.2.10 Specifications of the OLP.
Replacement
Table 17-14 lists the substitution rules for the OLP board.
Table 17-14 Substitution rules of the OLP board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11OLP
TN12OLP
In single mode, the TN12OLP can substitute for the TN11OLP.

For the substitution, upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN
6800 V100R004C01 or a later version, upgrade the NE
software to OptiX OSN 3800 V100R004C01 or a later version,
or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002C00
or a later version.
TN12OLP
None

17-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Type
Table 17-15 lists the type description of the TN11OLP board.
Table 17-15 Type description of the TN11OLP board
Board
Type
Description
TN11OLP
01
Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal

power application; supports client 1+1 protection.
TN11OLP
02
Supports multi-mode optical module and is intended for normal

power application; supports client 1+1 protection.
Table 17-16 lists the type description of the TN12OLP board.

Table 17-16 Type description of the TN12OLP board
Board
Type
Description
TN12OLP
01
Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for normal

power application; supports client 1+1 protection and intra-board
1+1 protection.
03
Supports single-mode optical module and is intended for high

power application; supports optical line protection.
17.2.2 Application
Because it is a type of optical protection unit, the OLP board provides the optical line protection,
intra-board 1+1 protection, and client-side 1+1 protection.
For the position of the OLP board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-6, Figure 17-7, Figure
17-8 and Figure 17-9.
Figure 17-6 Position of the TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection,
application 1)
OTU
OTU
TI
MUX
FIU
OTU
OTU
17-18
DMUX
TO1
RI1
RI1
TO1
TO2
RI2
RI2
TO2
DMUX
OTU
OTU
OLP
OLP
RO
RO

FIU
TI
MUX
OTU
OTU
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
at the same time.
Figure 17-7 Position of the TN12OLP03 board in the WDM system (optical line protection,
application 2)
OTU
OTU
FIU
FIU
OA
FIU
FIU
OA
OA
FIU
FIU
OA
OA
FIU
FIU
OA
OA
MUX
OA
OLP
OTU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
OTU
OLP
DMUX
OTU
MUX
OTU
NOTE
at the same time.
Figure 17-8 Position of the TN12OLP01 board in the WDM system (intra-board 1+1 protection)
TO1
RI1
OTU
TI
RO OLP
TO2
MUX
DMUX
FIU
FIU
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
FIU
RI2
FIU
MUX
DMUX
RI1
TO1
RI2
OLP
RO
TI OTU
TO2
NOTE
When used for intra-board 1+1 protection, the OLP does not support the 2.5 Gbit/s OTU.
Figure 17-9 Position of the TN11OLP01/TN11OLP02/TN12OLP01 board in the WDM system

Client-side
Cient-side
TO1
RI1
OTU
(W)
DMUX
MUX
FIU
FIU
MUX
DMUX
TI
RO OLP
OLP
TO2 OTU
RI2
(P)
MUX
DMUX
FIU
FIU
DMUX
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OTU RI1
(W) TO1

MUX
RO
TI
OTU RI2
(P) TO2
17-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE
When the working OTU and the protection OTU are installed in different subracks or chassis, the OLP
board can be used for client-side protection.

The OLP board provides optical line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection and client-side 1+1
protection.
Table 17-17 Functions and features of the OLP board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides the optical line protection to ensure the normal receiving of

signals when the line fiber fails.
Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU
that has no dual-fed and selective receiving function.
Provides client-side 1+1 protection, making use of a working OTU
and a protection OTU to protect the client-side services.
Protection scheme
The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection and single-ended

switching.
NOTE
The client-side 1+1 protection supports dual-ended switching for GE services.
Protection switching is stable and quick because the APS protocol is

not required.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The OLP board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 17-10 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board.
17-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-10 Functional modules and signal flow of the OLP board
TO1
TO2
TI
Optical switch
RI1
RO
RI2
Optical power
detecting
module
Optical module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
l
Transmit direction
The TI optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO1 and TO2 optical interfaces.
Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1
and RI2 optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the optical switch. The optical switch
selects one from the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In
this way, the selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved.
The selected optical signals are output through the RO optical interface.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical switch
based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working and the
protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l
Optical module
The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal dual-fed part

Signal selection part
Receives the optical signals from the working and protection channels. The optical
power detecting module detects and compares the optical power of the two channels of
optical signals. Based on the results, the signal selection part selects one channel of
optical signals and outputs it.
l

Power supply module

17.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the OLP board.

Figure 17-11 shows the front panel of the OLP board.
17-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-11 Front panel of the OLP board
OLP
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
TO1
RI1
TO2
RI2
RO
TI
OLP
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are six optical interfaces on the front panel of the OLP board. Table 17-18 lists the type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-18 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OLP board
Interface
Type
Function
TI
LC
Receives the line signal from the FIU board. (optical

line protection)
Receives one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Receives one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1
protection)
RO
LC
Transmits the line signal to the FIU board. (optical line

protection)
Transmits one WDM-side signal. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Transmits one client-side signal. (client-side 1+1
protection)
TO1/TO2
LC
Transmits the working and the protection signals to the

line side. (optical line protection)
Transmits signals to the working and the protection
Transmits signals to the working and the protection
RI1/RI2
LC
Receives the working or the protection signal from the

line side. (optical line protection)
Receives the signals from the working and the
protection multiplexer unit. (intra-board 1+1
protection)
Receives the signals from the working and protection
Laser Hazard Level

17.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one OLP board.
Table 17-19 shows the valid slots for the TN11OLP board.
Table 17-19 Valid slots for the TN11OLP board
17-24
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 6800
IIU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
Table 17-20 shows the valid slots for the TN12OLP board.
Table 17-20 Valid slots for the TN12OLP board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IIU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
17.2.7 Characteristic Code for the OLP

Table 17-21 Characteristic code for the OLP board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50ms.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 17-22 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the OLP board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TO1/RI1
TO2/RI2
TI/RO
NOTE
17.2.9 OLP Parameters

For parameters of the OLP, refer to Table 17-23.
Table 17-23 OLP parameters
17-26
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)
-35 to -10

value, the board reports the MUT_LOS
alarm.
information
Default: -35
for more
information.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Initial Variance Value

Between Primary and
Secondary Input Power
(dB)
-10 to 10
The Initial Variance Value Between

Primary and Secondary Input Power
(dB) parameter provides an option to set the
reference value of the optical power variance
between the primary and secondary input
optical interfaces of a board.
See D.19 Initial Variance Value Between
Variance Threshold
Between Primary and
Secondary Input
Optical Power (dB)
3 to 8
Default: 0
The Variance Threshold Between Primary

and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
parameter provides an option to set the optical
power variance threshold of the primary and
secondary optical interfaces of a board. When
the threshold is reached, signal degrade (SD)
occurs. When the variance between the
primary and secondary optical power exceeds
the threshold, the optical switch switches
services to the channel with better optical
power. The configured value can be queried.
See D.55 Variance Threshold Between
Default: 5
17.2.10 Specifications of the OLP

Table 17-24 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 8800
Interfa
ce
Item
TI-TO1
TI-TO2
Insertio
n loss at
the
transmit
end
single
mode
Insertio
n loss at
the
receive
end
RI1-RO
RI2-RO
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Unit
Value
TN11OLPa
TN12OLP01b
TN12OLP03b
dB
multimo
de
dB
4.5
single
mode
dB
1.5
1.5
multimo
de
dB

17-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfa
ce
Item
Range of the input

optical power
Unit
Value
TN11OLPa
TN12OLP01b
TN12OLP03b
single
mode
dBm
-35 to 7
-30 to 23
multimo
de
dBm
-35 to 0
single
mode
nm
1270 to 1350,
1528 to 1567
1270 to 1350,
1528 to 1567
multimo
de
nm
830 to 870
Switching threshold of optical

power difference
dB
Range of the alarm threshold

for the optical power difference
dB
3 to 8
3 to 8
3 to 8
Operating
wavelength range
a: TN11OLP has no single mode optical module.

b: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.
Table 17-25 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN
3800
Interfa
ce
Item
TI-TO1
TI-TO2
Insertio
n loss at
the
transmit
end
single
mode
Value
TN11OLP
TN12OLP01a
TN12OLP03a
dB
multimo
de
dB
4.5
Insertio
n loss at
the
receive
end
single
mode
dB
1.5
1.5
1.5
multimo
de
dB
Range of the input

optical power
single
mode
dBm
-35 to 7
-35 to 7
-30 to 23
multimo
de
dBm
-35 to 0
single
mode
nm
1270 to
1350,
1528 to 1567
1270 to 1350,
1528 to 1567
1270 to 1350,
1528 to 1567
RI1-RO
RI2-RO
Operating
wavelength range
17-28
Unit

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfa
ce
Item
Unit
Value
TN11OLP
TN12OLP01a
TN12OLP03a
multimo
de
nm
830 to 870
Switching threshold of optical

power difference
dB
Range of the alarm threshold

for the optical power difference
dB
3 to 8
3 to 8
3 to 8
a: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight
l
TN11OLP: 0.9 kg (1.98 lb.)
TN12OLP: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OLP
6.0
6.6
TN12OLP
4.0
4.5
17.3 SCS
SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
The available functional versions of the SCS board is TN11.
17.3.2 Application
As a type of optical protection unit, the SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and boardlevel protection (extended mode).
The SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and board-level protection (extended
mode).
The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

17.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board.
17.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one SCS board.
17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS
The characteristic code for the SCS board contains one character and two digits, indicating the
17.3.9 SCS Parameters
17.3.10 Specifications of the SCS

The available functional versions of the SCS board is TN11.
Type
Table 17-26 lists the type description of the SCS board.
Table 17-26 Type description of the SCS board
Board
Type
Description
SCS
01
Supports single-mode optical module.
02
Supports multi-mode optical module.
17.3.2 Application
As a type of optical protection unit, the SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and boardlevel protection (extended mode).
For the position of the SCS board in the WDM system, see Figure 17-12 and Figure 17-13.
Figure 17-12 Position of the SCS board in the WDM system (client-side 1+1 protection)
Client-side
TO11
RI11
OTU
TO21 (W)
TI1
RO1
RI21
SCS
TI2
RO2
TO12
RI12
OTU
TO22 (P)
RI22
17-30
MUX
DMUX
FIU
FIU
DMUX
MUX
MUX
DMUX
FIU

MUX
Client-side
OTU
(W) RI21
RO1
TI1
TO21
RI12
TO12
OTU
(P) RI22
FIU
DMUX
RI11
TO11
SCS
RO2
TI2
TO22
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-13 Position of the SCS in the WDM system (board-level protection with extended
mode)
TBE1
R1
S
C
S
TBE2
TBE1
TBE1
L
4
G
O
A
D
M
F
I
U
F
I
U
TBE2
O
A
D
M
L
4
G
TBE2
TBE1
S
C
S
R1
TBE2

The SCS board provides client-side 1+1 protection and board-level protection (extended
mode).
Table 17-27 Functions and features of the SCS board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Receives signals from the working and the protection OTUs and
implements client-side 1+1 protection.
l Receives signals from the working and the protection TBE and
implements board-level protection (extended mode).
Protection scheme
The channel protection supported by the SCS board does not need
protocol support. Instead, the channel protection executes switching
by detecting SD and SF events of the channel.
Optical-layer ASON
Not supported

The SCS board consists of the optical module, control and communication module, and power
supply module.
Figure 17-14 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-14 Functional modules and signal flow of the SCS board
Optical module
TI1
Splitter
TO11
TO12
TI2
Splitter
TO21
TO22
RO1
Coupler
RI11
RI12
RO2
Coupler
RI21
RI22
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
One SCS board supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The
SCS board processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes
the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.
l
Transmit direction
The TI1 optical interface receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the TO11
and TO12 optical interfaces.
Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2
optical interfaces, and then are transmitted to the coupler. The system activates one of the
two channels of optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of
path optical signals is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1
optical interface. Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection
OTU is standby. Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm triggers a protection switching.
The system shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.
Module Function
l
Optical module
The optical module consists of the splitters and couplers.
17-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Splitter
Coupler
Receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The system selects one
channel of optical signals based on the service quality.
l

Power supply module

17.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board.

Figure 17-15 shows the front panel of the SCS board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 17-15 Front panel of the SCS board
SCS
STAT
TO11 RI11
TO12 RI12
TO21 RI21
TO22 RI22
RO1
TI1
RO2
TI2
SCS
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 12 optical interfaces on the front panel of the SCS board. Table 17-28 lists the type
Table 17-28 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SCS board
17-34
Interface
Type
Function
TI1/TI2
LC
Receives the first/second channel of client-side signals.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interface
Type
Function
RO1/RO2
LC
Transmits the first/second channel of client-side

signals.
TO11/TO12
LC

and protection OTU.
TO21/TO22
LC

and the protection OTU.
RI11/RI12
LC

and protection OTU.
RI21/RI22
LC

working and protection OTU.
Laser Hazard Level

17.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one SCS board.
Table 17-29 shows the valid slots for the TN11SCS board.
Table 17-29 Valid slots for the TN11SCS board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IIU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
17.3.7 Characteristic Code for the SCS

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-30 Characteristic code for the SCS board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.


Table 17-31 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SCS board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TI1/RO1
TO11/RI11
TO12/RI12
TI2/RO2
TO21/RI21
TO22/RI22
NOTE
17.3.9 SCS Parameters

For parameters of the SCS, refer to Table 17-32.
17-36

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 17-32 SCS parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

default value.
17.3.10 Specifications of the SCS

Table 17-33 lists the optical specifications of the SCS board.
Table 17-33 Optical specifications of the SCS board
Interface
Item
TI1-TO11
TI1-TO12
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
Splitting
insertion loss
RI11-RO1
RI12-RO1
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Coupling
insertion loss
Unit
Value
Single-mode
dB
Multi-mode
dB
4.5
Single-mode
dB
Multi-mode
dB
4.5
Single-mode
nm
1270 to 1350,
1528 to 1567
Multi-mode
nm
830 to 870
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

17-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
17-38
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
SCS
0.2
0.3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

18 Spectrum Analyzer Unit
18
Spectrum Analyzer Unit
About This Chapter

18.1 MCA4
MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit
18.2 MCA8
18.3 OPM8
OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board
18.4 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

18.1 MCA4
The available functional versions of the MCA4 board is TN11.
18.1.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA4 board supports spectral analysis for four channels.
The MCA4 board is mainly used for spectral analysis, APE and power detection.
The MCA4 board consists of the 1x4 optical switch, spectral analysis module, driving and control
18.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the MCA4 board.
18.1.6 Valid Slots
Two slots house one MCA4 board.
18.1.7 Characteristic Code for the MCA4
The characteristic code for the MCA4 board contains one character, indicating the band of the
optical signals processed by the board.
18.1.9 MCA4 Parameters
18.1.10 Specifications of the MCA4

18.1.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA4 board supports spectral analysis for four channels.
For the position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 18-1.
Figure 18-1 Position of the MCA4 board in the WDM system
OTU
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU
MCA4
OTU
DMUX
OAU
OTU
MCA4
OAU
MUX
OTU
18-2
OTU

OTU
OTU
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The MCA4 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at both the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure the MCA4 boards at both ends for supervision.

The MCA4 board is mainly used for spectral analysis, APE and power detection.
Table 18-1 Functions and features of the MCA4 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides the spectral analysis for four channels.
Detection function
Supports the following detection functions and reports to the SCC

board. The following information can be displayed on the U2000.
l Optical power of the channel
l Central wavelength
l Optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR)
NOTE
The board only detects the OSNRs of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path

Implements the APE function in cooperation with other boards.
APE function
Detects the optical power of each channel.

Optical-layer ASON
Supported

Figure 18-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA4 board
IN01
IN02
IN03
IN04
Spectrum analysis module
1 4
optical switch
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
Driving and control module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Control and
communication module
Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The 1x4 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the spectral analysis
module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data parameter is sent
to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control and
communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The final
spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.
Module Function
l
1x4 optical switch

Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed four channels of optical signals
for spectrum analysis.

Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of
wavelengths.

Drives and controls spectrum.
Controls the 1x4 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.

18-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

18.1.5 Front Panel


Figure 18-3 shows the front panel of the MCA4 board.
Figure 18-3 Front panel of the MCA4 board
MCA4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
MCA4
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the MCA4 board. Table 18-2 lists the type
Table 18-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA4 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN4
LC
Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to

receive optical signals for analysis. The interfaces can
be connected to four "MON" interfaces at the same
time.
18.1.6 Valid Slots

Table 18-3 shows the valid slots for the MCA4 board.
Table 18-3 Valid slots for the MCA4 board
18-6
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
For OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the
two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the left slot. For example, if slots IU1 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of the MCA4
For OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot of the
two slots in the subrack. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the number
For OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom slot
of the two slots in the chassis. Therefore, the slot number of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is the
number of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA4 board, the slot number of
the MCA4 board displayed on the NM is IU2.

Table 18-4 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

represents C band. The value
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.


Table 18-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA4 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1-IN4
1-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For parameters of the MCA4, refer to Table 18-6.

Table 18-6 MCA4 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Monitoring
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Sets the optical interface monitoring state.

When the monitoring of an optical interface
is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not
analyze the wavelength at this interface.
Sets the working band types of a board.
Configure Band
Default: C
18-8
Actual Band

board.
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Port
Displays port name and wavelength

frequency.
Band
Displays the current band.
Wavelength Monitor
Status
No Monitor, Monitor
Default: No Monitor
Sets whether to monitor the current

wavelength. It is recommended to set the
monitor status of wavelengths that bear
services to Monitor.
Board
Displays the board name.
Optical Switch No.
The Optical Switch No. parameter

provides an option to query the current
working optical interface of the multichannel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA).
See D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM
Monitor Interval
(min.)
5 - 49995

supervisory channel for the current board
and to analyze the time interval of the
channel status.
See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM
Default: All
Default: 10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
WDM type
Default, 100-GHz
Spacing with CRZ,
50-GHz Spacing with
CRZ, 100-GHz
Spacing with 40Gbps,
50-GHz Spacing with
40Gbps
Default: Default

Table 18-7 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4 board.
Table 18-7 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
Detect range for single channel optical power
dBm
-30 to -10
Detect accuracy for optical power
dB
1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range

for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and
the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.)
dB
1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)

2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
Detect accuracy for central wavelength
nm
0.1
pcs
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MCA4
8.0
8.5

18-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

18.2 MCA8
18.2.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA8 board supports spectral analysis for eight
channels.
The MCA8 board provides spectral analysis, automatic power equilibrium (APE) and detection.
18.2.5 Front Panel
18.2.6 Valid Slots
The characteristic code for the MCA8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of

18.2.2 Application
As a type of spectrum analyzer unit, the MCA8 board supports spectral analysis for eight
channels.
For the position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 18-4.
Figure 18-4 Position of the MCA8 board in the WDM system
OTU
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU
MCA8
OTU
DMUX
OAU
OTU
MCA8
OAU
MUX
OTU
18-10
OTU

OTU
OTU
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
The MCA8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure one MCA8 board at each end to provide supervision.

The MCA8 board provides spectral analysis, automatic power equilibrium (APE) and detection.
Table 18-8 Functions and features of the MCA8
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides spectral analysis for eight channels.
Detection function
Detects the:
l Optical power of the channel
l Central wavelength
l Optical signal-to-noise ratio
NOTE
The board only detects the OSNRs of 10 Gbit/s or lower signals.
l Number of wavelengths in the main optical path

The MCA8 reports the detected data to the SCC. The U2000 can
display the detected information.
Implements the APE function when the board is used with other
required boards.
APE function
Detects the optical power of each channel.

Optical-layer ASON
Supported

Figure 18-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the MCA8 board
IN01
IN02
IN03
IN04

1 8
optical switch
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication
Control and
communication module
Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and transmits the channel to the
spectral analysis module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and converted, each data
parameter is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface. The control
and communication module further reports the parameter to the SCC board and the U2000. The
U2000 reports the final spectrum analysis results.
Module Function
l
1x8 optical switch

Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals
for spectrum analysis.

Monitors parameters such as the central wavelength, optical power, OSNR, and number of
wavelengths.

Drives and controls spectrum.
Controls the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.

18-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

18.2.5 Front Panel


Figure 18-6 shows the front panel of the MCA8 board.
Figure 18-6 Front panel of the MCA8 board
MCA8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
MCA8
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the MCA8 board.Table 18-9 lists the type
Table 18-9 Types and functions of the interfaces on the MCA8 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN8
LC
Connected to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to

be connected to eight "MON" interfaces at the same
time.
18.2.6 Valid Slots

Table 18-10 shows the valid slots for the MCA8 board.
Table 18-10 Valid slots for the MCA8 board
18-14
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

IU61-IU67
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU7, IU11-IU17
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU16
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot
of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number
For the OptiX OSN 6800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the left slot
of the two slots in the subrack. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number
For the OptiX OSN 3800, the rear connector of the board is mounted to the backplane along the bottom
slot of the two slots in the chassis. The slot number of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM is the number
of the bottom slot. For example, if slots IU11 and IU2 house the MCA8 board, the slot number of the MCA8

Table 18-11 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card
processes optical signals in the C band.


Table 18-12 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the MCA8 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface on the NM
IN1-IN8
1-8

18-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


For parameters of the MCA8, refer to Table 18-13.
Table 18-13 MCA8 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Monitoring
Enabled, Disabled
Sets the optical interface monitoring

state. When the monitoring of an optical
interface is set to Disabled, the MCA
board does not analyze the wavelength
at this interface.
Default: Enabled
Configure Band
Default: C
18-16
Actual Band

board.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Port

frequency.
Band
Wavelength Monitor
Status
No Monitor, Monitor
Default: No Monitor

Board
Optical Switch No.

Default: All

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Monitor Interval
(min.)
5 - 49995

supervisory channel for the current
board and to analyze the time interval of
the channel status.
See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.)
information.
WDM type
Default, 100-GHz
Spacing with CRZ, 50GHz Spacing with
CRZ, 100-GHz
Spacing with 40Gbps,
50-GHz Spacing with
40Gbps
Default: 10
Default: Default

Table 18-14 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8 board.
Table 18-14 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
dBm
-30 to -10
Detect accuracy for optical power
dBm
1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range

for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and
the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.)
dB
1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)

2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
nm
0.1
pcs
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
MCA8
12.0
13.0
18.3 OPM8
OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitor board
Only one functional version of the OPM8 board is available, that is, TN11.
18.3.2 Application
The OPM8 board monitors the optical power for eight channels.
The OPM8 board is mainly used for optical power monitoring and APE.
The OPM8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, optical power monitor module, driving and
control module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
18.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board.
18.3.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one OPM8 board.
18.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8
The characteristic code for the OPM8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the
18.3.8 OPM8 Parameters
18.3.9 Specifications of the OPM8

Only one functional version of the OPM8 board is available, that is, TN11.
18.3.2 Application
The OPM8 board monitors the optical power for eight channels.
For the position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system, see Figure 18-7.
18-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-7 Position of the OPM8 board in the WDM system

OTU
MUX
OAU
OAU
DMUX
OTU
OPM8
OTU
DMUX
OAU
OTU
OTU
OPM8
OAU
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
NOTE
The OPM8 board is usually configured at the receive end. If supervision is required at the receive and
transmit ends, you can configure the OPM8 boards at each end for supervision.

The OPM8 board is mainly used for optical power monitoring and APE.
Table 18-15 Functions and features of the OPM8
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides the spectral analysis for eight channels.
Monitoring function
Detects optical power of channels and reports the central wavelength

and optical power to the SCC board.
The results are reported to the SCC and can be displayed on the
U2000.
APE function
Implements the APE function when the board is used with other
required boards.
Monitors the optical power of each channel.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The OPM8 board consists of the 1x8 optical switch, optical power monitor module, driving and
control module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 18-8 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the OPM8 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-8 Functional modules and signal flow of the OPM8 board
IN01
IN02
IN03
IN04
IN05
IN06
IN07
IN08
Optical power monitor

module
1 8
optical switch
Control
signal
Driving
signal
Data
signal
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Required
voltage
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The 1x8 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals from the board it is connected to,
and sends the channel to the optical power monitor module. After being analyzed and converted,
the optical power value is sent to the control and communication module through a data interface.
The control and communication module reports the value to the SCC board and the U2000. The
final spectrum analysis results are displayed on the U2000.
Module Function
l
1x8 optical switch

Selects one channel of optical signals from the accessed eight channels of optical signals
for optical.
Optical power monitor module

Monitors channel optical power and wavelength information and reports the data to the
driving and control module.

Drives and scans spectrum.
Instructs the 1x8 optical switch to select one channel of optical signals for spectrum
analysis.

18-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Power supply module

18.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board.

Figure 18-9 shows the front panel of the OPM8 board.
Figure 18-9 Front panel of the OPM8 board
OPM8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
OPM8
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the OPM8 board. Table 18-16 lists the
Table 18-16 Types and functions of the interfaces on the OPM8 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN8
LC
Connects to the "MON" interfaces of other boards to

be connected to "MON" interfaces of other boards at
the same time.
18.3.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one OPM8 board.
Table 18-17 shows the valid slots for the OPM8 board.
Table 18-17 Valid slots for the OPM8 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
18.3.7 Characteristic Code for the OPM8

The characteristic code for the OPM8 board consists of one character, indicating the band of the
18-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-18 Characteristic code for the OPM8 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OPM8 board is C, indicating C band.
18.3.8 OPM8 Parameters

For parameters of the OPM8, refer to Table 18-19.
Table 18-19 OPM8 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Monitoring
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
Sets the optical interface monitoring state.

When the monitoring of an optical interface
is set to Disabled, the MCA board does not
analyze the wavelength at this interface.
Configure Band
Default: C
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Actual Band

board.
Actual Working
Band Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Port

frequency.
Band
Wavelength Monitor
Status
No Monitor, Monitor

Default: All
Default: No Monitor

18-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Board
Optical Switch No.

Monitor Interval
(min.)
5 - 49995

supervisory channel for the current board
and to analyze the time interval of the
channel status.
See D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM
Default: 10
18.3.9 Specifications of the OPM8

Table 18-20 lists the optical specifications of the OPM8 board.
Table 18-20 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
dBm
-30 to -10
Detected accuracy for optical power
dB
1.5
Channel spacing
GHz
50/100
pcs
18-24
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11OPM8
12
15
18.4 WMU
WMU: wavelength monitored unit
The available functional version of the WMU board is TN11.
18.4.2 Application
The WMU board monitors the wavelengths at a 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing in the system.
The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths at a channel spacing
of 50 GHz/100 GHz on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system.
The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength and power detection
18.4.5 Front Panel
There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board.
18.4.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses on WMU board.
18.4.8 WMU Parameters
18.4.9 Specifications of the WMU

The available functional version of the WMU board is TN11.
18.4.2 Application
The WMU board monitors the wavelengths at a 50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing in the system.
For the position of the WMU board in the WDM system, see Figure 18-10.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 18-10 Position of the WMU board in the WDM system

OSC
MUX
DMUX
OA
OA
WMU
MUX
DMUX
FIU
FIU
ITL
WMU
ITL
DMUX
MUX
OA
OA
DMUX
MUX
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
NOTE
One WMU board can implement the centralized wavelength monitoring in two directions. Figure 18-10 shows
the two WMU boards, which, however, refer to the same WMU board.

The WMU board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths at a channel spacing
of 50 GHz/100 GHz on the OTU board at the transmit end in the system.
Table 18-21 Functions and features of the WMU board
18-26
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
The board supports the centralized monitoring of the wavelengths on

the OTU board at the transmit end in the system with wavelengths at
50 GHz/100 GHz channel spacing, and performs centralized
monitoring of the wavelengths on the OTU at the transmit end in a
transmission system. In addition, the board can monitor the
wavelengths in two different optical transmit directions.
Optical switch
The optical switch is used to select the optical signals from the desired
transmission direction to monitor.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


The WMU board consists of the 1x2 optical switch, optical wavelength and power detection
Figure 18-11 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the WMU board.
Figure 18-11 Functional block diagram of the WMU board
IN1
IN2
1X2
optical switch
Control
signal
Optical wavelength and power

detection module
Driving
signal
Data
signal
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The 1x2 optical switch selects one channel of optical signals and sends it to the optical
wavelength and power detection module for parameter analysis. After being analyzed and
converted, the wavelength and optical power information is sent to the control and
communication module through a data interface. The control and communication module further
reports the results to the SCC board and the U2000. The final results are displayed on the
U2000.
Module Function
l
1x2 optical switch

Selects one channel of signals from the signals accessed through two optical interfaces for
optical wavelength and power detection.
Optical wavelength and power detection module

Detects each single-wavelength optical signals from the optical channel selection module,
and reports the wavelength and optical power information to the SCC board.
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

18.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board.

Figure 18-12 shows the front panel of the WMU board.
Figure 18-12 Front panel of the WMU board
WMU
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
IN1
IN2
WMU
18-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the WMU board.Table 18-22 lists the type
Table 18-22 Types and functions of the interfaces on the WMU board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1/IN2
LC
Connects to the MON optical interface on the optical

amplifier boards in two different transmit directions,
respectively, for centralized wavelength monitoring.
18.4.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses on WMU board.
Valid Slots
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

18-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 18-23 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the WMU board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1
IN2
18.4.8 WMU Parameters

For WMU parameters, refer to Table 18-24.
Table 18-24 WMU parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

interface name. It is recommended to
use the default value.
18.4.9 Specifications of the WMU

Table 18-25 Optical specifications of the WMU board
18-30
Item
Unit
Value
nm
1529-1561
GHz
50/100
Per-channel input optical power range
dBm
-36 to -16
GHz
<2.5
Detect accuracy for single channel optical

power
dB
<2
Detect range for Central wavelength offset
GHz
-10 to 10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11WMU
12
15

18-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

19
19 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
Variable Optical Attenuator Unit
About This Chapter

19.1 VA1
VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit
19.2 VA4
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

19-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

19.1 VA1
The available functional versions of the VA1 board are TN11 and TN12.
19.1.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA1 board implements the power adjustment
for one signal.
The VA1 board adjusts optical power and provides power-off protection.
The VA1 board consists of the variable optical attenuator, driving and control module, control
19.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces and laser hazard level label on the front panel of the VA1 board.
19.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one VA1.
19.1.7 Characteristic Code for the VA1
The characteristic code for the VA1 board contains three digits, indicating the maximum
attenuation of the optical signals processed by the board.
19.1.9 VA1 Parameters
19.1.10 Specifications of the VA1

Table 19-1 lists the version description of the VA1 board.
Table 19-1 Version description of the VA1 board
19-2
Item
Description
Functional
version

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Description
Difference
l Specification:
the VA1.
Replacement
Table 19-2 lists the substitution rules for the VA1 board.
Table 19-2 Substitution rules of the VA1 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11VA1
TN12VA1

later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800
V100R003 or a later version.
TN12VA1
None
19.1.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA1 board implements the power adjustment
for one signal.
For the position of the VA1 board in the WDM system, see Figure 19-1.
Figure 19-1 Position of the VA1 board in the WDM system
OTU OTU
VA1 VA1
VA1
VA1 VA1
VA1
OA
MR2
OA
OTU OTU
OA
MR2
VA1
OA
VA1

The VA1 board adjusts optical power and provides power-off protection.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

19-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-3 Functions and features of the VA1 board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Queries the attenuation and adjusts the optical power of one optical
signal according to the control command sent by the SCC.
Power-off protection
Supports the power-off protection to avoid the damages to the

corresponding optical receiver due to high optical power when the
power supply recovers.
TN11VA1: When there is no power supplied to the VA1, the
attenuation of the VA1 changes to its maximum value automatically.
Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA1
still remains its maximum value. When the system begins to work
normally, the attenuation automatically changes back to the value set
last time.
attenuation of the VA1 keeps the original value or changes to its
maximum value automatically. When being the maximum value,
shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA1
last time.
Attenuation range
The variable attenuation range is between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The
resolution is 0.1 dB.
NOTE
The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA1 is 1.5 dB.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

Figure 19-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA1.
19-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA1
Variable optical attenuator
IN
OUT
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
According to commands sent by the SCC board, the VA1 board adjusts the power of the input
optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l

Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.

Detects the input and output optical power of the VA1 board.
Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation
to the control and communication module.

l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Power supply module

19-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

19.1.5 Front Panel


Figure 19-3 shows the front panel of the VA1 board.
Figure 19-3 Front panel of the VA1 board
VA1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT
IN
VA1
Indicators
19-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the VA1 board. Table 19-4 lists the type
Table 19-4 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA1 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.
OUT
LC
Transmits the adjusted optical signals.
Laser Hazard Level

19.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one VA1.
Valid Slots
Table 19-5 shows the valid slots for the TN11VA1 board.
Table 19-5 Valid slots for the TN11VA1 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
Table 19-6 Valid slots for the TN12VA1 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32

19-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 19-7 Characteristic code for the VA1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
Digits 1 through 3
Attenuation value

attenuation.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11VA1 board is 21.5, indicating that the
maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.


Table 19-8 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA1 displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE

For parameters of the VA1, refer to Table 19-9.
19-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-9 VA1 parameters

Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
Attenuation Rate
(dB) to Value of Max.
Attenuation Rate
(dB)

power attenuation of a board channel so
that the optical power of the output
signals at the transmit end is within the
preset range.
parameter by querying the
corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate
(dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
parameters.
Default: Value of Max.

Attenuation Rate
(dB)

Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)


(dB)

Configure Band
Default: C
Actual Band

board.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Actual Working Band

Parity
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

band of the board.

19-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All

TN11VA1 Optical Specifications

Table 19-10 lists the optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board.
Table 19-10 Optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board
Item
IN-OUT
Unit
Value
Inherent insertion loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
Adjustment accuracy

Item
IN-OUT
Unit
Value
dB
1.5
Dynamic attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
1 (attenuation10dB)
1.5 (attenuation15dB)
Adjustment accuracy
1.8 (attenuation>15dB)
19-10
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Power Consumption
Board
Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
VA1
6.5
7.2
19.2 VA4
19.2.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA4 board adjusts optical power for four optical
signals.
The VA4 board is mainly used to adjust optical power and provide power-off protection.
19.2.5 Front Panel
19.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one VA4 board.

Table 19-12 lists the version description of the VA4 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

19-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-12 Version description of the VA4 board

Item
Description
Functional
version
Difference
l Specification:
the VA4.
Replacement
Table 19-13 lists the substitution rules for the VA4 board.
Table 19-13 Substitution rules of the VA4 board

Original
Board
Substitute
Board
Substitution Rules
TN11VA4
TN12VA4

later version, or upgrade the NE software to OptiX OSN 3800
V100R003 or a later version.
TN12VA4
None
19.2.2 Application
As a type of variable optical attenuator unit, the VA4 board adjusts optical power for four optical
signals.
For the position of the VA4 board in the WDM system, see Figure 19-4.
Figure 19-4 Position of the VA4 board in the WDM system
VA4
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
VA4
VA4
VA4
OA
MR2
OA
VA4
VA4
OA
MR2
OA
VA4

The VA4 board is mainly used to adjust optical power and provide power-off protection.
19-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Table 19-14 Functions and features of the VA4 board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Queries the attenuation and adjust the optical power of four optical
signals respectively according to the control command sent by the
SCC.
Power-off protection
Supports power-off protection to avoid damage to the corresponding

optical receiver caused by too-high optical power when the power
supply recovers.
attenuation of the VA4 changes to its maximum value automatically.
Shortly after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4
last time.
attenuation of the VA4 keeps the original value or changes to its
maximum value automatically. When at the maximum value, shortly
after the power supply recovers, the attenuation of the VA4 still
remains at its maximum value. When the system begins to work
the previous time.
Attenuation range
The variable attenuation ranges between 1.5 dB and 21.5 dB. The
resolution is 0.1 dB.
NOTE
The maximum inherent insertion loss of the VA4 is 1.5 dB.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

Figure 19-5 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the VA4.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

19-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 19-5 Functional modules and signal flow of the VA4

IN1
OUT1
IN2
OUT2
IN3
OUT3
IN4
OUT4
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
SCC
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
Signal Flow
According to the instructions from the SCC board, the VA4 board adjusts the power of four
channels of optical signals by using a variable optical attenuator.
Module Function
l

Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals.

Detects the input and output optical power of the VA4 board.
Drives and controls the variable optical attenuator, and reports the detected attenuation
to the control and communication module.

19-14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
Power supply module

19.2.5 Front Panel


Figure 19-6 shows the front panel of the VA4 board.
Figure 19-6 Front panel of the VA4 board
VA4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CAUTION

LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
OUT1
IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
VA4
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

19-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the VA4 board. Table 19-15 lists the type
Table 19-15 Types and functions of the interfaces on the VA4 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN1-IN4
LC
Receives the optical signals to be adjusted.
OUT1-OUT4
LC
Transmits the adjusted optical signals.
Laser Hazard Level

19.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one VA4 board.
Valid Slots
Table 19-16 Valid slots for TN11VA4 board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
19-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 19-17 Valid slots for TN12VA4 board

Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11

Table 19-18 Characteristic code for the VA4 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First to third digits
Attenuation value

attenuation.
maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.


Table 19-19 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the VA4 board displayed on the NM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
IN3/OUT3
IN4/OUT4

19-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


NOTE

For VA4 Parameters, refer to Table 19-20.
Table 19-20 VA4 parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.
Optical Interface
Name

name.
Optical Interface
Attenuation Ratio
(dB)
Value of Min.
to Value of Max.

power attenuation of a board channel so
that the optical power of the output
signals at the transmit end is within the
preset range.
parameter by querying the
corresponding Min. Attenuation Rate
(dB) and Max. Attenuation Rate (dB)
parameters.
Default: Value of Max.


Max. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Min. Attenuation
Rate (dB)

information.
Configure Band
Default: C
19-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Actual Band

board.
Channel Use Status
Used, Unused

channel of a board.
Default: Used
Threshold of Input
Power Loss (dBm)

value of the input optical power, which
can trigger a board to generate an optical
power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm. When
the actual input optical power is lower
than this threshold value, the board
See D.52 Threshold of Input Power
Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface) for more
information.
Actual Working Band

Parity

band of the board.
Configure Working
Band Parity
All, Odd, Even

band.
Default: All


Item
IN-OUT
Unit
Value
dB
1.5
Dynamic attenuation
range
dB
20
dB
Adjustment accuracy

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

19-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Item
IN-OUT
Unit
Value
Inherent insertion
loss
dB
1.5
Dynamic
attenuation range
dB
20
dB
1 (attenuation10 dB)
1.5 (attenuation15 dB)
Adjustment accuracy
1.8 (attenuation>15 dB)
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
19-20
Board
Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
VA4
8.5
9.4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Unit
20
Optical Power and Dispersion

Equalizing Unit
About This Chapter

20.1 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit
20.2 TDC
TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

20-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20.1 DCU
DCU: dispersion compensation unit
The available functional version of the DCU board is TN11.
20.1.2 Application
As a kind of dispersion compensation board, the DCU board is used at the transmit or receive
end in the transmission system to compensate for the dispersion that is accumulated in an optical
transmission system.
The DCU board compensates for the dispersion that is accumulated in the fiber during
transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. This enables the transmitted optical signals
to be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board,
the DCU board can implement long haul optical transmission.
The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication
20.1.5 Front Panel
There are interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board.
20.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one DCU board.
20.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU
The characteristic code for the DCU board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber
that the board works with and the dispersion compensation distance.
20.1.9 DCU Parameters
20.1.10 Specifications of the DCU

The available functional version of the DCU board is TN11.
20.1.2 Application
As a kind of dispersion compensation board, the DCU board is used at the transmit or receive
end in the transmission system to compensate for the dispersion that is accumulated in an optical
transmission system.
For the position of the DCU board in the WDM system, see Figure 20-1.
20-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-1 Position of the DCU board in the WDM system

DCU
OTU
MUX
OBU
DMUX
OAU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
OAU
MUX
OBU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU
DCU
OTU
MUX
DCU
OBU
DMUX
OAU
OTU
OTU
DMUX
OAU
OBU
DCU
OTU
MUX
OTU
OTU
OTU
OTU

The DCU board compensates for the dispersion that is accumulated in the fiber during
transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. This enables the transmitted optical signals
to be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with an optical amplifier board,
the DCU board can implement long haul optical transmission.
Table 20-1 Functions and features of the DCU board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
Provides dispersion compensation for different transmission distance.
Dispersion
compensation
method
Compensates for the dispersion accumulated in an optical

transmission system, and compresses the optical signal pulse. This
enables the transmitted optical signals to be restored at the output end.
Long haul
transmission with
optical regeneration
Implements long haul transmission when used together with an

optical amplifier board.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported

The DCU board consists of the dispersion compensation module, control and communication
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

20-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-2 shows the functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board.
Figure 20-2 Functional modules and signal flow of the DCU board
IN
OUT
Dispersion compensation
EDFA optical module
module
Control
CPU
Memory
Communication

Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(Controlled by SCC)
SCC
Signal Flow
The dispersion compensation module (DCM) performs the dispersion compensation with the
main path optical signals received through the IN optical interface. Then, the signals are output
through the OUT optical interface.
Module Function
l
The dispersion compensation module

After the optical signal is transmitted for a certain distance, the optical signal pulse is
widened because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. This severely affects
the system transmission performance. The DCM employs the negative dispersion borne
with the dispersion compensating fiber (DCF) to offset the positive dispersion in the
transmission fiber, and compresses the input optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical
signals at the output end are restored back to the original signals.

Power supply module

20-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20.1.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board.

Figure 20-3 shows the front panel of the DCU board.
Figure 20-3 Front panel of the DCU board
DCU
OUT
IN
DCU
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCU board.Table 20-2 lists the type
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

20-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DCU board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
Accesses the multiplexed signals to be compensated in

terms of dispersion.
OUT
LC
Outputs the multiplexed signals that have been

compensated in terms of dispersion.
Laser Hazard Level

20.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DCU board.
Table 20-3 shows the valid slots for the DCU board.
Table 20-3 Valid slots for the DCU board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
OptiX OSN 3800
IU2-IU5, IU11
20.1.7 Characteristic Code for the DCU

Table 20-4 Characteristic code for the DCU board
20-6
Code
Meaning
Description
Character before hyphen (-)
Fiber type
Type of the fiber that the

DCU board works with
Character after hyphen (-)
distance
The transmission distance

achieved through dispersion
compensation

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates
that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance
is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to
separate each distance.


Table 20-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DCU board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN
OUT
20.1.9 DCU Parameters

For parameters of the DCU, refer to Table 20-6.
Table 20-6 DCU parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel
Displays the position of the

optical interface.
Optical Interface
Name

interface name. It is
recommended to use the default
value.
20.1.10 Specifications of the DCU

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

20-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-7 Optical specifications of the DCU (1) board
Item
Unit
Value
DC
U0
1
DC
U0
2
DC
U0
3
DC
U0
4
DC
U0
5
DC
U06
D
CU
07
DCU0
8
Typical dispersion
compensation distance
km
20
40
60
80
100
120
10
Maximum insertion loss
dB
3.3
4.7
6.4
9.8
2.3
2.8
slope
90%-110%
Polarization mode
dispersion
ps
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.3
0.3
Polarization-dependent
loss
dB
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Maximum input power a
dBm
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
range
nm
1528-1568
Dispersion compensating
fiber type
G.652 fiber
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
Table 20-8 Optical specifications of the DCU (2) board

Item
20-8
Unit
Value
DCU
11
DCU
12
DCU
13
DCU
14
DCU1
5
DCU1
6
Typical dispersion
compensation distance
km
20
40
60
80
100
120
Maximum insertion loss
dB
5.9
6.9
7.8
8.8
slope
90%-110%
Polarization mode
dispersion
ps
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Polarization-dependent
loss
dB
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Item
Unit
Value
DCU
11
DCU
12
DCU
13
DCU
14
DCU1
5
DCU1
6
20
20
20
20
20
Maximum input power a
dBm
20
range
nm
1528-1568
Dispersion compensating
fiber type
G.655 fiber
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board
Optical Module
Type
Typical Power
Consumption at
25C (77F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at
55C (131F) (W)
TN11DCU
0.2
0.3
20.2 TDC
TDC: single-wavelength tunable-dispersion compensation board
The available hardware version of the TDC board is TN11.
20.2.2 Application
The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in one channel.
The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in a single channel and reports information.
The TDC board consists of the optical module, the driving and detection module, the control
and communication module, and the power supply module.
20.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicator and interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board.
20.2.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one TDC board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

20-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

20.2.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC

The characteristic code for the TDC board contains characters, indicating the type of the fiber
This section introduces information such as slots, interfaces and parameters for the TDC
configuration in an NM system.
20.2.9 TDC Parameters
20.2.10 Specifications of the TDC
Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and
power consumption.

The available hardware version of the TDC board is TN11.
20.2.2 Application
The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in one channel.
If a 40 Gbit/s OTU board is configured with intra-board 1+1 protection, the TDC board must be
configured on the protection path at the receive end. For the application of the board in a WDM
system, see Figure 20-4.
Figure 20-4 Application of the TDC board in a WDM system
O
T
U
O
L
P
TDC
M40
OA
OA
D40
M40
OA
OA
D40
D40
OA
OA
M40
D40
OA
OA
M40
TDC
O
L
P
O
T
U

The TDC board compensates for the dispersion in a single channel and reports information.
20-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-9 Functions and features of the TDC board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
The TDC board is used for C-band optical signals.

Compensates for the dispersion in the single channel. The dispersion
is adjustable.
Information report
Reports the ambient temperature and alarm information about the

board.
Optical-layer ASON
Supported by TN11TDC01.

The TDC board consists of the optical module, the driving and detection module, the control
and communication module, and the power supply module.
Figure 20-5 is the functional block diagram of the TDC board.
Figure 20-5 Functional block diagram of the TDC board
Optical module
Tunable dispersion
compensation module
IN
OUT
Data
signal
Driving
signal
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication
Power supply
module
Fuse
Required
voltage
SCC
DC power supply
from a backplane
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Back plane
(Controlled by SCC)
20-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Signal Flow
The TDC reports hardware information and alarm events to the SCC through the communication
module. One single wavelength optical signal is input through the IN interface. After the
dispersion is compensated for by the compensation module, the signal is output through the
OUT.
Module Function
l
Optical module
The optical module of the TDC board contains a tunable dispersion compensation module.
The system can adjust for the dispersion of the compensation module.

Drives and controls the TDC module, and reports the detected dispersion to the control and
communication module.

Power supply module

20.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicator and interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board.

Figure 20-6 shows the front panel of the TDC board.
20-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure 20-6 Front panel of the TDC board
TDC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT
IN
TDC
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the TDC board.
Table 20-10 lists the type and function of each interface.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

20-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table 20-10 Types and functions of the TDC interfaces

Interface
Connector Type
Description
IN
LC
Connected to the optical demultiplexer to input a single

signal that is to be equalized.
OUT
LC
Connected to the OTU to output the equalized a single

signal.
Laser Hazard Level

20.2.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one TDC board.
Table 20-11 shows the valid slots for the TDC board.
Table 20-11 Valid slots for the TDC board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU18
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU17
20.2.7 Characteristic Code for the TDC

Table 20-12 Characteristic code for the TDC board
20-14
Code
Meaning
Description
Fiber type
Fiber type that the TDC

board is compatible with
distance

compensation

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that
the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is
tunable.

This section introduces information such as slots, interfaces and parameters for the TDC
configuration in an NM system.

Table 20-13 shows the sequence number displayed in an NM system of the optical interface on
the panel of the board.
Table 20-13 Display of the optical interfaces on the TDC board
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
An optical interface displayed on the NM denotes a pair of actual optical interfaces, one of which serves
to receive signals and the other of which serves to transmit signals.
20.2.9 TDC Parameters

For parameters of the TDC, refer to Table 20-14.
Table 20-14 TDC parameters
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.


20-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Field
Value
Description
Receive Wavelength
l C: 1/1529.16/196.050
to
80/1560.61/192.100
Sets Receive Wavelength of a

board. The value of the Receive
Wavelength is as follows:
l CWDM:
3/1311.00/230.330 to
18/1611.00/188.780
l When the receive wavelength of

the board is the same as the
transmit wavelength of the local
board, use the default value,
which indicates keeping the
receive wavelength the same as
the transmit wavelength of the
local board automatically.
Default: /
l When the receive wavelength of

the board is different from the
transmit wavelength of the local
board, the value of this parameter
must be the same as the transmit
wavelength of the peer board;
otherwise, services are affected.
NOTE
For ASON services, this parameter must
be set to the default value.
Planned Band Type
C, CWDM
The Planned Band Type parameter

sets the band type of the current
working wavelength.
Default: C
NOTE
See D.45 Planned Band Type

information.
20.2.10 Specifications of the TDC

Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and
power consumption.
Table 20-15 lists the optical specifications of the TDC board.
Table 20-15 Optical specifications of the TDC board
20-16
Parameter
Unit
Value
Optical channels
80
Dispersion tuning range
ps/nm
400

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Parameter
Unit
Value
Dispersion tuning resolution
sec
<15
Input power range
dBm
-13 to 0
Dispersion accuracy
ps/nm
10
dBm
The output optical power should

be close to the input power, with
an error range of 1.5 dB.
The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows:
l
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TN11TDC
13
15

20-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21 Clock Unit
21
Clock Unit
About This Chapter

21.1 STG
STG: Centralized Clock Board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

21-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21 Clock Unit
21.1 STG
STG: Centralized Clock Board
The available functional versions of the STG board are TN11, TN52, TNK2.
21.1.2 Application
The STG board is a type of clock board, which locks the reference clock source and provides
clock signals and frame signals to the system. The clock signals comply with ITU-T G.813 and
ITU-T G.823.
The STG board is mainly used to lock the reference clock source and provide signal signals and
frame signals to the system.
The STG board consists of a control and communication module and a clock processing module.
21.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators on the front panel of the STG board.
21.1.6 Valid Slots
One slot houses one STG board.
21.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG
None
21.1.8 STG Parameters
21.1.9 Specifications of the STG

The available functional versions of the STG board are TN11, TN52, TNK2.
Table 21-1 lists the versions of the STG board.
Table 21-1 Version description of the STG board
21-2
Item
Description
Functional
version
The available functional versions of the STG board are TN11, TN52, and
TNK2.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21 Clock Unit
Item
Description
Difference
l Appearance:
The TN11, TN52 and TNK2 versions use different front panels with
Specifications of the STG.
l Specification:
Specifications of the STG.
The TN11STG board and the STG board of other versions are not
interchangeable.
Replacement
The TN52STG board and the STG board of other versions are not
interchangeable.
The TNK2STG board and the STG board of other versions are not
interchangeable.
21.1.2 Application
The STG board is a type of clock board, which locks the reference clock source and provides
clock signals and frame signals to the system. The clock signals comply with ITU-T G.813 and
ITU-T G.823.
For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T64, see Figure 21-1.
For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 8800 T32, see Figure 21-2.
For the position of the STG in the OptiX OSN 6800, see Figure 21-3.
Figure 21-1 Position of the TNK2STG in OptiX OSN 8800 T64
external clock
external clock
STI
STG
STG
Clock signals &

Frame signals
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
Clock signals &

Frame signals
G.694.1
G.694.1
1
STI
MUX
NS2
DMUX
TOM
TOM
4
Client side
NS2
WDM side
DMUX
MUX
NS2
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
4
Client side
NOTE
The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2
function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

21-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21 Clock Unit
Figure 21-2 Position of the TN52STG in OptiX 8800 T32

external clock
external clock
STI
STG
STG
Clock signals &

Frame signals
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
Clock signals &

Frame signals
G.694.1
G.694.1
1
STI
MUX
NS2
DMUX
TOM
TOM
4
DMUX
NS2
Client side
MUX
NS2
WDM side
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
Client side
NOTE
The STI is optional and it is configured when the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2
function needs to be supported, and certain sites in the OCS system need to access the BITS clock.
Figure 21-3 Position of the TN11STG in OptiX OSN 6800

external clock
external clock
STG
STG
Clock signals &

Frame signals
1
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
NS2
Clock signals &

Frame signals
G.694.1
G.694.1
MUX
NS2
DMUX
TOM
TOM
4
Client side
NS2
DMUX
MUX
WDM side
NS2
WDM side
100Mbit/s2.5Gbit/s
4
Client side
NOTE
When the 2M clock signals need to be transmitted, the IEEE 1588V2 function needs to be supported, the
external clock is input on the STG board.

The STG board is mainly used to lock the reference clock source and provide signal signals and
frame signals to the system.
21-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21 Clock Unit
Table 21-2 Functions and features of the STG board

Function and
Feature
Description
Basic function
l Locks the reference clock source.

l Provides the system with ITU-T clock signals that comply with G.
813- and ITU-T G.823 and frame signals.
l Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream
system.
Active/standby
switching function
In the OptiX OSN 8800, the STG board uses a 1+1 hot backup scheme.
The two STGs serve as mutual backups. When both of them are
normal, one of them functions as the active board, and the other
functions as the standby board. Service boards select the clock source
according to the status of the two STGs. When the active STG is
faulty, an active/standby switching occurs. Then, the standby STG
becomes active, and the services boards select the clock from the
current active STG according to the status of the two STGs.
Clock source
selection function
Traces the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock
source, to provide the synchronization clock source for itself and the
system.
Time
synchronization
function
Synchronizes the time of an NE with the time of the upstream NE.

The STG board consists of a control and communication module and a clock processing module.
Figure 21-4 shows the functional block diagram of the STG board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

21-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21 Clock Unit
Figure 21-4 Functional modules and signal flow of the STG board
Time signals/
Clock signals
Clock signals/Frame signals
Control
Memory
CPU
Communication

Power supply
module
Required
voltage
Fuse
DC power supply
from a backplane
Backplane
(controlled by SCC)
SCC
Module Function
l

The clock processing module consists of the clock signal receiver, clock signal transmitter,
clock signal trace sub-module, clock source selection sub-module, IEEE 1588 clock
synchronization sub-module, and active/standby STG board switching control sub-module.
Locks the external clock source, service clock source, or local clock source, to provide
the STG board and the system with the synchronization clock source.
Updates the clock signals periodically to ensure the time synchronization within an NE.

Power supply module

21-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21 Clock Unit
21.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators on the front panel of the STG board.

Figure 21-5 shows the front panel of the TNK2STG board.
Figure 21-6 shows the front panel of the TN52STG board.
Figure 21-7 shows the front panel of the TN11STG board.
Figure 21-5 Front panel of the TNK2STG board
STG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
Figure 21-6 Front panel of the TN52STG board

STG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

21-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21 Clock Unit
Figure 21-7 Front panel of the TN11STG board
STG
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
TOD
CLK
IN
OUT
STG
Indicators
l
Interfaces
Table 21-3 lists details on the interfaces of the TN11STG board.
21-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21 Clock Unit
Table 21-3 Interface description of the STG board

Interface
Connector
Function
IN
SMB
Clock signal input interface
OUT
SMB
Clock signal output interface
CLK
RJ-45
Clock signal input and output

interface
TOD
RJ-45
Time signal input and output

interface
NOTE
The CLK port and the IN/OUT port cannot be used as the input or output port at the same time. If the CLK
port is used to input or output clock signals, the IN/OUT port cannot be used to input/output clock signals.
If the IN/OUT port is used to input/output clock signals, the CLK port cannot be used to input or output
clock signals.
21.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one STG board.
Table 21-4 shows the valid slots for the TN11STG board.
Table 21-4 Valid slots for the TN11STG board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 6800
IU15, IU16
Table 21-5 shows the valid slots for the TN52STG board.
Table 21-5 Valid slots for the TN52STG board
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU42, IU44
Table 21-6 shows the valid slots for the TNK2STG board.
Table 21-6 Valid slots for the TNK2STG board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Product
Valid Slots
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU75, IU86

21-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

21 Clock Unit
21.1.7 Characteristic Code for the STG

None
21.1.8 STG Parameters

For STG Parameters, refer to Table 21-7.
Table 21-7 STG parameters
Field
Value
Description
Optical Interface/
Channel

interface.

21.1.9 Specifications of the STG

l
Dimensions of the front panel:

TNK2STG: 50.3mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.2
in. (H))
TN52STG: 28.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
4.2 in. (H))
TN11STG: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
TN52STG/TNK2STG: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
TN11STG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
21-10
Board
Typical Power
F) (W)
Maximum Power
Consumption at 55C
(131F) (W)
TNK2STG
14.0
16.0
TN52STG
13.0
14.1
TN11STG
8.7
9.57

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
21 Clock Unit

21-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22
OCS System Unit
About This Chapter

22.1 BPA
BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board
22.2 EGSH
EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board
22.3 SF64
SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
22.4 SF64A
SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
22.5 SFD64
SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
22.6 SL64
SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board
22.7 SLD64
SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board
22.8 SLH41
SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board
22.9 SLO16
SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board
22.10 SLQ16
SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board
22.11 SLQ64
SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.1 BPA
BPA: optical booster and pre-amplifier board
Only one functional version of the BPA board is available, that is, N4.
22.1.2 Application
The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board. The BPA board provides a BA and a
PA, which are respectively used at the transmit end and receive end of the OptiX OSN 8800.
During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high.
Therefore, the BA and PA are required to ensure that the optical receiver can receive normal
optical signals.
The BPA board consists of the optical part, driving and detecting part, and data processing and
communication part.
22.1.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the BPA board.
22.1.6 Valid Slots
The BPA board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on the subrack.
Otherwise, the board does not function.
22.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA
The number code that follows the board name in the bar code is the characteristic code for the
board. The characteristic code for the BPA board indicates the output optical power of the optical
interfaces.
22.1.9 Specifications of the BPA
Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety class, mechanical specifications, and
power consumption.

Only one functional version of the BPA board is available, that is, N4.
22.1.2 Application
The BPA is an optical booster and pre-amplifier board. The BPA board provides a BA and a
PA, which are respectively used at the transmit end and receive end of the OptiX OSN 8800.
Figure 22-1 shows the position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system.
22-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-1 Position of the BA and PA in an optical transmission system

Tx
BA
Rx
Tx
PA
Rx

During the long-haul transmission of optical signals, the attenuation of the signals is high.
Therefore, the BA and PA are required to ensure that the optical receiver can receive normal
optical signals.
Table 22-1 Functions and features of the BPA board
Function and
Feature
Description
Basic functions
Increases the launched optical power of the line board to 13

15 dBm. As a result, when the G.652 optical fiber with a loss
of 0.275 dB/km is used, the transmission distance can be 120
km or above.
Pre-amplification
function
Provides the PA module to pre-amplify the received optical

signals. Increases the power of the small-volume optical
signals by 2233 dB so that the sensitivity of the receiver
increases to 37 dBm.
EDFA
l Supports the automatic control of the laser temperature and

optical power of the EDFA module.
l Supports the automatic monitoring of the input and output
optical power of the EDFA module and query of the optical
power of the EDFA module.
l Supports the protection function of the EDFA module.
When no optical signals are received, the laser is
automatically turned off. When optical signals are
received, the laser is automatically turned on.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Performance events
and alarms
monitoring
Supports the reporting of the performance parameters of the

laser. Reports various alarms and performance events, which
facilitates the management and maintenance of the equipment.
Software upgrade
Supports the software upgrade without interrupting services.

22-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The BPA board consists of the optical part, driving and detecting part, and data processing and
communication part.
Figure 22-2 shows the function modules and signal flow of the BPA board.
Figure 22-2 Function modules and signal flow of the BPA board
Optical input
Optical output
Optical input
Optical output
Optical
part
EDFA optical module
Pump current
check
Drive
module
Module
temperature
control
Input/output
power
check
Pump
Drive
current
module
check
Module
temperature
control
Input/output
power
check
Driving
and
detecting
part
A/D or D/A conversion
SCC
Communication
module
Control
module
Data processing and

communication part
Optical Part
The BPA board has one EDFA optical module. The EDFA optical module magnifies the optical
power.
Driving and Detecting Part

The driving and detecting part provides the EDFA optical module with the driving current. It
also checks the working status of each part in the EDFA optical module. In addition, it predicts
and handles possible faults.
The driving and detecting part performs the following functions: checking the pump current,
driving the optical module, controlling the temperature of the optical module, and checking the
input and output optical power.
Data Processing and Communication Part

The data processing and communication part consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. The data
processing and communication part analyzes the test result of the tested circuit. Then, it adjusts
the driving circuit based on the analysis result so that the gain or output optical power of the
EDFA optical module remains in the range of the rated value. It also classifies the abnormal
states represented by the measured values and reports the abnormal states to the NMS.
22.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of the BPA board.
22-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

Figure 22-3 shows the front panel of the BPA board.
Figure 22-3 Front panel of the BPA board
BPA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LASER
RADIATION
WITH OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
CLASS 1M LASER
PRODUCT
BOUT
BIN
POUT
PIN
BPA
Indicators
The following indicators are present on the panel of the board:
l
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) two colors (red and green)
Service activation status indicator (ACT) one color (green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) two colors (red and green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, and yellow)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Interfaces
There are two LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BPA board. Table 22-2 lists the
type and function of each optical interface.
Table 22-2 Types and functions of the interfaces on the BPA board
Interface
Type
Function
BIN
LC
Receives one channel of optical signals for

amplification.
BOUT
LC
Transmits one channel of amplified optical

signals.
PIN
LC
Receives one channel of optical signals for preamplification.
POUT
LC
Transmits one channel of pre-amplified optical

signals.
22.1.6 Valid Slots

The BPA board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on the subrack.
Valid slots for the BPA board are as follows:
l
IU1IU8, IU12IU27, and IU29IU36 on the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack
IU1IU8, IU11IU42, and IU45IU68 on the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack
22.1.7 Characteristic Code for the BPA

board. The characteristic code for the BPA board indicates the output optical power of the optical
interfaces.
Table 22-3 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the
output optical power.
Table 22-3 Relationship between the characteristic code for the BPA board and the output optical
power
Board
Characteristic
Code
Description
SSN4BPA01
01
The receiver sensitivity of the PA module

is 37 dBm.
The output optical power of the BA
module is 14 dBm.
22-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

Display of Optical Interfaces on the NMS

Table 22-4 lists the displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the board on the NMS.
Table 22-4 Displayed serial numbers of the optical interfaces of the BPA board on the NMS
Optical interface
Displayed serial number on the NMS
BOUT
BIN
POUT
PIN
22.1.9 Specifications of the BPA

power consumption.
Table 22-5 lists the optical specifications of the BPA board.
Table 22-5 Optical specifications of the BPA board
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s or 9953280 kbit/s
Application code
V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2, V-64.2, and U-64.2
Line code pattern
NRZ
Input wavelength (nm)
BA: 1530 to 1565

PA: 1550.12
Input optical power

(dBm)
BA: -6 to +3
PA: -28 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at
the rate of 10 Gbit/s)
PA: -38 to -10 (when the BPA board works with the line board at
the rate less than 10 Gbit/s)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

(dBm)
13 to 15 (BA)
Sensitivity (dBm)
PA: -37

22-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Noise figure (dB)
BA: < 6.5

PA: < 6
NOTE
When you perform a loopback on the PA module of the BPA board, prevent the damage caused by high
input optical power to the optical module.
Laser Safety Class

The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1M, indicating that the maximum output
The mechanical specifications of the BPA board are as follows:
l
Dimensions (mm): 25.4 (W) x 220 (D) x 262.05 (H)
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 11 W
22.2 EGSH
EGSH: 16xGE Ethernet switching and processing board
Only one functional version of the EGSH board is available, that is, N1.
22.2.2 Application
The EGSH board is used in telecommunication domains such as Ethernet service access,
bandwidth management, and Ethernet service L2 switching.
The EGSH board accesses multiple types of Ethernet services and provides various functions
and features such as the MPLS function, VLAN multicast function, QinQ function, and interboard link aggregation function.
The EGSH board consists of the interface module, 1588 clock processing module, L2 service
processing module, SDH encapsulation and mapping module, active/standby interface
converting module, logic control module, clock module, and power module.
22.2.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, and a bar code on the front panel of the EGSH board.
22.2.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers
No DIP switch or fiber jumper for setting the board is equipped on the EGSH board.
22-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.2.7 Valid Slots

The EGSH board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board does not
function.
22.2.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH
The characteristic code of a board is the code after the board name in the bar code on the board.
The characteristic code of the EGSH board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
22.2.10 Board Protection
The EGSH board supports the distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) protection. The
DLAG protection is a board-level port protection technology.
22.2.11 EGSH Parameters
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EGSH board.
22.2.12 Specifications of the EGSH
Specifications include optical specifications, electrical specifications, laser safety class,
mechanical specifications, and power consumption.

Only one functional version of the EGSH board is available, that is, N1.
22.2.2 Application
The EGSH board is used in telecommunication domains such as Ethernet service access,
bandwidth management, and Ethernet service L2 switching.
Figure 22-4 shows the typical networking of the EGSH board. The board provides the following
functions: receives and converges Ethernet services; performs L2 switching of Ethernet data;
isolates Ethernet data ports; classifies the traffic; controls the data traffic; manages the VLAN;
configures data attributes such as the priority; encapsulates and decapsulates data; forms virtual
concatenation; maps and demaps SDH signals. In addition, the board can be interconnected with
the broadband access equipment and data communication equipment to provide a networkwide
solution.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-4 Networking and application of the EGSH board
T2000
NE1
User A2
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2
Service flow
VLAN 100
PORT 1 VLAN 100
User B1
OCS line board

OCS data board
Cross-connect and timing board
User A1

The EGSH board accesses multiple types of Ethernet services and provides various functions
and features such as the MPLS function, VLAN multicast function, QinQ function, and interboard link aggregation function.
Table 22-6 Functions and features of the EGSH board
22-10
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
The board processes 16xGE services. It provides functions such as O/E

conversion, Ethernet frame processing, mapping, Layer 2 (L2) switching, and
overhead and pointer processing of the service signals. The board is connected
to the active and standby cross-connect boards through the backplane. In this
manner, data is exchanged and services are groomed.
Functions
when being
used with the
interface
board
Accesses 16 channels of Ethernet signals by providing interfaces on the front

panel.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
Specificatio
ns of the
interface
l Supports the 1000BASE-LX and 1000BASE-SX optical interface.

l Port 6 and port 8 can work as the 1000BASE-T electrical interface at the
same time.
l All the sixteen interfaces comply with IEEE 802.3z.
Format of
service
frames
l Supports Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, and IEEE 802.1 q/p formats.
Maximum
uplink
bandwidth
The maximum uplink bandwidth of the EGSH is 10 Gbit/s.
VCTRUNK
s
l The number of supported VCTRUNKs is 24.
Mapping
granularities
Supports VC-4, VC-3, VC-4-Xv (X8), and VC-3-Xv (X24) granularities.
Encapsulatio
n format
Supports the GFP-F encapsulation.
EPL services
Supports the PORT-based transparent transmission.
EVPL
services
Supports PORT+VLAN-based EVPL services that use the frame

encapsulation formats of MartinioE and stack VLAN.
EPLAN
services
l Supports the L2 convergence and point-to-multipoint (P2MP)

convergence.
l Supports the frame with a length ranging from 64 bytes to 9600 bytes and
supports the Jumbo frame with a length less than 9600 bytes.
l One VCTRUNK can be bound with a maximum of eight VC-4s or 24

VC-3s.
l Supports the L2 forwarding function.

l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides.
l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The capacity of the
MAC address table is 32k. The aging time of the MAC address can be set
and queried.
l Supports the configuration of the static MAC route.
l Supports the query of the dynamic MAC address.
l Supports the creation, deletion, and query of the VB. Only one VB is
supported. The maximum number of logical ports for one VB is 40.
l Supports the data isolation based on VB+VLAN.
l Queries the number of actually learned MAC addresses based on VB
+VLAN or VB+LP.
l The services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d MAC bridge are referred
to as EPLAN services.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
MTU
Supports the setting of the packet length, which ranges from 1518 bytes to
9600 bytes. After the setting becomes valid, the length of the packets that enter
or exit the IP ports is limited.
MPLS
Supports the MPLS.
VLAN
Supports a maximum of 4000 VLANs. The VLAN technology complies with

IEEE 802.1q/p.
STP
Supports the broadcast packet suppression function and rapid spanning tree
protocol (RSTP) that comply with IEEE 802.1w.
Link
aggregation
Supports the LAG function.
Distributed
link
aggregation
Supports the DLAG protection.
Multicast
function
Supports the multicast function.
ETH-OAM
function
Supports continuity check (CC) for the multicast service, loopback (LB) test
for the unicast service, link trace (LT) test, loop detection (LD), autonegotiation, fault diagnosis, and link performance detection.
CAR
Supports the CAR.

The granularity is 64 kbit/s.
22-12
QoS flow
classificatio
n
Supports the flow classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN ID, PORT

+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, Label Flow, or Label Exp Flow.
LCAS
function
Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the bandwidth

in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT
function
Supports the point-to-point (P2P) LPT and P2MP LPT.
Flow control
function
Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Highprecision
time
Supports the synchronous Ethernet and IEEE 1588 V2 clock at ports 2 and 4.
The synchronous Ethernet realizes frequency synchronization, and the IEEE
1588 V2 clock realizes time synchronization.
Test frames
Receives and transmits Ethernet test frames.
Loopback
function
Supports inloops on Ethernet ports (at the PHY layer or MAC layer).

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
Protection
schemes
Supports the following protection schemes at the Ethernet service layer:

l STP/RSTP
l LCAS
l LPT
l LAG
l DLAG
l ERPS
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Supports Ethernet performance monitoring at the port level.
Alarms and
performance
events
Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the

management and maintenance of the equipment.
Protocol or
standard
compliance
(non-performance
monitoring) with which
transparently transmitted
services comply
IEEE 802.1q VLAN

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1d
IEEE 802.1w
IEEE 802.1s
STP
RSTP
MSTP
All L3 protocols including ARP, IGMP, OSPF,
RIP, IGRP etc.
(performance monitoring)
for processing services
IEEE 802.3z interface

IEEE 802.3ad LACP
IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IEEE 802.1d
IEEE 802.1w
IEEE 802.1s
STP
RSTP
MSTP
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The EGSH board consists of the interface module, 1588 clock processing module, L2 service
processing module, SDH encapsulation and mapping module, active/standby interface
converting module, logic control module, clock module, and power module.
The processing of 1xGE signal is considered as an example to describe the working principle
and signal flow of the EGSH board.
Figure 22-5 shows the function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board.
Figure 22-5 Function modules and signal flow of the EGSH board
Backplane
GE
O/E
conversion
1588 clock
processing
module
E/O
conversion
GE
L2 service
processing
module
Active/
standby
interface
converting
module
SDH
encapsulation
and mapping
module
Interface module
Laser
shutdown
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit
LOS
Communication
Logic and
control module
Reference clock and frame header

+3.3V
Clock module
Power
module
Power Fuse
module
SCC unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
66 25 125 155
MHz MHz MHz MHz
NOTE
Among the 16 ports of the board, only ports 2 and 4 support the 1588 clock processing module.
Receive Direction
The interface module receives the series signals from an external Ethernet device (such as the
Ethernet switch or router), decodes the signals, and converts the signals into parallel signals.
Then, the service processing module delimits the frames, strips the preamble code, terminates
the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet performance.
The service processing module also classifies the traffic according to the service type and
configuration requirements (the packets in the formats of MPLS, L2 MPLS VPN, and Ethernet/
VLAN are supported). In addition, the service processing module adds the tunnel and VC tags
to the services according to the service configuration for mapping and forwarding the services.
At last, the encapsulation module encapsulates the Ethernet frames in the GFP-F format, and
sends the frames to the mapping module where the frames are mapped and are sent to the crossconnect unit on the backplane through the active/standby interface converting module.
Transmit Direction
The cross-connect unit sends parallel signals to the encapsulation and mapping module through
the active/standby interface converting module for demapping and decapsulation. Then, the
service processing module determines a route for the signals according to the level of the
22-14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
equipment on the network, and performs L2 processing of the data services according to the
service type and configuration requirements. The service processing module also delimits the
frames, adds the preamble code, computes the CRC code, and collects the statistics of Ethernet
performance. At last, the interface module converts the parallel signals into serial signals,
encodes the serial signals, and outputs the serial signals through the Ethernet interface.
Interface Module
In the receive direction, the interface module converts the optical signals from an external
Ethernet device (such as the Ethernet switch or router) into electrical signals, and sends the
electrical signals to the L2 service processing module.
In the transmit direction, the interface module converts the electrical signals from the L2 service
processing module into optical signals.
1588 Clock Processing Module

The board supports the synchronization protocol for two 1588 clocks. On the uplink, the 1588
clock processing module extracts service packets from the Ethernet data signals that it receives,
processes the packets, and transparently transmits the Ethernet data signals to the L2 service
processing module. The signal flow on the downlink reverses that on the uplink.
L2 Service Processing Module

This module provides functions such as L2 switching of the received and transmitted Ethernet
data services, port isolation, traffic classification, data traffic control, VLAN management, and
priority configuration.
SDH Encapsulation and Mapping Module

This module encapsulates the received data services in the GFP format, decapsulates the
transmitted data services in the GFP format, and maps and demaps the VC-3/4 service granules
in the SDH format.
Active/Standby Interface Converting Module

The active/standby interface module sends the encapsulated SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4 level
to the active and standby cross-connect boards, and selects the SDH service at the VC-3/VC-4
level sent from the active and standby cross-connect boards.
Logic Control Module

The logic control module controls the modules on the board and configures services for these
modules. In addition, the logic control module selects and traces the clock and header signal
sent from the active and standby clock boards.
Clock Module
The clock module traces the system reference clock and generates the clock signals required for
each chip. The clock frequency can be 66 MHz, 25 MHz, 125 MHz, or 155 MHz.
Power Supply Module

The power supply module provides the DC voltage required by each module on the board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, and a bar code on the front panel of the EGSH board.

Figure 22-6 shows the front panel of the EGSH board.
Figure 22-6 Front panel of the EGSH board
SM SFP WORK WITH
G.657B FIBER ONLY
G.657B
EGSH
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
RX 1
2 TX
TX 15
16 RX
Indicators
22-16
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Interfaces
There are 16 optical interfaces on the front panel of the EGSH board, and "16 SFP" is silkscreened
under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.
Table 22-7 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Table 22-7 Types and functions of the interfaces on the EGSH board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX16
LC
Receives optical signals.
TX1TX16
LC
Transmits optical signals.
NOTE
When the 1000BASE-LX optical interface board is used, the G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D
fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door
cannot be closed. Figure 22-7 shows the G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
Figure 22-7 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

G.652D fiber jumper
58.25
50.75
G.657A2 fiber jumper
50.5
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.2.6 DIP Switches and Fiber Jumpers

No DIP switch or fiber jumper for setting the board is equipped on the EGSH board.
22.2.7 Valid Slots

The EGSH board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board does not
function.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the EGSH board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
IU12IU27, and IU29IU36.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the EGSH board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
22.2.8 Characteristic Code for the EGSH

The characteristic code of the EGSH board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
Table 22-8 provides the relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type
of the EGSH board.
Table 22-8 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the EGSH
board
Board
Characteristic
Code
Optical Interface Type
SSN1EGSH10
10
1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
SSN1EGSH11
11
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
SSN1EGSH12
12
1000BASE-T & 1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)a
SSN1EGSH13
13
1000BASE-T & 1000BASE-LX (10 km)b
a: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces,
and the other interfaces on the board are 1000BASE-SX optical interfaces.
b: The port 6 and port 8 interfaces on the EGSH board are 1000BASE-T electrical interfaces,
and the other interfaces on the board are 1000BASE-LX optical interfaces.
The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over
the 1000BASE-LX optical interface.

22-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

Table 22-9 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the EGSH board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
TX9/RX9
TX10/RX10
10
TX11/RX11
11
TX12/RX12
12
TX13/RX13
13
TX14/RX14
14
TX15/RX15
15
TX16/RX16
16
NOTE
22.2.10 Board Protection

The EGSH board supports the distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) protection. The
DLAG protection is a board-level port protection technology.
Figure 22-8 shows the slot configuration for the working and protection EGSH boards in the
OptiX OSN 8800.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-8 Slot configuration for the working EGSH board of a DLAG protection group
FAN
EFI2
EF
I1
PIU
PIU
A S
U T
X G
A
U
X
IU20 IU21 IU22 IU23 IU24 IU25 IU26 IU27
S
T
G
PIU
PIU
STI
ATE
IU28 IU29 IU30 IU31 IU32 IU33 IU34 IU35 IU36
S
C
C
X
C
H
/
X
C
M
Fiber routing
X
C
H
/
X
C
M
Fiber routing
IU9 IU10
IU1 IU2
IU3 IU4 IU5
E
G
S
H
(A)
IU6
IU7 IU8
IU11 IU12 IU13 IU14 IU15 IU16 IU17 IU18 IU19
S
C
C
E
G
S
H
(B)
E
G
S
H
(A)
E
G
S
H
(B)
FAN
(A): Active
(B): Standby
In Table 22-10, the board in slot 5 protects the board in slot 3, and the board in slot 17 protects
the board in slot 14. DLAG protection is of board level and protects the services between the
ports configured in a protection group on the working and protection boards.
Table 22-10 Slot assignment for the EGSH board
22-20
Board
Protection Group 1
Protection Group 2
EGSH (protection board)
Slot 5
Slot 17
EGSH (working board)
Slot 3
Slot 14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.2.11 EGSH Parameters

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the EGSH board.
On the NMS user interface, Ethernet Interface of the EGSH board provides parameters
classified according to External Port and Internal Port. Regardless of an external port or
internal port, the parameter configuration window involves many tab pages. Table 22-11 lists
the tab pages in the parameter configuration window.
Table 22-11 Tabs of the parameter configuration windows for external port and internal port on
the EGSH board
Port
Tab
External Port
Basic Attributes
Flow Control
TAG Attributes
Network Attributes
Advanced Attributes
Internal Port
TAG Attributes
Network Attributes
Encapsulation/Mapping
LCAS
Bound Path
Advanced Attributes
Each parameter of the EGSH on each tab page is described as follows.

l
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page are listed in
Table 22-12.
Table 22-12 Parameters on the Basic Attributes tab page (external port)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Port
Displays all ports available

on the Ethernet board.

22-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Enable Port
Enabled, Disabled
The Enable Port parameter

determines whether to
enable a port. A port can
receive services if this
parameter is set to
Enabled but cannot receive
services if this parameter is
set to Disabled.
Default: Disabled
See D.8 Enable Port to

obtain the details.
Working Mode
Ports 2 and 4 support only

1000M Full-Duplex. The
other ports support both
1000M Full-Duplex and
Auto-Negotiation, but the
default modes of them are
set to Auto-Negotiation.
Set the Working Mode

parameter to set the
working mode of the
Ethernet port on the board.
The Working Mode
parameter indicates the
maximum transmission rate
and communication mode
of a port.
Maximum Frame Length
1518-9600
Specifies the maximum

frame length supported by
the Ethernet port.
Default: 1522
Port Physical Parameters
Displays the actual working

state of a port.
MAC Loopback
Outloop
The MAC Loopback

parameter specifies the
MAC loopback state at an
Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test
whether equipment runs
normally by creating a
looped path at the MAC
layer and then sending and
receiving signals over the
path.
See D.29 MAC Loopback
to obtain the details.
22-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
PHY Loopback
Outloop
The PHY Loopback

PHY loopback state at an
Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test
whether equipment runs
normally by creating a
looped path at the PHY
layer and then sending and
receiving signals over the
path.
See D.44 PHY Loopback
Physical Type
Displays the type of the

physical port.
Logic Type
SDH-OPPORT, SDHEPORT
Displays the type of the

logical port.
Default: SDH-OPPORT
l
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Flow Control tab page are listed in
Table 22-13.
Table 22-13 Parameters on the Flow Control tab page (external port)
Field
Value
Description
Port

Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric Flow Control,
Send Only, Receive Only
Non-Autonegotiation
Flow Control Mode is
selected when a port works
in non-autonegotiation
mode.
Default: Disable
See D.41 NonAutonegotiation Flow

Control Mode to obtain
the details.
Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode
Disabled, Enable
Symmetric Flow Control,
Enable Dissymmetric Flow
Control, Enable
Symmetric/Dissymmetric
Flow Control
Specifies the flow control

mode adopted when an
Ethernet port works in autonegotiation mode.
Default: Disabled
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
The parameters on the TAG tab page are listed in Table 22-14.
Table 22-14 Parameters on the TAG tab page
Field
Value
Description
Port
Displays the type of port,

either PORT or
VCTRUNk.
TAG
Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid
Specifies the type of a data

packet that a port processes.
This parameter is available
only when the network
attribute of the port is PE or
UNI.
Default: Tag Aware
Default VLAN ID
1-4095
Default: 1
The Default VLAN ID

parameter specifies a
default VLAN ID to a port
that transmits untagged
packets.
See D.7 Default VLAN ID
VLAN Priority
0-7
Default: 0
The VLAN Priority

priority of the default
VLAN ID of a port.
See D.56 VLAN Priority
Entry Detection
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The Entry Detection

parameter determines
whether a port detects
packets by tag identifier.
See D.11 Entry Detection
The parameters on the Network Attributes tab page are listed in Table 22-15.
Table 22-15 Parameters on the Network Attributes tab page
22-24
Field
Value
Description
Port
Displays the type of port,

either PORT or
VCTRUNk.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Port Attribute
UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware,

NNI
Specifies the position of the

port in the network.
Different port attributes
support different types of
packets.
Default: UNI
In the case of external ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed
in Table 22-16.
Table 22-16 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (external port)
Field
Value
Description
Port

Enabling Broadcast Packet

Suppression
Disabled, Enabled
The Enabling Broadcast

Packet Suppression
parameter determines
whether to suppress the
traffic of broadcast packets.
Default: Disabled
See D.9 Enabling

Broadcast Packet
Suppression to obtain the
details.
Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold
1-10
Default: 3
The Broadcast Packet

Suppression Threshold
percentage of broadcast
traffic in the bandwidth of a
port. The broadcast packets
beyond this percentage will
be discarded.
See D.3 Broadcast Packet
Suppression Threshold to
obtain the details.
Loop Detection
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Disabled
The Loop Detection

(Ethernet Port Attribute)
function of reporting the
self-loop alarms after one
of the following loopback
cases is detected.
See D.25 Loop Detection
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Loop Port Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
The Loop Port Shutdown

parameter is set to disable
the self-loop port after a
self-loop port is detected if
the loop port shutdown
function is enabled. After
the self-loop port is shut
down, the self-loop port
only transmits or receives
the self-loop detection
packets rather than any
other packets. If the port is
not a self-loop port, it starts
to work again.
Default: Enabled
See D.26 Loop Port

Shutdown (Ethernet Port
Attribute) to obtain the
details.
l
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page are
listed in Table 22-17.
Table 22-17 Parameters on the Encapsulation/Mapping tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
Port
Displays the VCTRUNK

ports.
Mapping Protocol
GFP
Specifies the mapping

protocol adopted by the
VCTRUNK port.
Default: GFP
Scramble
Unscrambled, Scrambling
mode[X43+1]
Default: Scrambling Mode
[X43+1]
Check Field Length
FCS32, No
Default: FCS32
FCS Calculated Bit

Sequence
22-26
Big endian, Little endian

Default: Big endian

Specifies whether to
scramble the payload area
of the encapsulation
protocol and which
scramble mode is adopted.
Specifies the length of the
CRC field of the mapping
protocol.
Specifies the sequence of
storing the bits in the CRC
field in the FCS frame of the
mapping protocol.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Extension Header Option
Yes, No
Specifies whether the GFP

encapsulation protocol
supports the extension
header.
Default: No
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the LCAS tab page are listed in Table
22-18.
Table 22-18 Parameters on the LCAS tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
Port

ports.
Enabling LCAS
Enabled, Disabled
The Enabling LCAS

parameter can increase or
decrease the SDH network
capacity without affecting
the service. The capacity is
automatically decreased if a
member fails, and is
automatically increased if
the member recovers.
Default: Disabled
See D.10 Enabling LCAS

LCAS Mode
Huawei Mode, Standard

Mode
Default: Huawei Mode
The LCAS Mode

sequence for the sink end to
respond to the MST and
Rs_Ack messages received
from the source end.
See D.23 LCAS Mode to
obtain the details.
Hold off Time(ms)
0, 2000-10000
Default: 2000
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Specifies the duration of the

HO (Hold Off) Procedure
timer of the LCAS protocol.
When the LCAS and other
network-level protection
schemes (such as the MSP
and SNCP) coexist, a
proper value of the hold-off
time can be set to delay the
LCAS switching.
22-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
WTR Time(s)
0-720
Specifies the duration of the

Wait To Restore (WTR)
Procedure timer of the
LCAS protocol. A proper
value of the WTR time can
be set to prevent an alarm
jitter from affecting the link
status.
Default: 300
Enabled, Disabled
TSD
Default: Disabled
The TSD (LCAS)

parameter specifies the B3
or BIP error status of a
VCTRUNK member. TSD
stands for trail signal
degrade. When this
parameter is set to
Enabled, and if a
VCTRUNK member has
excessive B3 or BIP bit
errors, the LCAS protocol
regards that this member
fails and deletes it from the
available members. If this
parameter is set to
Disabled, the LCAS
protocol does not monitor
the status of the B3 or BIP
bit errors of a VCTRUNK
member.
See D.54 TSD (LCAS) to
obtain the details.
Minimum Number of
Members in the Transmit
Direction
2-256
Default: 256
When the LCAS is enabled,

the LCAS_PLCT alarm is
reported if certain members
in the transmit direction fail
and the number of valid
members is smaller than a
certain value. The
Minimum Number of
Members in the Transmit
Direction parameter
specifies the certain number
of the valid members in the
transmit direction.
See D.35 Minimum
Number of Members in
the Transmit Direction to
obtain the details.
22-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Minimum Number of
Members in the Receive
Direction
2-256
Specifies the minimum

number of members in the
receive direction. When the
LCAS is enabled and the
number of valid members is
smaller than this value, an
alarm is reported
.
Default: 256
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Bound Path tab page are listed in Table
22-19.
Table 22-19 Parameters on the Bound Path tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
Configurable Ports
Displays all VCTRUNK

ports available on the
board.
Available Resources
Displays all resources

available.
Available Timeslots
Displays all timeslots

available.
VCTRUNCK Port
Displays the number of the

VCTRUNK port.
Level
VC4-xv, VC3-xv
Default: VC3-xv
Specifies the level of the

VCTRUNK bound path.
Bidirectional, Uplink,
Downlink
Specifies the direction of

the Ethernet service.
Service Direction
Default: Bidirectional
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Bound Path
Specifies the number of the

bound path, including the
VC4 path number and VC3
path number.
Number of Bound Paths
Displays the number of the

bound VCTRUNK ports.
The Used Channel
Displays the channels in

use.
In the case of internal ports, the parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page are listed
in Table 22-20.

22-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-20 Parameters on the Advanced Attributes tab page (internal port)
Field
Value
Description
Port

ports.
Loop Detection
Enabled, Disabled
The Loop Detection

function of reporting the
self-loop alarms after one
of the following loopback
cases is detected.
Default: Disabled
See D.25 Loop Detection

Loop Port Shutdown
Enabled, Disabled
Default: Enabled
The Loop Port Shutdown

parameter is set to disable
the self-loop port after a
self-loop port is detected if
the loop port shutdown
function is enabled. After
the self-loop port is shut
down, the self-loop port
only transmits or receives
the self-loop detection
packets rather than any
other packets. If the port is
not a self-loop port, it starts
to work again.
See D.26 Loop Port
Shutdown (Ethernet Port
Attribute) to obtain the
details.
22.2.12 Specifications of the EGSH

Specifications include optical specifications, electrical specifications, laser safety class,
mechanical specifications, and power consumption.
Table 22-21 lists the optical specifications of the EGSH board.
22-30

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-21 Optical specifications of the EGSH board

Item
Value
Type of optical
interface
1000BASE-LX (10 km)
1000BASE-SX (0.5 km)
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Multi-mode LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1270 to 1355
770 to 860
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
9 to 3
9.5 to 3.5
(dBm)
20
18
Minimum overload
(dBm)
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
Electrical Specifications
Table 22-22 lists the electrical specifications of the EGSH board.
Table 22-22 Electrical specifications of the EGSH board
Type of Interface
Code Pattern
1000BASE-T, RJ-45
4D-PAM5
NOTE
Only port 6 and port 8 of the EGSH board can work as the GE electrical interface.
Laser Safety Class

The laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1, indicating that the maximum output
optical power of each optical interface is less than 10 dBm (10 mW).
The mechanical specifications of the EGSH board are as follows:
l
Dimensions: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 266.7 mm (H)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Power Consumption
Typical power consumption at 25C (77F): 89.3 W
22.3 SF64
SF64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
Only one functional version of the SF64 board is available, that is, N4.
22.3.2 Application
The SF64 board is a line board. The SF64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to
transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64 board converts the received optical
signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SF64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
The SF64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
The SF64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
22.3.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel of
the SF64 board.
22.3.6 Jumpers and DIP Switches
The SF64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.3.7 Valid Slots
The SF64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SF64 board cannot
work normally.
22.3.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64
board. The characteristic code for the SF64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
22.3.10 SF64 Parameters
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64 board.
22.3.11 Specifications of the SF64
power consumption.

Only one functional version of the SF64 board is available, that is, N4.
22-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.3.2 Application
The SF64 board is a line board. The SF64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to
transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SF64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 22-9 shows the application of the SF64 board. The SF64 boards can form a ring network
or a chain network in the system.
Figure 22-9 Networking and application of the SF64 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SF64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
Table 22-23 Functions and features of the SF64 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
l Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface
l Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the Ue-64.2c,

Ue-64.2d, and Ue-64.2e. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply
with the standards defined by Huawei.
l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function.
l Supports the output of the DWDM standard wavelengths that comply with
ITU-T G.692 and can be directly connected to the WDM equipment.
22-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
l Supports the XFP optical module.
Service
processin
g
Supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, VC-4-4c

concatenation services, VC-4-16c concatenation services, and VC-4-64c
concatenation services.
Overhead
processin
g
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-64 signals.
l Supports the detection and query of information about the optical module.
l Provides the ALS function. The optical interface supports the setting of the
on/off state of a laser.
l Supports the transparent transmission and termination of the path overheads.

l Supports the setting and query of the J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
l Supports one channel of ECC communication.
l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission
of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Reports various alarms and performance events.
Specificat
ions of the
REG
Does not support the REG.
Protectio
n
schemes
l Supports the two-fiber ring MSP.

l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP.
l Supports the linear MSP.
l Supports the SNCP.
l Supports the SNCTP.
l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.
l Supports the fiber-shared MSP.
NOTE
Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64 board supports a maximum of two MSP
rings.
22-34

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Maintena
nce
features
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical interfaces.

l Supports inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths.
l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect services.
l Supports the query of the manufacturing information of the board.
l Supports the in-service loading of the FPGA.
l Supports the upgrade of the board software without affecting services.
l Supports the PRBS function.
l Supports the press-to-collect function in fault data collection.
Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829

The SF64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
Figure 22-10 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-10 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64 board
Backplane
622 MHz
622 MHz
PLL
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
DEMU
X
SPI
10.71
Gbit/s
E/O
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
converting
module
MUX
4x2.67G
bit/s
4x2.5G
bit/s
4x2.67G FEC 4x2.5G

bit/s
bit/s
622 MHz
PLL
Reference clock
K1 and K2
insertion/extraction
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
669 MHz
PLL
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V
PLL: phase-locked loop
SPI: SDH physical interface
RST: regenerator section

termination
MST: multiplex section termination MSA: multiplex section adaptation
HPT: higher order path termination -
SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
O/E Converting Module

l
In the receive direction, the module converts the received optical signals into electrical
signals.
In the transmit direction, the module converts the electrical signals into SDH optical signals
and sends the SDH optical signals to fibers for transmission.
Detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l
In the receive direction, the DEMUX part demultiplexes the high-rate electrical signals into
multiple parallel electrical signals and restores the clock signal at the same time.
In the transmit direction, the MUX part multiplexes the parallel electrical signals received
from the SDH overhead processing module into high-rate electrical signals.
SDH Overhead Processing Module

This module includes the RST, MST, MSA, and HPT sub-modules. This module provides the
inloop and outloop functions.
l
RST sub-module
In the receive direction, the RST sub-module terminates the RSOH. That is, the RST
sub-module detects the frame alignment bytes (A1 and A2), descrambles all the bytes
except the first line of the RSOH, restores and checks the J0 byte, and checks the B1
byte.
22-36

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
In the transmit direction, the RST sub-module generates the RSOH. That is, the RST
sub-module writes bytes such as A1, A2, and J0, calculates and writes the B1 byte, and
scrambles all the bytes except the first line of the RSOH.
l
MST sub-module
In the receive direction, the MST sub-module terminates the MSOH. That is, the MST
sub-module generates the MS_AIS alarm and detects the MS_RDI alarm after detecting
the K2 byte, and detects the MS_REI alarm and generates the B2_EXC alarm after
checking the B2 byte.
In the transmit direction, the MST sub-module generates the MSOH. That is, the MST
sub-module writes bytes such as E2, D4-D12, K1, K2, S1, and M1, and calculates and
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
In the receive direction, the MSA sub-module de-interleaves the AUG, divides an AUG
into N AU-4s, detects the AU_LOP alarm and the AU_AIS alarm, and performs pointer
justifications.
In the transmit direction, the MSA sub-module assembles the AUG and generates the
AU-4. N AU-4s are multiplexed into an AUG through byte interleaving.
HPT sub-module
In the receive direction, the HPT sub-module terminates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule detects the HP_REI alarm after checking the B3 byte, generates the HP_TIM
alarm and the HP_SLM alarm and detects the HP_RDI alarm after detecting the J1 and
C2 bytes, and generates the HP_UNEQ alarm after detecting the C2 byte.
In the transmit direction, the HPT sub-module generates the POH. That is, the HPT submodule writes bytes such as J1 and C2, and calculates and writes the B3 byte.
Logic and Control Module

l
Manages and configures the other modules of the board.
Performs inter-board communication through the internal Ethernet interface.
Traces the clock signal from the active and standby clock units.
Controls the laser.
Selects the clock signal and frame header signal from the active and standby clock units.
Controls the indicators on the board.
Power Module
It converts the 48 V/60 V power supply into the DC voltages that the modules of the board
require.
22.3.5 Front Panel

the SF64 board.

Figure 22-11 shows the front panel of the SF64 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-11 Front panel of the SF64 board
SF64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF64
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64 board. Table 22-24 lists the type
and function of the optical interface.
22-38

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-24 Type and function of the interface on the SF64 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC

The SF64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.3.7 Valid Slots

The SF64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SF64 board cannot
work normally.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SF64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12
IU27, and IU29IU36.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SF64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11
IU42, and IU45IU68.
22.3.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64

board. The characteristic code for the SF64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 22-25 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and
the type of optical interface.
Table 22-25 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SF64 board and the type of
optical interface
Board
Characteristic Code
Type of Optical Interface
SSN4SF6401M01
01M01
Fixed-wavelength optical
interface
SSN4SF6401
01
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and

Ue-64.2e


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-26 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
22.3.10 SF64 Parameters

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64 board.
Table 22-27 lists all the parameters of the SF64 board.
Table 22-27 Parameters of the SF64 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path
Displays all available VC3

paths.
Specifies the name of an

optical interface.
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled
The MSP Sharing parameter

determines whether multiple
multiplex section (MS)
protection groups can be
configured at the same
optical interface.
Default: Disabled
See D.37 MSP Sharing to

obtain the details.
Laser Switch
Off, On
Default: On
22-40

Specifies the laser state of the

line board. In general, the
parameter is set to On.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Laser Transmission Distance

(m)
2000, 10000, 15000, 40000,

80000
The Laser Transmission

Distance (m) parameter
indicates the valid distance
over which the laser sends a
signal. A line board uses
pluggable optical module and
the transmission distance is
determined by the type of the
pluggable optical module.
Default: -
See D.21 Laser

Transmission Distance (m)
Optical (Electrical) Interface
Loopback
Outloop
Laser-in-Position Status
In-Position, Not-in-Position
Default: -
Specifies the loopback state

of an SDH interface. In
general, this parameter is set
to Non-Loopback.
The Laser-in-Position
Status parameter indicates
whether the physical laser on
the line board is installed.
See D.22 Laser-in-Position
Status to obtain the details.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop
Specifies the VC4 loopback

state on the line board. In
to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
Hardware REG Enabled
Enabled, Disabled
The Hardware REG

Enabled parameter provides
an option for enabling or
disabling the hardware
regeneration function.
Default: Disabled
See D.18 Hardware REG

Enabled to obtain the details.
22.3.11 Specifications of the SF64

power consumption.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-28 lists the optical specifications of the SF64 board.
Table 22-28 Optical specifications of the SF64 board
Item
Value
Nominal bit
rate
10.709 Gbit/s
Application
codea
Ue-64.2c
Ue-64.2d
Ue-64.2e
OBU101 (-28
dBm to -31
dBm)+
OAU103b +
DCU03 (60) +
MR2
OBU101 (-31
dBm to -34 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
OBU101 (-34
dBm to -37 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)c
1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10.5
OBU101 (-37
dBm to -40 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
a: The numbers in the brackets indicate the corresponding parameter values. For example,
"OBU101 (-28 dBm to -31 dBm)" indicates that the optical power amplified by the OBU101
is -28 dBm to -31 dBm.
b: "OBU101 + OAU103" indicates that the specifications of the optical interface are measured
when the OBU101 and OAU103 are used.
c: The parameters are only for the optical modules. The parameters of the amplifier are not
provided.
Table 22-29 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64 board.
22-42

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-29 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
10.709 Gbit/s
Dispersion limit (km)
40
Mean launched optical power (dBm)
-1 to 2
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
-19
Minimum overload (dBm)
Maximum allowed dispersion (ps/

nm)
800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
10
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SF64 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
22.4 SF64A
SF64A: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
Only one functional version of the SF64A board is available, that is, N1.
22.4.2 Application
The SF64A optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64A board converts the received
optical signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side.
In addition, the SF64A board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
The SF64A board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
The SF64A board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
overhead processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
22.4.5 Front Panel
the SF64A board.
The SF64A board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.4.7 Valid Slots
The SF64A board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board does not
function.
22.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A
The characteristic code of the SF64A board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
22.4.10 SF64A Parameters
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64A board.
22.4.11 Specifications of the SF64A
power consumption.

Only one functional version of the SF64A board is available, that is, N1.
22.4.2 Application
The SF64A optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SF64A board converts the received
In addition, the SF64A board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 22-12 shows the application of the SF64A board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
Figure 22-12 Networking and application of the SF64A board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board
22-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The SF64A board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
Table 22-30 Functions and features of the SF64A board
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface

l Supports adjustable wavelengths in DWDM applications.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
Service
processin
g

Overhead
processin
g

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and
maintenance.
Specificat
ions of the
REG

22-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Protectio
n
schemes

l Supports the fiber-shared virtual trail protection
l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP.
NOTE
Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SF64A supports a maximum of two MSP
protection rings.
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
22-46

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The SF64A board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 22-13 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board.
Figure 22-13 Function modules and signal flow of the SF64A board
622MHz
622MHz PLL
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
10.71
Gbit/s
DEMUX
16x669
Mbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
MUX
16x669 FEC 16x622

Mbit/s
Mbit/s
O/E
converting
module
MUX/
DEMUX
module
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
622MHz PLL
Reference
clock
K1 and K2 insertion/
extraction
16x622
Mbit/s
Backplane
K1 and K2
Highspeed bus
RST MST MSA HPT
Highspeed bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
669MHzPLL
Frame header
Logic and
control module
+3.3V
Power
module
Communication
Fuse
Power
module
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect unit A
Cross-connect unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V

termination
HPT: higher order path termination IIC: inter-integrated circuit
The function modules are described as follows:

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

l
RST sub-module
byte.
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
22-48

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.4.5 Front Panel

the SF64A board.

Figure 22-14 shows the front panel of the SF64A board.
Figure 22-14 Front panel of the SF64A board
SF64A
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SF64A
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SF64A board. Table 22-31 lists the type
Table 22-31 Type and function of the optical interface on the SF64A board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC

The SF64A board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.4.7 Valid Slots

The SF64A board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board does not
function.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SF64A board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SF64A board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
22.4.8 Characteristic Code for the SF64A

The characteristic code of the SF64A board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SF64A board.
Table 22-32 Relationship between the characteristic code and optical interface type of the
SF64A board
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN1SF64A01
01
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d,
Ue-64.2e

22-50

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

Table 22-33 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SF64A board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
22.4.10 SF64A Parameters

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SF64A board.
Table 22-34 lists all the parameters of the SF64A board.
Table 22-34 Parameters of the SF64A board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.

optical interface.
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Laser Switch
Off, On
Default: On
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


22-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description

(m)
40000
Specifies the valid distance

over which a laser transmits
optical signals.
Default: 40000
See D.21 Laser

Loopback
Outloop
Default: -

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
Enabled, Disabled
The Hardware REG

Default: Disabled

22.4.11 Specifications of the SF64A

power consumption.
Table 22-35 lists the optical specifications of the SF64A board.
22-52

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-35 Optical specifications of the SF64A board

Item
Value
Nominal bit
rate
10.709 Gbit/s
Application
codea
Ue-64.2c
Ue-64.2d
Ue-64.2e
OBU101 (-29
dBm to -26
dBm) +
OAU103b +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
OBU103 (-28
dBm to -25 dBm)
+ OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
OBU101 (-34.6
dBm to -32 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)c
1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10.5
OBU101 (-37.9
dBm to -34.9
dBm) + CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
provided.
Table 22-36 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SF64A board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
10.709 Gbit/s
40
3 to 2
19

nm)
800
13.5
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SF64A board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
22.5 SFD64
SFD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board with the FEC function
Only one functional version of the SFD64 board is available, that is, N4.
22.5.2 Application
The SFD64 board is a line board. The SFD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SFD64 board converts the received
In addition, the SFD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
The SFD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
22-54

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
The SFD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
overhead processing module, logic and control module, and power module.
22.5.5 Front Panel
the SFD64 board.
The SFD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.5.7 Valid Slots
The SFD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SFD64 board
cannot work normally.
22.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64
board. The characteristic code for the SFD64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
22.5.10 SFD64 Parameters
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SFD64 board.
22.5.11 Specifications of the SFD64
power consumption.

Only one functional version of the SFD64 board is available, that is, N4.
22.5.2 Application
The SFD64 board is a line board. The SFD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
to transmit and receive STM-64 FEC optical signals. The SFD64 board converts the received
In addition, the SFD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 22-15 shows the application of the SFD64 board. The SFD64 boards can form a ring
network or a chain network in the system.
Figure 22-15 Networking and application of the SFD64 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The SFD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals and processes overhead
bytes.
Table 22-37 Functions and features of the SFD64 board
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
l Transmits and receives 2xSTM-64 FEC optical signals.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface

Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
Service
processin
g

Overhead
processin
g
l Supports configuration of the normal FEC or enhanced FEC function.
l Supports the output of the standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with

l Supports two channels of ECC communication.
22-56
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Specificat
ions of the
REG

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Protectio
n
schemes

NOTE
Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of
K bytes. One SFD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings.
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-57
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The SFD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 22-16 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board.
Figure 22-16 Function modules and signal flow of the SFD64 board
Backplane
622 MHz
622 MHz
PLL
10.71
Gbit/s
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
DEMU
X
SPI
10.71
Gbit/s
E/O
10.71
Gbit/s
O/E
converting
module
MUX
4x2.67G
bit/s
4x2.5G
bit/s
4x2.67G FEC 4x2.5G

bit/s
bit/s
622 MHz
PLL
Reference clock
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
669 MHz
PLL
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

termination

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

22-58

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
RST sub-module
byte.
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
22.5.5 Front Panel

the SFD64 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-59
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

Figure 22-17 shows the front panel of the SFD64 board.
Figure 22-17 Front panel of the SFD64 board
SFD64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
SFD64
Indicators
22-60

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SFD64 board. Table 22-38 lists the type
Table 22-38 Type and function of the interface on the SFD64 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX2
LC
TX1TX2
LC

The SFD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.5.7 Valid Slots

The SFD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SFD64 board
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SFD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SFD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
22.5.8 Characteristic Code for the SFD64

board. The characteristic code for the SFD64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 22-39 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and
Table 22-39 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SFD64 board and the type of
optical interface
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SFD6401M01
01M01
interface
SSN4SFD6401
01
Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, and

Ue-64.2e

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-61
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

Table 22-40 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SFD64 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
NOTE
22.5.10 SFD64 Parameters

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SFD64 board.
Table 22-41 lists all the parameters of the SFD64 board.
Table 22-41 Parameters of the SFD64 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.

optical interface.
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Laser Switch
Off, On
Default: On
22-62


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description

(m)
2000, 10000, 15000, 40000,

80000

Default: -
See D.21 Laser

Loopback
Outloop
Default: -

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
22.5.11 Specifications of the SFD64

power consumption.
Table 22-42 lists the optical specifications of the SFD64 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-63
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-42 Optical specifications of the SFD64 board

Item
Value
Nominal bit
rate
10.709Gbit/s
Application
codea
Ue-64.2c
Ue-64.2d
Ue-64.2e
OBU101 (-28
dBm to -31
dBm)+
OAU103b +
DCU03 (60) +
MR2
OBU101 (-31
dBm to -34 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
OBU101 (-34
dBm to -37 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
MR2
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1550.12
Launched
optical
power range
(dBm)c
1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-19
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
10.5
OBU101 (-37
dBm to -40 dBm)
+ CRPC +
OAU103 +
DCU03 (60) +
DCU04 (80) +
DCU08 (10) +
MR2
provided.
Table 22-43 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SFD64 board.
22-64

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
10.709 Gbit/s
40
-1 to 2
-19

nm)
800
10
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SFD64 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
22.6 SL64
SL64: 1xSTM-64 optical interface board
Only one functional version of the SL64 board is available, that is, N4.
22.6.2 Application
The SL64 board is a line board. The SL64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to
transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SL64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SL64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
The SL64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-65
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
The SL64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
processing module, logic and control module, DC/DC converter, and other modules.
22.6.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label
on the front panel of the SL64 board.
The SL64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.6.7 Valid Slots
The SL64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board does not
function.
22.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64
board. The characteristic code for the SL64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
22.6.10 SL64 Parameters
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SL64 board.
22.6.11 Specifications of the SL64
power consumption.

Only one functional version of the SL64 board is available, that is, N4.
22.6.2 Application
The SL64 board is a line board. The SL64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment to
transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SL64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SL64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 22-18 shows the application of the SL64 board. The SL64 boards can form a ring network
or a chain network in the system.
Figure 22-18 Networking and application of the SL64 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board
22-66

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The SL64 board receives and transmits 1xSTM-64 optical signals and processes overhead bytes.
Table 22-44 Functions and features of the SL64 board
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Transmits and receives 1xSTM-64 optical signals.
Specificati
ons of the
optical
interface
l The N4SL64 board supports the I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, P1L1-2D2, and
V-64.2b optical interfaces. The characteristics of the optical interfaces of the
I-64.1, S-64.2b, Le-64.2, and V-64.2b types comply with ITU-T G.691. The
characteristics of the optical interface of the P1L1-2D2 type comply with
ITU-T G.959.
Specificati
ons of the
optical
module
Service
processing

Overhead
processing

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Alarms
and
performan
ce events
Specificati
ons of the
REG

22-67
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
Protection
schemes

NOTE
Supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SL64 supports a maximum of two MSP rings.
Maintenan
ce features

l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Protocol
or
standard
complianc
e

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
22-68

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The SL64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH overhead
Figure 22-19 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board.
Figure 22-19 Function modules and signal flow of the SL64 board
Backplane
622 MHz
PLL
622 MHz
9.953
Gbit/s
O/E
9.953
Gbit/s
DEMU
X
16x622
Mbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
MUX
16x622
Mbit/s
SPI
9.953
Gbit/s
E/O
O/E
converting
module
MUX/
DEMUX
Reference clock
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

termination

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-69
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

l
RST sub-module
byte.
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
22-70

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, a bar code, a laser safety class label, and an APD alarm label
on the front panel of the SL64 board.

Figure 22-20 shows the front panel of the SL64 board.
Figure 22-20 Appearance of the front panel of the SL64 board
SL64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SL64
Indicators
l
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-71
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Interfaces
There is one optical interface on the front panel of the SL64 board. Table 22-45 lists the type
Table 22-45 Type and function of the interface on the SL64 board
Interface
Type
Function
IN
LC
OUT
LC

The SL64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.6.7 Valid Slots

The SL64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board does not
function.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SL64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU12
IU27, and IU29IU36.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SL64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8, IU11
IU42, and IU45IU68.
22.6.8 Characteristic Code for the SL64

board. The characteristic code for the SL64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 22-46 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and
Table 22-46 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SL64 board and the type of
optical interface
22-72
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SL6401M01
01M01
interface
SSN4SL6401
01
I-64.1
SSN4SL6402
02
S-64.2b
SSN4SL6403
03
P1L1-2D2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SL6404
04
V-64.2b
SSN4SL6405
05
Le-64.2


Table 22-47 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SL64 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN/OUT
NOTE
22.6.10 SL64 Parameters

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SL64 board.
Table 22-48 lists all the parameters of the SL64 board.
Table 22-48 Parameters of the SL64 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.

optical interface.

22-73
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Off, On
Laser Switch
Default: On
(m)
2000, 10000, 15000, 40000,

80000
Default: -

See D.21 Laser

Loopback
Outloop
Default: -

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel
22-74


channels.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Enabled, Disabled
The Hardware REG

Default: Disabled

22.6.11 Specifications of the SL64

power consumption.
Table 22-49 lists the optical specifications of the SL64 board.
Table 22-49 Optical specifications of the SL64 board
Item
Value
Nominal bit
rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application
code
I-64.1
S-64.2b
P1L1-2D2
Le-64.2
V-64.2b
(OBU101 +
OBU101 +
DCU +
MR2)a
Transmissio
n distance
(km)
0 to 2
2 to 40
40 to 80
35 to 60
80 to 120
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
1530 to 1565
1550.12
Mean
launched
optical
power (dBm)
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
0 to +4
+2 to +4
-1 to 2
(without the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
16 (with the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-75
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Item
Value
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-11
-14
-24
-21
-17 (without
the OBU,
DCU, or
MR2)
-26 (with the
OBU, DCU,
or MR2)
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1
-1
-7
-8
-1
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
10.5
a: "OBU101 + OBU101 + DCU + MR2" indicates that the specifications of the V-64.2b optical
interface are measured when the OBU, DCU, and MR2 are used.
Table 22-50 lists the specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the SL64 board.
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
40
-1 to 2
-17
-1

nm)
800
10.5
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SL64 board are as follows:
l
22-76

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Power Consumption
22.7 SLD64
SLD64: 2xSTM-64 optical interface board
Only one functional version of the SLD64 board is available, that is, N4.
22.7.2 Application
The SLD64 board is a line board. The SLD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SLD64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
The SLD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
and performs the MSP protection.
The SLD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
22.7.5 Front Panel
the SLD64 board.
The SLD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.7.7 Valid Slots
The SLD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLD64 board
22.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64
board. The characteristic code for the SLD64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
22.7.10 SLD64 Parameters
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLD64 board.
22.7.11 Specifications of the SLD64
power consumption.

Only one functional version of the SLD64 board is available, that is, N4.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-77
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.7.2 Application
The SLD64 board is a line board. The SLD64 board can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
to transmit and receive STM-64 optical signals. The SLD64 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLD64 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 22-21 shows the application of the SLD64 board. The SLD64 boards can form a ring
Figure 22-21 Networking and application of the SLD64 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

The SLD64 board receives and transmits 2xSTM-64 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
Table 22-51 Functions and features of the SLD64 board
22-78
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and
S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
Service
processin
g

Overhead
processin
g

l Supports two channels of ECC communication.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Specificat
ions of the
REG
Protectio
n
schemes

NOTE
Supports processes four sets of K bytes. A single optical interface can process two sets of
K bytes. One SLD64 board supports a maximum of four MSP rings
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-79
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829

The SLD64 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 22-22 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board.
22-80

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-22 Function modules and signal flow of the SLD64 board
Backplane
622 MHz
9.953
Gbit/s
SPI 9.953
E/O
Gbit/s
DEMUX 16x622
Mbit/s
. .
. .
9.953
Gbit/s
O/E
O/E
SPI
E/
O
O/E
converting
module
9.953
Gbit/s
16x622
Mbit/s
MUX
622 MHz
PLL
Reference clock
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Power
module
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

termination

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

l
RST sub-module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-81
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
byte.
l
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
22.7.5 Front Panel

the SLD64 board.

Figure 22-23 shows the front panel of the SLD64 board.
22-82

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-23 Front panel of the SLD64 board
SLD64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
SLD64
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are two optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLD64 board. Table 22-52 lists the
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-83
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-52 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLD64 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX2
LC
TX1TX2
LC

The SLD64 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.7.7 Valid Slots

The SLD64 board must be installed in a valid slot in the subrack. Otherwise, the SLD64 board
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SLD64 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
22.7.8 Characteristic Code for the SLD64

board. The characteristic code for the SLD64 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 22-53 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and
Table 22-53 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLD64 board and the type of
optical interface
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SLD6401
01
I-64.1
SSN4SLD6402
02
S-64.2b


22-84

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-54 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLD64 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
NOTE
22.7.10 SLD64 Parameters

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLD64 board.
Table 22-55 lists all the parameters of the SLD64 board.
Table 22-55 Parameters of the SLD64 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.

optical interface.
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Laser Switch
Off, On
Default: On
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


22-85
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description

(m)
2000, 10000, 15000, 40000,

80000

Default: -
See D.21 Laser

Loopback
Outloop
Default: -

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
22.7.11 Specifications of the SLD64

power consumption.
Table 22-56 lists the optical specifications of the SLD64 board.
22-86

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-56 Optical specifications of the SLD64 board

Item
Value
Nominal bit
rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application
code
I-64.1
S-64.2b
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
Operating
wavelength
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
Mean
launched
optical power
(dBm)
-6 to -1
-1 to +2
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
-11
-14
Minimum
overload
(dBm)
-1
-1
Minimum
extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLD64 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-87
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.8 SLH41
SLH41: 16xSTM-4/STM-1 optical interface board
Only one functional version of the SLH41 board is available, that is, N3.
22.8.2 Application
The SLH41 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-1/STM-4 optical signals. The SLH41 board converts the received
In addition, the SLH41 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side
into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
The SLH41 board transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals or 16xSTM-1
electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, extracts
and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
The SLH41 board consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead
22.8.5 Front Panel
the SLH41 board.
The SLH41 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.8.7 Valid Slots
The SLH41 board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on a subrack.
22.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41
The characteristic code of the SLH41 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
22.8.10 SLH41 Parameters
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLH41 board.
22.8.11 Specifications of the SLH41
power consumption.

Only one functional version of the SLH41 board is available, that is, N3.
22.8.2 Application
The SLH41 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-1/STM-4 optical signals. The SLH41 board converts the received
22-88

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
In addition, the SLH41 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side
into optical signals and transmits the optical signals.
Figure 22-24 shows the application of the SLH41 board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
Figure 22-24 Networking and application of the SLH41 board
NE1
NE2
SNCP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect and timing board

The SLH41 board transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals or 16xSTM-1
electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for the STM-1 or STM-4 optical signals, extracts
and inserts overhead bytes, and generates alarm signals on the line.
Table 22-57 Functions and features of the SLH41 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Function
and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Transmits and receives 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical signals, or 16xSTM-1

electrical signals.

22-89
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
Specificati
ons of the
optical
interface
l The 16xSTM-1/STM-4 optical module can be used.

When the STM-1 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the
optical interfaces of the S-1.1 type. The characteristics of the optical
interfaces of the S-1.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957.
When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the
optical interface of the S-4.1 type. The characteristics of the optical
interface of the S-4.1 type comply with ITU-T G.957.
The optical interfaces are adaptive. The SLH41 board supports hybrid
configuration of STM-1/STM-4 optical interfaces.
l The 16xSTM-1 electrical module can be used.
Specificati
ons of the
optical
module
l Supports the SFP optical/electrical module.
Service
processing
l When the STM-1 optical/electrical module is used, the SLH41 board

supports the VC-12 services, VC-3 services, and VC-4 services.
l When the STM-4 optical module is used, the SLH41 board supports the
VC-12 services, VC-3 services, VC-4 services, and VC-4-4c concatenation
services.
Overhead
processing
l Processes the section overheads of the STM-1 signals or STM-4 signals.

l Supports sixteen channels of ECC communication. Port 1 to port 8 support
the ECC communication by using bytes D1D12. Port 9 to port 16 support
the ECC communication by using bytes D4D12.
l Only interfaces 1-4 supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature
and transmission of the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms
and
performan
ce events

Protection
schemes

l Supports the four-fiber ring MSP in the case of STM-1 interfaces.
l Supports the two-fiber/four-fiber ring MSP in the case of STM-4 interfaces.
22-90

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Function
and
Feature
Description
Maintenan
ce features
l Supports inloops and outloops at optical/electrical interfaces.

l Supports warm resets and cold resets. The warm reset does not affect
services.
Protocol or
standard
complianc
e

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829

The SLH41 board consists of the O/E converting module, CDR module, SDH overhead
This topic describes the working principle and signal flow of the SLH41 board by describing
how to process STM-1/STM-4 signals.
Figure 22-25 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-91
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-25 Function modules and signal flow of the SLH41 board
155MHz PLL
STM-1/
STM-4
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
CDR
O/E
E/O
. .
. .
. .
. .
STM-1/
STM-4
S
P
I
CDR
Reference Backplane
clock
Clock unit
extraction
K1 and K2
RST MST MSA HPT
Highspeed bus
SCC unit
Highspeed bus
DCC
SCC unit
SDH overhead
processing module
O/E
converting
module
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Clock unit
Communication
SCC unit
Fuse
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V

termination
CDR: clock and data recovery
The function modules of the STM-1/STM-4 units are described as follows:

l
signals.
CDR Module
This module restores the data signal and the clock signal.

l
RST sub-module
byte.
22-92

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
l
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
22.8.5 Front Panel

the SLH41 board.

Figure 22-26 shows the front panel of the SLH41 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-93
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-26 Front panel of the SLH41 board (considering optical interfaces as an example)
SM SFP WORK WITH
G.657B FIBER ONLY
G.657B
SLH41
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
RX 1
2 TX
TX 15
16 RX
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are 16 optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLH41 board, and "16 SFP" is
silkscreened under the silkscreening for the indicator on the front panel.
22-94

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-58 lists the type and function of each optical interface.
Table 22-58 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLH41 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX16
LC
TX1TX16
LC
NOTE
The G.657A2 fiber jumper rather than the G.652D fiber jumper is used if an optical attenuator is inserted
into the transmit port. Otherwise, the cabinet door cannot be closed. Figure 22-27 shows the G.657A2
fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper.
Figure 22-27 G.657A2 fiber jumper and G.652D fiber jumper

G.652D fiber jumper
58.25
50.75
G.657A2 fiber jumper
50.5
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-95
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The SLH41 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.8.7 Valid Slots

The SLH41 board occupies one slot and must be installed in the valid slot on a subrack.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLH41 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SLH41 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
22.8.8 Characteristic Code for the SLH41

The characteristic code of the SLH41 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SLH41 board.
SLH41 board
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN3SLH4102
02
8S-1.1, 8S-4.1
SSN3SLH4103
03
16S-1.1
SSN3SLH4105
05
16S-4.1
The G.657A2 fiber jumper is required because the single-mode optical module is used over
the interface.


Table 22-60 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLH41 board displayed on the NM
22-96
Interface on the NM
TX1/RX1
1
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Interface on the NM
TX2/RX2
TX3/RX3
TX4/RX4
TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6
TX7/RX7
TX8/RX8
TX9/RX9
TX10/RX10
10
TX11/RX11
11
TX12/RX12
12
TX13/RX13
13
TX14/RX14
14
TX15/RX15
15
TX16/RX16
16
NOTE
22.8.10 SLH41 Parameters

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLH41 board.
Table 22-61 lists all the parameters of the SLH41 board.
Table 22-61 Parameters of the SLH41 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.

optical interface.

22-97
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
Laser Switch
Off, On

Default: On
(m)
2000, 10000, 15000, 40000,

80000
Default: -

See D.21 Laser

Loopback
Outloop
Default: -

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.
22.8.11 Specifications of the SLH41

power consumption.
Table 22-62 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module
is used.
22-98

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-62 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 optical module is used
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
S-1.1
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 15
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1261 to 1360
Launched optical power range (dBm)
15 to 8
28
Overload optical power (dBm)
8.2
Table 22-63 lists the optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module
is used.
Table 22-63 Optical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-4 optical module is used
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
622080 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
S-4.1
Transmission distance (km)
0 to 15
Operating wavelength range (nm)
1274 to 1356
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm)
15 to 8
28
8.2
Electrical Specifications
Table 22-64 lists the electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical
module is used.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-99
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-64 Electrical specifications of the SLH41 board when the STM-1 electrical module is
used
Item
Value
Type of interface
139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
Code pattern
CMI
Bit rate of the output signal
Compliant with G.703
Permitted frequency deviation on the input

interface
Permitted attenuation on the input interface
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLH41 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
22.9 SLO16
SLO16: 8xSTM-16 optical interface board
Only one functional version of the SLO16 board is available, that is, N4.
22.9.2 Application
The SLO16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLO16 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLO16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
The SLO16 board receives and transmits 8xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
The SLO16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
22-100

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.9.5 Front Panel

the SLO16 board.
The SLO16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.9.7 Valid Slots
The SLO16 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board does not
function.
22.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16
The characteristic code of the SLO16 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
22.9.10 SLO16 Parameters
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLO16 board.
22.9.11 Specifications of the SLO16
power consumption.

Only one functional version of the SLO16 board is available, that is, N4.
22.9.2 Application
The SLO16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLO16 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLO16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
Figure 22-28 shows the application of the SLO16 board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
Figure 22-28 Networking and application of the SLO16 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-101
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The SLO16 board receives and transmits 8xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
Table 22-65 Functions and features of the SLO16 board
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specifica
tions of
the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITUT G.957.
Specifica
tions of
the
optical
module
l Supports the SFP optical module.
Service
processin
g

concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Overhead
processin
g
l Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as

transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes.
l Supports eight channels of ECC communication.
l Support the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of
the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
22-102
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

Specifica
tions of
the REG

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Protectio
n
schemes

l Supports the SNCTP
NOTE
One SLO16 board supports a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-103
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

The SLO16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
Figure 22-29 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board by describing
how to process 1xSTM-16 signals.
Figure 22-29 Function modules and signal flow of the SLO16 board
155MHz
O/E
2.488
Gbit/s
E/O
S
P
I
DEMUX
2.488
Gbit/s
MUX
16x155
Mbit/s
extraction
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
16x155
Mbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
O/E
converting
module
Backplane
K1 and K2
Highspeed bus
. .
. .
2.488
Gbit/s
155MHzPLL
Reference
clock
Highspeed bus
DCC
MUX/
DEMUX
module
SDH overhead
processing module
Frame header
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3V
Power
module
Power
module
Communication
Fuse
Clock unit
SCC unit
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V

termination

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
22-104

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit

l
RST sub-module
byte.
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-105
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.9.5 Front Panel

the SLO16 board.

Figure 22-30 shows the front panel of the SLO16 board.
Figure 22-30 Front panel of the SLO16 board
SLO16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2 RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
TX5
RX5
TX6
RX6
TX7
RX7
TX8
RX8
SLO16
Indicators
22-106

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Interfaces
There are eight optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLO16 board. Table 22-66 lists the
Table 22-66 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLO16 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX8
LC
TX1TX8
LC

The SLO16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.9.7 Valid Slots

The SLO16 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board does not
function.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLO16 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subrack, the SLO16 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,
22.9.8 Characteristic Code for the SLO16

The characteristic code of the SLO16 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SLO16 board.
SLO16 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SLO1601
01
I-16
SSN4SLO1602
02
S-16.1
SSN4SLO1603
03
L-16.1
SSN4SLO1604
04
L-16.2

22-107
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit


Table 22-68 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLO16 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
IN3/OUT3
IN4/OUT4
IN5/OUT5
IN6/OUT6
IN7/OUT7
IN8/OUT8
NOTE
22.9.10 SLO16 Parameters

This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLO16 board.
Table 22-69 lists all the parameters of the SLO16 board.
Table 22-69 Parameters of the SLO16 board
22-108
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.

optical interface.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Off, On
Laser Switch
Default: On
(m)
2000, 10000, 15000, 40000,

80000
Default: -

See D.21 Laser

Loopback
Outloop
Default: -

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


channels.
22-109
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.9.11 Specifications of the SLO16

power consumption.
Table 22-70 lists the optical specifications of the SLO16 board.
Table 22-70 Optical specifications of the SLO16 board
Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Application code
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
25 to 40
50 to 80
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
10 to 3
5 to 0
2 to +3
2 to +3
(dBm)
18
18
27
28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLO16 board are as follows:
22-110

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Power Consumption
22.10 SLQ16
SLQ16: 4xSTM-16 optical interface board
Only one functional version of the SLQ16 board is available, that is, N4.
22.10.2 Application
The SLQ16 optical interface board is an OCS line board. It can be used in the OptiX OSN 8800
to receive and transmit STM-16 optical signals. The SLQ16 board converts the received optical
addition, the SLQ16 board converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into
The SLQ16 board receives and transmits 4xSTM-16 optical signals, processes overhead bytes,
and performs the MSP.
The SLQ16 board consists of the O/E converting module, MUX/DEMUX module, SDH
22.10.5 Front Panel
the SLQ16 board.
The SLQ16 board does not have any jumpers or DIP switches that are used for board settings.
22.10.7 Valid Slots
The slots valid for the SLQ16 board vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
22.10.8 Characteristic Code for the SLQ16
board. The characteristic code for the SLQ16 board indicates the type of optical interface.
22.10.10 SLQ16 Parameters
This topic describes all the parameters, including the read-only parameters, of the SLQ16 board.
22.10.11 Specifications of the SLQ16
power consumption.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-111
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.10.2 Application
Figure 22-31 shows the application of the SLQ16 board. The SLQ16 boards can form a ring
Figure 22-31 Networking and application of the SLQ16 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

and performs the MSP.
Table 22-71 Functions and features of the SLQ16 board
22-112
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specifica
tions of
the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-16, S-16.1,
L-16.1, and L-16.2. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITUT G.957.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Specifica
tions of
the
optical
module
l Supports the SFP optical module.
Service
processin
g

concatenation services, and VC-4-16c concatenation services.
Overhead
processin
g
l Supports the configuration of the D1D12, E1, F1, and X1 bytes as

transparent transmission bytes or into other unused overheads bytes.
l Supports four channels of ECC communication.
l Supports the IEEE 1588 V2 time synchronization feature and transmission of
the time information by using the section overhead bytes.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events

Specifica
tions of
the REG
Protectio
n
schemes

NOTE
One SLQ16 board supports a maximum of four MSP protection rings.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-113
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829

Figure 22-32 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board by describing
how to process 1xSTM-16 signals.
22-114

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-32 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ16 board
Backplane
155 MHz
2.488
Gbit/s
O/E SP
E/O I
2.488
Gbit/s
DEMU 16x155
X
Mbit/s
. .
. .
2.488 O/E
SP
Gbit/s
E/O I
2.488
Gbit/s
16x155
Mbit/s
MUX
Reference clock
K1 and K2
K1 and K2
High-speed
bus
RST MST MSA HPT
High-speed
bus
DCC
SDH overhead
processing module
MUX/
DEMUX
O/E
converting
module
155 MHz
PLL
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3 V
Power
module
Power
module
Frame header
Communication
Fuse
Clock unit
SCC unit
Cross-connect
unit A
Cross-connect
unit B
SCC unit
Clock unit
SCC unit
-48 V/-60 V
-48 V/-60 V

termination

l
signals.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

l
RST sub-module
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-115
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
byte.
l
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
22.10.5 Front Panel

the SLQ16 board.

Figure 22-33 shows the front panel of the N4SLQ16 board.
22-116

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-33 Front panel of the N4SLQ16 board
SLQ16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
SLQ16
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ16 board. Table 22-72 lists the
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-117
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-72 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ16 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX4
LC
TX1TX4
LC

22.10.7 Valid Slots

The slots valid for the SLQ16 board vary with the cross-connect capacity of the subrack.
On the OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subrack, the SLQ16 board can be installed in any of IU1IU8,

board. The characteristic code for the SLQ16 board indicates the type of optical interface.
Table 22-73 provides the relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and
Table 22-73 Relationship between the characteristic code for the SLQ16 board and the type of
optical interface
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SLQ1601
01
I-16
SSN4SLQ1602
02
S-16.1
SSN4SLQ1603
03
L-16.1
SSN4SLQ1604
04
L-16.2


22-118

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-74 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ16 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
IN1/OUT1
IN2/OUT2
IN3/OUT3
IN4/OUT4
NOTE

Table 22-75 lists all the parameters of the SLQ16 board.
Table 22-75 Parameters of the SLQ16 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.

optical interface.
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Laser Switch
Off, On
Default: On
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)


22-119
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description

(m)
2000, 10000, 15000, 40000,

80000

Default: -
See D.21 Laser

Loopback
Outloop
Default: -

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.

power consumption.
Table 22-76 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ16 board.
22-120

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-76 Optical specifications of the SLQ16 board

Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Application code
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
25 to 40
50 to 80
Type of fiber
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode
LC
Single-mode LC
Single-mode
LC
Operating
wavelength range
(nm)
1266 to 1360
1260 to 1360
1280 to 1335
1500 to 1580
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
-10 to -3
-5 to 0
-2 to +3
-2 to +3
(dBm)
-18
-18
-27
-28
Minimum overload
(dBm)
-3
-9
-9
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLQ16 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
22.11 SLQ64
SLQ64: 4xSTM-64 line interface board
22.11.2 Application
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-121
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
22.11.5 Front Panel
There are indicators, interfaces, the bar code, and the laser safety class label on the front panel
of the SLQ64 board.
22.11.7 Valid Slots
The SLQ64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board does not
function.
The characteristic code of the SLQ64 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
power consumption.

22.11.2 Application
Figure 22-34 shows the application of the SLQ64 board. The board supports the ring and chain
networking modes.
22-122

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-34 Networking and application of the SLQ64 board
NE1
NE2
MSP ring
NE4
NE3
Service flow
OCS line board
Cross-connect board

Table 22-77 Functions and features of the SLQ64 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Basic
functions
Specificat
ions of the
optical
interface
Supports different types of standard optical interfaces, namely, the I-64.1 and
S-64.2b. The characteristics of the optical interfaces comply with ITU-T G.691.
Specificat
ions of the
optical
module
Service
processin
g


22-123
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Functio
n and
Feature
Description
Overhead
processin
g

l Supports four channels of ECC communication.
Alarms
and
performa
nce
events
Reports various alarms and performance events to facilitate the management and
maintenance.
Specificat
ions of the
REG
Protectio
n
schemes

l Supports the SNCP
l Supports the optical-path-shared MSP.
NOTE
A single optical interface supports processes two sets of K bytes. One SLQ64 board supports
a maximum of eight MSP protection rings.
Maintena
nce
features

Protocol
or
standard
complian
ce
22-124

comply
ITU-T G.774.7

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Functio
n and
Feature
22 OCS System Unit
Description

ITU-T G.707
ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.783
ITU-T G.774.1
ITU-T G.774.2
ITU-T G.774.3
ITU-T G.774.4
ITU-T G.774.5
ITU-T G.774.6
ITU-T G.774.9
ITU-T G.774.10
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.825
ITU-T G.829

Figure 22-35 shows the function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-125
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-35 Function modules and signal flow of the SLQ64 board
622MHz
9.953
Gbit/s
9.953
Gbit/s
O/E
E/O
S
P
I
9.953
Gbit/s
DEMUX
9.953
Gbit/s
MUX
O/E
converting
module
622MHzPLL
Reference
clock
16x622
Mbit/s
extraction
16x622
Mbit/s
RST MST MSA HPT
Backplane
K1 and K2
Highspeed bus
Highspeed bus
DCC
MUX/
DEMUX
module
SDH overhead
processing module
Frame header
IIC
LOS
Laser shutdown
Logic and
control module
+3.3V
Power
module
Power
module
Clock unit
SCC unit
SCC unit
Clock unit
Communication
SCC unit
Fuse
-48V/-60V
-48V/-60V

termination

l
signals.
The SPI detects the R_LOS alarm and provides the function of shutting down the laser.
MUX/DEMUX Module
l

l
RST sub-module
22-126

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
byte.
l
MST sub-module
writes the B2 byte.
MSA sub-module
justifications.
HPT sub-module

l
Controls the laser.
Power Module
require.
22.11.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, interfaces, the bar code, and the laser safety class label on the front panel
of the SLQ64 board.

Figure 22-36 shows the front panel of the SLQ64 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-127
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Figure 22-36 Front panel of the SLQ64 board
SLQ64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
TX3
RX3
TX4
RX4
SLQ64
Indicators
l
Interfaces
There are four optical interfaces on the front panel of the SLQ64 board. Table 22-78 lists the
22-128

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-78 Types and functions of the interfaces on the SLQ64 board
Interface
Type
Function
RX1RX4
LC
TX1TX4
LC

22.11.7 Valid Slots

The SLQ64 board must be installed in a valid slot on a subrack. Otherwise, the board does not
function.

The characteristic code of the SLQ64 board indicates the optical interface type of the board.
of the SLQ64 board.
SLQ64 board
Board
Characteristic Code
SSN4SLQ6401
01
I-64.1
SSN4SLQ6402
02
S-64.2b


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-129
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-80 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the SLQ64 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the NM
RX1/TX1
RX2/TX2
RX3/TX3
RX4/TX4
NOTE

Table 22-81 lists all the parameters of the SLQ64 board.
Table 22-81 Parameters of the SLQ64 board
Field
Value
Description
Port

on the line board.
VC3 Path

paths.

optical interface.
MSP Sharing
Enabled, Disabled

optical interface.
Default: Disabled

obtain the details.
Laser Switch
Off, On
Default: On
22-130


Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Field
Value
Description

(m)
2000, 10000, 15000, 40000,

80000

Default: -
See D.21 Laser

Loopback
Outloop
Default: -

to Non-Loopback.
VC4 Path

paths.
VC4 Loopback
Outloop

to Non-Loopback.
VC12 Channel

channels.

power consumption.
Table 22-82 lists the optical specifications of the SLQ64 board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

22-131
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

22 OCS System Unit
Table 22-82 Optical specifications of the SLQ64 board

Item
Value
Nominal bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Application code
I-64.1
S-64.2b
Transmission distance
(km)
0 to 10
10 to 40
Type of fiber
Single-mode LC
Single-mode LC
range (nm)
1290 to 1330
1530 to 1565
Launched optical
power range (dBm)
6 to 1
1 to +2
(dBm)
11
14
Minimum overload
(dBm)
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
Laser Safety Class

The mechanical specifications of the SLQ64 board are as follows:
l
Power Consumption
22-132

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
23
Cables
About This Chapter

23.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables
The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables.
23.2 Optical Fibers
Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC,
LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC.
23.3 Grounding Cables
The equipment has grounding cables, including cabinet door grounding cables and a PDU
grounding cable.
23.4 Alarm Cables
Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/
inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.
23.5 Management Cables
Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and
straight-through network cables.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
23.1 Power Cables and Grounding Cables

The equipment has cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND power cables and subrack power cables.
23.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables
The -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One
end of the power cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the
equipment room. The other end is connected to the DC power distribution box at the cabinet
top.
23.1.2 Subrack Power Cables
The subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the
power interface in the subrack interface area, and lead the -48 V power supply from the top of
the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables are correctly connected before delivery.
23.1.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power Cables

The -48 V, BGND, and PGND power cables supply power to devices inside the cabinet. One
end of the power cable is connected to the power distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the
equipment room. The other end is connected to the DC power distribution box at the cabinet
top.
Structure
23-2
When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800: Figure 23-1 shows the structure of
the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND grounding cable.
When the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800: Figure 23-2 shows the structure of
the cabinet -48 V power cable and the cabinet BGND grounding cable.
Figure 23-3 shows the structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable for the OptiX OSN
8800 and the OptiX OSN 6800.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Figure 23-1 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable
(when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800)
1
2
W1
X1
W1
W2
W2
X2
1m
0.8m
L
1. JG two-hole naked crimping connector
2. Heat-shrink tube
Figure 23-2 Structure of the cabinet -48 V power cable and cabinet BGND grounding cable
(when the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800)
1
1. Cord end terminal
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
2. OT single-hole naked crimping connector

3. Cable clip
23-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Figure 23-3 Structure of the cabinet PGND grounding cable

3
2
1. OT single-hole naked crimping connector
2. Cable clip 3. JG two-hole naked crimping connector
4. Heat shrink tube
5. Cable
Pin Assignment
None
23-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Technical Parameters
Table 23-1 Technical parameters of the PGND cables and the -48V/BGND power cables (when
the cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 8800)
Cable
Cabin
et
power
cable
-48 V
power
cable
Usage
Wire Used
Accesses
-48 V DC
to the
cabinet.
-48 V DC power
cable (blue)
l If the required
length of the
power cable is
less than 20 m,
use the 16 mm2
cable.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 20 m
to 35 m, use the
25mm2 cable.
Connector
If copper Plates is
used on the PDU, the
25m-35 mm2 power
cable must be used.
OT naked
crimping
connector
NOTE
If the intended power
cable is longer than 25
m, contact a cable
engineer of Huawei
for tailoring.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 35 m
to 50 m, use the
35mm2 cable.
BGND
cable
Accesses
the BGND
to a
cabinet.
Battery grounding
cable (black)
l If the required
length of the
power cable is
less than 20 m,
use the 16 mm2
cable.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 20 m
to 35 m, use the
25mm2 cable.
If copper Plates is
used on the PDU, the
25m-35 mm2 power
cable must be used.
OT naked
crimping
connector
NOTE
If the intended power
cable is longer than 25
m, contact a cable
engineer of Huawei
for tailoring.
l If the required
length of the
power cable
ranges from 35 m
to 50 m, use the
35mm2 cable.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Table 23-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (16 mm2) (when the
cabinet houses only the OptiX OSN 6800)
Item
Description
Cabinet -48 V power cable
Cabinet BGND grounding

cable
Connector 1
Cord end terminal-16

mm2-0.024mm-80AInsertion depth 16mm-Green
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-16 mm2-M8
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-450 V/

750 V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-16mm2-Blue-85 A
Connector 1

mm2-0.024mm-80AInsertion depth 16mm-Green
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-16 mm2-M8
Type of the cable

750 V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-16mm2-Black-85 A
Table 23-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables(25 mm2) (when the
Item
Description

cable
23-6
Connector 1

mm2-30 mm-75 A-Insertion
depth 16 mm-Brown
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-25 mm2-M8
Type of the cable

750 V-25 mm2-Blue-110 A
Connector 1

mm2-30 mm-75A-Insertion
depth 16 mm-Brown
Connector 2
Naked crimping connectorOT type-25 mm2-M8
Type of the cable

750 V-25 mm2-Black-110 A

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Table 23-4 Technical parameters of the cabinet -48 V/BGND power cables (35 mm2) (when the
Item
Description

cable
Connector 1
Cord end
terminal-35mm2
-0.03m-105A-Insertion
depth 16mm-Cream-colored
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-35 mm2-M8
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-750V/

450V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-35mm2-Blue-135 A
Connector 1
Cord end
terminal-35mm2
-0.03m-105A-Insertion
depth 16mm-Cream-colored
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-35 mm2-M8
Type of the cable

450V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-35mm2-Black-135 A
Table 23-5 Technical parameters of the cabinet PGND power cables

Item
Description
Cabinet PGND grounding

cable
Connector 1
OT naked crimping
connector-35 mm2-M8
Connector 2
OT naked crimping
connector-35 mm2-M8
Type of the cable

450V-227 IEC 02
(RV)-35mm2-Yellow and
green-135 A
23.1.2 Subrack Power Cables

The subrack power cables connect the DC power distribution box at the cabinet top and the
power interface in the subrack interface area, and lead the -48 V power supply from the top of
the cabinet to the subracks. The subrack power cables are correctly connected before delivery.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Structure (OptiX OSN 8800)

Figure 23-4 shows the subrack power cable.
Figure 23-4 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN 8800
1
W1
W1
W2
W2
X1
X2
1. OT naked crimping connector
Structure (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)

Figure 23-5 shows the subrack power cable.
Figure 23-5 Structure of the subrack power cable on the OptiX OSN6800/3800
1
X1
A
A3
A2
A1
W1
X3
W2
X2
500
1. Cable connector
2. Cable clip
3. Naked crimping connector
Pin Assignment (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)

For the pin assignment of subrack power cables, refer to Table 23-6.
23-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Table 23-6 Pin assignment of the subrack power cables

Cable
Cable
Connector
Cord End
Terminal
Connection
Core Color
W2
X1.A1
X2
A1 connects to
X2.
Blue (-48 V
power)
W1
X1.A3
X3
A3 connects to
X3.
Black (power
ground)
Technical Parameters (OptiX OSN 6800/3800)

The technical parameters of subrack power cables are listed in Table 23-7.
Table 23-7 Technical parameters of subrack power cables
Item
Description
Cable connector X1
Cable connector-D type-3PIN-FemaleSolder injection molding type-No middle

contact
Cord end terminals X2, X3
Common terminal-Conductor Cross

Section-6 mm2-Length 20 mm-30 AInsertion depth 12 mm-Black
Type of the cable W2
Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2Blue-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable
Power cable-450 V/750 V-H07Z-K-6 mm2Black-Low Smoke Zero Halogen Cable
23.2 Optical Fibers

Optical fibers can be classified into the following types: LSH/APC-SC/APC, LC/PC-LC/PC,
LC/PC-FC/PC and LC/PC-SC/PC.
23.2.1 Classification
The connectors and the length of the fibers are determined according to the site survey that is
conducted before installation.
23.2.2 Connectors
Connectors of all optical interfaces on the front panel of the boards are of the LC/PC type. LC/
PC fiber connectors are used with these boards. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the
equipment room are generally of the FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors
are used with them.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
23.2.1 Classification
The connectors and the length of the fibers are determined according to the site survey that is
conducted before installation.
The optical fibers used by the equipment are classified as shown in Table 23-8.
Table 23-8 Classification of optical fibers
Type of Connectors at
Both Ends
Fiber Type
LC/PC-LC/PC
2.0 mm (0.1 in.) single-mode

fiber
G.657A2 fiber
2.0 mm (0.1 in.) multimode

fiber
LC/PC-FC/PC

fiber
G.657A2 fiber

fiber
LC/PC-SC/PC

fiber
G.657A2 fiber

fiber
LSH/APC-SC/APC

fiber
G.652D fiber

fiber
A1b fiber
NOTE
The G.657 optical fibers provided by Huawei are named G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 optical fibers. The
G.657B optical fibers are short-jacket optical fibers defined in ITU-T G.657 (12/2006). According to ITU-T G.
657 (11/2009), these fibers are classified into G.657A1, G.657A2, G.657B2, and G.657B3 optical fibers. The
G.657B optical fibers provided by Huawei and the G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible and can be
interconnected. In addition, the G.657B and G.657A2 optical fibers are fully compatible with G.652D optical
fibers. However, the compatibility between customer-purchased G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 and G.
652D optical fibers needs to be verified.
23.2.2 Connectors
Connectors of all optical interfaces on the front panel of the boards are of the LC/PC type. LC/
PC fiber connectors are used with these boards. The optical interfaces on the ODF in the
equipment room are generally of the FC/PC or SC/PC type. FC/PC or SC/PC fiber connectors
are used with them.
Table 23-9 lists details on classification of fiber connectors.
23-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Table 23-9 Classification of fiber connectors

Type of Fiber Connectors
Description
LC/PC
Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding

polished
FC/PC
Round fiber connector/protruding polished
SC/PC
Square fiber connector/protruding polished
LSH/APC
Fiber connector with a cap that provides

automatic protection against dust/eightdegree radian surface/protruding polished
The appearances of the fiber connectors are shown in Figure 23-6, Figure 23-7, Figure 23-8
and Figure 23-9.
Figure 23-6 LC/PC fiber connector
The axial operation instead of rotation is required to insert or remove an LC/PC fiber connector.
To insert a fiber jumper that uses an LC/PC connector, align the head of the fiber jumper with
the optical interface and apply proper force. To remove the fiber jumper, first, press the clip,
then, slightly push the fiber connector inward, and finally, pull out the connector.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Figure 23-7 FC/PC fiber connector
Figure 23-8 SC/PC fiber connector
23-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Figure 23-9 LSH/APC fiber connector
Cover the optical interfaces of the replaced boards with protective caps in time. Store them in
proper packages to keep the optical interfaces clean. The protective caps recommended are
shown in Figure 23-10, and the protective caps not recommended are shown in Figure 23-11.
Figure 23-10 Protective caps recommended
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Figure 23-11 Protective caps not recommended
NOTE
The air filter caps made of soft rubber are not recommended, which tends to collect dust and sundries. This type
of caps provides poor dustproof function.
23.3 Grounding Cables

The equipment has grounding cables, including cabinet door grounding cables and a PDU
grounding cable.
23.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables
The cabinet door grounding cables ground the front door, rear door, and side doors. The
cabinet door grounding cables are correctly connected before delivery.
23.3.2 PDU Grounding Cable
One end of the PDU grounding cable is connected to a protection grounding screw of the power
distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection grounding screw on the top of the
cabinet. The PDU grounding cable is correctly connected before delivery.
23.3.1 Cabinet Door Grounding Cables

The cabinet door grounding cables ground the front door, rear door, and side doors. The
cabinet door grounding cables are correctly connected before delivery.
23-14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Structure
Figure 23-12 shows the structure of the cabinet door grounding cables.
Figure 23-12 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable
1
X1
X2
L
Pin Assignment
None
The technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables are listed in Table 23-10.
Table 23-10 Technical parameters of the cabinet door grounding cables
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2 (0.01 in.

2)-M6-Tin plating-Insulated ring
terminal-12-10AWG
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-600V-UL1015-0

mm2-10AWG-Yellow/Green-50 A-105 core
strand
23.3.2 PDU Grounding Cable

One end of the PDU grounding cable is connected to a protection grounding screw of the power
distribution box. The other end is connected to the protection grounding screw on the top of the
cabinet. The PDU grounding cable is correctly connected before delivery.
Structure
Figure 23-13 shows the structure of the PDU grounding cable.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Figure 23-13 Structure of the PDU grounding cable

1
X1
X2
2. Heat-shrink tube
Pin Assignment
None
The technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable are listed in Table 23-11.
Table 23-11 Technical parameters of the PDU grounding cable
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6
Type of the cable
Electric power cable-450/750V-227IEC02

(RV)-10 mm2 (0.02 in.2)-Yellow/Green-62 A
23.4 Alarm Cables

Alarm cables for the equipment include the cabinet indicator alarm cable, alarm concatenating/
inter-subrack concatenating cable, and alarm interface cable.
23.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable
The cabinet indicator cable is used to cascade the signals of the indicators at different subracks
in the same cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of one
subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of another
subrack.
23.4.2 Alarm Interface Cable
The alarm interface cable between cabinets is connected to the ALMI interface of the subrack
to achieve the input of alarm signals. The equipment provides eight alarm outputs. By default,
critical, major, and minor alarms use the first three alarm outputs. The other five are reserved.
The output alarm signals can be concatenated.
23.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating Cable
The inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cable is used to concatenate alarm signals of
different subracks housed in one cabinet. Both ends of the cable use the RJ-45 connector. Each
end is connected to interface ALMO in a different subrack.
23-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
23.4.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to cascade the signals of the indicators at different subracks
in the same cabinet. One end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of one
subrack. The other end of the cable is connected to LAMP1 or LAMP2 interface of another
subrack.
Structure
The structure of the cable indicator alarm cable is shown in Figure 23-14.
Figure 23-14 Structure of the cabinet indicator alarm cable
1
View A
8
4
View B
1
2
X2
X3
X1
A
X4
X5
1. Network interface connector
2. Heat-shrink tube
3. Common plug
4. Ordinary connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable, refer to Table 23-12.
Table 23-12 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator alarm cable
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Connector X1
Connectors X2, X3,

X4, X5
Color
Relationship
X1.4
X2.2
White
Pair
X1.5
X2.1
Green
X1.1
X3.2
White
X1.2
X3.1
Blue
X1.3
X4.2
White
X1.6
X4.1
Brown
X1.7
X5.2
White
X1.8
X5.1
Orange

Pair
Pair
Pair
23-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
The technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable are listed in Table 23-13.
Table 23-13 Technical parameters of the cabinet indicator alarm cable
Item
Description
Connector X1
Network interface connector-8PIN-single

row-single port-8bit-shielded-crystal model
connector
Connector X2/X3/X4/X5
Common plug-2PIN-single row/2.5 mm (0.1

in.)
Type of the cable
Twisted pair cable -100SEYPVPV-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4

pairs-black
Number of cores
Core diameter
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
23.4.2 Alarm Interface Cable

The alarm interface cable between cabinets is connected to the ALMI interface of the subrack
to achieve the input of alarm signals. The equipment provides eight alarm outputs. By default,
critical, major, and minor alarms use the first three alarm outputs. The other five are reserved.
The output alarm signals can be concatenated.
Structure
Figure 23-15 shows the structure of the alarm interface cable.
Figure 23-15 Alarm interface cable
1
View A
8
6
3
1
X2
X1
L
23-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm interface cable, refer to Table 23-14.
Table 23-14 Pin assignment of X1
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
Pair
X1.1
X2.1
White-orange
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.3
X2.3
White-green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White-blue
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
X1.7
X2.7
White-brown
Pair
Pair
Pair
The technical parameters of the alarm interface cable are listed in Table 23-15.
Table 23-15 Technical parameters of the alarm interface cable
Item
Description
Connector X1
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitunshielded-RJ-45 connector-uniconductor

flat cable
Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100UTPCAT5E-0.5 mm (0.02 in.)-24AWG-4

pairs-PANTONE 430U-low-smoke and
halogen-free cable
Number of cores
Core diameter
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
23.4.3 Alarm Concatenating/Inter-Subrack Concatenating Cable

The inter-subrack indicator/alarm concatenating cable is used to concatenate alarm signals of
different subracks housed in one cabinet. Both ends of the cable use the RJ-45 connector. Each
end is connected to interface ALMO in a different subrack.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Structure
Figure 23-16 shows the structure of the cable.
Figure 23-16 Structure of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable
8
1
1
X1
X2
1. Network interface connector-RJ-45
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer to
Table 23-16.
Table 23-16 Pin assignment of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
Pair
X1.1
X2.1
White-orange
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.3
X2.3
White-green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White-blue
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
X1.7
X2.7
White-brown
Pair
Pair
Pair
For the technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable, refer
to Table 23-17.
23-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Table 23-17 Technical parameters of the alarm concatenating/inter-subrack concatenating cable

Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bitcrystal model connector
Type of the cable
Communication cable-8 cores category-5

twisted pair-24AWG
Number of cores
Core diameter
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)
23.5 Management Cables

Management cables for the equipment include: OAM serial port cables, AUX signal cables and
straight-through network cables.
23.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable
The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface in OptiX OSN 6800/8800.
23.5.2 AUX Signal Cable
The AUX signal cable accesses external signals through the serial port used for NM
communications and the management port. The AUX signal cable does not process external
signals in the OptiX OSN 3800.
23.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable
The straight-through network cable connects the OptiX OSN 3800 equipment and the network
management computer. RJ-45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network
cable, connected to the equipment at two ends.
23.5.1 OAM Serial Port Cable

The OAM serial port cable is used to connect to the OAM interface in OptiX OSN 6800/8800.
Structure
Figure 23-17 shows the structure of the OAM serial port cable.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Figure 23-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable
1. DB9 connector
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable, refer to Table 23-18.
Table 23-18 Pin assignment of the OAM serial port
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
X1.1
X2.1
Pair
X1.5
X2.5
X1.2
X2.2
X1.3
X2.3
X1.6
X2.6
X1.7
X2.7
X1.8
X2.8
X1.9
X2.9
Pair
Pair
Pair
The technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable are listed in Table 23-19.
Table 23-19 Technical parameters of the OAM serial port cable
23-22
Item
Description
Connector X1, X2
Cable connector-D type-9 PIN-Male-Cable

welding type

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Item
Description
Type
Symmetrical twisted-pair cable-100ohmSEYVP-0.48mm (0.02 in.)-26AWG-4 pairsBlack
Number of cores
4 pairs
Length
10.0m (393.7 in.), 20.0m (787.4 in.)
23.5.2 AUX Signal Cable

The AUX signal cable accesses external signals through the serial port used for NM
communications and the management port. The AUX signal cable does not process external
signals in the OptiX OSN 3800.
Structure
Figure 23-18 shows the structure of the AUX signal cable.
Figure 23-18 Structure of the AUX signal cable
2
Pos.64
View A
W8
W7
Pos.1
View B
X8
X7
X6
W6
Delander
W5
W1
X5
W4
X1
L1
X4
W3
X3
View C
Pos.9
W2
C
X2
L2
L3
Pos.1
L4
L5
1. DB64 cable connector
3. DB9 cable connector
For the relationship between the connectors X2 to X8X5 and interface types, refer to Table
23-20.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Table 23-20 Relationship between connectors and interface types

Connector
Interface Type
X2
Serial
X3
ALMI1
X4
ALMI2
X5
ALMO
X6
LAMP1
X7
LAMP2
X8
ETH
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the W2 to W8, refer to Table 23-21, Table 23-22, Table 23-23, Table
23-24, Table 23-25, Table 23-26 and Table 23-27.
Table 23-21 Pin assignment of the W2
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
X1.3
X2.2
Pair
X1.7
X2.3
X1.4
X2.4
X1.1
X2.5
X1.6
X2.6
X1.8
X2.7
X1.5
X2.8
X1.2
X2.9
Pair
Pair
Pair
23-24
Connector X1
Connector X3
Relationship
X1.9
X3.1
Pair
X1.11
X3.2
X1.13
X3.3
X1.15
X3.6

Pair
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X3
Relationship
X1.17
X3.4
Pair
X1.19
X3.5
X1.10
X3.7
X1.12
X3.8
Pair

Connector X1
Connector X4
Relationship
X1.14
X4.1
Pair
X1.16
X4.2
X1.18
X4.3
X1.20
X4.6
X4.4
X4.5
X4.7
X4.8
Pair
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Connector X1
Connector X5
Relationship
X1.21
X5.1
Pair
X1.23
X5.2
X1.25
X5.3
X1.27
X5.6
X1.22
X5.4
X1.24
X5.5
X1.26
X5.7
X1.28
X5.8

Pair
Pair
Pair
23-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables

Connector X1
Connector X6
Relationship
X1.33
X6.1
Pair
X1.35
X6.2
X1.41
X6.3
X1.43
X6.6
X1.37
X6.4
X1.39
X6.5
X1.45
X6.7
X1.47
X6.8
Pair
Pair
Pair

Connector X1
Connector X7
Relationship
X1.34
X7.1
Pair
X1.36
X7.2
X1.42
X7.3
X1.44
X7.6
X1.38
X7.4
X1.40
X7.5
X1.46
X7.7
X1.48
X7.8
Pair
Pair
Pair
23-26
Connector X1
Connector X8
Relationship
X1.61
X8.1
Pair
X1.57
X8.2
X1.53
X8.3
X1.49
X8.6
X8.4
X8.5

Pair
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X8
Relationship
X8.7
X8.8
The technical parameters of the AUX signal cable are listed in Table 23-28.
Table 23-28 Technical parameters of the AUX signal cable
Item
Description
Connector X1
Cable connector-D type-64

PIN-8 bit-straight through
connector
Connector X2
Cable connector-D
type-9PIN
Connectors X3-X8
Network interface
connector-8 bit-8PINShielded
Type of the cable
W1
Communication
cable-26AWGPANTONE430U-Sheilded
W2-W8
Communication
cable-24AWG-8 coresPANTONE445U
Number of cores
23.5.3 Straight-Through Network Cable

The straight-through network cable connects the OptiX OSN 3800 equipment and the network
management computer. RJ-45 connectors are used at both ends of the straight-through network
cable, connected to the equipment at two ends.
Structure
Figure 23-19 shows the structure of the straight-through network cable.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

23-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

23 Cables
Figure 23-19 Structure of the straight-through network cable

8
1
RJ-45
X1
X2
Pin Assignment
For the pin assignment of the straight-through network cable, refer to Table 23-29.
Table 23-29 Pin assignment of the straight-through network cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
Pair
X1.1
X2.1
White-orange
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.3
X2.3
White-green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White-blue
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
X1.7
X2.7
White-brown
Pair
Pair
Pair
The technical parameters of the straight-through network cable are listed in Table 23-30.
Table 23-30 Technical parameters of the straight-through network cable
23-28
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector-8 PIN-8 bitCrystal model connector
Type of the cable
Communication cable-8-core category-5

twisted pair-24AWG

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
23 Cables
Item
Description
Number of cores
Core diameter
0.5 mm (0.02 in.)

23-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

24 Optical Attenuator
24
Optical Attenuator
About This Chapter

Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical
attenuators (VOAs).
24.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator
A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The
common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and
15 dB.
24.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator
A MVOA (mechanical variable optical attenuator) can adjust the optical power on an optical
path in a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of a VOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

24-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

24 Optical Attenuator
24.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator

A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value. The
common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10 dB, and
15 dB.
Figure 24-1 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator.
Figure 24-1 Appearance of a fixed optical attenuator
24.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator

A MVOA (mechanical variable optical attenuator) can adjust the optical power on an optical
path in a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of a VOA is 2 dB to 30 dB.
Figure 24-2 shows the appearance of a common VOA.
Figure 24-2 Appearance of a VOA
24-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

25 Filler Panels
25
Filler Panels
About This Chapter

A filler panel is used to fill in a vacant slot.
25.1 Functions and Features
This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel.
25.2 Front Panel
There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel.
25.3 Valid Slots
This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel.
25.4 Technical Specifications
This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

25-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

25 Filler Panels
25.1 Functions and Features

This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel.
A filler panel has the following functions:
l
Prevents exposure of people to hazardous voltage and current in the subrack.
Prevents foreign matter from entering the subrack.
Maintains electromagnetic interference (EMI) compliance.
Maintains proper air flow through the subrack.
25.2 Front Panel

There are no indicators and interfaces on the filler panel.
Figure 25-1 shows the appearance of a filler panel.
25-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

25 Filler Panels
Figure 25-1 Appearance of a filler panel

21136047 21135823 21136389 21132664 21134882 21135716 21135491 21135492
21135493
21136046
25.3 Valid Slots

This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel.
Table 25-1 lists the valid slots for a filler panel.
Table 25-1 Valid slots for a filler panel
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Part Number
Product
Valid Slots
21132664
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
21132664
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU36
21132664
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18
21132664
OptiX OSN 6800
IU1-IU18

25-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

25 Filler Panels
Part Number
Product
Valid Slots
21132664
OptiX OSN 3800
IU11, IU2-IU5
21134882
OptiX OSN 3800
IU1, IU6-IU11
21135491
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU42, IU44
21135492
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU76, IU77
21135492
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU38
21135493
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU69-IU71, IU78-IU82, IU87-IU89
21135493
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU37, IU39, IU40, IU45-IU48
21135716
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU41, IU43
21135716
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU72, IU73, IU83, IU84, IU75, IU86

NOTE
Either slot IU75 or IU86 must be filled by two
filler panels.
21135823
OptiX OSN 8800 T32
IU9, IU10
21136046
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU74, IU85
21136047
OptiX OSN 8800 T64
IU9, IU10, IU43, IU44
21136389
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
IU9, IU10
NOTE
l When slot IU9 or IU10 is used to house a
board except the TN16XCH board, this filler
panel must be inserted before the board is
inserted.
l When slot IU9 or IU10 is empty, it must be
covered with this filler panel and then with a
filler panel identified as 21132664.
25.4 Technical Specifications

This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Table 25-2 lists the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Table 25-2 Technical specifications of a filler panel
25-4
Part Number
21132664
25.4 mm (W) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 10.4 in. (H))
21134882
25.4 mm (W) x 118.9 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.9 in. (H))
21135491
28.8 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
25 Filler Panels
Part Number
21135492
25.4 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H))
21135493
50.8 mm (W) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 3.1 in. (H))
21135716
25.4 mm (W) x 107.5 mm (H) (1 in. (W) x 4.2 in. (H))
21135823
27.2 mm (W) x 581.5 mm (H) (1.1 in. (W) x 22.9 in. (H))
21136046
110.0 mm (H) x 76.2 mm (W) (4.4 in. (H) x 3.0 in. (W))
21136047
34.1 mm (W) x 602.5 mm (H) (1.4 in. (W) x 23.7 in. (H))
21136389
54.5 mm (W) x 350.3 mm (H) (2.1 in. (W) x 13.8 in. (H))

25-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
Indicators
A.1 Cabinet Indicators

There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and
yellow.
A.2 Subrack Indicator
There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are
in the following colors: red, orange, yellow and green.
A.3 Chassis Indicators
There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red.
A.4 Board Indicators
On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running
status of the board.
A.5 Fan Indicator
There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN.
A.6 PIU Indicator
There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

A-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
A.1 Cabinet Indicators

There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and
yellow.
The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table A-1.
Table A-1 Meanings of cabinet indicators
Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
power
Power indicator
On (green)
The cabinet is powered

on.
Off
The cabinet is not

powered on.
Critical alarm
indicator
On (red)
There is a critical alarm.
Off
There is no critical alarm.
Major alarm
indicator
On (Orange)
There is a major alarm.
Off
There is no major alarm.
Minor alarm
indicator
On (Yellow)
There is a minor alarm.
Off
There is no minor alarm.
critical
major
minor
A.2 Subrack Indicator

There are four subrack indicators for the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800. Indicators are
in the following colors: red, orange, yellow and green.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 subrack indicators are on the panel of the fan tray assembly.
Table A-2 Meanings of subrack indicators

Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
PWR
Power indicator
On (Green)
The subrack works

normally.
Off
The subrack does not

work.
On (Red)
OptiX OSN
6800: CRI
A-2
Critical alarm
indicator

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
Off
Major alarm
indicator
On (Orange)
Off
Minor alarm
indicator
On (Yellow)
Off
OptiX OSN
8800: CRIT
MAJ
MIN
A.3 Chassis Indicators

There are four chassis indicators in the following colors: green, yellow, orange and red.
Table A-3 Meanings of chassis indicators
Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
PWR
Chassis power supply

indicator
On (green)
The chassis is powered

on.
Off
The chassis is not

powered on.
On (yellow)
Off
On (orange)
Off
On (red)
Off
MIN
Minor alarm indicator
MAJ
Major alarm indicator
CRI
Critical alarm indicator
A.4 Board Indicators

On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running
status of the board.
The meanings of the board indicators are listed in Table A-4,Table A-5 and Table A-6.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

A-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
Table A-4 Meanings of board indicators

Indicato
r
Name
Status
Meaning
STAT
Board hardware
indicator
On (green)
The board works normally.
On (red)
A critical alarm occurs on the

board.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs on the

board.
Off
The board is not powered on.
On (red)
The memory check fails.
PROG
Board software
indicator
Loading the board software fails.

The FPGA file is lost.
The board software is lost.
SRV
ACT
Service alarm
indicator
Service activation
indicator
Blinking (red)
On for 100 ms and off for 100 ms:

The BOOTROM check fails.
Blinking quickly
(green)

Writing the flash memory is in
progress.
Blinking slowly
(green)

The BIOS booting is in progress.
On (green)
The board software or FPGA is

uploaded successfully, or the
board software is initialized
successfully.
On (green)
The service is normal with any

service alarm.
On (red)
A critical or major service alarm

occurs.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote service alarm

occurs.
Off
No service is configured.
On (green)
The board is in the working mode.

The board is in the active mode.
Off
The board is not in the working

mode.
The board is in the standby mode.
Blinking quickly
(green)
A-4


Backing up the system database in
batches is in progress.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
Indicato
r
Name
Status
Meaning
LINK/
ACTn
Data port
connection/data
transceive indicator
On (green)
The data port connection is

normal.
Off
The data port connection is

abnormal.
Blinking quickly
(green)

Data transceiving is in progress.
Table A-5 Meanings of the indicators on the PQ2 board

Indicato
r
Name
Status
Meaning
STAT
Board hardware
indicator
On (green)
The PQ2 board is configured with

services and is running normally.
On (red)
The PQ2 board is configured with

services and is running
abnormally.
On (yellow)
The PQ2 board is not configured

with services and is running
abnormally.
Off
The PQ2 board is not configured

with services and is running
normally.
Table A-6 Meanings of the indicators on the SCC board

Indicato
r
Name
Status
Meaning
STAT
Board hardware
indicator
On (green)
The board is working normally.
On (red)
A critical alarm occurs on the

board.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs on the board.
Off
The board is not powered on.
On (red)
The memory check fails.
PROG
Board software
indicator
Loading the board software fails.

The FPGA file is lost.
The NE software is lost.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

A-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
Indicato
r
SRV
ACT
Name
Service alarm
indicator
Service activation
indicator
Status
Meaning
Blinking (red)

The BOOTROM check fails.
Blinking quickly
(green)

Writing the flash memory is in
progress.
Blinking slowly
(green)

The BIOS booting is in progress.
On (green)
The board software or FPGA is

uploaded successfully, or the
board software is initialized
successfully.
On (green)
The service is normal with any

service alarm.
On (red)
A critical or major service alarm

occurs.
On (yellow)
A minor or remote service alarm

occurs.
Off
No service is configured.
On (green)
The board is in the working mode.

The board is in the active mode.
Off
The board is not in the working

mode.
The board is in the standby mode.
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
A-6
Indicator for system

power supply
Indicator for system

power supply
Indicator for
protection power
supply
Blinking quickly
(green)

Backing up the system database in
batches is in progress.
On (green)
-48 V power supply A is normal.
On (red)
-48 V power supply A is faulty

(lost or failed).
Off
No power is input.
On (green)
-48 V power supply B is normal.
On (red)
-48 V power supply B is faulty (lost

or failed).
Off
No power is input.
On (green)
The +3.3 V protection power is

normal.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Indicato
r
ALMC
A Indicators
Name
Alarm cut-off
indicator
Status
Meaning
On (red)
The +3.3 V protection power is

lost.
On (yellow)
There is no audible or visual

warning in case of an alarm.
Off
Audible warning is generated in

case of an alarm.
A.5 Fan Indicator

There is one indicator on the FAN, indicating the status of the FAN.
The corresponding meanings of the Fan indicator are listed in Table A-7.
Table A-7 Meanings of the FAN indicator
Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
OptiX OSN
6800/OptiX
OSN 3800:
STAT
OptiX OSN
8800: FAN
Fan indicator
On (green)
The fan is normal.
On (red)
A major alarm occurs or two or

more fans are faulty.
On (yellow)
A minor alarm occurs or one fan is

faulty.
Off
The fan is not powered on, is

absent, or the software is not
loaded.
A.6 PIU Indicator

There is one indicator on the PIU, indicating power access status.
Table A-8 Meanings of the PIU indicator
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Indicator
Name
Status
Meaning
OptiX OSN
6800/OptiX
OSN 3800:
RUN
OptiX OSN
8800: PWR
Running status
indicator
On (green)
Indicates that the power is

accessed normally.
Off
Indicates that the power is

not accessed.

A-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

A Indicators
A-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B Bar Code for Boards
Bar Code for Boards
and board characteristic code.
B.1 Overview
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs
The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical
modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.
B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit
The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM
optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules.
B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM
The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical
signals processed by the board.
B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA
The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the
board.
B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU
The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal
input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit
The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals
processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and
the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.
B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit
The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection
switching time.
B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

B-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals
B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit
The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with,
the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.
B-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.1 Overview
The information about a bar code can be queried on the U2000, for details refer to Supporting
Tasks.
NOTE
Such information as frequency of signals queried on the U2000 is a commissioning value, different from
that on the bar code.
Figure B-1, Figure B-2 and Figure B-3 show a bar code.
Figure B-1 Description of the bar code (example 1)
Delivery
information
Board model
number
Board version
(TN12)
2102314840107A000090 Y TN1M2 LSX 01 19210AG

Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
BOM
Board
name
Characteristic
code

Delivery
information
Board model
number
Board version
(TN12)
2102315653108A000199 Y TN1M2 LSX T01 TPT

BOM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Environmental
friendliness flag
(Y: Environmentally
friendly)
Board Tunable Characteristic

name
code

B-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Delivery
information
Board version
Board model
number
030FBQ1073000001 N TN11MR8 01 -92109280V

Last four numbers of
the BOM
Environmental
friendliness flag
Board name
Characteristic
code
(N: Environmentally
unfriendly)
B.2 Characteristic Code for OTUs

The characteristic code for OTUs indicates the frequency, type and wavelength of the optical
modules in DWDM OTUs, DWDM wavelength-tunable OTUs and CWDM OTUs.
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs
The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the
frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs
The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating
the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs
The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and
type of the optical module in the OTU.
B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM OTUs

The characteristic code for a DWDM OTU consists of digits and characters, indicating the
frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
Detailed information about the characteristic code is listed in Table B-1.
Table B-1 Characteristic code for a DWDM OTU
B-4
Code
Meaning
Description
The first five digit
The frequency of the

DWDM-side optical
transmitter module
Indicate the frequency of the

DWDM-side optical
transmitter module.
The sixth character
The type of the DWDM-side

receiving optical module
The value can be A or P. A

represents APD. P represents
PIN.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
The seventh character

optical transmitter module
The detailed meaning of the

character is shown in Table
B-2.
NOTE
In the case of the OTU boards with dual fed optical interfaces, such as the LQMD board, the characteristic
code consists of eight digits. The frequency values of the two channels of optical signals on the WDM side
are indicated.
The types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules are listed in Table B-2.
Table B-2 Types of DWDM-side transmitting optical modules
Character
Dispersion (1550
nm)
Distance
Rate
1600ps/nm
80km
2.5G
3200ps/nm
170km
2.5G
800ps/nm
40km
10.66G
3200ps/nm
160km
2.5G
1500ps/nm
80km
10.66G
1600ps/nm
80km
10.66G
3200ps/nm
170km
2.5G
800ps/nm
40km
10.66G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.5G
6500ps/nm
320km
2.5G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.5G
6500ps/nm
320km
2.5G
800ps/nm
40km
10.71G
>600ps/nm
>30km
10.71G
>600ps/nm
>30km
10.66G
800ps/nm
40km
10.66G
1800ps/nm
90km
2.66G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.66G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.5G
1500ps/nm
80km
10.66G
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

B-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Character
Dispersion (1550
nm)
Distance
Rate
>600ps/nm
>30km
10.66G
>600ps/nm
>30km
10.71G
6400ps/nm
320km
4.9-5.4G
6400ps/nm
320km
10.66G
1500ps/nm
80km
10.71G
3400ps/nm
170km
4.9-5.4G
800ps/nm
40km
10.71G
>600ps/nm
>30km
10.71G
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is 19210AG. This code indicates the
following features: The frequency of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is 192.10 THz;
APD is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving optical module; the code of the DWDM-side
optical transmitter module is G. For details, refer to Table B-2.
B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs

The characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU consists of characters, indicating
the frequency and type of the optical module in the OTU.
Table B-3 Characteristic code for a DWDM wavelength-tunable OTU
Code
Meaning
Description
The first character
Wavelength-tunable
T is the abbreviation for

Tunable, indicating that the
wavelength is tunable.


PIN.
The third character

optical transmitter module
The detailed meaning of the

character is shown in Table
B-4.
The types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules are listed in Table B-4.
B-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-4 Types of DWDM-side optical transmitter modules

Character
Dispersion (1550
nm)
Distance
Rate
1200ps/nm
60km
10.71G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.66G
12800ps/nm
640km
2.67G
3400ps/nm
170km
5.33G
-1000 to 1100ps/nm
60km
10.71G
4800ps/nm
240km
11.3G
For example, the characteristic code for the TN12LSX is TPT. This code indicates the following
features: This board is a wavelength-tunable OTU; PIN is adopted by the DWDM-side receiving
optical module; the code of the DWDM-side optical transmitter module is T. For details, refer
to Table B-4.
B.2.3 Characteristic Code for CWDM OTUs

The characteristic code for a CWDM OTU consists of characters, indicating the wavelength and
type of the optical module in the OTU.
Table B-5 Characteristic code for a CWDM OTU
Code
Meaning
Description
The first four digits
The wavelength of the

CWDM-side transmitting
optical module
Indicate the wavelength of

the CWDM-side transmitting
optical module.
The fifth character
The type of the CWDM-side


PIN.
The sixth character
The type of the CWDM-side

transmitting optical module
The value can be L or S. L

represents long haul. S
represents short haul.
NOTE
As for the LWX2 board, only information about the first wavelength is indicated.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN13LQM is 1531AS. This code indicates the
following features: The wavelength is 1531 nm; APD is adopted by the CWDM-side receiving
optical module; the CWDM-side transmitting optical module is used for short-haul transmission
(80 km).
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

B-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.3 Characteristic Code of a Line Unit

The characteristic code of a line unit indicates the frequency, type, and wavelength of the DWDM
optical modules and DWDM wavelength-tunable optical modules.
The line unit shares the same characteristic code with the WDM-side DWDM optical module
of the wavelength tunable unit. For details, refer to B.2.1 Characteristic Code for DWDM
OTUs and B.2.2 Characteristic Code for DWDM Wavelength-Tunable OTUs.
B.4 Characteristic Code of an FOADM

The characteristic code of an FOADM indicates the wavelength or frequency of the optical
signals processed by the board.
B.4.1 Characteristic Code for the CMR1
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1
B.4.5 Characteristic Code for the MR2
B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V

Table B-6 lists details on the characteristic code for the CMR1.
B-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-6 Characteristic code for the CMR1

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Wavelength that carries

optical signals
Indicates the wavelength that

carries the optical signals
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21CMR1 is 1471, indicating that the wavelength
that carries the signals is 1471 nm.

The detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-7.
Table B-7 Characteristic code for the CMR2 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

optical signals
Indicates the first wavelength

Last four digits

Indicates the second

the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR2 is 14711571.

l

Detailed information about the characteristic code is given in Table B-8.
Table B-8 Characteristic code for the CMR4 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Code
Meaning
Description
First and second digits

optical signals

digits of the first wavelength

B-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description


digits of the second
the board.
Third wavelength that carries

optical signals

digits of the third wavelength
Fourth wavelength that


digits of the fourth
the board.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CMR4 board is 47495961.
l
"59" indicates that the third wavelength is 1591 nm.
"61" indicates that the fourth wavelength is 1611 nm.
B.4.4 Characteristic Code for the DMR1

Table B-9 provides the details on the characteristics code.
Table B-9 Characteristic code for the DMR1 board
Barcode
Meaning
Description
First to fourth digits
Optical signal frequency
Frequency of the optical

signals processed by the
board
For example, the characteristics code of the TN11DMR1 board is 9210. The code indicates that
the frequency of the optical signals is 192.1 THz.

B-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-10 Characteristic code for the MR2 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

signal
the first optical signal.
Last four digits
Frequency of the second

optical signal

the second optical signal.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR2 board is 93609370.
l
"9370" indicates that the frequency of the second optical signal is 193.70 THz.

Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits
Frequency of first optical

signal

Last four digits
Frequency of forth optical

signal

the fourth optical signal
l
"9240" indicates that the frequency of the fourth optical signal is 192.40 THz.
Since the four channels of optical signals processed by the MR4 board are in sequence, it can
be inferred that:
l
The frequency of the second channel of optical signals is 192.20 THz.
The frequency of the third channel of optical signals is 192.30 THz.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

B-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Code
Meaning
Description
First four digits

signal
Last four digits

optical signal

l
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8 board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
l
B.4.8 Characteristic Code for the MR8V

Table B-13 Characteristic code for the MR8V board
B-12
Code
Meaning
First four digits

signal

Description
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
Last four digits

optical signal

"V"
Adjustment of the input

optical power of each
channel
Indicates that the board

adjusts the input optical
power of each channel.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MR8V board is 92109280V.
l
"V" indicates that adjusts the input optical power of each channel.
Since the eight channels of optical signals processed by the MR8V board are consecutive, it can
be inferred that:
l
B.5 Characteristic Code of an MCA

The characteristic code of an MCA indicates the band of the optical signals processed by the
board.
B.5.1 Characteristic Code for the MCA4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

B-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-14 Characteristic code for the MCA4 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA4 board is C, indicating C band.

Table B-15 Characteristic code for the MCA8 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11MCA8 board is C, indicating that the card
processes optical signals in the C band.
B.6 Characteristic Code of an OAU

The characteristic code of an OAU indicates the gain, gain range, and the maximum nominal
input optical power of the optical signals processed by the board.
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA
the board.
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1
B.6.3 Characteristic Code for the OBU1
B-14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.6.5 Characteristic Code for the CRPC
B.6.1 Characteristic Code for the HBA

the board.
Table B-16 Characteristic code for the HBA board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character
The second character is

always G.
Third to the fourth digits
Gain
The third to the fourth digits

indicate the gain value.
Fifth character
The fifth character is always

I.
Sixth and seventh digits

optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11HBA board is CG29I-8. The code indicates
that the HBA board is used in C band, the gain is 29 dB, and the maximum nominal input optical
power is -8 dBm.
B.6.2 Characteristic Code for the OAU1

Table B-17 Characteristic code for the OAU1 board
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Is always G.

B-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
Second to fifth digits
Gain range
Indicates the range within

which the gain can be
continuously adjusted.
Sixth character
Is always I.

optical power
Indicates the maximum

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OAU1 board is G2031I0. The code indicates
that the gain can be continuously adjusted from 20 dB to 31 dB and the maximum nominal input
optical power is 0 dBm.

Table B-18 Characteristic code for the OBU1 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

G.
Gain

Fourth character

always I.

optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU1 board is G23I-3. This code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is -3 dBm.

B-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-19 Characteristic code for the OBU2 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character

G.
Gain

Fourth character

always I.

optical power

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11OBU2 board is G23I00. The code indicates
that the gain is 23 dB and the maximum nominal input optical power is 0 dBm.
B.6.5 Characteristic Code for the CRPC

Table B-20 Characteristic code for the CRPC board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Is always G.
Two digits
Gain
Indicate the gain value.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11CRPC board is G10, indicating 10 dB gain.
B.7 Characteristic Code of an Optical MUX/DMUX Unit

The characteristic code of an optical MUX/DMUX unit indicates the band of the optical signals
processed by the board, whether the wavelengths with signals are odd or even wavelengths, and
the multiplexing solution adopted by the board.
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40
B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V
are odd or even.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

B-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU

by the board.
B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL
by the board.
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40
are odd or even.
B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V
are odd or even.
B.7.1 Characteristic Code for the D40

Table B-21 Characteristic code for the D40
Code
Meaning
Description
The first character
Band


wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40 is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.7.2 Characteristic Code for the D40V

are odd or even.
Table B-22 Characteristic code for the D40V board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11D40V board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.7.3 Characteristic Code for the DFIU

by the board.
Table B-23 Characteristic code for the DFIU board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band; the value L
represents L band.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN21DFIU board is C, indicating that the optical
signals are in C band.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

B-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.7.4 Characteristic Code for the FIU

Table B-24 Characteristic code for the FIU board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band; the value L
represents L band.
C band.
B.7.5 Characteristic Code for the ITL

by the board.
Table B-25 Characteristic code for the ITL board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

C band.
For example, the characteristic code for the ITL board is C, indicating that the optical signals
are in C band.
B.7.6 Characteristic Code for the M40

are odd or even.
B-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-26 Characteristic code for the M40 board

Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40 board is CE, indicating C band and even
wavelengths.
B.7.7 Characteristic Code for the M40V

are odd or even.
Table B-27 Characteristic code for the M40V board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character
Band

Second character

wavelengths.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11M40V board is CE, indicating C band and
even wavelengths.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

B-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

B.8 Characteristic Code of a Protection Unit

The characteristic code of an optical protection board indicates the maximum protection
switching time.
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS
B.8.1 Characteristic Code for the DCP

Table B-28 Characteristic code for the DCP board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12DCP board is P50. This code indicates that
the maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
B.8.2 Characteristic Code for the OLP

Table B-29 Characteristic code for the OLP board
B-22
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Code
Meaning
Description
Maximum protection
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN12OLP board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50ms.
B.8.3 Characteristic Code for the SCS

Table B-30 Characteristic code for the SCS board
Code
Meaning
Description
First character

P.
Maximum protection
switching time

For example, the characteristic code for the TN11SCS board is P50. This code indicates that the
maximum protection switching time is 50 ms.
B.9 Characteristic Code of a VOA

The characteristic code of a VOA indicates the maximum attenuation of the optical signals
B.9.1 Characteristic Code for the VA1

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

B-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-31 Characteristic code for the VA1 board

Code
Meaning
Description
Digits 1 through 3
Attenuation value

attenuation.
maximum allowable attenuation value is 21.5 dB.

Table B-32 Characteristic code for the VA4 board
Code
Meaning
Description
First to third digits
Attenuation value

attenuation.
maximum attenuation value is 21.5 dB.
B.10 Characteristic Code of a PDE Unit

The characteristic code of a PDE unit indicates the type of the fiber that the board works with,
the dispersion compensation distance, and the gradient of optical signals.
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU
The characteristic code for the GFU board contains two characters and two digits, indicating the
gradient of optical signals processed by the board.
B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC
B.10.1 Characteristic Code for the DCU

B-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-33 Characteristic code for the DCU board

Code
Meaning
Description
Fiber type
Type of the fiber that the

DCU board works with
distance

compensation
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11DCU board is G.655LEAF-40. It indicates
that the DCU board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance
is 40 km.
NOTE
If the characteristic code contains various dispersion compensation distances, the symbol "&" is used to
separate each distance.
B.10.2 Characteristic Code for the GFU

The characteristic code for the GFU board contains two characters and two digits, indicating the
gradient of optical signals processed by the board.
Table B-34 Characteristic code for the GFU board
Code
Meaning
Description
First and second characters
The first and second

characters are always GF.
Gradient
Indicate the gradient of

optical signals.
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11GFU board is GF10. This code indicates that
the gradient of optical signals processed by the board is 10.
B.10.3 Characteristic Code for the TDC

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

B-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table B-35 Characteristic code for the TDC board

Code
Meaning
Description
Fiber type
Fiber type that the TDC

board is compatible with
distance

compensation
For example, the characteristic code for the TN11TDC board is G.655LEAF_T. It indicates that
the TDC board works with G.655LEAF fibers, and the dispersion compensation distance is
tunable.
B-26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

C Quick Reference Table of the Units
Quick Reference Table of the Units
Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical
amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards.
C.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification
The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards
include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
C.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification
The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range,
channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output
power of a single wavelength.
C.3 Other Unit Specification
The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board.
C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio
Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory
signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service
performance monitoring of the optical signals.
C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are
wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different types of loopback.
C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function.
C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

C.1 OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line Boards Specification

The main specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards and line boards
include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
C.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side
The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) include the access
service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
C.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side
The main WDM-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards
and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module
type.
C.1.1 OTUs and Tributary Boards Specification on the Client Side

The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit (OTU) include the access
service type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
Table C-1 Quick reference table for client-side specifications of OTU boards
Board
Name
TN11ECO
M
TN11L4G
C-2
Access Service
Type
FE
GE
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
100 BASEFX-10 km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
100 BASEFX-40 km
-4.5
-20
-3
100 BASEFX-80 km
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11LDG
D
TN11LDG
S
Access Service
Type
GE
GE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate-40km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate-80km
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate-40km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate-80km
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate-40km
-19
-3

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
C-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN12LDM
Access Service
Type
C-4
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate-80km
-28
-9
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
TN11LDM
D
Optical Module

eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
TN11LDM
S
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

eSFP
CWDM
C-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Access Service
Type
C-6
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
OC-192/
STM-64/ 10GE
LAN/ 10GE
WAN/ OTU2/
OTU2e
10Gbit/s
multirate-10km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(Multirat
e)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10Gbit/s
multirate-40km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
10Gbit/s singlerate-0.3km
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10Gbit/s
multirate-80km
-24.0
-7
800 ps/nm
-3
-27
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
TN12LDX
Optical Module

eSFP
CWDM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11LEM
24
Access Service
Type
FE/GE
10GE WAN/
10GE LAN
TN11LEX
4
TN11LOG
TN12LOG
TN11LOM
TN12LOM
10GE WAN/
10GE LAN
GE
GE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
1000BASESX,I-850-LC
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000BASELX,I-1310-LC
-3
-9.5
-20
10GBASE-SR
(SFP+)
(multimode)
-1
-7.3
-11.1
-1
10GBASE-LR
(SFP+) (single
mode)
0.5
-8.2
-14.4
0.5
10GBASE-SR
(SFP+)
(multimode)
-1
-7.3
-11.1
-1
10GBASE-LR
(SFP+) (single
mode)
0.5
-8.2
-14.4
0.5
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
SFP+
SFP+
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
C-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Access Service
Type
FC 100/ FC 200/
FC 400/ FICON/
FICON Express
GE/ FC 100/ FC
200
TN11LQG
C-8
GE
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
FC 400 moduleMultimode
-1
-9
-14
FC 400 moduleSingle-mode
-2
-8
-16
FC 100/
FICON/ FC
200/ FICON
Express
moduleMultimode
-2.5
-9.5
-17
FC 100/
FICON/ FC
200/ FICON
Express
module-Singlemode
-3
-10
-18
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN13LQM
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
TN11LQM
D
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
C-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN12LQM
D
TN11LQM
S
TN12LQM
S
C-10
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
OTU1b/
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
FC100/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
FE/ DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI

eSFP
CWDM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
OTU1b/
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
TN11LSQ
STM-256/
OC-768/ OTU3
Transponder
-5
TN11LSX
OC-192/
STM-64/ 10GE
LAN/ 10GE
WAN/ OTU2/
FC1200a
10Gbit/s
multirate-10km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(Multirat
e)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10Gbit/s
multirate-40km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
TN12LSX
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

eSFP
CWDM
C-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN13LSX
Access Service
Type
OC-192/
STM-64/ 10GE
LAN/ 10GE
WAN/ OTU2/
FC1200a
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
10Gbit/s
multirate-80km
-24.0
-7
10Gbit/s
multirate-10km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(Multirat
e)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
10Gbit/s
multirate-40km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10Gbit/s
multirate-80km
-24.0
-7
800 ps/nm
-3
-27
Optical
Module
Type
XFP
TN11LSX
L
STM-256/
OC-768
Transponder
-5
TN12LSX
L
STM-256/
OC-768/ OTU3
Transponder
-5
TN11LWX
2
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
C-12

eSFP
CWDM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11LWX
D
TN11LWX
S
TN12LWX
S
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
ETR/ CLOc/
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
ETR/ CLO/ GE/

FC100/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
FE/ DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Optical
Module
Type
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
C-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11TMX
TN12TMX
TN11TBE
Access Service
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
ETR/ CLO/
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
STM-16/ OC-48/
OTU1 (without
FEC)
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
CWDM
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
100 BASEFX-1310
nm-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
eSFP
100 BASEFX-1550
nm-80km
-2
-22
-3
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
FE
GE/ 10GE LAN/

10GE WAN
C-14
Optical Module

eSFP
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11TDG
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
10Gbit/s
multirate-10km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(Multirat
e)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
10Gbit/s
multirate-40km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10Gbit/s
multirate-80km
-24
-7
FE/ GE/ 10GE

LAN/ 10GE
WAN
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
GE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate-40km
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate-80km
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

Optical
Module
Type
XFP
eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
eSFP
CWDM
C-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11TDX
TN12TDX
TN52TDX
TN52TOG
TN11TOM
TN52TOM
Access Service
Type
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
10Gbit/s
multirate-10km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(Multirat
e)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
10Gbit/s
multirate-40km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10Gbit/s
multirate-80km
-24
-7
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2
GE
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
C-16
Optical Module

Optical
Module
Type
XFP
eSFP
eSFP
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11TQM
TN12TQM
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
FC200/GE/
FC100/ FE
2.125 Gbit/s
multirate
-2.5
-9.5
-17
eSFP
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1000 BASELX-10km
-3
-11.5
-19
-3
1000 BASELX-40km
-4.5
-20
-3
1000 BASEZX-80km
-2
-22
-3
OTU1b/
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
GE/ FC100/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ FE/
DVB-ASI
1.25 Gbit/s
multirate
-19
-3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

eSFP
CWDM
eSFP
CWDM
C-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11TQS
TN11TQX
TN52TQX
TN11TSX
L
C-18
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
Optical
Module
Type
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
OTU1/ STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/ STM-1/
DVB-ASI/ FE
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
DWDM
STM-16/ OC-48/
OTU1
I-16
-3
-10
-18
-3
eSFP
S-16.1
-5
-18
L-16.1
-2
-27
-9
L-16.2
-2
-28
-9
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
eSFP
CWDM
10Gbit/s
multirate-10km
-1
-6
-11
(multirate
)/-14.4
(10GE
LAN)
-1
(Multirat
e)/0.5
(10GE
LAN)
XFP
10Gbit/s
multirate-40km
-1
-14
(multirate
)/-15.8
(10GE
LAN)
-1
-1.3
-7.3
-7.5
-1
10Gbit/s
multirate-80km
-24
-7
40G
Transponder
-5
10GE LAN/
10GE WAN/
STM-64/
OC-192/OTU2
STM-256/
OC-768

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN53TSX
L
Access Service
Type
STM-256/
OC-768/OTU3
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
40G
Transponder
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximu
m (dBm)
Minimu
m
(dBm)
Receiver
Sensitivi
ty (dBm)
Minimu
m
Overloa
d Point
(dBm)
-5
Optical
Module
Type
a: Only TN12LSX/TN13LSX supports FC1200 service.

b: Only TN12LQMD/TN12LQMS/TN12TQM support OTU1 service.
c: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/CLO services.
C.1.2 OTUs and Line Boards Specification on the WDM Side

The main WDM-side specifications of the optical transponder units (OTUs), tributary boards
and line boards include the access service type, optical module specifications and optical module
type.
Table C-2 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of OTU boards
Board Name
TN11L4G
TN11LDGD
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
OTU 5G/FEC
5G
3400 ps/nm
3400 ps/nmtunable
STM-16/OTU1
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
-2
-25
-9
-3
-25
-9
12800 ps/nmPIN
-4
-8
-18
12800 ps/nmAPD
-4
-8
-28
-9
6500 ps/nm-PIN
-5
-18
3200 ps/
nm-2mW-APD
-5
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmtunable
-5
-28
-9

C-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN11LDGS
Access Service
Type
STM-16/OTU1
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
6400 ps/nmfour

channelstunable
-5
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmPIN
-1
-5
-18
12800 ps/nmAPD
-1
-5
-28
-9
6500 ps/nm-PIN
-2
-18
3200 ps/
nm-2mW-APD
-2
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmtunable
-2
-28
-9
6400 ps/nmfour

channelstunable
-2
-28
-9
TN12LDM
OTU1
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
TN11LDMD
OTU1
12800 ps/nmAPD
-4
-8
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmtunable
-5
-26
-9
6400ps/nmtunable
-5
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmAPD
-1
-5
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmtunable
-2
-26
-9
6400ps/nmtunable
-2
-28
-9
TN11LDMS
OTU1
TN12LDX
OTU2/OTU2e
800 ps/nm
-3
-27
TN11LEM24
OTU2
800 ps/nm (XFP)
-3
-16
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10km
-1
-6
-11
-1
C-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN11LEX4
TN11LOG
TN12LOG
TN11LOM
TN12LOM
Access Service
Type
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
OTU2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40km
-1
-14
-1
10Gbit/s
Multirate -80km
-24
-7
800 ps/nm (XFP)
-3
-16
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -10km
-1
-6
-11
-1
10 Gbit/s
Multirate -40km
-1
-14
-1
10Gbit/s
Multirate -80km
-24
-7
800 ps/nm
-3
-16
1200 ps/nmtunable-PIN
-3
-16
1200 ps/nmtunable-APD
-3
-26
-9
4800 ps/nmODB-tunable
-3
-26
-9
800 ps/nm-DRZtunable
-3
-16
800 ps/nm-fixed
-3
-16
800 ps/nm NRZ

tunable
-3
-27
800 ps/nm DRZ

tunable
-3
-27
800 ps/nm
-3
-27
800 ps/nm
-3
-16
-3
-16
-3
-26
-9
-3
-26
-9

C-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Access Service
Type
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
800 ps/nm-fixed
FEC 5G/
OTU5G
TN13LQM
TN11LQMD
TN11LQG
TN12LQMD
TN11LQMS
C-22
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
-3
-16
-3
-16
3400 ps/nm
-2
-25
-9
3400 ps/nmtunable
-3
-25
-9
OTU1
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
OTU1
12800 ps/nmPIN
-4
-8
-18
12800 ps/nmAPD
-4
-8
-28
-9
6500 ps/nm-PIN
-5
-18
3200 ps/
nm-2mW-APD
-5
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmtunable
-5
-28
-9
6400 ps/nmfour

channelstunable
-5
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmAPD
-4
-8
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmtunable
-5
-26
-9
6400ps/nmtunable
-5
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmPIN
-1
-5
-18
12800 ps/nmAPD
-1
-5
-28
-9
6500 ps/nm-PIN
-2
-18
3200 ps/
nm-2mW-APD
-2
-28
-9
OTU1
OTU1

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN12LQMS
TN11LSQ
TN11LSX
TN12LSX
TN13LSX
TN11LSXL
TN12LSXL
Access Service
Type
OTU1
OTU3
OTU2/OTU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
OTU3
OTU3
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
12800 ps/nmtunable
-2
-28
-9
6400 ps/nmfour

channelstunable
-2
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmAPD
-1
-5
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmtunable
-2
-26
-9
6400ps/nmtunable
-2
-28
-9
ODB- tunable
-5
-16
DQPSK- tunable
-5
-16
800 ps/nm
-3
-16
-3
-16
-3
-26
-9
-3
-26
-9
-3
-16
800 ps/nm-fixed
-3
-16
800 ps/nm NRZ

tunable
-3
-27
800 ps/nm DRZ

tunable
-3
-27
800 ps/nm
-3
-27
ODB- tunable
-5
-16
DRZ- tunable
-5
-16
ODB- tunable
-5
-16
DQPSK- tunable
-5
-16

C-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN11LSXLR
TN12LSXLR
TN11LSXR
TN11LWX2
TN11LWXD
C-24
Access Service
Type
OTU3
OTU3/OTU3e
OTU2/OTU2e
STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
ODB- tunable
-5
-16
DRZ- tunable
-5
-16
DQPSK- tunable
-5
-16
ODB- tunable
-5
-16
800 ps/nm
-3
-16
-3
-16
-3
-26
-9
-3
-26
-9
-3
-16
800 ps/nm-fixed
-3
-16
12800 ps/nmPINa
-1
-5
-18
12800ps/nmAPDa
-1
-5
-28
6500 ps/nm -PIN
-2
-18
3200 ps/nm
-2mW-APD
-2
-26
-9
6400 ps/nmfour

channelstunable
-2
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmPINa
-4
-8
-18
12800ps/nmAPDa
-4
-8
-28
6500 ps/nm -PIN
-5
-18
3200 ps/nm
-2mW-APD
-5
-26
-9

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN11LWXS
TN12LWXS
TN11TMX
TN12TMX
Access Service
Type
STM-16/
FC200/ FC100/
GE/ STM-4/
ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ FE/ ETR/
CLO
OTU2
OTU2
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
12800 ps/nmtunable
-5
-28
-9
6400 ps/nmfour

channelstunable
-5
-28
-9
12800 ps/nmPINa
-1
-5
-18
12800ps/nmAPDa
-1
-5
-28
6500 ps/nm -PIN
-2
-18
3200 ps/nm
-2mW-APD
-2
-26
-9
12800 ps/nmtunable
-2
-28
-9
6400 ps/nmfour

channelstunable
-2
-28
-9
800 ps/nm
-3
-16
-3
-16
-3
-26
-9
-3
-26
-9
-3
-16
800 ps/nm-fixed
-3
-16
800 ps/nm NRZ

tunable
-3
-27
800 ps/nm DRZ

tunable
-3
-27
800 ps/nm
-3
-27

C-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN11ND2
TN12ND2
TN52ND2
Access Service
Type
OTU2/OTU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
OTU2/OTU2e
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
800 ps/nmNRZ- fixed
-3
-16
800 ps/nm NRZ

tunable
-3
-16
800 ps/nm DRZ

tunable
-3
-16
800 ps/nm NRZ

tunable
-3
-16
800 ps/nm DRZ

tunable
-3
-16
800 ps/nm (XFP)
-3
-16
800 ps/nm NRZ

tunable
-3
-16
800 ps/nm DRZ

tunable
-3
-16
TN51NQ2
OTU2/OTU2e
NRZ- fixed
-3
-16
TN52NQ2
OTU2/OTU2e
800 ps/nm (XFP)
-3
-16
TN11NS2
OTU2
800 ps/nm
-3
-16
-3
-16
-3
-26
-9
-3
-26
-9
-3
-16
800 ps/nm-fixed
-3
-16
800ps/nm- NRZfixed
-3
-16
1200 ps/nm tunable- PIN
-3
-16
1200 ps/nm tunable-APD
-3
-26
-9
TN12NS2
C-26
OTU2/OTU2e

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN52NS2
Access Service
Type
OTU2/OTU2e
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched
Optical Power
Receiver
Sensitivit
y (dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
4800 ps/nm ODB- tunable
-3
-26
-9
800 ps/nmDRZ- tunable
-3
-16
800 ps/nm NRZ

tunable
-3
-16
800 ps/nm DRZ

tunable
-3
-16
TN11NS3
OTU3/OTU3e
DQPSK- tunable
-5
-16
TN52NS3/
TN54NS3
OTU3/OTU3e
ODB- tunable
-5
-16
DQPSK- tunable
-5
-16
a: The 12800 ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
b: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/ CLO services.
Table C-3 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of OTU boards
Board
Name
TN11ECO
M
Access Service
Type
GE
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical

Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
1.25 Gbit/s
Multirate
-19
-3
2.67 Gbit/s
Multirate
-28
-9
TN11LDG
D
STM-16/OTU1
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
-0.5
-28
-9
TN11LDG
S
STM-16/OTU1
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
2.5
-28
-9
TN12LDM
OTU1
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
TN11LQG
Access Service
Type
FEC 5G/OTU5G
Optical Module
Optical
Interface Type
Supported
Mean Launched Optical

Power
Receiver
Sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum
Overload
Point
(dBm)
Maximum
(dBm)
Minimum
(dBm)
5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP

CWDM)-50 km
-18
5 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP

CWDM)-70 km
-28
-9
TN13LQM
OTU1
2.67 Gbit/s
multirate
-28
-9
TN11LQM
D
OTU1
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
-0.5
-28
-9
TN11LQM
S
OTU1
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
2.5
-28
-9
TN11LWX
2
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
STM-1/ DVBASI/ SDI/ FE/
FICON/ FICON
Express
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
2.5
-28
-9
TN11LWX
D
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
FICON/ FICON
Express
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
-0.5
-28
-9
TN11LWX
S
STM-16/ FC200/
FC100/ GE/
STM-4/ ESCON/
FICON/ FICON
Express/ ETR/
CLO
1600 ps/
nm-4mW
2.5
-28
-9
TN12LWX
Sa
a: Only TN12LWXS supports ETR/ CLO services.
C-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

C.2 Optical Amplifying Unit Specification

The main specifications of the optical amplifier unit include the operating wavelength range,
channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum output
power of a single wavelength.
Table C-4 Quick reference table for optical amplifier unit
Board
Name
OAU100
DAS1/
OAU101
OAU102
OAU103
OAU105
Channel
Gain (dB)
16 to 25.5
20 to 31
20 to 31
24 to 36
23 to 34
Nomin
al
Chann
el Gain
(dB)
Input Power Range per Channel

(dBm)
Typical Input Power of a

Single Wavelength (dBm)
40 channels
80 channels
40 channels
80 channels
16
-32 to -14
-32 to -17
-14
-17
22
-32 to -20
-32 to -23
-20
-23
25.5
-32 to -23.5
-32 to -27.5
-23.5
-27.5
20
-32 to -16
-32 to -19
-16
-19
26
-32 to -22
-32 to -25
-22
-25
31
-32 to -27
-32 to -30
-27
-30
20
-32 to -19
-32 to -22
-19
-22
26
-32 to -25
-32 to -28
-25
-28
31
-32 to -30
-32
-30
-32
24
-32 to -20
-32 to -23
-20
-23
29
-32 to -25
-32 to -28
-25
-28
36
-32
-32
-32
-32
23
-32 to -16
-32 to -19
-16
-19
30
-32 to -23
-32 to -26
-23
-26
34
-32 to -27
-32 to -30
-27
-30
OBU101
201.5
20
-32 to -20
-32 to -23
-20
-23
OBU103
231.5
23
-32 to -19
-32 to -22
-19
-22
OBU104
171.5
17
-32 to -17
-32 to -20
-17
-20
OBU205
231.5
23
-24 to -16
-24 to -19
-16
-19
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table C-5 Quick reference table for CRPC

Board Name
Channel Gain (dB)
Maximum Pump Power

(dBm)
G.652 fiber
LEAF fiber
CRPC01
10
12
29
CRPC03
>10
NA
29.5
Table C-6 Quick reference table for HBA

Board
Name
HBA
Channel
Gain (dB)
291
Typical Input Power of a Single

Wavelength (dBm)
80
channels
40
channels
10
channels
Nominal
Input
Power
Range
(dBm)
-22
-19
-13
-25 to -3
Channel Allocation
(nm)
1529 to 1561
C.3 Other Unit Specification

The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board.
Table C-7 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards
Board Name
Insertion Loss (dB)
TN11MR2/TN21MR2
IN-MO
1.0
MI-OUT
TN11MR4/TN21MR4
Add/drop channel
1.5
IN-MO
1.5
MI-OUT
TN11MR8
Add/drop channel
2.2
IN-MO
3.5
MI-OUT
TN11MR8V
Add/drop channel
IN-MO
MI-OUT
TN21CMR1
C-30
Add/drop channel
4.5
IN-MO
MI-OUT
0.8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TN11CMR2/TN21CMR2
Insertion Loss (dB)

Add/drop channel
IN-MO
1.0
MI-OUT
TN11CMR4/TN21CMR4
Add/drop channel
1.5
IN-MO
1.0
MI-OUT
TN11DMR1/
TN21DMR1
Add/drop channel
EIN-EMO
0.8
EMI-EOUT
WIN-WMO
WMI-WOUT
Add/drop channel
TN11SBM2
Add/drop channel
TN11D40
6.5
TN11D40V
8a
TN21DFIU
EIN-ETM
1.5
ERM-EOUT
WIN-WTM
WRM-WOUT
EIN-ETC
ERC-EOUT
WIN-WTC
WRC-WOUT
TN11FIU/TN12FIU/
TN13FIU/TN21FIU
IN-TM
1.5
RM-OUT
IN-TC
RC-OUT
TN11SFIU
LINE1-SYS1
1.0
LINE2-SYS2
LINE1-OSC1
1.5
LINE1-OSC2
TN11ITL01
RE-OUT
<4.5
RO-OUT
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Insertion Loss (dB)

IN-TE
<2.5
IN-TO
TN11ITL04
RE-OUT
<3
RO-OUT
IN-TE
<3
IN-TO
TN12ITL
RE-OUT
<4.5
RO-OUT
IN-TE
<3.5
IN-TO
TN11M40
6.5
TN11M40V
8a
TN11DCP
Transmit-end insertion
loss
Single mode 4
Receive-end insertion loss
Single mode 1.5
Multimode 4.5
Multimode 2
TN12DCP
TN11OLP
loss
Single mode 4
Single mode 1.5
loss
Single mode 4
Single mode 1.5
Multimode 4.5
Multimode 2
TN12OLP
TN11SCS
TN11RDU9
C-32
loss
Single mode
Multimode
1.5
Wavelength dropping
insertion loss
Single mode
Multimode
4.5
Wavelength adding
insertion loss
Single mode
Multimode
4.5
IN-Drop(DM1-DM8)
12.5
ROA-Drop(DM1-DM8)
11.5
IN-EXPO
12.5

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Insertion Loss (dB)

IN-TOA
EXPI-OUT
8.5
AMxb-TOA
12.5a
ROA-OUT
1.5
Mxc-OUT
9a
IN-DM
EXPI-OUT
14a
IN-EXPO
TN11WSD9/
TN12WSD9/TN13WSD9
IN-DMxd
8a
TN11WSM9/
TN12WSM9/
TN13WSM9
AMxb-OUT
TN11WSMD2
AMxb-OUT
8a
IN-DMxd
4.5
TN11WSMD4/
TN12WSMD4
AMxb-OUT
8a
TN11WSMD9
AMxb/EXPI-OUT
8a
IN-DMxd/EXPO
12
TN11RMU9
TN11ROAM
IN-EXPO
8a
EXPI-OUT
IN-DMxd
a: The value tested when the VOA attenuation is set to 0 dB.

b: AMx denotes AM1-AM8.
c: Mx denotes M1-M40.
d: DMx denotes DM1-DM8.
C.4 MON Interface Optical Split Ratio

Certain boards of WDM equipment provide MON interfaces. A small number of supervisory
signals are split from the main-path signals and are output through MON for in-service
performance monitoring of the optical signals.
Table C-8 lists the ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals
of each type of board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table C-8 Ratio of the optical power of signals at MON to that of the main-path signals of each type of board
Board Name
Ratio of MON Interface to Received

Signal in Main Path
Ratio of MON Interface to

Transmitting Signal in Main Path
CRPC
"MON"/"SYS" = 1/99 (20 dB)
D40
"MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB)
D40V
"MON"/"IN" = 10/90 (10 dB)
DAS1
"MONR"/"SOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
"MONT"/"LOUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
FIU
"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
HBA
"MON"/"OUT" = 1/999 (30 dB)
ITL
"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
M40
"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
M40V
"MON"/"OUT" = 10/90 (10 dB)
OAU1
"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
OBU1
"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
OBU2
"MON"/"OUT" = 1/99 (20 dB)
RDU9
"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)
RMU9
"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"TOA" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSD9
"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"EXPO" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSM9
"MONI"/"EXPI" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSMD2
"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSMD4
"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
WSMD9
"MONI"/"IN" = 3/97 (15 dB)
"MONO"/"OUT" = 3/97 (15 dB)
C.5 Basic Functions of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line

Boards
The main functions and features supported by OTUs, tributary boards and line boards are
wavelength conversion, cross-connection at the electrical layer, OTN interfaces and ESC.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table C-9.
C-34

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Table C-9 Basic functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board
Name
Tun
able
Wav
elen
gth
Fun
ctio
n
ESC
Func
tion
ALS
Func
tion
TN11EC
OM
TN11L4G
TN11LD
GD
TN11LD
GS
OTN
Func
tion
FEC Encoding
WDM
Specificatio
n
Opti
cal
Mod
ule
PRB
S on
the
Clie
nt
Side
PRB
S on
the
WD
M
Side
FEC
AFE
C
AFE
C-2
DW
DM
CW
DM
eSFP
eSFP
eSFP
eSFP
TN11LD
M
eSFP
TN11LD
MD
eSFP
TN11LD
MS
eSFP
TN12LD
X
XFP
TN11LE
M24
XFP/
SFP+
TN11LEX
4
XFP/
SFP+
TN11LO
G
eSFP
TN12LO
G
eSFP
TN11LO
M
eSFP
TN12LO
M
eSFP
TN11LQ
G
eSFP
TN13LQ
M
eSFP
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Tun
able
Wav
elen
gth
Fun
ctio
n
ESC
Func
tion
ALS
Func
tion
TN11LQ
MD
TN12LQ
MD
TN11LQ
MS
TN12LQ
MS
OTN
Func
tion
FEC Encoding
WDM
Specificatio
n
Opti
cal
Mod
ule
PRB
S on
the
Clie
nt
Side
PRB
S on
the
WD
M
Side
FEC
AFE
C
AFE
C-2
DW
DM
CW
DM
eSFP
eSFP
eSFP
eSFP
TN11LSQ
TN11LSX
XFP
TN13LSX
XFP
TN11LSX
L
TN12LSX
L
TN11LSX
LR
TN11LSX
R
XFP
TN11LW
X2
eSFP
TN11LW
XD
eSFP
TN11LW
XS
eSFP
eSFP
TN12LSX
TN12LSX
LR
TN12LW
XS
TN11TM
X
C-36

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Tun
able
Wav
elen
gth
Fun
ctio
n
ESC
Func
tion
ALS
Func
tion
TN12TM
X
TN11ND2
TN12ND2
TN52ND2
OTN
Func
tion
FEC Encoding
WDM
Specificatio
n
Opti
cal
Mod
ule
PRB
S on
the
Clie
nt
Side
PRB
S on
the
WD
M
Side
FEC
AFE
C
AFE
C-2
DW
DM
CW
DM
eSFP
XFP
TN51NQ2
XFP
TN52NQ2
XFP
TN54NQ2
XFP
TN11NS2
TN52NS2
TN11NS3
TN54NS3
TN11TBE
eSFP
XFP
TN11TD
G
eSFP
TN11TD
X
eSFP
eSFP
eSFP
TN12NS2
TN52NS3
TN12TD
X
TN52TD
X
TN11TO
M
TN52TO
M
TN11TQ
M
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Tun
able
Wav
elen
gth
Fun
ctio
n
ESC
Func
tion
ALS
Func
tion
TN12TQ
M
TN11TQS
TN11TQ
X
TN11TSX
L
OTN
Func
tion
FEC Encoding
WDM
Specificatio
n
Opti
cal
Mod
ule
PRB
S on
the
Clie
nt
Side
PRB
S on
the
WD
M
Side
FEC
AFE
C
AFE
C-2
DW
DM
CW
DM
eSFP
eSFP
XFP
TN53TSX
L
TN52TO
G
eSFP
TN52TQ
X
NOTE
l "Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function
l The SCC board can automatically detect that the eSFP and XFP modules are installed and online. The following information
about the modules can be obtained through a query on the U2000: VendorName, BarCode, and type of optical interface.
l The boards using different FEC codes cannot interconnect with each other.
C.6 Loopback Function of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line

Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support different types of loopback.
Table C-10 Loopback function of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board Name
Client-Side
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
Path loopback
ECOM
LDGD
LDGS
LDM
C-38

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Client-Side
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
Path loopback
LDMD
LDMS
LDX
LOG
LOM
LQG
LQM
LQMD
LQMS
LSQ
LSX
TN11LSXL
TN12LSXL
LSXLR
LSXR
LWX2
LWXD
LWXS
TMX
ND2
NQ2
NS2
NS3
TDG
TDX
TOG
TN11TOM
TN52TOM
TQM
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Client-Side
Inloop
Client-Side
Outloop
WDM-Side
Inloop
WDM-Side
Outloop
Path loopback
TQS
TQX
TSXL
NOTE
"Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
Table C-11 Loop function of the Ethernet boards

Board Name
Interface
Loop Mode
L4G
Client side
MAC inloop
PHY outloop
WDM side
Inloop
Outloop
TBE
10GE optical interface
MAC inloop
MAC outloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
GE optical interface
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
GE electric interface
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
FE optical interface
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
FE electric interface
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
LEM24
MAC inloop
MAC outloop
PHY inloop
C-40

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Interface
Loop Mode
PHY outloop
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
WDM side
Inloop
Outloop
LEX4
MAC inloop
MAC outloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
WDM side optical interface
Inloop
Outloop
Table C-12 Loop function of the Ethernet boards

Board Name
Interface
Loop Mode
L4G
Client side
MAC inloop
PHY outloop
WDM side
Inloop
Outloop
TBE
MAC inloop
MAC outloop
PHY inloop
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
Interface
Loop Mode
PHY outloop
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
MAC inloop
PHY inloop
PHY outloop
C.7 Protection mode of OTUs, Tributary Boards and Line

Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support protection function.
For detailed protection mode, refer to Table C-13.
Table C-13 Protection mode of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards
Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
ntSide
1+1
Prote
ction
IntraBoard
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
ECOM
L4G
LDGD
LDGS
LDM
LDMD
C-42

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
ntSide
1+1
Prote
ction
IntraBoard
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
LDMS
LDX
LEM24
LEX4
LOG
LOM
LQG
LQM
LQMD
LQMS
LSQ
LSX
LSXL
Ya
LSXLR
LSXR
LWX2
LWXD
LWXS
TMX
ND2
NQ2
NS2
NS3
TBE
TDG
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board
Name
Protection Mode
SW
SNC
P
VLA
N
SNC
P
OD
Uk
SNC
P
Clie
ntSide
1+1
Prote
ction
IntraBoard
1+1
Protec
tion
OWS
P
Prote
ction
OD
Uk
SPRi
ng
Prot
ectio
n
Bo
ard
Le
vel
Pro
tect
ion
DB
PS
DL
AG
MS
SNCP
Tribut
ary
SNCP
TDX
TOG
TOM
TQM
TQS
TQX
TSXL
NOTE
a: The TN11LSXL does not support intra-board 1+1 protection.
NOTE
"Y" indicates that the OTU supports the function. "N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
C.8 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, Tributary Boards

and Line Boards
The OTUs, tributary boards and line boards support electrical cross-connection.
For detailed electrical cross-connection functions, refer to Table C-14, Table C-15 and Table
C-16.
Table C-14 Electrical cross-connection of OTUs, tributary boards and line boards in OptiX OSN 8800
Board Name
Electrical Cross-Connection
LDM
LDMD
LDMS
LDX
LEM24
LEX4
C-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
LOG
LOM
LQM
LQMD
LQMS
LSQ
LSX
LSXL
LSXLR
LSXR
LWXS
TMX
ND2
16 x ODU0/8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e
NQ2
NS2
NS3
32 x ODU0/16 x ODU1/4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e/1 x ODU3/1 x ODU3e

NOTE
Only the TN54NS3 supports ODU3/ODU3e.
TDX
2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e
TOM
8 x ODU0/4 x ODU1
TQX
4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
TOG
8 x ODU0
TSXL
1 x ODU3
"N" indicates that the OTU does not support the function.
Board Name
Integrated Cross-Connection
Distributed Cross-Connection
ECOM
1 x GE
1 x GE
L4G
4 x GE
4 x GE
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
LDGD
2 x GE
2 x GE
LDGS
2 x GE
2 x GE
LDM
LDMD
LDMS
LDX
LEM24
2 x 10GE
LEX4
2 x 10GE
LOG
8 x GE
8 x GE
LOM
LQG
4 x GE
4 x GE
LQM
4 x GE
4 x Any/ 4 x GE/1 x OTU1
LQMD
4 x GE
LQMS
4 x GE/1 x ODU1
LSQ
LSX
LSXL
LSXLR
LSXR
LWX2
LWXD
LWXS
TMX
ND2
8 x ODU1/2 x ODU2/2 x ODU2e
NQ2
NS2
4 x ODU1
NOTE
It is supported by TN11NS2.
NS3
4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
TBE
16 x GE
C-46

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
TDG
2 x GE/1 x ODU1
2 x GE/1 x ODU1
TDX
8 x ODU1
TOG
4 x ODU1
4 x ODU1/
TN11TOM
8 x GE/4 x ODU1
8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any/4 x ODU1
TN52TOM
4 x ODU1
8 x GE/1 x OTU1/8 x Any
TQM
4 x GE/1 x ODU1
4 x GE/4 x Any/1 x ODU1/1 x OTU1
TQS
4 x ODU1
4 x ODU1
TQX
4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
TSXL
4 x ODU2/4 x ODU2e
Board Name
ECOM
1 x GE
L4G
4 x GE
LDGD
2 x GE
LDGS
2 x GE
LDM
LDMD
LDMS
LDX
LOG
8 x GE
LOM
LQG
4 x GE
LQM
4 x Any/4 x GE
LQMD
4 x Any/4 x GE
LQMS
4 x Any/4 x GE
LSX
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

C-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Board Name
LSXR
LWX2
LWXD
LWXS
TMX
NS2
4 x ODU1
TBE
16 x GE
TDG
2 x GE/1 x ODU1
TDX
8 x ODU1
TOG
4 x ODU1
TOM
8 x GE/8 x Any/4 x ODU1
TQM
4 x Any/1 x ODU1
TQS
4 x ODU1
C-48

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D Parameter Reference
Parameter Reference
D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface)

D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface)
D.5 Client Side Service Bearer Rate (M) (WDM Interface)
D.6 Current Bearer Ratio (M) (WDM Interface)
D.7 Default VLAN ID
D.8 Enable Port
D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression
D.10 Enabling LCAS
D.11 Entry Detection
D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)
D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface)
D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)
D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface)
D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.18 Hardware REG Enabled
D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM
Interface)
D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)
D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m)
D.22 Laser-in-Position Status
D.23 LCAS Mode
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.24 Line Rate

D.25 Loop Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute)
D.26 Loop Port Shutdown (Ethernet Port Attribute)
D.27 Loopback (WDM Interface)
D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface)
D.29 MAC Loopback
D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.31 Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)
D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.34 Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.35 Minimum Number of Members in the Transmit Direction
D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface)
D.37 MSP Sharing
D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode
D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM Interface)
D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface)
D.44 PHY Loopback
D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)
D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) (WDM Interface)
D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)
D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)
D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)
D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface)
D.52 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface)
D.54 TSD (LCAS)
D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
D.56 VLAN Priority
D-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.1 Automatic Laser Shutdown (WDM Interface)

Description
The Automatic Laser Shutdown parameter determines whether to automatically shut down the
This parameter is applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.
Impact on the System

If the automatic laser shutdown function is enabled, the services of the optical interface may be
interrupted.
Values
OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled for client-side optical interfaces, and Disabled for

WDM-side optical interfaces.
The following table lists the description of each value.

Value
Description
Enabled
After the received signal is lost, the laser is automatically shut

down and stops emitting optical signals. This can prolong the
life span of the laser and avoid injuries to relevant personnel.
l Enable the automatic laser shutdown function for the
transmit optical interface on the client side: When there is
no optical signal input to the receive optical interface on
any WDM side of an OTU, the transmit optical interface
on the client side shuts down the laser automatically. When
there is no optical signal input to the receive optical
interface on a client side of the OTU at the peer end, the
transmit optical interface on the corresponding client side
of the OTU at the local end shuts down the laser
automatically.
Disabled
D-4
After the received signal is lost, the laser is not shut down
automatically. The parameter is usually set to Disabled during
commissioning.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Configuration Guidelines
l
In the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800:
Only the LWX2, LWXD and LWXS support the Automatic Laser Shutdown function of
the WDM side.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 doesn't support the LWX2 and LWXD boards.
Relationship with Other Parameters

None.
D.2 Board Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The Board Mode parameter is used to set the work mode of a board depending on the application
scenario.
NOTE
For TN52TOM, this parameter is named as Board Working mode.

The signal flow, work mode, and functions of the board vary with the board mode. Hence, the
switching between different board modes interrupts the active services.
Values
The following table lists the work modes of the ECOM board.
Value Range
Default Value
Service Mode, HUB Mode
HUB Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the ECOM board.
Parameter Value
Remarks
Service Mode
Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x GE service.
HUB Mode
Supports converging 8 x FE services to 1 x FE service.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN12LQMS board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value Range
Default Value
NS1 Mode, LQM Mode
LQM Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12LQMS board.
Parameter Value
Remarks
NS1 Mode
As a line board, this board adds and drops OTU1 signals in

conjunction with another tributary board.
LQM Mode
As a tributary/line integrated board, this board converges four

channels of Any signals into a channel of OTU1 signals.
NOTE
The NS1 Mode is valid only when the TN12LQMS is housed in the OptiX OSN 6800 subracks or OptiX
OSN 3800 subracks.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN11TOM.

Value Range
Default Value
Cascading Mode, Non-cascading Mode
Non-cascading Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11TOM.
Parameter Value
Remarks
Cascading Mode
Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM side

optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to six
channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals.
Non-cascading Mode
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Any
signals into two channels of OTU1 signals.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN52TOM.

Value Range
Default Value
Cascading, Non-Cascading
Non-Cascading
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN52TOM.
D-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Parameter Value
Remarks
Cascading
Only RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM side

optical ports. The board supports multiplexing up to six
channels of Any signals into one channel of OTU1 signals.
Non-Cascading
RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 can be used as WDM-side optical ports.

The board supports multiplexing up to four channels of Any
signals into two channels of OTU1 signals.
The following table lists the work modes of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/TN12LSXLR.

Value Range
Default Value
Electrical Relay Mode, Optical Relay Mode
Electrical Relay Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN11LSXR/TN11LSXLR/
TN12LSXLR.
Parameter Value
Remarks
In the case of an optical-layer system, however, the

regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Optical Relay Mode
The following table lists the work modes of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3.

Value Range
Default Value
Line Mode, Electrical Relay Mode, Optical

Relay Mode
Line Mode
The following table lists the description of each value of the TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN54NQ2/
TN54NS3.
Parameter Value
Remarks
Line Mode
The board works as a line board.
The board works as a wavelength conversion relay unit.

In the case of an optical-layer system, however, the
regeneration mode must be set to Optical Relay Mode.
Optical Relay Mode
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Select the board mode according to the actual service application scenario.

None.
D.3 Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold

Description
The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter specifies the percentage of broadcast
traffic in the bandwidth of a port. The broadcast packets beyond this percentage will be discarded.

After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the flow of broadcast packets will be limited
according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified
threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
1-10
D-8
Value
Description
Indicates that the broadcast packets can

account for 10% of the bandwidth of a port to
the maximum.

the maximum.

the maximum.

the maximum.

the maximum.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description

the maximum.

the maximum.

the maximum.

the maximum.
10

account for 100% of the bandwidth of a port
to the maximum.

This parameter is available only when Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression is set to
Enabled.
D.4 Channel Use Status (WDM Interface)

Description
The Channel Use Status parameter sets the occupancy status of the current channel of a board.
The value can be set.
Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.

When it is set to Unused, no alarm on the optical interface is reported.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Used, Unused
Used

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
Used
Indicates that the current channel is used.
Unused
Indicates that the current channel is not used.
l
This parameter is set to Used by default.
Set this parameter to Unused when the current channel is not used for the moment.
When a channel is not used, you need to disable the laser of the channel. Otherwise, the
laser forcibly enabled alarm is reported.

This parameter can be changed from Unused to Used only when Automatic Laser
Shutdown is set to Disabled.
D.5 Client Side Service Bearer Rate (M) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Client Side Service Bearer Rate (M) parameter sets the rate of the accessed service at the
optical interface on the client side of a board.
This parameter applies to the client side of the optical transponder board.

A SPEED_OVER alarm is reported when the rate of actually accessed services exceeds the set
value.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
The specific value range is

related to the board.
The specific value is related

to the board.
Mbit/s
The bearer rate of client-side services can be set only when the type of the client-side services
is set to Any. The set value should be consistent with the rate of the actually accessed services.

None.
D-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.6 Current Bearer Ratio (M) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Current Bearer Ratio (M) parameter provides an option to query the rate of services
accessed at the optical interface on the client side for the OTUs at any rate.
Applicable to the client side of the optical transponder board.

None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
16-2500
Mbit/s
None.

None.
D.7 Default VLAN ID

Description
The Default VLAN ID parameter specifies a default VLAN ID to a port that transmits untagged
packets.

The default VLAN ID of a packet will be stripped when it traverses a HYBRID port.
Values
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value Range
Default Value
1-4095

D-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

None.

None.
D.8 Enable Port

Description
The Enable Port parameter determines whether to enable a port. A port can receive services if
this parameter is set to Enabled but cannot receive services if this parameter is set to
Disabled.

The attributes of a port take effect only after the port is enabled. If a port is disabled, the attributes
of the port will be invalid and the service at this port will be interrupted.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled

Value
Description
Enabled
Enables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the

port take effect.
Disabled
Disables a port. In this case, the attributes configured for the

port becomes invalid and the service at the port is interrupted.
None.

None.
D-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.9 Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression

Description
The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter determines whether to suppress the
traffic of broadcast packets.

After suppression of broadcast packets is enabled, the traffic of broadcast packets will be limited
according to the specified threshold. If the traffic of the broadcast packets exceeds the specified
threshold, the excess broadcast packets will be discarded.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Disabled, Enabled
Disabled

Value
Description
Enabled
Indicates that the traffic of broadcast packets

is not limited.
Disabled
Indicates that excess broadcast packets will

be discarded if the traffic of broadcast packets
exceeds the specified threshold.
Set this parameter only when you need to limit the traffic of broadcast services.

Suppression of broadcast packets is implemented only when this parameter is set to Enabled.
D.10 Enabling LCAS

Description
The Enabling LCAS parameter can increase or decrease the SDH network capacity without
affecting the service. The capacity is automatically decreased if a member fails, and is
automatically increased if the member recovers.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


As a bidirectional protocol, the LCAS can work normally only when some bandwidth is available
in the bidirectional physical paths. If the bandwidth is available in the unidirectional physical
paths only, the LCAS may fail to correctly adjust the bandwidth.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled

Value
Description
Disabled
Disables the LCAS protocol.
Enabled
Enables the LCAS protocol.
You can set Enabling LCAS as required.

None.
D.11 Entry Detection

Description
The Entry Detection parameter determines whether a port detects packets by tag identifier.

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled

D-14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
Enabled
Enables a port so that the port detects packets by tag identifier.
Disabled
Disables a port so that the port does not detect packets by tag
identifier. In this case, all packets can traverse the port.
None.

The entry detection states of the ingress and egress ports of a service must be the same.
D.12 Ethernet Working Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The Ethernet Working Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of the Ethernet.

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Auto-Negotiation, 1000M Full-Duplex
Vary with different boards
l
This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to Ethernet service.
The Ethernet working mode must be consistent with the mode set for the upstream services
of the customer.
If two ports are mutually protected, the Ethernet working mode must be consistent on the
active and standby ports.

None.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.13 FC Distance Extension (WDM Interface)

Description
A flow control mechanism is applied between FC service client-side equipment and between
two FCE boards to provide the far-reaching function of FC services, which ensures that the
bandwidth does not decrease during long haul transmission of FC services. The FC Distance
Extension parameter indicates whether the FC distance extension function is enabled.

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled

Parameter Value
Remarks
Enabled
Indicates the normal state. Loopback is not required when the

equipment normally operates.
Disabled
Indicates the loopback state in which the signals are looped

from the output optical interface back to the input optical
interface of the same equipment at the local end.
If the distance between the transmit and receive ends of FC services exceeds the maximum
transmission distance that the FC switch supports, the value of the parameter must be set to
Enabled.

This parameter is valid only when the Service Type parameter is set to FC services.
D.14 FEC Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The FEC Mode parameter sets the FEC mode of the current optical interface.
D-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Different FEC modes have different capabilities of enhancing the SNR of the optical signal at
the receive end and support different extended distances of the repeater section.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
FEC, AFEC
Value
Description
FEC
Indicates a technology of coding error correction. It can

correct bit errors generated in signal transmission.
AFEC
Indicates a new technology of coding error correction. It is

suitable for correcting burst bit errors. The AFEC coding
technology has stronger error correction capabilities than the
FEC.
FEC Mode of two interconnected boards must be the same.
According to the network design, set FEC Mode to a proper value.
In the case of expansion of an existing network or proper OSNR, FEC is recommended; in the
case of comparatively poor network performance and high OSNR requirement, AFEC is
recommended.

This parameter is available only when you set FEC Working State to Enabled.
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800, this parameter is automatically set to AFEC when you set
Service Type to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping to Bit Transparent Mapping(10.7G).
D.15 FEC Working State (WDM Interface)

Description
The FEC Working State parameter determines whether to enable or disable the forward error
correction (FEC) function of the current optical interface.
Applicable to the WDM side of the optical transponder board.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Disabling the FEC function affects the transmission distance.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
The specific value is related to the board.

Value
Description
Enabled
Indicates enabling the FEC function of a board.
Disabled
Indicates disabling the FEC function of a board.
The FEC Working State parameter on the transmit end must be consistent with that on the
receive end. Otherwise, this parameter is invalid.
NOTE
Two OTUs with different FEC working states can be interconnected.
D.16 Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter sets or queries the output optical power of
an optical amplifier board.

Changing the value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) directly influences the optical power
of each wavelength on the line.
Values
D-18
Value Range
Default Value
5 dBm-30 dBm (continuously tunable)
None.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Normally, the fixed pump optical power of the CRPC and ROP board should be larger than 23
dBm. The value is related to the system specifications.

Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) must be set within a range between Min. Fixed Pump
Optical Power (dBm) and Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm). If the fixed pump optical
power value is beyond the range, the board might work abnormally.
D.17 Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Gain (dB) parameter queries the gain of an optical amplifier board, namely, the difference
of the output power (dBm) to the input power (dBm).

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
20.0-40.0
None
dB
None.

This parameter is different from the Nominal Gain parameter. The Nominal Gain parameter
indicates the gain of the signal optical power, excluding the noise power. The Gain parameter,
however, is only related to the power and includes the noise power. Therefore, if the noise power
occupies a large ratio and the input optical power is low, the gain queried exceeds the nominal
gain of the board.
D.18 Hardware REG Enabled

Description
The Hardware REG Enabled parameter provides an option for enabling or disabling the
hardware regeneration function.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


After the hardware regeneration function is enabled, the service at an optical interface is affected.
Values
Valid Value
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled

Value
Description
Enabled
Optical signals are regenerated after being

received by the input optical interface, and
then they are directly sent to the downstream
board. This is similar to an outloop of the
signals between the input and output optical
interfaces.
Disabled
After receiving optical signals, an optical

interface processes the optical signals in a
usual way, like regenerating the signals and
processing the SDH overhead.
None.

None.
D.19 Initial Variance Value Between Primary and

Secondary Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Initial Variance Value Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB) parameter
provides an option to set the reference value of the optical power variance between the primary
and secondary input optical interfaces of a board.
D-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


l
In the OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800, this parameter functions
as the SD switching threshold reference value for optical line protection (OLP), OTU +
OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/DCP client-side 1+1 protection.
During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between
the primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold, SD switching
occurs. The initial variance value is an important factor in calculating the optical power
variance and affects the service switching.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
-10.0 to 10.0
dB
After the optical power of the system is commissioned and is normal, set this parameter according
to the primary and secondary input optical power and the following formula:
Initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power = Initial input optical power
of the primary optical interface - Initial input optical power of the secondary optical interface

l
The setting of the initial variance affects the calculation of the variance between current
primary and secondary input optical power. The formula for calculating the variance
between current primary and secondary input optical power is as follows:
Variance between current primary and secondary input optical power = current input power
of the primary optical interface - current input power of the secondary optical interface initial variance between primary and secondary input optical power
If the variance between current primary and secondary input optical power exceeds the
value of the Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Power (dB)
parameter, the protection switching occurs.
D.20 Laser Status (WDM Interface)

Description
The Laser Status parameter sets and queries the laser status of a board.
Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical supervisory channel board.

This parameter directly determines whether the corresponding optical interface outputs optical
signals. If this parameter is set to Off, services are interrupted.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Value Range
Default Value
On, Off
l WDM side: On
l Client side: Off

Value
Description
On
Indicates enabling the laser.
Off
Indicates disabling the laser.
l
Optical wavelength conversion unit

The normal service requires that the lasers on both WDM side and client side should
be opened.
When installing and commissioning OTUs, you must set the Laser Status parameter
to Off to protect the downstream boards.
In the case of the OTUs configured with intra-board 1 + 1 optical channel protection or
client-side 1 + 1 protection, whether to enable or disable the laser on the board client
side is controlled by the NE software automatically. No manual setting is required.
Optical amplifier board

In the case of the CRPC board, you can set optical interface parameters only when the
laser is disabled.
NOTE
After the commissioning, you must set the Laser Status parameter to On.
NOTE
In the case of the inter-board 1+1 protection and client-side protection realized by the SCS board, the lasers
on the active and standby OTUs on the client side are open and closed respectively in the case of normal
operation. You must not enable the disabled laser manually. Otherwise, services will be interrupted.
NOTE
The parameter value of Laser Status is not restored automatically by the U2000. That is, after the board
is replaced, the parameter value is set to the default value.

To forcibly enable the laser on the U2000 during commissioning, you need to set the Automatic
Laser Shutdown parameter to Disabled.
D-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.21 Laser Transmission Distance (m)

Description
The Laser Transmission Distance (m) parameter indicates the valid distance over which the
laser sends a signal. A line board uses pluggable optical module and the transmission distance
is determined by the type of the pluggable optical module.

This parameter has no impact on the system operation.
Values
Valid Value
Default Value
2000, 10000, 15000, 40000, 80000
The value of this parameter is subject to the type of the optical module. The following table lists
the values of this parameter for different types of optical modules.
Optical Module Type
Value
I-64.1
10000
S-64.2b
40000
I-16
2000
S-16.1
15000
L-16.1
40000
L-16.2
80000
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.22 Laser-in-Position Status

Description
The Laser-in-Position Status parameter indicates whether the physical laser on the line board
is installed.

Values
Valid Value
Default Value

Value
Description
In-Position
Indicates that the physical laser on the line

board is installed.
Not-in-Position
Indicates that the physical laser on the line

board is not installed.
None.

None.
D.23 LCAS Mode

Description
The LCAS Mode parameter specifies the sequence for the sink end to respond to the MST and
Rs_Ack messages received from the source end.

The system operation is not affected.
D-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Values
Value Range
Default Value
Huawei Mode, Standard

Mode
Huawei Mode

Value
Description
Huawei Mode
Inverts the RS_Ack message, and then transmits the MST

message.
Standard Mode
Transmits the MST message, and then Inverts the RS_Ack

message.
To set the LCAS mode, follow the principles:
l
If the interconnected equipment at the two ends is Huawei equipment, select Huawei
Mode.
If Huawei equipment is interconnected to a third-party equipment, set the interconnected

equipment to the same mode according to the mode supported by the third-party equipment.

None.
D.24 Line Rate

Description
The Line Rate parameter provides an option to set the OTN line rate.

If the values of the Line Rate parameter for the transmit and receive boards are different, services
are unavailable.
Values
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value Range
Default Value
Standard Mode, Speedup Mode

D-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Value
Description
Speedup Mode
Set Line Rate for a board on the line to Speedup Mode

when the following conditions are satisfied.
l An OTU or a tributary board on the line transmits/
receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Mapping for the board is set to Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1 G).
l Line Rate for another board on the line is set to Speedup
Mode.
Standard Mode
Set Line Rate for a board on the line to Standard Mode

when the following conditions are satisfied.
l The conditions for setting Line Rate to Speedup
Mode and Speedup Mode 11.3G are not satisfied.
l Line Rate for another line board on the line is set to
Standard Mode.
l
This parameter should be set according to the actual service mapping mode and the optical
signal rate on the network.
This parameter must be set to the same value at the transmit and receive ends.
The values of the Line Rate parameter for the upstream and downstream boards must be
the same.
In the case of the LSXLR, LSXR, TN12ND2(Relay Mode), TN52ND2(Relay Mode),

TN54NQ2(Relay Mode), and TN54NS3(Relay Mode) boards, it is recommended that you
set Enable Auto-Sensing to Enabled. In this case, the system supports the FEC Type and
Line Rate of the received signals in auto-sensing mode, and thus no manual setting is
required.
Configuration examples:
l
Example 1:
As shown in Figure D-1, the 52ND2 works as a regeneration board.
When the 12LSX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Mapping for the 12LSX is set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G). In this case,
Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode.
In other cases, Line Rate for the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode.
D-26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Figure D-1 Example 1

M
U
X
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
12LSX
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
52ND2
D
M
U
X
12LSX
M
U
X
Example 2:
As shown in Figure D-2, the 52ND2(1) and 52ND2(3) work as line boards, and the 52ND2
(2) works as a regeneration board.
When the 52TDX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Speedup Mode.
In other cases, Line Rate for all the 52ND2 must be set to Standard Mode.
M
U
X
52ND2
(1)
52TDX
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
M
U
X
52ND2
(2)
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
52ND2
(3)
52TDX
Example 3:
As shown in Figure D-3, the 54NS3(1) and 54NS3(3) work as line boards, and the 54NS3
(2) works as a regeneration board.
When the 52TQX transmits/receives 10GE LAN services on the client side and Port
Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Speedup Mode.
In other cases, Line Rate for all the 54NS3 must be set to Standard Mode.
M
U
X
52TQX
54NS3
(1)
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
M
U
X
54NS3
(2)
D
M
U
X
D
M
U
X
M
U
X
54NS3
(3)
52TQX

l
LSXLR and LSXR: This parameter can be set only when Enable Auto-Sensing is set to
Enabled.
TN12ND2/TN52ND2/TN54NQ2/TN54NS3: This parameter can be set only when Board

Mode is set to Relay Mode and Enable Auto-Sensing is set to Disabled.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.25 Loop Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute)

Description
The Loop Detection (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter specifies the function of reporting
the self-loop alarms after one of the following loopback cases is detected.
l
For the external physical interface of the board, the transmit direction is connected to the
receive direction by a fiber.
The two external physical ports on the board are cross-connected to each other through
fibers.
The cross-connection is created on the same VCTRUNK of the board.
The cross-connection is created between different VCTRUNKs of the board.

After the self-loop check function is enabled for a port, the specified self-loop check packets are
transmitted from the port. One packet is transmitted each second.
Values
Valid Values
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
To check the self-loop port, select Enabled.

The loop port shut-down function takes effect only after the loop check function is enabled.
D.26 Loop Port Shutdown (Ethernet Port Attribute)

Description
The Loop Port Shutdown (Ethernet Port Attribute) parameter is set to disable the self-loop
port after a self-loop port is detected if the loop port shutdown function is enabled. After the
self-loop port is shut down, the self-loop port only transmits or receives the self-loop detection
packets rather than any other packets. If the port is not a self-loop port, it starts to work again.

If a port enables the loop port shut-down function, the IEEE 802.3ah protocol blocks the port
once the port is detected to be a self-loop port. In this case, the services at the port are interrupted.
All the packets based on the upper-level protocol are discarded.
D-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Values
Valid Values
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Enabled
To block a self-loop port, select Enabled. Otherwise, select Disabled.

The loop port shutdown function takes effect only after the IEEE 802.3ah protocol and the loop
detection function are enabled.
D.27 Loopback (WDM Interface)

Description
The Loopback parameter sets the loopback mode for the current optical interface of a board.
For optical wavelength conversion unit, WDM side/client side availability: WDM side, client
side

When the loopback mode is set to Inloop or Outloop, services are interrupted.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Outloop
Non-Loopback
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value
Description
Non-Loopback
Indicates that the equipment is normal. Optical interface

loopback is not required when the equipment runs normally.
Inloop
Loops the signals to be output from the output optical

interface back to the input optical interface of the same
equipment at the local end. Inloop is used to test whether the
signal processing on the board is normal.
D-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
Outloop
Directly loops the accessed signals of the local equipment

back to the corresponding output optical interface before
signal processing on the premise that the signal structure is
not changed. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber
lines and connectors.
Loopback is usually used for equipment commissioning and troubleshooting. Before adding
services to the equipment, you must check whether loopback is set for the optical interfaces. If
the loopback exists, release it immediately.
Outloop indicates a mode where the unprocessed signals accessed to the local-end equipment
are directly looped back to the corresponding output interface with the signal structure
unchanged. Outloop is used to test connections between fiber lines and connectors
The following figure shows the outloop configuration.
Type
Illustration
Client-side outloop of the

OTU
Outloop OTU
Client side
WDM-side outloop of the

OTU
WDM side
Line unit
WDM side
Inloop indicates that the processed signal is transmitted from the transmit port at the local end
and then looped back to the receive port at the local end. Inloop is used to test whether the signal
processing on the board is normal.
The following figure shows the inloop configuration.
D-30

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Type
Illustration
Client-side inloop of the

OTU
Inloop OTU
WDM side
Client side
WDM-side inloop of the

OTU
OTU
Client side
Inloop
WDM side

None.
D.28 LPT Enabled (WDM Interface)

Description
The LPT Enabled parameter determines whether to enable the link pass-through (LPT).

Enabling the LPT does not affect system running but makes it impossible to configure ALS
function.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
Value
Description
Enabled
Indicates that the link_err alarm of the upstream station is

transparently transmitted to the downstream station.

D-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
Disabled
Indicates that the link_err alarm of the upstream station is not

transmitted to the downstream station.
l
Enabling the LPT can support the system to transparently transmit link status. In this way,
the downstream station can determine the running status of the upstream station according
to whether the link_err alarm occurs, and thus adopts the corresponding working status.
Therefore, whether to enable the LPT depends on the actual network situation.
Before enabling the LPT, ensure the following:

The board to be configured is an Ethernet service (such as the GE service) board.
The services carried on the board are normal.
The services carried on the board are not configured with ALS function.

After services borne on the unit are configured with protection, this parameter must be set to
Disabled.
D.29 MAC Loopback

Description
The MAC Loopback parameter specifies the MAC loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the MAC
layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

A MAC loopback is used for fault locating but can interrupt services. When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the PHY Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the
PHY Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to NonLoopback.
Values
Board Name
Value Range
Default Value
TN11LEM24
Outloop
Non-Loopback
TN11LEX4

D-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
Non-Loopback
Indicates that no loopback is configured.
Inloop
Indicates that an internal loopback is configured. In the case

of an internal loopback, a port receives the packets sent by
itself.
Outloop
Indicates that an external loopback is configured. In the case

of an external loopback, a port transmits the packets after
receiving them.
l
For a GE optical port, GE electrical port, FE optical port, and FE electrical port, an MAC
loopback can be set to only inloop.
For a 10GE optical port, an MAC loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.
By default a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five

minutes.

This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.
D.30 Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Max. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the maximum attenuation rate allowed by

None.
Values
The value can be queried through the system.
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.31 Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM

Interface)
Description
The Max. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the maximum pump
optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed pump optical power value is
larger than the maximum value, the board might work abnormally.

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
5 dBm-30 dBm
l ROP: 28 dBm
l CRPC: 26 dBm
None.

If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) is larger than the value of Max.
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board might work abnormally.
D.32 Max. Packet Length (WDM Interface)

Description
The Max. Packet Length parameter sets and queries the maximum packet length supported by
a board and is applicable to the boards supporting Ethernet services.

For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800, if a data packet transparently transmitted by a board exceeds
the maximum packet length, the excess data is discarded.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
D-34

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value Range
Default Value
1518-9600
9600
None.

None.
D.33 Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameter queries the minimum attenuation rate allowed by

None.
Values
None.

None.
D.34 Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) (WDM

Interface)
Description
The Min. Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) parameter is used to query the minimum pump
optical power that an optical amplifier board can fix. If the fixed pump optical power value is
smaller than the minimum value, the board might work abnormally.

None.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Values
Value Range
Default Value
5 dBm-30 dBm
20 dBm
None.

If the configured value of Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm) is smaller than the value of Min.
Fixed Pump Optical Power (dBm), the board might work abnormally.
D.35 Minimum Number of Members in the Transmit

Direction
Description
When the LCAS is enabled, the LCAS_PLCT alarm is reported if certain members in the transmit
direction fail and the number of valid members is smaller than a certain value. The Minimum
Number of Members in the Transmit Direction parameter specifies the certain number of the
valid members in the transmit direction.

When the LCAS is enabled, failure of certain paths does not affect the service in the case of
sufficient bandwidths. The user can set this parameter to enable the reporting of the LCAS_PLCT
alarm only when the number of the valid members in the transmit direction is smaller than a
certain value.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
2-256
256
Set this parameter according to the actual requirement of the user.
D-36

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.36 Monitor Interval (min.) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Monitor Interval (min.) parameter provides an option to set the supervisory channel for
the current board and to analyze the time interval of the channel status.

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
5 to 49995
10
min
The default value is recommended.

None.
D.37 MSP Sharing

Description
The MSP Sharing parameter determines whether multiple multiplex section (MS) protection
groups can be configured at the same optical interface.

Values
Valid Value
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
Enabled
Indicates that multiple MS protection groups

can be configured at the same optical
interface.
Disabled
Indicates that only one MS protection group

can be configured at the same optical
interface.
Currently, an optical interface supports a maximum of two MS protection groups.

None.
D.38 Nominal Gain (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Nominal Gain (dB) parameter specifies the desired gain of the signal optical power. This
parameter is used to indicate the relative value between the optical power of output signals and
the optical power of input signals, namely, the amplifying multiple of the signal optical power.

Modifying this parameter directly affects the output power of all wavelengths passing through
the amplifier board.
Values
l
OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800
Value Range
Default Value
HBA: 29dB
The specific value is related to the module.
OAU101: 20dB to 31dB, continuously

tunable
tunable
tunable
tunable
OBU101: 20dB
OBU103: 23dB
OBU104: 17dB
OBU205: 23dB
D-38

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

l
Huawei provides many types of OAU boards. The different gain ranges of an OAU board
of the same type are applicable to different application scenarios. For example, the gain
range of the OAU101/02 is 20 dB to 31 dB. The gain range from 20 dB to 26 dB is applicable
to the application scenarios with the dispersion compensation module (DCM). The gain
range from 26 dB to 31 dB is applicable to the application scenarios without the DCM.
The gain range of the OAU103 is 24 dB to 36 dB and is mainly used in long-span links.
The gain range from 24 dB to 30 dB is used when the DCM is accessed. The gain range
from 31 dB to 36 dB is not recommended when the DCM is accessed.
Nominal gain of a board = Maximum gain of a board - Insertion loss between the TDC and
RDC. The range of the nominal gain is related to the input optical power.
If the intermediate insertion loss exceeds the maximum intermediate insertion loss of a
board, the board gain may not reach the nominal gain. In this case, the board locks the gain
according to the intermediate insertion loss.

The gain queried on the U2000 namely, the actually amplified signal optical power by the optical
amplifier board, or the actual gain measured through a meter may be different from the
configured nominal gain, because it is affected by device performance. This is because the optical
amplifier board actually locks the per-channel power instead of the total power. Noises are
generated when the power is amplified by the EDFA and the noise power is at a certain level.
In the case of high input power, the impact from the noise is small and the gain of the total power
is close to the per-channel gain. In the case of low input power, however, the impact from the
noise cannot be neglected. The total output power equals the sum of the signal optical power
and the noise power. The noise power and signal optical power can be assimilated because of
an increase in total gain. This is normal.
In the case of the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800, you can obtain the value range of the
Nominal Gain parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Upper Nominal Gain
Threshold (dB) and Lower Nominal Gain Threshold (dB) parameters.
D.39 Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Nominal Gain Lower Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the minimum
nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends
on the optical module type.

None.
Values
Queriable only.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

None.

None.
D.40 Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Nominal Gain Upper Threshold (dB) parameter provides an option to query the maximum
nominal gain of the optical amplifier unit (OAU). This parameter value cannot be set and depends
on the optical module type.

None.
Values
Queriable only.
None.

None.
D.41 Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode

Description
Non-Autonegotiation Flow Control Mode is selected when a port works in nonautonegotiation mode.

Non-autonegotiation flow control will be unable to take effect if this parameter is set incorrectly.
D-40

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Values
Board Name
Value Range
Default Value
TN11LEM24
Disabled, Enable Symmetric Flow

Control, Send Only, Receive Only
Disable
TN11LEX4

Value
Description
Disabled
Disables port flow control at both the transmit and receive

ends.
Enable Symmetric Flow

Control
Enables symmetric flow control frames (allows transmission

and receiving) in non-autonegotiation mode.
Send Only
Enables only transmission of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.
Receive Only
Enables only receiving of flow control frames in nonautonegotiation mode.
Set this parameter properly according to actual service configurations.

This parameter is available only when the working mode of an Ethernet port is Nonautonegotiation mode.
D.42 Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB)(WDM

Interface)
Description
The Optical Interface Attenuation Ratio (dB) parameter sets the optical power attenuation of
a board channel so that the optical power of the output signals at the transmit end is within the
preset range.

None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-41
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value Range
Default Value
Unit
Min. Attenuation Ratio Max. Attenuation Ratio
Max. Attenuation Ratio
dB
l
Optical multiplexer unit and optical demultiplexer unit

Before the commissioning, the attenuation ratio of each channel must be set to 5 dB.
Other board
The attenuation adjustment amplitude should not be very large.
It should be controlled within 2 dB compared with the original attenuation every time
the attenuation is adjusted in a new project.
During the expansion of a project or during maintenance, however, the attenuation
adjustment amplitude should be controlled within 0.5 dB compared with the original
attenuation when the attenuation is adjusted.

You can obtain the value range of this parameter of a board by querying the corresponding Max.
Attenuation Rate (dB) and Min. Attenuation Rate (dB) parameters.
D.43 Optical Switch No. (WDM Interface)

Description
The Optical Switch No. parameter provides an option to query the current working optical
interface of the multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA).

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
1-8
None.
D-42
The MCA supports 8-optical interface detection or 4-optical interface detection, depending
on the type of the MCA.
Before setting the MCA to monitor wavelengths, you are recommended to query this
parameter to confirm that the optical interfaces is available on the MCA.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


None.
D.44 PHY Loopback

Description
The PHY Loopback parameter specifies the PHY loopback state at an Ethernet port. With this
parameter, users can test whether equipment runs normally by creating a looped path at the PHY
layer and then sending and receiving signals over the path.

A PHY loopback is used for fault locating but interrupts services. When this parameter is set to
Inloop, the MAC Loopback parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback. When the MAC
Loopback parameter is set to Inloop, this parameter is automatically set to Non-Loopback.
Values
Board Name
Value Range
Default Value
TN11LEM24
Outloop
Non-Loopback
TN11LEX4

Value
Description
Non-Loopback
Indicates that no loopback is configured.
Inloop
Indicates that an internal loopback is configured. In the

case of an internal loopback, a port receives the packets
sent by itself.
Outloop
Indicates that an external loopback is configured. In the

case of an external loopback, a port transmits the
packets after receiving them.
l
For a GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for a GE electrical port,
a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
For a 10GE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
For an FE optical port, a PHY loopback can be set to only inloop; for an FE electrical port,
a PHY loopback can be set to either inloop or outloop.
An inloop and an outloop cannot be configured at the same time at a port.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-43
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

By default, a loopback is released automatically after it is configured at a port for five

minutes.

This parameter is available only when the Enable Port parameter is set to Enabled.
D.45 Planned Band Type (WDM Interface)

Description
The Planned Band Type parameter sets the band type of the current working wavelength.

The configured logical band must be consistent with the actual physical band. Otherwise, a
WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
C, CWDM

Value
Description
Indicates that the current working band is C band.
CWDM
Indicates that the current working band is CWDM band.
None.

None.
D-44

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.46 Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency

(THz) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Planned Wavelength No./Wavelength (nm)/Frequency (THz) parameter sets the
wavelength number, wavelength and frequency of the current optical interface on the WDM side
of a board.

If the wavelength is incorrectly set, the downstream services may not be normally received.
Values
C band
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
192.10 to 1196.05
(wavelength spacing: 50
GHz)
THz
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
1271 to 1611(wavelength
spacing: 20 nm)
nm
CWDM band
l
In the case of the OTUs with a fixed wavelength, set the actual wavelength of the
wavelength conversion board.
In the case of the OTUs with a variable wavelength, set the wavelength according to network
wavelength planning.
The same wavelength must be used for a service in the receive and the transmit directions.
If a service travels through multiple regeneration stations, it is recommended that these

regeneration sections use the same wavelength.
It is recommended that the active and standby channels use the same wavelength when the
inter-board channel protection or client-side path protection is configured.
The configured logical wavelength must be consistent with the actual physical wavelength.
Otherwise, a WAVEDATA_MIS alarm is reported.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-45
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

In the case of the optical tunable transponders, this parameter directly changes the physical
wavelength but cannot change the band.
In the case of the optical untunable transponders, this parameter can change the logical
wavelength only.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN 8800, OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 3800:
In the case of CWDM band, the two wavelengths 1271 nm and 1291 nm are not supported.

None.
D.47 Port Mapping (WDM Interface)

Description
The Port Mapping parameter sets and queries the mapping mode of a port service.

None.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Value Range
Default Value
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), MAC

Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), Bit Transparent
Mapping (10.7 G), Encapsulated to FEC5G,
Encapsulated to OTU5G
D-46
Value
Description
Bit Transparent Mapping

(11.1 G)
Supports transparent bit (11.1 G) transport for 10GE LAN

signals. In this port mapping mode, transmission of signals are
achieved by increasing the OTU frame frequency. This
ensures the encoding gain and correction capability of FEC.
In this mode, the bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s, which is higher than
the standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Value
Description
MAC Transparent Mapping

(10.7 G)
In this port mapping mode, 10GE LAN signals are

encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then are mapped into
standard OTU frames. This mode supports transparent
transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode,
the signals are encapsulated in standard OTU2 frames and the
bit rate of the signals is 10.71 Gbit/s. In addition, the FEC/
AFEC code pattern is applicable to 10GE LAN services in this
mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended for
10G SDH services.
Bit Transparent Mapping

(10.7 G)
Supports transparent bit (10.7 G) transport for 10GE LAN

signals. In this mapping mode, certain AFEC fields are used
for transmission of signals. In this mode, the bit rate of signals
is 10.71 Gbit/s. Thus, for the signals that adopt AFEC, the
encoding gain of AFEC is low and the correction capability
of AFEC is comparatively poor.
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
l
Services other than 10GE LAN do not require configuring the port mapping mode.
The port mapping mode of 10GE LAN services can be configured as "Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1 G)", "MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" or "Bit Transparent Mapping
(10.7 G)". Users can select a proper mapping mode according to the service transmission
requirements.
"Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" and "Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)" meet
customer requirement for transparent bit transport of 10GE LAN signals. If a 10GE LAN
signal is directly mapped into an OTU frame by means of bit transparent mapping, the
10GE LAN signal will overflow the OTU frame. Thus, to solve this problem, certain AFEC
fields are occupied by the 10GE LAN signal. This is why the AFEC encoding gain is low
and AFEC correction capability is comparatively poor for the signals in the AFEC field.
In the "Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)" mode, transmission of signals are achieved by
increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the encoding gain and correction
capability of FEC. In this mode, however, the bit rate is higher than the standard bit rate of
OTU2 signals.
"MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7G)" is specific to transparent transmission of 10GE MAC

frames as required by customers. In this port mapping mode, a 10GE LAN signal is
encapsulated in the GFP-F format and then mapped into a standard OTU frame. This mode
supports transparent transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this mode, the
signals are in standard OTU2 frames. In addition, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable
to 10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is intended
for 10G SDH services.
The port mapping modes of the upstream and downstream board must be the same.

For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-47
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

Set the Line Rate parameter to Standard Mode when the value of this parameter is MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).
Set the Line Rate parameter to Speedup Mode when the value of this parameter is Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1 G).
When the parameter value is changed from MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), FEC Mode
automatically changes to AFEC.
When the parameter value is changed from Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G) to MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) or Bit Transparent Mapping (10.7 G), FEC Mode
remains unchanged.
D.48 PRBS Test Status (WDM Interface)

Description
The PRBS Test Status parameter sets the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test status
of a board.
Applicable to the WDM side and client side of the optical transponder board.

The PRBS test belongs to the fault diagnosis function and affects channel services. After the
PRBS test is started, the services on the corresponding port are interrupted.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled

Value
Description
Enabled
Indicates enabling the PRBS test.
Disabled
Indicates disabling the PRBS test.
The PRBS test is only used for deployment commissioning. Set this parameter to Enabled during
network-wide commissioning and to Disabled after the deployment.
D-48

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


Different boards support different optical interface channels. After the command of enabling the
PRBS test is issued, an error is returned in case the optical interface channels do not support the
PRBS test.
D.49 Rated Optical Power (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Rated Optical Power (dBm) parameter provides an option to set and query the per-channel
rated optical power. It is a reference value for automatic adjustment of the optical power. When
the optical amplifier unit and ROADM unit are used in a network, this parameter is available
for the optical amplifier unit.

When the automatic adjustment of the optical power is enabled, this parameter affects the budget
of the optical power on the optical channel of the system.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
-30.0-30.0
The specific value is related

to the board
dBm
l
The rated input and output optical power should be configured according to the actual
configurable input and output range of the OAU and should be the same as the input and
output values measured when the OAU runs normally.

None.
D.50 SD Trigger Condition (WDM Interface)

Description
The SD Trigger Condition parameter sets the relevant alarms of certain optical interfaces or
channels of an OTU board as SD switching trigger conditions of the protection group in which
this OTU board resides.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-49
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


After this parameter is set, set SD Trigger Condition of the protection group in which the OTU
resides to Enabled. When the OTU receives alarms such as B1_SD, the system regards the
received alarms of the OTU as the switching trigger condition of the protection group. As a
result, switching occurs in the protection group.
Values
For OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800
Value Range
Default Value
B1_SD, OTUk_DEG,
ODUk_PM_DEG, None
None

Parameter Value
Remarks
B1_SD
Regeneration section (B1) signal degrade.
SM_BIP8_SD
OTUk signal degrad.
PM_BIP8_SD
ODUk_PM signal degrade.
None
No condition is configured for SD switching.
When SD switching is used against a small number of bit errors, the switching is rapidly
performed. Select the proper alarms as the switching trigger conditions depending on the service
status. The alarms, which can be selected as switching trigger conditions, at certain optical
interfaces and channels of a board vary with the board type. If one optical interface supports
various services, all the three alarms can be set as the SD switching conditions. When the service
type is changed, the board automatically counts the corresponding bit errors and reports an SD
alarm according to the actual service type.

This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable.
D.51 Service Mode (WDM Interface)

Description
The Service Mode parameter sets and queries the working mode of a board on the line side.
D-50

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


None.
Values
For the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG
Value Range
Default Value
OTN, SDH
OTN
For the ND2, NQ2, NS2 and NS3

Value Range
Default Value
ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, Automatic
Automatic
For the LQM, TN12LQMD, TN12LQMS, TOM, and TQM

Value Range
Default Value
Client Mode , OTN Mode
Client Mode
l
In the case of the L4G, LDGS, LDGD, and LQG boards: The mode of line-side services
of boards on an NE at the local end should be the same as that at the opposite end. When
a local-end board need be connected to an SDH service board of another product, the mode
of line-side services should be set to SDH.
In the case of the LQM, LQMD, LQMS, TOM, and TQM boards: When the client side
accesses OTN services, set this parameter to OTN Mode. When the client side accesses
other services, set this parameter to Client Mode.

None.
D.52 Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) (WDM

Interface)
Description
The Threshold of Input Power Loss (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input
optical power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (MUT_LOS) alarm.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-51
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

When the actual input optical power is lower than this threshold value, the board reports the
MUT_LOS alarm.
The alarm can be queried.

This parameter is used to determine whether the input optical power is lost for the protection
board, optical multiplexer unit and optical demultiplexer unit. If the optical power is lost, the
relevant alarm is reported. This facilitates fault diagnosis.
When the optical amplifier boards work in the gain locking mode, this parameter triggers the
boards to report the MUT_LOS alarm if the optical power is lost.
Values
Optical protection unit
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
-35.0 to -10.0
dBm
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
-46.0 to -23.0
dBm
Optical supervisory channel unit
For optical multiplexer unit, optical demultiplexer unit and amplifier board, the value can be
queried through the system.
l
Protection board
The default value is usually recommended, namely, -35 dB.
In special cases, you can set this parameter to any value within the allowed range
according to the actual situation.

None.
D.53 Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) (WDM Interface)

Description
The Threshold of Power Loss (dBm) parameter queries the threshold value of the input optical
power, which can trigger a board to generate an optical power loss (R_LOS) alarm.
D-52

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800


This parameter triggers a board to report an R_LOS alarm.
Values
None.

None.
D.54 TSD (LCAS)

Description
The TSD (LCAS) parameter specifies the B3 or BIP error status of a VCTRUNK member. TSD
stands for trail signal degrade. When this parameter is set to Enabled, and if a VCTRUNK
member has excessive B3 or BIP bit errors, the LCAS protocol regards that this member fails
and deletes it from the available members. If this parameter is set to Disabled, the LCAS protocol
does not monitor the status of the B3 or BIP bit errors of a VCTRUNK member.

The system running is not affected.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Enabled, Disabled
Disabled
You can set whether to enable the TSD as required.

This parameter is valid only when Enabling LCAS is set to Enabled.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-53
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.55 Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary

Input Power (dB) (WDM Interface)
Description
The Variance Threshold Between Primary and Secondary Input Optical Power (dB)
parameter provides an option to set the optical power variance threshold of the primary and
secondary optical interfaces of a board. When the threshold is reached, signal degrade (SD)
occurs. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the
threshold, the optical switch switches services to the channel with better optical power. The
configured value can be queried.

l
In the OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800 and OptiX OSN 8800, this parameter functions
as the SD switching threshold reference value for optical line protection (OLP), OTU +
OLP/DCP intra-board 1+1 protection and OLP/DCP client-side 1+1 protection.
During the judgment of switching conditions, if the absolute value of the variance between
primary and secondary input power reaches the SD switching threshold, the SD switching
occurs. This parameter is used to ensure the service quality and enable services to work in
the channels with better signals.
If the variance between the primary and secondary optical power exceeds the value of this
parameter, the POWER_DIFF_OVER alarm is generated. After the threshold is modified,
the corresponding alarm threshold also changes.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
Unit
3.0 - 8.0
dB
l
It is recommended to set the threshold to 5 dB.
In special cases, the threshold can be adjusted according to the actual situation.
When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power reaches 5 dB, you
can properly increase the threshold if the services in the channel with lower optical power
are still normal. When the variance between the primary and secondary optical power is
far lower than 5 dB, you need to decrease the threshold properly if SD occurs.

None.
D-54

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

D.56 VLAN Priority

Description
The VLAN Priority parameter specifies the priority of the default VLAN ID of a port.

None.
Values
Value Range
Default Value
0-7
None.

None.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

D-55
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Glossary
A
AC
See alternating current
access control list
A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to have access
to a resource.
ACK
See acknowledgement
acknowledgement
A response sent by a receiver to indicate successful reception of information.

Acknowledgements may be implemented at any level including the physical level (using
voltage on one or more wires to coordinate transfer), at the link level (to indicate
successful transmission across a single hardware link), or at higher levels.
ACL
See access control list
add/drop multiplexer
Network elements that provide access to all or some subset of the constituent signals
contained within an STM-N signal. The constituent signals are added to (inserted), and/
or dropped from (extracted) the STM-N signal as it passed through the ADM.
Add/drop wavelength
Add/drop wavelength refers to the wavelength that carries the add/drop services in the
OADM equipment.
Address Resolution
Protocol
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to

MAC addresses. It allows hosts and routers to determine the link layer addresses through
ARP requests and ARP responses. The address resolution is a process in which the host
converts the target IP address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame.
The basic function of the ARP is to query the MAC address of the target equipment
through its IP address.
ADM
See add/drop multiplexer
administrative unit
The information structure which provides adaptation between the higher order path layer
and the multiplex section layer. It consists of an information payload (the higher order
VC) and an AU pointer which indicates the offset of the payload frame start relative to
the multiplex section frame start.
Administrator
A user who has authority to access all the Management Domains of the EMLCore
product. He has access to the whole network and to all the management functionalities.
ADSL
See asymmetric digital subscriber line
AGC
See automatic gain control
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-1
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
AID
access identifier
AIS
See alarm indication signal
alarm
A message reported when a fault is detected by a device or by the network management

system during the process of polling devices. Each alarm corresponds to a recovery
alarm. After a recovery alarm is received, the status of the corresponding alarm changes
to cleared.
alarm cable
The cable for generation of visual or audio alarms.
alarm cascading
The shunt-wound output of the alarm signals of several subracks or cabinets.
alarm cause
A single disturbance or fault may lead to the detection of multiple defects. A fault cause
is the result of a correlation process which is intended to identify the defect that is
representative of the disturbance or fault that is causing the problem.
alarm indication
On the cabinet of an NE, there are four indicators in different colors indicating the current
status of the NE. When the green indicator is on, it indicates that the NE is powered on.
When the red indicator is on, it indicates that a critical alarm is generated. When the
orange indicator is on, it indicates that a major alarm is generated. When the yellow
indicator is on, it indicates that a minor alarm is generated. The ALM alarm indicator on
the front panel of a board indicates the current status of the board.
alarm indication signal A code sent downstream in a digital network as an indication that an upstream failure
has been detected and alarmed. It is associated with multiple transport layers.
alarm mask
On the host, an alarm management method through which users can set conditions for
the system to discard (not to save, display, or query for) the alarm information meeting
the conditions.
alarm severity
The significance of a change in system performance or events. According to ITU-T

recommendations, an alarm can have one of the following severities: Critical, Major,
Minor, Warning.
alarm suppression
A function used not to monitor alarms for a specific object, which may be the
networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function
module of a specific board.
alarm type
Classification of alarms with different attributes. There are six alarm types as following:
Communication: alarm indication related with information transfer. Processing: alarm
indication related with software or information processing Equipment: alarm indication
related with equipment fault Service: alarm indication related with QoS of the equipment
Environment: alarm related with the environment where the equipment resides, usually
generated by a sensor Security: alarm indication related with security
ALC
See automatic level control
ALC link
A piece of end-to-end configuration information, which exists in the equipment (single

station) as an ALC link node. Through the ALC function of each node, it fulfils optical
power control on the line that contains the link.
ALC node
The ALC functional unit. It corresponds to the NE in a network. The power detect unit,
variable optical attenuator unit, and supervisory channel unit at the ALC node work
together to achieve the ALC function.
ALS
See automatic laser shutdown
alternating current
Electric current that reverses its direction of flow (polarity) periodically according to a
frequency measured in hertz, or cycles per second.
E-2

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
American National
Standard Institute
An organization that defines U.S standards for the information processing industry.
American National Standard Institute (ANSI) participates in defining network protocol
standards.
American Standard
Code for Information
Interchange
American Standard Code for Information Interchange - the standard system for
representing letters and symbols. Each letter or symbol is assigned a unique number
between 0 and 127.
ANSI
See American National Standard Institute
antistatic floor
A floor that can quickly release the static electricity of the object contacting it to prevent
accumulated static electricity
APD
See avalanche photodiode
APE
automatic power equilibrium
APID
access point identifier
application-specific
integrated circuit
A special type of chip that starts out as a nonspecific collection of logic gates. Late in
the manufacturing process, a layer is added to connect the gates for a specific function.
By changing the pattern of connections, the manufacturer can make the chip suitable for
many needs.
APS
See automatic protection switching
ARP
See Address Resolution Protocol
arrayed waveguide
grating
A device, built with silicon planar lightwave circuits (PLC), that allows multiple
wavelengths to be combined and separated in a dense wavelength-division multiplexing
(DWDM) system.
ASCII
See American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASE
amplified spontaneous emission
ASIC
See application-specific integrated circuit
ASON
See automatically switched optical network
asymmetric digital
subscriber line
A technology for transmitting digital information at a high bandwidth on existing phone

lines to homes and businesses. Unlike regular dialup phone service, ADSL provides
continuously-available, "always on" connection. ADSL is asymmetric in that it uses most
of the channel to transmit downstream to the user and only a small part to receive
information from the user. ADSL simultaneously accommodates analog (voice)
information on the same line. ADSL is generally offered at downstream data rates from
512 Kbps to about 6 Mbps.
Asynchronous
Transfer Mode
A protocol for the transmission of a variety of digital signals using uniform 53 byte cells.
A transfer mode in which the information is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in
the sense that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate.
Statistical and deterministic values may also be used to qualify the transfer mode.
ATAG
autonomously generated correlation tag
ATM
See Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU
See administrative unit
auto-negotiation
An optional function of the IEEE 802.3u Fast Ethernet standard that enables devices to
automatically exchange information over a link about speed and duplex abilities.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-3
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
automatic gain control A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a
function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level.
automatic laser
shutdown
A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser transmitters

and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control A well-known application in communication systems with a given input signal
conditioned to produce an output signal as possible, while supporting a wide gain range
and controlled gain-reduction and gain recovery characteristics.
automatic protection
switching
Capability of a transmission system to detect a failure on a working facility and to switch

to a standby facility to recover the traffic.
automatically switched A network which is based on technology enabling the automatic delivery of transport
optical network
services. Specifically, an ASON can deliver not only leased-line connections but also
other transport services such as soft-permanent and switched optical connections.
avalanche photodiode
A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.

Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
AWG
See arrayed waveguide grating
B
background block
error ratio
The ratio of background block errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a
fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.
backup
A periodic operation performed on the data stored in the database for the purposes of
database recovery in case that the database is faulty. The backup also refers to data
synchronization between active and standby boards.
bandwidth
A range of transmission frequencies that a transmission line or channel can carry in a

network. In fact, it is the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies the
transmission line or channel. The greater the bandwidth, the faster the data transfer rate.
BAS
See broadband access server
basic input/output
system
A firmware stored in the computer mainboard. It contains basic input/output control

programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the computer.
bayonet-neillconcelman
A connector used for connecting two coaxial cables.
BBE
background block error
BBER
See background block error ratio
BC
See boundary clock
BDI
Backward Defect Indication
BEI
backward error indication
BER
See bit error rate
BIAE
backward incoming alignment error
E-4

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
bill of material
Listing of all the subassemblies, parts and raw materials that go into the parent assembly.
It shows the quantity of each raw material required to make the assembly. There are a
variety of display formats for BOMS, including single level, indented, modular/
planning, transient, matrix and costed BOMs [APICs, CMSG].
BIOS
See basic input/output system
BIP
See bit-interleaved parity
BIP-8
See bit interleaved parity order 8
bit error
An incompatibility between a bit in a transmitted digital signal and the corresponding

bit in the received digital signal.
bit error rate
Ratio of received bits that contain errors. BER is an important index used to measure the
communications quality of a network.
bit interleaved parity

order 8
A frame is divided into several blocks with 8 bits (one byte)in a parity unit. Then arrange
the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of "1" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the
corresponding bit for the result if the number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
bit-interleaved parity
A method of error monitoring. With even parity an X-bit code is generated by the
transmitting equipment over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the
first bit of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the
covered portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of
all X-bit sequences within the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting
the BIP-X bits so that there is an even number of 1s in each monitored partition of the
signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits which are in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
BITS
See building integrated timing supply
BMC
best master clock
BNC
See bayonet-neill-concelman
BOM
See bill of material
boundary clock
A clock with a clock port for each of two or more distinct PTP communication paths.
BPDU
See bridge protocol data unit
BPS
board-level protection switching
bridge protocol data

unit
The data messages that are exchanged across the switches within an extended LAN that
uses a spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on
ports, addresses, priorities and costs and ensure that the data ends up where it was
intended to go. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. The loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridges
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
bridging
The action of transmitting identical traffic on the working and protection channels
simultaneously.
broadband access
server
A server providing features as user access, connection management, address allocation

and authentication, authorization and accounting. It also works as a router featuring
effective route management, high forwarding performance and abundant services.
broadcast
A means of delivering information to all members in a network. The broadcast range is

determined by the broadcast address.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-5
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
broadcast service
The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks.
building integrated
timing supply
In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
BWS
Backbone WDM System
C
cable tie
The tape used to bind the cables.
capex
See capital expenditure
capital expenditure
Capital expenditures (CAPEX or capex) are expenditures creating future benefits. A

capital expenditure is incurred when a business spends money either to buy fixed assets
or to add to the value of an existing fixed asset with a useful life that extends beyond the
taxable year. Capex are used by a company to acquire or upgrade physical assets such
as equipment, property, or industrial buildings.
CAR
See committed access rate
CBS
See committed burst size
CC
See connectivity check
CCI
connection control interface
CCM
See continuity check message
CD
chromatic dispersion
CDMA
See Code Division Multiple Access
CE
See customer edge
CENELEC
See European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that interprets
and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and execute
instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the computers
main data-transfer path, the bus.
centralized alarm
system
The system that gathers all the information about alarms into a certain terminal console.
CF
See compact flash
CGMP
Cisco Group Management Protocol
channel
A telecommunication path of a specific capacity and/or at a specific speed between two

or more locations in a network. The channel can be established through wire, radio
(microwave), fiber or a combination of the three. The amount of information transmitted
per second in a channel is the information transmission speed, expressed in bits per
second. For example, b/s (100 bit/s), kb/s (103 bit/s), Mb/s (106 bit/s), Gb/s (109 bit/s),
and Tb/s (1012 bit/s).
channel spacing
The center-to-center difference in frequency or wavelength between adjacent channels

in a WDM device.
CIR
See committed information rate
E-6

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
CIST
Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CLEI
common language equipment identification
CLNP
connectionless network protocol
CLNS
connectionless network service
clock synchronization
Also called frequency synchronization, clock synchronization means that the signal
frequency traces the reference frequency, but the start point need not be consistent.
clock synchronization A type of high-decision clock defined by the IEEE 1588 V2 standard. The IEEE 1588
compliant with
V2 standard specifies the precision time protocol (PTP) in a measurement and control
precision time protocol system. The PTP protocol ensures clock synchronization precise to sub-microseconds.
clock tracing
The method to keep the time on each node being synchronized with a clock source in a
network.
CM
See configuration management
CMEP
connection monitoring end point
CMI
coded mark inversion
coarse wavelength
division multiplexing
A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into

the same fiber. CWDM widely spaces wavelengths at a spacing of several nm. CWDM
does not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
Code Division Multiple A communication scheme that forms different code sequences by using the frequency
Access
expansion technology. In this case, subscribers of different addresses can use different
code sequences for multi-address connection.
committed access rate
A traffic control method that uses a set of rate limits to be applied to a router interface.
CAR is a configurable method by which incoming and outgoing packets can be classified
into QoS (Quality of Service) groups, and by which the input or output transmission rate
can be defined.
committed burst size
committed burst size. A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is,
the maximum burst IP packet size when the information is transferred at the committed
information rate. This parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this
parameter should be not less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be
forwarded.
committed information The rate at which a frame relay network agrees to transfer information in normal
rate
conditions. Namely, it is the rate, measured in bit/s, at which the token is transferred to
the leaky bucket.
Common Object
Request Broker
Architecture
A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces of

programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the two
programs are written in different programming languages and are running on different
platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request broker, or
ORB, and thus does not need to know the structure of the program from which the object
comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented environments. See also IIOP,
object (definition 2), Object Management Group, object-oriented.
compact flash
Compact flash (CF) was originally developed as a type of data storage device used in
portable electronic devices. For storage, CompactFlash typically uses flash memory in
a standardized enclosure.
concatenation
A process that combines multiple virtual containers. The combined capacities can be
used a single capacity. The concatenation also keeps the integrity of bit sequence.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-7
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Configuration Data
A command file defining hardware configurations of an NE. With this file, an NE can
collaborate with other Nes in an entire network. Thus, configuration data is the key factor
for normal running of an entire network.
configuration
management
1. A network management function defined by the International Standards Organization

(ISO). It involves installing, reinitializing & modifying hardware & software.
2. Configuration Management (CM) is a system for collecting the configuration
information of all nodes in the network.
configure
To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
congestion
An extra intra-network or inter-network traffic resulting in decreasing network service

efficiency.
connecting plate
A metallic plate which is used to combine two cabinets.
connection point
A reference point where the output of a trail termination source or a connection is bound
to the input of another connection, or where the output of a connection is bound to the
input of a trail termination sink or another connection. The connection point is
characterized by the information which passes across it. A bidirectional connection point
is formed by the association of a contradirectional pair.
connectivity check
Ethernet CFM can detect the connectivity between MEPs. The detection is achieved by
each MEP transmitting a Continuity Check Message (CCM) periodically.
continuity check
message
CCM is used to detect the link status.
convergence
1. A process in which multiple channels of low-rate signals are multiplexed into one or
several channels of required signals.
2. It refers to the speed and capability for a group of networking devices to run a specific
routing protocol. It functions to keep the network topology consistent.
convergence service
A service that provides enhancements to an underlying service in order to provide for

the specific requirements of the convergence service user.
CORBA
See Common Object Request Broker Architecture
corrugated pipe
Used to protect optical fibers.
CPLD
Complex Programmable Logical Device
CPU
See central processing unit
CRC
See cyclic redundancy check
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
CSES
consecutive severely errored second
CSMA
carrier sense multiple access
CST
Common Spanning Tree
current alarm
An alarm not handled or not acknowledged after being handled.
current performance
data
Performance data stored currently in a register. An NE provides two types of registers,

namely, 15-minute register and 24-hour register, to store performance parameters of a
performance monitoring entity. The two types of registers stores performance data only
in the specified monitoring period.
E-8

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
customer edge
A part of BGP/MPLS IP VPN model. It provides interfaces for direct connection to the
Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or host.
CWDM
See coarse wavelength division multiplexing
cyclic redundancy
check
A procedure used in checking for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses
a complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before transmission and includes it in the packet that it
sends to the receiving device. The receiving device repeats the same calculation after
transmission. If both devices obtain the same result, it is assumed that the transmission
was error free. The procedure is known as a redundancy check because each transmission
includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-checking values.
D
DAPI
destination access point identifiers
Data backup
A method that is used to copy key data to the standby storage area, to prevent data loss
in the case of the damage or failure in the original storage area.
data communication
network
A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the Data

Communication Function (DCF).
data communications
channel
The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P)
between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the
192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
DBPS
distribute board protect system
DCC
See data communications channel
DCF
See dispersion compensation fiber
DCM
See dispersion compensation module
DCM frame
A frame which is used to hold the DCM (Dispersion Compensation Module).
DCN
See data communication network
DDF
See digital distribution frame
DDN
See digital data network
demultiplexer
A device that separates signals that have been combined by a multiplexer for transmission
over a communications channel as a single signal.
dense wavelength
division multiplexing
Technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of
single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific frequency spacing
as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.
device set
A collection of multiple managed devices. By dividing managed devices into different

device sets, users can manage the devices by using the U2000 in an easier way. If an
operation authority over one device set is assigned to a user (user group), the authority
over all the devices in the device set is assigned to the user (user group), thus making it
unnecessary to set the operation authority over all the devices in a device set separately.
It is recommended to configure device set by geographical region, network level, device
type, or another criterion.
DHCP
See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-9
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
diamond-shaped nut
A type of nut that is used to fasten the wiring frame to the cabinet.
digital data network
A high-quality data transport tunnel that combines the digital channel (such as fiber
channel, digital microwave channel, or satellite channel) and the cross multiplex
technology.
digital distribution
frame
A type of equipment used between the transmission equipment and the exchange with
transmission rate of 2 to 155 Mbit/s to provide the functions such as cables connection,
cable patching, and test of loops that transmitting digital signals.
digital subscriber line

access multiplexer
A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company that
receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections and
puts the signals on a high-speed backbone line using multiplexing techniques.
dispersion
compensation fiber
A kind of fiber which uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion
of transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
dispersion
compensation module
A module, which contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the

dispersion of transmitting fiber.
Distance Vector
Multicast Routing
Protocol
An Internet gateway protocol mainly based on the RIP. The protocol implements a typical
dense mode IP multicast solution. The DVMRP protocol uses IGMP to exchange routing
datagrams with its neighbors.
distributed link
aggregation group
The distributed link aggregation group (DLAG) is a board-level port protection

technology used to detect unidirectional fiber cuts and to negotiate with the opposite end.
In the case of a link down failure on a port or a hardware failure on a board, the services
can automatically be switched to the slave board, thus realizing 1+1 protection for the
inter-board ports.
DLAG
See distributed link aggregation group
DMUX; DEMUX
See demultiplexer
DNI
Dual Node Interconnection
domain
A logical subscriber group based on which the subscriber rights are controlled.
DRDB
dynamic random database
DRZ
differential phase return to zero
DSCP
Differentiated Services Code Point
DSCR
dispersion slope compensation rate
DSLAM
See digital subscriber line access multiplexer
DSP
Digital Signal Processing
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF
See dual tone multiple frequency
DTR
data terminal ready
dual tone multiple

frequency
In telephone systems, multifrequency signaling in which standard set combinations of

two specific voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the
other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used.
dual-ended switching
A protection operation method which takes switching action at both ends of the protected
entity (e.g. "connection", "path"), even in the case of a unidirectional failure.
DVB
Digital Video Broadcasting
E-10

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
DVMRP
See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol
DWDM
See dense wavelength division multiplexing
Dynamic Host
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol.
Configuration Protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host
requesting, generally, information required by the host to participate on the Internet
network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to hosts.
E
E2E
End to End
EAPE
enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium
EBS
See excess burst size
ECC
See embedded control channel
EDFA
See erbium doped fiber amplifier
eDQPSK
enhanced differential quadrature phase shift keying
EFM
See Ethernet in the first mile
ejector lever
A lever for removing circuit boards from an electronic chassis.
electric supervisory
channel
A technology realizes the communication among all the nodes and transmits the
monitoring data in the optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electromagnetic
compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility is the condition which prevails when telecommunications

equipment is performing its individually designed function in a common electromagnetic
environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic
interference
Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or

limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
electrostatic discharge
The sudden and momentary electric current that flows between two objects at different
electrical potentials caused by direct contact or induced by an electrostatic field.
element management
system
An element management system (EMS) manages one or more of a specific type of

network elements (NEs). An EMS allows the user to manage all the features of each NE
individually, but not the communication between NEs - this is done by the network
management system (NMS).
embedded control
channel
A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer,
to enable transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
EMC
See electromagnetic compatibility
EMI
See electromagnetic interference
EMS
See element management system
enterprise system
connection
A path protocol which connects the host with various control units in a storage system.
It is a serial bit stream transmission protocol. The transmission rate is 200 Mbit/s.
EPL
See Ethernet private line
EPLAN
See Ethernet private LAN service
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-11
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
erbium doped fiber

amplifier
An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The device uses a short length of
optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and the energy level jump of
Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier passes the external light
source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
ESC
See electric supervisory channel
ESCON
See enterprise system connection
ESD
See electrostatic discharge
ESD jack
Electrostatic discharge jack. A hole in the cabinet or shelf, which connect the shelf or
cabinet to the insertion of ESD wrist strap.
eSFP
enhanced small form-factor pluggable
Ethernet
A technology complemented in LAN. It adopts Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision

Detection. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/
s or 10000 Mbit/s. The Ethernet network features high reliability and easy maintaining..
Ethernet in the first

mile
Last mile access from the broadband device to the user community. The EFM takes the
advantages of the SHDSL.b is technology and the Ethernet technology. The EFM
provides both the traditional voice service and internet access service of high speed. In
addition, it meets the users requirements on high definition television system (HDTV)
and Video On Demand (VOD).
Ethernet private LAN

service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a

dedicated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or
MPLS server layer networks.
Ethernet private line
A type of Ethernet service that is provided with dedicated bandwidth and point-to-point
connections on an SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer network.
Ethernet virtual
private LAN service
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared
bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
Ethernet virtual
private line
An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared
bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server
layer networks.
ETS
European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
ETSI 300mm cabinet
A cabinet which is 600mm in width and 300mm in depth, compliant with the standards
of the ETSI.
European Committee
for Electrotechnical
Standardization
The European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization was established in 1976

in Brussels. It is the result of the incorporation of two former organizations. It aims to
reduce internal frontiers and trade barriers for electrotechnical products, systems and
services.
EVOA
electrical variable optical attenuator
EVPL
See Ethernet virtual private line
EVPLAN
See Ethernet virtual private LAN service
E-12

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
excess burst size
A parameter related to traffic. In the single rate three color marker (srTCM) mode, the
traffic control is achieved by the token buckets C and E. Excess burst size is a parameter
used to define the capacity of token bucket E, that is, the maximum burst IP packet size
when the information is transferred at the committed information rate. This parameter
must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not less than the
maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
Extended ID
The number of the subnet that an NE belongs to, for identifying different network
segments in a WAN. The extended ID and ID form the physical ID of the NE.
External cable
The cables and optical fibers which are used for connecting electrical interfaces and
optical interfaces of one cabinet to interfaces of other cabinets or peripherals.
eye pattern
An oscilloscope display of synchronized pseudo-random digital data (signal amplitude

versus time), showing the superposition of accumulated output waveforms.
F
F1 byte
The user path byte, which is reserved for the user, but is typically special for network
providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for
special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte.
fast Ethernet
Any network that supports transmission rate of 100Mbits/s. The Fast Ethernet is 10 times
faster than 10BaseT, and inherits frame format, MAC addressing scheme, MTU, and so
on. Fast Ethernet is extended from the IEEE802.3 standard, and it uses the following
three types of transmission media: 100BASE-T4 (4 pairs of phone twisted-pair cables),
100BASE-TX (2 pairs of data twisted-pair cables), and 100BASE-FX (2-core optical
fibers).
fault
A failure to implement the function while the specified operations are performed. A fault
does not involve the failure caused by preventive maintenance, insufficiency of external
resources and intentional settings.
FBG
fiber Bragg grating
FC
See fiber channel
FDB
flash database
FDDI
See fiber distributed data interface
FE
See fast Ethernet
FEC
See forward error correction
fiber channel
A high-speed transport technology used to build storage area networks (SANs). Fiber
channel can be on the networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. It is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays. Fiber channel supports single-mode
and multi-mode fiber connections. Fiber channel signaling can run on both twisted pair
copper wires and coaxial cables. Fiber channel provides both connection-oriented and
connectionless services.
fiber distributed data

interface
A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for highspeed fiber-optic local area networks (LANs). FDDI provides specifications for
transmission rates of 100 megabits (100 million bits) per second on networks based on
the token ring network.
fiber management tray A device used to coil up extra optical fibers.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-13
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
fiber patch cord
A kind of fiber used for connections between the subrack and the ODF, and for
connections between subracks or inside a subrack.
fiber spool
A device used in coiling up an extra length of optical fibers.
Fiber trough
The trough that is used for routing fibers.
fiber/cable
Fiber & Cable is the general name of optical fiber and cable. It refers to the physical
entities that connect the transmission equipment, carry transmission objects (user
information and network management information) and perform transmission function
in the transmission network. The optical fiber transmits optical signal, while the cable
transmits electrical signal. The fiber/cable between NEs represents the optical fiber
connection or cable connection between NEs. The fiber/cable between SDH NEs
represents the connection relation between NEs. At this time, the fiber/cable is of optical
fiber type.
field programmable
gate array
A type of semi-customized circuit used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit

(ASIC) field. It is developed on the basis of the programmable components, such as the
PAL, GAL, and EPLD. It not only remedies the defects of customized circuits, but also
overcomes the disadvantage of the original programmable components in terms of the
limited number of gate arrays.
FIFO
See First in First out
File Transfer Protocol
A member of the TCP/IP suite of protocols, used to copy files between two computers
on the Internet. Both computers must support their respective FTP roles: one must be an
FTP client and the other an FTP server.
First in First out
A stack management mechanism. The first saved data is first read and invoked.
Flow
An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the network

management system or NE software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards,
it is a group of packets that have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present,
two flows are supported: port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID
and port+VLAN flow is based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist
in the same port.
FMT
See fiber management tray
FOADM
fixed optical add/drop multiplexer
FOAs
fixed optical attenuator
Forced switch
For normal traffic signals, switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless
an equal or higher priority switch command is in effect or SF condition exists on the
protection section, by issuing a forced switch request for that traffic signal.
forward error
correction
A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at
the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission are corrected at the receive end.
four-wave mixing
Four-Wave Mixing (FWM), also called four-photon mixing, occurs when the interaction
of two or three optical waves at different wavelengths generates new optical waves,
called mixing products or sidebands, at other wavelengths.
FPGA
See field programmable gate array
E-14

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

frame
E Glossary
A frame, starting with a header, is a string of bytes with a specified length. Frame length
is represented by the sampling circle or the total number of bytes sampled during a circle.
A header comprises one or a number of bytes with pre-specified values. In other words,
a header is a code segment that reflects the distribution (diagram) of the elements prespecified by the sending and receiving parties.
frame alignment signal A distinctive signal inserted in every frame or once in every n frames, always occupying
the same relative position within the frame, and used to establish and maintain frame
alignment.
FTP
See File Transfer Protocol
full-duplex
A full-duplex, or sometimes double-duplex system, allows communication in both

directions, and, unlike half-duplex, allows this to happen simultaneously. Land-line
telephone networks are full-duplex, since they allow both callers to speak and be heard
at the same time. A good analogy for a full-duplex system would be a two-lane road with
one lane for each direction.
G
gain
The ratio between the optical power from the input optical interface of the optical
amplifier and the optical power from the output optical interface of the jumper fiber,
which expressed in dB.
gain flattening filter
Gain Flattening Filter (GFFs), also known as gain equalizing filters, are used to flatten
or smooth out unequal signal intensities over a specified wavelength range. This unequal
signal intensity usually occurs after an amplification stage (for example, EDFA and/or
Raman). Typically, GFFs are used in conjunction with gain amplifiers to ensure that the
amplified channels all have the same gain. A static spectral device that flattens the output
spectrum of an erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
Gateway IP
When an NE accesses a remote network management system or NE, a router can be used
to enable the TCP/IP communication. In this case, the IP address of the router is the
gateway IP. Only the gateway NE requires the IP address. The IP address itself cannot
identify the uniqueness of an NE. The same IP addresses may exist in different TCP/IP
networks. An NE may have multiple IP addresses, for example, one IP address of the
network and one IP address of the Ethernet port.
gateway network
element
A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and
the NM application layer
Gb
See gigabit
GCC
general communication channel
GCP
See GMPLS control plan
GE
See gigabit Ethernet
GE ADM
The technology can optimize GE service transport over WDM for Metro network. It
owns the capability of GE service convergence and grooming and benefits to use the
network resource more effectively.
generic framing
procedure
A framing and encapsulated method which can be applied to any data type. It has been
standardized by ITU-T SG15.
GFF
See gain flattening filter
GFP
See generic framing procedure
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-15
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
gigabit
In data communications, a gigabit is one billion bits, or 1,000,000,000 (that is, 10^9)
bits. It's commonly used for measuring the amount of data that is transferred in a second
between two telecommunication points.
gigabit Ethernet
GE adopts the IEEE 802.3z. GE is compatible with 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s Ethernet.
It runs at 1000 Mbit/s. Gigabit Ethernet uses a private medium, and it does not support
coaxial cables or other cables. It also supports the channels in the bandwidth mode. If
Gigabit Ethernet is, however, deployed to be the private bandwidth system with a bridge
(switch) or a router as the center, it gives full play to the performance and the bandwidth.
In the network structure, Gigabit Ethernet uses full duplex links that are private, causing
the length of the links to be sufficient for backbone applications in a building and campus.
Global Positioning
System
A global navigation satellite system. It provides reliable positioning, navigation, and

timing services to worldwide users.
GMPLS
generalized multiprotocol label switching
GMPLS control plan
The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei.
The OptiX GCP applies to the OptiX OSN product series. By using this software, the
traditional network can evolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN product series
support the ASON features.
GNE
See gateway network element
GPS
See Global Positioning System
graphical user interface A visual computer environment that represents programs, files, and options with
graphical images, such as icons, menus, and dialog boxes, on the screen.
grounding
The connection of sections of an electrical circuit to a common conductor, called the

ground, which serves as the reference for the other voltages in the circuit.
GSSP
General Snooping and Selection Protocol
GUI
See graphical user interface
H
Hardware loopback
A connection mode in which a fiber jumper is used to connect the input optical interface
to the output optical interface of a board to achieve signal loopback.
HCS
See hierarchical cell structure
HDB
high density bipolar code
HDLC
See high level data link control
hierarchical cell
structure
This is a term typically used to describe the priority of cells within a mixed environment.
That is when Macro, Micro, and Pico cells may be viewed as candidates for cell
reselection the priority described by the HCS will be used in the associated calculations.
high level data link

control
The HDLC protocol is a general purpose protocol which operates at the data link layer
of the OSI reference model. Each piece of data is encapsulated in an HDLC frame by
adding a trailer and a header.
History alarm
The confirmed alarms that have been saved in the memory and other external memories.
History Performance
Data
The performance data that is stored in the history register or that is automatically reported
and stored in the NMS.
E-16

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
I
IAE
incoming alignment error
IC
See integrated circuit
ICC
ITU carrier code
ICMP
See Internet Control Message Protocol
ID
See identity
identity
The collective aspect of the set of characteristics by which a thing is definitively

recognizable or known.
Idle resource optical

NE
When the U2000 is started successfully, an NE icon called "Idle ONE" will be displayed
on the topological view. In this NE, the subracks and boards that are not divided to other
optical NEs (such as OTM, OADM and other NEs) are retained. In this NE, idle DWDM
subracks and boards are reserved, which can be distributed to other ONEs. Double-click
the NE icon to view all the currently idle DWDM subracks or boards in the network.
IE
See Internet Explorer
IEC
See International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IETF
See Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP
See Internet Group Management Protocol
Input jitter tolerance
The maximum amplitude of sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which, when
modulating the signal at an equipment input port, results in no more than two errored
seconds cumulative, where these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30
second measurement intervals.
Institute of Electrical
and Electronics
Engineers
A society of engineering and electronics professionals based in the United States but
boasting membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on electrical,
electronics, computer engineering, and science-related matters.
integrated circuit
A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
integrated services
digital network
A network defined in CCITT, providing comprehensive transmission service for the

voice, video, and data. The ISDN enables the voice, video, and data transmission on a
small number of data channels simultaneously, thus implementing a comprehensive
transmission service.
intelligent power
adjustment
A technology that the system reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level if the system detects the loss of
optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals may due to the fiber is broken, the
performance of equipments trend to be inferior or the connector is not plugged well.
Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser being sent out from the slice
of broken fiber.
Internal cable
The cables and optical fibers which are used for interconnecting electrical interfaces and
optical interfaces within the cabinet.
internal spanning tree
A segment of CIST in a certain MST region. An IST is a special MSTI whose ID is 0.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-17
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
International
Electrotechnical
Commission
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) is an international and nongovernmental standards organization dealing with electrical and electronical standards.
International
Organization for
Standardization
An international association that works to establish global standards for communications

and information exchange. Primary among its accomplishments is the widely accepted
ISO/OSI reference model, which defines standards for the interaction of computers
connected by communications networks.
International
Telecommunication
Union
A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
radio networks (ITU-R).
International
Telecommunication
UnionTelecommunication
Standardization Sector
An international body that develops worldwide standards for telecommunications

technologies. These standards are grouped together in series which are prefixed with a
letter indicating the general subject and a number specifying the particular standard. For
example, X.25 comes from the X series which deals with data networks and open
system communications and number "25" deals with packet switched networks.
Internet Control
Message Protocol
A network-layer (ISO/OSI level 3) Internet protocol that provides error correction and
other information relevant to IP packet processing. For example, it can let the IP software
on one machine inform another machine about an unreachable destination. See also
communications protocol, IP, ISO/OSI reference model, packet (definition 1).
Internet Engineering
Task Force
A worldwide organization of individuals interested in networking and the Internet.

Managed by the Internet Engineering Steering Group (IESG), the IETF is charged with
studying technical problems facing the Internet and proposing solutions to the Internet
Architecture Board (IAB). The work of the IETF is carried out by various working groups
that concentrate on specific topics, such as routing and security. The IETF is the publisher
of the specifications that led to the TCP/IP protocol standard.
Internet Explorer
Microsoft's Web browsing software. Introduced in October 1995, the latest versions of
Internet Explorer include many features that allow you to customize your experience on
the Web. Internet Explorer is also available for the Macintosh and UNIX platforms.
Internet Group
Management Protocol
The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups among
the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish
and maintain multicast group memberships.
Internet Protocol
The TCP/IP standard protocol that defines the IP packet as the unit of information sent
across an internet and provides the basis for connectionless, best-effort packet delivery
service. IP includes the ICMP control and error message protocol as an integral part. The
entire protocol suite is often referred to as TCP/IP because TCP and IP are the two
fundamental protocols. IP is standardized in RFC 791.
IP
See Internet Protocol
IP address
A 32-bit (4-byte) binary number that uniquely identifies a host (computer) connected to
the Internet for communication with other hosts in the Internet by transferring packets.
An IP address is expressed in dotted decimal notation, consisting of the decimal values
of its 4 bytes, separated with periods; for example, 127.0.0.1. The first three bytes of the
IP address identify the network to which the host is connected, and the last byte identify
the host itself.
IP over DCC
The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote
NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead
DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.
IPA
See intelligent power adjustment
E-18

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
IPG
inter-packet gap
ISDN
See integrated services digital network
ISO
See International Organization for Standardization
IST
See internal spanning tree
ITU
See International Telecommunication Union
ITU-T
See International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization

Sector
J
Jitter
Short waveform variations caused by vibration, voltage fluctuations, and control system
instability.
Jitter transfer
The physical relationship between jitter applied at the input port and the jitter appearing
at the output port.
L
label switched path
A sequence of hops (R0...Rn) in which a packet travels from R0 to Rn through label

switching mechanisms. A label-switched path can be chosen dynamically, based on
normal routing mechanisms, or through configuration.
LACP
See Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG
See link aggregation group
LAN
See local area network
LAPD
link access procedure on the D channel
LAPS
link access protocol-SDH
Laser
A component that generates directional optical waves of narrow wavelengths. The laser
light has better coherence than ordinary light. The fiber system takes the semi-conductor
laser as the light source.
layer
A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically

as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer
of its characteristic information.
LB
See loopback
LCAS
See link capacity adjustment scheme
LCD
See liquid crystal display
LCN
local communication network
LCT
local craft terminal
LED
See light emitting diode
LHP
long hop
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-19
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
light emitting diode
A display and lighting technology used in almost every electrical and electronic product
on the market, to from a tiny on/off light to digital readouts, flashlights, traffic lights and
perimeter lighting. LEDs are also used as the light source in multimode fibers, optical
mice and laser-class printers.
Link Aggregation
Control Protocol
A method of bundling a group of physical interfaces together as a logical interface to

increase bandwidth and reliability. For related protocols and standards, refer to IEEE
802.3ad.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were
a single link.
link capacity
adjustment scheme
LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
control mechanism to hitlessly increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member links
that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity initiation,
increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path is the
responsibility of the Network and Element Management Systems.
Link Control Protocol
In the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), the Link Control Protocol (LCP) establishes,
configures, and tests data-link Internet connections.
link state
advertisement
The link in LSA is any type of connection between OSPF routers, while the state is the
condition of the link.
linktrace message
The message sent by the initiator MEP of 802.1ag MAC Trace to the destination MEP
is called Linktrace Message(LTM). LTM includes the Time to Live (TTL) and the MAC
address of the destination MEP2.
linktrace reply
For 802.1ag MAC Trace, the destination MEP replies with a response message to the
source MEP after the destination MEP receives the LTM, and the response message is
called Linktrace Reply (LTR). LTR also includes the TTL that equals the result of the
TTL of LTM minus 1.
liquid crystal display
A type of display that uses a liquid compound having a polar molecular structure,
sandwiched between two transparent electrodes.
LLC
See logical link control
LMP
link management protocol
LOC
loss of clock
local area network
A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few square
kilometers or within a single building. It features high speed and low error rate. Ethernet,
FDDI, and Token Ring are three technologies used to implement a LAN. Current LANs
are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and running at 1,000 Mbit/
s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).
Locked switching
When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being
switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been
switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to
the working channel.
logical link control
According to the IEEE 802 family of standards, Logical Link Control (LLC) is the upper
sublayer of the OSI data link layer. The LLC is the same for the various physical media
(such as Ethernet, token ring, WLAN).
logical port
A logical port is a logical number assigned to every application.
E-20

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
loopback
A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors.
LOP
See loss of pointer
LOS
See Loss Of Signal
loss of pointer
Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in the

PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to the start of
cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.
Loss Of Signal
Loss of signal (LOS) indicates that there are no transitions occurring in the received
signal.
Lower subrack
The subrack close to the bottom of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.
LP
See logical port
LPT
link-state pass through
LSA
See link state advertisement
LSP
See label switched path
LT
linktrace
LTM
See linktrace message
LTR
See linktrace reply
M
MA
Maintenance Associations
MAC
See media access control
MADM
multiple add/drop multiplexer
main distribution
frame
A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
main path interface at

the transmitter
A reference point on the optical fiber just after the OM/OA output optical connector.
main topology
A interface that displays the connection relation of NEs on the NMS (screen display).
The default client interface of the NMS, a basic component of the human-machine
interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms
of different NEs, subnets in the network, the communication status as well as the basic
network operation status. All topology management functions are accessed here.
maintenance domain
The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by CFM. The
devices in an MD are managed by a single ISP.
maintenance point
Maintenance Point (MP) is one of either a MEP or a MIP.
MAN
See metropolitan area network
managed object
The management view of a resource within the telecommunication environment that may
be managed via the agent. Examples of SDH managed objects are: equipment, receive
port, transmit port, power supply, plug-in card, virtual container, multiplex section, and
regenerator section.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-21
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Management
information
The information that is used for network management in a transport network.
management
information base
A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It

comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such as
routers and switches) in a network.
manual switch
Switches normal traffic signal to the protection section, unless a failure condition exists
on other sections (including the protection section) or an equal or higher priority switch
command is in effect, by issuing a manual switch request for that normal traffic signal.
Mapping
A procedure by which tributaries are adapted into virtual containers at the boundary of
an SDH network.
marking-off template
A quadrate cardboard with four holes. It is used to mark the positions of the installation
holes for the cabinet.
MD
See maintenance domain
MDB
Memory Database
MDF
See main distribution frame
MDP
message dispatch process
MDS
message distribution service software
ME
maintenance entities
mean launched power
The average power of a pseudo-random data sequence coupled into the fiber by the
transmitter.
Mean Time Between

Failures
The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure

of the reliability of the system.
media access control
A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of the
data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and connecting
the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC protocol
checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted, certain control
information is added to the data, and then the data and the control information are
transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving data, the MAC
protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the data is transmitted
correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted correctly, the control
information is removed from the data and then the data is transmitted to the LLC layer.
MEP
maintenance end point
metropolitan area
network
A metropolitan area network (MAN) is a network that interconnects users with computer
resources in a geographic area or region larger than that covered by even a large local
area network (LAN) but smaller than the area covered by a wide area network (WAN).
The term is applied to the interconnection of networks in a city into a single larger
network (which may then also offer efficient connection to a wide area network). It is
also used to mean the interconnection of several local area networks by bridging them
with backbone lines. The latter usage is also sometimes referred to as a campus network.
MFAS
See multiframe alignment signal
MIB
See management information base
MIP
maintenance intermediate point
MLD
See multicast listener discovery
E-22

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
MLM laser
See multi-longitudinal mode laser
MO
See managed object
mother board
A printed board assembly that is used for interconnecting arrays of plug-in electronic
modules.
mounting ear
A piece of angle plate with holes in it on a rack. It is used to fix network elements or
components.
MP
See maintenance point
MPI
main path interface
MPI-R
main path interface at the receiver
MPI-S
See main path interface at the transmitter
MPLS
See Multiprotocol Label Switching
MS
Multiplex Section
MSA
Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSI
multi-frame structure identifier
MSOH
See multiplex section overhead
MSP
See multiplex section protection
MSPP
multi-service provisioning platform
MST
See multiplex section termination
MSTI
See multiple spanning tree instance
MSTP
See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MTA
Mail Transfer Agent
MTBF
See Mean Time Between Failures
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit
multi-longitudinal
mode laser
An injection laser diode which has a number of longitudinal modes.
multicast listener
discovery
The MLD is used by the IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
connected network segments, and set up and maintain member relationships. On IPv6
networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router to which
the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related groups and the
multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment
signal
A distinctive signal inserted in every multiframe or once in every n multiframes, always

occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to establish and
maintain multiframe alignment.
multiple spanning tree Multiple spanning tree instance. One of a number of Spanning Trees calculated by MSTP
instance
within an MST Region, to provide a simply and fully connected active topology for
frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST
Configuration. A VLAN cannot be assigned to multiple MSTIs.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-23
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Multiple Spanning
Tree Protocol
Multiple spanning tree protocol. The MSTP can be used in a loop network. Using an
algorithm, the MSTP blocks redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed
as a tree network. In this case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided
in the loop network. The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and
multiple spanning trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded
in a VLAN because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
multiplex section
overhead
The overhead that comprises rows 5 to 9 of the SOH of the STM-N signal. See SOH
definition.
multiplex section
protection
A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and
including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to a
"protection" channel.
multiplex section
termination
The function performed to generate the MSOH in the process of forming an SDH frame
signal and terminates the MSOH in the reverse direction.
multiplexer
Equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of

aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate channels
being fixed.
Multiplexing
A procedure by which multiple lower order path layer signals are adapted into a higher
order path or the multiple higher order path layer signals are adapted into a multiplex
section.
Multiprotocol Label
Switching
A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different link
layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the basis of
IP routing and control protocols. It improves the cost performance and expandability of
networks, and is beneficial to routing.
MUX
See multiplexer
MVOA
mechanical variable optical attenuator
N
NA
No Acknowledgment
NCP
See Network Control Protocol
NE
See network element
NE database
There are three types of database on NE SCC board as following:

(1) DRDB: a dynamic database in a dynamic RAM, powered by battery;
(2) SDB: a static database in a power-down RAM;
(3) FDB0, FDB0: permanently saved databases in a Flash ROM.
In efficient operation, the NE configuration data is saved in DRDB and SDB at the same
time. Backing up an NE database means backing up the NE configuration data from SDB
to FDB0 and FDB1. When an NE is restarted after power-down, the NE database is
restored in the following procedures: As the SDB data is lost due to power-down, the
main control restores the data first from DRDB. If the data in DRDB is also lost due to
the exhaustion of the battery, the data is restored from FDB0 or FDB1.
E-24

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the NMS, which is used to manage the
telecommunication equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can query, manage and
maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis.
NE ID
An ID that indicates a managed device in the network. In the network, each NE has a
unique NE ID.
NE Panel
A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks,
boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the
configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.
NE-side data
The NE configuration data that is stored on the SCC board of the equipment. The NEside data can be uploaded to the network management system(NMS) and thus is stored
on the NMS side.
NEBS
Network Equipment Building System
NEF
See network element function
Network Control
Protocol
This is the program that switches the virtual circuit connections into place, implements
path control, and operates the Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) link.
network element
A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One
NE is at least equipped with one system control and communication(SCC) board which
manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the SCC
board.
network element
function
A function block which represents the telecommunication functions and communicates

with the TMN OSF function block for the purpose of being monitored and/or controlled.
network management
The process of controlling a network so as to maximize its efficiency and productivity.

ISO's model divides network management into five categories: fault management,
accounting management, configuration management, security management and
performance management.
Network Management A system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network.
System
network node interface The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node.
network segment
A part of an Ethernet or other network, on which all message traffic is common to all
nodes, that is, it is broadcast from one node on the segment and received by all others.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, through which entities on the network layer can
point
access OSI network services.
Network Time Protocol The Network Time Protocol (NTP) defines the time synchronization mechanism. It
synchronizes the time between the distributed time server and the client.
NM
See network management
NMS
See Network Management System
NNI
See network node interface
NOC
network operation center
Noise figure
An index that represents the degrade extent of optical signals after the signals passing a
system.
NSAP
See network service access point
NTP
See Network Time Protocol
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-25
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
O
OA
See optical amplifier
OADM
See optical add/drop multiplexer
OADM frame
A frame which is used to hold the OADM boards.
OAM
See operation, administration and maintenance
OC
See optical coupler
OCI
open connection indication
OCP
See optical channel protection
OD
optical demultiplexing
ODB
optical duobinary
ODF
See optical distribution frame
ODUk
optical channel data unit-k
OEQ
optical equalizer
OFC
open fiber control
OLA
See optical line amplifier
OLP
See optical line protection
OM
optical multiplexing
OMS
optical multiplexing section
ONE
See optical network element
Online Help
The capability of many programs and operating systems to display advice or instructions
for using their features when so requested by the user.
OOF
See out of frame
OPA
optical power adjust
open shortest path first A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing. Dijkstra's
algorithm is used to calculate the shortest path tree. It uses cost as its routing metric. A
link state database is constructed of the network topology which is identical on all routers
in the area.
Open Systems
Interconnection
A framework of ISO standards for communication between different systems made by

different vendors, in which the communications process is organized into seven different
categories that are placed in a layered sequence based on their relationship to the user.
Each layer uses the layer immediately below it and provides a service to the layer above.
Layers 7 through 4 deal with end-to-end communication between the message source
and destination, and layers 3 through 1 deal with network functions.
operation,
administration and
maintenance
A group of network support functions that monitor and sustain segment operation,
activities that are concerned with, but not limited to, failure detection, notification,
location, and repairs that are intended to eliminate faults and keep a segment in an
operational state and support activities required to provide the services of a subscriber
access network to users/subscribers.
OpEx; OPEX
operation expenditure
OPS
optical physical section
E-26

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
optic fiber connector
A device installed at the end of a fiber, optical source or receive unit. It is used to couple
the optical wave to the fiber when connected to another device of the same type. A
connector can either connect two fiber ends or connect a fiber end and a optical source
(or a detector).+
optical add/drop
multiplexer
A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one channel
and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical amplifier
Devices or subsystems in which optical signals can be amplified by means of the

stimulated emission taking place in a suitable active medium.
optical attenuator
A passive device that increases the attenuation in a fiber link. It is used to ensure that the
optical power of the signals received at the receive end is not extremely high. It is
available in two types: fixed attenuator and variable attenuator.
optical channel
A signal transmitted at one wavelength in a fiber-optic system.
optical channel
protection
In an optical transmission link that contains multiple wavelengths, when a certain

wavelength goes faulty, the services at the wavelength can be protected if the optical
channel protection is configured.
optical coupler
A coupler for coupling light in an optical system. Multiple discrete layers of alternating
optical materials have respective first and second indexes of refraction. The thickness of
each layer is a fraction of the light wavelength.
optical distribution
frame
A frame which is used to transfer and spool fibers.
optical line amplifier
A piece of equipment that functions as an OLA to directly amplify the input optical
signals and to compensate for the line loss. Currently, the key component of the OLA is
the EDFA amplifier.
optical line protection
A protection mechanism that adopts dual fed and selective receiving principle and singleended switching mode. In this protection, two pairs of fibers are used. One pair of fibers
forms the working route. The working route transmits line signals when the line is
normal. The other pair of fibers forms the protection route. The protection route carries
line signals when the line is broken or the signal attenuation is extremely large.
optical network
element
A transport entity that implements the NE functions (terminal multiplexing, add/drop

multiplexing, cross-connection and regeneration) in a DWDM layer network. The types
of ONEs include OTM, OADM, OLA, REG and OXC. The locating of an ONE is
equivalent to that of a common NE. In a view, an ONE is displayed with an icon, like a
common NE and its alarm status can be displayed with colors. Logically, an ONE consists
of different subracks. Like a common NE, an ONE cannot be expanded or entered like
a sub-network. Similar to a common NE, an ONE provides a list of the subracks that
form the NE to display the board layout.
optical signal-to-noise
ratio
The most important index of measuring the performance of a DWDM system. The ratio
of signal power and noise power in a transmission link. That is, OSNR = signal power/
noise power.
optical spectrum
analyzer
A device that allows the details of a region of an optical spectrum to be resolved.

Commonly used to diagnose DWDM systems.
optical supervisory
channel
A technology that realizes communication among nodes in optical transmission network

and transmits the monitoring data in a certain channel (the wavelength of the working
channel for it is 1510 nm and that of the corresponding protection one is 1625 nm).
Optical switch
A passive component possessing two or more ports which selectively transmits, redirects,
or blocks optical power in an optical fiber transmission line.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-27
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
optical time domain

reflectometer
A device that sends a very short pulse of light down a fiber optic communication system
and measures the time history of the pulse reflection to measure the fiber length, the light
loss and locate the fiber fault.
optical transmission
section
Optical transmission section allows the network operator to perform monitoring and
maintenance tasks between NEs.
optical transponder
unit
A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals into the G.694.1/G.694.2compliant WDM wavelength.
optical transport
network
A network that uses the optical signal to transmit data
optical wavelength
shared protection
In the optical wavelength shared protection (OWSP), the service protection between
different stations can be achieved by using the same wavelength, realizing wavelength
sharing. This saves the wavelength resources and lowers the cost. The optical wavelength
shared protection is mainly applied to the ring network which is configured with
distributed services. It is achieved by using the OWSP board. In a ring network where
services are distributed at adjacent stations, each station requires one OWSP board. Then,
two wavelengths are enough for configuring the shared protection to protect one service
among stations.
OPU
optical channel payload unit
OPUk
optical channel payload unit-k
orderwire
A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or

maintenance engineers of different stations.
original equipment
manufacturer
An original equipment manufacturer, or OEM is typically a company that uses a

component made by a second company in its own product, or sells the product of the
second company under its own brand.
OSA
See optical spectrum analyzer
OSC
See optical supervisory channel
OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection
OSN
optical switch node
OSNR
See optical signal-to-noise ratio
OSPF
See open shortest path first
OTDR
See optical time domain reflectometer
OTM
optical terminal multiplexer
OTN
See optical transport network
OTS
See optical transmission section
OTU
See optical transponder unit
OTUk
optical channel transport unit-k
out of frame
An NE transmits an OOF downstream when it receives framing errors in a specified

number of consecutive frame bit positions.
The ranger of optical energy level of output signals.
overhead cabling
Cables or fibers connect the cabinet with other equipment from the top of the cabinet.
OWSP
See optical wavelength shared protection
E-28

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
P
PA
pre-amplifier
packet over SDH/

SONET
A MAN and WAN technology that provides point-to-point data connections. The POS
interface uses SDH/SONET as the physical layer protocol, and supports the transport of
packet data (such as IP packets) in MAN and WAN.
packet switched
network
A telecommunication network which works in packet switching mode.
Packing case
A case which is used for packing the board or subrack.
Paired slots
Two slots of which the overheads can be passed through by using the bus on the
backplane.
pass-through
The action of transmitting the same information that is being received for any given
direction of transmission.
PBS
See peak burst size
PCB
See printed circuit board
PCC
protection communication channel
PCC
See policy and charging control
PCS
See physical coding sublayer
PDH
See plesiochronous digital hierarchy
PDL
See polarization dependent loss
PDU
Protocol Data Unit
PE
Provider Edge
peak burst size
A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst
IP packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate. This
parameter must be larger than 0. It is recommended that this parameter should be not
less than the maximum length of the IP packet that might be forwarded.
peak information rate
Peak Information Rate. A traffic parameter, expressed in bit/s, whose value should be
not less than the committed information rate.
Performance register
Performance register is the memory space for performance event counts, including 15min current performance register, 24-hour current performance register, 15-min history
performance register, 24-hour history performance register, UAT register and CSES
register. The object of performance event monitoring is the board functional module, so
every board functional module has a performance register. A performance register is
used to count the performance events taking place within a period of operation time, so
as to evaluate the quality of operation from the angle of statistics.
PGND
protection ground
phase-locked loop
A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector which compares the frequency of
a voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or referencefrequency generator; the output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop filter,
is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with the
incoming or reference frequency.
PHY
See physical sublayer & physical layer
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-29
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
physical coding
sublayer
The PCS further helps to define physical layer specifications for 10 gigabit Ethernet after
having been broken down into their Physical Media Dependent Sublayer or PMD. Each
sublayer places the 10GBASE standards into either LAN or WAN specifications.
physical sublayer &

physical layer
1. physical sublayer: One of two sublayers of the FDDI physical layer. 2. physical layer:
In ATM, the physical layer provides the transmission of cells over a physical medium
that connects two ATM devices. The PHY is comprised of two sublayers: PMD and TC
PID
photonics integrated device
PIM-DM
protocol independent multicast-dense mode
PIM-SM
See protocol independent multicast sparse mode
PIN
See Positive Intrinsic Negative
PIR
See peak information rate
plesiochronous digital
hierarchy
A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum
rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates.
PLL
See phase-locked loop
PMD
polarization mode dispersion
PMI
payload missing indication
POH
path overhead
point to multipoint
A communications network that provides a path from one location to multiple locations
(from one to many).
Point-to-Point Protocol A protocol on the data link layer, provides point-to-point transmission and encapsulates
data packets on the network layer. It is located in layer 2 of the IP protocol stack.
Point-to-Point Protocol PPPoE, point-to-point protocol over Ethernet, is a network protocol for encapsulating
over Ethernet
PPP frames in Ethernet frames. It is used mainly with DSL services. It offers standard
PPP features such as authentication, encryption, and compression.
Pointer
An indicator whose value defines the frame offset of a virtual container with respect to
the frame reference of the transport entity on which it is supported.
polarization dependent The maximum, peak-to-peak insertion loss (or gain) variation caused by a component
loss
when stimulated by all possible polarization states. It is specified in dB units.
policy and charging
control
Short for Policy and Charging Control, the PCC is defined in 3GPP R7. The PCC
provides the QoS control and service-based charging functions in the wireless bearer
network.
POS
See packet over SDH/SONET
Positive Intrinsic
Negative
Photodiode. A semiconductor detector with an intrinsic (i) region separating the p- and
n-doped regions. It has fast linear response and is used in fiber-optic receivers.
Power box
A direct current power distribution box at the upper part of a cabinet, which supplies
power for the subracks in the cabinet.
power distribution box A power box through which the power enters the cabinet and is re-distributed to various
components, at the mean time, the Power Distribution Box protects the electric devices
from current overload.
PPP
See Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE
See Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
E-30

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
PRBS
See pseudo random binary sequence
PRC
primary reference clock
PRI
See primary rate interface
primary rate interface
An interface consisting of 23 channel Bs and a 64 kbit/s channel D that uses the T1 line,
or consisting of 30 channel Bs and a channel D that uses the E1 line.
printed circuit board
A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components

using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated onto
a non-conductive substrate.
protection ground
cable
A cable which connects the equipment and the protection grounding bar. Usually, one
half of the cable is yellow; while the other half is green.
Protection path
A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
Protection policy
In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protection
policies can be selected as required. Protection policy refers to the protection mode given
the priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above,
the protection preference is divided into trail protection and subnet connection
protection.
Protection service
A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled protection.
protocol independent
multicast sparse mode
It is applicable to large-scale multicast networks with scattered members.
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in a sense that the value of an element is independent of the
sequence
values of any of the other elements, similar to real random sequences.
PSI
payload structure identifier
PSN
See packet switched network
PSTN
See public switched telephone network
PT
payload type
PTMP
See point to multipoint
PTN
packet transport network
PTP
Point-To-Point
public switched
telephone network
A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the public

subscribers. Sometimes called POTS.
Q
QA
Q adaptation
QoS
See quality of service
quality of service
A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.

Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-31
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
R
radio network
controller
An equipment in the RNS which is in charge of controlling the use and the integrity of
the radio resources.
RAI
remote alarm indication
RAM
See random access memory
random access memory Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the central processing unit
(CPU) or other hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order.
Note that the various types of ROM memory are capable of random access but cannot
be written to. The term RAM, however, is generally understood to refer to volatile
memory that can be written to as well as read.
Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol
An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree
convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Receiver Sensitivity
Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum acceptable value of average received

power at point R to achieve a 10-12 (The FEC is open).
reconfiguration optical The WDM equipment supports the ROADM. It flexibly and dynamically adjusts add/
add/drop multiplexer drop wavelengths of sites on the network by adjusting the pass-through or block status
of any wavelength without affecting the service transmission in the main optical channel.
This implements wavelength allocation among sites on the network. After the ROADM
is used, the existing services are not affected during upgrade. The wavelength can be
modified quickly and efficiently during network maintenance, which reduces
maintenance cost. In addition, the ROADM supports the equalization for optical power,
which equalizes the optical power at the channel level.
Reed Solomon Code
A type of forward error correcting codes invented in 1960 by Irving Reed and Gustave
Solomon, which has become commonplace in modern digital communications.
reference clock
A kind of stable and high-precision autonous clock providing frequencies for other clocks
for reference.
Reflectance
The ratio of the reflected optical power to the incident optical power.
REG
A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
Regeneration
The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that the amplitudes,
waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrained within specified limits.
REI
Remote Error Indication
Resource Reservation
Protocol
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) is designed for Integrated Service and is
used to reserve resources on every node along a path. RSVP operates on the transport
layer; however, RSVP does not transport application data. RSVP is a network control
protocol like Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP).
RF
Radio Frequency
RFC
Requirement for Comments
RFI
remote failure indication
ring network
A type of network topology in which each node connects to exactly two other nodes,
forming a circular pathway for signals.
RIP
See Routing Information Protocol
E-32

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
RMON
remote network monitoring
RNC
See radio network controller
ROADM
See reconfiguration optical add/drop multiplexer
route
A route is the path that network traffic takes from its source to its destination. In a TCP/
IP network, each IP packet is routed independently. Routes can change dynamically.
Routing Information
Protocol
A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a route
based on the smallest hop count between source and destination. RIP is a distance vector
protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its neighboring routers and is
known to waste bandwidth.
RS Code
See Reed Solomon Code
RS232
In the asynchronous transfer mode and there is no hand-shaking signal. It can

communicate with RS232 and RS422 of other stations in point-to-point mode and the
transmission is transparent. Its highest speed is 19.2kbit/s.
RSTP
See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSVP
See Resource Reservation Protocol
RZ
return to zero code
S
S1 byte
In an SDH network, each network element traces step by step to the same clock reference
source through a specific clock synchronization path, thus realizing the synchronization
of the whole network. If a clock reference source traced by the NE is missing, this NE
will trace another clock reference source of a lower level. To implement protection
switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about clock quality
information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to
transmit network synchronization status information. It uses the lower four bits of the
multiplex section overhead S1 byte to indicate 16 types of synchronization quality
grades. Auto protection switching of clocks in a synchronous network can be
implemented using S1 byte and a proper switching protocol.
Safe control switch
The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement,
which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off,
IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, the
IPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm.
SAN
See storage area network
SAP
service access point
SAPI
source access point identifiers
SBS
stimulated Brillouin scattering
SC
See square connector
SD
See signal degrade
SD trigger flag
SD stands for signal degrade. The SD trigger flag determines whether to perform a
switching when SD occurs. The SD trigger flag can be set by using the network
management system.
SDH
See synchronous digital hierarchy
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-33
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
SDI
See Serial Digital Interface
SDP
serious disturbance period
Search domain
Search field refers to the range of IP addresses being searched. In the TCP/IP, the IP
addresses include: Category A address (1.0.0.0---126.255.255.255). For example,
10.*.*.*, whose search field is 10.255.255.255, all 10.*.*.* to be searched. Category B
address (128.0.0.0---191. 255. 255. 255). For example, 129.9.*.*, whose search field is
129.9.255.255, all 129.9.*.* to be searched. Category C address (192.0.0.0---223. 255.
255. 255). For example, 192.224.9.*, whose search field is 192.224.9.255, all
192.224.9.* to be searched. Category D address (224.0.0.0---230.255.255.255), which
is reserved. Category E address (240.0.0.0---247.255.255.255), which is reserved. Netid 127.*.*.*, in which .*.*.* can be any number. This net-ID is a local address.
Secure File Transfer

Protocol
A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Self-healing
Self-healing is the establishment of a replacement connection by network without the

NMC function. When a connection failure occurs, the replacement connection is found
by the network elements and rerouted depending on network resources available at that
time.
Serial Digital Interface An interface for transmitting digital signals.

Serial Line Interface
Protocol
Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement
transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection
function with a known IP address.
service level agreement A service contract between a customer and a service provider that specifies the
forwarding service a customer should receive. A customer may be a user organization
(source domain) or another differentiated services domain (upstream domain). A SLA
may include traffic conditioning rules which constitute a traffic conditioning agreement
as a whole or partially.
Service protection
A measure that ensures that the services can be received at the receive end.
SES
See severely errored second
SETS
See synchronous equipment timing source
settings
Parameters of a system or operation that can be selected by the user.
severely errored second A one-second period which has a bit error ratio >= 10-3 or at least one defect. Time
interval of one second during which a given digital signal is received with an error ratio
greater than 10-3 (Rec. ITU R F. 592 needs correction) .
SF
See signal fail
SFP
See small form-factor pluggable
SFTP
See Secure File Transfer Protocol
shock-proof reinforce
A process by which the cabinet is fastened to the wiring frame or the top of the equipment
room so that the cabinet stands stably.
shortcut menu
A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an objects name or icon. This is also
referred to a context menu.
side door
The side door of a cabinet is used to protect the equipment inside the cabinet against
unexpected touch and environment impact.
E-34

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
side mode suppression The Side Mode Suppression Ratio (SMSR) is the ratio of the largest peak of the total
ratio
source spectrum to the second largest peak.
side trough
The trough on the side of the cable rack, which is used to place nuts so as to fix the
cabinet.
signal cable
Common signal cables cover the E1 cable, network cable, and other non-subscriber
signal cable.
signal degrade
A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect
(e.g., dDEG) condition is active.
signal fail
A signal that indicates the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
signal to noise ratio
The ratio of the amplitude of the desired signal to the amplitude of noise signals at a
given point in time. SNR is expressed as 10 times the logarithm of the power ratio and
is usually expressed in dB (Decibel).
Simple Network
Management Protocol
A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and modify
the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents, which
can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various devices on the
network and report these activities to the network console workstation. Control
information about each device is maintained by a management information block.
single-ended switching A protection operation method which takes switching action only at the affected end of
the protected entity (e.g. "trail", "subnetwork connection"), in the case of a unidirectional
failure.
single-mode fiber
A type of fiber optic cable through which only one type of light signal with a fixed wave
length can travel at a time. The inner diameter of the single-mode fiber is less than 10
microns. This type of fiber is used to transmit data in long distance.
SLA
See service level agreement
SLIP
See Serial Line Interface Protocol
SLM
single longitudinal mode
SM
section monitoring
small form-factor
pluggable
A specification for a new generation of optical modular transceivers.
SMF
See single-mode fiber
SMSR
See side mode suppression ratio
SNCP
See subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP
See subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP
See Simple Network Management Protocol
SNR
See signal to noise ratio
soft permanent
connections
An ASON connection which features flexible and dynamic adjustment of routes. SPC
includes different classes of services (CoS).
SONET
See synchronous optical network
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-35
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
span
The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment. The number of spans
determines the signal transmission distance supported by a piece of equipment and varies
according to transmission system type.
Spanning Tree Protocol STP is a protocol that is used in the LAN to remove the loop. STP applies to the redundant
network to block some undesirable redundant paths through certain algorithms and prune
a loop network into a loop-free tree network.
SPC
See soft permanent connections
SPM
self phase modulation
SQL
See structured query language
square connector
Cables may use two styles of connectors: "square" and "D-style".
SRLG
Shared Risk Link Group
SRS
stimulated Raman scattering
SSM
See Synchronization Status Message
SSMB
synchronization status message byte
SSU
synchronization supply unit
STM
Synchronous Transfer Mode
STM-1
See synchronous transport mode 1
STM-4
Synchronous Transport Module of order 4
storage area network
An architecture to attach remote computer storage devices such as disk array controllers,
tape libraries and CD arrays to servers in such a way that to the operating system the
devices appear as locally attached devices.
STP
See Spanning Tree Protocol
structured query
language
A database query and programming language widely used for accessing, querying,
updating, and managing data in relational database systems.
sub-network
Sub-network is the logical entity in the transmission network and comprises a group of
network management objects. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or
correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock
subnet and so on. A sub-network can contain NEs and other sub-networks. Generally, a
sub-network is used to contain the equipments which are located in adjacent regions and
closely related with one another, and it is indicated with a sub-network icon on a
topological view. The U2000 supports multilevels of sub-networks. A sub-network
planning can better the organization of a network view. On the one hand, the view space
can be saved, on the other hand, it helps the network management personnel focus on
the equipments under their management.
sub-network number
A number used to differentiate network sections in a sub-network conference. A subnetwork ID consists of the first several digits (one or two) of a user phone number. An
oderwire phone number consists of the sub-network ID and the user number.
subnet mask
The technique used by the IP protocol to determine which network segment packets are
destined for. The subnet mask is a binary pattern that is stored in the client machine,
server or router and is matched with the IP address.
subnetwork connection A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection
protection
subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance
falls below a required level.
E-36

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
subnetwork connection SNCTP provides a VC-4 level channel protection. When the working channel is faulty,
tunnel protection
the services of the entire VC-4 path can be switched over to the protection channel.
support
A part used to support and fix a cabinet on the antistatic floor, it is made of welded steel
plates and is used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling.
Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under
the supports, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfy
the insulation requirements.
Suppression state
An attribute set to determine whether an NE monitors the alarm. Under suppression

status, NE will not monitor the corresponding alarm conditions and the alarm will not
occur even when the alarm conditions are met.
Switching priority
There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary
board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the
same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher
priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority.
Synchronization Status A message that carries quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing link.
Message
Nodes on an SDH network and a synchronization network acquire upstream clock
information through this message. Then the nodes can perform proper operations on their
clocks, such as tracing, switching, or converting to holdoff), and forward the
synchronization information to downstream nodes.
synchronize NE time
To send the system time of the server of the network management system to NEs so as
to synchronize all NEs with the server.
synchronous digital
hierarchy
A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. It defines the
transmission features of digital signals such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and BISDN. It interleaves the bytes of low-speed signals to multiplex the signals to high-speed
counterparts, and the line coding of scrambling is only used only for signals. SDH is
suitable for the fiber communication system with high speed and a large capacity since
it uses synchronous multiplexing and flexible mapping structure.
synchronous
equipment timing
source
The SETS function provides timing reference to the relevant component parts of
multiplexing equipment and represents the SDH network clement clock.
synchronous optical
network
A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers to

connect networks based on fiberoptic cable. SONET is designed to handle multiple data
types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84 Mbps, but multiples
of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbps (gigabits per second).
synchronous transport Synchronous Transfer Mode at 155 Mbit/s.

mode 1
T
TCM
Tandem Connection Monitoring
TCP
See Transmission Control Protocol
TDM
See time division multiplexing
TE
See traffic engineering
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-37
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Telecommunication
A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
Management Network network. An architecture for management, including planning, provisioning, installation,
maintenance, operation and administration of telecommunications equipment, networks
and services.
terminal multiplexer
A device used at a network terminal to multiplex multiple channels of low rate signals
into one channel of high rate signals, or to demultiplex one channel of high rate signals
into multiple channels of low rate signals.
TFTP
See Trivial File Transfer Protocol
TIM
trace identifier mismatch
time division
multiplexing
A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time slots
(TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross time slots
in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be transmitted over
one channel.
Time Slot
Continuously repeating interval of time or a time period in which two devices are able
to interconnect.
Time Synchronization
Also called the moment synchronization, time synchronization means that the
synchronization of the absolute time, which requires that the starting time of the signals
keeps consistent with the UTC time.
time to live
A technique used in best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets that loop endlessly.
The TTL is set by the sender to the maximum time the packet is allowed to be in the
network. Each router in the network decrements the TTL field when the packet arrives,
and discards any packet if the TTL counter reaches zero.
TL1
See Transaction Language 1
TLV
Type/Length/Value
TM
See terminal multiplexer
TMN
See Telecommunication Management Network
TP
traffic Policing
traffic engineering
A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the load
of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic management
parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to optimize the
utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion caused by
unbalanced loads.
Transaction Language Transaction Language One is a widely used telecommunications management protocol.
1
TL1 is a vendor-independent and technology-independent man-machine language. TL1
facilities can be provided as part of an OSS for interacting with either underlying
management systems or NEs. One popular application is for a management system (or
NE) to package its trap/notification data in TL1 format and forward it to an OSS
component. ...(from authors.phptr.com/morris/glossary.html) Transaction Language 1
(TL1) is a widely used, "legacy", management protocol in telecommunications. It is a
cross-vendor, cross-technology man-machine language, and is widely used to manage
optical (SONET) and broadband access infrastructure in North America. It is defined in
GR-831 by Bellcore (now Telcordia). (from en.wikipedia.org/wiki/TL1)
E-38

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
Transmission Control
Protocol
The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
be sent via IP (Internet Protocol), and the reassembly and verification of the complete
messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable protocol (reliable
in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the transport layer in
the ISO/OSI reference model.
tray
A component that can be installed in the cabinet for holding chassis or other devices.
tributary unit group
One or more Tributary Units, occupying fixed, defined positions in a higher order VCn payload is termed a Tributary Unit Group (TUG). TUGs are defined in such a way that
mixed capacity payloads made up of different size Tributary Units can be constructed
to increase flexibility of the transport network
Trivial File Transfer

Protocol
A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server. TFTP
restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication. TFTP is
small enough to be contained in ROM to be used for bootstrapping diskless machines.
trTCM
Two Rate Three Color Marker
TTI
trail trace identifier
TTL
See time to live
TU
tributary unit
TUG
See tributary unit group
U
UAS
unavailable second
UAT
See unavailable time event
UDP
See User Datagram Protocol
unavailable time event A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The
event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than within 10 consecutive
seconds.
UNI
See user network interface
universal time
coordinated
The world-wide scientific standard of timekeeping. It is based upon carefully maintained

atomic clocks and is kept accurate to within microseconds worldwide.
Unprotected
Pertaining to the transmission of the services that are not protected, the services cannot
be switched to the protection channel if the working channel is faulty or the service is
interrupted, because protection mechanism is not configured.
upload
An operation to report some or all configuration data of an NE to the NMS(Network

Management system). The configuration data then covers the configuration data stored
at the NMS side.
Upper subrack
The subrack close to the top of the cabinet when a cabinet contains several subracks.
User
A client user of the NMS. The user name and password uniquely identifies the operation
rights of a user in the NMS.
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-39
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
User Datagram
Protocol
A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send a
datagram to an application program on another. User Datagram Protocol (UDP) uses IP
to deliver datagrams. UDP provides application programs with the unreliable
connectionless packet delivery service. Thus, UDP messages can be lost, duplicated,
delayed, or delivered out of order. UDP is used to try to transmit the data packet, that is,
the destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data packet is
received.
user network interface The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
example, ATM switches).
UTC
See universal time coordinated
V
VB
virtual bridge
VC
See virtual container
VCG
See virtual concatenation group
VCI
See virtual channel identifier
virtual channel
identifier
A 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to
identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on
its way to its destination.
virtual concatenation
group
A group of co-located member trail termination functions that are connected to the same
virtual concatenation link
virtual container
The information structure used to support path layer connections in the SDH. It consists
of information payload and path Overhead (POH) information fields organized in a block
frame structure which repeats every 125 s or 500 s.
virtual local area

network
A logical grouping of two or more nodes which are not necessarily on the same physical
network segment but which share the same IP network number. This is often associated
with switched Ethernet.
virtual path identifier
The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which
VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs.
virtual private network A system configuration, where the subscriber is able to build a private network via
connections to different network switches that may include private network capabilities.
VLAN
See virtual local area network
VOA
Variable Optical Attenuator
voice over IP
An IP telephony term for a set of facilities used to manage the delivery of voice
information over the Internet. VoIP involves sending voice information in a digital form
in discrete packets rather than by using the traditional circuit-committed protocols of the
public switched telephone network (PSTN).
VoIP
See voice over IP
VPI
See virtual path identifier
VPN
See virtual private network
VRRP
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
E-40

Issue 01 (2010-12-31)
OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

E Glossary
W
WAN
See wide area network
wavelength division
multiplexing
A technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low attenuation of
single mode optical fiber, uses multiple wavelengths as carriers, and allows multiple
channels to transmit simultaneously in a single fiber.
Wavelength protection The wavelength protection group is important to describe the wavelength protection
group
structure. Its function is similar to that of the protection subnet in the SDH NE. The
wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the
wavelength protection group.
WDM
See wavelength division multiplexing
WEEE
waste electrical and electronic equipment
wide area network
A network composed of computers which are far away from each other which are
physically connected through specific protocols. WAN covers a broad area, such as a
province, a state or even a country.
Working path
The channels allocated to transport the normal traffic.
Working service
A specific service that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.
WRR
weighted round Robin
WSS
wavelength selective switching
WTR
Wait To Restore
WXCP
wavelength cross-connection protection
WXCP service
The WXCP service is also called the GE ADM protection service. The WXCP is a type
of channel protection based on ring network. It adopts the dual fed and selective receiving
principle and uses the cross-connection function to achieve service switching between
working and protection channels.
X
XFP
10Gbit/s Small Form-Factor Pluggable
XPM
cross-phase modulation
Issue 01 (2010-12-31)

E-41

OptiX OSN 8800 - 6800 - 3800 Hardware Description (V100R006C00 - 01)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 8800 - 6800 - 3800 Hardware Description (V100R006C00 - 01)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Industrial Base

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document

About This Document

OptiX OSN 6800

OptiX OSN 3800

iManager U2000 Web LCT

Network Planning Engineer

Hardware Installation Engineer

Installation and Commissioning Engineer

Field Maintenance Engineer

Network Monitoring Engineer

Data Configuration Engineer

System Maintenance Engineer

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

Indicates an electrical module.

All modules of a board are inside such a block in bold.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version

l Added descriptions of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

Added a description of the TN12LOM board's capability to support 3GSDI services.

Added descriptions of the TN55NPO2 board.

Added descriptions of the TN52XCM02.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-11-20) Based on Product Version

Deleted information about the TN13LSXL.

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

About This Document

Added information about the LPT function and protocol or standard

Added information about the TN52XCH02.

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-07-30) Based on Product Version

l This manual provides descriptions according to product series OptiX

Introduction to fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical

Introduction to filler panels is added.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

2 OptiX OSN 6800 Cabinet..........................................................................................................2-1

3 OptiX OSN 8800 Subrack.........................................................................................................3-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

3.4.6 Specifications of the PIU......................................................................................................................3-33

4 OptiX OSN 6800 Subrack.........................................................................................................4-1

5 OptiX OSN 3800 Chassis...........................................................................................................5-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential

OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800

5.6.2 PIN Assignment of Interfaces..............................................................................................................5-16

8 Optical Transponder Unit........................................................................................................8-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential